ICON MUSIC BLOG

Serum 2 Is Here: What Producers Need to Know About the Long-Awaited Upgrade

Wed, 23 Apr 2025 22:46:32 GMT

Created by Steve Duda , a legendary figure in music production and former instructor at ICON Collective , Serum 2 is more than just an upgrade—it’s a creative evolution. Here’s everything you need to know about the launch, what’s new, and why it matters for producers in 2025.

If you’ve spent any time in the world of electronic music production, you already know the name Serum. It’s the wavetable synth that redefined sound design workflows for a generation of producers—and now, nearly a decade after its debut, Serum 2 is finally here.

What Is Serum 2?

Serum 2 is the latest version of the best-selling software synth plugin from Xfer Records , and it’s free for existing Serum users . This new release builds on everything that made the original Serum a go-to for producers (from its intuitive visual interface to its powerful wavetable engine) and pushes it into new territory with expanded modulation capabilities, improved UI scaling, and fresh sonic possibilities.

If you’re a producer looking to stay on the cutting edge of synth design, Serum 2 should be on your radar.

Key Features of Serum 2

Fully scalable high-res UI
A long-requested feature, Serum 2 now looks crisp and clean on 4K and Retina displays.
New Effects and Filters
Expanded filter options and a beefed-up FX section give sound designers more creative tools than ever before.
Improved Modulation and Routing
Advanced drag-and-drop modulation routing and enhanced macro control workflows streamline creative flow.
Backwards Compatibility
Serum 2 fully supports older presets, meaning your library and custom patches carry forward seamlessly.

Why This Is Big News at ICON

Steve Duda isn’t just the mastermind behind Xfer Records—he’s part of ICON’s legacy. As a former instructor, his work has directly influenced the next generation of artists studying at ICON. His commitment to innovation and sonic excellence continues to inspire how we teach production and sound design.

At ICON, we don’t just teach tools, we teach vision. And when one of our own pioneers drops the most talked-about synth of the year, you can bet we’re paying attention.

How ICON Students Are Using Serum

From creating genre-defining basslines in dubstep to crafting cinematic textures in electronic pop, Serum has long been a staple in our production curriculum. Now with the release of Serum 2, our students are already diving into:

Advanced wavetable morphing for hybrid genres
Creative sound design using new FX and filters
Real-time performance techniques powered by the updated modulation matrix

Serum 2 is more than a plugin: it’s a total playground!

Where to Get Serum 2

Head over to the official Xfer Records website to download Serum 2. If you already own Serum, the upgrade is completely free . If not, this might be the best $189 you’ll spend in your production journey.

Final Thoughts: A Must-Have in 2025

Whether you're a beginner producer learning sound design or an advanced artist pushing the boundaries of synthesis, Serum 2 is the most exciting synth release of the year . With its intuitive design and powerful engine, it continues to set the standard for what a software synth can do.

And for us at ICON Collective, it’s a proud moment to see one of our own reshaping the future of sound—again.

Want to learn how to master Serum 2 and take your production skills to the next level? Explore our Music Production Program and start your journey with hands-on mentorship, professional-grade tools, and the ICON mindset.

How to Market Your Music in 2025: The Best Tips for Getting Heard

Wed, 26 Mar 2025 22:42:47 GMT

You don’t need to go viral to build a career—you need a plan.

The music industry is evolving faster than ever, and in 2025, the way you promote your music looks nothing like it did five years ago. If you want to stand out in a world flooded with content, you need to be more than just talented—you need to be strategic.

In this article, we’ll break down the smartest, most effective ways to market your music in 2025. Whether you’re an independent artist or looking to sign with a label, these tips are designed to help you grow your audience and build a career with longevity.

1. Build a Strong Personal Brand People don’t just follow artists for their music—they follow them for their identity. Define who you are, what you stand for, and how you want your audience to feel when they listen to your music. Consistency across your visuals, messaging, and sound makes you memorable.

2. Prioritize Short-Form Video Content TikTok, Instagram Reels, and YouTube Shorts continue to dominate music discovery. Post behind-the-scenes clips, previews of unreleased tracks, or storytelling content about your songs. Even a 15-second clip can change your career.

3. Use AI-Powered Tools to Your Advantage From AI-generated visuals to smart ad targeting, AI is your new secret weapon. Platforms like Soundful, Rotor, and Boomy can help with content creation, while AI-driven analytics tools can optimize your release strategy.

4. Focus on Niche Communities In 2025, it’s not about being viral—it’s about being valuable to the right audience. Build relationships in genre-specific subreddits, Discord servers, and micro-communities. Smaller, engaged groups often lead to superfans.

5. Collaborate Intentionally Collabs can introduce you to new audiences, but they need to feel authentic. Choose artists who share your vibe, values, or vision. Even cross-genre collabs can be powerful if the story makes sense.

6. Own Your Audience Relying on algorithms is risky. Grow an email list, create a text club, or launch a private fan community. These direct lines give you control and help you monetize more effectively.

7. Drop Music Strategically Don’t just drop and pray. Build a content calendar around your release—teasers, livestreams, BTS content, and even song breakdowns can create anticipation. Use tools like SubmitHub or Groover to pitch your track to blogs and curators.

8. Learn the Business Side Marketing your music means understanding things like distribution, royalties, sync licensing, and brand partnerships. The more you understand the business, the more power you have. That’s why ICON’s Los Angeles Music Business Program is designed to give you the real-world skills and industry knowledge to not just make music—but build a career.

Frequently Asked Questions

Q: What’s the best platform to promote music in 2025?

A: TikTok remains a top discovery tool, but also look to YouTube Shorts, Spotify Canvas, and Discord communities. What matters most is where your audience spends time.

Q: How often should I post to grow my music brand?

A: Consistency is key. Aim for 3–5 pieces of content per week across your main channels. Focus on quality, but don’t overthink it—authenticity beats perfection.

Q: Should I hire a music marketer or do it myself?

A: In the early stages, learning DIY marketing is crucial. Once you have traction (and a budget), hiring a pro can level you up. But understanding the basics yourself is non-negotiable.

Q: Do I need a huge following to succeed?

A: Not at all. In 2025, 1,000 true fans can fund a full-time music career. Focus on engagement and connection over vanity metrics.

Q: How do I learn more about the music business side?

A: Programs like ICON’s Music Business Program in LA are built to teach aspiring artists and managers how to navigate the industry, build a brand, and launch real careers.

How to Start Producing Music at Home: 6 Steps to Get Started in Music Production

Wed, 26 Mar 2025 22:02:51 GMT

Follow these 6 easy steps to get started in music production from home—including tools, tips, and expert guidance.

So, you want to produce music. Maybe you’ve been messing around with GarageBand, maybe you’ve always been the one curating the party playlist, or maybe you've just got this itch to create. No matter where you're coming from, you’re in the right place.

The good news? You don’t need a fancy studio to get started. All it takes is a few essential tools, the right mindset , and a little bit of guidance . In this guide, we’ll break down the key steps to get started in music production—so you can start making tracks from your bedroom (or wherever inspiration hits).

Step 1: Choose Your Digital Audio Workstation (DAW)

Your DAW is your creative playground. It’s the software you’ll use to record, edit, and produce music. Popular options include Ableton Live , FL Studio, Logic Pro X, and Pro Tools.

Not sure which one to pick? Think about your goals, your budget, and your computer (some DAWs are Mac-only). And don’t worry—you can always switch later. Most producers try a few before landing on the one that feels like home.

Step 2: Set Up Your Home Studio

You don’t need a massive setup to get started. A basic home studio might include:

A reliable computer
Audio interface
MIDI keyboard
Studio headphones or monitors
A mic (if you’re recording vocals)

Pro tip: Prioritize quality headphones or monitors—they’ll help you actually hear what you’re making.

Step 3: Learn the Fundamentals

You can have all the gear in the world, but if you don’t understand the basics—song structure, rhythm, harmony, mixing techniques—you’ll hit a wall fast.

That’s where a structured course can make a huge difference. ICON Collective’s Online Music Production Program was built to take you from “Where do I start?” to “Check out my new track.” You’ll learn from industry pros, get feedback on your work, and collaborate with a community of up-and-coming producers.

Step 4: Start Making Music (Even If It Sucks at First)

Perfection is the enemy of progress. The only way to improve is to start creating. Make loops. Try making a beat a day. Remake a song you love. Play around.

The point is to build muscle memory and start understanding how sounds come together. Every pro you admire once made absolute garbage. That’s just part of the game.

Step 5: Get Feedback and Collaborate

Music isn’t meant to be made in a vacuum. Share your work with other producers, join online communities, and don’t be afraid to ask for feedback.

ICON’s Online Program gives you direct access to mentorship and peer critique—that’s the kind of feedback loop that fast-tracks your growth.

Step 6: Keep Going (Even When It’s Hard)

You’ll hit roadblocks . You’ll doubt yourself. You’ll get stuck on the same 4-bar loop for way too long. That’s all normal.

The producers who make it are the ones who keep going. Stay curious, keep experimenting, and remember: you’re not alone on this path.

Ready to Go Deeper? If you’re serious about producing music and want a structured way to learn, grow, and level up—check out ICON’s Online Music Production Program . It’s your first real step from bedroom beats to industry-level production.

Frequently Asked Questions

Q: Do I need expensive equipment to start producing music at home?

A: Nope. You can start with just a laptop and a good pair of headphones. As you progress, you might invest in an audio interface, MIDI controller, or studio monitors—but these aren’t must-haves on day one.

Q: What’s the best DAW for beginners?

A: It depends on your style. Ableton Live is great for electronic music, Logic Pro X is user-friendly for Mac users, and FL Studio is popular for beat-making. Most offer free trials, so experiment before committing.

Q: Can I get good at music production without formal training?

A: Yes, but it takes time, dedication, and lots of trial and error. That said, taking a structured course (like ICON’s Online Program) can dramatically accelerate your progress and help you avoid common beginner mistakes.

Q: How long does it take to learn music production?

A: It varies. Some people feel comfortable after a few months, while others take years to refine their skills. The key is consistency. With the right guidance, you’ll level up much faster.

Q: Can I make a career out of producing music from home?

A: Absolutely. Many successful producers started in their bedrooms. With digital distribution, social media, and sync licensing opportunities, the path from bedroom to Billboard is more accessible than ever.

The Top 10 New Features in Ableton 12

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 04:05:30 GMT

The music production community has been buzzing with excitement ever since Ableton dropped Live 12. Packed with forward-thinking upgrades, Live 12 continues to push the boundaries of digital audio workstations. Whether you’re producing beats in your bedroom or mixing tracks in a studio, this latest version promises to revolutionize your workflow with its new features.

We’ve compiled a list of the top 10 features in Ableton Live 12 that will supercharge your creativity and production techniques, making your DAW experience smoother than ever before.

1. Keys and Scales for Effortless Musical Exploration

Ableton Live 12 now integrates the Keys and Scales feature directly into the Control Bar, giving users the ability to easily explore and apply scales to their entire project, allowing things like harmonic plug-ins (Auto Shift) and MIDI edits to lock to the key of the song automatically, making for smoother workflow, and opening up endless possibilities for musical experimentation. Changes in Live reflect instantly on Push, creating a seamless workflow.

2. ROAR: Dynamic Saturation and Sound Coloration

Ableton Live 12 introduces ROAR, a versatile coloring and saturation effect that adds warmth, grit, and character to your sound. With three distinct saturation stages, you can create anything from subtle, mastering-grade warmth to bold, unpredictable textures. These stages can be used in series, parallel, or in mid/side and multiband configurations, giving you extensive creative control. ROAR also features a feedback generator and a modulation matrix, unlocking endless possibilities for saturating, transforming, and shaping your audio.

3. Auto Shift for Real-Time Pitch Correction

Looking for seamless pitch correction and tracking? Ableton Live 12’s Auto Shift feature is designed to keep vocals and other monophonic signals perfectly in tune. Set a key, and Auto Shift will apply real-time pitch correction to incoming audio, allowing every note to sit right in the mix. Whether you're aiming to harmonize, add depth with subtle vibrato, or play with modulation effects, Auto Shift makes it easy to maintain pitch accuracy while enhancing vocal expression. This feature keeps your creative flow uninterrupted by allowing precise pitch control, all in real time, and at very low CPU cost.

4. MELD: Dynamic Sound Morphing

MELD introduces a MPE-capable synthesis experience designed to enhance sound diversity and creativity. With intuitive controls, users can merge audio sources, adjusting parameters like pitch and timbre dynamically. This enables the creation of complex textures and evolving soundscapes, perfect for enhancing live performances or studio sessions. MELD encourages experimentation and creative exploration, empowering producers to develop unique sonic identities and push the boundaries of their music.

5. Sound Similarity Search

Ableton Live 12 introduces an exciting new feature called Sound Similarity Search, designed to optimize your workflow. This innovative tool uses advanced machine learning to help you start with a sample and effortlessly discover sounds and instrument presets that are sonically similar. By enabling users to quickly locate complementary sounds for their projects, it aims to enrich the overall creative process.

6. Advanced MPE Editing

MIDI Polyphonic Expression (MPE) was a game-changer in Live 11, and Live 12 takes it further with Advanced MPE Editing. The upgraded MPE functionality offers deeper control over individual notes, enhancing creative possibilities in bending, sliding, and modulating MIDI notes. The editor now offers more control over multi-parameter adjustments, letting you shape expressive sounds more fluidly.

7. Enhanced Warp Detection for Precise Audio Editing

Ableton Live 12’s improved warp detection markers make timing adjustments easier and more accurate. With a refined algorithm that precisely detects transients and places markers, you can align complex rhythms and subtle timing shifts effortlessly. This update provides a smoother editing process, allowing you to maintain a natural feel while staying in complete control.

8. Updated Browser with Smart Collections

Ableton has revamped the Live 12 browser with Smart Collections, allowing users to categorize sounds, samples, and devices effortlessly. Organize your library based on frequently used sounds, favorites, or custom tags for a faster, more organized workflow. This feature keeps creative momentum high by minimizing time spent searching for assets.

9. 16-Channel Automation Lanes

With Ableton 12’s 16-Channel Automation Lanes, you can view and edit up to 16 lanes of automation simultaneously. Whether it's automating filters, volume levels, or even plugin parameters, the streamlined editing interface ensures you can tweak every detail without constantly switching between tracks.

10. New Mixer in Arrangement View

Live 12 introduces a revamped mixer in the Arrangement View, offering more control and visibility directly on the timeline. Adjust levels, panning, and routing without switching views, making it easier to balance your mix while arranging. This update streamlines essential controls, allowing you to manage complex sessions with enhanced clarity and efficiency, keeping the creative flow uninterrupted.

Ready to master Ableton Live and start creating your own tracks? Explore ICON Collective's Online Music Production Intro Course and learn from industry pros. Build your skills with hands-on projects, expert mentorship, and an inspiring online community. Start your music journey today and bring your sound to life. Learn more...

How to Quantize in Ableton Live 12

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 03:52:20 GMT

Quantization is an essential feature in music production, aligning MIDI and audio notes with a defined grid to create rhythmically accurate compositions. It allows producers to tighten up performances, sync elements like drums and basslines, or achieve a polished, professional sound. Here’s how to make the most of quantization in Ableton Live 12 to streamline your workflow and enhance your music.

Quantizing MIDI in Ableton Live 12

Ableton Live 12 makes MIDI quantization intuitive and flexible, offering several methods to fit different creative needs. Here are some techniques to try:

Real-Time Quantization for MIDI

Ableton’s Record Quantization feature allows you to apply quantization to MIDI notes during recording, snapping them to the grid as you play. This is a great way to maintain the flow of a live performance while keeping everything rhythmically precise. Enable Record Quantization in the Edit menu to lock in timing as you record.

Manual Quantization in the MIDI Editor

If you need more control, the MIDI Editor lets you manually adjust notes. Drag notes to the nearest grid line or choose custom grid settings for precise adjustments. This is useful for fine-tuning rhythms or applying unique grooves to individual sections.

The Quantize Command

Ableton’s Quantize Command (accessible via CTRL+Shift+U on PC or CMD+Shift+U on Mac) is a powerful way to correct MIDI timing quickly. You can set grid size and quantize strength to create tighter timing without fully eliminating the performance’s human feel.

Quantizing Audio in Ableton Live 12

Quantizing audio is just as straightforward, thanks to the integration of Warp Markers:

Use Warp Markers to identify beats in your audio clip that you’d like to align. Place markers at key points, like downbeats, to bring sections into time with your project. Double-check the results and manually move Warp Markers to the correct beat on the timeline if needed.
Choose a Grid Size and apply quantization to snap audio segments in line with the grid. This is especially helpful for tightening live-recorded parts, like drums or vocals.
Experiment with Stretch Points for subtle timing shifts without overwhelming your audio with markers. This approach allows for smoother edits and keeps your waveform cleaner.

Creative Quantization Techniques in Ableton Live 12

Quantization isn’t just about precision—it can also enhance your creative workflow. Here are some advanced methods to add character to your tracks:

Partial Quantization

To keep some natural groove while tightening the rhythm, try applying quantization at a lower strength. Set the Quantize Amount below 100% to create a blend of human feel and grid precision. This works particularly well with looser rhythms or swing-heavy genres.

Swing & Groove

Ableton’s Groove Pool is an excellent way to add feel and timing variation. Choose a groove template, adjust its strength, and apply it to clips to give them a more dynamic, human quality. For more experimental results, apply multiple groove templates to different layers of your track.

Quantizing with Triplet Grids

For producers exploring unconventional time signatures, quantizing to triplet grids can add rhythmic complexity. This is particularly effective for genres that incorporate polyrhythms or offbeat accents, creating interesting rhythmic tension and release.

Velocity-Based Quantization

If you’re working with expressive MIDI parts, consider quantizing by velocity. This way, you can preserve dynamics while tightening note starts, perfect for instruments like piano or percussion, where performance nuances are key.

Why Use Quantization?

Quantization brings precision to your projects, but it’s also a tool for creating depth. Here’s how it can elevate your music:

Refine Timing: Quantization aligns performance to the grid, giving rhythmically precise results.
Polish Drum Grooves: It’s ideal for locking in beats in electronic and dance music, ensuring tight rhythmic interplay.
Keep Expressive Feel: When used with partial strength or groove templates, quantization keeps tracks rhythmic while preserving a human touch.

In Ableton Live 12, quantization provides you with a balance between structure and expression, allowing your music to stay tight without sacrificing its groove.

Sidechaining in Ableton 12: A Comprehensive Guide

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 03:34:03 GMT

What is Sidechaining in Music Production?

Sidechaining is a fundamental technique in music production where one audio signal influences the processing of another. Most commonly used in genres like electronic music, pop, and hip-hop, it allows producers to create space between competing frequencies, improve mix clarity, or add rhythmic effects.

New in Ableton 12: - Updates to Sidechaining Features

Ableton 12 introduces several enhancements to streamline sidechaining and improve compatibility with popular plugins, making it easier to set up, manage, and visualize sidechain effects.

Improved Sidechain Routing: Now, users can apply sidechain compression more efficiently on Group Tracks and buses, a major time-saver in the mixing process when applying effects to multiple tracks. This improvement also makes it easier to manage sidechain processing across an entire session.

Expanded Plugin Compatibility: With improved VST3 support, Ableton 12 ensures smoother sidechain integration with third-party plugins, allowing seamless compatibility with popular tools like Kickstart 2 and FabFilter’s Pro-C 2.

While the Compressor and Glue Compressor interfaces remain familiar, these routing and compatibility updates enhance the overall workflow and expand creative possibilities with sidechaining in Ableton Live 12.

One of the most significant updates in Ableton 12 is its improved sidechain routing and visual feedback , making it easier for producers to set up, control, and visualize the sidechaining effect. Key enhancements include:

Enhanced Sidechain Interface: The sidechain controls within Ableton’s devices, such as the Compressor and Glue Compressor, have been updated for improved clarity, allowing faster setup and greater control.
Sidechain in Group Tracks: Routing improvements make it easier to apply sidechain compression to group tracks or entire buses, saving you time during the mixing process.
Expanded Plugin Compatibility: Ableton 12 ensures better sidechain support with third-party VSTs, enabling seamless integration with popular plugins like Kickstart 2, FabFilter, and others.

How to Sidechain in Ableton Live 12

Step 1: Load a Compressor on the Target Track

For traditional sidechaining, add Ableton’s Compressor to the track you want to duck in volume—such as a synth or bass that interferes with the kick or vocal. This track is the one that will react to the external signal.

Step 2: Access the Sidechain Section

Once the Compressor is loaded, toggle the sidechain button to reveal the external routing parameters. You’ll see two main sections:

Audio From: Select the audio track that will trigger the compression (e.g., your kick drum).
Sidechain EQ: Allows you to filter the input signal by frequency. This is useful for focusing only on certain frequencies (like the low end of a kick drum).

Step 3: Choose the External Source

In the Audio From dropdown, choose the track that you want to use as the trigger signal, such as a kick drum. In the second dropdown, select Pre FX to ensure the signal isn't affected by other effects.

Step 4: Adjust the Compressor

Tune the Threshold , Ratio , Attack, and Release to shape the sidechain effect. Aim for subtlety—setting the attack too fast can make it sound unnatural, while setting the release too long can create a pumping effect.

Using Kickstart 2 for Easy Sidechaining

If you're looking for a quick, creative way to set up sidechaining without manually adjusting a compressor, consider using Kickstart 2 by Nicky Romero. Like with Ableton’s compressor, you can route to Kickstart 2’s External Sidechain Output, but Kickstart 2 simplifies the process by offering preset shapes for the ducking effect. Adjusting the intensity is as easy as moving a single slider.

Creating an Efficient Sidechain Bus Template in Ableton 12

Setting up a dedicated sidechain bus is an effective way to simplify your sidechaining workflow, allowing you to route multiple tracks to a single bus rather than setting up individual compressors on each track. Here’s how to do it in Ableton 12:

Creating a Dedicated Sidechain Bus in Ableton 12

Set Up a Dedicated Sidechain Bus:
Add a new audio track and name it “Sidechain Bus.”
In the track’s I/O section, set Audio From to “No Input” (or any empty input channel) since this track will act as a silent controller for your sidechaining.
Insert your preferred sidechain tool, like Ableton’s Compressor, onto this “Sidechain Bus” to apply a global sidechain effect.
Create a Sidechain Trigger Track:
Create a new audio or MIDI track specifically for your sidechain trigger, such as a kick pattern.
Use this track to input the rhythmic trigger (kick, snare, or any other percussive sound) that will control your sidechaining.
Route the Audio From from each Compressor or Kickstart 2 instance on your “Sidechain Bus” to this dedicated trigger track.
On the Sidechain Bus, set Monitor to “In” to keep the routing active without requiring actual audio output. (Note: you can only set Monitor to “In” once you’ve routed another track’s audio to it)
Apply Sidechain Compression:
On each group or individual track you want sidechained, route the audio output to your “Sidechain Bus.”
Program your sidechain trigger pattern on the Trigger Track, then adjust the parameters of your sidechain tool (threshold, release, intensity, etc.) to fit the desired ducking effect.
Save as a Template:
Once your sidechain bus and trigger track are set up, go to File > Save Live Set as Template. Now, whenever you start a new project, your sidechain setup will be ready to go, saving time and ensuring a consistent workflow.

Advantages of Using a Sidechain Template

Consistency: Ensures the same compression settings are applied across different sessions.
Efficiency: Saves time by eliminating the need to set up sidechain routing repeatedly.
Versatility: Allows you to easily switch out different trigger signals, like changing the rhythm of the kick without reconfiguring the routing.

Other Ways to Use Sidechaining in Ableton 12

Aside from traditional sidechain compression, you can also use sidechaining for creative sound design. Here are some creative applications:

Sidechain Reverb and Delays: Apply sidechain compression to reverb or delay effects to prevent them from overpowering your main elements. This keeps the effects subtle and controlled.
Rhythmic Sidechain for Pads and Leads: Use sidechain compression to create a pumping effect on pads or lead synths, giving them a rhythmic groove that syncs with the beat.
Sidechain Multiple Frequency Bands: Utilize multiband sidechaining with Ableton’s Multiband Dynamics or third-party plugins like FabFilter Pro-MB to duck specific frequency bands rather than the whole sound.

Conclusion

Sidechaining is an essential tool in every producer’s kit. Whether you're using Ableton's built-in compressor, third-party tools like Kickstart 2, or setting up a sidechain template for an efficient workflow, mastering this technique will give your productions more clarity, energy, and professional polish.

Don't be afraid to experiment with sidechaining across different elements in your mix. The creative potential is immense, and with the new tools in Ableton Live 12, you'll find endless ways to shape your sound.

Tips for Recording Vocals in Ableton Live 12

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 03:07:43 GMT

Recording vocals effectively in Ableton Live 12 takes a combination of preparation, technique, and creativity. With new updates like improved Take Lanes , an enhanced audio engine, and intuitive workflow improvements, the process has never been smoother. This guide takes you through the steps of recording vocals and offers tips for capturing the best performances using Ableton's latest features.

GETTING YOUR GEAR READY

Before recording, make sure your equipment is in place and optimized for quality vocal tracking.

Computer - A reliable laptop or desktop with sufficient RAM and CPU power to handle multiple tracks, plugins, and takes.
DAW: Ableton Live 12 - Ensure you are using Ableton Live 12 for the latest features like Take Lanes and enhanced audio tools.
Microphone - A good quality condenser mic for a clean, professional vocal sound. A dynamic mic can also work depending on the vocal style.
Audio Interface - Your audio interface will connect your microphone and headphones to your DAW, allowing for high-quality sound recording and monitoring.
Studio Headphones - Closed-back headphones are crucial for recording to avoid bleed from the backing track into the mic.

PREPARING ABLETON LIVE 12 FOR VOCAL RECORDING

Here are the steps to set up your Ableton session for recording vocals:

Connect Your Microphone - Plug your microphone into your audio interface, and if using a condenser mic, turn on Phantom Power (48V).
Set Up Preferences - Open Preferences (CMD + ,) and navigate to the Audio tab. Select your audio interface as the Audio Input Device and the Audio Output Device for your headphones.
Set Your Song’s Tempo - Adjust the song's tempo in the Control Bar. If unsure of the exact BPM, use the Tap Tempo function to find a comfortable speed.
Enable the Metronome - Activate the metronome to ensure your recording stays in time with the beat. You can access this in the Control Bar.
Create a Vocal Track - Create a new Audio Track (CMD+T). Name it appropriately (e.g., "Lead Vocal") for easier session management.

ADVANCED VOCAL PROCESSING IN ABLETON 12

Once you’ve tracked your vocals, it’s time to apply processing to enhance the sound.

Reverb & Delay - Adding reverb and delay to vocals can create space and depth in your mix. You can apply these effects via Return Tracks, which allows for parallel processing. This way, the original signal remains intact while effects are blended in.
Saturation & Compression - Use Saturation to add warmth and Compression to smooth out dynamics, ensuring your vocals stay balanced.
MPE Compatibility - Ableton 12’s support for MPE (MIDI Polyphonic Expression) controllers allows for nuanced manipulation of vocal effects, adding expressive control over vibrato, pitch, and dynamics.

CONCLUSION

Ableton Live 12 offers tools and workflows that make tracking vocals easier and more powerful than ever. With features like Take Lanes and advanced processing options, you can capture and refine the perfect vocal performance in a seamless, creative way. Keep practicing, experiment with these techniques, and you’ll see your vocal recordings grow stronger with every session.

How To Use Ableton Live 12 Vocoder On Vocals And Drums

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 02:50:41 GMT

This comprehensive guide dives into the depths of Ableton Live's powerful vocoder effect, showing you how to unlock its full potential on both vocals and drums. Whether you're aiming to craft that iconic robotic voice, add harmonic depth to your vocal melodies, or elevate your drum patterns with textural layers, this guide will walk you through the essentials. You’ll not only learn how to set up and configure the vocoder device step-by-step but also how to push its boundaries with cutting-edge features in Ableton 12, giving you creative, out-of-the-box techniques to transform your sounds into something truly unique. From tweaking formant shifts to layering snare drums with noise oscillators, the possibilities are endless—and this guide will ensure you're ready to explore them all.

ABLETON LIVE VOCODER OVERVIEW

Ableton Live’s vocoder remains a versatile tool for creating unique sound modulations, and with Ableton 12, its integration into workflows has been enhanced. The vocoder modulates one signal (the modulator) with the frequencies of another (the carrier), allowing you to create robotic vocals, harmonized melodies, and even gritty drum textures.

In Ableton 12, the vocoder maintains its classic functionality but with improved performance and smoother audio routing. This version also makes creating custom vocoder templates easier, allowing users to set up their favorite vocoder chains quickly.

VOCODER ON VOCALS

Modulating vocals to achieve the classic robotic sound is still a staple in Ableton 12, but now the setup is more streamlined, especially with customizable templates and routing shortcuts.

Steps to Set Up Vocoder on Vocals in Ableton 12:

Load Vocoder on your vocal track.
Create a new MIDI track (Shift+CMD+T) and load a synth such as Operator or Serum.
Draw MIDI notes (Shift+CMD+M) or record them live to control the synth. For best results, keep the notes in the same key as your vocals.
On Vocoder, set Carrier to External and choose the synth track from the Audio From menu.
Play both tracks together. You’ll hear the synthesizer shape the vocal timbre, transforming it into that distinct vocoder effect.

TIP: If your vocoded vocal sounds too mono and needs a bit more depth, you can add width in a couple of ways. First, go to the synth patch you’re using as the carrier and increase the unison and detune settings; this will spread the sound for a more stereo effect.

Alternatively, adjust the Depth control in the Vocoder. Moving the Depth slider further to the right increases the influence of the carrier signal, while moving it to the left emphasizes the modulator signal, which can create a unique blend and add richness to your vocal sound.

NEW FEATURE : Carrier routing improvements in Ableton 12 make the process smoother, with automatic routing suggestions based on your synth selection.

For extra clarity, try using harmonically-rich synth patches. Sawtooth waves or bright pads often produce the clearest, most powerful results.

PROCESSING VOCALS WITH VOCODER

The Ableton Live Vocoder offers a range of sound-shaping controls to help you fine-tune your effect. Experimenting with these controls can significantly enhance your results. Here’s a quick overview of some key features to explore:

Enhance : Vocoder's output can sometimes lose high-end detail and clarity when using external carriers. Enabling the Enhance button improves brightness and restores clarity by normalizing the carrier’s frequencies and dynamics.
Unvoiced : This control adjusts the volume of a noise generator that resynthesizes parts of the modulator signal. Increasing this adds brightness and definition to the sound.
Filter Bank : The central display shows the levels of individual bandpass filters, allowing for quick adjustments by clicking and dragging each level. This effectively acts as an EQ, though using a separate EQ can provide more flexibility in shaping the sound.
Bands : This setting determines the number of filters applied. Higher band counts produce clearer sounds, while fewer bands result in a more textured, distorted sound. In this example, 40 bands are set for enhanced clarity.
Precise/Retro : Toggle between two filter types here. Precise mode offers a wider, fuller sound with increased bass presence, while Retro mode emphasizes higher frequencies, resulting in a narrower, brighter tone.
Depth : This control determines how much of the modulator’s amplitude envelope affects the carrier signal. At 0%, only the processed synthesizer is heard, while at 200%, only the highest amplitude peaks of the modulator are audible. 100% provides a balanced, classic vocoder effect.
Attack and Release : Attack controls how quickly Vocoder responds to changes in amplitude, and Release determines how long each filter band holds its amplitude before decaying.
Formant : This control shifts the carrier's filter frequencies up or down. Lower values deepen the tone, creating a masculine quality, while higher values create a brighter, more feminine sound.

OUT-OF-THE-BOX VOCODER IDEAS FOR VOCALS

Ambient Wash with Reverb and Delay : Send the vocoded signal to an auxiliary track with lush reverb and long delay settings, then bring up the reverb/delay level to taste. This trick creates an ethereal wash, turning vocals into a spacious, atmospheric pad perfect for intros, breakdowns, or transitions.
Pitch-Controlled Chopping: Create rhythmic chops by routing your vocoded track through a MIDI-controlled gate or tremolo effect. Sync it to your song's tempo and set it to open at specific beats, producing a stuttering, pitch-based chopping effect that brings a fresh rhythmic layer to your mix.

VOCODER ON DRUMS

In Ableton 12, vocoder applications extend beyond vocals to drums, creating unique textures and enhancing drum sounds. The new Noise Carrier and improved Filter Bank controls allow for even more control over layered drum sounds.

Steps to Vocoder a Snare with Noise:

Load Vocoder on a snare or hi-hat track.
Group it (CMD+G) into an Audio Effect Rack, adding a parallel chain to mix dry and processed signals.
Set Vocoder’s Carrier to Noise and adjust the X-Y display for different textures.
Dial in the bands (8 works well for snares) and adjust Enhance, Formant, and Attack/Release for a tailored sound. This is a great technique to add a satisfying tail to your snare if it feels a bit too short or lacks presence.

CREATIVE USE CASES FOR DRUMS IN ABLETON 12

Percussive Ambience: Use the Noise Carrier on a parallel drum track, but send it to a long reverb. This creates ethereal ambient tails for percussive sounds, perfect for lo-fi or experimental genres.
Rhythmic Vocoder Drum Gating: In Ableton 12, use a vocoder with a MIDI-triggered gate. Set the vocoder’s carrier to a rhythmic synth or noise pattern, and it will modulate the drums in time, adding a complex, dynamic layer to the percussion.

CONCLUSION

The Ableton Live Vocoder in version 12 offers numerous ways to get creative with both vocals and drums. Beyond classic robotic vocals, its potential for dynamic automation, drum layering, and rhythmic modulation opens doors to endless sound design possibilities. Dive in, experiment, and unlock the power of the vocoder to add unique flair to your tracks.

How to Survive as a Touring Artist

Fri, 20 Sep 2024 16:15:00 GMT

Learn how to survive the road as a touring artist. Find advice on how to plan your tour, take care of your health, and navigate the music industry.

5 Tips for Touring Artists

Touring can be a positive experience in the life of an artist. However, it’s a specific lifestyle much different than an aspiring artist may think. Working in the electronic music industry is often fast-paced and highly pressured. And the high demands of touring can affect your health, personal life, and music career.

Before you head out on your first string of out-of-town shows, consider the following touring artist tips.

1. Physical Health

Taking care of your physical health is vital while touring. It’s essential to have a healthy lifestyle while on the road to maintain a sustainable music career. However, wellness is especially difficult for artists on tour. Excessive partying, unhealthy eating, sleep deprivation, traveling, and grueling schedules can reap havoc on your health, career, and personal life.

These six tips will help you maintain your physical health while on tour:

Manage Your Diet

Unhealthy diets affect how we feel, both mentally and physically. For example, bad eating habits can increase stress and fatigue. Being mindful of your diet and eating habits is essential. Pack healthy snacks with needed nutrients such as fruits, vegetables, and protein. They will fuel a healthy metabolism, boost energy, and keep you full longer through late nights, long flights, and busy schedules. Also, consider taking a multivitamin to give your body essential nutrients.

Improve Your Sleep Habits

It’s hard to get sufficient sleep during a busy touring schedule. Plus, other factors can affect your sleep like time zone changes, jet lag, and adrenaline rush after playing a set. Lack of sleep can cause health issues, affect your performance, and more. Find time to rest and recharge. Also, be cautious of sleep aids; they can be habit-forming and have side effects.

Exercise More

Exercise is good for your body and mind. Physical activity can boost energy, improve your mood, relieve stress and anxiety, help you sleep better, improve memory, and alleviate mental health issues. Try finding time to exercise while on tour. Many hotels have fitness centers, and there are workouts you can do in your room. Also, consider activities like yoga, running, and stretching.

Stay Hydrated

Your body needs water to stay healthy. Try to drink at least two liters of water each day. Also, limit sugary drinks like soda and energy drinks. These beverages are not hydrating and will likely cause an energy crash.

Limit the Booze

When on tour, you may be thrust into situations where people drink and take drugs. As a touring artist, you may also get free alcohol on your rider. Plus, everyone around you in the crowd is drinking. To continue touring throughout your career, best to manage your partying from the start. Create a system for it. For example, alternate days between remaining sober and drinking. And drink with caution. Alcohol can cause health issues, affect your performance, damage your career, and lead to other problems when abused.

Avoid Drugs

Recreational drugs are common in the electronic music scene. However, drug abuse and addiction will lead to health issues, affect your performance, damage your career, and cause various other problems. It’s best to avoid drugs if you want to sustain a healthy and productive music career.

2. Mental Health

Another huge concern for many musicians on tour is mental health. This might not seem like a big deal because going on tour is the dream for so many artists. However, it’s a severe problem in the music industry. There’s even a growing movement within the industry raising awareness about mental health issues such as substance abuse, depression, and suicide.

Tour life can be lonely and put you under enormous pressure. Touring brings a relentless schedule, financial uncertainty, unsociable hours, isolation, anxiety, and extended periods away from family and friends. These situations create a drastic duality, which takes a toll on your mental state.

These five tips will help you maintain your mental health while on tour:

Reach out for Help

If you’re feeling unwell mentally, tell someone. Your manager, crew member, a promoter at the venue, someone. Take care of yourself, and don’t be afraid to miss a tour date. There are also programs that provide free or low-cost mental health care. For example, the Recording Academy’s MusiCares charity provides emergency financial assistance to the music community for a variety of medical expenses. The Tim Bergling Foundation raises money for several causes, including mental health and suicide prevention. There’s also a helpful guide full of mental health resources by the Association for Electronic Music (AFEM).

Manage a Healthy Lifestyle

Maintain a healthy diet, get adequate sleep, exercise, keep hydrated, and stay connected with supportive people in your life. Also, avoid alcohol and drugs if you’re feeling depressed or anxious. They will make matters worse!

Find Coping Strategies

Take time for yourself to cope with the emotional pressures of touring. Look for different coping strategies on the road. For example, prominent touring DJs have talked about coping mechanisms such as exercise, journaling, meditation, reading, and sightseeing.

Surround Yourself with Good People

Your team and friends must have your interests at heart. Make sure the people who support you have your wellness in mind. If they don’t, they’re the wrong people to have in your life.

Set Your Goals

Resilience in the music industry requires setting goals. Goal setting provides clarity that helps you stay focused and make the right decisions. They also give you direction when feeling overwhelmed. Moreover, goals are motivating and can give you a sense of satisfaction.

3. Proper Tour Planning

Being a touring DJ or artist requires a good amount of planning when playing shows in other cities and countries. The best way to avoid unpleasant surprises is to practice proper planning. These tips will help make your travels go smoother:

Lastly, be realistic with your plans when organizing your travels. Balance out work days and rest days. Spread out workdays and take some time off between tour dates to get some downtime.

4. Present Yourself as a Professional Artist

As a touring artist, you will develop relationships with managers, agents, promoters, and other music industry professionals. Maintaining a sustainable music career requires you to develop your brand, build relationships, and to take your career seriously. Here are some general tips to consider:

Take Your Music Career Seriously

Touring and performing is fun, but it’s also a job. It’s important to treat it as such and maintain a professional demeanor. Show up on time for your gig, flight, bus call, or other obligations. Also, don’t show up too drunk or high to play. Moreover, respect your industry peers and fans. Avoid situations that will damage your brand and reputation. It’s simple enough.

Building worldwide relationships is one of the greatest benefits of touring. If you establish your reputation as a professional, it will be much easier for you to continue touring. Promoters will have you back, venue owners will welcome you, booking agents will find you gigs, and your fans will show support.

Your Tour Crew Is Your Family

Many touring DJs travel alone while on the road. However, when you reach the level of ICON Alumni such as NGHTMRE, SLANDER, and JAUZ, you will tour with a production crew.

A tour crew can consist of a manager, booking agent, publicist, crew chief, lighting techs, effects techs, and other team members. They work hard building your brand, and ensuring every event is in order. You must show them your appreciation and understand how to treat people you will work with closely. Motivate them and thank them for their hard work. Also, show empathy because they make the same sacrifices as you in terms of constant travel. Make the tour as enjoyable for them as possible.

5. Traveling, but Not Really

Beyond the toll it takes on your body, traveling on tour is not what most people expect. While on tour, you may not have a moment to enjoy the places you’re visiting.

A tour stop often consists of landing in the new city, going to your hotel, having a few hours before the show, and then going straight to the venue. Later, you play the show, go back to the hotel, and catch a few hours of sleep before flying off to the next stop.

In reality, you may not have time to enjoy the destinations you visit while on tour. However, with proper planning, you may find time to immerse yourself in the culture and see the sights. However, the best way to enjoy traveling is by taking a vacation where you decide your schedule.

Conclusion

Your experience as a touring artist depends on your self-discipline. Enjoy yourself as long as you don’t harm your health and professional reputation. Keep your habits and professionalism in check, and you may tour for decades like the Rolling Stones. Plus, you will reap all the monetary, professional, and cultural benefits along the way.

Furthermore, don’t be afraid to admit that touring life is not for you. Even if you spent years as a young producer dreaming of touring, it’s ok to acknowledge it’s not what you expected.

5 Exciting Careers in Music Business Worth Pursuing

Fri, 13 Sep 2024 17:21:00 GMT

Are you looking to pursue a career in the music industry? Check out these five essential careers in music business! They keep the music industry moving.

How to Get into the Music Industry?

The music industry has needs that go beyond the music itself. In today’s music job market, it takes business professionals to elevate music into a cultural phenomenon.

The music business is a vast, complex industry. It employs millions of people across different career paths. Everything from event production planning to music law.

However, it’s difficult to make a decent living in the music industry. Succeeding in music requires various disciplines, strategies, knowledge, and experience beyond creating or performing music. Versatility is key to a sustainable career in music!

Pursuing a career in music business opens doors to more opportunities. Plus, learning and practicing the business side of music is essential in this competitive industry.

Are you passionate about music and want to find a music related career path? Consider these five entry level music business careers:

5 Promising Careers in Music Business

This list of five career paths are perfect for those ready to pursue the hustles of music business.

1. Artist Manager

Behind each successful artist is a hard-working and talented manager. An artist manager plays a significant role in shaping an artist’s career.

An artist manager represents and serves as an advisor to their artists. They find opportunities, represent their interests, oversee day-to-day schedules, negotiate contracts, counsel them on career decisions, and more.

Artist managers are also the middleman between the artist and the music industry. They work on behalf of the artist, handling the business and professional development of their career. This allows the artist to maintain their mental health and focus on creating their art.

Depending on a manager’s style, they can also become a mentor to the artist. For example, teach them music business skills, music production techniques, mental health management, and more. This guidance will help the artist reach their full potential.

Professional Skills and Duties:

2. Tour Manager

A tour manager (TM) travels with an artist and ensures the tour runs smoothly. They organize, plan, and manage various touring logistics.

The responsibilities of a tour manager change depending on the size of the tour. But certain aspects of being a TM remain consistent across any tour.

Professional Skills and Duties:

Another essential aspect of being a tour manager is keeping everyone happy and healthy. Touring is a demanding and stressful lifestyle. A good TM will make sure everyone is performing at their best.

Read how to survive the road as a touring artist . Find advice on how to plan your tour, take care of your health, and navigate the music industry.

3. Booking Agent (Talent Agent)

A booking agent’s primary responsibility is to book gigs for their clients. They’re the point of contact for talent buyers interested in booking an artist.

Booking agents also facilitate the logistics involved in securing live performances or appearances. This includes securing venues, negotiating details, arranging equipment needs, organizing hospitality, managing finances, and more.

Agents work closely with promoters, venues, festival organizers, record labels, and managers. They make sure the artist plays dates and venues that align with their capabilities, goals, and artistic profile.

Like a manager, a great booking agent will also build connections in the music industry. They can also work independently or for a booking agency that represents a roster of artists.

Moreover, having industry connections allow booking agents to advance their clients’ music careers. These advantages are also a big reason artists sign with a particular agent or agency.

Professional Skills and Duties:

4. Record Label Manager

A record label manager coordinates and oversees operations at a record label. They implement a release schedule, manage contracts, coordinate marketing strategies, manage royalties, and more.

A label manager also guides the entire musical project from early planning to the release. They work with the A&R department, the label’s artist roster, management teams, and digital music distribution services.

However, the manager’s role varies depending on the size and budget of the record label.

For example, at a smaller, independent label, the manager can serve as A&R and various other roles. With a major label, the manager focuses on more big-picture planning.

A major label will have separate departments for A&R, marketing, design, distribution, and more. This structure allows the manager to delegate smaller tasks to individual departments.

Professional Skills and Duties:

5. A&R Representative

A&R stands for “ Artists & Repertoire .” It’s the A&R’s job to find and curate new talent for record labels.

A&R’s continually search the internet for up and coming artists. They also talent scout at various shows and festivals. That’s how they stay up-to-date with what sounds and styles resonate with the music community.

The first part of the A&R rep’s job is finding artists they want on their roster. Then they approach them with a record contract offer and convince them to sign.

The A&R will also help facilitate the recording and production process. It’s their job to give them the platform that best fits the particular artist’s needs.

Also, an A&R is most valuable to a label when they identify artists ready for success. The next big thing!

Up and coming artists are much more open to contracts. Plus, it’s a massive boost for business if the label finds a huge star early in their career.

Whereas artists who established huge success have more leverage. This makes it more challenging to secure a record contract.

Professional Skills and Duties:

How to Get into Music Business?

ICON’s Music Business Program prepares students for various jobs in the music industry.

A vital aspect of the program focuses on developing fundamental music business skills and strategies. Students then apply what they learned in real-life music business situations.

Music Business students also work alongside students from the Music Production Programs and Vocal Artist Program . They apply the knowledge taught in the classroom to help vocalists and producers develop their careers.

Learn everything you need to know about the music business. This extensive program teaches you how to:

Students will also partake in professional, hands-on music business internships. Internships benefit those seeking entry level music industry jobs.

ICON will also connect students with notable entities in the music industry. This gives them a chance to apply their knowledge in real-time. ICON has relationships with management companies, record labels, PR firms, and more.

Graduates of the Music Business Program will leave with prospective clients and industry contacts to kick-start their careers.

Jumpstart your music career today! Check out ICON’s Music Business Program . You will get a comprehensive music industry education, unlike any other music business college.

Conclusion

The music business requires more than musicians to advance. While the musicians get most of the attention, there are roles in the music industry equally vital.

Someone on the business side of things could have a significant effect on the future of music. As long as they have an unwavering work ethic and the right skills.

That effect can take various forms. For example, a great manager could develop the next Led Zeppelin. A talented agent could secure an all-star lineup for the next Woodstock. While the next wave of A&R reps will find the new generation of hitmakers.

6 Must-Read Books for Artistic Success

Wed, 11 Sep 2024 18:07:00 GMT

Icon’s Industry Advisor Nik Cherwink is one of music industry's top performance coaches and has helped many artists to take their career to the next level. In this article Nik shares six inspirational books that offer advice on artistic success. Learn essential knowledge that will help you develop as an artist in the music business.

Path to Artistic Success

The pursuit of a successful career in the music business is an exciting journey filled with many ups and downs. It takes an incredible amount of hard work to establish yourself in this industry. Countless hours need to be spent in the studio, marketing your brand, playing shows and building your team. But just as much work (if not MORE) needs to be done on yourself. Learning to understand yourself better will enable you to accomplish goals and reach your full potential as an artist.

The following list of books provide some great tools that will assist in developing a powerful mindset and a creative edge:

1. The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People | Stephen Covey

This is the first self-help book I ever read, and I can honestly say it changed my life. The first chapter alone changed my life. Each lesson teaches profound ways of thinking and behaving that will help you thrive in your business and personal relationships. It also explains how to truly become a “highly effective” person. Only by mastering our internal world can we achieve greatness and fulfillment in our external world. This book shows you how to do just that.

2. Think and Grow Rich | Napoleon Hill

This was the second book that made a profound impact on the way I see and interact with the world. It teaches about the “law of attraction” (though it doesn’t use those words) and explains a step-by-step system to manifest what you desire most in life. Napoleon Hill spent 25 years studying and interviewing the most successful people in the world to find the common thread between their philosophies. This book explains and explains those philosophies. Think and Grow Rich is is a must-read!

3. Love Is The Killer App | Tim Sanders

I received a copy of this book from Jake Udell, an incredible manager, and marketing genius. He helped launch the careers of Krewella, Zhu, Gallant, and others with his powerhouse team at TH3RD BRAIN. Jake truly lives the principles described in this book. He is what Tim Sanders considers to be a “lovecat,” someone who openly shares their knowledge, network, and compassion to authentically build stronger friendships with the people they do business with. Sure, you can be a shark and make it to the top. However, only a lovecat will experience true happiness and fulfillment when they get there.

4. The Slight Edge | Jeff Olson

This book was given to me by an Icon Online student that I mentored (gotta love when the student becomes the teacher). It discusses how the small, seemingly insignificant choices we make every day shapes our destiny. This often forgotten truth is wise knowledge. For example, making your bed, saving your money, and choosing healthy food options may seem like simple common sense decisions. But having the discipline to actually DO these little things every day has a compound effect that ultimately determines the quality of your life. My favorite tip he suggests is to read ten pages of something inspirational every day, a short investment of time that will positively wire your brain for success.

5. The Artist’s Way | Julia Cameron

The Artist’s Way is a popular book that covers the topic of creativity, and for a good reason. This 12-week workbook takes a spiritual approach to help you further explore and activate your creativity. It offers powerful exercises and questions that will take you deep, so don’t expect to read through this one like a regular book. You’ll need to roll up your sleeves and get to work, like doing daily Morning Pages and taking yourself on a weekly “artist date.”

6. The War of Art | Steven Pressfield

As an ex-marine, Steven Pressfield takes a straightforward approach to tackle creativity. He personifies the “resistance” we experience when taking on work. This guidance is an inevitable part of the process that everybody has to deal with in life. The book also shares some fairly simple advice: STFU, sit down and get to work. If you’re looking for a healthy dose of inspiration to help you push through those rough patches, then this is your book. It’s a quick read as well, and should only take a couple of days to get through. Plus, you can always go back and revisit when you need it.

Learn More About Music Business

Learn about the complexities of a rapidly changing music industry. Icon’s compressive Music Business course provides students with the essential knowledge and direction to uniquely position themselves in the ever-changing music space. Discover how to formulate branding and marketing plans, protect intellectual property, and much more.

5 Ways to Overcome Creative Block

Fri, 06 Sep 2024 21:38:00 GMT

This guide serves as a resource that offers five methods used by musicians to help you keep your head in the game and work through creative obstacles.

Creative Block

Whether you’re a music producer or a singer/songwriter, it’s likely you experienced creative block at some point.

The life of a musician is never smooth sailing. There will be times when you struggle to find the inspiration to start a new project or become completely devoid of ideas, making it hard to find a path towards the finish line. Music production is full of pitfalls, and it’s easy to head down the rabbit hole of endless fine tweaking or become overwhelmed by the limitless options and infinite possibilities. It’s ok to feel the weight of these many obstacles; it’s part of the process.

Although these common occurrences can become frustrating, there are several methods musicians use to motivate their creative flow and jump back on the productive train. The following guide offers some tried–and–true approaches used to overcome creative block.

Take Breaks

There will be times when you feel exasperated but are locked in and determined to keep working. Forcing yourself through a session without taking breaks can become counter-productive. Breaks are healthy and necessary to recharge your creative energy.

Whether it’s 30 minutes, a day, a week or a month, take some time away from the studio to clear your head and not think about music. Taking walks has long been a proven creative block-breaker, but feel free to enjoy any of your favorite activities. Catch some fresh air and jump back in the pilot seat when you feel more prepared to work productively.

Change Gears

There is no shortage of things to work on throughout the process of creating music. There are several different things you can delve into such as sound design, recording samples, mixing, arrangement, and more.

If you’re feeling stuck, change course and experiment. Fire up a synth, free yourself from any restrictions, and go wild creating new sounds. This technique is an excellent way to become more familiar with your instruments and lets you create freely without any pressure worrying about what you’re doing is right or wrong. It’s also very poseable that the sounds you make will inspire new ideas. Remember to save your synth presets to use in future projects.

The same goes for recording samples. Grab a recorder and adventure around capturing all types of unique sounds no one else has. Be creative and build a collection of material for various uses. Also, try dropping some samples into your DAW and mess around with them in different ways. Let loose, mangle, layer, and process the samples to create something entirely new.

Music Deconstruction

One of the best ways to up your music production game is to analyze and deconstruct the music you enjoy. Learn from other people’s music by interpreting the different elements that make up a song and then use what you have learned in your productions.

Breaking down the music that inspires you will certainly boost musical ideas and improve your ability to understand the mechanics of music production. With practice, you will be able to identify different instruments, song structure, drum patterns, melodies, harmony, and more. This highly valuable learning approach is essential in strengthening the fundamentals such as arrangement, sound design, music theory, and songwriting.

For example, practice your arrangement skills by first dragging a reference tune into your DAW. Then identify all the musical parts such as verse, chorus, bridge, breakdown, intro, outro, drop, etc. Use locators or slice up the sections and give them all different colors to differentiate them. Doing this will give you a road map to follow when arranging your mix.

Boost your sound design skills by setting a loop brace around a part of a song such as a bass solo and then load up one of your instruments to recreate the same sound. This technique helps you to learn your tools and also serves as an excellent way to train your ears.

Same goes for increasing your music theory and songwriting knowledge. Set a loop around a dope sounding chord progression and try to recreate those same chords or musical patterns. Doing this will help you recognize the different notes in each scale, learn different ways to write chord progressions or melodies, and figure out how your favorite artists created the particular elements that excite you.

The goal of deconstructing other peoples music is to help you establish an understanding of the various production techniques used by artist’s that influence you. Take that newly discovered knowledge and apply it to your own creative style.

Collaborate

One of the greatest things about creating music is its collaborative nature. When your inspiration is stalling, bring other people into the mix.

Most producers these days often work from their home studio or on the road in solitary, freedom is one of the appeals of music production. However, working solo at times has its downfalls.

Working with someone else can be a great way to draw new ideas. It’s an excellent way to gain insight into how other people work. You may learn how other musicians approach things differently than you which can make you rethink your methods.

Even if you’re not stranded on creative block island, it’s still good to reach out to your mates to bounce ideas, critique or edit your work, and ask questions.

Listen to Music

One of the easiest ways to keep inspired is to curate a collection of tunes that serve as a reminder of why you’re making music. Go back to your roots and listen to the music that excites your creativity or explore new music to gain fresh ideas. This approach helps you get your head back into the right creative space.

It’s easy to get caught up on various things that cause us to lose focus. Instead of forcing yourself to work through a session, take a break and clear your mind of that tedious loop pattern by soaking in music that will kick start excitement and motivation.

Also, try listening to several different types of music you may not be into like classical, jazz, country, etc. Expand your music palette and avoid limiting yourself to one genre. Pay close attention to the arrangement, time signature, instruments, and techniques used to spark ideas that you can fuse into the style of music you’re trying to create.

How to Design an Album Cover: Tips for Making a Good Album Cover

Mon, 26 Aug 2024 16:54:00 GMT

In today’s crowded music industry, knowing how to design an album cover that stands out is more important than ever. Your album cover is often the first interaction potential listeners have with your music, making it a crucial element in capturing attention and building your brand. The versatility of album art, appearing in formats from billboards to social media and music apps, significantly impacts listener engagement and brand loyalty. This article will guide you through the process of how to make a good album cover, providing insights into what makes a good album cover and how to design album covers that leave a lasting impression.

The Importance of Album Cover Design

When considering how to make an album cover, remember that it serves as the visual representation of your music album. It’s the image that listeners will associate with your sound, often before they hear a single note. On digital platforms, where thousands of albums are released daily, understanding how to design an album cover that grabs attention can significantly impact whether your music gets noticed. Beyond aesthetics, designing an album cover that aligns with your brand is essential for effective music promotion.

Best Practices for Designing an Album Cover

To ensure your album cover meets industry standards and is not rejected by music distributors , follow these best practices:

Resolution and Dimensions: When designing an album cover, ensure it’s at least 3000 x 3000 pixels to maintain high quality across all platforms. A resolution of 300 dpi is recommended for clarity, especially for physical prints. For CD covers, the recommended size is 4.724 x 4.724 inches, which is crucial for attracting potential buyers and representing the music effectively.
File Formats: PNG or JPEG is the preferred file format for most music distributors. It ensures compatibility and maintains quality across various digital platforms.
Color Modes: Use RGB color mode, which is ideal for digital displays. Avoid CMYK, as it’s intended for print and may not display correctly online.
Text Inclusion: When learning how to design album covers, remember to only include the artist’s name and album title. Avoid adding extra text like “New Release” or “Limited Edition,” which can date the artwork or cause it to be rejected by distributors.
Avoiding Branding Elements: Do not include URLs, logos, or any promotional text that could violate distributor guidelines. Focus on making a good album cover that highlights the album and artist without external branding.
Simplicity and Clarity: Your album cover design should be easily recognizable, even when viewed as a small thumbnail. Avoid cluttered backgrounds, and ensure any text is legible against the chosen background.

Key Principles of Album Cover Design

Understanding what makes a good album cover involves mastering the principles of composition, ensuring that your design is both visually appealing and representative of the music. Creative album artwork plays a crucial role in packaging, especially for vinyl releases, and can significantly enhance the appeal of your product. Innovative designs can even gain recognition, such as the Grammy Award for best album packaging:

Balance and Symmetry: A well-balanced design creates harmony and order. Symmetry can be used to center the focus of the cover, while asymmetry can add dynamic energy.
Color Theory: Colors evoke emotions and set the tone for your album. For example, warm colors like red and orange convey energy and passion, while cooler tones like blue and green suggest calmness or introspection. Choose colors that reflect the mood and genre of your music when designing an album cover.
Contrast and Clarity: High contrast between text and background ensures readability, especially in small thumbnail views. This is particularly important on digital platforms where your cover may be viewed on various screen sizes.
Typography: The font you choose should be legible and align with the album’s mood. While artistic fonts can add character, they shouldn’t compromise readability. The typography should complement the overall design and not overpower it.
Focal Point: A strong focal point draws the viewer’s eye and makes your cover memorable. Whether it’s an image, a piece of text, or a symbol, the focal point should be the central element of your design.

COLOR AND TYPOGRAPHY

When it comes to designing an album cover, color and typography are two crucial elements that can make or break the overall aesthetic. Colors can evoke emotions, convey moods, and create a visual representation of the music. Typography, on the other hand, can communicate the band’s personality, style, and tone.

Color Palette: Choose a color palette that reflects the mood and tone of your music. Consider the emotions you want to evoke in your listeners and select colors that align with those emotions. For example, if your music is energetic and upbeat, you may choose bright and bold colors like red, orange, or yellow. If your music is calm and soothing, you may choose softer, more muted colors like blue, green, or purple. The right color palette can transform your album cover into a powerful visual representation of your music.
Typography: Select a font that reflects the style and tone of your music. Serif fonts are traditional and serious, often used for classical music or heavy metal album covers. Sans serif fonts are modern and streamlined, often used for electronic and indie rock music. Script fonts are cursive and can be used for a broad range of music types, while display fonts are decorative and often used for novelty purposes. The typography should complement the overall design and not overpower it, ensuring that your album title and artist name are clear and legible.

IMAGERY AND STYLE

Imagery and style are essential components of album cover design. The imagery you choose can convey the message and tone of your music, while the style can reflect your band’s personality and aesthetic.

Imagery: Choose imagery that reflects the theme and tone of your music. Consider using photography, illustrations, or graphics that convey the emotions and moods you want to evoke in your listeners. For example, if your music is dark and moody, you may choose imagery that is eerie and haunting. If your music is upbeat and energetic, you may choose imagery that is bright and colorful. The right imagery can make your album cover a compelling visual representation of your music.
Style: Consider the style of your album cover design. Do you want it to be minimalist and simple, or bold and elaborate? Do you want to incorporate graphics, illustrations, or photography? Think about the overall aesthetic you want to create and choose imagery and style that reflects that. A well-designed album cover should be a cohesive blend of imagery and style that captures the essence of your music and stands out in a crowded market.

Tools and Resources for Making a Cool Album Cover

If you don’t have advanced design skills or a large budget, there are plenty of tools available to help you learn how to design album cover art that looks professional:

Free Stock Photo Websites: Websites like Pexels , Unsplash , and Pixabay offer high-quality, royalty-free images that can be customized for your album cover design.
Online Photo Editors: Tools like Canva , Pixlr , and Adobe Spark provide easy-to-use platforms for designing album covers. These editors offer pre-designed templates and simple drag-and-drop interfaces, making them ideal for beginners learning how to make an album cover.
Graphic Design Software: For those with more experience, software like Adobe Photoshop and GIMP allows for greater control and customization of your album cover design. These programs offer advanced features like layering, masking, image manipulation, and AI integrations.

Trends in Album Cover Design

Album cover design trends evolve over time, reflecting broader cultural and artistic movements. Here are some current trends to consider when thinking about how to make a cool album cover:

Minimalism: Minimalistic designs focus on simplicity, using clean lines, few colors, and plenty of white space. This trend is popular in genres like electronic and indie music, where the focus is on conveying a single, powerful idea.
Retro and Vintage Aesthetics: Nostalgic designs that draw from past decades are popular, especially in genres like synthwave or rock. These covers often use grainy textures, faded colors, and vintage fonts to evoke a sense of time and place.
Abstract Art: Abstract designs are often used to convey complex or experimental music. These covers may use unusual shapes, patterns, and colors to create a sense of mystery and intrigue.

Examples of Good Album Cover Art

Advanced Techniques for Designing Album Covers

To create an album cover that stands out, consider incorporating these advanced design techniques:

Layering and Textures: Adding layers and textures can give your album cover design depth and complexity. This technique is especially effective for creating a tactile, three-dimensional look that stands out in digital formats.
Symmetry vs. Asymmetry: Symmetrical designs create a sense of balance and harmony, while asymmetrical designs can be more dynamic and engaging. Choose the approach that best represents the mood and energy of your music.
Image Manipulation: Altering images—whether through color adjustments, cropping, or adding filters—can transform a simple photo into something unique and original. Experimenting with image manipulation allows you to create an album cover design that is truly your own.

Tips for Creating Cohesive Branding Through Album Cover Design

Your album cover design should be a reflection of your overall brand identity. Here are some tips for ensuring consistency when designing album covers:

Consistency Across Releases: Maintain a visual style that ties your releases together, such as using similar fonts, colors, or imagery. This helps build a recognizable brand that fans can easily identify. Hiring an album cover designer can ensure that your visuals are both professional and appealing, enhancing your music's presentation.
Matching Visuals to Music: The cover art should accurately reflect the tone and genre of your music. For example, bright, vibrant colors might suit an upbeat pop album, while darker, more muted tones could better represent a moody, introspective record.

Leveraging Design Trends to Make a Cool Album Cover

While it’s important to stay true to your style, incorporating current design trends can help your album cover stand out:

Adapting Trends: Look at what’s popular in the industry and see how you can adapt these trends to fit your music. For example, if minimalism is trending, you might strip back your design to focus on a single, powerful image.
Avoiding Overused Tropes: Be aware of clichés in album cover design and avoid them. Instead, aim for originality and creativity, using trends as a starting point rather than a template.

Importance of Thumbnail Optimization in Album Cover Design

Most listeners will first encounter your album cover as a thumbnail on a streaming platform, so it’s crucial that your design works at a small scale:

Designing for Small Screens: Ensure that key elements of your design—such as the focal point and text—are still visible and impactful when reduced to a thumbnail size.
Focus on Clarity and Simplicity: Simplify your design to ensure it doesn’t lose its impact when scaled down. Avoid clutter and focus on creating a clear, compelling image that draws the eye, even in a crowded interface.

Designing Album Covers for Multiple Formats

Your album cover design needs to look great in both digital and physical formats, which may require some adjustments:

Digital vs. Physical Formats: Digital platforms often display album covers as square thumbnails, while physical formats like vinyl or CDs may require additional cropping or adjustments. Ensure your design works well across all intended formats. Graphic designers play a crucial role in ensuring that the album cover design is optimized for both digital and physical formats.
Aspect Ratios and Cropping: Consider how your design will be cropped or resized for different formats, and make adjustments as necessary to maintain its integrity.

Legal Considerations in Album Cover Design

When designing album covers, it’s essential to navigate the legal aspects carefully:

Copyright and Image Use: Make sure you have the rights to use any images or artwork included in your cover. This includes photos, illustrations, and any other visual elements that may be subject to copyright.
Permissions and Clearances: If you’re using images of people, famous landmarks, or other recognizable elements, ensure you have the necessary permissions to use them commercially. This can help you avoid legal issues down the line.

Final Steps: Preparing Your Album Cover Design for Release

Before releasing your album cover design, it’s important to finalize the artwork and ensure it meets all technical and legal requirements:

Review and Adjustments: Conduct a final review of your design to check for any errors or quality issues. Consider getting feedback from others to ensure the design is effective.
Exporting in the Correct Format: Make sure your file is exported in the correct format and resolution to meet distributor requirements. This final step is crucial to ensuring your album cover looks its best across all platforms.

Conclusion

Learning how to design an album cover is a critical part of releasing music, gaining fans, and building your brand. By following the guidelines and techniques outlined in this article, you can create an album cover design that not only meets industry standards but also captures the attention of listeners and conveys the essence of your music.

How to Send a Demo to a Record Label in 2024: A Complete Guide

Wed, 21 Aug 2024 14:32:00 GMT

In the music industry, getting your demo heard by the right people at the right time can be the key to unlocking new opportunities. In 2024, the process of sending demos to record labels has evolved with the digital age, but the core principles remain the same. This guide will walk you through the steps necessary to prepare, submit, and follow up on your demo, ensuring that your music stands out in a crowded field.

Step 1: Demo Submission Preparation

Before you send a demo to a record label, it’s crucial to make sure your track is polished and professional. The first step is ensuring that your music is complete—meaning it’s fully mixed, mastered, or at least ready for mastering. Don’t waste the time of A&R managers with unfinished or poor-quality tracks.

To ensure your music is ready for submission, seek feedback from industry professionals. Trusted peers, producers, or mentors can provide valuable insights that help you fine-tune your tracks. Be cautious about relying solely on feedback from close friends or family, as they may not provide the critical perspective you need.

Additionally, when exporting your tracks, be sure to use the correct file formats. Most labels prefer MP3 or WAV files, and they may have specific requirements for how tracks should be tagged. Properly labeled tracks, with clear file names and ID3 tags, make it easier for labels to identify your work. For instance, include your artist name, track title, and contact information in the tags.

Step 2: Research Record Labels

Not all record labels are the same, and sending your demo to the right one is essential. Begin by researching labels that align with your music style. Every label specializes in certain genres and sounds, so it’s important to ensure that your music matches what they typically release.

Look at the roster of artists already signed to the labels you’re interested in. Does your music fit in with their current lineup? Additionally, study the labels’ brand and image. Understanding the label’s vision and audience can help you tailor your submission and make a stronger case for why your music belongs there.

Compile a list of target labels and familiarize yourself with their websites, social media channels, and any available contact information. The more you know about a label, the better you can personalize your demo submission, increasing the likelihood that it will be heard by the right people.

Step 3: Read and Follow the Demo Policy

Once you’ve identified the labels you want to submit to, the next step is to read their demo policies carefully. These guidelines are often posted on the label’s website and outline specific requirements for submissions. Some labels won’t accept unsolicited demos due to legal concerns, while others may have strict rules about the types of tracks they’re looking for.

For instance, most labels request original, full-length tracks rather than remixes, mashups, or short previews. They may also specify preferred formats for demo submissions, such as private streaming links via SoundCloud or Dropbox, rather than email attachments. Paying attention to these details is crucial—failure to follow a label’s demo policy can result in your submission being ignored or rejected outright.

Step 4: Sending Links Instead of Files

In today’s digital landscape, most record labels prefer receiving demos as streaming links rather than file attachments. Sending a private streaming link, such as a SoundCloud link with downloads enabled, is both efficient and professional. It allows the label to listen to your track without having to download files, which can be cumbersome and raise security concerns.

Avoid attaching files directly to your emails unless the label explicitly requests it. Attachments can clog inboxes, be mistaken for spam, or get automatically filtered out. By sending a streaming link, you make it easier for the label to access and listen to your music.

Step 5: Use Official Contact Methods

When it comes to submitting your demo, professionalism is key. Always use the official contact methods provided by the label, which are typically listed on their website or social media pages. While it might be tempting to message label representatives directly through social media, this approach is often seen as unprofessional and may result in your demo being ignored.

Stick to the channels the label prefers, whether that’s through a designated email address or a submission form on their website. This not only shows respect for the label’s process but also increases the chances that your demo will reach the right person.

Step 6: Personalize Your Submission Message

Record labels receive dozens, if not hundreds, of demo submissions daily. To stand out from the crowd, it’s essential to personalize your submission message. A generic or impersonal email is less likely to catch the attention of an A&R manager.

Keep your message simple, concise, and professional. Briefly introduce yourself, mention why your track is a good fit for the label, and highlight any relevant achievements, such as notable collaborations or performances. Personal touches, like referencing specific tracks from the label that you admire, can also help you stand out.

Step 7: Building Industry Relationships

Networking is a powerful tool in the music industry. Building relationships with other artists, DJs, producers, and industry professionals can open doors and create opportunities for your music. Attend events, participate in online communities, and engage with others in the industry.

However, it’s important to approach networking professionally. Be genuine in your interactions, and avoid coming across as overly aggressive or desperate. Relationships built on mutual respect and shared interests are more likely to lead to fruitful opportunities.

Step 8: Follow-Up Emails

After you’ve sent your demo, it’s natural to want to know if it was received and listened to. While patience is important, a polite follow-up email can be appropriate after a reasonable amount of time has passed, typically two to three weeks.

In your follow-up, keep the tone polite and brief. Simply inquire whether the label has had a chance to listen to your demo and if any feedback is available. Remember, if the label is interested in your track, they will usually reach out. However, following up shows that you’re serious and professional.

Step 9: Dealing with Rejection

Rejection is a common part of the music industry, but it doesn’t have to be discouraging. If a label rejects your demo, it may not be a reflection of your music’s quality but rather a matter of fit with the label’s current roster or release schedule.

Use rejection as an opportunity to learn and grow. You can politely ask for feedback, thank the label for their time, and inquire if there are other labels they would recommend for your style of music. Keep in mind that a rejection from one label doesn’t mean you can’t submit to them again in the future with new material.

Step 10: Demo Submission Checklist

Before sending your demo, it’s helpful to review a checklist to ensure you’ve covered all your bases:

Don’t:

Don't send bulk emails to multiple record label contacts
Avoid sending a demo through social media messages
Never tell the A&R that your demo is a work in progress
Don’t send unfinished tracks, remixes, or mashups
Do not send tracks with copyrighted material
Don’t attach MP3, WAV, or other files to emails unless specifically requested by the label
Refrain from sending more than three tracks at once
Don’t write long or spammy emails
Avoid stalking record label staff if they take a long time to reply
Don’t get discouraged if your demo is rejected

Do:

Research record labels thoroughly
Follow a label’s demo policy
Communicate on the label’s official channels
Personalize your demo submission message
Send private SoundCloud links with downloads enabled
Detail your success in a clear, simple, and concise way
Be polite and use appropriate language
Seek feedback and advice from industry professionals
Establish an online presence and branding material
Build relationships and network with people in the music industry

Current Trends in Demo Submissions for 2024

The music industry in 2024 is more data-driven than ever before. Labels are increasingly looking at streaming analytics, social media engagement, and other data points when considering new artists. This means that building an online presence and engaging with your audience is crucial before sending out your demo.

Leveraging AI for Music Production and Submission
AI tools are becoming more common in music production, helping artists refine their sound and improve production quality. In addition to traditional feedback, consider using AI tools to analyze your tracks and make improvements before submitting your demo. These tools can offer insights into mixing, mastering, and even songwriting, helping you present the best possible version of your music.

Building an Online Presence Before Sending a Demo
Before you send your demo, ensure that your online presence is solid. This includes having a professional artist profile on streaming platforms, active social media accounts, and a consistent brand image. Labels will often look at your online presence as part of their decision-making process, so make sure it reflects your professionalism and commitment to your music.

Conclusion

Sending a demo to a record label is a significant step in your music career, and following the right process can increase your chances of success. By preparing your music, researching labels, following their demo policies, and building industry relationships, you can make a strong impression. Remember that patience, professionalism, and persistence are key, and even if you face rejection, it’s all part of the journey to finding the right home for your music.

How to Become a Music Manager: A Comprehensive Guide

Mon, 19 Aug 2024 19:54:36 GMT

Becoming a music manager is a rewarding but challenging career path that requires a unique blend of skills, experience, and connections. As an artist manager, you play a crucial role in guiding the careers of artists, helping them navigate the complexities of the music industry through strategic decision-making, contract negotiations, and effective networking. If you’re passionate about music and have a knack for business, this could be the perfect career for you. A great way to start your journey is by enrolling in a specialized program, such as the Music Business Program offered by ICON Collective, which equips you with the knowledge and skills needed to succeed in the music management field.

Understanding the Role of a Music Manager

A music manager is responsible for overseeing the business aspects of an artist's career. This includes everything from negotiating contracts and securing deals to organizing tours and managing finances. The manager acts as the artist's representative, making strategic decisions that align with the artist's goals and ensuring that their career progresses smoothly. Successful music managers have a deep understanding of the music industry, strong negotiation skills, and the ability to build and maintain relationships.

Understanding the Music Industry

The music industry is a complex and multifaceted business that encompasses various sectors, including record labels, publishing companies, live event promoters, and music management companies. As a music manager, having a deep understanding of the industry’s inner workings is crucial. This includes knowing the roles of different stakeholders, such as artists, producers, promoters, and executives, and understanding the various revenue streams, from album sales and streaming royalties to live performances and merchandise.

Staying informed about current trends and challenges in the music industry will enable you to navigate it effectively. This knowledge will help you make informed decisions and provide valuable guidance to your clients. Whether it’s understanding the impact of digital streaming on revenue or recognizing the importance of social media in artist promotion, being well-versed in industry dynamics is essential for success in music management.

Essential Skills for a Music Manager

To become a successful music manager, there are several key skills you need to develop:

Strong Communication and Negotiation Skills: You must be able to communicate effectively with artists, record labels, promoters, and other industry professionals. Negotiation is a significant part of the job, as you’ll be responsible for securing the best possible deals for your artists.

Organizational and Time Management Skills: Managing an artist’s career involves juggling many tasks simultaneously, so being organized and managing your time effectively is crucial.

Financial Acumen: Understanding how to manage budgets, track expenses, and maximize profits is essential. You’ll need to make informed financial decisions to ensure your artists’ careers are profitable.

Marketing and Branding Expertise: Promoting your artists and building their brand is a critical part of the job. You should be well-versed in marketing strategies and know how to leverage social media and other platforms to increase visibility.

Educational Foundation in Business Management: Obtaining a degree in business management provides essential skills in business practices, negotiation tactics, and industry expertise. This solid educational foundation is crucial for understanding the legal and financial responsibilities tied to managing an artist's career.

Music Manager Responsibilities

A music manager’s responsibilities can vary depending on the specific needs of their clients, but some common tasks include:

Developing and Implementing Career Strategies: Creating long-term plans to help artists achieve their career goals.

Coordinating Music Production and Release Schedules: Ensuring that recording sessions, album releases, and promotional activities are well-organized and timely.

Managing Finances and Budgets: Overseeing the financial aspects of an artist’s career, including budgeting for tours, recording sessions, and marketing campaigns.

Negotiating Contracts and Deals: Securing favorable terms for recording contracts, publishing deals, and other agreements.

Providing Guidance and Support on Creative and Business Decisions: Advising artists on both creative and business matters to help them make informed decisions.

Building and Maintaining Relationships with Industry Professionals: Cultivating connections with promoters, booking agents, record label executives, and other key players in the industry.

Identifying and Pursuing New Opportunities: Seeking out new opportunities for artists, such as collaborations, endorsements, and media appearances.

Are you an artist looking for a music manager? Learn how to get a music manager with these essential tips and strategies for artists.

Gaining Experience in the Music Industry

Experience is vital when it comes to becoming a music manager. Here are some ways to gain the experience you need:

Internships and Entry-Level Jobs: Start by working in entry-level positions at record labels, artist management firms, or music production companies. These roles will give you valuable insights into how the industry operates and help you build the foundational knowledge needed for a career in music management. (Our accredited Music Business Class helps with finding internships and opening doors in the industry.)

Networking: The music industry is built on relationships. Attend music industry events, join professional organizations, and connect with industry professionals to build your network . The more connections you have, the more opportunities you’ll find.

Volunteering: Volunteering at music festivals, concerts, and other events is another excellent way to gain experience and meet people in the industry. This hands-on experience will be invaluable as you start your career.

Engaging with the Music Scene: Attend live shows regularly to immerse yourself in the vibrant music scene. Live performances are crucial for artists, and music managers often look for new talent in these settings.

Building a Strong Network

In the music industry, who you know can be just as important as what you know. Building a strong network is crucial for success as a music manager:

Industry Connections: Cultivating relationships with industry professionals such as promoters, booking agents, record label executives, and other managers will open doors for your artists and help you advance in your career.

Attending Music Conferences and Events: Regularly attending conferences, workshops, and music events is essential for staying connected with the industry. These gatherings offer opportunities to learn, meet key players, and stay informed about industry trends.

Collaborating with Artists and Producers: Building relationships with artists and producers not only helps you gain experience but also expands your network. Working closely with others in the industry will strengthen your reputation as a reliable and effective manager.

Educating Yourself in Music Business

Education is a crucial component of a successful career in music management. Continuous learning keeps you informed about industry changes and helps you stay competitive:

Relevant Courses and Programs: Enrolling in music business courses can provide you with a solid understanding of the industry's legal, financial, and operational aspects. Consider programs that cover a wide range of topics, from contract law to marketing and digital distribution.

ICON Collective’s Music Business Program: One of the best ways to educate yourself is through the Music Business Program offered by ICON Collective . This program is designed to equip you with the skills and knowledge necessary to thrive as a music manager. The curriculum covers essential topics such as artist management, branding, marketing, and music law. With expert instructors and a strong network of industry professionals, ICON Collective offers a comprehensive education that prepares you for the challenges of the music industry.

Developing a Strategic Approach to Artist Management

A successful music manager needs a well-thought-out strategy for managing artists. Here’s how to develop one:

Identifying and Signing Talent: The first step is to identify promising artists who have the potential to succeed in the industry. Look for unique talent, a strong work ethic, and a clear artistic vision. Once you’ve found the right artist, negotiate and sign a management contract that outlines your role and responsibilities.

Creating a Career Roadmap: Work with your artists to develop a long-term career plan. This should include goals such as releasing albums, touring, gaining media exposure, and expanding their fan base. Understanding their current position in their music career is crucial for making strategic decisions. A clear roadmap helps keep both you and your artist focused on achieving these goals.

Leveraging Digital Platforms: In today’s music industry, digital platforms are crucial for promoting artists and connecting with fans. Ensure your artists have a strong online presence across platforms like Spotify, YouTube, and social media. Use these platforms to release music, share content, and engage with fans.

Understanding the Legal Aspects of Music Management

Navigating the legal landscape of the music industry is a critical part of being a music manager. Here’s what you need to know:

Contracts and Agreements: As a music manager, you’ll need to understand the various contracts and agreements that govern the industry, including recording contracts, management agreements, and publishing deals. These contracts define the terms of your relationship with artists, labels, and other stakeholders.

Copyrights, Royalties, and Intellectual Property: Ensure you understand how copyrights and royalties work in the music industry . This knowledge is vital for protecting your artists’ intellectual property and ensuring they receive proper compensation for their work.

Working with Entertainment Lawyers: Given the complexity of the legal issues involved, it’s important to have a good relationship with an entertainment lawyer. They can help you draft and review contracts, navigate disputes, and protect your artists’ interests.

Marketing and Promoting Your Artists

Marketing is a key component of an artist’s success. Here’s how to effectively market and promote your artists:

Crafting an Artist’s Brand Identity: Developing a strong brand identity is essential for differentiating your artist in a crowded market. Work with your artist to define their image, message, and unique selling points. This brand should be consistent across all platforms, from album artwork to social media profiles.

Strategies for Online and Offline Promotion: Use a mix of online and offline strategies to promote your artist. This could include digital advertising, social media campaigns, press releases, and interviews. Offline, consider organizing tours, live performances, and appearances at industry events.

Utilizing Social Media and Content Creation: Social media is a powerful tool for building an artist’s brand and engaging with fans. Encourage your artist to be active on platforms like Instagram, TikTok, and Twitter. Regular content creation, such as behind-the-scenes videos, live streams, and interactive posts, can help maintain fan interest and grow their audience.

The Role of Music Managers: Music managers play a vital role in guiding artists through their careers, negotiating deals, and coordinating tours. They provide essential mentorship and strategic planning, ensuring the success and growth of the artists they represent.

Managing Finances and Budgets

A music manager must have a firm grasp of financial management to ensure the artist’s career is financially sustainable. Here are some key responsibilities:

Overview of Financial Responsibilities: As a music manager, you’ll be responsible for overseeing the financial aspects of your artist’s career, including income, expenses, and investments. It’s important to keep accurate records and regularly review financial reports to ensure the artist’s finances are in order.

Budget Planning: Effective budget planning is essential for managing costs related to tours, recording sessions, marketing campaigns, and other career-related activities. Create detailed budgets that outline expected costs and revenue, and make adjustments as needed to stay within financial constraints.

Understanding Revenue Streams: Revenue in the music industry comes from various sources, including streaming royalties, live performances, merchandise sales, and licensing deals. Understanding these revenue streams and how to maximize them is crucial for your artist’s financial success.

Staying Updated with Industry Trends

The music industry is constantly evolving, and it’s important for music managers to stay informed about the latest trends and developments. Here’s how:

Importance of Staying Informed: Staying updated on industry trends allows you to make informed decisions and keep your artist competitive. This includes understanding changes in technology, consumer behavior, and industry standards.

Resources for Staying Current: There are many resources available to help you stay informed, including industry blogs, podcasts, newsletters, and reports. Regularly consuming this content will help you stay ahead of the curve.

Leveraging New Technologies: The music industry is heavily influenced by technology, from streaming services to social media platforms. Embracing new technologies and incorporating them into your artist’s strategy can provide a competitive edge and open up new opportunities.

The Challenges and Rewards of Being a Music Manager

Being a music manager comes with its own set of challenges, but the rewards can be significant. Here’s what to expect:

Common Challenges: Managing an artist’s career can be demanding, with challenges ranging from tight schedules and high-pressure negotiations to navigating the complexities of the music industry. You’ll need resilience, problem-solving skills, and the ability to stay calm under pressure.

Strategies for Overcoming Obstacles: To overcome these challenges, it’s important to stay organized, communicate effectively, and build a strong support network. Continuously improving your skills and knowledge will also help you navigate obstacles more effectively.

The Rewards: Despite the challenges, being a music manager can be incredibly rewarding. You’ll have the satisfaction of helping artists achieve their dreams, contributing to the creation of great music, and potentially earning a substantial income as your artists succeed.

Career Path and Development

A music manager’s career path can vary widely depending on their background, experience, and goals. Some music managers start their careers by working for established management companies, gaining valuable experience and industry connections. Others may choose to start their own companies, offering personalized management services to a select group of artists.

To develop a successful career as a music manager, it’s essential to gain relevant experience and build a strong network of industry contacts. Attending music industry events, conferences, and workshops can provide valuable opportunities to learn from experienced professionals and stay up-to-date with industry trends. Pursuing ongoing education and training, such as enrolling in music business programs, can also enhance your knowledge and skills.

Networking is a key component of career development in the music industry. Building relationships with artists, producers, promoters, and other industry professionals can open doors to new opportunities and help you establish a reputation as a reliable and effective music manager.

Don't wait, start your journey!

Becoming a music manager is a journey that requires dedication, hard work, and a passion for both music and business. By understanding the role, developing the necessary skills, gaining experience, and continuously educating yourself, you can build a successful career in this exciting field. Networking and staying informed about industry trends will further enhance your chances of success. If you’re serious about becoming a music manager, consider enrolling in ICON Collective’s Music Business Program , which offers comprehensive training and valuable connections to help you achieve your goals.

5 Common Mistakes to Avoid as a New Music Producer

Mon, 19 Aug 2024 18:37:37 GMT

Choose reference tracks wisely: Select tracks in a similar genre or style to your production.
Compare frequently: Regularly A/B your track against your reference to ensure you’re on the right path.
Focus on specific elements: Pay attention to how the reference track handles bass, mids, highs, and overall loudness.

How to Improve Your Music Production Skills

Improving your music production skills is an ongoing journey. Beyond avoiding the common mistakes listed above, consider these additional tips:

Invest in education: Take courses that teach music production fundamentals. The Music Production Intro Course from ICON Collective is an excellent resource for beginners.
Practice regularly: The more time you spend producing, the better you’ll become. Don’t be afraid to make mistakes; they’re part of the learning process.
Seek feedback: Share your work with more experienced producers and be open to constructive criticism.

Tips for Amateur Music Producers

As you start your music production journey, keep these tips in mind:

Develop good habits early: Organize your project files, label your tracks, and back up your work regularly.
Stay patient and persistent: Progress may be slow at times, but perseverance is key to growth.
Experiment with different genres: Trying out various styles can help you discover your unique sound and broaden your skill set.

Music Production Tips for Beginners

If you’re just starting out, these basic tips will help you build a strong foundation:

Use quality samples and sounds: Invest in high-quality sample packs and sound libraries.
Understand the basics of music theory: A solid grasp of music theory will help you create more cohesive and professional-sounding tracks.
Learn the art of mixing and mastering: Even basic knowledge in these areas will drastically improve the quality of your productions.

Conclusion

Avoiding these common mistakes will set you on the right path as a new music producer. Remember, continuous learning and practice are crucial for growth. One way to accelerate your progress is by enrolling in a structured course, such as the Music Production Intro Course offered by ICON Collective. This course is designed to give you the foundational skills needed to excel in music production.

Digital Music Distribution: How to Sell Your Music Online

Wed, 17 Jul 2024 17:16:00 GMT

Learn what digital music distribution services are and how they help independent artists and record labels sell music online.

What is Digital Music Distribution?

Digital music distribution services help independent artists and labels get their music on major online music stores and streaming sites worldwide. These digital aggregators distribute music on iTunes, Apple Music, Spotify, Beatport, Amazon, Google Play, Pandora, and other leading music platforms. Many digital distributors also offer an extensive range of artist tools, services, and resources. They provide everything needed to sell your music online and grow your fan base.

Digital Music Distribution Services

Many leading digital music distributors offer a suite of services and tools for artists. They provide everything needed to prepare, sell, and market your music. Common services offered by industry-leading digital music distribution companies include:

Delivering music to an extensive network of online music stores and streaming platforms
Collecting and managing various music royalties
Sales and analytics tools
In-depth reporting and analysis
Music licensing for placement on TV, film, video games, commercials, and more
Music anti-piracy services
Free ISRC and UPC barcodes
Mixing and mastering services
Video creation, promotion, distribution, and monetization
Content ID protection for YouTube videos
Album cover art , logo, EPK , and branding design services
Merchandise and printing services
Marketing promo mailer and other promotional services
Public relations services, custom marketing plans, and release advice
Music education, industry tips, and artist development information

How Digital Music Distribution Works

Music distribution is now easier for unsigned artists. You no longer need a record label to share your music with the world.

Many of the major music platforms like iTunes, Apple Music, Spotify, Amazon, Google Play, and Beatport do not deal with independent artists. They either require demanding submission requirements or will only work with approved digital distribution aggregators. So, the easiest and most hassle-free way to sell your music across the globe without a record deal is to use a digital music distribution service.

Additionally, digital music distributors partner with hundreds of online music stores and streaming services worldwide. They also provide everything needed to get your music to these music platforms. Moreover, you keep 100% of the rights to your music and 100% of the money you earn.

Digital Music Distribution Pricing

Many digital aggregators allow you to keep 100% of sales, downloads, and streaming revenue. However, there are costs to using their services.

Digital music distribution pricing varies. Some digital distributors charge upfront fees for every album, EP, and single. Many also charge a percentage of revenue earned from sales and streaming. In other cases, aggregators will charge ongoing monthly or annual fees to keep your content online. New business models continue to appear as the music industry evolves, so do your homework before choosing one.

The Best Music Distribution Companies

Each of the music distribution companies mentioned below has a solid reputation. It’s encouraged to check out what each service offers, how they manage your music, and what they charge to distribute your music. Choose one that best meets your needs and budget.

The Takeaway

Digital music distribution services help independent artists and labels get their music heard worldwide. They distribute music to a vast network of digital music stores and streaming platforms. These digital aggregators also offer an extensive range of tools and services that help artists grow their brand, reach new fans, make money from their music, and much more.

Explained: How Music Royalties Work in the Music Industry

Wed, 17 Jul 2024 16:00:00 GMT

Music royalties are a critical component of the music industry, providing a way for artists, songwriters, and producers to earn income from their creative works. With the advent of streaming platforms, understanding how music royalties work has become increasingly complex. This comprehensive guide will demystify music royalties, explain the various types, and delve into the specifics of streaming royalties.

Understanding Music Royalties

What Are Music Royalties?

Music royalties are payments made to rights holders (such as songwriters, composers, and recording artists) for the use of their music. These royalties are earned whenever their music is played, performed, or reproduced. They serve as compensation for the intellectual property rights of the creators and are essential for sustaining the music industry.

Importance of Music Royalties

Music royalties ensure that creators are fairly compensated for their work, encouraging continued creativity and production of new music. They provide a crucial revenue stream, especially in an era where physical sales have declined and digital consumption dominates.

Types of Music Royalties

Performance Royalties

Public performance royalties generate music income for copyrighted works performed, recorded, played, or streamed in public. This includes terrestrial radio, television, bars, restaurants, clubs, live concerts , music streaming services, and anywhere else your music plays in public.

Mechanical Royalties

Mechanical royalties generate music income for the physical or digital reproduction and distribution of copyrighted works. This applies to all music formats such as vinyl, CD, cassette, digital downloads, and streaming services. For example, record labels pay mechanical royalties to songwriters every time they press a CD of their music. A copyright owner can also collect mechanical royalties from a digital music distributor service if they are independent.

Synchronization Royalties

Synchronization royalties generate income for copyrighted music paired or ‘synced’ with visual media. Sync licenses grant the right to use copyrighted songs in films, television, commercials, video games, online streaming, advertisements, music videos, and any other visual media.

However, a synchronization license does not include the right to use an existing recording with audiovisual media such as a YouTube video. A licensee will need a master use license before using copyrighted music with a new audiovisual project. This is an agreement between the master recording owner, such as a record label, and the person seeking permission to use the recording.

Any use of protected music in an audiovisual project will need a master use license and a sync license. It doesn’t matter if it’s a full song or short sample. For example, you need both a master and sync agreement before syncing up the latest pop track with your wakeboarding video on YouTube.

Print Music Royalties

Print royalties are the least common form of payment a copyright holder receives. This royalty applies to copyrighted music transcribed to a print piece such as sheet music and then distributed.

Additionally, the copyright holder pays out these fees based on the number of copies made of the printed piece.

How Music Royalties Work

Music royalties and copyrights is a complex subject. This guide outlines the basic rights and usages of musical compositions.

TYPES OF SONG COPYRIGHTS

Music copyrights have two components: master rights and publishing rights.

Master rights belong to the owner of a master sound recording. A master recording is an original song or sound used for reproduction and distribution. Master rights typically belong to either the artist(s), record label, recording studio, or any other party who financed the recording.
Publishing rights belong to the owner of the actual music composition. The publishing side of music refers to the notes, melodies, chords, rhythms, lyrics, and any other piece of original music.

WHAT ARE THE EXCLUSIVE RIGHTS OF COPYRIGHT?

Copyright law grants six exclusive rights to control the use and distribution of copyrighted work. The copyright owner has exclusive rights to:

Reproduce and make copies of the original work . For example, a digital music download and physical formats like a CD or vinyl.
Prepare derivative works based on the original work . For example, a new original product that includes aspects of an existing song. This consists of a cover song, remix, or any altered version of an existing song.
Distribute copyrighted work to the public . For example, release the song through a music distributor, digital download, or record label.
Perform copyrighted work publicly . For example, live concerts or live performances in a public setting.
Play copyrighted work publicly . For example, through music streaming, satellite radio, music videos, FM radio, a TV show, etc.
Display the copyrighted work publicly . A public display means to show a visual copy of the work to others. For example, sheet music or photos from performance pieces.

The copyright owner can transfer these exclusive rights or parts. The two methods of transfer are licensing and assignment. Transfers must be in writing and signed by the copyright owner or an authorized agent.

Collection Societies and PROs

Collection societies and Performance Rights Organizations (PROs) such as ASCAP , BMI , and SESAC , play a vital role in collecting and distributing royalties. They monitor the usage of music across various platforms and ensure that royalties are paid to the appropriate rights holders. By registering with these organizations, artists and songwriters can ensure they receive their due payments.

Be aware, the songwriter and publisher of the work split these royalties. Therefore, you must register as both the writer and publisher to receive 100% of the performance royalties.

The Role of Music Publishers

Music publishers manage the rights of songwriters and composers. They help with the registration of works, collect royalties, and ensure proper distribution. Publishers often take a percentage of the royalties as a fee for their services.

Royalties Split Between Songwriters and Performers

Royalties are typically split between the songwriters, composers, and performers. The specific split depends on contracts and agreements made between the parties involved. It's crucial for artists to understand these splits to ensure fair compensation. Music managers can help navigate contract negotiations for artists.

WHO GETS MUSIC ROYALTIES AND ADMINISTERS THEM?

The following roles either receive or distribute royalties for copyrighted music:

1. SONGWRITERS

Songwriters are those who write both the music and lyrics for a song. They receive either mechanical, performance, or sync royalties depending on the usage of their recordings.

If multiple songwriters contributed to a song, they would need a split sheet. A songwriter split sheet is a written agreement that identifies each contributor to a song and establishes ownership percentages amongst them. The agreed percentages determine how much each contributor will receive from the royalties generated by their music.

2. PUBLISHERS

The publisher is the person or company responsible for ensuring copyright holders receive payment for using their music. For example, a music publisher will obtain the songwriting copyright in exchange for royalty privileges. A publishing company will also issue licenses for using music they represent. They also monitor them and collect licensing fees. These publishing royalties get split between the publisher and the songwriter.

3. RECORD LABELS

Record labels market and distribute an artist’s original work. They often have the master rights to a recorded song, but not the publishing rights. Record labels generate income from mechanical and public performance royalties. They issue contracts that allow them to exploit the recordings in exchange for royalty payments over a set length of time. The artist then receives a flat rate or percentage of these record label royalties.

4. DIGITAL MUSIC DISTRIBUTOR

5. PERFORMING ARTISTS

A performing artist is anyone who performs the songwriter’s original work. Performing artists do not have publishing rights unless they are also the songwriter. Public performances of copyrighted music generate performance royalties for songwriters. These fees are often collected by a Performing Rights Organization such as ASCAP, BMI, or SESAC.

6. PERFORMING RIGHTS ORGANIZATION (PRO)

A Performing Rights Organization collects public performance royalties and distributes them to the songwriter and music publisher. These organizations also monitor performances and broadcasting of registered music played in public. The PROs in the United States include ASCAP, BMI, and SESAC. You must register with one to collect performance royalties.

7. MECHANICAL RIGHTS AGENCY

Mechanical rights agencies manage mechanical licensing rights for the music publisher. They also issue those rights to anyone reproducing and distributing copyrighted musical compositions.

These agencies often charge a set percentage of gross mechanical royalties collected for their services. In the U.S., the Harry Fox Agency is the group that issues mechanical licenses and collects royalties on behalf of the rights holder. A percentage of gross mechanical royalties collected are then paid to the publisher of the song or music composition.

8. SYNC LICENSING AGENCY

Sync licensing agencies acquire the rights from record labels and music publishers to issue licenses for syncing music with visual media. They also distribute royalties for sync licenses to whoever owns the master recording rights. Music users typically work with a music supervisor for sync licensing. A music supervisor oversees all music-related aspects of television, film, advertising, video games, and other existing or emerging visual media platforms. They also serve as middlemen between the artists and the companies or directors licensing the music.

Streaming Royalties Explained

What Are Streaming Royalties?

Streaming royalties are payments made to rights holders whenever their music is played on streaming platforms like Spotify, Apple Music, and YouTube. These royalties are calculated based on a variety of factors, including the number of streams and the revenue generated by the streaming service.

How Streaming Royalties Are Calculated

Streaming royalties are calculated using a pro-rata model. This means that the total revenue generated by the streaming service is divided by the total number of streams on the platform. Each rights holder is then paid a fraction of this revenue based on the number of streams their music received. However, the exact payout per stream varies between platforms and can be influenced by the user’s subscription type and geographic location.

Major Streaming Platforms and Their Payouts

Different streaming platforms have different payout rates. For example, Spotify generally pays between $0.003 and $0.005 per stream, while Apple Music pays around $0.007 to $0.01 per stream. YouTube, on the other hand, pays significantly less, often around $0.00069 per view. Understanding these rates can help artists gauge potential earnings from their music.

Factors Affecting Streaming Royalties

Market Share of Streaming Services

The market share of a streaming service affects the amount of royalties paid out. Services with a larger user base, like Spotify and Apple Music, generally generate more revenue, which can result in higher payouts for artists.

Subscription vs. Ad-Supported Streams

Streaming royalties also differ based on whether the streams come from paid subscribers or ad-supported users. Typically, streams from paid subscribers generate higher royalties compared to ad-supported streams, which rely on advertising revenue.

Territory and Geographic Differences

Geographic location plays a significant role in determining streaming royalties. Different countries have varying subscription fees, ad revenue, and user engagement levels, which influence the overall payout rates. For example, streams from the United States might generate higher royalties compared to streams from developing countries.

The Impact of Streaming on Traditional Royalties

Decline of Physical Sales

The rise of streaming has led to a decline in physical sales, such as CDs and vinyl records. This shift has impacted mechanical royalties, as fewer physical copies are being sold.

Changes in Performance Royalties

Streaming has also changed the landscape of performance royalties. While traditional radio and live performances still contribute, streaming services now account for a significant portion of public performance income.

How to Maximize Your Music Royalties

Registering Your Music Properly

Proper registration of your music with PROs, collection societies, and digital distribution platforms is essential for ensuring you receive all due royalties. Make sure to provide accurate information and keep your registrations up to date.

Understanding Your Rights and Contracts

Understanding your rights as a creator and the terms of your contracts is crucial for maximizing your royalties. Seek legal advice if necessary and ensure that your agreements are fair and transparent.

Utilizing Digital Distribution Services

Digital distribution services like TuneCore , DistroKid , and CD Baby can help you get your music on various streaming platforms and collect royalties. These services often provide tools and resources to track your earnings and optimize your distribution strategy.

Challenges and Controversies in Music Royalties

Transparency in Royalty Payments

One of the major challenges in the music industry is the lack of transparency in royalty payments. Artists often struggle to track their earnings and understand how royalties are calculated. Advocacy for greater transparency is ongoing to ensure fair compensation.

Disparities in Royalty Rates

There are significant disparities in royalty rates between different platforms and regions. This inconsistency can create financial instability for artists, particularly those relying heavily on streaming income.

Legal Disputes and Litigations

Legal disputes over royalty payments are common in the music industry. These disputes can arise from unclear contracts, mismanagement by publishers, or disagreements over rights ownership. Staying informed and seeking legal assistance can help artists navigate these challenges.

Future of Music Royalties

Emerging Trends in Music Consumption

Emerging trends such as the rise of short-form video platforms, social media integration, and virtual concerts are shaping the future of music royalties. These new consumption methods are creating additional revenue streams for artists.

Technological Advances and Their Impact

Technological advances like blockchain and smart contracts promise to revolutionize royalty tracking and payments. These technologies could enhance transparency, reduce disputes, and ensure quicker and more accurate payments to rights holders.

Conclusion

Understanding and navigating the world of music royalties is essential for any musician or songwriter. By knowing the different types of royalties, how they are calculated, and the impact of streaming, artists can ensure they are fairly compensated for their work. While challenges and controversies exist, staying informed and utilizing the right tools and services can help maximize your royalty income.

At ICON Collective, we teach this critical knowledge as part of our comprehensive music programs . Our students gain a deep understanding of music royalties, learning how to effectively manage and optimize their earnings. As the music industry continues to evolve, so too will the methods of royalty collection and distribution, promising a more transparent and equitable future for music creators. Through education and hands-on experience, ICON Collective prepares artists to navigate these complexities confidently, ensuring they thrive in the ever-changing music landscape.

How to Find Your Vocal Range: A Comprehensive Guide

Wed, 17 Jul 2024 15:17:00 GMT

Discovering your vocal range is an essential step for any singer, whether you are a beginner or a seasoned professional. Knowing your vocal range helps you choose appropriate songs, improve your vocal performance, and avoid straining your voice. This guide will walk you through the process of finding your vocal range accurately, offer tips for improving it, and highlight common mistakes to avoid.

Understanding Vocal Range

Definition of Vocal Range

Vocal range refers to the range of notes that a person can sing comfortably. It is typically divided into different types based on the pitch and frequency of the notes. Understanding your vocal range can help you identify the types of songs that suit your voice and prevent vocal damage.

Importance of Knowing Your Vocal Range

Knowing your vocal range is crucial for several reasons. It allows you to select songs that fit your voice, aids in vocal training and development, and ensures you don't strain your vocal cords by singing notes that are too high or too low for you. Furthermore, understanding your range can boost your confidence and performance skills.

How to Find Your Vocal Range?

There are a variety of ways to identify your singing range. From vocal range test apps and online tools to vocal lessons at ICON Collective . Finding your voice has never been easier. However, the best method to use for determining your range is with a piano. Try these steps using a keyboard or a piano instrument loaded in your DAW:

IMPORTANT: Before you start testing your vocal range, it's essential to warm up your voice . Perform gentle vocal exercises such as humming, lip trills, and scales to prepare your vocal cords and prevent strain.

How to Find Your Lowest Note

Start by finding the lowest note you can sing. Find middle C (C4) on the piano and sing a consistent vowel sound like “ah,” “ee,” or “oo.” Match your voice to the C4 note. Now, travel down the white keys and sing along to each note until you reach the lowest recognizable pitch you can sustain. Your low note will be the last note you can sing comfortably without croaking or breathing the note. Match your voice with a note on the piano and write it down.

How to Find Your Highest Note

Next, find the highest note you can sing using the same method. This time, sing upwards from middle C on a consistent vowel sound until you reach the highest note you can comfortably sing. Match your voice with a note on the piano and write it down.

NOTE : As you move up in pitch, there may be notes which become hard to sing, causing cracking or croaking. These transitions are your passaggio or “break” points. Keep rising in pitch through these parts of your range until you hit your highest note. Again, you should be able to sustain that note at a consistent, recognizable pitch.

Also, make sure you’re not straining your voice. Allow your voice to stretch with the right training and practice. Your current range may not hit that money note yet, but in time you’ll get there.

Compare Your Low and High Notes

Your vocal range also plays a vital role in classifying singing voices into voice types. Once you know your low and high notes, check them against the voice types listed below.

Tips for Accurate Measurement

Finding Your Lowest Note

Start at a comfortable pitch and gradually lower your voice until you reach the lowest note you can sing clearly. Make sure to relax your vocal cords and avoid pushing your voice too hard.

Finding Your Highest Note

Similarly, begin at a comfortable pitch and raise your voice until you hit your highest note. Ensure you use proper breathing techniques and avoid straining your voice.

Avoiding Vocal Strain

When testing your vocal range, it's essential to avoid vocal strain. Take breaks if you feel any discomfort, and make sure to stay hydrated. Straining your voice can lead to vocal damage and impede your progress.

What Are the Six Voice Types?

The vast majority of voices fall into one of six vocal categories – three voice types for females and three for males. Female types are typically soprano, mezzo-soprano, and alto. While male types are generally tenor, baritone, and bass. These vocal types also have different subcategories. However, let’s focus on the six main voice classifications for now.

A voice classification categorizes the vocal ranges and describes the specific vocal qualities unique to each range. Once you know your range, use the descriptions below to find your voice type.

1. Soprano

Soprano is the highest female vocal type. A typical soprano has a range from C3 to C6. In the lower and upper extremes, some sopranos can extend down to B3 or up to G6.

2. Mezzo-Soprano

Mezzo-Soprano is the middle-range vocal type for females. It’s also the most common female voice classification. A typical mezzo-soprano has a range from A3 to A5. In the lower and upper extremes, some mezzo-sopranos can extend down to G3 or up to C6.

3. Alto

Contralto (Alto) is the lowest female vocal type. A typical alto has a range from F3 to F5. In the lower and upper extremes, some contraltos can extend down to D3 or up to A5. However, the range of a true contralto is rare for females.

4. Tenor

Tenor is the highest male vocal type. A typical tenor has a range from C3 to C5. In the lower and upper extremes, some tenors can extend down to B2 or up to F5.

5. Baritone

Baritone is the middle-range vocal type for males. It’s also the most common male voice classification. A typical baritone has a range from G2 to G4. In the lower and upper extremes, some baritones can extend down to F2 or up to C5.

6. Bass

Bass is the lowest male vocal type. A typical bass has a range from E2-E4. In the lower and upper extremes, a bass voice can extend down to C2 or up to G4.

Unique Vocal Characteristics

Vocal range is not the only factor that determines your voice type. Finding your type also relies on vocal qualities or characteristics such as:

Tessitura – The notes you feel most comfortable singing
Vocal Timbre – Your distinctive voice quality, tone, and texture
Vocal Weight – The distinction between light and bright voices or heavy and darker voices
Passaggio or Transition Points – The point of transition from your chest register (lower notes) to your head register (higher notes)
Vocal Registers – The different sections of your range. For example, vocal fry, chest voice, mixed voice, head voice, and falsetto.
Speech Level – Your normal speaking range
Age and Experience – Your age and amount of singing experience will affect your voice type
Physical Qualities – Physical characteristics such as height and weight will also affect your voice

These vocal characteristics will help you identify and classify your voice type more precisely. Knowing your voice qualities will also define your range when your singing voice borders two types.

Why Knowing Your Vocal Range Important?

Identifying your singing range is one of the essential steps you can do as a beginning singer. Knowing your range will help determine the best songs and musical key for your voice. Understanding what notes you sing the best, and the songs that fit your voice will also help you discover your unique sound as an artist.

Ideally, sing within your natural range for the best results. Also, singing outside of your range can be dangerous to your vocal health. Vocal misuse, such as straining to hit notes outside of your range, can irritate the vocal cords and cause damage. Caution pushing your voice beyond your limits!

Once you’re comfortable performing the notes within your range, you’ll be more confident about expanding your singing voice and abilities. For example, singing with more emotion, improving the quality of the notes, improving breath control, creating more dynamics, and other techniques.

Improving Your Vocal Range

Vocal Exercises

Regular vocal exercises can help expand your range. Practice scales, arpeggios, and other vocal techniques to improve your flexibility and control.

Consistent Practice

Consistent practice is key to improving your vocal range. Set aside time each day to practice and challenge yourself with new vocal exercises.

Professional Lessons

Consider taking professional vocal lessons to get personalized guidance and feedback. A vocal coach can help you identify areas for improvement and provide tailored exercises to enhance your range.

Conclusion

Understanding and finding your vocal range is a vital part of vocal training. It helps you select appropriate songs, improve your vocal performance, and protect your voice from strain. By following the steps outlined in this guide and practicing regularly, you can accurately determine and enhance your vocal range. Remember, every singer's journey is unique, so focus on your own progress and enjoy the process of discovering your voice.

Live Electronic Music - Pro Tips To Elevate Your Stage Game

Tue, 16 Jul 2024 20:30:00 GMT

Discover essential live electronic music performance tips to elevate your stage presence and sound quality. Learn from ICON Collective experts.

Introduction

Mastering live electronic music performance is an art that requires a blend of technical skills, creativity, and stage presence. As an electronic musician, stepping onto the stage can be both exhilarating and daunting. Whether you're a seasoned performer or a newcomer, understanding the intricacies of live performance can significantly enhance your stagecraft. ICON Collective, a leading music production school, specializes in equipping artists with the skills and mindset necessary to excel professionally. In this comprehensive guide, we will explore essential live electronic music performance tips to help you shine on stage.

Understanding the Basics of Live Electronic Music Performance

Live electronic music performance differs vastly from studio production. It involves real-time manipulation of sounds, synchronization of various devices, and interaction with the audience. The dynamic nature of live performance demands not only technical proficiency but also the ability to adapt and improvise on the spot.

The Role of Technology in Live Performances

Essential Gear for Electronic Performances

The backbone of any electronic live performance is the gear. This includes synthesizers, drum machines, samplers, MIDI controllers, and audio interfaces. Each piece of equipment plays a pivotal role in shaping your sound and performance style. It's crucial to select gear that complements your music and offers reliability during live sets.

Integrating Software and Hardware

Seamless integration between software and hardware is essential for a smooth performance. Software like Ableton Live, Logic Pro, or FL Studio can be used in conjunction with hardware to trigger samples, control effects, and sequence tracks. Ensuring that your setup is cohesive and easy to navigate will prevent technical hiccups during your performance.

Setting Up Your Live Performance Rig

Choosing the Right Equipment

Selecting the right equipment for your live setup can be overwhelming given the plethora of options available. Focus on gear that not only sounds great but also integrates well with your existing setup. Modular synths, grooveboxes, and performance-oriented controllers can add versatility to your rig.

Configuring Your Setup for Seamless Performance

Proper configuration of your equipment is crucial for a glitch-free performance. This includes setting up MIDI mappings, creating templates, and organizing your sessions. Practicing with your configured setup will help you become familiar with its nuances, ensuring you can troubleshoot quickly if needed.

Creating an Engaging Setlist

Balancing Energy and Flow

Crafting a setlist that maintains audience engagement is an art. Balance high-energy tracks with more subdued moments to create a dynamic flow. Consider the arc of your performance, building up to climactic points and allowing space for audience interaction.

Incorporating Improvisation

While a well-structured setlist is important, leaving room for improvisation can make your performance more spontaneous and exciting. Use loops, live effects, and on-the-fly adjustments to add a unique touch to each performance, ensuring no two shows are the same.

Sound Design for Live Performances

Crafting Unique Sounds

Sound design is a key element of live electronic music. Creating unique sounds that distinguish your performance from recorded tracks can captivate the audience. Experiment with synthesizers, samplers, and effects to develop a sonic palette that is distinctly yours.

Utilizing Effects and Processing

Live effects and processing can transform your sound in real time. Delays, reverbs, filters, and modulation effects can be used to add depth and texture to your performance. Mastering the use of these effects will enable you to manipulate your sound creatively on stage.

Live Performance Techniques

Live Looping and Sampling

Live looping and sampling are powerful techniques that can enhance your performance. By layering loops and samples, you can create complex arrangements and build tracks organically during your set. Practice timing and layering to achieve a polished live looping setup.

Sequencing and Arrangement on the Fly

Sequencing and arranging tracks live requires quick thinking and familiarity with your equipment. Using step sequencers, clip launching, and pattern chaining allows you to modify arrangements in real time, keeping the performance dynamic and engaging.

Visuals and Stage Presence

Enhancing Your Performance with Visuals

Visual elements can significantly enhance your live show. Integrating visuals that sync with your music, such as projection mapping, LED screens, or VJ software, creates a multi-sensory experience for the audience. Ensure your visuals complement the mood and style of your music.

Developing Stage Presence and Audience Interaction

Stage presence is crucial for connecting with your audience. Confidence, energy, and interaction can elevate your performance. Engage with the crowd through eye contact, gestures, and verbal communication. The more you connect with your audience, the more memorable your performance will be.

Rehearsal Strategies

Effective Practice Techniques

Rehearsing your set is essential for a flawless performance. Break down your practice sessions into focused segments, such as transitions, cue points, and improvisation. Regular practice will build muscle memory and ensure you are prepared for any situation on stage.

Simulating Live Performance Conditions

Practicing in an environment that mimics live performance conditions can help you prepare for the real thing. Use the same setup, volume levels, and lighting conditions as you would on stage. This will help you identify and address any potential issues before your performance.

Managing Live Performance Anxiety

Mental Preparation and Mindset

Performance anxiety is common among musicians. Mental preparation techniques, such as visualization, breathing exercises, and positive affirmations, can help you manage nerves. Developing a confident mindset will allow you to perform at your best.

Techniques to Stay Calm and Focused

Staying calm and focused on stage is crucial for a successful performance. Practice mindfulness and grounding techniques to maintain composure. Remember that the audience is there to enjoy your music, and minor mistakes are often unnoticed by them.

Performance Day Essentials

Pre-Performance Checklist

Having a pre-performance checklist ensures that everything is in place for your show. This includes checking your gear, preparing backups, and confirming logistics. A thorough checklist will help you avoid last-minute stress and focus on delivering a great performance.

On-Stage Troubleshooting Tips

Technical issues can arise during live performances. Being prepared to troubleshoot on stage is essential. Familiarize yourself with common issues and their solutions, and always have a backup plan in place.

Post-Performance Review

Assessing Your Performance

After your performance, take time to review and assess how it went. Analyze what worked well and what could be improved. Recording your performance can provide valuable insights and help you refine your skills.

Gathering Feedback and Improving

Feedback from peers, mentors, and audience members can offer valuable perspectives. Use this feedback constructively to make adjustments and enhance your future performances. Continuous improvement is key to becoming a successful live performer.

ICON Collective's Role in Shaping Successful Performers

Skills and Mindset Training at ICON Collective

ICON Collective is renowned for its comprehensive training programs that blend technical skills with mindset development. The school's curriculum covers all aspects of music production and performance, ensuring that students are well-prepared for the demands of the music industry.

Success Stories from ICON Alumni

Many ICON Collective alumni have gone on to achieve significant success in the music industry. Their stories serve as inspiration and testament to the effectiveness of ICON's training programs. From chart-topping producers to acclaimed live performers, ICON graduates are making their mark globally.

Frequently Asked Questions

Conclusion

Mastering live electronic music performance requires dedication, practice, and a deep understanding of both technology and artistry. By following these tips, you can elevate your stage presence and deliver unforgettable performances. ICON Collective offers the training and support needed to succeed in the competitive music industry, helping you turn your passion for music into a professional career. Whether you're just starting or looking to refine your skills, ICON Collective can guide you on your journey to becoming a successful live performer.

How to Make an EPK That Will Get You Noticed

Thu, 11 Jul 2024 14:51:00 GMT

Learn how to make an EPK that will get you noticed by music industry professionals. This complete guide outlines the essential elements to add in an EPK (electronic press kit) for musicians with tips on essential components, best practices, and tools. You can download our free EPK template and checklist here ⇩ .

Competition in the music industry is fierce. Getting the attention of record labels, agents , promoters, venues, and various media outlets can be virtually impossible if you don’t approach it correctly.

This guide offers insider knowledge on creating a successful electronic press kit for artists in the music industry.

Introduction to EPKs

An Electronic Press Kit (EPK) is a critical tool for musicians aiming to make a mark in the industry. Essentially a digital resume, an EPK showcases an artist's music, biography, photos, videos, and contact information. As the music industry becomes increasingly digital, having a well-crafted EPK can significantly enhance an artist’s promotional efforts and opportunities.

What is an EPK?

An EPK, or Electronic Press Kit, serves as a digital portfolio for musicians. It is designed to provide music industry professionals—such as promoters, record labels, and media outlets—with all the information they need to promote an artist effectively. Unlike traditional press kits, EPKs are more versatile, accessible, and can be easily updated and shared.

Importance of EPKs in the Music Industry

In today's fast-paced digital landscape, EPKs have become indispensable . They offer a streamlined way for artists to present their work professionally. A well-structured EPK can make the difference between getting noticed and being overlooked. It allows artists to present their best material in a polished and professional manner, helping them stand out in a crowded market.

Core Components of an EPK

Creating an effective EPK involves including several key components that collectively showcase your brand and talents:

Music Links

Your music is the heart of your EPK. Include direct links to your best tracks, preferably on streaming platforms like Spotify, SoundCloud, or Bandcamp. This makes it easy for industry professionals to listen to and share your music without the need for downloads.

Artist Biography

Your biography should be concise and engaging, providing a snapshot of your musical journey. Highlight your achievements, influences, and unique style. Make sure it reflects your personality and brand.

Professional Photos

High-quality, professional photos are crucial for making a strong visual impact. Include a variety of images, such as headshots, live performance photos, and promotional images that capture your essence as an artist.

Creating an Effective EPK

Promoters and talent buyers review hundreds of potential acts every day. It’s essential to present yourself clearly and professionally. Follow the below best practices and learn what mistakes to avoid:

Best Practices

To ensure your EPK stands out, adhere to these best practices:

Simplicity and Clarity: Keep your EPK easy to navigate. Ensure that all information is clear and concise, allowing industry professionals to find what they need quickly.
Highlight Your Best Work: Feature your top tracks, best photos, and most notable achievements upfront. Make a strong first impression by putting your best foot forward.
Regular Updates: An outdated EPK can be a turn-off. Regularly update your EPK to include new releases, upcoming shows, and recent accomplishments.

Avoiding Common Mistakes

Avoid these common pitfalls when crafting your EPK:

Information Overload: Too much information can overwhelm the viewer. Stick to the essentials and make sure everything is relevant.
Poor Quality Content: Low-quality photos or poorly produced tracks can detract from your professionalism. Ensure all content is of high quality.
Outdated Information: An outdated EPK can make you seem inactive or uninterested in your career. Keep your EPK current to reflect your ongoing efforts and progress.

TIPS ON USING AI TO CREATE YOUR EPK

Artificial Intelligence (AI) has revolutionized many aspects of the creative industry, including the creation of Electronic Press Kits (EPKs). Leveraging AI can streamline the process, enhance creativity, and ensure your EPK stands out. Here are some tips on using AI to create your EPK:

Content Generation: AI tools like GPT-4 can assist in drafting artist biographies, press releases, and other written content. Provide the AI with key points about your career, achievements, and style, and it can generate a polished, engaging narrative.
Image and Design Assistance: AI-powered design tools such as Canva and Adobe Express use machine learning to suggest layouts, color schemes, and design elements that align with your brand. These tools can help create professional-looking EPKs quickly and efficiently.
Music Analysis: Platforms like Cyanite.ai use AI to analyze your music and generate metadata, such as genre classification and mood descriptors. This metadata can be included in your EPK to give industry professionals a clearer understanding of your music.
Video Editing: AI-driven video editing software such as Magisto (now owned by Vimeo) and Lumen5 can automatically create and edit promotional videos for your EPK. These tools use AI to select the best clips, apply transitions, and even add music, ensuring your videos are professional and engaging.

For artists thinking beyond the tools — how to build a brand identity that stays consistent when AI is handling your copy, visuals, and content — The Brand Algorithm covers the strategy layer that most AI guides skip.

Hosting and Sharing Your EPK

Artist Website

Hosting your EPK on your official website is ideal. Create a dedicated page that is easily accessible from your homepage. This not only centralizes your promotional materials but also drives traffic to your site.

Cloud Storage

Platforms like Dropbox, Google Drive, and WeTransfer are excellent for storing and sharing your EPK. These services allow you to organize your files neatly and provide direct download links.

Social Media

Leverage your social media platforms to share your EPK. Include a link in your bio and posts to increase its visibility. Social media is a powerful tool for reaching a broader audience and engaging with fans and industry professionals alike.

Updating and Maintaining YOUR EPK

Regular maintenance of your EPK is crucial. Schedule periodic reviews to ensure all information is up-to-date and relevant. Add new releases, achievements, and any upcoming events. This ongoing effort keeps your EPK fresh and reflective of your current status.

Tools and Platforms for EPKs

Several tools and platforms can assist you in creating and hosting a professional EPK:

Sonicbids

Sonicbids offers a comprehensive platform for creating and managing EPKs. It provides templates and tools to help you craft a professional and appealing press kit.

ReverbNation

ReverbNation is another great resource, offering career management tools alongside EPK creation. It helps you promote your music and connect with industry professionals.

Conclusion

Creating an effective EPK is an essential step for any musician aiming to succeed in the music industry. By following best practices and leveraging the right tools, you can craft a compelling EPK that showcases your talents and opens doors to new opportunities. Regularly updating and maintaining your EPK ensures it remains a powerful tool for promotion and networking.

Frequently Asked Questions

How to Get a Music Manager: Essential Steps for Success

Wed, 10 Jul 2024 16:56:00 GMT

Navigating the music industry can be a challenging endeavor for any artist. Amid the myriad responsibilities and tasks, a music manager becomes an indispensable ally. If you’re wondering how to get a music manager, this comprehensive guide is designed to provide you with the insights and strategies necessary to secure professional representation and elevate your music career.

A crucial aspect of music management is artist development, where managers guide artists through their growth and the complexities of the music industry.

Do you wan to become a music manager? Discover how to become a music manager with our comprehensive guide.

How to Get a Music Manager That Will Guide Your Career Development

Understanding the Music Industry and Music Managers

To get a music manager that will guide your career, it’s essential to understand the music industry and the role of music managers. The music industry is a complex system with many stakeholders, including artists, managers, labels, and publishers. Music managers play a crucial role in the industry, serving as a liaison between the artist and other industry professionals. They handle various aspects of an artist’s career, including business negotiations, marketing strategies, tour planning, and day-to-day operations.

Understanding the Role of a Music Manager

An artist manager plays a pivotal role in shaping an artist’s career by coordinating various teams and managing contract structures. They handle various tasks, from business negotiations to marketing strategies, allowing the artist to focus on their craft and live performances . Managers are instrumental in opening doors to new opportunities, negotiating deals, and managing day-to-day operations. The benefits of having a music manager include streamlined career development, increased exposure, and strategic growth within the industry.

Assessing Your Readiness

Before seeking a music manager, it’s crucial to assess whether you’re ready for one. During the early stages of an artist's career, having a music manager can be vital due to the transitional nature of this phase. Consider if you have a solid foundation—consistent music releases, an established fanbase, and a clear artist identity. Being prepared enhances your attractiveness to potential managers and demonstrates your commitment and professionalism.

Crafting Your Unique Artist Identity and Artist Development

Defining your brand is a critical step in attracting a music manager. Artist development plays a crucial role in crafting a unique artist identity and assembling an effective team. Your unique artist identity sets you apart in the crowded music landscape. Develop a compelling narrative about who you are as an artist, what your music represents, and what your goals are. A strong online presence, including an engaging website and active social media profiles, is essential for showcasing your brand.

Building a Professional Network

Networking is a powerful tool in the music industry. Connect with industry professionals, attend music events, and participate in conferences. Building relationships with other artists, producers, and industry insiders can lead to valuable introductions to potential managers.

How to Get Noticed by a Music Manager

1. Create an Impressive EPK (Electronic Press Kit)

An Electronic Press Kit (EPK) is your professional resume. It should include your biography, music samples, press photos, videos, and notable achievements. In the realm of artist management, a well-crafted EPK provides managers with a comprehensive view of your career and potential, increasing your chances of making a strong impression.

2. Release Quality Music Consistently

Regular music releases are vital for maintaining and growing your audience. Consistency in your music output demonstrates your dedication and keeps your fanbase engaged. Effective promotion strategies, such as leveraging social media and engaging with music blogs, are essential for maximizing the reach of your releases.

3. Gain a Loyal Fanbase

A loyal and engaged fanbase (even a small one) is a significant asset when seeking a music manager. Engage with your audience through social media, live performances, and personalized interactions. Strategies such as exclusive content, fan clubs, and interactive experiences can help grow and maintain your fanbase.

4. Leverage Social Media

Social media platforms are indispensable tools for musicians. Each platform offers unique ways to connect with fans and promote your music. Understanding how to utilize social media platforms effectively can significantly enhance your visibility and attract potential managers.

5. Showcase Your Live Performances

Live performances are a critical aspect of a music career. For successful artists, live performances can significantly influence a manager's decision, as they showcase the artist's potential and ability to engage an audience. They provide exposure, build your fanbase, and demonstrate your performance skills to potential managers. Focus on booking regular gigs, participating in music festivals, and honing your live performance abilities .

6. Collaborate with Other Artists

Collaboration can open new avenues for exposure and growth. Working with other artists can introduce you to their fanbases and networks. Seek out collaboration opportunities that align with your music style and brand, and ensure they are mutually beneficial.

7. Creating a Professional Online Presence

In today’s digital age, having a professional online presence is crucial for artists. A well-designed website and active social media profiles are essential for showcasing your brand and connecting with industry professionals. Your online presence should include your biography, music samples, press photos, videos, and notable achievements. This will provide managers with a comprehensive view of your career and potential.

Legal Considerations

Protecting your music rights is crucial. Record labels play a significant role in supporting artists and navigating career development. Consider legal aspects such as copyright, trademarks, and performance rights. Hiring a lawyer experienced in the music industry can provide valuable guidance and ensure your rights are safeguarded. You can learn the basics of this in our Music Business and Music Production courses.

Tips on Reaching Out and Engaging With Potential Managers

When reaching out to potential managers, craft a compelling email that highlights your achievements, music style, and career goals. Include your EPK, links to your music, and reasons why you believe a partnership would be mutually beneficial. A well-thought-out pitch increases your chances of catching a manager’s interest.

Researching Music Management Companies

When searching for a music manager, it’s essential to research music management companies. Look for companies that have a track record of success in your genre and have experience working with artists at your level. Check their client roster and read reviews from other artists. You can also attend music industry events and conferences to network with managers and learn more about their companies.

Additionally, you can use online directories such as the Music Managers Forum (MMF) and the Unsigned Guide to find managers who specialize in your genre. These directories can provide valuable information about managers, including their experience, client roster, and contact information.

When reaching out to potential managers, make sure to craft a compelling email that highlights your achievements, music style, and career goals. Include your EPK, links to your music, and reasons why you believe a partnership would be mutually beneficial. A well-thought-out pitch increases your chances of catching a manager’s interest.

Remember to take your time when choosing a manager, and never sign a contract until you’ve had it checked by a legal expert. With the right manager, you can navigate the complexities of the music industry and achieve long-term success.

Utilizing Music Industry Platforms and Networks

Several online platforms are designed to connect artists with industry professionals, including managers. Sites like ReverbNation, Sonicbids, and Music Gateway offer opportunities to showcase your music and connect with potential managers. Use these platforms to expand your reach and network.

Understanding Music Contracts

Familiarize yourself with the basics of music contracts. Understanding common terms and clauses helps you navigate agreements with managers and other industry professionals. Knowledge of contracts empowers you to make informed decisions and protect your interests.

Preparing for Meetings with Managers

When meeting potential managers, come prepared with your EPK, a list of your achievements, and a clear vision for your career. Asking insightful questions about their experience, client roster, and management style helps you determine if they are the right fit for you.

Negotiating Management Deals

Negotiation is a key part of securing a management deal. The financial aspects of talent management, including commission rates and the complexity of management structures, play a crucial role in these negotiations. Focus on important points such as commission rates, contract duration, and the scope of services. Be aware of red flags, such as unreasonable demands or lack of transparency, and ensure the terms are fair and mutually beneficial.

Maintaining a Good Relationship with Your Manager

A positive relationship with your manager is essential for long-term success. Effective communication, setting clear expectations, and addressing issues promptly help maintain a healthy partnership. Building trust and mutual respect ensures a productive and collaborative relationship.

VIDEO: Krewella's manager Jake Udell sits with Icon's Music Business instructor Nik Cherwink to discuss the group's meteoric rise to success and what it takes to make it in the music industry.

Conclusion

Securing a music manager is a significant milestone in an artist’s career. A music manager plays a crucial role in overseeing and guiding the development of an artist's career, including areas such as crisis management, financial planning, and strategic growth. By understanding the role of a manager, assessing your readiness, building a solid foundation, and effectively networking, you can increase your chances of attracting the right professional to guide your journey. With dedication, strategic planning, and the right support, you can navigate the complexities of the music industry and achieve long-term success.

Frequently Asked Questions

Women in Electronic and Pop Music: Breaking Barriers

Tue, 09 Jul 2024 18:52:37 GMT

In the dynamic and ever-evolving realms of electronic and pop music, women have continually pushed boundaries, defied stereotypes, and reshaped the musical landscape. Despite facing numerous challenges, their relentless spirit and innovative contributions have paved the way for future generations of female artists. This article delves into the inspiring stories of women in electronic and pop music, highlighting their journey of breaking barriers and achieving remarkable success.

Women in Electronic and Pop Music

The world of electronic and pop music has traditionally been male-dominated, but women have steadily carved out a significant presence. Their influence spans across various roles, from producers and DJs to singers and songwriters. This section explores the history, challenges, and triumphs of women in these genres.

A Historical Perspective

Women have been an integral part of the music industry since its inception. However, their contributions in electronic and pop music have often been overshadowed by their male counterparts. Icons like Delia Derbyshire , who played a crucial role in developing electronic music in the 1960s, set the stage for future generations. Derbyshire's pioneering work with the BBC Radiophonic Workshop, particularly her composition of the "Doctor Who" theme, demonstrated the potential of electronic music and inspired countless women to explore this genre.

Breaking Stereotypes in Electronic Music

In electronic music, women like Wendy Carlos (the first trans women to win a Grammy) have made groundbreaking contributions. Carlos's 1968 album "Switched-On Bach" was one of the first classical music albums performed on a synthesizer, earning her three Grammy Awards and solidifying her place in music history. Today, artists like Moore Kismet and SOPHIE continue to challenge norms, blending genres and pushing the boundaries of what electronic music can be.

The Role of Female DJs and Producers

The role of DJs and producers is crucial in electronic music, yet women in these positions often face significant hurdles. Despite this, female DJs like Nina Kraviz and The Black Madonna have risen to prominence, earning respect and recognition for their innovative sounds and performances. These women have not only excelled in their craft but have also become powerful advocates for gender equality in the music industry.

Impact of Social Media and Technology

The rise of social media and advancements in technology have democratized the music industry, allowing more women to showcase their talents. Platforms like SoundCloud and YouTube have provided female artists with the opportunity to reach global audiences without traditional gatekeepers. This has led to a surge in female representation in electronic and pop music, with artists like Billie Eilish leveraging these platforms to achieve meteoric success.

Women in Pop Music: Shaping the Mainstream

Pop music, known for its widespread appeal, has seen a significant influence from female artists. Legends like Madonna and Whitney Houston paved the way, using their platforms to address social issues and empower women. Today's pop landscape continues to be shaped by influential female artists who are unafraid to challenge the status quo.

Empowering Messages and Themes

Female pop artists often use their music to convey powerful messages of empowerment and self-expression. Artists like Beyoncé and Taylor Swift have utilized their music to address issues such as feminism, self-worth, and resilience. Their lyrics resonate with audiences worldwide, inspiring listeners to embrace their individuality and stand up against societal norms.

Collaborations and Cross-Genre Innovations

Collaborations between female artists and those from other genres have resulted in innovative and genre-blurring music. For example, Lady Gaga's collaborations with electronic producers have led to chart-topping hits that fuse pop and electronic elements seamlessly. These collaborations not only highlight the versatility of female artists but also expand the boundaries of pop music.

Challenges and Triumphs

Despite their successes, women in electronic and pop music continue to face numerous challenges. Issues such as gender bias, underrepresentation, and the pressure to conform to industry standards persist. However, the triumphs of female artists in overcoming these obstacles are a testament to their resilience and talent.

Gender Bias and Industry Standards

The music industry has long been criticized for its gender bias, with female artists often facing discrimination and unequal opportunities. Women in electronic and pop music have had to navigate a landscape that frequently prioritizes male artists. However, through sheer determination and talent, many have managed to break through these barriers and achieve recognition.

Underrepresentation in Leadership Roles

While female artists have made significant strides, there is still a notable lack of representation in leadership roles within the music industry. Women are underrepresented in executive positions, leading to a lack of female perspectives in decision-making processes. This disparity highlights the need for greater inclusivity and diversity at all levels of the music industry.

The Power of Advocacy and Community

Advocacy and community support have played a crucial role in advancing the cause of women in electronic and pop music. Organizations like SheSaid.So and Women in Music provide networks and resources that empower female artists and industry professionals. These communities foster collaboration, mentorship, and a collective effort to create a more equitable music industry.

Celebrating Success Stories

Amidst the challenges, the success stories of women in electronic and pop music are truly inspiring. From winning prestigious awards to headlining major festivals, female artists have made indelible marks on the music world. Their achievements serve as a beacon of hope and motivation for aspiring female musicians.

INNOVATIVE FEMALE ARTISTS LEADING THE WAY

Innovative female artists continue to redefine electronic and pop music. Artists like FKA twigs and Halsey are known for their genre-defying music and bold artistic visions. By pushing creative boundaries, these women are not only contributing to the evolution of music but also inspiring a new generation of female musicians.

Educational Opportunities and Mentorship

Education and mentorship are critical in nurturing the talents of aspiring female musicians. Institutions like ICON Collective offer comprehensive programs that equip students with the skills and knowledge needed to succeed in the music industry. By providing a supportive and inclusive learning environment, these institutions play a vital role in fostering the next generation of female music leaders.

The Future of Women in Music

The future of women in electronic and pop music is bright, with more opportunities for female artists to shine than ever before. As societal attitudes continue to shift towards greater gender equality, the music industry is also evolving. This section explores the potential for further advancements and the exciting possibilities that lie ahead for women in music.

Embracing Diversity and Inclusion

Embracing diversity and inclusion is crucial for the continued growth of the music industry. By actively promoting and supporting female artists, the industry can benefit from a wider range of perspectives and creative ideas. This inclusivity not only enriches the music itself but also sets a positive example for other industries to follow.

Technological Advancements and New Platforms

Technological advancements and new platforms will continue to play a pivotal role in the future of music. Virtual reality concerts, AI-driven music production, and blockchain technology are just a few examples of innovations that could shape the music landscape. Female artists who leverage these technologies will be at the forefront of the industry's evolution.

Inspiring the Next Generation

Inspiring the next generation of female musicians is essential for sustaining the momentum of progress. By highlighting the achievements of women in electronic and pop music, young girls and aspiring artists can see the possibilities that lie ahead. Mentorship programs, workshops, and initiatives aimed at empowering young female musicians will be instrumental in fostering future talent.

Frequently Asked Questions

Conclusion

The journey of women in electronic and pop music is a testament to their resilience, creativity, and unwavering spirit. Despite facing numerous challenges, they have continually broken barriers, redefined genres, and inspired future generations. As we look to the future, it is essential to continue supporting and celebrating the contributions of women in music, ensuring a more inclusive and vibrant industry for all.

Music Theory for Electronic and Pop Musicians

Wed, 03 Jul 2024 19:56:17 GMT

Discover essential music theory for electronic and pop musicians to elevate your tracks. Unlock your creative potential with ICON Collective's guide.

Introduction to Music Theory

Music theory often seems like a daunting, archaic discipline to modern musicians, especially those immersed in the realms of electronic and pop music. However, understanding the fundamental principles of music theory is essential for any artist aspiring to elevate their craft. At ICON Collective, we believe that a solid grasp of music theory can unleash a musician's full creative potential, providing them with the tools needed to innovate and create impactful music.

Understanding the Basics of Music Theory

To embark on your musical journey, it is crucial to start with the basics . Music theory encompasses the study of how music works, focusing on elements such as melody, harmony, rhythm, and form. These elements serve as the building blocks of music, allowing musicians to compose, arrange, and understand the structure of their compositions more effectively.

The Importance of Scales in Pop and Electronic Music

Scales are the foundation of melody and harmony. In pop and electronic music, major and minor scales are predominant. These scales form the basis of most musical pieces, providing a set of notes from which melodies and chords are derived. Understanding scales allows musicians to create cohesive and harmonious tracks, making their music more appealing to listeners.

Key Signatures and Their Role in Songwriting

Key signatures indicate the tonal center of a piece of music, helping musicians understand which notes and chords will sound consonant. In songwriting, choosing the right key signature is crucial as it sets the emotional tone of the track. For instance, a song in a major key often sounds happy and uplifting, while a song in a minor key may convey sadness or introspection.

Chord Progressions: Building the Foundation of Your Track

Chord progressions are sequences of chords that provide the harmonic backdrop for a melody. They are essential in creating the mood and direction of a song. Popular chord progressions in electronic and pop music, such as the I-IV-V-I progression, are easy to learn and implement, providing a strong foundation for songwriting.

The Role of Rhythm and Timing in Electronic Music

Rhythm and timing are pivotal in electronic music, where beat and groove are at the forefront. Understanding rhythmic patterns and time signatures helps musicians create compelling beats that drive their tracks forward. Syncopation and varied rhythms can add excitement and complexity, keeping listeners engaged.

Harmony: Creating Depth and Texture

Harmony involves the combination of different musical notes played or sung simultaneously. In electronic and pop music, harmony adds depth and texture, enhancing the overall sound. Musicians can experiment with close and open harmonies, as well as using synthesizers to layer harmonic sounds, creating rich sonic landscapes.

Melody: Crafting Memorable Hooks

A strong melody is often what makes a song memorable. In pop music, catchy hooks are essential. Melodies should be simple yet impactful , sticking in the listener's mind long after the song has ended. Understanding how to construct melodies using scales and intervals is crucial for any songwriter.

Counterpoint: Adding Complexity to Your Compositions

Counterpoint involves the interaction of two or more melodic lines. While it is more commonly associated with classical music, counterpoint can add a layer of complexity to electronic and pop music as well. By weaving multiple melodies together, musicians can create intricate and engaging compositions.

Understanding Modes and Their Emotional Impact

Modes are variations of scales that provide different tonalities and emotional impacts. For example, the Dorian mode has a jazzy feel, while the Phrygian mode has an exotic sound. Incorporating modes into compositions allows musicians to explore new sonic territories and evoke specific emotions in their music.

The Circle of Fifths: A Tool for Mastery

The Circle of Fifths is a visual representation of the relationships between different key signatures. It is a valuable tool for musicians, aiding in the understanding of key changes and modulation. By mastering the Circle of Fifths, musicians can easily transition between keys, adding variety and sophistication to their music.

Dynamics and Expression in Pop Music

Dynamics refer to the volume and intensity of music. In pop music, dynamics play a crucial role in creating emotional arcs within a song. By varying dynamics, musicians can build tension, highlight climactic moments, and create a more engaging listening experience.

Synthesizers and Sound Design: Applying Music Theory

Synthesizers are a staple in electronic music. Understanding music theory helps musicians design sounds that are harmonically rich and melodically interesting. By applying principles of harmony and melody, musicians can create unique and captivating sounds that define their style.

Using Arpeggios in Electronic Music

Arpeggios are broken chords played in sequence rather than simultaneously. In electronic music, arpeggios are often used to create rhythmic and melodic interest. They can add movement and energy to a track, making it more dynamic and engaging.

The Role of Lyrics in Pop Music: Marrying Words and Melody

Lyrics are a vital component of pop music, often telling a story or conveying emotions. Marrying lyrics with melody requires an understanding of prosody, the natural rhythm, and flow of language. Effective lyrics complement the melody, enhancing the overall impact of the song.

Arrangement and Structure: Keeping the Listener Engaged

The arrangement and structure of a song determine how it unfolds over time. Common structures in pop music, such as verse-chorus-verse, provide a familiar framework that keeps listeners engaged. Understanding how to arrange a song effectively is crucial for maintaining interest and delivering a satisfying musical experience.

Mixing and Production: Blending Theory with Technology

Mixing and production are where music theory meets technology. A solid understanding of music theory aids in making informed decisions during the mixing process, ensuring that each element of the track complements the others harmoniously. Balancing frequencies, dynamics, and spatial elements results in a polished and professional sound.

Music Theory in Live Performance: Tips for DJs and Performers

For DJs and live performers , music theory provides the knowledge to craft seamless sets and engaging performances. Understanding key signatures and tempo helps in selecting tracks that blend well together. Additionally, knowledge of rhythm and dynamics aids in creating an exciting live experience.

The Evolution of Music Theory in Modern Pop and Electronic Genres

Music theory has evolved alongside modern pop and electronic genres. Innovations in technology and production techniques continue to push the boundaries of what is possible, while the fundamental principles of music theory remain relevant. Embracing both tradition and innovation allows musicians to create groundbreaking music.

Icon Collective's Approach to Teaching Music Theory

At ICON Collective, we integrate music theory into our comprehensive curriculum, ensuring that students gain a deep understanding of its principles. Our approach is hands-on, focusing on practical applications that empower students to use music theory creatively in their own compositions and productions.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the most important aspect of music theory for beginners to learn? For beginners, understanding scales and basic chord progressions is crucial as they form the foundation of most musical compositions.
How can I make my electronic music more harmonically interesting? Experimenting with different scales, modes, and chord progressions can add harmonic interest to your music. Additionally, layering harmonies and using counterpoint can create rich, textured sounds.
Why are dynamics important in pop music? Dynamics add emotional depth and variation to a song, making it more engaging for listeners. They help to highlight important moments and create a more compelling musical experience.
How does understanding music theory help with songwriting? Music theory provides the tools to craft cohesive and harmonious songs. It helps songwriters understand how melodies, harmonies, and rhythms work together, enabling them to create more polished and impactful music.
What is the Circle of Fifths and how is it used? The Circle of Fifths is a visual tool that shows the relationships between different key signatures. It is used to understand key changes, modulations, and to find harmonically related keys, aiding in the composition and arrangement process.
Can I still be creative if I follow music theory rules? Absolutely! Music theory is not about restricting creativity but about providing a framework to understand and manipulate musical elements more effectively. It empowers musicians to make informed creative choices and innovate within a structured context.

Conclusion: Embracing Music Theory for Creative Freedom

Music theory is a powerful tool for electronic and pop musicians, providing a solid foundation to build upon. By understanding the principles of scales, harmony, rhythm, and structure, musicians can unlock their full creative potential, crafting songs that resonate with listeners. At ICON Collective, we are dedicated to helping musicians master music theory and use it to create groundbreaking music. Embrace music theory, and let it be the key to your artistic freedom.

Mental Health and Creativity: Balancing the Two as an Artist

Wed, 03 Jul 2024 18:52:49 GMT

Being an artist often means navigating the delicate balance between mental health and creativity. The pressures of constant creation, public scrutiny, and the uncertainty of the industry can take a toll on an artist's mental well-being. Here are some strategies to help maintain that balance:

Understanding the Connection

Creativity and mental health are deeply intertwined. Many artists draw from their personal experiences and emotions, which can be both therapeutic and taxing. Recognizing this connection is the first step in managing your mental health.

Establish a Routine

Creating a daily routine can provide structure and stability. Set specific times for creative work, breaks, exercise, and relaxation. This helps to create a balance between work and personal time, reducing stress.

Practice Mindfulness and Meditation

Mindfulness practices, such as meditation, can help artists manage stress and stay present. Techniques like deep breathing, progressive muscle relaxation, and mindfulness exercises can alleviate anxiety and improve focus.

Seek Professional Help

Therapists and counselors who specialize in working with artists can provide valuable support. Don't hesitate to seek professional help if you're feeling overwhelmed, anxious, or depressed. Therapy can offer coping strategies and a safe space to discuss your challenges.

Connect with a Community

Building a supportive network of fellow artists can provide a sense of belonging and understanding. Sharing experiences, challenges, and successes with others who understand your journey can be incredibly comforting and motivating.

Set Realistic Goals

Setting achievable goals can prevent burnout and keep you motivated. Break down larger projects into smaller, manageable tasks. Celebrate your progress, no matter how small, to maintain a positive outlook.

Take Breaks

Regular breaks are essential to avoid creative fatigue. Step away from your work to recharge, whether it’s through a walk, listening to music, or spending time with loved ones. Allowing yourself downtime can lead to fresh perspectives and renewed creativity.

Maintain Physical Health

Physical health significantly impacts mental well-being. Regular exercise, a balanced diet, and sufficient sleep are crucial. Activities like yoga or dancing can also combine physical exercise with creative expression.

Limit Social Media

While social media can be a valuable tool for artists, it can also contribute to stress and anxiety. Limit your time on social media, curate your feed to include positive and inspiring content, and be mindful of how it affects your mood.

Embrace Failure

Failure is a natural part of the creative process. Embrace it as an opportunity to learn and grow. Remember, every artist experiences setbacks. What matters is how you respond to them and use them to fuel your next creation.

Conclusion

Balancing mental health and creativity as an artist requires conscious effort and self-awareness. By implementing these strategies, you can create a sustainable practice that nurtures both your art and your well-being. Remember, your mental health is as important as your creative output. Taking care of yourself will ultimately lead to more authentic and inspired work.

More Resources FROM ICON COLLECTIVE:

Networking in the Music Industry: Tips for Building Connections

Wed, 03 Jul 2024 18:35:43 GMT

In the ever-evolving landscape of the music industry, networking stands as a cornerstone of success. Building meaningful connections can open doors to opportunities, foster collaborations, and help artists navigate their careers more effectively. At ICON Collective, we understand the pivotal role networking plays in the music industry and provide our students with unparalleled opportunities to connect with industry experts and fellow artists. In this article, we'll explore why networking is crucial and share practical tips on how to network effectively in the music industry.

Why Networking Matters in the Music Industry

Opportunities for Collaboration: Networking allows artists to meet potential collaborators, from fellow musicians to producers and songwriters. These relationships can lead to creative partnerships that elevate your music and expand your audience.

Access to Industry Knowledge: Connecting with industry professionals can provide valuable insights into the business side of music. Learning from the experiences of others can help you avoid common pitfalls and navigate the complexities of the industry.

Building a Support System: The music industry can be challenging, and having a network of supportive peers can make a significant difference. Whether it's sharing advice, providing feedback, or offering emotional support, your network can be a vital resource.

Increasing Visibility: Networking helps you get your name out there. The more people you know, the more likely you are to be recommended for gigs, collaborations, and other opportunities.

Tips for Effective Networking in the Music Industry

Attend Industry Events: Music conferences, workshops, and festivals are prime opportunities to meet industry professionals and fellow artists. Be open to conversations and ready to introduce yourself and your work. For instance, events like SXSW , NAMM and ICON Rising are excellent places to start.

Utilize Social Media: Platforms like LinkedIn, Instagram, and Twitter are powerful tools for networking. Engage with industry leaders by commenting on their posts, sharing their content, and sending thoughtful direct messages. Apps like Hootsuite can help you manage your social media presence effectively.

Join Music Organizations and Communities: Becoming a member of music organizations or online communities can provide access to exclusive networking events and resources. These groups often host meetups, webinars, and forums where you can connect with like-minded individuals. Organizations such as The Recording Academy and ASCAP offer great networking opportunities.

Follow Up: After meeting someone, whether in person or online, follow up with a personalized message. Express your appreciation for the conversation and suggest staying in touch.

Be Genuine and Authentic: Authenticity goes a long way in building lasting relationships. Be yourself and show genuine interest in others' work and experiences.

Collaborate on Projects: Working on collaborative projects is one of the best ways to strengthen your network. Whether it's co-writing a song or producing a track together, these experiences build trust and rapport.

Stay Informed and Engaged: Keep up with industry trends and news. Being knowledgeable about the latest developments in the music industry can be a great conversation starter and show that you're serious about your career. Websites like Billboard and Pitchfork are excellent sources of industry news.

Offer Value: Think about how you can help others in your network. Whether it's sharing useful information, providing support, or making introductions, offering value builds goodwill and strengthens your relationships.

Networking at ICON Collective

At ICON Collective, we believe that networking is not just about meeting people, but about building a community. Our programs are designed to foster connections among students, alumni, and industry professionals. Here's how ICON Collective provides an exceptional networking environment:

Industry-Connected Faculty: Our instructors are seasoned professionals with extensive industry experience. They offer not only education but also connections to the industry.

Guest Speakers and Workshops: ICON Collective regularly hosts guest speakers and workshops with top industry professionals. These events provide students with direct access to influential figures in the music world.

Collaborative Projects: Our curriculum emphasizes collaboration. Students work together on projects, building relationships and learning how to work effectively with others.

Alumni Network: Our alumni network is a vibrant community of successful artists and industry professionals. Staying connected with our alumni can lead to mentorship opportunities and career advancements.

Exclusive Events: ICON Collective organizes exclusive events such as showcases, listening sessions, and networking mixers, where students can meet industry insiders and fellow creatives.

Networking is a vital component of success in the music industry, and at ICON Collective, we are committed to providing the tools and opportunities needed to build a robust and supportive network. By leveraging the tips shared in this article and taking advantage of the unique networking opportunities at ICON Collective, you'll be well on your way to forging meaningful connections that can propel your music career forward.

Famous Electronic Music Artists and Their Signature Styles

Wed, 19 Jun 2024 21:15:02 GMT

Explore the unique sounds and signature styles of famous electronic music artists who have shaped the genre with their innovative approaches and timeless tracks.

Electronic music has evolved into a multifaceted genre with a rich tapestry of sounds and styles, each artist contributing their unique touch. From the pulsing beats of techno to the atmospheric vibes of ambient music, electronic music artists have consistently pushed the boundaries of what is possible. Here, we delve into some of the most famous electronic music artists and their signature styles that have left an indelible mark on the industry.

Introduction to Electronic Music

Electronic music, characterized by its use of electronic devices and technology in music production, has a diverse history that spans decades. It includes subgenres such as house, techno, trance, dubstep, and more, each with its own distinct sound and culture. The genre's rise can be attributed to the innovative artists who have continually experimented with new sounds and production techniques.

The Pioneers of Electronic Music

Kraftwerk : The Godfathers of Electronic Music

Kraftwerk, a German band formed in the early 1970s, is often credited with pioneering electronic music. Their minimalist, robotic sound and use of synthesizers laid the groundwork for many subgenres. Tracks like "Autobahn" and "The Robots" are seminal works that have influenced countless artists across various genres.

Jean-Michel Jarre : The Architect of Electronic Soundscapes

Jean-Michel Jarre's contribution to electronic music is monumental. His album "Oxygène" is a masterpiece that showcased the potential of electronic music to create vast, immersive soundscapes. Jarre's live performances, often featuring laser shows and grandiose setups, further cement his reputation as a pioneer.

Giorgio Moroder : The Innovator of Disco and Synthpop

Giorgio Moroder's influence on electronic music is profound, particularly in the realms of disco and synthpop. His work with Donna Summer, including the iconic "I Feel Love," introduced a new level of electronic production to mainstream music. Moroder's signature use of synthesizers and sequencers has inspired many modern electronic musicians.

The Modern Icons of Electronic Music

Daft Punk : The Masters of French House

Daft Punk, the French duo known for their helmets and enigmatic personas, revolutionized house music with their unique sound. Albums like "Homework" and "Discovery" feature a blend of funky basslines, robotic vocals, and catchy hooks. Their signature style is a fusion of house, funk, and disco, making their tracks instantly recognizable.

Deadmau5 : The King of Progressive House

Joel Zimmerman, better known as Deadmau5, is a prominent figure in the progressive house scene. Known for his iconic mouse helmet, Deadmau5's music features complex melodies, intricate rhythms, and a blend of progressive and electro house elements. Tracks like "Strobe" and "Ghosts 'n' Stuff" are emblematic of his sophisticated production style.

Skrillex : The Dubstep Dynamo

Skrillex, born Sonny Moore, is synonymous with the explosive rise of dubstep in the early 2010s. His aggressive, bass-heavy tracks with signature wobbles and drops redefined the genre. Songs like "Scary Monsters and Nice Sprites" showcase his ability to blend dubstep with elements of electro and glitch.

The Innovators of Experimental Electronic Music

Aphex Twin : The Eccentric Genius

Richard D. James, known as Aphex Twin, is a legend in the world of experimental electronic music. His work spans various styles, from ambient to acid techno, characterized by complex rhythms, innovative sound design, and often cryptic melodies. Albums like "Selected Ambient Works 85-92" are revered for their groundbreaking approach to electronic composition.

Flying Lotus : The Fusion Maestro

Flying Lotus, or Steven Ellison, has carved a niche with his unique blend of electronic, hip-hop, and jazz. His intricate beats, lush textures, and experimental sounds create a distinct musical identity. Albums like "Cosmogramma" are a testament to his ability to fuse different genres into a cohesive sonic experience.

The Titans of Techno and House

Carl Cox : The Techno Titan

Carl Cox is a powerhouse in the techno scene, known for his high-energy DJ sets and charismatic presence. His style incorporates elements of techno, house, and acid, creating an infectious groove that keeps dance floors packed. Cox's long-standing residency at Space Ibiza and his global tours have solidified his status as a techno legend.

Nina Kraviz : The Siberian Sensation

Nina Kraviz, a DJ and producer from Siberia, has gained acclaim for her hypnotic techno and house tracks. Her music often features minimalistic beats, deep basslines, and her own haunting vocals. Kraviz's ability to create an immersive atmosphere in her sets has made her a standout figure in the electronic music world.

The Visionaries of Ambient and Downtempo

Brian Eno : The Ambient Architect

Brian Eno, a pioneer of ambient music, has a profound impact on the genre. His approach to creating ambient soundscapes involves layering textures and using unconventional sound sources. Albums like "Music for Airports" are quintessential examples of his ability to craft serene, meditative music that transcends traditional song structures.

Bonobo : The Downtempo Virtuoso

Simon Green, known as Bonobo, is celebrated for his lush, downtempo productions. His music blends organic and electronic elements, creating rich, atmospheric tracks. Albums like "Black Sands" and "Migration" showcase his talent for weaving intricate melodies with subtle beats, resulting in a captivating listening experience.

Influence of Famous Electronic Music Artists

The influence of these artists extends beyond their own music. They have inspired new generations of producers, shaped the evolution of electronic music genres, and left a lasting legacy. Their innovative techniques, from the use of synthesizers and drum machines to the incorporation of live elements in electronic performances, have pushed the boundaries of what electronic music can achieve.

Signature Styles and Their Impact on Modern Music

Each of these artists has a signature style that sets them apart. For example, Kraftwerk's robotic sounds paved the way for the development of techno and electro. Jean-Michel Jarre's epic soundscapes influenced ambient and new-age music. Giorgio Moroder's disco productions helped shape modern pop and dance music. Understanding these signature styles provides insight into the evolution of electronic music and its current trends.

The Evolution of Electronic Music Production

The technology behind electronic music production has advanced significantly since the early days of Kraftwerk and Jean-Michel Jarre. Modern producers have access to an array of digital audio workstations (DAWs), software synthesizers, and effects plugins that enable them to create complex sounds with ease. This technological evolution has democratized music production, allowing more artists to experiment and innovate.

Conclusion

The world of electronic music is vast and continually evolving, driven by the creativity and innovation of its artists. From the pioneers like Kraftwerk and Jean-Michel Jarre to modern icons like Daft Punk and Skrillex, each artist brings a unique signature style that contributes to the rich tapestry of the genre. Their influence is evident in the diverse subgenres of electronic music today, making it an exciting field for both listeners and aspiring musicians.

Discover the Best Online Music Production Workshops and Tools

Tue, 18 Jun 2024 18:01:48 GMT

In the ever-evolving world of music production, staying ahead of the curve requires continuous learning and access to the right tools. Whether you're a novice looking to dip your toes into the art of music production or an experienced producer seeking to hone your skills, online music production workshops and tools offer a convenient and effective way to elevate your craft. This article delves into some of the best online music production workshops, with a special focus on ICON Collective’s offerings, as well as essential tools that every music producer should have in their arsenal.

Introduction to Online Music Production

The digital age has revolutionized the way we create, share, and consume music. Online music production workshops and tools have made it easier than ever for aspiring musicians and producers to learn the ropes and advance their skills. These resources offer flexibility, affordability, and access to industry experts, making them an invaluable asset for anyone serious about music production.

The Importance of Music Production Workshops

Workshops provide structured learning experiences that can significantly speed up the learning process. They offer hands-on practice, feedback from experienced professionals, and opportunities to collaborate with peers. Online workshops, in particular, eliminate geographical barriers, allowing participants to learn from the best, regardless of their location.

ICON Collective: A Premier Destination for Music Production Education

Free ICON Collective Workshop

ICON Collective offers a free workshop that serves as an excellent introduction to music production. This workshop is designed to provide a taste of what ICON Collective’s full programs have to offer, covering essential concepts and techniques that every aspiring music producer should know. It's an ideal starting point for those who are new to the field or considering a more in-depth study.

ICON Collective Online Music Production Intro Course

For those looking to take their education a step further, ICON Collective’s Online Music Production Intro Course is a comprehensive program that covers the fundamentals of music production. This course is perfect for beginners and includes lessons on music theory, digital audio workstations (DAWs), sound design, and more. It’s a structured program that provides a solid foundation in music production.

ICON Collective Online Music Production Program

For a more advanced and immersive experience, the ICON Collective Online Music Production Program offers an in-depth curriculum designed to turn students into professional music producers. This program covers a wide range of topics, from advanced sound design and mixing techniques to music business and branding. Students receive personalized feedback and mentorship from industry professionals, making it one of the most comprehensive online music production programs available.

Essential Tools for Music Production

Digital Audio Workstations (DAWs)

A DAW is the centerpiece of any music production setup. It’s the software that allows you to record, edit, and mix your music. Popular DAWs include Ableton Live, Logic Pro X, and FL Studio. Each DAW has its strengths, and the choice often comes down to personal preference and workflow.

Virtual Instruments and Plugins

Virtual instruments and plugins are essential for creating and shaping sounds. They can emulate traditional instruments, synthesizers, and offer various effects. Some must-have plugins include Serum, Omnisphere, and Native Instruments’ Kontakt. These tools expand your sonic palette and allow for endless creative possibilities.

Audio Interfaces

An audio interface is a hardware device that connects your computer to your other music gear, such as microphones and instruments. It converts analog signals into digital audio that your DAW can process. Quality interfaces like the Focusrite Scarlett series or the Universal Audio Apollo series are crucial for achieving professional-grade recordings.

Studio Monitors and Headphones

Accurate monitoring is essential for mixing and mastering. Studio monitors provide a flat frequency response, allowing you to hear your music as accurately as possible. Brands like KRK, Yamaha, and Genelec offer excellent studio monitors. Additionally, high-quality headphones like the Sennheiser HD 650 or the Audio-Technica ATH-M50x are important for detailed listening.

MIDI Controllers

MIDI controllers, such as keyboards and pad controllers, allow for more expressive and intuitive music creation. They can control virtual instruments and parameters within your DAW, making the production process more hands-on and interactive. Popular models include the Akai MPK series and the Novation Launchkey.

Maximizing Your Learning Experience

Practice Regularly

Consistency is key in mastering music production. Set aside dedicated time each day or week to practice and experiment with new techniques and tools.

Engage with the Community

Joining online forums, social media groups, and attending virtual meetups can provide valuable feedback and support. Communities like Reddit’s r/edmproduction or Gearspace are great places to connect with other producers.

Take Advantage of Free Resources

There are countless free tutorials, samples, and plugins available online. Websites like YouTube, Splice, and Landr offer a wealth of resources that can help you learn new skills and find inspiration.

Invest in Your Education

While free resources are great, investing in structured courses and workshops can provide a more comprehensive education. ICON Collective’s offerings are an excellent investment for those serious about taking their music production to the next level.

Conclusion

Online music production workshops and tools offer unparalleled opportunities for learning and growth. Whether you're just starting out or looking to refine your skills, there are resources available to meet your needs. ICON Collective stands out as a leader in music production education, offering free workshops, introductory courses, and advanced programs that cater to all levels of experience. By leveraging these resources and tools, you can unlock your full potential as a music producer and create music that resonates with audiences worldwide.

Frequently Asked Questions

Learning Electronic Music Production: A Beginner’s Guide

Mon, 17 Jun 2024 18:46:53 GMT

Learning electronic music production can seem daunting at first, but with the right guidance and resources, it becomes an exhilarating journey. This guide aims to provide beginners with a comprehensive roadmap to mastering electronic music production.

The realm of electronic music production is expansive, offering boundless creative opportunities. Whether you're drawn to the lively rhythms of house music or the intricate textures of ambient tunes, mastering the art of electronic music production allows you to bring your artistic ideas to life. Yet, the journey to becoming a thriving electronic music producer demands commitment and practice. Seeking mentorship from experienced professionals at a music school can fast-track your progress.

Embrace the journey, stay dedicated, an d let your creativity soar.

Understanding Electronic Music Production

What is Electronic Music Production?

Electronic music production involves creating music using electronic devices and software. Unlike traditional music production, which relies on acoustic instruments, electronic music is crafted using synthesizers, drum machines, and digital audio workstations (DAWs). This process allows for a high level of creativity and innovation, as producers can manipulate sounds in ways that are not possible with traditional instruments.

The Role of Digital Audio Workstations (DAWs)

DAWs are essential tools in electronic music production. They provide a platform for recording, editing, and mixing music. Popular DAWs like Ableton Live , FL Studio , and Logic Pro X offer a range of features that cater to different production styles and preferences. Choosing the right DAW is a crucial step for any aspiring producer, as it becomes the central hub for all music production activities.

Essential Equipment for Beginners

Starting with electronic music production requires some basic equipment:

A Computer: A reliable computer is the backbone of your production setup. Ensure it has sufficient processing power and memory to handle complex audio projects.
DAW Software: Select a DAW that suits your workflow and production style. Many DAWs offer free trials, so you can explore different options before committing.
MIDI Controller: A MIDI controller, such as a keyboard or pad controller, allows for more tactile interaction with your DAW and virtual instruments.
Audio Interface: An audio interface improves the sound quality of your recordings and provides connectivity for microphones and instruments.
Headphones and Monitors: High-quality headphones and studio monitors are essential for accurate sound monitoring and mixing.

The Importance of Learning from Industry Experts

Why Work with Established Professionals?

Learning from established professionals in the industry provides invaluable insights that are not available through self-study. These experts offer real-world experience, insider tips, and personalized feedback that can significantly accelerate your learning process. They help you avoid common pitfalls and guide you towards effective production techniques.

Benefits of Attending ICON Collective

ICON Collective is renowned for its comprehensive electronic music production programs . Here are some benefits of enrolling at ICON Collective:

Expert Mentorship: ICON Collective’s instructors are seasoned professionals with extensive industry experience. Their mentorship helps students navigate the complexities of music production and develop a unique artistic voice.
Hands-On Learning: The curriculum emphasizes practical, hands-on learning, allowing students to apply theoretical knowledge in real-world scenarios.
Collaborative Environment: ICON Collective fosters a collaborative learning environment, encouraging students to work together and learn from each other’s experiences.
Career Support: The school provides career support, helping students network with industry professionals and find opportunities in the music industry.

The Learning Process: Step-by-Step

1. Understanding Music Theory

A solid foundation in music theory is essential for creating compelling electronic music. Understanding scales, chords, and rhythm helps you construct melodies and harmonies that resonate with listeners. While electronic music often breaks traditional rules, knowing these basics provides a framework for experimentation.

2. Exploring Sound Design

Sound design is the art of creating unique sounds using synthesizers and other audio tools. This skill is crucial for defining your signature sound. Start by experimenting with different types of synthesis, such as subtractive, additive, and FM synthesis. Learn how to manipulate oscillators, filters, and envelopes to shape your sounds.

3. Mastering Beat Making

Beats are the backbone of most electronic music genres. Learn how to program drums and create rhythmic patterns that drive your tracks. Experiment with different drum kits and samples to find the right sounds for your style. Pay attention to groove and swing to make your beats more dynamic and engaging.

4. Recording and Editing

Recording techniques are not limited to vocals and live instruments. In electronic music, you might record samples, field recordings, or live performances with MIDI controllers. Learn how to edit and arrange these recordings in your DAW, using tools like quantization, slicing, and time-stretching to refine your tracks.

5. Mixing and Mastering

Mixing and mastering are critical stages in the production process. Mixing involves balancing the levels of different elements in your track, applying effects, and creating spatial depth. Mastering polishes the final mix , ensuring it sounds great on all playback systems. Invest time in learning these skills, as they significantly impact the quality of your music.

Building Your Production Skills

1. Practice Regularly

Consistent practice is key to improving your production skills. Set aside dedicated time each day to work on your music. Start with small projects and gradually take on more complex tasks as you build confidence.

2. Analyze and Deconstruct Tracks

Study tracks from your favorite artists and genres. Analyze their structure, sound design, and mixing techniques. Try to recreate these tracks in your DAW to understand how they were made. This exercise helps you learn new techniques and apply them to your own productions.

3. Participate in Online Communities

Join online forums and communities focused on electronic music production. Platforms like Reddit, Gearspace, and various online groups offer valuable resources and a space to connect with other producers. Sharing your work and receiving feedback from peers can provide new perspectives and ideas.

4. Attend Workshops and Masterclasses

Workshops and masterclasses offer intensive learning experiences with expert instructors. They provide an opportunity to dive deep into specific topics and gain practical skills. Many workshops also offer hands-on sessions where you can apply what you’ve learned in real-time.

Creating Your Unique Sound

1. Experiment with Different Genres

Don’t limit yourself to a single genre. Experimenting with different styles of electronic music can broaden your creative horizons and help you discover new techniques. Blend elements from various genres to create a unique and innovative sound.

2. Develop Your Signature Style

Your signature style sets you apart from other producers. Focus on developing a sound that is distinctly yours. This might involve using specific synth patches, drum samples, or production techniques that become a hallmark of your music.

3. Use Samples Creatively

Sampling is a staple in electronic music production. Use samples creatively by chopping, looping, and processing them in unexpected ways. Explore different sample libraries and field recordings to find unique sounds that add character to your tracks.

4. Incorporate Live Elements

Incorporating live elements, such as recorded instruments or vocals, can add a human touch to your electronic productions. Experiment with recording live performances and blending them with electronic sounds to create a hybrid style.

Marketing Your Music

1. Building an Online Presence

Creating a strong online presence is essential for reaching a wider audience. Set up profiles on social media platforms, music streaming services, and websites like SoundCloud and Bandcamp. Regularly share your music, engage with your audience, and use analytics to understand your listeners.

2. Networking with Industry Professionals

Networking is crucial in the music industry. Attend industry events, join professional associations, and connect with other musicians, producers, and industry professionals. Networking opens up opportunities for collaborations, gigs, and mentorship.

3. Promoting Your Releases

Effective promotion ensures that your music reaches the right audience. Use a combination of social media marketing, email newsletters, and press releases to announce your releases. Collaborate with influencers and music blogs to gain exposure.

4. Performing Live

Live performances are a great way to connect with your audience and showcase your music. Practice your DJing or live performance skills and seek out opportunities to perform at local venues, festivals, and online events. Live performances can also help you build a loyal fanbase.

Learning Electronic Music Production at ICON Collective

ICON Collective offers a comprehensive electronic music production program designed to equip students with the skills and knowledge needed to succeed in the industry. The program covers all aspects of music production, from sound design and beat making to mixing and mastering.

Expert Instructors

The instructors at ICON Collective are industry veterans who bring a wealth of experience to the classroom. They provide personalized mentorship, helping students navigate the intricacies of music production and develop their unique sound.

Hands-On Experience

ICON Collective’s curriculum emphasizes hands-on learning. Students work on real-world projects, gaining practical experience in all aspects of music production. This approach ensures that graduates are well-prepared for the challenges of the industry.

Collaborative Environment

The collaborative environment at ICON Collective fosters creativity and innovation. Students have the opportunity to work with peers from diverse musical backgrounds, learning from each other and creating unique projects together.

Career Support

ICON Collective provides comprehensive career support, helping students network with industry professionals and find opportunities in the music industry. The school’s strong industry connections and alumni network open doors to internships, gigs, and collaborations.

Frequently Asked Questions::

Write Your Epic EDM Song: Top Songwriting Tips for Electronic Music Producers

Fri, 07 Jun 2024 18:30:00 GMT

Creating a pop EDM song is exhilarating. But how does one capture that flawless vibe?

This guide dives into practical steps, providing essential insights to help both budding and experienced artists refine their songs. Produce tracks that resonate with listeners and climb the charts.

Ready to start? Let's go!

Finding Inspiration

Diving into the world of creativity can ignite an artist's passion. Inspiration often comes from everyday experiences, nature, family, or even heart-wrenching moments, so be open to explore and embrace these sources to fuel your songwriting journey.

Being curious and observant helps songwriters discover fresh perspectives and ideas that transform into meaningful music. Surrounding yourself with influential sounds and captivating stories also enhances creativity.

Discover Current Trends

Staying updated with current trends in the electronic music scene is essential for every artist.

Sampling from popular genres can enhance the appeal, making the song more relatable to a larger audience.

Exploring trending sounds, rhythms, and production techniques allows artists to create fresh and relevant tracks. The blending of various influences helps in crafting a unique sonic identity that stands out.

Follow influential musicians and platforms to keep a pulse on what's hot. Engaging with fan communities and analyzing hit songs provide valuable insights for songwriting tips for electronic music.

Tap Into Personal Stories

Drawing inspiration from personal experiences provides authenticity to your music. It creates a deep emotional connection that listeners appreciate, fostering an unforgettable auditory experience.

Personal stories often offer a rich pool of emotions.

Joy, heartbreak, triumph, and growth manifest into powerful lyrics and melodies that resonate widely.

Listeners feel the impact of genuine storytelling, making your music more relatable and engaging.

These narratives do not have to be grandiose or dramatic; simple, honest moments can be just as compelling.

Exploring personal memories with a creative mindset transforms raw feelings into profound musical expressions that shine in the pop EDM landscape.

So, go ahead and unlock those personal anecdotes. Transforming life experiences into song is among the most potent songwriting tips for electronic music.

Crafting The Melody

Creating a captivating melody is essential, a cornerstone of exceptional songwriting tips for electronic music. A memorable melody can make your pop EDM song truly unforgettable, drawing listeners in from the very first note.

To achieve this, experiment with a mix of short and long notes, known as "melodic contrast". This adds a layer of dynamic depth, keeping listeners’ attention. Combine this with interesting chord progressions, and you have the foundation of a hook that audiences will come back to, again and again.

Start With A Hook

Crafting an unforgettable hook is essential to capturing your audience's attention from the get-go.

Identify a Catchy Phrase: Pick a phrase that resonates and can be easily remembered.
Play With Rhythm: Experiment with different rhythms to find what makes your hook stand out.
Use Repetition: Repetition makes your hook memorable and encourages listeners to sing along.
Keep It Simple: Simplicity ensures that your hook is catchy and not overly complex.
Incorporate a Unique Sound: Adding a distinctive sound can set your hook apart from others.

A powerful hook sets the tone for the rest of your track, making it enticing from the very start.

Keep these steps in mind to ensure your pop EDM song starts with a bang and hooks your listeners instantly.

Develop Chord Progressions

Creating impactful chord progressions is crucial to your song’s emotional and harmonic depth.

Analyze Popular Songs: Study the chord progressions of favorite tracks to understand what works.
Choose a Key: Decide whether your song will be in a major or minor key.
Experiment with Inversions: Use different chord inversions to add variety and complexity.
Utilize Seventh Chords: Adding seventh chords can enrich your progression and add emotional nuance.
Incorporate Passing Chords: Passing chords can help you transition smoothly between other chords.

Remember, your chord progression acts as the backbone of your song, guiding its mood and energy. Don't be afraid to experiment and trust your ear to find what sounds best.

Producing Powerful Beats

Crafting compelling beats involves striking a balance between rhythm and emotion, captivating your listeners' senses from the outset.

To achieve this, start by selecting high-quality electronic drum samples that create an infectious groove, ensuring they complement your song's overall vibe while adding a punch to each section.

Creating complementary basslines can significantly enhance the groove and energy of your song. A well-crafted bassline underpins the rhythm and harmonizes with your chords, adding depth and movement. Experiment with different patterns and syncopations to find the best fit for your track, ensuring it complements both the melody and the drums for a cohesive and dynamic production.

Utilize “swing” and “syncopation” techniques to bring life to the 'heartbeat of your music.'

Layering Drums and Bass

When layering drums and basslines, consider each element’s frequency range and dynamic impact.

For instance, to craft a memorable hook in a pop EDM song, layering different drum sounds can create a more engaging rhythm. Select complementary kick drums, snares, and high-hats, ensuring each layer provides a unique texture while fitting harmoniously within your mix.

Similarly, blend several bass sounds and basslines to build a powerful and dynamic low end. Experiment with sub-bass frequencies and mid-bass patches, layering them carefully to achieve a full and rich sound that energizes your track.

By mastering the art of layering drums and bass, songwriters can create intricately detailed compositions. This layered approach not only adds depth and richness to the music but also enhances its energy, captivating listeners with a dynamic and polished production.

For instance, focusing on innovative basslines can set your song apart. A compelling bassline serves as the backbone of your track, weaving through the beats and melody to create a unified and engaging composition. Utilizing techniques like sidechain compression can blend the bass and kick drum more seamlessly, enhancing the track's overall punch and rhythmic drive.

Adding Synths and Effects

Synths and effects are essential components that add texture, color, and a unique character to any electronic music production , particularly in pop EDM songs.

Start with selecting the right synth sounds that harmonize with your track.

Tweak parameters such as filters, envelopes, and oscillators for truly signature sounds.

Use layering techniques to stack multiple synths, creating lush, full chords that fill the sonic space.

Incorporate effects like reverb, delay, and chorus to add width and depth, ensuring each synth layer complements the overall mix.

Utilize automation to modulate effects throughout the track, creating dynamic changes that keep listeners engaged from start to finish.

Ultimately, adding synths and effects is about finding a balance that enhances your composition. These elements work together to elevate the song, making every second resonate with energy and emotion.

Finalizing Your Track

After all the creativity and technical work, it's time to polish.

Export the song for a critical listening session. Take notes on balance, transitions, and any inconsistencies that need adjustment. This stage ensures all elements are cohesive and professional-sounding.

Consult peers for feedback and make necessary revisions.

Mixing and Mastering Tips

Achieving a professional sound in electronic music requires meticulous mixing and mastering. Here are essential tips to help elevate your tracks:

Balance Levels: Ensure each instrument is clearly heard by adjusting volume levels.
EQ Effectively: Remove unwanted frequencies and enhance key elements with equalization.
Use Compression: Apply compression to control dynamics and add punch.
Stereo Imaging: Create a wide, spatial mix using panning and stereo width tools.
Add Reverb and Delay: Use these effects to add depth and ambiance to your mix.
Reference Tracks: Compare your mix to professionally mixed songs to gauge quality.
Mastering Chain: Apply a mastering chain with EQ, compression, limiting, and metering.

Balancing levels and using EQ effectively ensures all elements sit well together. Remember to reference other tracks to maintain a standard. Incorporating these techniques with patience and precision will help you achieve a polished, professional sound.

Feedback and Revisions

Feedback and revisions are essential to crafting a standout pop EDM song. They offer a fresh perspective and insights, often uncovering elements that may need tweaking.

Getting feedback from fellow artists fosters growth. Constructive criticism helps refine the track further.

Seek out trusted sources to review your track. Their diverse backgrounds will highlight a range of strengths and areas for improvement, ensuring the song appeals to a broad audience.

The revision process can significantly improve the final output. By actively incorporating feedback and making thoughtful adjustments, artists can produce a truly epic pop EDM song that resonates with listeners everywhere. Remember, persistence and adaptability are key to refining and perfecting your track.

Home Studio Setup: Design & Acoustic Tips from Industry Experts

Thu, 06 Jun 2024 17:08:27 GMT

A home recording studio setup is like planting the seeds of creative expression and then watching them bloom. This guide makes it achievable, including recommendations for the best recording software.

Optimizing Your Home Studio

Achieving the perfect home recording studio setup is a journey of refining details that align with your creative goals, including the strategic use of a high-quality mixing desk. Consider the acoustics of the space, choosing foam panels, soundproofing materials, or bass traps to reduce echo. Position equipment thoughtfully, maintaining an ergonomic flow, and incorporate quality cables and power supplies to ensure clean signal paths. Each adjustment, no matter how small, contributes to creating a studio environment that inspires productivity and creativity.

Essential Equipment

Setting up a home recording studio requires three key items—audio interface, studio monitors, and a digital audio workstation. Additionally, a mixing desk can provide enhanced control over your audio signals.

Don't overlook the importance of a reliable audio interface; it bridges the gap between your instruments and computer seamlessly. A solid interface ensures clear, distortion-free recordings.

Equally essential is investing in a suitable digital audio workstation and a reliable mixing desk for comprehensive sound management. This software becomes the heart of your production process, enabling the crafting, editing, and mixing of your musical creations.

Acoustic Treatment

Acoustic treatment and soundproofing are essential for achieving professional sound quality in a home studio. Properly treated rooms help reduce unwanted echoes and improve the clarity of recordings and mixes.

Start with bass traps to manage low-frequency energy. They are particularly effective in room corners.

Next, consider installing acoustic panels on the walls to absorb mid to high-frequency sounds. This setup will ensure a balanced audio environment.

Effective acoustic treatment transforms any room into a place of sonic excellence. To maximize these benefits, consider studying music production at ICON Collective, where expert guidance can help optimize your home studio setup for peak performance and creativity.

Mastering Software Tools

Navigating through various recording software tools is crucial to optimizing a home studio setup. Each software offers unique features for recording, editing, and mixing, making them indispensable to your production process.

ICON Collective provides in-depth training on top software tools, ensuring users can achieve professional-quality outcomes from their home studios.

DAW Selection

Choosing the right Digital Audio Workstation (DAW) is crucial for your home studio setup. The DAW acts as the heart of your music production environment.

Popular DAWs include Ableton Live , Logic Pro, and FL Studio.

Each DAW offers unique features and workflows, catering to different styles and needs, but incorporating specialized recording software can further enhance your production capabilities.

Consider your music genre, workflow preference, and compatibility with other software and hardware.

ICON Collective provides comprehensive training on various DAWs, helping users make informed choices. This guidance ensures that producers can fully utilize their DAW’s capabilities.

Ultimately, the right DAW can unlock creative potential and streamline production. Investing in DAW proficiency through ICON Collective enhances this journey.

Plugin Essentials

Plugins are vital tools for enhancing a home studio setup. They empower producers to shape their sonic landscapes and achieve unique musical textures.

In 2016, Soundonsound, a leading industry source, reported that the best plugins embody innovations, offering exceptional audio quality with versatile features, which streamline the creative process.

So, it's not just about how many plugins one has; it's about having the right ones. Ensuring a selection of high-quality plugins can elevate any musical project, providing depth and richness.

Among the essentials, you want to have high-quality EQs, compressors, and reverb. These tools are the foundation of any mix, but don't overlook the value of synths, samplers, and creative effects to add flair.

Investing in the right plugins and refining their use can set one's work apart. ICON Collective’s comprehensive courses guide producers in mastering these powerful tools.

Recording Techniques

Capturing clear audio requires a combination of skillful performance, strategic microphone placement, and a well-treated recording environment. Selecting the right mic can dramatically affect the quality of the recording, making a noticeable difference in the final product.

Infinite possibilities emerge when a home studio setup is maximized with the right techniques. Implementing a "room mic" adds colorful ambiance to tracks, while close-miking ensures focused sound capture. Aspiring producers can sharpen their recording techniques at ICON Collective, where expert guidance leads to professional-grade outcomes.

Vocal Recording Tips

Begin with choosing the right microphone, as it significantly impacts vocal quality. Experiment with different options to find the best fit for your voice.
Ensure your recording space is treated with soundproofing materials that reduce echoes. A quiet, controlled environment enhances vocal clarity.
Position the microphone at a comfortable height, slightly angled. A pop filter helps minimize plosive sounds, ensuring a cleaner recording.
Use a consistent distance from the microphone to maintain volume levels. Mark the spot to help ensure uniform recordings.
Record multiple takes to capture dynamic performances. Editing these together in your home studio setup yields a polished final product.
Remember, DIY efforts are enriched with professional training. Courses at ICON Collective cover advanced vocal recording techniques for superior results.

Instrument Tracking

Instrument tracking is a cornerstone of any home studio setup. It captures the essence of each performance, so it’s crucial to get it right.

The first step is to ensure all instruments are well-tuned. A consistent tuning avoids issues later in the production process.

Microphone placement plays a significant role in achieving optimal sound quality. Test various positions and angles to find the sweet spot for each instrument.

Investing in quality preamps and audio interfaces can elevate your recordings to professional standards. ICON Collective’s music production courses teach invaluable techniques, ensuring you make the most out of your home studio setup.

Post-Production Mastery

With diverse software options, a smooth and streamlined post-production workflow awaits every producer. Fine-tuning recordings and adding subtle effects create a polished sound. Courses at ICON Collective provide hands-on training, enabling full potential extraction from any home studio setup.

Mixing Basics

Mastering the basics of mixing is essential for any home studio setup. A well-mixed track can make all the difference.

First, focus on balancing levels. Each instrument should have its own space in the mix.

Next, consider panning. Positioning sounds across the stereo field creates depth and dimension.

Applying EQ and compression shapes the overall sound. These tools enhance clarity and reduce muddiness.

Don't overlook reverb and delay. These effects add space and atmosphere to your mix.

Ultimately, practice and education are key. Studying with ICON Collective can greatly improve your mixing skills.

Advanced Mastering

Mastering is a crucial step in music production, ensuring tracks sound polished and professional on all playback systems.

Software Tools: Invest in high-quality plugins such as iZotope Ozone or Waves Mastering Bundle.
Reference Tracks: Compare your masters with professionally mastered tracks.
Listening Environment: Ensure your studio monitors and headphones provide accurate sound representation.
Limiter Settings: Properly set limiters to avoid distortion while maximizing volume.
Frequency Balance: Maintain a balanced frequency spectrum through detailed EQ adjustments.
Dynamic Range: Preserve dynamic range by careful use of compression and limiting.

ICON Collective’s courses provide in-depth mastering guidance, enhancing any home studio setup.

Professional mastering separates good tracks from exceptional ones, offering the final professional touch. Applying these advanced mastering techniques elevates production quality to a competitive level.

Learn From The Best At ICON Collective

ICON Collective is the top choice for music education.

Students at ICON Collective have access to a wealth of knowledge. The faculty is composed of industry professionals who have proven expertise in the field. This ensures that students receive the most relevant and up-to-date instruction available. Furthermore, learners are equipped with the skills and insights needed to excel in their home studio setup.

Hands-on experience is a significant focus.

Practical knowledge gained through ICON Collective bridges the gap between theory and real-world application. Students mix, master, and produce projects under expert guidance – skills immediately transferable to their home studio setup.

The school's curriculum is designed to nurture creative and technical proficiencies, fostering confidence in each student. By studying at ICON Collective, individuals gain a competitive edge in the music industry. Join a community that celebrates and supports artistic growth, ensuring a rewarding journey in music production.

Becoming a Music Producer: How to Start Your Journey

Thu, 16 May 2024 04:44:38 GMT

Imagine embarking on a musical journey, where each note you create paints your story with vibrant colors. Picture yourself now in a state-of-the-art studio during recording sessions, feeling the hum of creativity surging through your veins, guided by a seasoned music producer .

Start at ICON.

Here, guidance from industry experts will elevate your production and audio engineering skills to professional levels.

Education and Training

ICON Collective empowers aspiring producers with a structured curriculum, blending theoretical knowledge with hands-on experience in audio engineering. Their program covers everything from music theory , beatmaking, digital audio workstations to mixing, mastering , audio engineering, and the business aspects of the industry, ensuring you are well-equipped for success as a future music producer.

Choosing the Right Program

Selecting the right music production program is crucial for building a solid foundation. ICON Collective offers a comprehensive curriculum that balances theory and practical experience.

Professionals lead each course, providing insights from the industry. This immersive environment, enriched with frequent recording sessions, is designed to help you develop technical skills and foster creativity.

Beyond technical skills, consider programs with a strong alumni network. ICON Collective's graduates often find success in diverse roles within the music industry, highlighting the program's efficacy. Choose wisely and invest in your future as a music producer.

Benefits of ICON Collective

ICON Collective boasts a robust curriculum designed to nurture both creativity and technical proficiency.

Their Artist Development Program emphasizes personalized mentorship, ensuring that students receive one-on-one guidance from industry professionals. This hands-on approach helps to refine artistic identity.

The school’s state-of-the-art facilities provide the perfect environment to master digital audio workstations, mixing, and mastering. Their commitment to excellence prepares students for competitive industry standards.

Networking opportunities at ICON Collective are unparalleled, featuring collaborations, guest speakers, and alumni events. These connections are vital for establishing a successful career in music production.

ICON Collective's graduates have gone on to achieve remarkable success in various sectors of the industry.

Essential Courses

Starting your journey at ICON Collective, several core courses are critical to building a strong foundation in music production.

Music Production: Learn the intricacies of digital audio workstations (DAWs), signal flow, and creative workflows.
Sound Design: Develop skills in synthesizing sounds, creating unique samples, and layering effects.
Mixing and Mastering: Understand the crucial post-production processes ensuring your tracks sound professional.
Music Theory: Gain a solid understanding of scales, chords, and song structures instrumental in producing compelling music.
Artist Development: Focus on your unique artistic identity, branding, and establishing a coherent musical vision.

These courses equip you with the practical and creative skills necessary to navigate the complexities of the music industry.

With a focus on contemporary techniques and tools, you’ll be well-prepared to produce high-quality, market-ready tracks.

Studying at ICON Collective ensures that you receive a comprehensive education tailored to your success as a professional music producer.

Building Your Skill Set

Developing a robust skill set is imperative for a successful career in music production, and ICON Collective offers an extensive curriculum designed to hone your abilities. With hands-on training and expert guidance, you'll refine your skills in areas such as sound engineering, composition, and arrangement, ensuring you possess the versatility needed to excel in a competitive industry.

Practicing consistently and staying updated with the latest trends and technologies will further solidify your proficiency, enabling you to create innovative and impactful music.

Mastering Software Tools

Becoming proficient in industry-standard software is crucial for any aspiring music producer.

Digital Audio Workstations (DAWs): Master software like Ableton Live , Logic Pro, and FL Studio.
Audio Plugins and VSTs: Understand how to use virtual instruments and effect plugins.
Audio Editing Software: Learn detailed audio editing with tools like Pro Tools and Cubase.
Mixing and Mastering Suites: Gain expertise in software like iZotope Ozone and Waves plugins.
Sound Design Tools: Explore unique sound creation with software like Serum and Massive.

Having a solid grasp of these tools will enable you to transform creative ideas into polished tracks.

Hands-on practice and consistent experimentation are essential for mastering these applications.

Understanding Music Theory

Music theory forms the foundation for creating harmonious and compelling compositions.

Scales and Modes: Learn the different scales and modes to create various moods and atmospheres.
Chord Progressions: Understand the relationships between chords to structure your tracks effectively.
Rhythm and Time Signatures: Master timing and rhythm to bring dynamic shifts in your music.
Melody and Harmony: Craft captivating melodies and harmonies that resonate with listeners.
Ear Training: Develop your ear to identify pitches, intervals, and chord qualities intuitively.

A strong grasp of music theory aids in making informed creative decisions, enhancing your production quality.

At ICON Collective, music theory is integrated into a practical curriculum, enabling you to apply these concepts to real projects.

Understanding music theory is not just academic; it’s a toolset for expressing your musical vision with precision and clarity.

Developing Your Style

Developing your unique style requires patience, consistent practice, and an open-minded approach to musical influences. It's a process that evolves with each new track you produce.

ICON Collective understands the importance of this journey.

By immersing yourself in diverse genres, analyzing their structures, and experimenting with different elements, your distinctive sound will begin to surface.

ICON Collective encourages exploration through a curriculum designed to push creative boundaries.

An important part of finding your style is regular feedback from experienced industry professionals, helping you refine and perfect your creations.

Ultimately, the aim is to develop a style that’s recognizably yours. ICON Collective provides the tools and environment to support this essential aspect of your musical development.

Gaining Practical Experience

ICON Collective's curriculum emphasizes hands-on learning, a cornerstone of music production. Through their coursework, students engage directly with cutting-edge software, hardware, and real-world scenarios, blending theory with practice.

In addition to classroom experiences, students can participate in "collab sessions." These provide a taste of actual studio work, fostering collaboration and networking opportunities. By the end, the experience of these sessions makes students feel prepared to enter the professional music world with confidence.

Internships and Apprenticeships

One of the most effective ways to gain practical experience is through internships and apprenticeships.

These opportunities allow you to learn directly from seasoned professionals.

By working in real-world environments, such as recording sessions, you'll develop a deeper understanding of the music industry's operations, workflow, and expectations.

Additionally, internships and apprenticeships provide invaluable networking opportunities that can lead to future career prospects. It's not just about learning; it’s about immersing yourself in the industry, building relationships, and positioning yourself for success. Whether you’re interning at a recording studio or apprenticing with a seasoned record producer, these experiences lay the groundwork for your professional journey.

Networking in the Industry

Networking is vital for a successful music career, whether you aim to be a music producer, artist, or sound engineer.

Building strong relationships with industry professionals, including a record producer or two, opens many doors. It allows you to gain insights from experienced producers, managers, and artists, as well as access opportunities that might not be publicly advertised. Effective networking can foster collaborations, lead to job offers, and provide the guidance needed to thrive.

Attend industry events and masterclasses whenever possible.

These settings create perfect opportunities to introduce yourself, exchange contact information, and foster meaningful connections. Don’t underestimate the power of social media—platforms like LinkedIn and Instagram are invaluable tools for expanding your professional network and showcasing your work.

Remember, networking is about quality, not quantity. Focus on developing genuine relationships rather than collecting a list of contacts. Treat each interaction seriously, and always follow up to build and maintain these connections. By valuing each professional relationship, you'll create a supportive network that will bolster your career in music production.

Hands-on Projects

Hands-on projects at ICON Collective provide students with practical experience in music production. This approach ensures that theoretical knowledge is effectively applied.

Small class sizes allow instructors to give personalized feedback essential for skill development. This feedback is crucial for refining your techniques.

During these projects, students work on real-world assignments designed to simulate industry conditions. This experience helps bridge the gap between academic learning and professional application.

Instructors, often industry veterans, offer mentorship to guide you through the intricacies of music production. By the end of your studies, you'll compile a portfolio showcasing your ability to produce, mix, and master tracks that meet industry standards.

Establishing Your Brand

Developing your brand as a music producer is crucial for distinguishing your unique sound and artistic vision. This involves curating your online presence, creating visuals, and using consistent messaging to ensure fans recognize your style.

Tools like social media and personal websites are essential for these efforts, helping to amplify your visibility and engagement within the music industry.

Creating an Online Presence

In today's digital age, establishing an online presence is vital for any music producer. Social media platforms like Instagram, Twitter, TikTok, and YouTube provide powerful tools for engaging with your audience, showcasing your work, and building a community around your music.

A professionally designed website acts as your digital business card. It's crucial to have a centralized platform where industry professionals can learn more about your projects and credentials.

Furthermore, leveraging streaming platforms such as Spotify, Apple Music, and SoundCloud, allows you to distribute your music effortlessly. Consistently updating and maintaining your profiles on these platforms maximizes your reach and helps cultivate an engaged listener base.

Connecting with other artists, producers, and industry insiders through online forums and networking events can yield significant collaborative opportunities. Engage in meaningful conversations to broaden your industry network.

Consistent content creation is essential for sustaining audience interest. Whether it’s through sharing behind-the-scenes footage, new releases, or educational content, maintaining a steady flow of posts keeps your audience connected and invested in your journey.

Lastly, remember that your online presence isn't just about self-promotion. Genuine engagement, such as replying to comments and participating in community discussions, builds loyalty and enriches your relationship with your audience.

Marketing Your Music

Creating a strong brand identity is paramount, alongside crafting a unique narrative for your musical creations. This identity should be consistently reflected across your online platforms.

In this digital era, visual content is powerful. Invest in high-quality artwork and videos to accompany your releases.

An optimized website serves as your digital business card. It should house essential information, your discography, and direct links to your social media and streaming profiles.

Collaborations and features with other artists can amplify your reach significantly. Consider strategic partnerships that complement your sound and style.

Email marketing remains a potent tool for engaging with your audience. Building and maintaining an email list allows for personalized communication regarding new releases, tour dates, and special offers.

Analytics are invaluable for refining your strategy. Utilize platform-specific insights to understand your audience's demographics and preferences, enabling more targeted marketing efforts.

Collaborating with Artists

Collaborating with artists can yield transformative results, enriching your sound, enhancing your creative vision, and increasing your network's reach in the music industry.

First, establish a rapport that fosters trust and mutual respect.

Secondly, clearly communicate your expectations, goals, and creative direction to avoid misunderstandings.

Third, understand the unique style and preferences of the artist you are working with.

Fourth, use a collaborative approach that balances both parties' creative inputs, fostering a synergistic outcome.

Fifth, utilize project management tools and regular check-ins to ensure the collaboration stays on track, addressing any issues promptly.

Finally, remember that flexibility is key; be open to exploring new ideas and adjusting your original plans to create the best possible music.

Read more: Discover 5 common mistakes new music producers make and learn how to improve your music production skills. Get essential tips for beginners and avoid critical errors in your music productions.

Beat Making Tips: Elevate Your Music Production Skills

Thu, 16 May 2024 04:18:00 GMT

Creating beats, whether in hip-hop, trap, or electronic music, is like crafting a symphony from scratch, where each sound from the drumkit and synth plays an essential role in the final composition, often laid out precisely on a sequencer grid.

Foundational Beat Making Techniques

Creating an engaging beat starts with understanding basic rhythmic patterns and groove dynamics, which are crucial in genres like trap to maintain a captivating flow.

This encompasses mastering drum programming, layering different percussion elements, and sampling techniques to enrich your sonic palette. It's important to experiment with variations to build a compelling rhythm that stands out.

Tools like “quantization” and “swing” help add human-like feel to the beats, and understanding how to manipulate these on a grid can elevate your rhythm precision.

Layering Sounds Effectively

Layering sounds effectively is a cornerstone of professional beat-making, enabling you to craft richer and more complex sonic textures. By strategically combining multiple layers of sounds, you achieve a fuller and more dynamic final mix.

Start by focusing on each layer's frequency range, ensuring that the sounds complement rather than compete with each other. This approach, often referred to as "frequency carving," helps to maintain clarity and prevent muddiness in your mix.

Frequency carving is key to maintaining sonic clarity in complex beat compositions.

Additionally, consider the stereo field when layering sounds. Panning different elements across the stereo spectrum can create a sense of space and depth, making your beat more immersive.

Remember, effective layering requires a balance between creativity and technical precision. ICON Collective educators excel in guiding students through this intricate process, collaborating with industry experts and successful artists in dedicated studio sessions.

Utilizing Drum Machines

Drum machines provide a fundamental platform for beat making, offering versatility and precision in drumkit patterns and rhythms.

By utilizing drum machines, producers can achieve a consistent and reliable rhythmic foundation for their tracks, essential for both live performances and studio sessions. These devices offer a range of pre-set sounds and samples, enabling beginners and seasoned producers to experiment with different drum kits and styles seamlessly.

Moreover, mastering the use of a drum machine can significantly enhance your sound design capabilities. With built-in sequencers, you can program complex drum patterns that add depth and character to your beats, allowing for creative expression and innovation in your productions.

At ICON Collective, we place a strong emphasis on the practical use of drum machines. Our collaboration with industry experts and successful artists during dedicated studio sessions ensures that students comprehend not just the technical aspects, but also the creative potential that these tools have to offer. The hands-on experience provided equips students with the skills necessary to produce professional-level beats.

Advanced Sound Design

Mastering advanced sound design involves a deep understanding of audio synthesis, intricate effects processing, and innovative sampling techniques, all of which benefit from using a detailed grid in your DAW. At ICON Collective, industry experts guide students through the nuances of sound shaping, including timbral sculpting and frequency modulation, to achieve distinctive sonic textures.

This expertise allows producers to create unique and memorable sounds that elevate their music, distinguishing their work in an increasingly crowded field.

Creating Unique Synths

Creating unique synths is paramount for producing distinct sonic signatures that resonate with listeners, and ICON Collective understands the importance of this artistry.

Synthesizers offer vast realms of exploration, enabling producers to craft new, unearthly sounds.

At ICON Collective, students learn to manipulate oscillators, filters, and envelopes to design bespoke patches, fostering a deep understanding of subtractive, additive, and FM synthesis. This technical knowledge, combined with creative inspiration, allows for unlimited potential in sound creation.

Hands-on sessions with industry experts in our state-of-the-art studios enable students to experiment with modular synths, digital workstations, and analog gear, honing their ability to engineer truly original sounds using synth technology. These experiences cultivate not only technical proficiency but also a unique personal style that sets students apart in the competitive landscape of music production.

Sound Sampling Tips

Sound sampling can significantly enhance the depth and texture of your beats, offering unique auditory elements that can set your music apart.

Choose High-Quality Samples: Always start with the best possible sound quality. This will make a massive difference in the final mix.
Clean Your Samples: Remove unwanted noise and hums using EQ and noise reduction techniques to ensure clarity.
Manipulate Pitch and Tempo: Experiment with altering the pitch and tempo of your samples to fit the vibe of your track.
Layer Multiple Samples: Combine different samples to create a fuller, richer sound spectrum. This can add complexity and interest to your beats.
Use Effects Sparingly: Reverb, delay, and other effects can enhance a sample, but overuse can muddy your mix. Apply them judiciously.

ICON Collective emphasizes these techniques through hands-on sessions where industry experts guide students in dedicated studio settings.

Mastering sound sampling can distinguish your music production, setting you on a path to creating polished and professional tracks.

Workflow Optimization

Streamlining your beat-making process not only enhances creativity but also maximizes productivity. Establishing a routine, using templates, and pre-organizing your samples can significantly cut down the time spent on mundane tasks.

ICON Collective's approach to workflow optimization ensures students can focus more on innovation by simplifying technical aspects through expert-led studio sessions.

Efficient Sequencing Methods

Efficient sequencing methods are crucial to creating professional and polished music productions with ease and precision. Sequencing lays the foundation of your tracks.

Understanding the workflow of your Digital Audio Workstation (DAW) is essential. Master your tools.

Learn the art of arranging sections to maintain listener interest. Consider a balance of repetition and variation, ensuring your beat remains engaging throughout.

To achieve efficiency, segment your work into manageable chunks. Utilize techniques like "ghost notes" to add subtle rhythmic elements without overpowering the main groove. ICON Collective collaborates with industry experts to refine these methods in their dedicated studio sessions, fostering an environment of professional growth and innovation.

DAW Shortcuts and Hacks

Mastering DAW shortcuts can drastically enhance your efficiency, particularly when producing intricate trap beats, allowing you to streamline your workflow and focus more on creative aspects rather than mundane tasks.

Key shortcuts like cut, copy, and paste are fundamental for quick edits and manipulations.

Additionally, utilizing macro commands can automate repetitive tasks (e.g., quantization or rendering) and save invaluable time.

Adjusting your DAW's interface to fit your personal workflow preferences can result in significant productivity boosts.

These tweaks may include customizing toolbars or setting up personalized key commands, enabling you to navigate and execute functions rapidly without cumbersome menu diving.

Ultimately, the aim is to ensure your DAW's interface serves your creative goals. Learning these techniques through focused sessions with industry experts at ICON Collective can provide transformative insights.

Collaboration and Learning

ICON Collective teaches beat making with a unique emphasis on collaboration, leveraging insights from industry experts and successful artists. Dedicated studio sessions allow you to work directly with seasoned professionals, offering a real-world perspective and hands-on experience. This immersive environment fosters a deeper understanding of beat-making techniques, encourages creative exchange, and hones your skills in a practical, impactful manner. These collaborations not only enhance your technical prowess but also imbue your work with industry-tested artistry, setting a solid foundation for your music production journey.

Working with Artists

Collaborating with artists is a crucial aspect of mastering beat making. It bridges the gap between technical skill and artistic vision.

At ICON Collective, we emphasize the importance of working closely with artists to understand their unique styles and creative preferences. This collaboration ensures that your beats are not only technically sound but also artistically enriching.

In our dedicated studio sessions, you'll learn to communicate effectively with artists, translating their ideas into polished, impactful tracks. Guidance from experienced professionals helps you to anticipate and fulfill artists' needs seamlessly.

This real-world experience is indispensable, enabling you to adapt your production techniques to a variety of genres and artistic directions. It ensures your work remains relevant and compelling in an ever-evolving music industry.

Ultimately, mastering beat making involves both technical mastery and artistic sensitivity, cultivated through meaningful artist collaborations.

ICON Collective Studio Sessions

ICON Collective's studio sessions are conducted in state-of-the-art facilities, providing a professional environment for students to engage deeply with various aspects of music production.

These sessions are pivotal to the holistic learning experience we offer.

Guided by industry experts and successful artists, students gain invaluable insights.

Hands-on experience in these sessions cultivates a thorough understanding of creative processes in beat making.

Each session is designed to foster direct interaction, encouraging students to apply theoretical knowledge to practical scenarios.

Ultimately, these studio sessions are where theory meets practice, bridging the gap between academic learning and industry expectations.

Top Music Production Courses for Aspiring Artists

Tue, 14 May 2024 03:54:13 GMT

Imagine the first time you heard a track with pulsating beats that truly moved you—it wasn't just sound; it was storytelling. For aspiring music producers , channeling that magic can be daunting. Without the right guidance, the path to becoming a proficient music producer can feel nebulous and overwhelming.

Music Production Mastery

At ICON Collective, music production mastery is achieved through project-based learning that fosters each student's unique sonic identity.

By integrating artistry, technology, and a creative mindset, students master industry-standard digital audio workstations (DAWs) to develop professional-grade tracks. This comprehensive program also emphasizes the emotional depth and cultural context needed for compelling soundscapes.

Graduates leave with a portfolio that showcases their 'audio fingerprint'.

Core Production Techniques

ICON Collective’s curriculum is meticulously designed to cover the fundamental principles of music production. ICON Collective emphasizes the philosophy of "preparing for success," not merely "avoiding failure."

In-depth modules explore key elements such as sound design, arrangement, and mixing, offering students hands-on experience with industry-standard software and hardware.

By mastering these techniques, aspiring producers build a robust foundation, essential for creating polished, professional-quality tracks with intricate beats that stand out in the competitive music industry.

Advanced Tools and Software

ICON Collective introduces students to a comprehensive suite of advanced music production tools and software, ensuring they stay at the cutting edge of technology.

Students explore powerful digital audio workstations (DAWs) including Ableton Live and Logic Pro, laying the groundwork for crafting exceptional beats.

In addition to DAWs, modules focus on understanding and utilizing plug-ins, virtual instruments, and advanced synthesis techniques. By integrating these tools, students can craft innovative and unique sounds, pushing the boundaries of their creative potential.

The curriculum also incorporates training on mixing and mastering software, such as iZotope Ozone, ensuring students can refine their tracks to a professional level. This emphasis on both creative and technical proficiency equips graduates with a versatile skill set, enabling them to navigate and excel in the evolving landscape of music production.

Vocal Performance Excellence

ICON Collective’s Vocal Performance program emphasizes empowering artists to deliver captivating performances. Through extensive training, students learn techniques in breath control, pitch accuracy, and stage presence, ultimately enhancing their vocal expression.

Expert instructors provide personalized feedback, fostering a supportive environment where vocalists can hone their craft and innovation.

Developing Vocal Technique

Focusing on vocal technique is crucial for any aspiring artist aiming to achieve vocal excellence and longevity.

Breath Control: Learn proper breathing techniques to support sustained and powerful vocals.
Pitch Accuracy: Develop your ability to hit the right notes consistently.
Articulation: Improve clarity and diction to ensure your lyrics are understood.
Vocal Range: Expand your vocal range to hit both high and low notes effortlessly.
Stage Presence: Master the skills to engage and captivate your audience during live performances.

These fundamental elements pave the way for a strong and versatile vocal performance.

By mastering these techniques, artists can greatly enhance their vocal capabilities and performance quality.

ICON Collective’s approach provides personalized instruction tailored to each student's unique voice and goals.

Recording and Mixing Vocals

Recording and mixing vocals is an essential skill that every budding music producer must master.

Understanding the intricacies can significantly elevate your tracks.

At ICON Collective, students delve deeply into vocal recording techniques that cover microphone choice, placement, and environment, ensuring pristine captures. Mixing instruction focuses on EQ, compression, reverb, and delay, enabling artists to shape the perfect vocal sound.

Combining technical prowess with artistic vision, ICON Collective prioritizes both the science and the art of vocal production. This comprehensive approach ensures students not only achieve sonic excellence but also cultivate a unique artistic identity.

Music Business Insights

Understanding the music industry's intricacies is pivotal for any aspiring artist. ICON Collective offers profound insights into music business strategies, marketing, and monetization, equipping students with the necessary skills to succeed.

In this hands-on course, you will dissect the complexities of royalties, contracts, licensing, and distribution. You will also learn how to effectively promote your music, manage your brand, and navigate the digital landscape.

With “industry-standard” and “real-world” being the cornerstones of this curriculum, you will leave with the knowledge and tools to thrive in the modern music industry.

Industry Fundamentals

Success in the music industry requires a well-rounded education that covers both artistry and business, a balance ICON Collective excels at maintaining. Their comprehensive course offerings ensure students gain the essential skills needed to thrive.

Students delve into the foundational elements of music production.

Understanding signal flow, mastering the digital audio workstation (DAW), sampling, and synthesis are core elements, providing a solid technical base.

Moreover, practical exercises and real-world projects reinforce these core concepts, ensuring competence.

Hands-on experience with industry-standard equipment and software signify the course's quality, positioning students for professional success.

Additionally, ICON Collective prioritizes mentorship and community, supporting their ethos of empowering creative minds. By the end of the course, students will master not only technical skills but also the artistry of music creation.

Marketing and Promotion

Marketing and promotion are crucial for the success of any music production career.

Social Media Mastery: Leveraging platforms like Instagram, TikTok, and YouTube to build an audience.
Brand Development: Crafting a unique artist brand that resonates with target audiences.
Content Strategy: Creating engaging content that maintains audience interest and encourages growth.
Analytics and Insights: Understanding data to refine marketing strategies and achieve better results.
Collaborations: Partnering with influencers and other artists to expand reach.

Effective marketing ensures that your music reaches a wider audience.

ICON Collective's course delves into innovative marketing tools and techniques.

From branding to analytics, students learn the art of promoting their music professionally.

Creative Mindset Development

ICON Collective emphasizes developing a "Creative Mindset," a crucial aspect for musicians, DJs, and artists. This mindset empowers students to think creatively and approach their work with a unique artistic vision, which is fundamental in today's music industry.

In addition to technical skills, the curriculum places a significant focus on fostering creativity. Students are taught to break free from conventional patterns, pushing the boundaries of their artistic expression. By the end of the program, they not only master the tools and techniques but also gain the confidence and mental agility to innovate consistently.

Building a Creative Routine

Establishing a successful creative routine is essential for consistent musical output and artistic growth. A structured schedule helps balance experimentation with productivity, allowing artists to flourish.

Students must find a balance between technical practice and free-form exploration.

ICON Collective's curriculum includes methods to cultivate effective habits, such as setting regular creative intervals and integrating personal reflection. This dual approach maximizes creativity, invention, and mastery of new skills.

By creating set times dedicated to various aspects of music production, students ensure steady progress. This discipline lays a foundation for artistic routines, making creativity a habit and not just an occasional spark. As they say, practice makes perfect, but the right kind of practice makes legendary.

Overcoming Artistic Challenges

Creating music often entails navigating various artistic challenges that can stifle progress or dampen motivation. ICON Collective equips artists with tools to transcend these barriers.

Mental Blocks: Strategies to overcome creative ruts.
Time Management: Techniques for balancing creative work and personal life.
Technical Skills: Building proficiency with modern music software and hardware.
Feedback Utilization: Constructive ways to harness and apply critiques.

These obstacles can be particularly daunting for emerging artists. The right mindset and resources can turn challenges into growth opportunities.

Embrace continuous learning and self-reflection to fuel creative resilience.

Master Sound Engineering Skills at ICON Collective

Sun, 05 May 2024 20:53:47 GMT

In the vast ocean of sound, few chart the depths quite like the masters.

ICON Collective excels at bridging the gap between aspiration and tangible skills. With curriculums deeply interwoven with the pulsating heart of the music industry, this institution not only imparts knowledge but also crafts the architects of tomorrow's soundscapes. Here, future sound engineers and producers are meticulously molded, armed with the expertise to make waves in the dynamic sphere of music production.

Dive Into the World of Music Production

At ICON Collective, immersion into music production is not just about acquiring technical knowledge; it is about embodying the creative and sonic ethos that defines the current musical landscape. Students are nurtured to comprehend and harness the nuances of sound design, electronic music theory, and digital music composition, enabling them to construct their unique auditory identity.

The journey with ICON Collective transcends traditional education, connecting students directly with industry professionals and cutting-edge production techniques. These experiences solidify a robust foundation in music technology and empower graduates to leave an indelible mark on the ever-evolving domain of music production.

Hands-On Experience with Industry-Standard Gear

ICON Collective's curriculum emphasizes practicality—students access cutting-edge technology shaping industry standards.

Stepping into ICON's facilities, one encounters an environment where theory intersects with application, bridging the gap between learning concepts and commanding hardware and software integral to the profession.

Here, music production is not an abstract theory; it's a tactile phenomenon—working with professional-grade equipment cultivates proficiency that aligns with the demands of modern sound engineering.

Real-World Music Projects from Day One

From day one, ICON Collective plunges students into authentic production projects, mirroring real industry practices and expectations. This immersive approach fast-tracks the development of essential competencies in sound engineering.

Learners tackle music creation with a professional mindset. They experience the pressures and rewards of industry timelines from the outset.

Students at ICON are not just trained; they're galvanized to fuse theoretical knowledge with real-world application, ensuring they remain on the cutting edge of production methods. Collaborative projects foster a community of creativity, innovation, and excellence.

Interfacing with active industry professionals, ICON students are guided through music projects that culminate in commercially viable products. They gain hands-on experience in production, mixing, mastering, and more, establishing themselves as emergent professionals in the music industry. This makes ICON graduates not mere "students," but invaluable contributors to the music production landscape.

Harness Cutting-Edge Sound Engineering Techniques

ICON Collective imparts audio-engineering skills within the vanguard of industry standards, helping students become adept in state-of-the-art sound manipulation and workflow optimization.

Through intensive instruction, ICON's curriculum ventures beyond theory to embrace digital audio workstations (DAWs), advanced signal processing, and innovative sound design practices, equipping students with the sophisticated skill set required for today's dynamic music industry.

A mastery of "in-the-box" methodologies and "out-of-the-box" thinking is seamlessly integrated to nurture a producer’s unique sonic signature.

Mastering Synthesis and Sampling

At ICON Collective, intricate knowledge of synthesis forms a cornerstone of our music production pedagogy. Proficiency in subtractive, additive and FM synthesis; , unconventional audio manipulation; and analog synthesis processes sharpen the competitive edge of budding producers.

Synthesis isn't simply an elective; it's a foundational pillar at ICON. Relying on this essential skill set can shape impressive aural landscapes.

Moreover, expert sampling techniques are equally emphasized. You learn to capture organic textures (field recordings, acoustic phenomena) and imbue them with musical purpose.

Deep understanding of synthesis and sampling is crucial to original sound creation. It transforms basic oscillations into vivid sonic tapestries, intertwining digital prowess with imaginative expedition.

Leveraging these skills can set a producer apart from his or her peers, fundamentally shaping one’s ability to craft unique auditory experiences that resonate broadly.

Exploration is key to mastery; thus, ICON Collective encourages creative risks within these domains, pushing boundaries and perpetuating innovation in musical expression.

Advanced Mixing and Mastering Strategies

Mastering sound engineering is a dynamic process that transcends mere technical knowledge, integrating artistic intuition with nuanced application. ICON Collective adopts a multidimensional approach, ensuring your mixes are not only technically sound but also emotionally resonant.

Developing the ability to discern and adjust the spectral balance, dynamic range, and stereo image lies at the heart of ICON's curriculum. Students are equipped with advanced mixing techniques that prioritize clarity, punch, and dimensional depth in their productions.

The mastering phase is about pushing a good mix to greatness, necessitating a forensic ear for detail and a firm grasp of signal processing tools. At ICON, you will learn strategies to maintain musicality while ensuring your tracks meet industry loudness standards and translate well across all listening environments.

Diving into the intricacies of software and hardware outboard gear, ICON students are mentored on how to apply EQ, compression, limiting, and saturation in mastering. Knowledge of the analog domain enriches the digital expertise, allowing a seamless blend of old-school warmth with contemporary sharpness.

Equipping you with the understanding to sculpt the final aural polish, ICON Collective strives to empower producers to deliver masterpieces that stand out in an ever-evolving music industry landscape.

Connect with Music Industry Insiders

Engagement with seasoned professionals is a pivotal aspect of the educational journey at ICON Collective. Through our established network, students gain access to music industry insiders, opening doors to mentorship, collaboration, and integral career guidance. This immersive interface is not just a cursory bonus but a deeply ingrained facet of the ICON experience, designed to forge connections that often continue beyond the bounds of the classroom into the professional world. Embrace the opportunity to glean wisdom from veterans and align your musical ambitions with the practical realities of the industry's inner workings.

Collaborate with Established Artists

At ICON Collective, your network expands as you blend talent, energy, and creativity in collaborations that resonate with the industry's pulse. These experiences provide a pragmatic approach to creativity, emphasizing a symbiotic and experiential learning curve that can propel your career forward.

Craft music alongside recognized figures who offer invaluable insight into artistic success. Their expertise helps hone your distinctive sound and strategic positioning within the music landscape.

Real-time feedback from those with esteemed industry clout (accomplished producers, engineers, and artists) accelerates your growth exponentially.

Collaborate on projects that could set the stage for your breakout opportunity, leveraging the valuable partnerships fostered at ICON Collective. This interaction is vital in understanding the nuances of crafting a track that connects with audiences and leaves a lasting impression.

Engagement with these professionals serves as a cornerstone of your education, offering a rare look into the complex processes that govern successful music production, from inception to final master.

Ultimately, your goal is to echo the greats—ICON Collective provides the environment to learn from the best, incorporating their techniques into your own unique artistry.

Direct Feedback from Music Professionals

Receiving critique from seasoned industry veterans fosters a rigorous development of your skills. They offer perspectives rooted deeply in professional experience.

At ICON Collective, direct engagement with music professionals ensures that you receive mentorship that is both relevant and current, informed by contemporary industry standards and practices.

Through this intimate interaction, students gain valuable insights into the intricacies of sound engineering and the elements of a successful production, all under the guidance of those who have mastered the craft.

Students are not only taught the technical skills needed for music production, but also the importance of cultivating a unique artistic identity—an endeavor sharpened by feedback from those who truly understand what resonates within the industry.

This personalized educational journey at ICON Collective empowers your transition from aspiring artist to seasoned professional, adept in the language of music and sound.

Build Your Professional Portfolio

At ICON Collective, creating a body of work that showcases your unique musical vision is paramount. The curriculum is strategically designed to facilitate the production of polished, industry-ready tracks that serve as a testament to your technical proficiency and artistic development. As you advance through the program, you will accumulate a diverse portfolio of work—spanning various genres and styles—that not only reflects your evolving skillset but also positions you advantageously for a competitive market. This portfolio will become a critical asset, aiding in your pursuit of career opportunities and collaborations within the music industry.

Crafting Your Unique Sound

Delving into the realm of sound engineering, ICON Collective cultivates the crucial ability to dissect and enhance sonic elements through meticulous attention to detail and imaginative processing techniques.

The heart of music production lies within the craft of capturing emotion and translating it into sonic form. At ICON Collective, the sophisticated curriculum intertwines theory with practical application, guiding you through the intricacies of synthesis, sampling, and effects processing. Your journey from raw sound to refined track will be marked by a deep understanding of how to mold frequencies and textures to epitomize the emotional intent behind your music.

Moreover, the pursuit of a distinct audio signature is nurtured at ICON Collective. You will explore innovative audio engineering solutions, adopting groundbreaking tools and unconventional methods that allow you to curate sounds that resonate with authenticity. Access to state-of-the-art equipment and exposure to industry trends will embolden your creative expression, propelling your auditory canvas to the forefront of innovation.

Lastly, to cement your music production prowess, ICON Collective's mentorship involve rigorous exercises aimed at honing your critical listening skills. This practice is essential to creating a well-balanced and compelling mix that stands out in today’s sonically saturated market. The guidance received from seasoned industry professionals ensures your final productions bear the hallmarks of quality, creativity, and individuality—a sound unmistakably your own.

Showcase Your Talent to the Industry

ICON Collective's curriculum is keenly designed to bridge the gap between music production education and real-world industry demands, ensuring that students emerge as adept and industry-ready producers. Our courses, rich with hands-on experience, pave the way for your smooth transition into the professional sphere.

Through project-based learning and collaborations, you'll craft portfolios that mirror industry standards and articulate your unique musical vision. Your body of work will speak volumes of your capabilities and readiness for the music industry.

Additionally, ICON engages with music industry professionals who provide insightful feedback, opening doors for networking opportunities that are invaluable in the music business. This form of direct engagement positions you favorably in the eyes of potential collaborators and decision-makers.

Our strategic partnerships with record labels and music platforms facilitate showcase opportunities that amplify your visibility to influential figures in the music scene. You'll engage directly with the pulse of the industry, gaining unprecedented access to career-launching platforms.

Participation in exclusive ICON events connects you with peers and industry veterans alike, providing a stage to display your talents and forge significant relationships. These experiences cement your presence within the industry and demonstrate to professionals that you are prepared to contribute at a high level.

Ultimately, ICON arms you with not only the expertise but also the platform required to make your mark in the music world. Through concerted effort and ICON's guidance, your transition from student to professional will be seamless and your sound unforgettably distinct.

How to plan your music career goals successfully

Wed, 24 Apr 2024 22:55:37 GMT

Music is a universal language, with a multitude of genres and styles. Crafting a sustainable music career requires deliberate planning and a clear understanding of your goals. To navigate the music industry's complex maze, a solid blueprint with measurable milestones is paramount. Have you outlined your path to success?

Setting Your Music Industry Goals

To set achievable targets, begin by defining clear, specific long-term objectives that encapsulate your musical ambitions and aspirations. This foundational step guides your career's trajectory.

Articulate intermediate goals that bridge the gap between your current position and your ultimate aim, ensuring each is attainable, time-bound, and serves as a stepping stone. This approach fosters a sense of progression and fulfillment along your artistic journey.

Always align your immediate tasks with your broader goals to maintain focus on the overall career progress you desire.

Identify Your Musical Vision

Clarity of intention fuels your career trajectory; it starts with crystallizing your artistic ethos. Envision the impact you want while honing your unique sound and message.

Your musical vision functions as your compass, guiding decisions and paving the way for strategic career moves. It demands introspection and the courage to aim beyond conventional boundaries—or comfort zones.

Authenticity amplifies your artistic voice, creating resonance in the collective heart of your audience.

A defined musical vision: it streamlines your path, sharpens your focus, and distinguishes you from the cacophony of voices (in a market saturated with talent), compelling the industry to take note of your distinct hue.

Establish Short and Long-Term Objectives

Structuring your career aspirations into tangible goals is essential for mapping a viable path forward. It's about breaking the grand vision into actionable steps.

Identify milestones that signal progress. These benchmarks align with your vision.

Short-term objectives are critical for maintaining momentum, while long-term goals keep you grounded in your ultimate artistic pursuits. Both should be S.M.A.R.T.—Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant, and Time-bound.

Long-term objectives often require short-term sacrifices and disciplined focus. They necessitate foresight and the flexibility to adapt as you gain insight and experience in the evolving landscape of the music industry. Remember, a goal without a plan is merely a wish—tactical foresight turns aspiration into achievement.

Developing a Brand and Image

In the relentless pursuit of a successful music career, carving out a unique brand and image is paramount. As an artist, your brand encapsulates your ethos, artistry, and the distinctive narrative you present to your audience—the amalgamation of your sound, style, and story. Understanding and consistently projecting this identity is not merely about aesthetics; it's an assertion of your values and an invitation to your audience to connect with the world you've created.

To solidify your brand, meticulous attention to the coherence and resonance of your image across all platforms is indispensable. Your visual representations, from album covers to social media, must echo the essence of your musical identity. They should resonate with your target demographic, while remaining authentic to your creative vision. Crafting this congruence is both an art and a science, requiring strategic refinement and passionate creativity.

Crafting Your Unique Artist Identity

Developing a unique artist identity requires introspection and a deep connection to your artistic vision. This personal brand must reflect the complexities and nuances of your music and ideology.

As you sculpt your identity, consider your influences, aspirations, and the emotional resonance of your music. Aim to create a symbiotic relationship between your musical output and visual brand that intricately weaves the fabric of your persona with the notes that you play. Your identity should act as a beacon, illuminating your musical landscape for your audience, laying bare your soul in a form they can see, touch, and feel through every aspect of your presence, from the tone of your interviews to the artwork on your releases.

Furthermore, constructing a persona that stands out in a crowded marketplace demands originality and adherence to your true self. It's vital to balance the raw, unpolished aspects of your character with a polished representation that captivates and endears you to your audience. This blend of authenticity and professionalism will become the hallmark of your artist brand, enabling you to forge a deep, lasting connection with your listeners.

Finally, the continuous evolution of your identity must be nurtured with forethought and precision. As you mature artistically, your brand should be an adaptive narrative that carries your fans along the journey. This perpetual storytelling not only retains the essence of who you are but also encompasses the growth and changes you experience as an artist. Refining this dynamic narrative is critical to maintaining relevance and resonance with both your loyal fan base and potential new listeners, ultimately bolstering your career in a landscape of perpetual motion and transformation.

Leveraging Social Media Presence

A well-orchestrated social media strategy is indispensable for carving out a distinct place in the music industry. Your digital footprint can serve as a powerful extension of your brand, enabling real-time engagement with your audience.

Craft content that resonates with your listeners' interests and lifestyle. A focused approach can foster deeper connections and loyalty.

Your social media accounts should be more than just platforms for announcements; they must embody the aesthetic and ethos of your music. This coherence ensures that every post contributes to a unified narrative of your artistic journey, capturing the nuances of your evolving identity.

To sustain a robust social media presence, it’s crucial to utilize analytics and feedback to adapt your strategy. Engaging content aligned with your artistic vision can drive your music career forward. Remember, on platforms like Instagram and TikTok, a single viral post can significantly enhance your visibility.

Building Professional Skills

In the domain of music production , developing an array of professional skills is instrumental. It's essential to master technical competencies, including audio engineering, mixing, mastering, and music theory. These pillars form the foundation upon which your distinct sound and style will rise. Without proficiency in these areas, your ability to express your musical intentions may fall short, leaving your creative potential unfulfilled.

To supplement your technical skill set, cultivate a nuanced understanding of the music industry landscape. This involves a firm grasp of music business practices , such as copyright laws, publishing, artist management, and branding. Immersing yourself in these facets not only protects your artistic works but enables you to navigate the complexities of the industry more effectively. Knowledge is power, and understanding the business elements of music production is imperative to guide your career trajectory towards success.

Essential Music Business Knowledge

Understanding the intricacies of music copyright is the bedrock of protecting your creative output. Without this knowledge, artistic vulnerabilities multiply, potentially undermining your craft and revenue.

Since the advent of digital distribution, the mechanisms to monetize music have evolved dramatically. Artists must now be adept in navigating streaming platforms, royalties distribution models, and various online monetization strategies to maximize their income.

Furthermore, building a robust network is indispensable in the music industry’s ecosystem. This requires strategic relationships with producers, labels, booking agents, and other musicians. Collaboration and partnerships are not just beneficial; they are integral to sustained growth and visibility in the market.

Awareness of branding and marketing techniques can no longer be relegated to ancillary status. Personal branding—coupled with adept use of social media—can dramatically influence the trajectory of an artist’s career. It’s about constructing a narrative that resonates with both existing and potential audiences.

Lastly, a comprehensive set of strategies for intellectual property management is paramount. A musician versed in this aspect is better equipped to exploit their work in a multitude of markets and platforms, ensuring diversification of income.

Networking Strategies for Musicians

In the music industry, networking is akin to laying the foundation for a building. It's not merely a means to an end; it's the very bedrock on which success is built. It necessitates a deliberate approach, merging professional etiquette with personal charm, to establish a network that sustains and expands your career.

Personal connections can bridge gaps no technology can. Engage with your community both online and offline.

Being present and active at industry events can lead to serendipitous connections. Seek out platforms (conferences, workshops) that facilitate exchange.

Cultivate relationships with respect and sincerity. It's about reciprocal value, not just what you can gain.

Diversify your network by connecting with professionals from different facets of the industry, such as sound engineers, event organizers, and digital marketers. This multidimensional web can offer support and open doors to various opportunities that might otherwise remain inaccessible.

Remember, a robust network is about quality rather than quantity. Focus on fostering meaningful relationships with individuals whose work aligns with your vision. Strategize your approach for longevity, ensuring that the connections you build today continue to bear fruit throughout your music career.

Creating a Realistic Action Plan

Constructing a pragmatic roadmap is imperative to transitioning aspiration into tangible results. Identify short-term milestones anchored in your overarching long-term objectives to substantiate progress.

When crafting your journey, employ pragmatic timelines matched with actionable steps. This bifurcation ensures you're pacing yourself while avoiding common pitfalls, such as burnout or misdirection that come with overambitious scheduling.

The mantra “measure twice, cut once” applies aptly to planning. Metrics and benchmarks are indispensable tools, offering feedback essential to your career trajectory's fine-tuning and recalibration.

Timeline Strategies for Goal Achievement

Crafting a timeline for your music career goals is fundamental to monitoring progress and ensuring tangible outcomes.

Set Clear Milestones: Establish specific, measurable objectives that contribute towards your overarching goals.
Allocate Timeframes: Dedicate realistic periods for achieving each milestone, allowing for flexibility as circumstances evolve.
Assess and Adjust: Regularly review your timeline to evaluate progress and make necessary adjustments to stay on course.
Incorporate Buffer Periods: Plan for unexpected delays by integrating buffer times, avoiding unnecessary pressure and stress.
Celebrate Achievements: Recognize when you hit milestones to maintain motivation and positive momentum.

Your timeline is a living document, subject to refinement as your career evolves and new opportunities arise.

Adhering to a structured roadmap paves the way for consistent progression and the avoidance of stagnation or derailment.

Evaluating and Adjusting Goals Regularly

In the dynamic landscape of the music industry, periodic evaluation of one's career goals is crucial for staying relevant and agile.

Review Progress: At regular intervals, assess your milestones against your initial objectives and the current market conditions.
Identify Deviations: Pinpoint where you have diverged from your plan and analyze the factors contributing to these discrepancies.
Realign Goals: Adjust your objectives to better reflect your evolved skillset, industry shifts, and personal aspirations.
Seek Feedback: Obtain input from peers, mentors, and industry professionals to gain an external perspective on your trajectory.
Update Strategies: Revise your approach, incorporating new techniques and opportunities that have emerged since your last assessment.

Frequent recalibration ensures that your career path remains viable and your objectives are still ambitious yet attainable.

Adaptability is the cornerstone of enduring success in the music industry, turning potential setbacks into growth opportunities.

ICON Collective was honored to host Lorne Padman as our 2023 Graduation Keynote Speaker. Lorne Padman, an industry veteran and VP at Dim Mak Records, delivered an inspiring keynote speech at the ICON Collective 2023 Graduation ceremony. His speech emphasized the importance of passion, resilience, and continuous learning for aspiring music professionals. Watch the keynote below:

Mastering Like an Icon: A Comprehensive Guide

Wed, 06 Dec 2023 19:05:14 GMT

Mastering is the final stage of the music production process, and it can make all the difference between an amateur sounding mix and a professional, radio-ready track. As the last creative step before distribution, mastering polishes a mix and prepares it for the listener's experience across various playback systems.

While mixing involves balancing and processing individual tracks, mastering takes a holistic approach. Mastering engineers use specialized tools and global adjustments to enhance the overall sound quality, consistency, and perceived loudness of a song. Their expertise and fresh ears provide an objective perspective on giving mixes the final touches they need.

This guide breaks down the art of mastering into "4 C's" - clarity, consistency, color, and clipping/loudness. Understanding these concepts is key to elevating mixes and achieving professional masters. Whether you're a producer looking to DIY master your own tracks or better communicate with mastering engineers, the 4 C's provide a framework for success.

I. Clarity

Clarity refers to how clearly the listener can hear all the individual elements and details in a mix. It enables the message and emotion of the music to shine through. Mastering should enhance clarity by ensuring nothing obscures the core instruments and vocals.

Equalization (EQ) is essential for boosting clarity during mastering. Strategic EQ can attenuate problem frequencies that clutter or mask other elements. For example, a dip at 400-600Hz could tame muddy bass buildup, while a boost at 2-4kHz could increase vocal presence. Subtle EQ moves of 1-2dB can make a notable difference.

Multiband compression also helps increase clarity on specific frequency ranges. Compressing the low mids around 300-500Hz can tighten and control muddy resonances, cleaning up the low end. Gentle compression on highs above 10kHz can add sizzle and detail. The key is to compress transparently, avoiding pumping artifacts.

Modern mastering tools like iZotope’s Ozone provide dedicated modules for honing clarity. The “Spectral Shaper” applies smoothing EQ to suppress resonances and masking. The “Vintage Tape” module smooths out peaks and enhances punch. Used subtly, these processing tools can work wonders for opening up a dense mix.

A case study in exemplary clarity is the mastering on Daft Punk’s 2013 album “Random Access Memories.” Despite the record’s density of instruments and arrangements, every element shines through in a clean, polished way. The mastering perfectly complements the pristine production quality.

II. Consistency

A hallmark of professional mastering is ensuring a cohesive, consistent listening experience across different playback environments. Well-mastered music should translate well whether heard on phone speakers, car stereos, club systems, or audiophile headphones.

The most fundamental step is volume leveling. A mastering engineer will set the integrated LUFS loudness of a song to match industry standards, typically -14 LUFS for streaming. This gives adequate headroom and allows the track to play at an appropriate volume on any system.

Stereo imaging should also be checked to ensure a centered, coherent soundstage. Left-right balance can be adjusted, and extreme panning reduced if necessary. Subtle mid/side processing may help glue the stereo spread for a more consistent effect.

Mastering engineers must understand the requirements for different release formats. For example, streaming platforms mandate specific loudness levels, while vinyl has physical limitations like bass phasing when cut too loud. A separate vinyl-specific master may use less limiting and custom EQ.

A standout case of cross-format consistency is the 2012 vinyl reissues of Beatles albums mastered by Sean Magee at Abbey Road Studios. He created new masters specifically optimized for vinyl, retaining dynamics while holding up against modern remasters. This set a new benchmark in reviving classics.

III. Color

When we talk of color in mastering, we mean the subtle tonal and textural flavors that bring vibes and character to a track. Mastering can impart polish while retaining the unique sonic signature of the mix. Or it can intentionally steer the color to suit the intended genre or mood.

Analog processing is renowned for adding pleasing color. Subtle tube warmth, tape saturation, and the natural compression of analog gear gives a master that elusive vintage vibe. Many plug-ins emulate analog hardware, but discerning engineers use this coloring judiciously.

Strategic harmonic saturation helps make mixes sound more full and vivid. Restrained exciter effects can enhance brightness and detail. Natural sounding reverbs also widen the perceived space and depth. All of this adds color without undermining the integrity of the mix.

The mastering color fits the production style. A sparse, dynamic folk record retains breath and transparency but gains sheen via subtle analog processing. A pumping EDM anthem goes for smashed limiting, radical EQ, and hyper-compressed maximization of impact. Mastering aligns the finish with the sound.

For example, compare Metallica’s "...And Justice for All" original mastering versus the controversial 2018 remaster. The new version added more low end and clarity, dividing fans who felt it abandoned the album's original thin, cold, and harsh sound. This shows how altering a record's color radically transforms its vibe.

IV. Clipping and Loudness

One of the most hotly debated aspects of mastering is managing clipping and loudness. The ongoing “Loudness War” refers to the trend of overly compressed masters sacrificing dynamics for loudness over the decades. Mastering engineers must strike the right balance.

Clipping occurs when a signal exceeds 0dBFS, the maximum loudness possible without distortion. Some clipping may be inevitable to achieve competitive loudness, but excessive clipping ruins quality. Careful transient-controls, lookahead limiting, and conservative gain ceilings reduce clipping artifacts.

Modern loudness normalization by streaming platforms like Spotify places less emphasis on loudness maximization in mastering. The goal now is achieving an integrated LUFS level matching the platform standard, not just making the track as loud as possible. This shift allows retaining more dynamics.

A widely praised example of a modern loud master that preserved dynamics is Nils Frahm’s 2018 album “All Melody.” Despite its expansive, open sound, the album hits -14 LUFS loudness. The engineer chose where to compress while allowing peaks to breathe. This demonstrates loudness done right in the streaming age.

Ultimately, the listener’s experience determines ideal clipping and loudness levels. A mastering engineer’s expertise comes from navigating this complex tradeoff successfully across years of clients and genres. There’s no single right answer, only what’s best for the individual track and its intended purpose.

V. The Future of Mastering

As production and distribution models continue evolving, mastering also adapts. We'll briefly explore some emerging trends and future possibilities in the world of mastering.

The role of dedicated mastering engineers is changing but not disappearing. More artists are self-mastering using software, but professional mastering is still crucial for complex, high-stakes releases. Engineers provide an expert final polish.

Cloud-based mastering allows remote collaboration. Engineers can access session files from anywhere to master, followed by quick turnaround on revisions. This facilitates better communication between mixers and mastering engineers.

Intelligent algorithms may assist in tasks like volume maximization, clipping prevention, and low-end phase correction. However, the nuanced human touch of a skilled engineer remains irreplaceable. Technology will enhance, not replace, the art.

Immersive audio formats like Dolby Atmos have new implications for spatial mastering techniques. Engineers develop expertise in these emerging formats early on. Music may be released with multiple master versions tailored per format.

Overall, discipline and quality control remain the core tenets of mastering. Tradition and innovation intersect to push the craft forward. Mastering continues serving the heart of music - delivering powerful experiences for listeners.

VI. Master with Icon

At Icon Collective, we provide aspiring producers all the practical guidance, tools and training needed to master professional recordings.

Our hands-on Music Production program teaches core mastering concepts in a real studio environment. You'll gain expertise in essential software like iZotope Ozone, FabFilter Pro-L2, and more using the same gear found in top studios.

But software alone doesn't make a master engineer. Icon's renowned mentors coach you through the nuanced art of mastering, from achieving clarity to loudness maximization to workflow efficiency. Their guidance helps you develop reliable critical listening skills and creative confidence.

You'll have access to studios packed with hardware from SPL, Rupert Neve Designs, Bettermaker and others used in the best mastering facilities. Our facilities and training are optimized for you to hone your craft.

Most importantly, Icon connects you directly with elite industry partners. You'll build relationships with producers and engineers while learning. And you'll work on real world projects applying your new skills.

The intensive year-long program condenses decades of knowledge into an accelerated curriculum. If you're serious about mastering music professionally, Icon gives you the tools, training and connections to excel.

Conclusion

Mastering can make or break a music release. By understanding the 4 C's - clarity, consistency, color and clipping/loudness - music producers can get the most out of the mastering process. While technology continues evolving, the human craft of mastering persists in bringing professional polish and impact to the music we love.

With the concepts in this guide under your belt, you have a head start to professional quality mastering. But that's only the beginning of the education at Icon Collective. Our renowned faculty and curriculum elevate your skills to the next level.

Our classes expose students to time-tested fundamentals and cutting-edge music technology. But more importantly, Icon nurtures the creative passion and thinking that brings original artistry to your productions.

The intensive hands-on training teaches you how to shine both technically and artistically. You'll emerge proficient not just in tools but in conveying meaning and emotion through music. This makes you invaluable to the industry.

Mastering completes the journey from musical inspiration to impactful finished record. We can't wait to join your journey with our mastering courses and see just how far your vision will take you. The only limit is your imagination.

Ready to master your music like an Icon?

References and Further Reading

Katz, Bob. Mastering Audio: The Art and the Science. Focal Press, 2007.
Boulanger, Richard. The Mastering Engineer's Handbook. MixBooks, 2019.
"Level Practices - Part 1: Streaming". iZotope. https://www.izotope.com/en/learn/level-practices-part-1-streaming.html
"Are We in a Post Loudness War World?". Waves Audio. 2022. https://www.waves.com/are-we-in-a-post-loudness-war-world
Owsinski, Bobby. The Mastering Engineer's Handbook. MixBooks, 2017.

Rick Rubin: Harnessing the Essence of Sound

Fri, 01 Dec 2023 22:07:22 GMT

Introduction

When legendary music producer Rick Rubin enters a studio, he does something unexpected: he strips it down. In an industry obsessed with excessive production, his radically minimalist approach breaks all conventions, focusing solely on amplifying the authentic spirit of artists and their music. Far from flashy, Rubin’s production style is intimate, raw, and at times uncomfortably sparse. And yet, it yields music which profoundly resonates on an emotional level rarely matched in popular music.

Over his illustrious career spanning four decades, Rubin has left an indelible mark on the musical landscape, shaping the trajectory of genres from rock, folk, rap and R&B. Renowned as one of the most influential producers alive today, Rubin has cultivated a signature sound which has redefined contemporary music. His unorthodox methods emphasize a “less is more” philosophy, exalting simplicity and clarity as the conduits to convey the essence of an artist.

Rubin’s Minimalist Manifesto

Ever since his early days as co-founder of legendary rap label Def Jam, Rick Rubin has championed his stripped-down sonic aesthetic. “I like things that go together but don’t match,” he has stated, encapsulating his disdain for overdone production. Rather than polishing sound, Rubin’s priority is always to magnify rawness, guiding artists to bare their souls free of embellishment.

While today, technology allows endless manipulation of sound for structural perfection, Rubin rebels against such exactitude. For him, technical precision is not the gateway to emotional authenticity; often, it achieves the opposite. Rubin thus embraces imperfection, with its jagged edges, seeking to amplify the flawed beauty which echoes human experience. His production recalibrates listeners to the essence beneath sound, jolting them to tap into often uncomfortable emotional spaces.

The Potent Alchemy of Grit and Grace

By foregrounding imperfections, Rubin produced albums which balance fragility with force. Take his collaborations with rock legend Johnny Cash in the 1990s on the ‘American Recordings’ series as an example. Though Cash was then struggling with waning popularity, Rubin heard deeper potential. He urged Cash to reimagine his identity through radically pared down versions of contemporary songs like “Hurt” by Nine Inch Nails, as well as original compositions.

Rubin’s production spotlighted Cash’s weathered baritone with just guitar or piano in the background. Gone were embellishments like lush string sections, background vocals or ornate percussion. Instead, Rubin zoomed in on Cash’s rich timbre punctuated with restraint to craft an eerie, gothic folk sound. Cash’s vulnerable voice thus took center stage to unleash the full force of his rugged poeticism.

The hauntingly sparse "Hurt" exemplifies Rubin’s masterful approach, where he adds by subtracting. Peeling off sentimental production, Rubin pierces through to pain. Cash’s frail voice etches out words like “broken”, “old” and “faded” against faint guitar over muted piano, evoking despair laced with defiant humanity. Just two minutes and seventeen seconds long, "Hurt" distills raw anguish into poetic economy.

Refining Voices: Rubin’s Collaborations with Adele

Rubin’s collaboration with yet another generational talent, this time singer Adele, demonstrates his uncanny skill to refine signature sounds of artists across genres. On Adele’s seminal 2011 album ‘21’, Rubin helped elevate her singular voice to rousing emotional heights.

Once again, his production relied not on ornamentation, but ruthless focus. Across heartrending ballad “Someone Like You”, piano chords echo Adele’s soaring vocals with no other accompaniment. Similarly, the breakup song “Don’t You Remember” features Adele’s voice over sole acoustic guitar. By clearing space for the sheer splendor of Adele’s mezzo-soprano range coupled with her evocative songwriting, Rubin creates an ambience of emotional intensity punctuated by stillness.

Listeners hang onto each breath and note, as Rubin spotlights Adele’s masterful vocal control and dynamics in conveying romantic dissolution. Just piano or guitar make Adele’s stellar vocals resonate louder in their unembellished glory. Pitch perfect heartbreak finds sublime expression through Rubin’s framework of less.

The Power of Sound and Space

Through his career, Rick Rubin has reinvented ideas of music production rooted in excess and extravagance. Instead of multiplying tracks, his hallmark is amplification through abridgment. Rubin embraces quietude and stillness to allow focus on tonality, lyrics and musicality in their purest forms.

His production examines negative sonic space, using intervals of silence to channel emotion. Especially in today’s deafened world, Rubin returns music to slowness and sparseness where each element carries weight. Listeners learn to recalibrate to subtleties - the sharp intake of breath, fingers gliding over guitar strings, the echo of piano chords.

By crafting space through strategic elimination rather than addition, Rubin shapes soundscapes that touch the soul. Artists under his direction foreground their vocal and writing brilliance by doing less. Out of emptiness emerges fullness - listeners engage viscerally with the grain of voice, the whisper of instruments. Silence sings.

The Sanctuary Studio: Creativity through Comfort

Beyond production strategies, Rubin’s stewardship of artists themselves facilitates his stripped-down sound. In an industry fueled by breakneck output, he focuses on nurturing unhurried creative processes.

Rubin curates studio environments specially designed for artist comfort. Famed examples include the legendary Shangri-La studios once owned by Bob Dylan and the iconic Village Recorder in West Los Angeles. Housing all kinds of eccentric instruments like zithers and dulcimers, these spaces brim over with inspiration.

More importantly, Rubin allows artists to jam and experiment freely without pressures of cost or schedules, often over months. For reclusive folk rock icon Tom Petty who found the studio intimidating, Rubin changed tack: they recorded an entire album in Petty’s living room filled with the musician’s guitars and favorite instruments instead.

Such thoughtful attention allows singers, rappers and bands to improvise, rework songs and follow creative digressions without fears of failure. Trust precipitates risk-taking. Out of the pressure cooker environment fueled by profit, Rubin’s studios breed authentic art.

Conclusion

Over decades, Rick Rubin has spearheaded a seismic shift in music production through the power of creative rebellion. Instead of keeping step with mainstream bombastic trends, he turned down the volume to amplify emotional clarity. The world’s highest selling producer, Rubin has won eight Grammys and worked with everyone from Beastie Boys to Justin Timberlake.

Nonetheless, Rubin remains an iconoclast, shattering norms of excess to excavate artistic integrity. His polemic against uniform perfection reveals flaws as pathways to meaning. Sometimes, he pushes artists out of their safety nets - rap group Run DMC recalls how he made them swap their flashy sneakers for street shoes to recover their roots.

Yet Rubin’s legacy is collaboration, not combat. By creating contexts for revelation, he guides artists to surprise themselves. His stripped-down production places center stage the things that truly matter - skillful songwriting, masterly musicianship and most importantly, unembellished voice quivering with feeling. Through his “less is more” leadership, the shy, bearded producer allows musicians to discover their boldest expressions.

Hip Hop History: From the Streets to the Mainstream

Thu, 18 May 2023 15:59:00 GMT

From the street corner to the world stage, hip hop has grown into one of the world’s most prominent musical genres and cultural influences. Explore significant events in hip hop history and its explosive evolution.

What is Hip Hop

Hip hop is more than music; it’s a cultural movement that incorporates different elements of art. Four foundational elements characterize hip hop culture. The original four main pillars of hip hop include DJing/turntablism, MCing/rapping, B-boying/breaking, and visual/graffiti art. These forms of expression have also developed into further subcultures with lasting legacies.

“Rap is something you do; hip hop is something you live.” KRS One

The intersection of these four elements also generated a cultural revolution that rapidly spread across the globe. The global influence of hip hop culture has shaped music styles, fashion, technology, art, entertainment, language, dance, education, politics, media, and more. To this day, hip hop continues to be a global phenomenon, developing new art forms that impact the lives of new and old generations.

Hip Hop Culture Origins

Hip hop is a subculture and an art movement that emerged from the Bronx in New York City during the early 1970s. Its development reflected the negative effects of post-industrial decline, political discourse, and a rapidly changing economy.

Looking back to New York City during this era, we see an economic collapse. The city’s economy was falling apart due to the decline of the manufacturing industry and construction of the Cross Bronx Expressway. Much of the white middle class moved to the suburbs to escape the social and economic challenges. The migration shifted demographics and segregated communities. Conditions worsened in neighborhoods prominently populated by African-Americans, Puerto Ricans, and Caribbean immigrants. Urban despair also brought rising crime, gang violence, and poverty.

Consequently, businesses closed their doors, causing many economic opportunities and sources of entertainment to evaporate. As a result, urban youth turned to the streets for recreation and self-expression. The abandoned buildings and parking lots set the stage for block parties. These block parties laid the groundwork for everything associated with early hip hop culture. DJs and MCs brought the music by setting up mobile “ Sound Systems ” introduced by Jamaican culture. Sheets of cardboard became dance floors for break-dancers, and brick walls transformed into canvases for graffiti.

A new era was on the rise fueled by sentiments of anger, hardship, and abandonment. However, the emerging hip hop movement transformed despair and racial barriers into numerous creative outlets. It also became an outlet to deal with violence.

Hip Hop Pioneers

Several people were influential in creating hip hop. However, the most notable pioneers are DJ Kool Herc, Afrika Bambaataa, and Grandmaster Flash. These three innovators are known as the “Holy Trinity” of hip hop.

DJ Kool Herc

One of the most influential hip hop pioneers was DJ Kool Herc, a Jamaican immigrant regarded as the founding father of hip hop. Kool Herc made history in 1973 when he and his sister hosted the “Back to School Jam” in the recreation room of their Bronx apartment building at 1520 Sedgwick Avenue. This historical party is recognized for launching the hip hop movement.

DJ Kool Herc also introduced the “breakbeat” DJ technique – a mixing practice he adapted from Jamaican dub music. However, Kool Herc would play funk, soul, and other genres with percussive sections. Using a pair of turntables, Kool Herc would play two copies of the same record and then switch between them to extend the percussive section known as the break. Kool Herc named this breakbeat juggling style of DJing “The Merry-Go-Round.” This breakbeat turntablism quickly became influential in the rise of hip hop music, rapping, and breakdancing.

The break section was also the most anticipated part of a song where people danced the most. Break-dancers would form dancer circles and save their best dance moves for the break. Kool Herc named the people dancing to his music B-Boys and B-Girls, which was short for Break-Boys and Break-Girls. Overtime, breaking evolved and became a global subculture that transcended into the mainstream.

Kool Herc also helped develop the rhythmic spoken delivery of rhymes and wordplay performed by MCs. He would speak in rhythm and rhyme over instrumental parts of songs to hype the crowd. His style of lyrical chanting and rhythmic wordplay was an early form of rapping inspired by the Jamaican tradition of toasting. He would shout phrases like “B-Boys, B-Girls, are you ready? Keep on rock steady,” “This is the joint! Herc beat on the point,” “To the beat, y’all,” and “You don’t stop!”

Kool Herc also enlisted his friend Coke La Rock to control the mic at their parties. During one party, Coke La Rock dropped the line “There’s not a man that can’t be thrown, not a horse that can’t be rode, a bull that can’t be stopped, there’s not a disco that I Coke La Rock can’t rock.” Many consider this verse as the first rap lyrics and Coke La Rock as the first MC of hip hop.

Afrika Bambaataa

Another influential figure of hip hop to emerge from New York City was Afrika Bambaataa, also known as “The Godfather.” Bambaataa was a pioneering DJ and music producer who organized block parties in the Brox during the late 1970s. He was also a visionary who helped guide the city’s youth away from gang life, drugs, and violence. He formed Universal Zulu Nation , a music-oriented organization that encourages peace and unity through the expressions of hip hop culture. Members introduced urban youth to DJing, breakdancing, rapping, and visual art. Soon after, Bambaataa categorized these forms of expression as the “four elements” of hip hop. To this day, Zulu Nation continues to spread hip hop culture throughout the world.

In 1982, Afrika Bambaataa and the Soul Sonic Force released “Planet Rock,” one of the most influential early hip hop songs. Instead of rapping over funk beats, Bambaataa created an electronic sound by sampling Kraftwerk and using the Roland TR-808 drum machine. The song helped popularize the TR-808, which became a staple of hip hop music.

Grandmaster Flash

Grandmaster Flash is another innovative DJ from the Bronx, New York City. He was the first DJ to manipulate records in a backward, forward or counterclockwise motion. He also invented distinct DJing techniques such as the backspin, cutting, punch phrasing, and scratching.

Grandmaster Flash also organized a group called Grandmaster Flash and the Furious Five in 1976. The group became widely acknowledged as one of the most influential hip hop acts. They delivered a unique style by trading off lyrics between four rappers and blending them with Flash’s unrivaled DJ skills. Flash would also perform acrobatic DJing skills by manipulating vinyl with his fingers, toes, elbows, and objects.

Grandmaster Flash and the Furious Five had several influential songs. However, their most prominent song was “The Message.” This critical hit further solidified rap as a genre and put rappers at the forefront for the first time. The powerful lyrics also detailed the grim realities of life in the ghetto, which was a significant shift from the traditional rhythmic chants of early hip hop.

In 2007, Grandmaster Flash and the Furious Five made history again. The group became the first hip hop act inducted into the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame.

Early Music Technology

The early 1980s was a vital turning point for hip hop and music production . Synthesizers, samplers, and drum machines became cheaper and more accessible. Roland’s iconic TR-808 drum machine became the weapon of choice. Instead of relying on DJ breakbeats, music producers could now program original drum patterns. The TR-808 also became a cornerstone of hip hop for its powerful bass drum sound.

Sampling technology also emerged during the 1980s. DJs experimented with early samplers such as the Linn 9000, E-mu SP-1200, and the Akai MPC60. They used these samplers to piece together breaks in songs rather than using turntables. Samplers also allowed producers to perform, rearrange sections, sequence arrangments, edit, and mix music in new ways. These production methods were an early form of remixing.

Over time sampling technology advanced. A new generation of samplers such as the AKAI S900 provided increased memory, higher sampling rates, better editing capabilities, and more. Music producers experimented with techniques such as layering sounds, looping, sequencing elaborate arrangements, adding effects, and more.

Turntable and mixer technology also advanced. There was an increase of DJs scratching records to create new sounds and effects. The most influential turntable was the Technics SL-1200 due to its strong motor, durability, and fidelity.

The Golden Age of Hip Hop

During the mid 1980s and early 1990s, hip hop spread across the country in full force. It brought an era that significantly transformed hip hop culture. This new era became known as “the golden age of hip hop.” Many characterize this turning point by its explosion of diversity, influence, stylistic innovation, and mainstream success.

Record labels recognized the genre as an emerging trend and invested a lot of money into the movement. Independent record labels like Tommy Boy, Prism Records, and Def Jam became successful. They were releasing records at a fast pace in response to the demand generated by local radio stations and club DJs.

New scenes and different styles of hip hop also emerged from city to city as the culture popularized. However, hip hop music was still mostly experimental. Although, the new generation of hip hop producers had access to more advanced drum machines and samplers that allowed them to take hip hop music to the next level.

One of the definitive characteristics of hip hop’s golden age was the heavy use of sampled music. No copyright laws protected music from being sampled, so artists could use samples from a variety of sources without legal troubles. They were capturing samples from various genres ranging from jazz to rock music. However, sampling was not limited to music. R.Z.A. of the Wu-Tang Clan sampled sound clips from his collection of 1970s Kung Fu films.

The lyrical content of hip hop developed as well. The early rhythmic chants of the 1970s progressed into metaphorical lyrics exploring a range of subjects. Artists also performed the lyrics over a more complex, multi-layered instrumental arrangement. Artists such as Melle Mel, KRS-One, Rakim, Chuck D, and Warp 9 were pivotal in advancing hip hop lyrics and the art of rapping.

There was also a wave of new school rappers who were pivotal in bringing hip hop to the mainstream. At the forefront was RUN DMC, a hip hop trio who fused rap with hard rock. They took rap into the Top Ten when they collaborated with Aerosmith on a rap remake of “Walk This Way.” The single conquered the radio and MTV, catapulting rap even further into the mainstream. Some other innovators in the golden age of hip hop were L.L. Cool J, Public Enemy, the Beastie Boys, A Tribe Called Quest, and many others.

It wasn’t just the music propelling hip hop culture. Hip hop fashion also hit the mainstream. Various clothes, shoes, accessories, and hairstyles became a form of expression. Street slang, later known as Ebonics, also crossed over into the mainstream. For example, the words “bling” and “fo’ shizzle” have been added to the Oxford English Dictionary.

Sampling and Copyright Laws

Rap music heavily used sampling in the early 1990s. Original copyright owners of the music being sampled heard parts of their songs in new rap music. They didn’t like other artists cashing in on their work and wanted compensation for the use of their music.

After many legal actions, the Government passed several copyright enforcement laws. They required artists to clear all samples in advance to avoid lawsuits. However, clearing samples was expensive, and many record labels could not afford to clear all the samples. Hip hop music took a whole new direction, and producers had to make original sounds rather than relying heavily on samples. We heard a different sound because producers were no longer sampling commercially released songs. As a result, the music lost much of its jazz and soul influences.

Mainstream Influences

Hip hop music became even more commercial, becoming the top-selling music genre by the late 1990s. Different regional styles also emerged such as West Coast hip hop, gangster rap, Southern rap, rap rock, and various other genres. A new wave of artists also emerged, such as N.W.A., Dr. Dre, Tupac Shakur, Snoop Dog, the Notorious B.I.G., Nas, Jay-Z, and several others. By the end of the decade, hip hop was an integral part of popular music. It even found its way into mainstream pop and electronic music.

Conclusion

Hip hop history has a fascinating story worth exploring more. This cultural movement has seen considerable change and evolution since its inception in the seventies. What began as a local movement intended to provide a haven for African-American and Puerto Rican youth in New York City, has become a global phenomenon. To this day, hip hop continues to be a dominant force influencing the culture around the world.

Experience the ICON Collective Campus

Tue, 22 Feb 2022 19:44:00 GMT

Welcome to the new ICON Collective. A hub for all forms of creation. A breeding ground for collaboration and a catalyst for careers. Activate your sound. Tell your story.

How to sing higher (and lower) without straining

Wed, 29 Sep 2021 17:26:00 GMT

As human beings, we rely largely on our bodies to communicate. Whether you are speaking or singing, not only are the vocal cords at work so much as the entire body. Every athlete understands the importance of a thorough warm-up to circulate blood, optimize performance, and avoid injury, and singing can be compared to intensive sport. When it comes to singing efficiently and impressively, maintaining proper form is essential, as it ensures the health of your vocal folds and, ultimately, how far you can stretch your vocal range. In this guide we will delve into how using the SOVT straw during your warm-ups can expand your vocal range and keep you singing for years to come.

What is SOVT?

SOVT stands for “Semi-Occluded Vocal Tract.” The vocal tract is a tube through which air passes from your lungs and out your mouth. Inside this tube is your larynx, or your “voice box,” which contains a couple of tiny, intricate muscles known as vocal folds that help you make sound. When you speak, sing, or make subtle changes above the larynx, like moving your tongue, lips, jaw, or soft palate, the shape of your vocal tract changes too. “Occlusion” is a fancy word for “blockage” or “narrowing.” So, a semi-occluded vocal tract is a partial blockage of the mouth. SOVT exercises were primarily used by speech language pathologists in voice therapy, but singers and vocal coaches have popularized them in recent years as the terminology and methods have become more commonly available.

How does the SOVT straw help?

Your vocal folds (or vocal cords) are quite small; their lengths in diameter can range from the size of the diameter of a dime to that of a nickel. In order to make sound, the vocal folds must oscillate, sometimes thousands of times a second. When we sing, the force of the air from our lungs gets sent straight to the vocal folds, prompting oscillation. Simultaneously, the vocal folds must resist the intensity of the air pressure all on their own. In order to sing efficiently and reduce collision of the vocal cords, which causes fatigue and can ultimately lead to damage, proper form is imperative.

When we put something in the way of our vocal tract, like humming or singing from a straw, some of the air leaving our mouth when we sing gets reflected back down to the vocal cords. This is known as back pressure. When you introduce back pressure, the vocal folds now have pressure both underneath them and above them, creating an “air cushioning” effect. This is beneficial because it relieves the vocal folds of resisting lung pressure on their own, the vocal folds in turn experience less collision, and the air particles trapped in our vocal tract are able to vibrate in an acoustic space, encouraging efficient vocal cord oscillation.

What kind of straw do I use?

The resistance you get depends on the diameter of the straw. If you want more of an athletic workout, you will do well with a thinner straw. If you want a more therapeutic massage for your voice, opt for a straw with a thicker diameter. For your convenience and modular experience, the SOVT straw can be manipulated to vary in length and aperture, so you can customize your workout to fit your resistance and vocal needs.

What are the exercises?

Put the SOVT straw in your mouth as you would if you were about to sip a drink and try some of these basic warm-up exercises.

How long do I exercise for?

Every body, and thus every voice, is different. For best results, do the exercises for 5 minutes at a time and spaced out throughout the day. 15 minutes total each day is more than enough, but experiment with your voice and see if you can benefit from even more.

Note on longevity

Remain relaxed when doing these exercises and feel free to play. Pay attention to your voice and its needs. The SOVT straw is not a cure-all by any means, but it can assist in training safely while you work on the fundamentals and on increasing your range. If you are going about your day or working through a song and feeling tired or strained, take out the straw and perform the aforementioned exercises. Build upon your foundation daily and you will achieve a flexible, effortless voice to be reckoned with.

3 Pillars Of Knowledge Our Q&A Guests Provide To The Students

Tue, 02 Mar 2021 22:50:00 GMT

Since ICON first opened its doors in 2005, we have invited Q&A guests from all around the industry to share their professional insight with the Collective. Producers, managers, A&R reps, we welcome all specialties because they can all provide knowledg e essential to thrive in the modern music business. 2020-2021 presented heretofore unseen challenges for everyone working in music including us. We are very grateful to all the guests who were generous enough to share their time with Collective during this pandemic. Let’s take a look at how these sessions can benefit growing creatives.

QUICK LINKS

Professional Experience

The music industry can provide any number of professions for hungry creatives. In fact, in 2021 most professions are self-made as people adopt numerous different skillsets to adapt to an ever-changing business. How often do you hear of a music professional who is only a producer? Only an engineer? Only a manager?

This is why we are sure to welcome guests from all corners of the professional music market. Students have the opportunity to get a first-hand look into various careers, perhaps finding passion for an exploit they never considered before.

Insight

Is there any better way to learn than from those who are doing what you want to do? The music industry is probably one of the most glamorized industries in the world. Enormous stages in front of thousands of people. Illustrious award ceremonies. Million dollar studios with more knobs and lights to count.

The glamour can draw so many people in, but it’s not what makes them stick around. Only true passion for the craft can do that. The Q&A guests we invite to speak to the Collective give insight into how to fully express your passion behind the glitzy facade.

The music business is a complicated landscape, and professional insight is the best way to navigate it without sacrificing your artistic integrity.

Access

Your net work is your net worth, and beyond the networking opportunities the Collective has among the staff and their fellow students, these Q&A’s offer networking opportunities with active professionals. Numerous collaborations have resulted between our students and Q&A guests over the years.

We reserve these sessions for our students not just because we want to give them exclusive access, but because we want to put our Q&A guests in a room with the cream of the crop. Passionate creatives who are prime to work with them. Mentoring up and coming artists is a incredibly rewarding process.

For access to all of our exclusive Q&A’s apply for our programs! We have space in our Music Production, Vocal Artist, and Music Business programs.

Modulation Effects Tips

Wed, 07 Oct 2020 19:18:12 GMT

HOW MODULATION EFFECTS WILL IMPROVE YOUR MUSIC

What is modulation in music production? Learn how the different modulation effects and techniques can make your music more interesting.

WHAT ARE MODULATION EFFECTS IN MUSIC PRODUCTION?

Modulation effects change the property of sound over time. Waveform properties include frequency, amplitude, timbre, wavelength, time, phase, and velocity. The modulation of these characteristics produces a sense of movement, dimension, and depth.

Modulation alone is not an effect. It’s a process audio effects and musical instruments use to manipulate sounds. Modulation requires a source signal called a modulator to control another signal called a carrier.

There are several ways to process audio with modulation. This guide explains the different ways to manipulate sound using modulation effects and synthesis techniques.

WHAT IS A MODULATOR?

Modulators or “source signals” control an input audio signal called a carrier. The modulator does not make a sound. Instead, it changes the original carrier sound wave.

Typical modulation waveforms include sine, square, sawtooth, triangle, ramp, and pulse. For example:

Modulating the amplitude of a sound will create a tremolo effect
Modulating the frequency of a sound will create a vibrato effect
Modulating the phase will create a phaser effect
Modulating the sound using delay will create a flanger effect

You can also modulate various parameters on audio effects and instruments. For example, you can route a modulation source to modulate pitch, volume, panning, filter cutoff frequency, resonance, wavetables, and more.

With digital music production software like Ableton Live and Logic Pro , you can modulate nearly everything!

Common modulator sources are LFO, ADSR envelopes, mod wheels, and step sequencers. They’re available on synthesizers, drum machines, samplers, controllers, and audio effects.

LFO MODULATION

A Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) is an integral part of modulation. An LFO modulation source produces a repeating signal to control a destination signal.

Also, waveform shapes determine the behavior of an LFOs repeating signal. For example, most LFOs have a selection of waveform shapes to control how the signal will rise and fall. They also have controls to change the amplitude and frequency rate of the signal.

Common LFO modulation targets are the filter frequency cutoff or volume control. For example, you can create bass wobbles by either modulating the volume or filter cutoff.

ADSR ENVELOPE MODULATION

ADSR means Attack, Decay, Sustain, and Release. Use these four envelopes to shape a sounds timbre or to modulate other parameters.

Modulation envelopes do not create a continuous signal like an LFO. Instead, they’re triggered by a note, sidechain input, automation, or user action like a key press.

A typical modulation target for an envelope is the filter frequency cutoff. For example, you can make the filter cutoff open when a note plays.

MODULATION WHEEL

A mod wheel is an expression control on synthesizers, keyboards, and MIDI controllers. It’s common to apply pitch-bending or vibrato with a mod wheel.

For example, you can use a mod wheel as a pitch shifter. Move the wheel up or down to bend the pitch of various notes. You can also assign a mod wheel to volume, filter frequency, and more.

Many modern controllers have a similar feature called aftertouch. Aftertouch is a pressure-sensitive touch strip used to modulate various parameters.

STEP SEQUENCER MODULATION

Step sequencers ar e programmable modules that generate note patterns. A step sequencer can also modulate various parameters on a synthesizer.

Use a step sequencer as a modulation source to create simple or complex rhythmic patterns. Modulating sound with a step sequencer also gives you more control. You can edit the individual steps to modulate various parameters in several ways.

Common step sequencer modulation targets are the filter frequency cutoff or volume control. For example, you can make various steps open or close the filter cutoff at different amounts.

SIX TYPES OF MODULATION EFFECTS

Common modulation effects include chorus , flanger , phaser , tremolo , vibrato , auto-pan , and LFO .

These audio effects are excellent for sound design and creative mixing. They add movement, depth, width, and character to sounds.

1. CHORUS EFFECTS

Chorus effects add stereo width and richness to sounds. The effect sounds thicker than the original signal. It also adds a lush, shimmering quality.

Stereo chorus also helps improve weak or thin sounds. It creates a sense of width and depth that makes sounds fuller. Try it on vocal sounds or synth sounds to widen the stereo image!

The chorus effect duplicates the incoming signal and then mixes it with pitch-shifted and delayed copies. An LFO then modulates the delay and pitch between the signals. They also have depth and rate controls to make the effect more or less intense.

2. FLANGER EFFECTS

Flangers are similar to chorus effects. However, a flanger produces a more dramatic effect than a chorus.

Flanging also mixes the source signal with a slightly delayed processed signal. The difference is flanging uses a shorter delay time between the copies. Flangers also have a feedback control. You can feed the effected signal back into the original signal to exaggerate the effect further.

Flanger effects are great for generating complex harmonic sounds. The shorter delay produces a “comb filtering” effect caused by phase cancellation. This creates a swirling, underwater texture. You can also increase the feedback to generate metallic, robot-like results.

3. PHASER EFFECTS

Phasers or phase shifters are also similar to chorus and flanging effects. However, the phasing effects sound is more subtle than the harsher flanging effect.

A phase shifter also splits the signal into two identical copies, modulates one, and mixes them. The difference is phasers shift the waveform phase of the copied signal rather than delaying it.

Moreover, phasers use “all-pass filters” to create a phase shift in the sound’s frequency. This makes small notches spaced evenly across the frequency spectrum.

An LFO then controls the movement of those filters across the phase-shifted signals. Sweeping through the notches and peaks with a filter causes phase cancellation. The result produces the signature whoosh sound of a phaser.

4. TREMOLO EFFECTS

Tremolo effects rhythmically change the volume of a signal. They also have an LFO to control the volume depth and rate. Most tremolos also have selectable waveform shapes to control how the volume rises and falls.

Tremolo is useful for creating gentle or intense stuttering and pulsating effects. You can generate tremolo effects in two ways. Use a dedicated tremolo effect or modulate a plugin’s volume control with an LFO.

5. VIBRATO EFFECTS

Vibrato effects change the pitch of a signal. An LFO controls the pitching depth and rate. Most vibrato effects also have selectable waveform shapes to control how the pitch rises and falls.

Applying subtle amounts of pitch modulation to notes or the incoming signal can make a sound more lively. It creates a sense of movement and rhythm. Vibrato can also help sounds stand out in the mix.

6. AUTO-PAN EFFECTS

An auto-pan effect rhythmically changes the panning position of a signal. An LFO controls the panning width and rate for the left and right stereo channels. Most auto-pan effects also have selectable waveform shapes to control the panning behavior.

Auto-pan effects can also manipulate the amplitude of a signal. For example, you can create tremolo and beat-synchronized chopping effects. Check out our creative Ableton Live Auto Pan tips below!

THE THREE TYPES OF MODULATION SYNTHESIS

Modulation is typical in synthesis. It enriches the character of the sound and adds variance. Some synthesis techniques also use modulation to create sound. In addition, many have a modulation section to route signals to various destinations.

The three main modulation types used in synthesis are Amplitude Modulation , Frequency Modulation , and Ring Modulation .

1. AMPLITUDE MODULATION (AM)

Amplitude modulation or AM synthesis uses one oscillator to modulate the amplitude of another oscillator. It’s the simplest and earliest type of synthesis.

AM synthesis is also a form of tremolo. For example, one oscillator is the carrier and a second oscillator is a modulator. The modulator’s waveform drives the volume of the audible carrier signal. Then you can adjust the modulator’s depth control and rate control to tune your sound.

Note : The carrier can be any sound source like vocals, samples, or other instruments.

2. FREQUENCY MODULATION (FM)

Frequency modulation or FM synthesis is a versatile synthesis technique. FM synthesis can create complex and harmonically rich textures. Sounds you cannot make with AM synthesis!

The oscillators in FM synthesis are known as “operators.” Operators can function as a modulator or a carrier. FM synthesizers have several operators you can link in various ways.

FM synthesis creates complex waveforms by modulating the carrier frequency using the waveforms of other operators. The result is like an extreme form of vibrato.

For example, the frequency modulation makes the pitch of the carrier go up and down. This behavior is like a basic vibrato. Increasing the modulator frequency creates a faster vibrato, making the signal audible. At a certain point, you stop hearing vibrato and hear new frequencies appear in your carrier.

The new harmonics produced by FM are known as sidebands. Evenly divisible harmonic overtones make harmonic sounds. Whereas non-integer multiples of overtones create inharmonic sounds. You can mix and manipulate these sounds to create interesting textures.

3. RING MODULATION (RM)

Ring modulation multiplies two input signals to create new frequencies. The output is the sum and difference of the frequencies present in each waveform.

Ring modulators create intriguing textures and movement. The overtones produce inharmonic sounds with robotic, metallic, and ringing qualities.

Also, ring modulation is similar to amplitude modulation. The main difference is ring modulation cancels frequencies from the output signal. The carrier wave is not present in the resulting sound. Whereas AM contains the original carrier wave and the new frequencies produced by the modulation.

CONCLUSION

Modulation is a great way to make your music more enjoyable. We encourage you to experiment with the modulation effects. Plus, music technology continues to create innovative sound manipulating tools!

Try subtle and extreme settings to manipulate audio in unique ways. However, modulate sounds with caution. Excessive use can ruin your mix.

How Modulation Effects Will Improve Your Music

Wed, 07 Oct 2020 14:30:00 GMT

What is modulation in music production? Learn how the different modulation effects and techniques can make your music more interesting.

What are Modulation Effects in Music Production?

There are several ways to process audio with modulation. This guide explains the different ways to manipulate sound using modulation effects and synthesis techniques.

What is a Modulator?

Modulators or “source signals” control an input audio signal called a carrier. The modulator does not make a sound. Instead, it changes the original carrier sound wave.

Typical modulation waveforms include sine, square, sawtooth, triangle, ramp, and pulse. For example:

With digital music production software like Ableton Live and Logic Pro , you can modulate nearly everything!

Common modulator sources are LFO, ADSR envelopes, mod wheels, and step sequencers. They’re available on synthesizers, drum machines, samplers, controllers, and audio effects.

LFO Modulation

A Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) is an integral part of modulation. An LFO modulation source produces a repeating signal to control a destination signal.

Common LFO modulation targets are the filter frequency cutoff or volume control. For example, you can create bass wobbles by either modulating the volume or filter cutoff.

ADSR Envelope Modulation

ADSR means Attack, Decay, Sustain, and Release. Use these four envelopes to shape a sounds timbre or to modulate other parameters.

Modulation envelopes do not create a continuous signal like an LFO. Instead, they’re triggered by a note, sidechain input, automation, or user action like a key press.

A typical modulation target for an envelope is the filter frequency cutoff. For example, you can make the filter cutoff open when a note plays.

Modulation Wheel

A mod wheel is an expression control on synthesizers, keyboards, and MIDI controllers. It’s common to apply pitch-bending or vibrato with a mod wheel.

For example, you can use a mod wheel as a pitch shifter. Move the wheel up or down to bend the pitch of various notes. You can also assign a mod wheel to volume, filter frequency, and more.

Many modern controllers have a similar feature called aftertouch. Aftertouch is a pressure-sensitive touch strip used to modulate various parameters.

Step Sequencer Modulation

Step sequencers are programmable modules that generate note patterns. A step sequencer can also modulate various parameters on a synthesizer.

Common step sequencer modulation targets are the filter frequency cutoff or volume control. For example, you can make various steps open or close the filter cutoff at different amounts.

Six Types of Modulation Effects

Common modulation effects include chorus , flanger , phaser , tremolo , vibrato , auto-pan , and LFO .

These audio effects are excellent for sound design and creative mixing. They add movement, depth, width, and character to sounds.

1. Chorus Effects

Chorus effects add stereo width and richness to sounds. The effect sounds thicker than the original signal. It also adds a lush, shimmering quality.

Stereo chorus also helps improve weak or thin sounds. It creates a sense of width and depth that makes sounds fuller. Try it on vocal sounds or synth sounds to widen the stereo image!

2. Flanger Effects

Flangers are similar to chorus effects. However, a flanger produces a more dramatic effect than a chorus.

3. Phaser Effects

Phasers or phase shifters are also similar to chorus and flanging effects. However, the phasing effects sound is more subtle than the harsher flanging effect.

A phase shifter also splits the signal into two identical copies, modulates one, and mixes them. The difference is phasers shift the waveform phase of the copied signal rather than delaying it.

Moreover, phasers use “all-pass filters” to create a phase shift in the sound’s frequency. This makes small notches spaced evenly across the frequency spectrum.

4. Tremolo Effects

5. Vibrato Effects

Vibrato effects change the pitch of a signal. An LFO controls the pitching depth and rate. Most vibrato effects also have selectable waveform shapes to control how the pitch rises and falls.

Applying subtle amounts of pitch modulation to notes or the incoming signal can make a sound more lively. It creates a sense of movement and rhythm. Vibrato can also help sounds stand out in the mix.

6. Auto-Pan Effects

Auto-pan effects can also manipulate the amplitude of a signal. For example, you can create tremolo and beat-synchronized chopping effects. Check out our creative Ableton Live Auto Pan tips below!

[yuzo id=”13031″]

The Three Types of Modulation Synthesis

The three main modulation types used in synthesis are Amplitude Modulation , Frequency Modulation , and Ring Modulation .

1. Amplitude Modulation (AM)

Amplitude modulation or AM synthesis uses one oscillator to modulate the amplitude of another oscillator. It’s the simplest and earliest type of synthesis.

Note : The carrier can be any sound source like vocals, samples, or other instruments.

2. Frequency Modulation (FM)

Frequency modulation or FM synthesis is a versatile synthesis technique. FM synthesis can create complex and harmonically rich textures. Sounds you cannot make with AM synthesis!

The oscillators in FM synthesis are known as “operators.” Operators can function as a modulator or a carrier. FM synthesizers have several operators you can link in various ways.

FM synthesis creates complex waveforms by modulating the carrier frequency using the waveforms of other operators. The result is like an extreme form of vibrato.

3. Ring Modulation (RM)

Ring modulation multiplies two input signals to create new frequencies. The output is the sum and difference of the frequencies present in each waveform.

Ring modulators create intriguing textures and movement. The overtones produce inharmonic sounds with robotic, metallic, and ringing qualities.

Conclusion

Try subtle and extreme settings to manipulate audio in unique ways. However, modulate sounds with caution. Excessive use can ruin your mix.

How to Make A Hip Hop Beat?

Thu, 01 Oct 2020 14:54:00 GMT

Learn how to make a hip hop beat in Ableton Live. This beginner’s guide to beat-making takes you through the steps. FREE Live project download included!

Hip hop is one of the most popular music genres in the world. Here are ten hip hop production tips using Ableton Live .

We’ve also provided an example Live 10 project containing the MIDI clips created in this tutorial. Download the project FREE .

Download “Hip Hop Beat Project” Hip-Hop-Beat-Project.zip – Downloaded 3003 times –

What do I Need to Make Beats?

Every beat-maker will have a personalized setup. To make beats with the basics, you’ll need:

How To Make A Hip Hop Beat?

This guide to making beats for beginners takes you through twelve fundamental steps of creating a modern hip hop beat.

Here is the complete hip hop beat created in this tutorial.

1. Develop a Workflow That Works Best for You

There are several ways to make beats in Ableton Live. You can build your beats in Arrangement View or Session View.

You can also sequence your drum hits using audio samples, MIDI, or a combination of both.

In addition, Live has several features to assist your creativity. For example, you can:

Tip : If you’re new to making beats, create a bar or two at a time. Then duplicate that loop and change the pattern. Repeat this process until you have an eight or sixteen bar drum loop. This technique works great for adding variation without feeling overwhelmed.

2. Set the Tempo

Several factors determine the style (or genre) of music, including the sounds, patterns, and tempo used.

For example, hip hop music typically has a tempo range of 60-100 BPM. You can also double the actual tempo to create a half-time feel.

Half-time and double-time beats are most common in hip hop, trap, and R&B. This approach makes it easier to program faster percussion rolls with hi-hats, snares, etc.

Doubling the tempo doesn’t change the time signature. It only changes the feel of the rhythm. There are still four beats per bar in double-time.

For example, a standard 4/4 beat places the snare on the second and fourth beats. Whereas double-time places the snare on the third beat.

Steps:

Set your tempo in Live from the Control Bar in the upper left side of the interface.

The drum rhythm in this tutorial has a half-time feel. It’s in 4/4 time with a tempo of 150 BPM. You could also make this same beat at 75 BPM.

Tip : Some find it easier to start with slower tempos while programming beats. Then, speed up the tempo once the drum groove is complete.

3. Load a Drum Rack Preset

One of the fastest ways to make beats is to sketch them out in Live with Drum Rack presets. Live comes loaded with several Drum Rack kits . Knowing how to locate, utilize, and manipulate these sounds is essential for streamlining your creative workflow.

It’s faster to use a preset and then replace drum and percussion samples after you build a foundation. Avoid slowing your creativity fussing with sample selection before you have a drum pattern.

Steps:

Create a drum kit by dragging a Drum Rack present from the browser into a MIDI track.

Next, double-click in an empty clip slot to create a MIDI clip. Then click the clip to reveal the MIDI Note Editor with all the drum samples. The MIDI Editor is where you’ll build your drum pattern.

4. Create a Kick Drum and Snare Pattern

The kick and snare groove will be the foundation of your beat. The kick drum emphasizes the downbeats and provides momentum. The snare drum acts as the backbeat and usually plays on unstressed positions.

For example, a simple 4/4 time hip hop groove places the kick on beats one and three. Then the snare responds to the kick on beats two and four.

In double-time, the main snare most always plays on the third beat. Then you can experiment with different kick patterns between each snare.

There are no set rules! Do what sounds good to you and works with the other elements in the mix.

Steps:

Start by creating a simple drum pattern you can build on. It’s easier to develop more complex beats once you have a basic pattern.

This example is a two-bar loop. The main snare plays on the third throughout the entire beat. Later in the process, you can add ghost snares between the main snares.

Kick patterns vary in hip hop. You have a lot of freedom when programming a kicks. Use your ears to determine what sounds good to you. This example uses a typical kick pattern.

Later in the process, we’ll duplicate the loop and edit the pattern to create variation. For example, move notes and add a ghost kick.

Remember to keep it simple. Get the backbone of your beat down. Then go back to add ghost kicks and snares, variation, and other elements.

Also, leave enough space for the vocal track, bassline, and melody.

5. Add a Hi-Hat Pattern

Hip hop also relies heavily on hi-hats to create groove and energy.

Hip hop beats use a combination of closed and open hi-hat patterns. Closed hats typically switch between 16th, 32nd, and 8th note patterns. Whereas open hats usually play on the offbeats.

Triplet fills are also effective in modern hip hop. Triplets are great for transitions and adding energy to keep the beat exciting.

Steps:

Start with a closed hat on every eighth or sixteenth note. This example places a hi-hat on every eighth note.

Once your beat develops, delete notes, rearrange notes, add fills, and apply velocity to create more interesting patterns.

6. Duplicate the Loop and Add Variation

Repeating this two-bar loop throughout the track will sound repetitive and boring. Make your beats interesting by adding variation.

The best way to add variation is to duplicate the loop and change the pattern. Repeat this process until you have an eight or sixteen bar drum loop.

Steps:

First, duplicate the loop. Second, edit the kick, snare, and hat patterns. Repeat this process until you have an eight or sixteen bar drum loop.

For this example, look at how the kick pattern changes over eight bars. There is also an added ghost kick in the first bar. Lastly, 32nd note hi-hat fills break up the repetitiveness and gives the beat more energy.

Edit your patterns by rearranging, deleting, and adding notes to create variation. But don’t go overboard. Make sure your beat flows with no awkward shifts in the rhythm.

7. Humanize Your Drums

Humanizing your beats is essential in hip hop. Injecting human character into your music is a great way to boost expression and realism.

A real drummer won’t have perfect timing and will never hit every kick, snare, or cymbal with the same velocity. The subtle variations and imperfections give the groove a natural vibe. Conversely, programmed MIDI drum sequences sound robotic, repetitive, and lifeless.

Music is all about movement, and humanizing your drums is a great way to keep your listeners moving.

These techniques offer creative ways to humanize your static drum patterns:

Adjust the Velocity on Various Hits

Live’s velocity markers set the volume or amplitude of each MIDI note. Use them to control how hard or soft a MIDI note sounds when played.

Giving your drum hits different velocity values will make them sound less rigid. The subtle differences in volume will also give your rhythms movement and syncopation. These moves sound more pleasing to listeners.

For example, apply different amounts of velocity to your hi-hat pattern. Use higher velocity values to emphasize downbeats and lower values for offbeats. Also, on fills, try ramping up the velocity from quiet to loud. This move is great for transitions.

Changing the velocity of a MIDI note in Live is easy. Click and drag a note’s velocity marker in the Velocity Editor.

The velocity changes on the hi-hat pattern make a huge difference. There are also slightly lower velocity values on the snares. Lastly, the kick pattern stays consistent at 100% velocity except for the ghost kick.

Listen how the drum loop has more groove and vibe. This method is the easiest way to humanize drums!

Trigger Variations of a Sample

Inject life into your MIDI drum patterns by triggering different versions of the same sample. This technique adds variation to the timbre of each drum hit.

Set up Drum Rack to trigger different samples with these steps:

Try this technique to humanize snares, claps, and hats.

Apply Swing From Live’s Groove Library

Applying groove changes the timing and feel of drum patterns. Notes 100% quantized to the grid can sound robotic, rigid, and repetitive.

Hip hop beats have swing and groove. However, some newer styles keep hits 100% quantized. It’s your choice!

You can manually move drum hits off the grid slightly or modify their timing with Live’s groove files. Live’s browser has a large selection of grooves you can drop onto audio and MIDI clips.

Once you’ve applied a groove file, modify its behavior by adjusting its controls in the Groove Pool. You can tweak timing, quantization, random timing fluctuation, and velocity.

This technique sounds best on percussion, such as hats, rides, shakers, etc. Ensure you don’t overdo your quantization though. Keep the timing tight.

Change the Pitch on Various Hits

Humanize your drums by changing the pitch of some hits by a small amount.

This technique is common in modern hip hop hi-hat patterns. For example, music producers will pitch down or up hi-hat fills. Pitching 808 basses is also effective.

If you’re using samples, change pitch by:

If you’re working with MIDI, change pitch by:

Change the Sample Length on Various Hits

Mixing different sample lengths also adds groove and variation. For example, make louder notes longer and quieter notes shorter. This technique creates a push and pull feeling that sounds more intriguing than a repetitive pattern.

It’s easy to change a sample’s length with Live’s Simpler and Sampler Instruments. Simply adjust the Decay, Sustain, and Release controls.

If you’re working with a Drum Rack, it’s easier to duplicate a sample before making edits. Duplicate a sample by holding Option (Mac) or CTRL (PC) and dragging it onto an empty pad.

Now you can make edits and program both hits without affecting the original sample.

8. Replace the Default Drum Samples With Your Own

Make your hip hop beats unique by using high-quality samples in your library. Using the right samples will give your rhythms character and a professional sound.

The foundation of hip hop beats typically have heavy kicks, punchy snares, sizzling hi-hats, and deep 808s. Music producers will then add percussion loops, claps, bass hits, and other sounds to make the beat more interesting.

Have you heard of “crate-digging?” The term describes music producers who find inspiration at the record store. They dig through crates of vinyl records to find their next golden sample.

Try sampling existing records or music on YouTube. Chop up your source material, process the samples, and use them in your beat. The old-school vibe or lo-fi sound characteristic of old vinyl is still popular.

Make your beats even more unique by adding field recordings or Foley. Go out and record everyday sounds and process them in creative ways. For example, sounds of nature, noisy crowds, traffic, machines, etc. can add interest and realism.

9. Add Percussion to Make the Beat More Interesting

After creating the backbone of your rhythm, add percussion and other sounds. Fill the offbeat gaps between the main elements to make your beat more interesting.

For example, use open hi-hats, crash cymbals, shakers, rides, or other percussion sounds. Remember to keep it simple. Hip hop beats are stripped back to make room for the vocals.

This example adds a crash cymbal, four finger snaps, and a sample loop with claps. Check out the complete beat.

10. Tune Your Drum Samples

Tuning drum samples to the key of your song is an essential technique often overlooked. Like any instrument, many drum sounds have defined pitches that correspond to notes on the musical scale.

Additionally, drum samples playing out of key with the rest of the song can sound dissonant or jarring to the listener. Conversely, tuned drums sound pleasing because they harmonize and groove better with other song elements.

Moreover, tuned drums improve harmonious relationships with basslines, chords, and other melodic parts. As a result, your mix will sound more cohesive.

However, not all drum sounds need tunning. Use your ears and judgment to determine what sounds best to you. Check out the guide below to learn how to tune your drum in Ableton Live .

[yuzo id=”13031″]

11. Complete Your Hip Hop Beat With a Bassline and Melody

Every good hip hop jam has a melody and bassline that adds momentum to the groove. Often, the bass and melody distinguish the hip hop genre and region that influences the style.

For example, there’s a difference between West Coast, East Coast, and Dirty South hip hop tracks. Each style has signature characteristics heard in the melody, bass, rhythm, tempo, lyrics, samples, and instruments. The same idea applies to old-school and new-school hip hop.

Listen to your favorite hip hop and rap tracks. Analyze what makes them different. Pay close attention to the beat patterns, the placement of drum sounds, tempo, and the samples used. This technique is excellent for learning how to make hip hop beats.

You may notice hip hop melodies are short and straightforward. Many modern hip hop tracks have one or two bar looping melody that serves as a hook. Simple melodies are less distracting and allow you to focus more on the vocal.

The bass track adds a sense of weight to the beat. The most common bass is an 808. Roland’s TR-808 Rhythm Composer first popularized this iconic sound.

12. Apply Effects to Polish Your Hip Hop Beat

Learning how to mix a hip hop beat is also a critical step. A great mix will make your beats sound professional.

There are too many mixing strategies to list. However, standard techniques include:

Primary audio effects needed in hip hop production include an:

Everyone will have their own set of tools and techniques. Do what works best for your workflow.

Conclusion

Now that you know how to make a hip hop beat, here are some final tips to close with:

What’s great is you can apply most of these music production techniques for any genre!

What Is a Hook in a Song and How to Write One

Mon, 21 Sep 2020 17:51:00 GMT

What is a hook in a song? Learn why hooks are effective and how to write a catchy hook for your song in this basic music theory guide.

What Is a Hook in a Song?

A song hook is a short lyrical line or melodic phrase used to catch the listener’s ear and make a song engaging. It’s attention-grabbing, catchy, and makes the song memorable.

Musical hooks are most evident in styles like rap, hip-hop, R&B, pop, rock, and dance music. They’re typically four or eight bars in length and repeat multiple times throughout a song.

Moreover, hooks can be lyrical, melodic, rhythmic, or instrumental. They support the main idea of a song in a shorter form than a chorus.

How to Write a Hook for a Song

Writing hooks into your music is an essential part of songwriting . Without them, listeners will not have something to latch onto and may not remember your song.

The goal is to make your hook simple and memorable. You want your audience to remember the lyrics and sing along to a catchy melody.

The key to writing a great hook is “less is more.” Long, complex hooks will be difficult for a listener to remember. That’s why hooks in popular music are a single line or combination of two lines that last four to eight bars.

It’s common to hear the hook in either the chorus, pre-chorus, intro, or verse. However, you can place your hook wherever you wish. Just make sure it repeats at least once throughout the song. Repetition makes the hook stand out!

When hook writing, think about the foundation of the song. What is it actually about? Why are you writing this song? Answer those questions and break down the answers into a single idea that lasts up to eight bars.

There are many ways to write a hook. However, the general approach includes a combination of:

Lyrical hooks based on a catchy lyrical phrase or verse
Rhythmic hooks based on a repetitive beat or rhythm
Melodic hooks based on a memorable melody or instrumental phrase

Here are tips to help write catchy hooks that will keep your listeners engaged:

Create Memorable Lyrics

The lyrics of a song are as important as a catchy melody. The hook’s lyrics can evoke emotion, catch your attention, and support your story’s main idea.

Make your lyrical hooks memorable with these tips:

Use song lyrics people can relate to or evoke emotion.
Switch up singing rhythms or use clever rhythms. Try singing in a different rhythm than in the verse and chorus.
Sing melodic syllables instead of words. “ Stayin’ Alive ” by The Bee Gees is a great example. The hook would not have been as effective without the Ah, ha, ha, ha before stayin’ alive, stayin’ alive .
Use short, simple phrases. For example, Outkast repeats the song title “Hey Ya” in the hook. It’s simple and catchy!
Invent new words or terms like “ Bless Up ” by DJ Khaled or “ YOLO ” by Drake.
Find your “ money note .” This unexpected, ear-grabbing note will catch the listener’s attention due to its pitch or duration.

When writing lyrics, also consider including the name of the song in the hook. Using the name of your song in the hook helps listeners find your music and remember it more.

Create a Memorable Rhythm

Next, focus on the underlying beat rhythm of the hook. Like the lyrics, you want the rhythm of the hook to be simple. You also want it to hold on to its identity.

Many music producers vary the rhythm between the verses, hooks, and choruses. This method is an easy and effective way to keep the listener’s attention and move the song forward.

Try arranging the beat of your hook differently than the verse or chorus to give your song variation. For example, here are tips on how to create a catchy rhythm:

Use syncopation to switch things up.
Strip the beat down to make it simple.
Change the pitch on some drum hits.
Use fewer notes or a different note pattern.
Switch out drum samples with different ones.

Avoid going overboard! You want to find the balance of originality and memorability. If the rhythm is too complicated, it will be harder to remember.

Create a Memorable Melody

Finally, the last element to focus on is melody. Memorable melodic hooks will get listeners’ humming or whistling to your tune.

However, melodies are not required for a hook. There are plenty of rap hooks that don’t use melody. Now you may ask, is a melody necessary?

If the hook can catch listeners’ attention without melody, don’t feel obligated to add it. If a melody seems viable, base it on the rhythm of the hook. Also, let the melody move with the lyrics. The two elements will naturally complement each other.

Remember to keep your melody simple. Melodic hooks often have two to four notes spaced a semi or whole tone apart. There are rarely huge leaps between notes. Limiting the melody note patterns like this makes it easy to sing along and remember.

For example, Post Malone uses a simple melody in his hooks. His song “Rock Star” has several repeated two-note melodic hooks.

You can also make your hook melodies stand out by using different instrumentation. Try using a different synth sound or instrument than the verse and chorus.

Repeat the Hook to Make it Memorable

Repeat your hook multiple times. Repetition will increase the chance of capturing someone’s attention. It will also help embed your hook in a listener’s memory.

Plus, if you have an awesome hook, your fans will want to hear it repeated throughout the song! Be cautious of repeating the hook too often, though. It may become boring.

Three Types of Hooks in Music

The three most common musical hooks are Rhythm Hook, Intro Hook, and Background Instrumental Hook.

1. Rhythm Hook

The rhythmic hook sets the beat and rhythm. It’s often a quick four or eight beat rhythm that grabs your attention. Your rhythmic idea can also be instrumental or lyrical.

Without lyrics, a rhythm hook relies on a combination of elements like a catchy beat, chord progression, and a bassline. For example, “Superstition” by Stevie Wonder is a popular hook. The iconic guitar line instantly grabs your attention and makes the song memorable.

With lyrics, words drive rhythm hooks. Make sure there is swing or syncopation to a lyrical rhythm hook to make it stand out. No need to make it complicated. However, if the hook only lands on strong beats, it’ll come across as boring.

2. Intro Hook

The intro hook is a melodic idea introduced in the intro of a song. It then repeats throughout the song, dropping in and out.

Intro hooks further support the primary purpose of a hook. That purpose is catching the listener’s attention. Having an effective intro hook also makes the song instantly recognizable.

What the listener hears first will be present throughout the whole song. With this in mind, make sure your intro hook starts with a bang to grab listener’s right away. If they’re not hooked in immediately, they may not be thrilled about its main idea.

For example, “Ice Ice Baby” by Vanilla Ice has a catchy intro hook. The driving bassline makes the song immediately recognizable, and it gets people grooving instantly.

3. Background Instrumental Hook

Instrumental hooks are short melodic phrases in songs that may not be part of the vocal melody. It’s often a recognizable two or four-beat riff placed around the lyrics.

Think of the instrumental hook as an answer to a chorus lyric. There will be a natural space left in a chorus or verse where a short instrumental idea can live. That idea then shows up throughout the song.

For example, “Latch” by Disclosure has a catchy instrumental hook. The song begins with the double-hit vocal chop. That chop then repeats throughout the song, showing up at the perfect moments.

Hook vs Chorus: What’s the difference?

The distinction between the hook and chorus is often an area of confusion. Is the hook the chorus? The answer is it can be but not always. A song’s hook can happen anywhere.

Both song sections are catchy and drive the main idea of a song. However, there are distinct differences. For example, a chorus is part of the song structure with a repeating melody and harmony.

Whereas a hook is a short musical idea that can be rhythmical, melodic, or lyrical. Also, not all hooks are its own song section. Instead, they can be riffs that catch your ear. You can place these riffs anywhere.

You can also have several types of hooks in a song. Plus, some of these hooks may not fit the format of the chorus. Instead, they may work better in other sections of the song. For example, a hook can appear in the chorus, verse, intro, or other song parts.

Catchy Hook Examples

In the modern music industry, hook-centric songs drive the musical conversation.

Here are two examples of songs with memorable hooks. They both prove the foundational qualities of writing strong hooks.

1. Lil Nas X – Old Town Road (feat. Billy Ray Cyrus)

For a hook to succeed, it should be short, catchy, and connective. Old Town Road nailed all three, unlike any song in history. That’s why it’s shattered so many world records. The debate about whether it’s a country song or rap song is irrelevant. The hook is masterful in its execution.

First, this powerful hook is short. Eight beats total—the perfect length for a hook.

Second, the instrumental part is catchy. The chord progression is a simple four-bar loop, and the melody is only two phrases. The first two-beat phrase repeats, filling four beats total. Then a second phrase fills four beats on its own. By creating this subtle contrast, the hook remains simple and avoids being boring.

Finally, the lyrical hook connects with fans. Most people with this song on repeat do not own a horse. However, most people relate to what the horse represents: the desire to be original. This theme is not obvious from the hook right off the bat. But because the hook is so catchy, it leads the listener to discover this and connect to it.

The song also mentions nice clothes, partying, and other common themes in rap songs. These are excellent for connecting to a listener’s desires. But what makes the song go deeper into the idea of originality is the country backdrop.

Country and rap had never come together like this before Old Town Road. It’s original, and Lil Nas X drives that point home with the repeated phrase, “you can’t tell me nothing.”

Thus, he reveals the connective aspect of the hook. The horse represents breaking away from the crowd and being your own person. For example, listen to Billy Ray Cyrus sing:

“Yeah, I’m gonna take my horse to the old town road
I’m gonna ride ’til I can’t no more”

People connect with these lyrics because he’s saying he will be himself. From there, every other aspect of the song supports that idea.

2. Ariana Grande – Thank U, Next

Yet another killer hook that leans even harder into the core elements. The hook of this song is also the title, which repeats three times over the same melody.

Everything about this hook is short and relatable. Unlike “Old Town Road,” which relies on expertly delivered symbolism, the hook in “thank u, next” is obvious.

For example, Ariana just went through a bad breakup and is moving on. This not only lends itself to the relatable experience of breakups, but it serves as a motivator for moving on. Moving on from a breakup is always difficult, and Grande helped many people do so with this hook.

Conclusion

Hooks are a staple of songwriting in modern music. Today’s culture is all about catching attention, and hooks are the musical means to do so.

If you develop your ability to write great hooks, your skills will serve you well. Remember to focus on “less is more” and brush up on your basic music theory .

With these elements, you can combine simple music and simple lyrics. That formula has the power to create the next record-breaking single.

What Is Mastering in Music and Why It’s Important

Mon, 14 Sep 2020 14:25:00 GMT

What is mastering in music? Learn what audio mastering involves and why it’s essential to master your music.

What Is Mastering in Music and Why Is It Important?

Audio mastering is the final step in the music production process . It’s the post-production process of optimizing music and preparing it for music distribution.

The mastering stage involves signal processing with equalization, compression, saturation, stereo enhancement, limiting, audio restoration, and other final touches. Mastering engineers must also adhere to specific loudness standards when creating digital masters.

The purpose of mastering is to make your music sound balanced, cohesive, uniform, professional, and ready for commercial release. Mastering also ensures playback optimization across various speaker systems and media formats.

Stereo Mastering vs. Stem Mastering

There are two methods of mastering: Stem mastering and stereo mastering .

What Is Stereo Mastering?

Stereo mastering uses a single stereo mix as its sound source. However, this method of mastering limits flexibility. For example, if you increase the vocal volume, you would likely also increase the volume of other elements. The same rule applies to EQ, dynamics, saturation, stereo imaging, and other processing.

However, the benefits of stereo mastering include cost and ease of delivering the entire project. Mastering a single audio file costs less than treating multiple files. Also, exporting, managing, and providing a single audio file is easier than dealing with numerous files.

What is Stem Mastering?

Stem mastering offers greater control over the shape and tonal balance of your music. This method uses multiple audio files called “stems” as a sound source. Stem files combine individual tracks into a single file. Typically, stems files include certain parts of the mix like drums, vocals, bass, synths, etc.

With stem mastering, you can process these separate tracks in isolation. This technique gives you more flexibility and convenience. For example, you can treat the vocal track without affecting the other elements in the mix.

After treating each stem, the mastering engineer will then apply finishing touches to the full mix. This approach often results in a more balanced, professional-sounding master.

Why Is Audio Mastering Important?

Mastering is a crucial step in the audio production process. For example:

Modern mastering ensures your music will sound the best it can across streaming platforms, media formats, devices, and speaker systems. Some formats include vinyl, CD, Tape, and digital audio files. While streaming services include Spotify, Apple Music, SoundCloud, and more.

Mastering also ensures the tracks on an album or EP have consistent volume levels. Matching levels for each track improves the listening experience. For example, you can listen to an entire album without adjusting the volume between songs.

Lastly, mastering prepares your music for distribution. This step includes sample rate conversion, bit depth reduction, sequencing tracks on an album or EP, adding required metadata, and more. The finished master file is then sent out for distribution and future replications.

How a mastering engineer treats a song depends on several factors. For example, their style, the audio format, music genre, loudness standards, intended distribution platform, and other reasons.

Artists and audio engineers master music to:

[yuzo id=”13031″]

What Is the Difference Between Mixing and Mastering?

Mixing and mastering are separate stages in the creative process often conflated. These two stages can become blurred since today’s music producers wear different hats in the studio.

What Is Audio Mixing?

Mixing combines multiple layers of audio to make one final track. The mixdown process makes sure the individual elements in a song sound good together.

The audio mixing process involves:

There’s a lot of technical understanding involved!

The goal is to treat the separate tracks of a song to create a cohesive mix that sounds amazing. The mixing engineer then exports the final mix as a stereo track file.

Typically, the mastering engineer will request an audio file with specific bit depth, sample rate, and headroom amount.

What Is Audio Mastering?

The mastering stage enhances the mixdown’s audio quality and prepares the entire track for distribution. This final step applies the same primary tools and techniques as mixing. For example, a mastering engineer will make slight adjustments to EQ, compression, saturation, stereo enhancement, and limiting.

However, the process involves making subtle changes across a signal chain on the master channel. A subtle change can make a huge difference in mastering. And if there are issues with the mix, it should go back to the mixing engineer.

The goal is to create a balanced frequency response, a controlled dynamic range, and a commercial loudness level. It’s also vital to establish consistent sound levels across each track. To help guide creative decisions, the engineer will use reference tracks .

These finishing touches create a high-fidelity stereo file ready for commercial release. Having a great sounding and balanced master is crucial!

Mastering Yourself vs. a Mastering Engineer

With advanced and affordable music technology, anyone can master music. And while there are mastering tutorials, nothing beats the expert ears of a professional mastering engineer.

Mastering is an art form that can take many years of practice to master (pun intended). Moreover, experienced mastering engineers have trained ears, musical intuition, expertise, pro audio equipment, treated rooms, and years of knowledge.

However, honing your mastering skills is encouraged. If you plan on mastering your music yourself, best first to strengthen your mixing skills. The mastering stage adds the final polish to a great sounding mix. You must prepare quality mixes first!

If you want a professional sound, go with a trained mastering engineer until you develop your mastering skills. Experienced ears and technical understanding will get your music to a level that competes with everything out there.

Plus, there are several affordable mastering studios and online mastering services like LANDR . Research your options.

Common Misconceptions About the Mastering Process

A common misconception is that a great master will make a bad mix sound good. Mastering will not fix a bad mix. Your mixdown must sound excellent before sending it out for mastering.

Also, mastering accentuates everything in your music. It makes the good parts sound great, and the bad parts sound terrible. Moreover, problems not fixed in the mixdown stage are hard to correct during the mastering process. So, don’t send your music out for mastering if you’re not satisfied with your mixdown. You may not like what your mastering engineer sends back. Also, don’t count on them to fix your mistakes!

Conclusion

Audio mastering will play a critical role in the success of your music. It’s a must if you want to stream music online, distribute CDs, or press a vinyl record. Think of this final stage as the bridge between your artistic vision and a world of listeners.

Also, mixing and mastering are both vital stages in the music creation process. It’s encouraged to learn the necessary knowledge, techniques, tools, and music industry standards.

How to learn mixing and mastering? Learn these critical skills through structured learning at ICON , online tutorials, and reading guides. Also, experiment with different mastering effects and signal chain configurations.

You can also connect with a mixing engineer or mastering engineer at a local recording studio. Sit in on a mastering session. Hands-on learning at a mastering studio with pro audio equipment will help hone your craft.

What Is a Diminished Chord and How to Use Them

Mon, 24 Aug 2020 17:40:00 GMT

What is a diminished chord? Learn how to make diminished chords and use them to spice up your chord progressions in this basic music theory guide . Knowing how to use diminished chords will open creative doors and expand your songwriting.

What is a Diminished Chord?

A diminished chord is a triad built from the root note, minor third, and a diminished fifth. It’s a chord with two minor thirds above the root. Meaning three semitones separate the third and fifth notes of the chord.

For example, a C major triad has the notes C (the root), E (the third), and G (the fifth). Therefore, a diminished C triad has the notes C, Eb, and Gb.

Diminished chords inject a sense of drama, tension, and suspense into music. They also have a distinct timbre that sounds dark, dissonant, and eerie. Their oddness makes them unique!

However, the flattened fifth makes diminished chords sound unstable and creates a desire for tonal resolution. They leave the listener hanging, which makes the resolve back to consonant chords more impactful. This sense of tension makes them interesting chords to use in your progressions.

How to Make a Diminished Chord?

Diminished chords are easy to build because the note intervals are equally spaced by a third. Meaning each note in a diminished chord is separated by three half steps. Easy right?

There are three types of diminished chords: diminished triads , the diminished seventh , and the half-diminished seventh .

Let’s look at how to build these three chords using the key of D minor as an example.

1. The Diminished Triad (dim or °)

The diminished triad chord consists of a:

Root Note
Minor 3rd
Diminished 5th

A diminished triad is a minor chord with a flat fifth. The chord symbols are “dim” and “°.” For example, Ddim or D°.

To build a diminished triad, first find the root note of the chord. The root is always the note that’s the basis for the chord. For example, the root note for a Ddim chord is D.

Next, count three semitones to find the third note of the scale. For example, the third note above the root in a Ddim chord is F.

Lastly, count three semitones from the third or six semitones from the root to find the diminished fifth note. For example, the fifth note in a Ddim chord is Ab. The complete Ddim triad chord has the notes D – F – Ab.

2. The Diminished Seventh Chord (dim7 or °7)

The diminished seventh is a four-note chord that consists of a:

The diminished seventh (or fully diminished chord) adds a minor-third above a diminished triad. Meaning the seventh note is three semitones above the flattened fifth.

For example, the seventh note in a Ddim7 chord is Cb. Therefore, the complete Ddim7 chord has the notes D – F – Ab – Cb.

3. The Half-Diminished Seventh Chord (m7b5 or ø7)

The half-diminished seventh is a four-note chord consisting of a:

A half-diminished chord adds a major-third above a diminished triad. Meaning the seventh note is four semitones above the flattened fifth.

For example, the seventh note in a Dø7 chord is C. The complete Dø7 chord has the notes D – F – Ab – C.

How to Use Diminished Chords in Your Progressions

Diminished chords often function as passing chords in a progression. Passing chords spice up standard progressions and create tension between chords with a stronger relationship to the key.

A passing chord acts as a transition that sits “in-between” the primary chords of a progression. Typically, a passing chord is not in the same key as the song. As a result, it creates a dissonant sound that needs to resolve to a chord harmonically related to the song’s key.

The most common passing chord is the diminished seventh. Try adding a diminished chord in the middle section of your chord sequence. Then resolve it to a major or minor chord one half-step higher. This technique adds tension and intrigue to a chord progression while remaining melodic.

For example, try replacing the V chord in a standard chord progression with a Dim7 or m7b5 chord. If you have a common I – V – vi- IV chord progression, the diminished chord will play second.

However, diminished chords are not limited to replacing the V chord. You can use them anywhere within a chord progression. But, because diminished chords sound unstable, they rarely play on the first or last bar. You won’t find a sequence of diminished chords in a progression, either. They typically occur once for a beat or two within a chord progression. They’re passing chords, so they pass by quickly.

Where to Use Diminished Chords

To figure out where to use a passing diminished chord, find two chords a whole step apart. Next, build a diminished chord on the note between them. Lastly, put the passing chord between the two chords a whole step apart.

For example, let’s use the progression C – Am – F – G. The F major and G major chords are a whole step apart. The note between them is F#. Build a F#dim chord and put it between the F and G major chords. The new progression is C – Am – F – F#dim – G.

Diminished Chord Chart

You can play the diminished chord in all twelve keys. In major scales, a diminished triad occurs only on the 7th scale degree. Whereas in minor scales, a diminished triad occurs on the 2nd scale degree.

Below is a list of all twelve diminished triads for each key:

C dim = C – Eb – Gb
C# dim = C# – E – G
Db dim = Db – E – G
D dim = D – F – Ab
Eb dim = Eb – Gb – A
E dim = E – G – Bb
F dim = F – Ab – B
F# dim = F# – A – C
Gb dim = Gb – A – C
G dim = G – Bb – Db
Ab dim = Ab – B – D
A dim = A – C – Eb
Bb dim = Bb – Db – E
B dim = B – D – F

Example of Diminished Chord Progressions

There are several ways to resolve a diminished chord to either a major chord or minor chord. Leading a song into the vi chord is one common use of diminished chords -- not just in songwriting in EDM and pop music . The vi chord builds on the 6th scale degree of the key.

The song below uses a diminished triad in a major key following a V – vi – IV – I progression.

“Stay With Me” by Sam Smith

Sam Smith’s 2014 hit “Stay With Me” uses the G#dim chord in all three choruses and the bridge. Here is one of those rare examples where the progression starts on a diminished chord.

Listen to the chord quality of G#dim and how it leads into the last chorus repetition. It changes the emotional feel and sets up the final “stay with me” lyric at the end of the chorus. You’ll also notice how quickly the chord plays compared to the other chords. Can you hear the subtle differences?

[Chorus]

Won’t you stay with me?

Am – F – C

Cause you’re all I need

Am – F – C

This ain’t love it’s clear to see

G – Am – F – C

But darling, stay with me

G#dim – Am – F – C

The bridge follows the same chord progression but with different lyrics. It sets up the final chorus.

[Bridge]

Oh oh oh ohhh oh ohhh oh ohhh

Am – F – C

Oh oh oh ohhh oh ohhh oh ohhh

Am – F – C

Oh oh oh ohhh oh ohhh oh ohhh

G#dim – Am – F – C

Oh oh oh ohhh oh ohhh oh ohhh

G#dim – Am – F – C

Conclusion

Music theory tools like diminished chords expand the sounds you have available in your chord progressions. Using them in your songwriting will improve your overall sound and make your music more interesting.

Basic Music Theory for Beginners – The Complete Guide

Mon, 24 Aug 2020 15:18:00 GMT

This basic music theory guide looks at fundamental concepts musicians use to understand, analyze, and create music.

What is Music Theory?

Music theory is a practice musicians use to understand and communicate the language of music. Musical theory examines the fundamentals of music. It also provides a system to interpret musical compositions. Music theory is a great tool for electronic and pop musicians to elevate tracks.

For example, basic music theory defines the elements that form harmony, melody, and rhythm. It identifies compositional elements such as song form, tempo, notes, chords, key signatures, intervals, scales, and more. It also recognizes musical qualities such as pitch, tone, timbre, texture, dynamics, and others.

How to Learn Music Theory?

Music theory is a complex and extensive subject. There are several practices, disciplines, and concepts.

Best to learn music fundamentals first before exploring advanced music theory. The building blocks that form musical compositions include:

Solidly understanding these three core elements will help you learn basic music theory.

What Is Harmony in Music?

Harmony is when multiple notes or voices play simultaneously to produce a new sound. The combined sounds in harmonies complement one another and sound pleasing.

Chords and chord progressions are examples of harmony. A chord has three or more notes that play at the same time. The chords and chord progressions in a piece of music support or complement the melody.

Combining vocal parts also creates harmony. The combined voices of a choir are a perfect example. The multiple voices that make up a choir blend to make a harmonious sound.

However, not all harmonies are pleasing to our ear. There are two main types of harmony: dissonant and consonant .

Musicians combine consonant and dissonant harmonies to make the music more exciting and intriguing.

What Is Melody in Music?

Melody is a succession of notes or voices arranged into a musical phrase. A song’s melody is often the most memorable and recognizable part.

Melodies can be created with instruments or vocals. They have two or more notes in a sequence that sound musically pleasing. Most compositions consist of multiple melodies that repeat.

The two primary elements of a melody are pitch and rhythm :

Melodies also have two types of melodic motion: conjunct or disjunct .

Musicians combine conjunct and disjunct motion to give melodies more variation and interest.

What Is Rhythm in Music?

Rhythm is an essential element of music with more than one meaning. For example:

The basic elements that comprise musical rhythm include:

Understanding rhythm will help you create great harmonies and melodies.

Also, the rhythm section or pulse propels a piece of music. It acts as the rhythmic backbone for other musical elements.

The Benefits of Music Theory: Why Study Music Theory?

Learning basic music theory is essential for enhancing creativity and developing musical awareness. It’s a challenging but rewarding set of skills to learn.

Knowing how music works will make the music production process easier and help you become an effective music producer.

Is learning music theory required? No. However, you can benefit from learning some aspects of music theory.

For example, learning basic music theory will:

Note : Musical theory is not a set of rules or guidelines you must follow. It’s only a tool to help you understand and explain how music works.

The Fundamentals of Music Theory (Music Theory for Dummies)

This basic music theory for beginner’s guide examines the core music fundamentals. It also provides insight into the basic building blocks of music that form harmony, melody, and rhythm.

Musical Notes and Intervals

Let’s start this music theory for beginner’s guide by going over harmony and melody. This section describes all the available notes and the specific relationships between them.

The Music Alphabet

Notes are the building blocks for all music. The musical alphabet consists of seven letters: A, B, C, D, E, F, G . Each note has a unique pitch.

The 12 Keys of Music

There are 12 notes on the piano keyboard: A, A#/B♭, B, C, C#/D♭, D, D#/E♭, E, F, F#/G♭, G, G#/A♭ .

The same 12 notes repeat upwards and downwards in octaves.

White Keys

The white keys on a piano play the “natural” notes in a scale: A, B, C, D, E, F, G .

Playing only white keys places you in either the key of C major or A minor.

Black Keys

The black keys on a piano play the “flat” and “sharp” notes in a scale: A#/B♭, C#/D♭, D#/E♭, F#/G♭, G#/A♭ .

Each note has a symbol: ♭ for flat and # for sharp. Playing a combination of white and black keys allows you to write in all available key signatures.

Intervals

An interval is a distance between two notes. There are several intervals. Measure these intervals by the number of half steps, whole steps, and their position in the scale.

Intervals are also the foundation of both harmony and melody. Playing two or more notes at the same time creates harmonic intervals (chords). Playing single notes in a sequence makes melodic intervals (melodies).

Furthermore, we describe intervals by number (distance) and prefix (quality). The interval number represents the number of half-steps between two notes. These numbers are 1st (unison), 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th, and 8th (octave) .

Lastly, intervals have using a prefix to describe their quality. The five interval qualities are major (M), minor (m), perfect (P), augmented (A), and diminished (d) .

Octaves

Octaves are the next highest or lowest pitch of the same note. The interval between a note and a note double its frequency is an octave. For example, an octave up from C1 on a piano is C2. An octave down would be C0.

There are 12 semitones in the octave. These pitches repeat in the same order throughout the range of human hearing.

Key Signatures

Key signatures tell you what notes in a scale are sharp (♯) or flat (♭). There are twelve key signatures, each derived from the twelve available notes.

Key signatures also help identify the key of a song, which is the tonal center. For example, a song in the key of A minor uses notes from the A minor scale.

Music Scales and Modes

Musical scales form the building blocks of music. Understanding musical scales and their functions is essential when learning basic music theory.

This section looks at the two most common scales, their scale degrees, and the seven music modes.

Music Scales

A music scale is a set of notes within an octave arranged by their pitch. The ascending or descending interval relationships among the note pitches define each scale. Moreover, the notes from a scale form melodies and harmonies.

There are several types of scales. However, the two main types are the major scale and the minor scale. You can build both major and minor scales from any note. How you use them depends on the pattern of intervals you use.

Major Scales

There are twelve possible natural major scales. Natural major scales are bright, uplifting, and happy sounding.

The seven notes in all major scales follow the same interval pattern: W-W-H-W-W-W-H (whole-whole-half-whole-whole-whole-half) .

Minor Scales

Natural minor scales are dark, sad, and emotional sounding. The seven notes in all minor scales follow the same interval pattern: W-H-W-W-H-W-W (whole-half-whole-whole-half-whole-whole) .

There are twelve possible natural minor scales. In addition, there are three variations of the minor scale: natural, harmonic, and melodic.

Scale Degrees

Each note of a scale has a specific name related to its function, called a scale degree. The name is the function, and a number indicates its position on the scale.

There are seven scale degrees. These names apply to all major and minor scales. Learning more about these functions takes us into advanced music theory. For now, it’s good to know the names:

Music can create and release tension. The function of a scale degree relates to the amount of tension created. It also helps you decide what note(s) should follow to resolve the tension.

Moreover, remembering the different pitches in major and minor scales is difficult. Referring to the steps of the scale by numbers rather than notes makes it easier to remember.

Music Modes

Musical modes are scales derived from a parent scale. There are seven music modes.

Each mode is a slight variation of a scale. They use all the same notes and interval patterns as the parent scale.

The main difference is the root note used to build the scale. Starting a scale on a different note defines the tonal center, giving it distinct melodic characteristics.

The seven musical modes are:

Learning musical modes goes beyond basic music theory and is more advanced. However, getting familiar with these terms and basic functions is helpful.

Counterpoint

Counterpoint is the relationship between two or more melody lines played at the same time. These melodies or voices work together to create pleasant-sounding harmonies.

The melodies that create counterpoint are dependent on each other to create harmony. However, they are independent in rhythm and contour.

Chords and Chord Extensions

Chords are the harmonious building blocks of music. They evoke emotion and provide the foundation for creating melodies.

Knowing how to build chords and how they interact with each other is essential when learning music theory. This section looks at basic chord types, chord extensions, and inversions.

Musical Chords

A chord is a combination of two or more notes played at the same time. They’re built off a single starting note called the root.

You can create chords from all twelve notes. There are also four basic types of chords in music:

The chords and chord progressions in a piece of music support or complement the melody.

Triad Chords

The most basic chords are triads. A triad is a chord made of three notes. Triads have a root note, a third (four semitones above the root), and a perfect fifth (seven semitones above the root).

Triads are also the foundation for more complex chords. For example, you can create seventh and ninth cords by adding notes above a tried.

Seventh Chords

A seventh chord adds a note above the basic triad. Seventh chords have a root note, a third, a perfect fifth, and a seventh.

For example, a C major seventh has the notes: C–E–G-B. There are also five main types of seventh chords: major, minor, dominant, diminished, and half-diminished.

Major Chords

Major chords have a root note, a major third, and a perfect fifth. A chord with these three notes alone is a major triad.

For example, a C major triad has the notes: C-E-G. You can also add notes to build more complex chords.

Minor chords

Minor chords have a root note, a minor third, and a perfect fifth. A chord with these three notes alone is a minor triad.

For example, a C minor triad has the notes C-E♭-G. You can also add notes to build more complex chords.

Diminished Chords

Diminished chords sound tense, dissonant, and dramatic. They have a root note, minor third, and a diminished fifth (six semitones above the root).

For example, a C diminished triad has the notes: C-E♭-G♭.

Augmented Chords

Augmented chords sound dissonant, unsettling, and mysterious. They have a root note, major third, and an augmented fifth (eight semitones above the root).

For example, a C augmented triad has the notes: C–E–G#.

Chord Extensions

Chord extension s are notes added to the basic triad beyond the seventh. These notes extend into the next octave. There are four chord extensions: the 9th, 11th, and 13th .

Extended chords create a richer, more harmonically complex sound than basic major and minor triads. They also provide additional voice leading possibilities, which makes chord progressions sound more interesting.

Chord Inversions

Chord inversions are variations of the same chord. Transposing the bottom note in a chord to the next octave creates an inversion.

There are two main chord inversions: first inversion and second inversion .

Chord inversions add variation, excitement, and smoother transitions in chord progressions. The more notes a chord has, the more possible inversions.

Chord Progressions

A chord progression or a harmonic progression is an ordered series of chords. Chord progressions support both the melody and the rhythm. They also provide the foundation for creating harmony and melody.

Moreover, the key determines the chords used in a progression. A progression can also consist of major and minor chords.

Roman Numeral Analysis

Roman numerals indicate the chords in a progression. They identify the musical key and the root note for each chord. For example, “IV” means the chord is built on the fourth degree of a scale.

Uppercase Roman numerals represent major chords, while lowercase numerals represent minor chords. For example, a chord progression in the key of C major would look like I-vi-IV-V (C-Am-F-G).

Delving deeper into this topic goes beyond basic music theory. However, it helps to introduce this numerical system.

Voice Leading

Voice leading is the linear movement between melodic lines or voices to create a single musical idea. This technique focuses on the smooth movement of notes from one chord to the next using common sounding tones.

Voice leading also minimizes the vertical and horizontal transitions between notes in a chord progression or melody. These smaller moves sound more natural and pleasing.

When creating a chord progression, use harmonically related chords. They can share similar notes or have inversions to make the stepwise motion smoother. For example, a C major chord and an A minor chord both have the notes E and C.

Conclusion

Music theory will give you a deeper understanding of music. But it’s also essential to remember musical theory is not hard rules. It’s a tool to help you create, understand, and communicate music.

There are several ways to practice music theory. Try applying the concepts in this guide to your workflow.

How to Make a DIY Vocal Booth on a Budget

Mon, 17 Aug 2020 17:53:00 GMT

Learn how to build your own vocal booth that won’t break the bank. This step-by-step guide shows you how to make four cheap recording booths for your home studio.

WHAT IS A VOCAL BOOTH AND WHY DO I NEED ONE?

A vocal booth, also known as a sound booth or recording booth, is a specialized enclosure designed to minimize external noise and maximize sound quality. It is an essential component of a professional recording studio, allowing artists to record high-quality vocals and other sounds without distractions or interruptions.

When you record in an untreated room, sound waves bounce off surfaces, creating reflections and ambient noise that can compromise your recordings. A vocal booth helps to eliminate these room sound reflections, providing a controlled environment that enhances the clarity and quality of your vocal recordings. By isolating the microphone from external noise and unwanted sound reflections, a vocal booth ensures that your recordings are clean, dry, and professional-grade.

CHOOSING THE RIGHT LOCATION FOR YOUR VOCAL BOOTH:

When choosing a location for your vocal booth, it’s essential to consider the surrounding environment and potential sources of noise. Ideally, your vocal booth should be located in a quiet room with minimal external noise and few distractions. Avoid placing your vocal booth near windows, doors, or other sources of noise, as these can compromise the sound quality of your recordings.

Additionally, consider the size of the room and the placement of your vocal booth within it. A larger room can provide better sound quality, but may require more effort to treat the space. Ensure that the room has enough space to accommodate your vocal booth and recording equipment comfortably. By carefully selecting the right location, you can create an optimal recording environment that enhances the quality of your vocal recordings.

4 Cheap DIY Vocal Booth Options for Your Recording Studio

Full-sized commercial vocal booths are expensive. That’s why many artists opt to build a DIY recording booth for a fraction of the cost. They may not look as fancy but will do the job for your vocal recording needs!

Here are four budget-friendly DIY sound booth designs you can build in your home studio.

1. How to Build a Closet Vocal Booth

Transforming your closet into a vocal isolation booth is a cheap and easy option. However, closet vocal booths don’t always absorb sound reflections and room sound well. Your vocals will sound like they’re recorded in a tiny room rather than in a proper vocal booth.

What you need:

Step 1: Pick a Closet for Your Recording Booth

Start by choosing the closet or small space. You can use a bedroom closet, hall closet, linen closet, or pantry for this space. Ensure the area is big enough to fit one person and the recording equipment comfortably.

A medium-sized recording space works best. A closet too large or small can create problems that affect the quality of your recordings. For example, confined closets create issues from standing waves, early reflections, and low-frequency buildup. They don’t always provide the ideal recording space.

In contrast, large closets require more acoustic treatment to eliminate reflections, room reverb, and other issues.

Step 2: Prepare the Closet for Acoustic Treatment

Singing in front of your t-shirts will not provide adequate sound treatment. Cloths will absorb high-frequency sound waves but do little to reduce low-frequency buildup and room sound. For best results, clear out the space to prepare it for adding proper acoustic treatment.

Remove cloths, shelves, racks, and clutter to make ample space. Also, ensure the surfaces are flat before applying the acoustic treatment.

Step 3: Check the Lighting and Electrical

If the lighting in your closet is noisy, consider using LED lights or bulbs. LED is quiet and won’t make sounds the microphone could pick up.

Also, ensure you have a power source to run your recording equipment. If you don’t have a power outlet, consider hiring an electrician, or run an extension cord from a nearby outlet.

Step 4: Apply Acoustic Treatment

Acoustically treat the inside of the closet to create a sound booth. Cover the walls, floor, ceiling, windows, door, and other reflective surfaces.

For example, lay thick rugs or carpet on the floor if you have hard surface flooring. Next, cover the walls with dense absorbent material. Use thick blankets, rugs, carpet, mattresses, egg-crate foam, or acoustic panels. You will need tacks, nails, or adhesive to secure the materials to the walls. Lastly, consider hanging blanks, towels, or other absorbent material from the ceiling if needed.

For best results, try to cover most hard surface areas. You may have to experiment with different materials and rooms until you achieve the optimum result.

2. How to Build a Mattress Vocal Booth

The mattress fort is the easiest DIY vocal booth. You surround yourself with mattresses to absorb sound reflections and room sound. The drawback is mattresses are a pain to stack and store.

This cheap vocal booth alternative also provides better isolation and absorption than the closet method. The extra thick material of a mattress will dampen and absorb more frequencies in the mids and low-mids. As a result, your vocal recordings will sound more balanced.

However, the effectiveness of a mattress booth depends on the design and the mattresses. For example, thicker materials like memory foam work better than a box spring mattress.

What you need:

Step 1: Build Your Mattress Vocal Booth

The design will vary on how many mattresses you have. Any of the following configurations will work:

Step 2: Add Sound Absorbing Material as Needed

If your vocal booth is on hard flooring, consider laying a thick rug or carpet. Also, consider placing dense material above the singer’s head for maximum isolation and dampening.

3. How to Build a Blanket Vocal Booth

The blanket booth is one of the best all-around DIY vocal booths. However, it will cost you more than the previous two solutions.

Also, there are several ways to make a blanket recording booth. Check online for various guides and blueprints. However, this example looks at building a PVC pipe frame for hanging several acoustic blankets.

The PVC vocal booth design gives you full isolation with sound-absorbing material on all sides. Though, it won’t provide the same sound absorption as a vocal booth with proper acoustic treatment.

Moreover, the blanket vocal booth is semi-portable. You can assemble and disassemble it easy depending on the design. You can also get as complex or simple as you like with this booth.

Note : You can download a FREE copy of these blueprints and size calculator from the Musician on a Mission website.

What you need:

Step 1: Figure Out the Dimensions of Your Vocal Booth

Before you get started and buy the material, figure out the size of your booth. Find the dimensions that work for your recording space. Next, enter the width and length dimensions into the size calculator.

This crucial step determines how many PVC pipes, curtain rings, and blankets you’ll need.

Step 2: Build the Frame of Your Vocal Booth

Follow the blueprints to save time and frustration. Start with the base of the frame and then build the upper half. Also, cut your PVC pipes at the right lengths. Then label each pipe to make assembly easier.

If you get your materials from a hardware store, ask them to cut the pipes to the custom lengths. It will save you lots of time! If not, use a tape measure and a Sharpie to measure out the lengths yourself. Then use the mini hacksaw to cut each pipe length.

Important : Cut the pipe in a straight line. Straight edges will make the booth sturdier.

Step 3: Hang the Acoustic Blankets

Before you hang the blankets, connect the shower rings to the blanket grommets. This step will make the process easier.

Next, hang three acoustic blankets from the upper frame pipes. Attach them on the outside of the frame, not the inside. They will conform to the frame’s shape better this way. Also, overlap two blankets to create a door.

Lastly, drape the fourth blanket over the top of the booth. Cover the area evenly. Then use the clamps to fasten down the slack to the edges of the frame.

4. How to Make a Portable Vocal Booth

There are several ways to create a portable desktop DIY vocal booth. This design consists of a box lined with dense absorbing material. It’s intended to sit on a desk and isolate the microphone like a reflection filter .

You can even get clever with this design and make it foldable for easy storage and portability.

What you need:

Step 1: Cut the Acoustic Foam Panels

Measure the inner walls of the cardboard box or plastic storage box. Next, cut five acoustic foam panels to the appropriate size. They will cover the entire inside of the box.

Before you attach the panels, make sure they fit. Insert the back panel first. Then measure from the panel to the outer edges of the box to determine the length for the other four panels. Also, consider cutting the two side panels shorter to fit between the top and bottom panels.

Step 2: Attach the Acoustic Foam to the Inside of the Box

Spray the entire inside of the box with adhesive. Then attach the back panel first, top and bottom second, and the side walls last.

Step 3: Sep up Your Microphone

Place your microphone and desktop stand inside of the box.

SOUNDPROOFING TECHNIQUES FOR A VOCAL ISOLATION BOOTH

Soundproofing is a critical component of building a vocal isolation booth. To achieve optimal sound quality, you’ll need to minimize sound reflections and prevent external noise from entering the booth. Here are some soundproofing techniques to consider:

Use Acoustic Foam: Line the walls and ceiling of your vocal booth with acoustic foam or other sound-absorbing materials. This helps to dampen sound reflections and reduce echo.
Install a Floating Floor: A floating floor can decouple the booth from the surrounding environment, preventing vibrations and external noise from entering the booth.
Use a Vapor Barrier: A vapor barrier can prevent moisture from entering the booth, which can compromise the sound quality.
Seal Gaps and Seams: Use soundproofing caulk or other sealants to seal any gaps and seams in the booth. This prevents sound from escaping or entering the booth.
Consider a Portable Vocal Booth: If you don’t have the space or budget for a permanent installation, a portable vocal booth or DIY recording booth can be a great alternative. These booths are easy to set up and can provide excellent sound isolation.

By incorporating these soundproofing techniques into your vocal booth design, you can achieve professional-grade sound quality and take your recordings to the next level.

Do I Need a DIY Vocal Booth?

It’s essential to control the recording environment surrounding your microphone to achieve the best results in vocal recording. Seasoned engineers will tell you the environment you record in is as important as your gear.

When recording in an untreated room, sound waves reflect off surfaces and bounce around the room. The room will also have natural reverberation. This creates a problem because the microphone will pick up the sound wave reflections, room reverb, and other noises. These problematic noises affect the quality of your vocal sound.

A vocal booth or acoustically treated room will improve the sound quality of your recordings. The acoustic treatment will dampen and absorb unwanted noise, ambiance, room reverb, and reflections. Eliminating unwanted noise and reflections will make your vocal takes sound clear, dry, punchy, and balanced. This approach will also make editing your vocals easier!

However, different music production situations will require varying degrees of vocal quality. If you want to capture high-quality vocal recordings, consider building a vocal booth. Or, at a minimum, use dense, uneven acoustic materials to dampen and absorb reflections around the microphone.

Conversely, if you’re not concerned with vocal quality, you may not need a vocal booth. Though, it’s difficult to make a poor vocal sound great – even if you have the best plugins and pro editing skills.

When people listen to a song, they pay attention to the vocals the most. That’s why it’s vital to record the best-sounding vocals.

A DIY vocal booth is an excellent option for recording in a less-than-ideal environment. A treated space will improve the sound quality of your recordings by absorbing and diffusing unwanted noise. It will also isolate the microphone from the surrounding area, eliminating problematic noises the microphone will pick up.

By improving your room acoustics and recording techniques, you will get the highest quality vocal sound. Plus, improving the quality of your vocal takes will make editing easier!

20 Best Saturation Plugins to Boost Your Music

Mon, 10 Aug 2020 14:04:00 GMT

What is audio saturation, and what are the best saturation plugins? This Icon Picks roundup features 20 saturation effects that will harmonically enhance your music.

What is Saturation in Music?

Audio saturation is an effect that generates harmonics and applies soft-clipping compression. Saturation is also the essence of what makes analog hardware sound musical and pleasing. Driving sounds through tape, tubes, transistors, and circuits have long been an essential ingredient in great-sounding mixes.

The effect originates from the analog days when audio recordings ran through various pieces of hardware. Mix engineers discovered they could overload magnetic tape machines, tube amps, and transistor-based preamps to create saturation and “soft-clipping” effects. This technique gave recordings sought-after qualities that improved the sound of mixes.

Artists and engineers use harmonic generation to add presence, character, warmth, edge, cohesion, and more to digital audio. From subtle to extreme, saturation is an integral part of amazing mixes.

The Different Types of Audio Saturation

While studios still have analog equipment, the music industry has mostly shifted to the digital realm. Plugin emulations provide the same great sound as their hardware counterparts without the maintenance hassle and high price tag.

Here are the three main types of saturation plugins that emulate the imperfections of analog hardware.

If your music sounds thin, weak, and digital-sounding, apply saturation to make it sound full, fat, and present. Analog emulation is one of the best ways to bring your digital audio alive!

20 Best saturation Plugins

Here are the 20 best saturation plugins for music production, mixing, and mastering. Any of them will make a great addition to your music toolbox.

1. Soundtoys | Decapitator

Infuse your tracks with the natural vibe of analog gear. Decapitator has five analog saturation models that add character to every sound you run through it. This beast also includes a tone control for shaping the saturated sound, a mix control for parallel processing, and a Punish button to push your saturation levels harder.

Decapitator’s design also captures the feel and vibe of analog gear. You can hear subtle changes when it reacts to an incoming signal like real hardware. From subtle to the extreme, Decapitator delivers every time!

Key Features

2. FabFilter | Saturn 2

Saturn 2 introduces additional features, new distortion styles, a redesigned interface with modulation visualization, and more. This versatile tool excels at adding warmth and definition to anything you run through it.

Saturn brings a range of high-quality distortion models inspired by the vintage sound of tubes, tape, and guitar amps. You also get five creative FX distortion styles to mangle your sounds in weird and unexpected ways.

The bx_saturator is a multiband saturation and Mid/Side processer. Add saturation and distortion exactly where you want it in your mixes and masters.

This saturation plugin increases the perceived volume of mixes without clipping them. It works great at bringing out vocals, acoustic guitars, and percussion without increasing their level or having to EQ.

Also, all four XL frequency bands have dedicated gain, drive, and mix controls. This flexibility allows you to increase a signal’s perceived volume without boosting its actual output level. You get louder, punchier mixes!

Key Features

19. Plugin Alliance | Noveltech Character

Add presence, air, and punch to your music with Character. This unique saturation plugin intelligently enhances the tonal spectrum, saturation levels, and dynamics of individual tracks and mixes.

The dynamic process automatically adjusts the parameters rather than frequency regions. This innovative approach delivers impressive results quickly every time. Also, it only has three intuitive knobs to control the process!

Key Features

20. URS | Saturation

Inject classic tonal preamp saturation vibe into your tracks. URS Saturation captures the sound of different eras and enhancement styles into your mix. Access six vintage pre-amplifier algorithms, two analog tape saturation algorithms, and two transformer core saturation algorithms.

URS Saturation is also a breeze to use. Choose between ten vintage analog algorithms, push the drive with the input gain, adjust the output gain, and mix the signal if needed.

Key Features

What Is Syncopation in Music and Why It Matters

Mon, 03 Aug 2020 18:09:00 GMT

Learn about syncopation in music. This basic music theory guide offers tips on how to spice up rhythms to make your music more interesting.

What is Syncopation in Music?

Syncopation in music is the concept of playing rhythms that accent or emphasize the offbeats. It shifts or displaces a standard rhythm by stressing beats generally not stressed.

The time signature of a piece of music identifies a consistent pattern of strong and weak beats. A syncopated rhythm shifts this pattern by emphasizing weak upbeats instead of the strong downbeats.

For example, songs with a 4/4 time signature usually stress the first and third beats. However, a syncopated rhythm may emphasize the second and fourth beats or notes between them.

Why is Syncopation Important?

Syncopation brings excitement to music by playing with our expectations for where the beat should occur. This groove-inducing tactic breaks away from the strait feel when every note falls on the expected beat.

Syncopation is also attention-grabbing. It surprises the ear by playing on our familiarity and expectations about straight rhythms. Unexpectedly switching the pattern or stressing offbeats adds variation, character, and groove to your music.

Emphasizing notes outside a constant pulse also allows you to create interesting rhythms when recording or performing. It will also give your music a more human quality . Music that plays only on the beat can sound static, boring, and machine-made. It lacks imperfect aspects that make music relatable. By using syncopation, artists make that imperfection sound good.

The Types of Syncopation in Music

The four most common syncopation types are Suspension , Even-Note , Offbeat , and Missed Beat .

1. Suspension Syncopation

Suspension syncopation sustains the weak beats through the strong beats. Instead of playing the strong beats, you hold the weak beats for a longer duration.

For example, you could carry the second beat over the third beat. In the same way, you could sustain the fourth beat of a bar past the first beat of the next bar.

The audio example starts an 808 phrase on the second beat, “suspending” the musical idea. This creates a more dynamic rhythmic feel. It also allows for more creativity while still aligning with the main pulse.

Practice suspension syncopation by considering where a strong beat would make sense. From there, either push it forward to the next beat or pull it back to the previous. Whether that beat is a kick drum, bassline, topline, or anything else, you can apply suspension.

2. Missed Beat Syncopation

Missed beat syncopation replaces a strong beat in a measure with a rest. Like suspension, missed beat emphasizes the weak beats rather than the strong beats. However, there is one primary difference in missed beat syncopation. Silence (known technically as a “rest”) replaces the strong beat instead of the weak note sustaining through the beat.

The kick pattern above omits the last kick of the first bar and first kick of the second bar. By inserting these rests at strategic times, you can emphasize the weak beats more noticeably than with suspension. The technique also works great at building tension or setting up the return to a straight rhythm.

Practice missed beat syncopation by unexpectedly dropping strong notes on beat one or three of a bassline, drum sequence, lead, or other sounds. You will notice how the next beat after the rest feels stronger.

3. Even Note Syncopation

Even note syncopation or backbeat relies on time signatures with an even number of beats, like 2/2, 2/4, and 4/4. By far, the most common time signature in Western music.

Usually, standard rhythms stress odd-numbered beats. With even-note syncopation, you emphasize beats two and four in a standard bar. These are traditionally the weak beats. Whereas one and three are the strong beats.

Below, the chord pattern stresses beats two and four in the first bar. The beat does not technically change. However, the dynamic accents do, creating a different feel.

Beats two and four are also commonly called “backbeats.” By placing emphasis there, you can create different grooves in your music. Overall, the rhythm of a track is in the backbeats. This is why it feels better to clap along to a song on beats two and four. If you clap on one and three, the feeling is robotic and stale. By leaning into the backbeats, you emphasize the rhythm of the music.

Practice backbeat syncopation by stressing even beats like two and four. This approach is the most familiar syncopation type found in drum patterns and chords.

4. Offbeat Syncopation

Offbeat syncopation gets more complex by shifting notes away from the constant pulse. Offbeat occurs when the stressed note falls between beats.

For example, in a 4/4 measure, four quarter notes fill each of the four beats in a bar. With offbeat syncopation, you can introduce beats on eighth notes instead of on quarter notes. This technique separates the music from the pulse of the song by having notes land between the beats.

Moreover, there are two types of offbeat syncopation: beat-level and division-level .

Beat-Level : This syncopation creates a shift across the foundational pulse. The beat remains the same. However, the shift creates emphasis on eighth-note upbeats between two quarter note downbeats.

Division-Level : This syncopation occurs when notes shift to subdivisions of the beat rather than a whole beat. For example, placing beats on a sixteenth note or thirty-second note. The pulse continues on the quarter note. The difference is you’re adding notes outside of that pulse. Stressing beats on a smaller metrical level like this makes the syncopation more complex.

The drum rhythm above starts each bar with a kick on the first beat. But the remaining three kicks in the bar are all offbeat. The second kick plays on the sixteenth note before beat two. While the last two kicks play on the eighth notes between beats three and four.

Playing a note slightly before or after a beat creates an unexpected accent that makes rhymes more interesting. Try it on various elements in your mix.

How to Learn Syncopation and Write Syncopated Rhythms

Here are five ways you can practice syncopation and create syncopated rhythms in your music.

1. Listen to Syncopated Music

Music genres like electronic dance music, reggae, jazz, funk music, and rap use heavy syncopation. Listen to your favorite tracks from these genres and pay attention to how the artists use syncopation.

A trained ear is one of the best ways to learn syncopation and musical form. Try to learn the different time signatures. Then train your ear to identify strong and weak beats for each time signature. This approach will help you make sense of syncopated rhythms.

2. Learn How to Count Syncopation

Start counting syncopated rhythms. Begin by counting the quarter beats. In music, the quarter beats get a whole number. For example, in 4/4 time, count the four quarter notes on each beat as 1, 2, 3, 4 .

However, when counting eight-note beats outside the pulse, use “AND” to stress the offbeats. For example, in 4/4 time, count the eighth notes between the quarter beats as 1 AND 2 AND 3 AND 4 AND .

Using a similar technique, you can count sixteenth notes. For example, in 4/4 time, count the sixteenth notes as 1 E-AND-A 2 E-AND-A 3 E-AND-A 4 E-AND-A .

Learning these counting methods will make it easier to understand syncopated rhythms.

3. Practice Syncopation with a Metronome

Metronomes are essential tools that provide a constant pulse to help musicians play in time. The next time you’re producing music or recording vocals, set up the metronome to play at the desired tempo. Then try improvising over the clicks.

You could also use the metronome to practice counting syncopated rhythms. Set aside a few minutes and clap outside of the pulse while the metronome is running. Get a feel for where the weak beats lie and make new rhythms. It will be uncomfortable at first, but the more you practice, the more comfortable you’ll get. This technique will also expand your understanding of rhythms.

4. Break the Standard Formula of Beat Placement

When making music in a DAW, freely placing beats is at your fingertips. Experiment with your beats by changing note velocities and patterns.

Use velocity to stress weak notes. For example, increase the velocity of weak notes and decrease the velocity on strong notes. This technique changes the feel of a groove without changing the note pattern.

Also, try putting notes on parts of the measure where you normally wouldn’t. For example, instead of placing a kick on the first beat, put it on the second or between the first and second. Then listen to how that changes the feel of the music.

Shifting notes to offbeats also works excellent for a percussion section. Practice placing different percussion sounds on subdivisions of the beat. You can drive a straight 4/4 kick pattern while injecting intriguing syncopated rhythms with percussion.

5. Record Rhythms and Convert Them to MIDI in Your DAW

Try recording a few bars of different rhythms by clapping or humming. Then inside the DAW, use the audio file to recreate the pattern with MIDI. If you’re working in Ableton Live , use the conversion commands to convert audio to MIDI. Then you can rearrange notes to tailor your pattern. This technique works great for creating drum patterns, basslines, and leads.

Make sure to run a metronome and clap outside of the pulse. You may not recreate your rhythms identically because of human error when clapping. But by understanding weak beats and off beats, you will get close.

This approach will give you a better understanding of both what syncopated rhythms sound like and look like.

Syncopation Examples Using Popular Music

Syncopation occurs in a variety of music genres. Below are two examples of how syncopation adds interest to a piece of music.

1. Major Lazer – “Lean On”

Major Lazer’s 2015 hit single “Lean On” provides an excellent example of syncopation. Every melodic instance from MØ’s vocals to the topline in the chorus is a syncopated rhythm.

With the kick drum creating the pulse, the melodies would sound bland and stale if they started on the beat. By introducing syncopation, the song sounds more dynamic and interesting.

2. The Police – “Don’t Stand So Close to Me”

The Police have always maintained a strong influence of reggae in their music. Primarily through the drumming of Stewart Copeland. In their 1980 hit song, “Don’t Stand So Close to Me,” Stewart uses reggae rhythms over Brit-pop. Those reggae rhythms are all syncopated.

Another example of syncopation in this track occurs on “drop one,” which, as its name suggests forgoes emphasizing the first beat of the bar. It’s a clear example of missed beat syncopation. By leaving the first beat open, the song adopts a more relaxed feel.

Conclusion

Syncopation injects life into all genres of music by adding variation, character, and groove to otherwise static rhythms. It’s the vehicle that drives exciting songwriting . Without it, rhythms become limited. Keeping rhythms confined to a straight pulse is a surefire way to make your music sound stale and robotic.

By syncopating rhythms, a new world of musical exploration opens up. Syncopation in music also gives you more freedom to express your emotions. You can syncopate drums, basslines, vocals, leads, guitar, and anything else. The creativity is in your hands!

Explore How Gay Culture Created Dance Music

Mon, 29 Jun 2020 18:42:00 GMT

ICON is proud to support the LGBTQ community during Pride Month 2020! To honor that support, we listed articles that show how the LGBTQ community contributed to artistic culture.

Celebrating Pride Month 2020

ICON’s commitment to inclusivity and acceptance extends across all races, religions, gender identities, and sexual orientations. We are proud to show our support of the LGBTQ community during Pride Month 2020!

The LGBTQ community has indelibly contributed to artistic culture, even more so to the culture of dance music, a genre many ICON alumni have helped shape since we opened our doors in 2005. The articles below provide further insight and education into those contributions along with our perspective to honor those contributions.

Pride Month Resources

Electronic Dance Music: Edm Is the Global LGBT Soundtrack

Dance Pride: The Gay Origins of Dance Music

Dance Music Owes Everything to the LGBTQ Community of Color

Reclaiming the Queer Dance Floor

Gay Black Men Helped Create EDM. Why Do Straight White Men Dominate It?

The Queer History of House Music

What Is a Verse in a Song and Why It’s Important

Mon, 22 Jun 2020 17:04:00 GMT

What is a verse in a song, and what is its purpose? Learn about song structure and how to identify the verse in this basic music theory guide.

What Is a Verse in a Song?

A verse is part of the song form that propels the narrative forward. It provides the listener with more depth and understanding about the song.

Song verses commonly repeat like the chorus. However, songs can have one or more different verses. Compared to a chorus, verses have different lyrics on each repetition but keep the same melody. Whereas the lyrical and instrumental elements of a chorus generally remain the same.

Within basic song structure, the verse exists against repeating elements like the chorus or bridge to give a song more purpose. Without verses, songs become repetitive and incomplete.

Moreover, the verse supports the overall theme of the song, keeps it interesting, and gives listeners more information. It deepens our feelings or understanding of the song and allows us to relate to the story more.

How Many Bars in a Verse?

Like with any numerical aspects of a song, there are no right or wrong answers. However, there are methods to consider to help determine the length of a verse in a song. For example:

1. Follow Standards or Break the Rules?

As a general rule, the number of bars in a verse are divisible by eight. For example, it’s common to hear verses in modern music that are 8, 16, 24, or 32 bars long . However, these metrics are not hard rules in music theory . There are songs with odd number verses.

The idea of even-numbered bars stems from centuries of musical evolution. Over time, even-numbered bars become universally accepted length for a musical phrase because odd-numbered bars feel incomplete.

When constructing a verse, try starting with an eight-bar phrase. Then piece numerous phrases together until you’ve developed a verse that sounds right in the song. Whether it’s 12 or 24 bars, do what sounds good!

2. Consider the Length of the Chorus

Consider the chorus length when determining the number of bars in a verse. These two song parts don’t have to be the identical length, but there has to be a balance between them.

Often, the verse and chorus will have a similar length. Although, it’s also common to have a longer verse to give the narrative time to develop.

Think about a song in the narrative form. The verse dictates what’s happening in the narrative, and the chorus dictates why it matters. So, if the verse is overly long compared to the chorus, the song’s meaning may get buried. Also, the song can lose value if the verse is too short against a long chorus.

The best rule of thumb to follow is balance. Effective verses incite a sense of anticipation for the rest of the song.

3. The Song’s Genre Can Determine Verse Length

Consider the genre of the song when dictating verse length. In general, all verses have the same melody but introduce a new song lyric. However, this approach can change depending on the genre.

For example, rap verses rarely include a melody because the intention is to display the emcee’s lyrical skill. Therefore, some instrumentation may get stripped back.

Also, rap verses are much longer than a typical pop song. The longer verse gives the emcee more time to tell their story and display their talent.

Conversely, pop music tends to have shorter verses. For example, many modern pop songs are 2-4 minutes long. Therefore, there’s not enough time for longer verses.

4. Consider the Song Length to Establish the Number of Bars in a Verse

Song length can determine how many bars are in a verse. People’s attention spans are increasingly becoming shorter. As a result, the average length of hit songs is decreasing. For example, most of the songs on the Billboard Top 100 are under four minutes.

If you’re writing a shorter song, consider crafting a verse that doesn’t drag on. For example, a typical pop song has verses 8 or 16 bars long. Again, find a balance for each part of the song structure.

5. The Song’s Tempo Can Determine the Number of Bars in a Verse

The tempo of a song can influence the length of your verses. For example, songs with a slower tempo like 60 BPM may have shorter verses than songs with faster tempos at 120 BPM.

For example, a song at 60 BPM takes 1 minute 04 seconds to play 16 bars. Whereas a song at 120 BPM only takes 32 seconds to play 16 bars. Both have 16 bar verses. However, the difference in tempo determines how long it takes to play each bar.

What Is Verse-Chorus Form?

Song form is essential in songwriting. It outlines the different song sections, how those sections repeat, and how they interact with each other. For example, one common form is ABABCB or Verse-Chorus-Verse-Chorus-Bridge-Chorus .

And while there are many structures a song can take, some are more popular than others. For example, the verse-chorus form is the most used song form in modern music. This musical structure builds around two repeating sections: a verse and a chorus.

A classic example of a verse-chorus form is ABABAB . Or rather Verse-Chorus-Verse-Chorus-Verse-Chorus . However, you can arrange verse-chorus structures in various ways. You’re not limited to this basic song pattern.

Some other popular variations on the verse-chorus form include AABA and ABABCB . These are also bare-bones versions of verse-chorus form. However, thousands of songs use them.

Each verse, chorus, and bridge section represents a different part of the story. For example:

The Verse

The verse builds anticipation and provides contrast to a song’s chorus. In music with lyrics, the verse will tell the main story.

This section often introduces new lyrics more than a new melody. It’s typical for repeating verses to share the same chord progression and melody (one different from the chorus). This is why verses share the same song form letter.

The Chorus

The chorus is the main event of your song that includes the hook. Also, the chorus is usually more intense than the verse. The instrumentation is busier, the vocal register is often higher, and the lyrics are more repetitive.

The Bridge

The bridge serves as a contrast to both the verse and the chorus. Therefore, it also gets its own song form letter. Usually, the bridge introduces new lyrics and melody.

By adding new lyrics and melody, the bridge doubles down on the purpose of a verse. It signifies change and forward motion. Also, the bridge generally occurs once towards the end of a song before the final chorus. It serves as one final musical entry before the song ends.

[yuzo id=”13031″]

What Is the Difference Between Verse and Chorus?

The primary difference between a verse and a chorus is change. Verses change throughout the song, while choruses remain the same.

Often, repeating verses share the same music but usually have different lyrics for each section.

The role of a verse is to either demonstrate change happening within the song or to expand the main idea detailed in the chorus. Verses also create musical tension that builds up to the chorus.

A great chorus represents the main idea or established theme of the song. It also serves as a point of resolution to the verse.

Repeating choruses typically share the same music and lyrics for each section. So, it makes sense for the chorus to remain the same throughout the song. If there are changes, they’re usually slight.

In newer styles of popular music, the hook may replace the chorus. The hook is a shortened version of the chorus. It has a similar function to the chorus.

Hooks that replace choruses usually last between 4 and 16 beats. They also repeat to create the desired space the songwriter wants between verses. Moreover, it’s common for the hook lyrics to include the title of the song.

Verse Chorus Bridge Song Examples

Below are two excellent verse examples. The first song places the verse against a chorus. Whereas the second song places the verse against a hook.

Major Lazer – Lean On

“Lean On” is the lead single on Major Lazer’s third studio album, “Peace Is the Mission.” The track features MØ on vocals and DJ Snake on co-production.

The song follows the ABABCB form. The first and second verses both have different lyrics but share the same chord progression. Whereas all three choruses repeat with the same music and lyrics.

[0:10] Verse 1
[0:20] Pre-Chorus 1
[0:30] Chorus
[1:10] Verse 2
[1:20] Pre-Chorus 2
[1:30] Chorus
[2:12] Bridge
[2:30] Chorus

Dillon Francis – Say Less (ft. G-Eazy)

“Say Less” is a collaboration with Dillon Francis and G-Eazy. This song demonstrates Dillon’s versatility as a producer by making a hip-hop tune that transforms into a festival trap hit.

The song follows the AABACB form. This structure is more complex and replaces the chorus with a hook. Here, the lyrics change for all three verses. Also, the first and second hook remain the same, but the third hook extends longer.

[0:15] Verse 1
[0:30] Verse 2
[0:42] Pre-Hook
[1:00] Hook
[1:15] Verse 3
[1:28] Pre-Hook
[1:42] Hook
[1:57] Bridge
[2:48] Pre-Hook
[2:52] Hook

Conclusion

What is a verse in a song? Well, verses tell the story of a song. When writing a song, think about the main idea, the reason you’re writing the song. Articulate that reason into a foundational theme to build the chorus. Then, think about the story you want to tell around that central theme. That story comprises the verses.

This is where true freedom comes into play when songwriting. You can tell that story however you want. There’s no limit to the number of verses, no limit to the length of the verses, and no restrictions on what melodic elements you use in the verse. Tell the story you want to convey in your heart, and the verses will fit naturally alongside the chorus.

15 Easy Tips for Recording Vocals Like A Pro

Mon, 25 May 2020 17:40:00 GMT

Learn how to record studio-quality vocals. These 15 tips for recording vocals will boost productivity and help you capture the best vocal performance.

How to Capture Better Vocal Recordings

When people listen to a song, they pay attention to the vocals the most. That’s why it’s vital to produce pro vocals that sound great.

Recording vocals is an essential part of producing a song. However, it takes a lot of work to create a great sound. Plus, there are many variables involved in recording the perfect vocal performance.

This guide will help you prepare for a vocal session and ensure everything runs smoothly in the recording studio.

15 Tips for Recording Vocals That Sound Professional

A great vocal performance can take your song to the next level. It’s vital to prepare your vocal sessions to get the best possible performance.

Recording vocals that sound professional involves many steps. Consider these 15 vocal recording tips during your next vocal session:

1. Learn the Song’s Arrangement and Key

Before the session, make sure the singer knows the song inside out. The singer and producer must be familiar with the song before recording to avoid wasting time.

Go over the song’s fundamentals like the tempo, key, melodies, harmonies, and lyrics. Also, become familiar with the arrangement and various sections like the verse, bridge, chorus, breakdown, etc.

Understanding the song will lead to a smoother and more efficient recording session.

2. Make Sure the Singer Knows Their Vocal Range

Good singers will know how to find their vocal range before recording a song.

What is vocal range ? Vocal range refers to how high and low a performer can comfortably sing. It’s the distance between the highest and lowest notes a singer can produce without straining their voice.

Knowing the singer’s range will help determine the best songs and musical key for their voice. Always check the vocal range of the singer to ensure the song key works for them.

If not, you must change the key of the song or choose another song. It’s best to send the song to the singer before the session. Allow the singer to rehearse and become comfortable singing the song.

[yuzo id=”13031″]

3. Consider Room Acoustics and Sound Treatment

Poor room acoustics will cause problems and affect the quality of your vocal recordings. Treated rooms reduce unwanted noise, ambiance, and sound wave reflections that interfere with the recording.

For best results, consider adding sound treatment to control sound reflections in your studio. A combination of acoustic panels, absorbers, diffusers, and bass traps will create an optimal recording environment.

However, you don’t need to spend a fortune on proper acoustic treatment or a professional vocal booth. Many DIY solutions can improve your home studio acoustics. These tips will enhance the acoustics of your recording space:

The goal is to control sound reflections to improve the quality of your vocal recordings. Capturing a ‘dry’ and clear vocal performance will also make it easier to edit and apply sounds effects.

4. Make Sure the Singer Warms Up Their Voice

It’s essential the singer warms-up their vocal cords before recording.

Vocal warm-ups are exercises that prepare the voice for singing. Whether recording in the studio or performing live, vocal warm-up exercises are vital for achieving the best performance.

Vocal exercises are also an integral part of improving, developing, and protecting the singer’s voice. A professional singer will use several effective vocal warm-ups.

Also, studio sessions can be expensive, and time is valuable. Ensuring the singer’s voice is ready to go will save time, make the recording session run smooth, and improve the quality of the performance.

5. Maintain Vocal Health and Get Rest

A singer’s vocal cords are their instrument. Maintaining good vocal health will protect their voice, improve voice quality, and help sustain longevity.

Singers should refrain from practicing extensively or pushing their voices hard before the session. They should also avoid alcohol, coffee, and dairy products before a session. These beverages can cause dehydration, reflux, or excess mucus. Instead, drink room temperature water and stay hydrated.

Quality sleep is also vital before a studio session. Fatigue can cause poor voice clarity, diminished tone quality, loss of volume, and reduced energy to perform 100%. It also increases the chances of vocal damage and strain.

6. Choose the Right Microphone for the Singer’s Voice

Matching the microphone to the vocalist ensures you get the best tone for their particular voice. Each microphone has its own unique and colorful character that contributes to the tone of a recording.

The type of microphone used will make a difference. However, there is no best microphone. Certain studio microphones reproduce sound differently than others. The character of the singer’s voice can also give you varying results depending on the microphone choice.

It’s crucial to understand the subtle qualities of your singer’s voice and then choose the appropriate microphone. While there are many types, condenser and dynamic mics are the most common for tracking vocals.

Here are general perceptions about condenser and dynamic microphones:

Recording studios around the world have a range of microphones that suit any situation. However, not everyone has the budget or access to revered microphones used by professional studios.

Instead, consider microphone modeling plugins . With a single hardware microphone and mic emulation plugins, you can access a dream virtual microphone collection inside your computer.

7. Properly Position the Microphone for Best Results

Before you record, ensure your microphone in the optimal recording position.

First, make sure the microphone is not in the center of the room and away from the walls. Finding the sweet spot places the mic away from standing waves that build up in the center of the room. It also reduces potential issues caused by room noise, reflections, and reverberance.

Next, adjust the height and angle of the microphone for the singer. Consider these microphone position tips:

Proper microphone technique is crucial for a good recording. The distance, height, and angle of your microphone placement can change the tone of the vocal recording.

8. Use a Microphone Pop Filter or Isolation Shield

Use a pop filter and shock mount to tame plosive sounds. Plosives are the ‘pop’ sounds produced when singing ‘P’ or ‘B’ consonants. For optimal results, mount the pop filter about 3-6 inches in front of the microphone.

A microphone isolation shield reduces unwanted noise, ambiance, and sound wave reflection. It improves the sound quality of recordings by isolating the microphone from the surrounding environment.

Reflection filters have dense, uneven acoustic materials that dampen and absorb sound wave reflections. Eliminating unwanted noise and reflections will make your vocal recordings sound clear, dry, and balanced.

9. Choose the Right Headphones to Minimize Bleed

Bleed happens when the microphone picks up sound escaping from inside the headphones. Headphone bleed or leakage can affect the clarity of your vocal recording.

Prevent bleed by using closed-back headphones like the ATH-M50x . Closed-back cans fit over the ear and create a seal that keeps sound from escaping.

If you don’t have closed-back headphones, reduce bleed by keeping the headphone levels down.

10. Prepare the Project for the Recording Session

Before recording, ensure your project is ready and prepared for the session. Consider these tips when setting up your project:

Preparing and organizing your project before recording will help prevent unexpected delays. It will also ensure the session kick-offs smoothly.

11. Control Breath Sounds when Recording Vocals

Breath sounds might get distracting in a recording session. They also detract from the quality of the performance.

For best results, have the singer practice proper breath control. Reducing excessive breath sounds will improve the quality and make the editing process easier.

However, a certain amount of breathing is also necessary to add a natural feel to the recording. Skilled singers will know what sounds natural.

The easiest way to reduce distracting breath sounds is by having the singer turn their head to either side with each breath. It’s also a good way to cut down the breath between spacious parts of the song.

12. Record Multiple Vocal Takes and Keep Them for Editing

When recording vocals, the objective is to capture a good take for each section of the song. It usually requires multiple takes to nail a good performance.

Often, a recording session will have five main takes for each vocal part. Recording several takes helps the singer warm-up their voice and become comfortable singing the song.

On average, the last three takes are typically the best ones. Plus, it’s good to have multiple takes for later use. You may find creative ways to use them.

13. Give the Singer Feedback After Every Vocal Take

Communication is essential in the studio! It’s important to give constructive feedback to the singer after vocal takes.

Recording great vocals requires teamwork. Giving your vocalist feedback can make them feel comfortable and help them improve their performance.

14. Record Composite Takes to Create the Perfect Performance

A flawless, one-take vocal performance is rare. Many producers record vocals section by section. This process is known as ‘comping,’ which is short for composite.

Have the vocalist run through their parts several times, even if they make mistakes. Keep the recording going. They’ll eventually nail that perfect take.

Next, choose the best takes and combine them to create one full composite track. Plus, it’s better to have too many takes than not enough for editing. You may find creative ways to use the other takes.

15. Know When to Add Audio Effects to the Vocal Track

One of the main decisions to make when recording vocals is to record ‘dry’ or ‘processed.’ Every producer will have a different process. There is no hard rule.

Generally, it’s good practice to track vocals dry and add audio effects later. Once you print the effects onto a track, it’s difficult to remove or edit them later on. Processed tracks are also harder to hear issues that may need editing.

However, some producers prefer to add subtle amounts of compression and reverb to get the vocalist in the right mood.

Adding reverb can make the singer’s voice come alive. This method can help inspire the vocalist to sing their best. Reverb also smooths out the tiny distracting details of a voice. It can help your singer perform without focusing on small imperfections.

Adding compression can tame spikes and even out levels. Start with 2-4dB of gain reduction and a slow attack. This technique is helpful when recording a great singer with a lot of dynamics.

However, use compression with caution and don’t over-compress. You can always apply more vocal compression later in the mixing stage.

Some producers will also add an EQ during the recording. This technique helps remove or accentuate specific frequencies of the singer’s voice.

Conclusion

There are several other tips for recording vocals. However, these 15 techniques provide a great starting point for the recording process.

While using proper techniques is essential, it’s also important to follow your creativity. Over time, you will develop a process that works best for your recording sessions.

Have fun while recording vocals, and keep making great music!

Do You Need a Music Publicist? Here is Advice

Mon, 18 May 2020 17:23:00 GMT

Are you an independent artist wanting the chance of being discovered? You might need a music publicist. Learn what a music publicist does and how to find the right publicist to advance your career.

What Is a Music Publicist?

A music publicist is a specialist who manages media and public relations on behalf of a music artist or group. They represent their client by overseeing, shaping, and maintaining their public image. They serve as a bridge between their client and the public with the use of media.

Music publicists also represent various other types of clients in the music business. This includes record labels, music venues, festivals, music studios, and music schools like ICON Collective .

What Does a Music Publicist Do?

A music publicist finds media opportunities and generates media coverage for their client to promote various projects. Most often, publicists work to secure press coverage for their clients’ upcoming activities.

For example, if an artist has a new single release, their publicist will write a press release for the song. They then send the release to music journalists to cover.

What Are the Responsibilities of a Publicist?

Day-to-day duties depend on the client. A music publicist’s job description can include various duties and responsibilities. For example:

[yuzo id=”13031″]

When Do You Need a Music Publicist?

It’s easy for an artist to generate local buzz as they become more prominent in their scene. However, to reach the next level of notoriety, you’ll need a publicist.

These examples are worth paying a music publicist to oversee:

1. Releasing New Music on a Record Label

It’s a good time to bring in a publicist whenever you have a new album, EP, or single coming out on a prominent label.

Such a release represents a chance to boost exposure and reach potential fans in new parts of the world. With a well-run release campaign, you can go from unknown to famous in a manner of weeks.

2. Releasing a High-Quality Music Video

Music videos are excellent for building excitement around a release. They’re also helpful in securing exclusive placement on music blogs and other outlets that feature videos.

Video marketing is one of the most effective ways to promote an artist. They play out the story a song is telling. The visuals also help connect an artist with an audience on a level beyond the music itself.

3. Touring or Playing at a Music Festival

Touring or performing at prominent festivals mean your career is advancing. It’s worth paying a publicist to promote your upcoming gigs. It will boost exposure and generate excitement.

A good publicist will craft media releases, secure interviews, and attract attention to maximize audience turnout. It’s an excellent way to grow your fan base !

4. Securing an Exclusive Music Premiere or Debut

Landing an exclusive premiere on a music blog or magazine before its release is significant. It’s an excellent way to generate buzz and exposure before the release. It can also boost sales and attract new fans.

5. Your Career is Gaining Momentum

Are you pursuing music as a full-time career and becoming established in the scene? If so, then it may be time to consider a publicist.

An artist gaining momentum may not have time to self-promote. Here, a publicist can handle all the marketing strategies. It will also free time for the artist to focus on advancing their career.

5 Things to Consider Before Hiring Music Publicist Services

Publicity should be one of the first concerns for someone ready to advance their music career. Where a manager helps an artist develop their artistic profile, a publicist spreads the word about their client’s profile.

Before searching for a publicist, consider these five factors:

1. Develop Your Unique Artistic Story

Your story is more than the step-by-step process of how you ended up where you are. An artist’s story is what a publicist uses to pitch coverage.

Journalists and readers connect to a story. They don’t connect to name recognition or a sonic description. Figure out your story before working with a publicist.

2. Determine What Activities Are Worth Paying for Publicity

What activities do you have coming up? It may not be worth hiring a publicist if the answer is a string of local shows or an independent release on SoundCloud.

You may be better off doing your own PR first to promote these campaigns at the start of your career. Connect with local music writers, create social media campaigns, and use online music marketing services to generate local buzz.

This approach will also help you build relationships and understand public relations. You’ll be better prepared when you’re ready to hire a publicist.

3. Build a Solid Brand as an Artist

A strong brand can mean a significant social presence. Or, a compelling visual aesthetic. Branding is anything that sets you apart from thousands of other up-and-coming artists trying to make it.

If you have nothing that makes you stand out, there’s not much a publicist can do for you. It’s critical to build a brand and a public image as an artist !

4. Establish Online Presence and a Robust Social Media Presence

Social media marketing is a valuable asset for musicians. A strong social media strategy is essential for promoting your music, engaging with fans, and expanding your fan base.

Social networking also connects you with music industry peers and presents new opportunities. So, update your social media platforms and music website if you have one. Most importantly, interact with your fans and post engaging content on the regular.

5. Know Your Goals and Set Expectations

Be realistic with your goals and expectations. Misconceptions about music publicity can create false expectations and disappointments.

It’s crucial to come prepared! A music PR firm may have strict criteria for accepting clients. Many also plan music publicity campaigns months in advance.

It’s helpful to have reasonable goals before approaching a music publicist. Make sure they know what you’re aiming to achieve. Ask questions, talk about your concerns, and communicate at every step.

Also, expect highs and lows during the campaign. PR campaigns can be an emotional roller coaster!

How to Find a Music Publicist?

Once you reach a level when you need a publicist, finding one is easy. PR firms are always looking to take on new clients with great stories to tell.

Consider these five tips for finding a publicist:

1. Research Music Publicist Services

Do some due diligence and research PR firms for a potential publicist.

Consider these five methods when researching a publicist for musicians:

2. Check out the Client List of Public Relations Firms

Most PR firm websites like Planetary Group show their entire list of clients. Current and past. Researching a client list is the best way to choose a potential publicist.

Once you find a publicity firm with a relevant client list, run a search on their roster. Ensure their clients and campaigns align with your music. They will do a better job landing suitable coverage if they do.

3. Know Your Budget and Estimate the Cost of a Publicity Campaign

Good PR firms are not cheap. Big-name artists are likely pulling seven figures per year. They have the money to hire the best.

If you’re not there yet, aim lower for more affordable options. Many online PR agencies can customize a full strategy based on your budget.

Also, ask your potential publicist about extra costs. Avoid getting blindsided with an unexpected bill.

Also, if your budget is tight, consider freelance music journalists. They’re an excellent option for independent artists with smaller budgets. Most journalists are excited to cover new artists if they have a good story. A good publicist doesn’t need to be expensive to tell your story.

4. Reach out to Fellow Artists and Seek Referrals

Contact other artists you know at a similar stage when seeking a publicist. It’s likely they’re also looking and could have leads.

Also, network and meet artists with a good publicist. Ask if they can refer you to the right publicist. Many PR agents find artists from the referrals of industry friends or existing acts on their roster.

5. Build a Brand and a Unique Story That Attracts the Right Publicist

Publicists are in the business of selling memorable stories and brands. Get out and play shows, release music, create videos, engage with fans, etc. Start creating buzz to catch the attention of a publicist.

Also, ensure you have a quality electronic press kit (EPK). Make sure it’s easy to find and accessible. EPK’s help promoters, booking agents, venue talent buyers, journalists, labels, etc. learn more about you and your music.

The Benefits of Choosing a Great Music Publicist

A great publicist can boost an artists’ music career in a competitive media landscape. Here are four ways a publicist can help advance your career:

1. A Music Publicist Can Pitch News and Stories to Media Outlets

The publicist will land coverage in a variety of media outlets. For example, music blogs, radio airplay, television, magazines, and more. By spreading out coverage, the news will reach a larger number of people.

2. Good Publicists’ Have an Established Network and Professional Reputation in the Music Industry

Having a strong personal network and a good professional reputation is essential for publicists. They work hard to build those relationships!

For example, music journalists receive hundreds of coverage pitches each week. To stand out in the competition, it’s helpful for them to connect with journalists on a personal level. This approach helps them secure opportunities.

Another essential part of building relationships is understanding individual preferences. For example, a journalist’s taste and interests drive what they cover.

A good publicist will also maximize their efforts by shopping pitches that fit a journalist’s past work. They will then make one piece of news work for many writers.

For example, say an artist hires a publicist to pitch a new music video. A good publicist will consider different types of coverage surrounding the one video.

3. Great Music Publicists Understand Their Client’s Unique Story

Experienced publicists have an inherent sense of what excites journalists. To develop this skill, they must understand their clients’ stories.

Also, no two clients are identical. The right publicist will understand a client’s unique story and craft compelling narratives around it.

For example, any publicist can pitch a new song by its genre and record label. However, great publicists pitch the story behind the genre and label. For instance, why an artist makes music in a specific genre. Or, why they chose to release on the particular label.

4. A Publicist Can Develop a Media Campaign Using Different Elements of an Upcoming Album Release

Major labels often release a few singles from the album before it’s out. Each single is a different element. They may also record a music video for one or more singles on the album. Each video is an element, too.

These different elements can contribute to a publicity campaign. Good publicists see each element as an opportunity to expand coverage and build anticipation. They will also have the network to put those opportunities into action.

For example, they will secure news updates to focus on one element like a new single. They will then approach feature writers to write in-depth profiles for each element. They will also work with playlist curators to place singles in a prominent playlist.

Conclusion

A publicist is not the first person you should look for when building a team. However, when you reach the point where you have a public presence, a publicist will skyrocket your career.

At heart, publicists are storytellers. They work with you to tell your story through media campaigns and public-facing opportunities. With the right publicist, people will hear your music around the world.

10 Best Vocal Warm-Ups That Will Improve Your Singing

Mon, 20 Apr 2020 17:24:00 GMT

Warming up your voice before singing is essential! These ten best vocal warm-ups for singers will develop and improve your singing performance.

What are vocal warm-ups for singers? A vocal warm-up is an exercise that prepares the voice for singing, acting, or other use. Whether recording in the studio or performing live, vocal warm-up exercises are essential for achieving the best performance.

10 Best Vocal Warm-Ups for Singers

Vocal exercises are an integral part of improving, developing, and protecting your voice. Here are ten effective vocal warm-ups for singers:

1. Breathing Exercises for Singers

The most basic and essential voice exercise for singers is breath control. It’s common to breathe from the chest during routine activities like speaking. However, singing requires breathing from the diaphragm.

Singing from your diaphragm gives your voice more power, control, and expressive tone. It also helps avoid straining your voice and releases tension that may affect your performance.

Two common breathing exercises are inhaling into your diaphragm and exhaling on a hiss. To practice this exercise:

Repeat this breathing exercise several times. Try inhaling and exhaling for longer durations to build more lung capacity and control.

2. The Siren Exercise Warms Up, and Safety Expands Your Vocal Range

The siren exercise will warm up your range and stretch your vocal cords. This technique also helps you transition through the notes smoothly without cracking. To practice this exercise:

This technique should feel smooth and relaxed. Sing at a comfortable level and don’t extend your range. As you practice, work on transitioning through the different vocal registers without cracking. For example, the transition from your chest voice to head voice.

3. Lip Trills Warm Up Your Diaphragm and Improve Breath Control

Lip trills or lip bubbles warm up the vocal cords and diaphragm, improves breath control, and reduces tension. The technique involves making a motorboat sound with your lips, causing them to vibrate rapidly. It’s a fun and effective technique! To practice this exercise:

As you improve, add sound to your lip trill. First, sing short and long notes while trilling. Then, try to produce buzzing melodies. You could also combine lip trills with the siren exercise.

4. Tongue Trill Warm-Up Exercises Relieve Tension

Tongue trill exercises are similar to lip trills but with your tongue. The technique involves curling your tongue and rolling your “R’s” as you go through your vocal range. To practice this exercise:

As your endurance improves, try tongue trills for longer durations. You could also combine this technique with the siren exercise.

5. Humming Exercises Stretch Your Vocal Cords

Humming is one of the best all-around vocal exercises. This technique helps stretch the vocal cords, relaxes your facial muscles, and improves breathing. Humming also develops your vocal resonance and tone quality. To practice this exercise:

Repeat this exercise several times. Also, try to increase the intensity of the humming vibration each time. The vibrations generated by the hum relaxes your face muscles and relieves tension that can affect your voice.

Next, repeat the process with your mouth open. This time, produce an “ahh” sound while humming notes. Also, challenge yourself by holding notes and while humming for longer durations.

6. Vowel Warm-Up Exercises Improve Voice Clarity and Articulation

Controlling the shape of your mouth and tone when singing vowels will enhance your voice clarity. This exercise also helps improve the quality of tone, pitch, vowel shape, and breath control.

When forming vowels, it’s essential to know the right lip, tongue, and jaw position. Having a controlled mouth position will help you pronounce words with greater clarity and articulation. To practice this exercise:

With practice, you’ll be able to change tones with clarity, control, and confidence.

7. Solfege and Scale Exercises Help You Recognize Notes by Ear

What is solfege ? Solfege is a musical system that assigns a unique syllable to every note of the musical scale. Major and minor scales have seven notes. Therefore, the solfege system has seven basic syllables: Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Ti, Do .

Solfege works by associating these syllables with the sound of each musical pitch. This system is great for identifying relationships between different notes in music. It’s also easier to remember and sing solfege syllables than the traditional letters or numbers of each musical scale.

Moreover, the solfege vocal warm-up exercise will help you recognize the different scale pitches by ear and stay in tune. It’s an excellent ear training exercise! It will also help you learn pitch, harmony, and sight-reading musical scores.

Start on middle C and sing through the solfege up and down the scale. Take your time and listen to each pitch. For example, the C major scale has the notes C, D, E, F, G, A, B . Therefore, sing “Do” for C, “Re” for D, and so on.

You can practice singing solfege with a piano. Start slow and work on increasing your speed. As you progress, try this vocal warm-up without a piano. Also, start at a higher pitch each time to improve your singing ability.

8. Tongue Twister Exercises Improve Vocal Articulation

Tongue twister exercises improve vocal articulation and pronunciation. It’s vital to pronounce words clearly when singing. The last thing you want to do is become tongue-tied while performing.

Tongue twisters train your brain and mouth to handle transitions between difficult syllables. Practice repeating short phrases that are difficult to say quickly. As you progress, try repeating them at various pitches.

Classic vocal warm-up tongue twisters include:

You articulate sounds with your lips, tongue, teeth, jaw, and palate. Tongue twisters will stretch out these muscles, reduce tension, and improve the quality of your voice. Clear vocal expression is vital!

9. Yawn and Open Your Throat to Relieve Tension

Yawning will relax your jaw, throat, tongue, and facial muscles. It also helps with breath control. To practice this exercise:

Loosening up your throat and facial muscles with this exercise will reduce possible voice straining. It also increases the oxygen flow to your brain, which will make you more alert. As a result, singing becomes a lot easier.

10. Jaw Loosening Exercises Release Facial Tension

The jaw massaging exercise releases jaw and mouth tension. Loosening your jaw and facial muscles will also help you pronounce words clearly when singing. A tense jaw can affect your voice and performance.

Use your fingers or palms to massage the muscles around your jaw with these steps:

The jaw is one of the fundamental controllers of the voice. Its movement and position will make a difference in how easy it is to sing.

Why Are Vocal Warm-Ups Important?

Maintaining your vocal health will protect and improve one of your most valuable assets – your singing voice.

The soft tissue of your vocal cords and inner muscles of the larynx are delicate. They must be treated with care to reduce damaging your voice or ability to perform.

Like athletes stretch before a game, singers should warm-up before a vocal performance. Vocal warm-ups loosen and relax your singing muscles. Proper vocal warm-ups will:

It’s absolutely necessary to always warm-up before singing!

When Should You Do Vocal Warm-Ups?

Vocal warm-ups should be an integral part of a singer’s practice routine. Vocal training and conditioning require frequent practice.

Also, consider investing in voice therapy, singing lessons, or a great vocal coach. These trained experts will show you how to keep your singing muscles, breathing, and vocal cords in excellent condition.

Conclusion

Vocal warm-ups are essential for maintaining a healthy voice. Whether you’re learning to sing or at the height of your career, vocal warm-ups should be a standard part of your vocal training.

Learn Vocal Production at Icon Collective’s Vocal Artist Program

ICON’s new Vocal Artist Program in Los Angeles is an opportunity to find your voice and develop your music skills. Students will unlock the secrets to becoming a better singer, songwriter, and performer.

This extensive 12-month program focuses on vocal training, songwriting, and performance. You’ll train your ear and expand your vocal range through weekly singing lessons and vocal training from a professional vocal coach. Throughout the program, you’ll also use advanced songwriting techniques to hone your music production skills. Students will graduate with the knowledge and experience to create original, commercial-grade music.

10 Best Microphone Isolation Shield and Reflection Filters

Mon, 16 Mar 2020 17:57:00 GMT

A microphone isolation shield will improve the sound quality of your recordings. Here are the ten best isolation shield and reflection filters for recording vocals.

What is a Microphone Isolation Shield?

A microphone isolation shield is a filter that reduces unwanted noise, ambiance, and sound wave reflection. It also improves the sound quality of recordings by isolating the microphone from the surrounding environment.

What to Consider When Buying an Isolation Shield?

Vocal isolation shields are excellent tools for recording in less-than-ideal environments. They improve the acoustic quality of your recording space without installing permanent treatment. However, it’s essential to choose the best reflection filter for your needs.

Consider these options and characteristics when buying the best microphone isolation shield for your vocal recordings:

Mounting and Placement

Choose between a desktop or mic stand mounting design. If you prefer sitting while recording, consider a desktop filter. If you prefer standing, choose a filter that mounts to a mic stand or boom. There are also isolation filters designed for both scenarios.

Adjustability and Positioning

Ensure the microphone mounting brackets, and shield mounts are adjustable. Positioning the mic’s depth, height, and angle will give you optimal recording conditions in various environments.

Isolation Shield Weight

Ensure your microphone stand can hold the weight of the isolation shield without tipping over. Also, consider the weight if you travel or record in different environments. Lightweight designs are more portable and manageable.

Isolation Shield Size

Choose an acoustic shield with a large absorptive filter that curves around your microphone. Greater isolation will give you optimum protection from reflected frequencies and background noise. Also, know your mic size. If the filter is too small, background noise and reflections might compromise the quality of your recording. Therefore, taller mics will require a larger surface arc.

Materials and Construction

Ensure the acoustic materials and shield construction are durable and high-quality. Rugged construction will last longer during travel and heavy use in demanding work environments. Also, consider the thickness of the acoustic materials. Thick, high-density acoustic foam will absorb and dampen sound waves better.

Compatibility

Ensure the isolation shield and mounting hardware are compatible with your microphone and stand.

Portability and Storage

Consider a lightweight and foldable isolation shield if you travel or record in different environments. A collapsible design will also make it easy to store or fit into a bag.

Price and Budget

Learn how to write the bridge in a song. This guide explains what is a bridge in music and offers ten tips on how to add one to your song.

What Is a Bridge in a Song?

The bridge is a musical passage that connects two sections of a song. For example, a bridge often connects the verse to the chorus of a song, introducing a different chord progression to add variety. It can also sit between the last two chorus sections to add variation. Think of it as a transitional section.

Bridges in songs are essential not just for writing EDM and pop hits as they introduce a fresh musical and lyrical element that enhances the song’s structure. For example, they add contrast from the repetitive verse and chorus sections by providing new musical and lyrical elements. Adding musical variation makes a song more exciting and keeps it from feeling too repetitive. It’s a great way to grab the attention of people listening to your song!

THE IMPORTANCE OF BRIDGES IN SONG STRUCTURE

A bridge is a crucial element in song structure, serving as a transitional section that connects two parts of a song. It provides a break from the repetition of the verse and chorus, adding contrast and variety to the song. The bridge can introduce a new chord progression, instrumentation, rhythm, feel, tempo, or even a change in key or time signature, making it a key element in creating a sense of surprise and interest in a song.

Typically placed in the second half of a song, after the second chorus, the bridge is usually 4-8 bars long. This section can add depth and emotion to a song, creating a sense of tension and release. A well-crafted bridge can elevate a song from good to great, making it more engaging and memorable for listeners.

In popular music, the bridge often adds a new perspective or twist to the song’s story, or introduces a new musical idea. It can be a powerful tool for songwriters, allowing them to add complexity and interest to their songs. By incorporating a bridge into their song structure, songwriters can create a more dynamic and engaging listening experience for their audience.

How Long Should a Bridge Be in a Song?

The typical length of a song bridge is 4 or eight bars. A bridge is also known as the “middle 8” because this section usually occurs in the middle of songs for 8 bars. However, the duration depends on your songwriting needs.

Moreover, a bridge is often the only part of the song that plays once. Having it play once maximizes its impact and effect. However, there are no hard rules!

Why Use a Bridge in a Song Structure

The bridge of a song has several purposes. Also, various genres use them in different ways to enhance the listening experience. For example, bridges can improve your song by:

Adding variety and variation
Creating tension and release
Building energy and anticipation
Creating a dynamic shift in the song
Introducing new instruments or lyrics
Providing contrast to the rest of the song
Shifting the emotional impact of the song
Breaking up repetitive sections of the song
Taking the song or lyrics in a new direction
Providing a new perspective or closure to the song
Transitioning two parts of a song to capture the listener’s attention

Additionally, a bridge can lead into a guitar solo, adding a new layer of excitement and variation to the song.

An effective bridge adds the essential contrast that keeps your song from feeling repetitive. It’s both pleasurable and makes the return to the next section more exciting.

USING A BRIDGE TO ENHANCE YOUR SONG

Using a bridge in your song can be a great way to enhance its structure and add interest. Here are some tips for using a bridge effectively:

Introduce a New Chord Progression or Melody: This can add contrast and variety to your song, creating a sense of surprise. A new chord progression can shift the mood and keep the listener engaged.
Experiment with Different Instrumentation or Rhythms: Adding new instruments or changing the rhythm in the bridge can add texture and interest to your song. This creates a sense of tension and release, making the final chorus more impactful.
Add a New Perspective or Twist to Your Song’s Story: Use the bridge to introduce a new lyrical idea or a different angle on the song’s theme. This can add depth and emotion, making the song more relatable and memorable.
Keep Your Bridge Concise and Focused: A good bridge should be 4-8 bars long and have a clear musical or lyrical idea. Avoid overcomplicating it; simplicity can often be more effective.
Create a Sense of Tension and Release: Introduce a new musical idea in the bridge and resolve it in the final chorus. This dynamic shift can make the return to the chorus more satisfying for the listener.

By using a bridge effectively, you can add complexity and interest to your song, creating a more dynamic and engaging listening experience for your audience. Remember to experiment and have fun with your bridge, and don’t be afraid to try new things.

10 Ways to Write an Amazing Bridge of a Song?

There are several ways to write a great bridge for a song. Use the bridge to creatively take your song in a slightly new direction before returning to either a repeat of the chorus or a new verse.

When writing a bridge, consider how it will interact with the chorus lyrics, providing a contrast that enhances the emotional impact of the song.

When done well, a bridge provides a pleasant sense of contrast from the rest of the song. It might also be the missing ingredient that completes your song!

However, not every song needs a bridge. It’s essential to have a purpose for the bridge. Otherwise, a randomly placed bridge may not add value to the song. Also, there are no hard rules for writing a bridge, so experiment.

Here are ten tips to consider when writing a bridge of a song:

1. Find a Bridge Placement That Works for Your Song

Start by identifying the different parts of your song. For example, the intro, verse, breakdown, chorus, outro, etc. Next, determine where the bridge fits within the context of your song.

A familiar song structure for pop music today is ABABCB . The format of this song structure is Verse-Chorus-Verse-Chorus-Bridge-Chorus . With this song form, the bridge breaks up the monotony of repeating the chorus twice.

However, experiment with different bridge placements based on your songwriting needs.

2. Write a New Chord Progression That Changes Key

Try writing a new chord progression that differs from the other parts of the song. Switching the chord progression adds contrast and creates a different mood or feeling.

For example, songs in a major key will often switch to minor chords in the bridge and vice versa. This move also presents the opportunity to write different lyrics for the bridge.

However, ensure the chord progression transitions smoothly without sounding disoriented. Jarring transitions between sections of a song are unpleasant.

3. Write a New Melody That’s Different from the Verse and Chorus

Writing a new melody for the bridge takes the song in another direction before returning to a repetitive chorus or verse. This dynamic shift creates variety and contrast. You could also use the new melody as a musical interlude.

Write a melody that differs in shape and feel from the verse and chorus melody. A common approach is to pitch the melody higher in the bridge to evoke an emotional response.

However, ensure the melody fits the new chord progression and flows seamlessly into the next section.

4. Introduce New Lyrics to Reinforce Your Lyrical Idea

The bridge offers an opportunity to introduce a new lyrical idea or add a twist to the song's story. It also gives you a chance to deepen the emotional impact of your lyrics.

Use bridge lyrics to present a different perspective, overall understanding, or closure to the song. For example, tell your story from another angle or give clarity to the point you’re trying to convey. You can also use the bridge to express an emotion that may not work tonally in the other sections.

In addition, try singing in a different vocal range for your bridge. Singing an octave higher or lower than the rest of your song adds a surprising new layer. The contrast may give your audience something catchy to latch onto and remember because it sticks out in the song.

5. Introduce New Instruments or an Instrument Solo

Many artists use the bridge to feature an instrument solo or to introduce a new instrumental passage.

A good example of this is when artists introduce a guitar solo in the bridge to add a new layer of excitement.

For example, if the song’s primary instrument is a piano, try adding a guitar in the bridge instead. This move provides a welcoming contrast that may surprise the listener.

You could also use the new instrumentation to build tension towards the final chorus. Or, continue the new instrument into the chorus to add another layer and a sense of heightened energy.

Again, experiment with different variations. You could even use the solo melody as a musical interlude

6. Change the Rhythm of Your Drum Pattern

Try using a song bridge to switch your drum rhythm pattern temporarily. Use it as a transitional section.

For example, if your song has a four-on-the-floor rhythm, switch to a half-time beat pattern for the bridge. This move adds contrast, variation, and a change in energy.

It also adds tension that releases once the 4/4 beat kicks back in, giving the chorus more impact. It’s a sure way to surprise the listener and build anticipation before transitioning to the next section.

7. Change the Musical Key to Shift Emotional Responses

Sometimes artists will modulate to a different key for the bridge. Key changes can produce various emotional effects on the listener.

For example, raising or lowering the energy level, brightening or darkening the mood, or creating a sense of unease. It’s a sure way to keep the listener interested in hearing more of the song.

However, switching keys can be tricky. Ensure the key change is smooth and makes sense within the context of the song. Avoid confusing the listener with a jarring key change.

One of the most natural key changes is modulating to the relative minor or major key. Relative keys share the same notes. For example, C major is the relative key of A minor.

After changing the key, you can switch back to the original key at the transition or stay in the new key for the rest of the song. Try different variations!

8. Change the Tempo to Shift Energy Levels

Changing the tempo or time signature is another way to add contrast, variation, and change to energy levels.

However, this move can be tricky. It can also confuse the listener if they’re flowing with the groove. Use this option with caution, and make sure the tempo transitions back to the original rhythm seamlessly.

9. Change the Dynamic Range to Create Pleasing Contrast

Dynamic range is the difference between the loudest and quietest parts of a song. Changing your song’s dynamic range in the bridge could add pleasing contrast.

For example, if your song is busy and packed with repetitious energy, consider releasing that energy in the bridge. This move gives the listener a chance to reset before returning to an explosive chorus. Again, variety will keep the listener engaged with your song.

You can release energy by removing drums and instruments. For example, strip the song down to only a vocal and a backing instrument.

You can also use the bridge to build energy. This move prepares the listener for the climax in the final chorus.

10. Keep It Simple and Don’t Overthink the Bridge

Sometimes the most effective moves are the simplest ones. Think about the phrase “Keep it simple stupid” or K.I.S.S. Avoid going overboard with the changes in the bridge.

A good bridge strengthens the overall song, not change it completely.

Examples of Great Bridges in a Song

Here are two excellent examples of effective bridge sections by Flume and The Beach Boys:

As mentioned earlier, a well-crafted bridge can elevate a song from good to great.

Flume – Never Be Like You feat. Kai

Flume has a beautiful bridge section. It starts at minute 2:15 and sits between the last two chorus sections. Kai’s vocal hook changes lyrically, melodically, and rhythmically.

Also, Flume brings in a slightly different pad progression that’s more present. He then introduces a set of string chords, adding tension that builds into the final chorus.

The Beach Boys – Good Vibration

This bridge is an excellent example of how to break the rules. First, there are two bride sections. The first bridge starts at minute 1:40, and the second begins at 2:14. The second bridge then extends to minute 2:56 before the last chorus section. This is a long bridge section!

Both sections dramatically shift the tone, energy, and mood of the song. First, the vocals change lyrically, melodically, and rhythmically. Second, they feature different drum rhythms, drum sounds, and new instruments.

The Beach Boys also did an excellent job creating plenty of tension before returning to the chorus. They broke the rules while still driving the song back to a happy final chorus.

Conclusion

What is a bridge in music? The bridge section provides a temporary detour for your listeners. It’s an effective way of adding contrast, variation, energy, and enhanced emotion to your music.

However, not all songs need a bridge. Don’t think your song is incomplete without one and avoid trying to force it. Only consider writing a bridge if it fits the song, makes sense to the listener, and adds value to the song.

How to Improve Your Mix with Mid-Side EQ

Wed, 04 Mar 2020 16:15:00 GMT

Learn what mid-side EQ is and how to use this mixing technique to improve your mix. Find tips on how to treat vocals, drums, bass, mixes, and other mid-side processing methods.

What is a Mid-Side EQ?

Mid-Side (M/S) EQ is an equalizer process that encodes a stereo signal into separate mono and stereo channels. The mid (mono) channel contains information identical in both the left and right channels. The sum of the left and right channels create a mono signal (L+R=Mid). Conversely, the side (stereo) channel contains information that differs between the left and right channels. The difference between the left and right channels creates a stereo signal (L-R=Side). When combined, the mid and side channels produce a full stereo field.

Once encoded into M/S, you can process the mid information independently from the side information. Both channels are then decoded or converted back into conventional left and right stereo channels. This technique allows you to EQ your mix with greater flexibility and precision.

5 Mid-Side EQ Techniques

The applications for mid-side equalization are countless. You can use it for corrective mixing work, mastering, sound design, creative effects, and more. The creativity is in your hands!

Here are five simple mid-side EQ techniques that will improve your mix. For these mixing tips, we’ll use the FabFilter Pro-Q 3 equalizer. The green filter is the mid band, and the blue filter is the side band.

1. Adding Stereo Width to Create a Fuller Sound

Use mid-side equalization to create a wider stereo image on a full mix or individual elements. You can create stereo width by changing the balance between mid and side levels. For example, widen a signal by boosting high frequencies in the side channel or attenuating low frequencies in the mid channel.

Widening the stereo image will make your mix sound fuller and more enjoyable for the listener. Similarly, stereo widening is also beneficial for sound design. For instance, when layering synths to create a wider, more fuller sound.

The example above widens a synth track by attenuating the mono signal and boosting the stereo signal with a high-shelf filter at 8,000 Hz. This move creates space to layer a mono focused synth while also creating width. When combined, both layers sound more cohesive, present, and immersive.

This mixing technique may also work better than stereo width plugins sometimes. For example, stereo imaging plugins can affect the phase of a sound, causing it to lose punch. Conversely, mid-side treatment will preserve the impact of the center channel while only widening the side channel.

2. Mixing Bass to Achieve a Tighter Low-End

Modern basslines in electronic music typically have a centered low-end and wider harmonic frequencies in the high-end. Keeping low-end sounds like the kick and bass centered maintains their punch and presence.

Achieve a tighter low-end by treating the bass with mid-side equalization. For example, EQ a stereo bassline to preserve a tight and punchy mono signal while retaining the wider, harmonically rich frequencies. Create this separation by cutting low frequencies from the side channel. The exact frequency cut will vary depending on the content. A good starting point is anywhere between 80 Hz and 250 Hz. Caution against cutting too much from the sides. It can make the bass sound thin and weak. Use your ears!

The example below removes low frequencies from the side channel at 300 Hz. It also boosts the mid channel at 175 Hz to give the mono signal more presence in the mix. Pro-Q 3 has a helpful solo button. Use it to hear the area affected by the EQ filter when dialing in the frequency.

This mixing technique ensures the lowest frequencies are mono. It also removes low frequencies from the sides, which cause clarity and phasing issues. As a result, your bass will sound tighter, present, and focused. It also creates headroom, which will give you better results when compressing the overall mix.

3. Mixing Vocals To Sit Perfectly in the Mix

Mid-side processing works excellent at enhancing vocals and getting them to sit in the mix. Try these vocal mixing techniques on the lead topline and backing vocals:

[yuzo id=13031 ]

Make Space for the Lead Vocal

Lead vocals should be front and center in a mix. Keeping lead vocals centered helps them sit in the mix better, gives them more definition, and retains their punch. Instead of boosting the volume of the vocal track, try making space in the mix for the vocal. For example, use mid-side treatment to carve out mid-range frequencies from instruments that conflict with the vocals.

These moves create a pocket for the vocals to sit in the mix. Also, dipping the mid frequencies preserves the wider side frequencies, not interfering with the vocals.

Add Clarity and Presence to Vocals

Enhance the lead vocals further by giving them more presence in the mix. The example below uses mid-side treatment on a vocal topline track. The EQ is boosting the mid-range frequencies on the mid channel and attenuating low frequencies on the sides. This move keeps the mid-range focused in the center and pushes the high-end information to the sides.

Balance the Background Vocals with the Lead Vocal

Mid-side equalization also works excellent on background vocals. Backing vocals are generally panned to the sides to make space for the topline in the center. However, if the backing vocals are conflicting with the lead vocal, use an EQ to make space. Simply attenuate the mono frequencies and boost the sides. Use your ears to balance the topline and the background vocals.

4. Mixing Drums to Create a Tighter, More Balanced Sound

Mid-side equalization is also effective at tightening and enhancing a drum group. For example, use the mid and side channels to keep your kick and snare centered while adding width to only the percussion. Or maybe you want to lower the volume of high-end frequencies without affecting the kick and snare. There are various scenarios.

Moreover, boosting or attenuating frequencies with a standard EQ will affect both the mono and stereo frequencies. With a mid-side EQ, you have more flexibility over mixing and balancing your drums. For example, create separation and clarity by cutting or attenuating low frequencies from the side channel. The exact frequency cut will vary depending on the content. This move gives you the freedom to boost the low-end of the kick and snare to add presence and punch without affecting other drum sounds. You can also boost or attenuate higher drum elements to balance the drum kit and add width.

The example above attenuates the side channel at 400 Hz to keep the kick mono and focused. Also, a high-shelf filter is boosting frequencies at 8,000 Hz to add width. Lastly, a bell filter boosting the mid channel at 65 Hz adds presence and weight to the kick drum. Now, there is more space for the kick to cut through the mix. The overall kit also sounds fuller and balanced. However, every drum group will be different. Use your ears to make informed decisions on where to cut or boost!

5. Mastering the Final Mix to Create a Radio Ready Song

Mid-side processing will give your mix more presence, clarity, and balance at the mastering stage. Use an EQ with mid-side capabilities for corrective work, tonal balance, and enhancement. For example, use the M/S mode on an equalizer to:

Tighten up the low-end : Cut low frequencies from the side channel to clean up the bottom end of the mix. This move also places the kick and bass in mono without affecting the stereo information of other elements.

Remove problematic resonant frequencies : Use the EQ sweep technique to identify unpleasant or nasally sounding frequencies. First, boost a bell curve with a narrow Q and then slowly sweep up and down the frequency spectrum. Listen for harsh-sounding spikes. Next, cut those frequencies by reducing the gain on the mid band. Repeat the process to create a clean and pleasant sound. Also, be cautious not to go overboard. Too many narrow cuts can cause phasing issues.

Add presence to the mids and highs : If the mix sounds muddy, try cutting the low-mids between 250 Hz and 500 Hz on the mid channel. You can also add presence to the mix by boosting the mid channel with a high-shelf filter anywhere above 8,000 Hz.

Add presence to vocals : Boost the mono frequencies of a vocal if it sounds buried in the mix. Again, use the EQ sweep technique to identify the vocalist’s strongest frequencies. Then boost those frequencies to add presence. This technique gives you better precision to treat the vocal without affecting the other elements in the mix.

Improve tonal balance : The interaction between all the parts of a song contributes to the overall tonal balance. Correcting tonal imbalances creates a cohesive mix that sounds more natural and pleasing. It also helps the mix translate better on various speaker systems. Balance the tonal spectrum by boosting or attenuating different areas of the mix. Use a broad bell filter on the mid channel and make subtle level changes. Try to achieve perceived equal loudness across the frequency spectrum.

The example above tightens the low-end by cutting rumble at 20 Hz on the mid channel. Next, there is a low cut at 200 Hz on the side channel. This move also tightens the low-end and improves clarity by removing problematic stereo information. Lastly, a high-end boost with a shelving filter on the sides adds brightness, width, and presence to the mix.

Conclusion

Mid-side equalization is versatile and effective. You will find many uses for this mixing technique. Remember to make subtle moves and not to go overboard. It’s easy to cause more issues when misused. Also, consider using linear-phase processing when filtering stereo channels to avoid unwanted phase changes. Again, use your ears!

Audio Compressor Ratio Explained

Wed, 12 Feb 2020 17:06:00 GMT

Compression ratios are often the most misunderstood control on a compressor. This beginner’s guide to compression explains what an audio compressor ratio is and how it affects your music.

What Is An Audio Compressor Ratio?

The compression ratio determines how much gain reduction the compressor applies when the signal passes a threshold level. For example, a ratio of 4:1 means that for every 4 dB the signal rises above the threshold, the compressor will increase the output by 1 dB. Whereas a ratio of 10:1 or higher will make the compressor effectively act as a limiter. However, if the ratio is 1:1, no compression will occur.

[yuzo id=13031 ]

What Does the Ratio Knob on a Compressor Do?

The ratio knob sets the amount of applied compression. The numbers on the knob indicate the ratio of input to output. The higher the ratio, the more extreme the compression. Compressors usually express ratio levels in decibels (dB). For example, with a compression ratio of 2:1, the input signal must cross the threshold by 2 dB for the output level to increase by 1 dB.

However, the available ratios depend on the type and manufacturer of the compressor you’re using. For example, here are basic ratio settings available on most compressors:

Note : All the controls on a compressor work together. It’s best to adjust them in tandem instead of focusing on the ratio knob in isolation. For example, the ratio and threshold work together. Compression only takes place when the signal rises above a set threshold level. The compressor will then lower the level of signals exceeding the threshold level at a ratio set by the ratio control.

Compressor Ratio Basics

There are no specific ratio settings that work best on any particular sound. It would be misleading to list specific ratio settings because every sound and compressor is different. The ratio settings you choose also depend on the source audio, the other compressor control settings, and the result you’re aiming to achieve.

The best approach is to use your ears and meters to determine the right ratio for each sound. There are also general tips to help you find a starting point when setting the compressor ratio. Consider these compressor ratio basics:

Note : To get technical, there is also a math equation for calculating the output of a compressor. However, best to use your ears and meters when making informed decisions.

Conclusion

Understanding the compressor ratio control is essential. Learning how the different compressor settings work together will help you achieve the best results. Also, remember to listen carefully while applying compression. And, use compression with caution. Aggressive compressor settings can adversely affect the tone, punch, clarity, and presence of an audio source.

What’s the Best Effects Chain Order for Mixing?

Wed, 29 Jan 2020 16:17:00 GMT

What’s the best effects chain order for mixing? Learn how the plugin order of your effects chain makes a difference to the sound.

Does the Effects Chain Order Matter?

The order of your plugins in an effects chain does matter. A plugin will affect the sound differently depending on its position along the effects chain. Knowing how the order of plugins influence sound can help you make mix decisions and troubleshoot problems.

What’s the correct order for plugins in an effects chain? This topic is confusing because there is no absolute rule. The order you insert your plugins depends on the source material, what you’re trying to achieve, and what sounds best to your ears. There is not a right and wrong order.

However, there is a traditional order of effects widely adapted. This workflow provides a good starting point. Moreover, it’s important to remember these are general mixing suggestions and not hard rules. Using the same order of plugins may not work for every sound or situation. Swap the order and remove or add plugins as needed.

1. Gain Staging

Gain staging is managing levels at each stage of the signal path. Maintaining the gain structure gives your mix sufficient headroom and dynamic range for mixing. It also ensures the audio signal flow is at an optimum level without clipping as it passes through various processors and mixer stages.

Inserting a gain plugin first in the chain allows you to adjust your levels before further processing. You can also insert a gain plugin anywhere needed along the effects chain to prevent clipping. Avoid running a “hot” signal into a plugin. Overloading a plugins input signal will give you poor results.

2. Saturation

Saturation adds presence, character, warmth, excitement, punch, and cohesion. Driving sounds through tubes, transistors, and circuitry has long been the key ingredient in achieving analog sounding mixes.

Saturation enhances sounds by adding even and odd order harmonics. These harmonic frequencies make a digital-sounding mix sound full, fat, and warm. It also helps sound translate on small speakers that can’t reproduce lower frequencies like earbuds, laptops, and phones.

Inserting a saturation plugin before an EQ allows you to cut or minimize unwanted harmonic frequencies created by saturation. However, it’s also suitable to saturate after EQing.

3. Subtractive EQ

Subtractive EQing removes problematic frequencies, creates clarity, and adds presence. The goal is to clean up the sound and minimize problematic frequencies that might get boosted by the compressor.

Use a parametric EQ to cut unwanted sub frequencies and harsh resonances. Avoid boosting in this first stage of equalization. It’s often better to boost with a second EQ after making corrective moves with subtractive EQing and compression.

4. Compression

Compression smooths out the dynamic range of a sound to maintain constant levels. It also adds loudness, cohesiveness, punch, and helps shape the tone. However, used incorrectly can reduce the impact of the sound, so only apply compression when needed.

This first stage of compression focuses on corrective work. Use a compressor to control dynamic range and catch the loudest peaks. Inserting the compressor after a subtractive EQ prevents unwanted frequencies from triggering the compression.

5. Additive EQ

After doing corrective work with subtractive equalization and compression, try shaping the tone with additive equalization. Tonal equalization adds presence and character. For example, it’s common to boost the high end to add presence in pop and electronic music.

The best way to shape tone is with an analog modeled EQ . Analog modeled equalizers emulate the circuity and musical character of their classic hardware counterparts. Analog modeled EQs also add, warmth, presence, punch, and sheen to your music.

It’s common practice to use a combination of digital and analog-style EQs. For example, digital EQs are excellent for corrective work because they are precise, flexible, and transparent sounding. Whereas analog-modeled EQs are ideal for tonal work and sweetening. They excel at emphasizing or attenuating certain frequency bands in a broad, musical manner to achieve clarity and punch.

6. Modulation Effects

After achieving an ideal frequency balance and dynamic range, add modulation effects if needed. Common modulation effects include chorus, flanger, phaser, tremolo, stereo width, and auto-pan. These creative audio effects add movement, depth, width, and character to sounds.

It’s common to insert creative effects after corrective work in post-production. Some prefer to get the basic sound down before modulating or adding ambiance. However, it’s also common to apply modulation effects before corrective effects during the sound design process.

Again, there are no rules. It might sound better to insert a modulation effect before the subtractive EQ and compressor. This workflow is logical if you want to clean up the sound and tame dynamics after creative processing. Use your ears!

7. Reverb and Delay

Reverb and delay effects are typically inserted towards the end of the chain or on return tracks. These time-based effects add a sense of space, dimension, and fullness to your mix. They also provide that integral polish that immerses listeners.

The order of these two effects will also make a difference. For example, when using delay and reverb together, it’s common to insert the delay before the reverb. This way the reverb doesn’t wash out the sound before it hits the delay.

8. Limiting

Limiters are essential dynamic processing tools used for mixing and mastering. At a basic level, limiters reduce the peaks in a waveform and prevent them from exceeding a digital ceiling. The result reduces the dynamic range of an audio signal and increases perceived loudness .

Insert a limiter towards the end of your effects chain to reduce excessive transients, control dynamics, glue sounds together, boost levels, and add power. However, not every sound requires limiting. Only apply a limiter if it’s needed.

9. Sidechaining

Sidechain compression creates separation between elements and helps them punch through the mix. It also minimizes phasing and frequency masking between the two elements.

A sidechain compressor uses an external sound source to quickly reduce the volume of a sound. For example, sidechaining a bass track will lower the bass volume every time the kick strikes. This technique allows the kick to cut through the mix more clearly. It will also give the kick more of an impact.

Applying sidechain compression last in the effects chain also helps control reverb and delay tails. In addition, it gives you more flexibility to adjust the amount of sidechaining without affecting the signal input of other effects plugins.

10. Volume

Inserting a gain plugin last in the chain allows you to adjust your levels further if needed. It’s also recommended to insert a gain plugin at the end of the effects chain if you plan on using volume automation.

Automation is an essential process that helps make your music sound more compelling, exciting, and dynamic. It’s better to apply automation using a gain plugin instead of the tracks volume fader. This method keeps the volume fader free to make further gain staging adjustments.

Conclusion

This guide aims to help you understand how the order of effects plugins can make a difference. Becoming familiar with how the output of a plugin can influence the next plugin in the chain will help you make informed decisions.

There are also logical reasons to use a particular plugin before another. However, the order may not work for every sound or scenario. In addition, not every sound requires all the effects plugins outlined in this guide. It’s crucial to use your ears and to only apply an effect plugin for a purposeful reason.

Lastly, remember there are no rules. Try swapping effects around to hear the difference. Also, try different combinations on various elements to hear what sounds best. Good luck!

The post What’s the Best Effects Chain Order for Mixing? appeared first on Los Angeles and Online .

How to Pick the Best Key for a Song

Wed, 22 Jan 2020 17:02:00 GMT

Learn how to pick the best key for a song. Here are four tips to consider when choosing the right key for your song.

How to Choose the Right Key for a Song

Choosing the best musical key for your song is essential. Nearly every song is written in a specific key. The key will define the makeup of your song and give you certain information about that song. For example, a song’s key determines:

It’s best to determine which key you will write your song in before starting a project. It will be difficult to change the key after the production process has begun. However, you can change the key by transposing all the tracks in your song with a pitch. For example, the vocals, melodies, harmonies, basslines, and any instruments. Basically, everything except drum tracks.

4 Tips for Choosing a Song’s Key

There are several factors to consider when choosing the key for your song. Here are four tips that will help you determine the best key for your song.

1. Find Your Vocal Range

Every singer has a vocal range of high and low notes they can comfortably sing. Similar to a melody having a top and bottom note. When choosing a key for a song, it’s essential to know the singer’s vocal range. Once you know the vocal range, find a key that includes the highest and lowest notes the vocalist can sing without straining.

However, if you already have an arrangement started, try pitching all your musical elements up or down to accommodate the singer’s vocal range. For example, if the top note a vocalist can sing is C4, then transpose the song, so the highest melody note reaches a C4. You will also need to check if the vocalist can sing the bottom note as well and then adjust accordingly.

How do you find your vocal range? Several online tools will help you find your vocal range. However, the best instrument to use when determining your range is the piano. Try these steps using a piano instrument loaded in your DAW:

Note : As you move up in pitch, there may be notes which become hard to sing, causing cracking or croaking. These are your transition or break notes. Keep rising in pitch through this part of your vocal range until you hit your highest note. Again, you should be able to sustain that note at a consistent, recognizable pitch.

2. Knowing Your Vocal Sweet Spot/Power Note

Vocal sweet spot refers to the strongest part of your vocal range in which you’re most comfortable singing. It’s the part of your voice that flows the easiest and sounds the best.

Knowing the vocal sweet spot (Tessitura) is important when you want the vocal line to stand out. Whether it be at the end of the chorus, during a hook, or to emphasize a message in the song. For example, “Oh baby, I love YOU.” In this example, “YOU” is the power note in the singer’s range. Also, these sweet spot/power notes are often not the highest notes a vocalist can sing. The sweet spot is usually somewhere in the upper range before there is noticeable vocal strain.

When choosing a key for a song, consider the “sweet spot” notes a vocalist can sing the best. Find a key that supports their strongest note range to ensure the highest quality performance. Or if you already have an arrangement started, tailor and transpose the song, so the vocalist power note and the part of the song you want to emphasize are the same. For example, make sure the most important parts of a song, such as the bridge and chorus, match the strongest part of the singer’s voice.

How do you find your vocal sweet spot? Finding your vocal sweet spot is more a matter of experimentation. Try singing long tones in the mid-upper part of your range. Listen and feel how different notes project and how your body resonates. Certain notes will sound louder, fuller, and pop out more. These are your power notes. They will be comfortable to sing and have the best sound quality.

3. Musical Timbre of Instruments and Singers

Timbre is the perceived sound quality of a musical note, voice, sound, or tone. When talking about timbre, the choice of the key becomes much more subjective. For example, raising or lowering the pitch of specific instruments will change the color or flavor of their sound. The sound may become brighter, thinner, fatter, or speak better depending on the characteristics of the instrument, sample, synth patch, or even the speakers. Moreover, certain keys will sound better on some instruments due to their construction. For these reasons, consider choosing a key that fits the natural range of a singer or instrument for the best sound quality.

A full mix also has timbre. If you already have an arrangement started, try auditioning the mix in a different key to hear if it sounds better. For example, if your overall mix sounds heavy or muddy, try transposing the entire mix up a tone or two. Similarly, if the mix lacks body and fullness, try transposing the whole mix down.

Audition your song in a different key by making a bounce-down of the mix and then transposing that track up or down. Repeat and listen to the various key versions to hear what sounds best to you. Once you find a key you like the most, go back to the original mix and transpose all the tracks except drums/percussion to the desired pitches. Next, listen to the drums/percussion to make sure they sound good in the new key. Be particularly aware of the bass drum as it may contain a specific pitch that can mess with your other tracks. Then transpose any drums/percussion if needed.

4. Instrument Playability and Ease of Performance

Another reason why you may want to change the key is if you play your music live. The playability of an instrument can play a factor in which key you choose. Many musicians prefer a key that’s easier to play on a particular instrument. For example:

If you’re playing an instrument, consider finding a key that’s easier to play while still sounding good. These decisions will be subjective based on the artist, player, and context. So, use your ear when choosing the right key for a song.

Conclusion

Learning how to find the best key for a song is a valuable musical skill. Knowing the key allows you to transpose the song to better suit a vocalist or instrument. It also allows you to experiment with making songs sound different. The differences in timbre, sound quality, and mood can be surprising. Moreover, knowing how a key affects your music can open up your creative pallet and mix options.

The most important consideration is how different keys affect the vocals. The vocal range is more limited than any synthesizer or acoustic instrument. Therefore, small changes to the key can drastically alter the impact of a vocal performance. That’s why it’s crucial to work with your vocalist to get the best performance possible. The rest is just icing on the cake!

10 Best Mini MIDI Keyboard Controllers

Mon, 13 Jan 2020 18:02:00 GMT

What are the best mini MIDI keyboard controllers? This ICON Picks roundup lists ten quality mini MIDI keyboards for your creative needs.

What are Mini MIDI Keyboard Controllers?

Mini MIDI keyboard controllers are an essential piece of music gear . These versatile keyboards enable you to control DAW functions, virtual instruments, and plugin effects. Compact mini keyboard controllers are also ideal for music producers wanting a feature-packed creative tool that’s affordable, portable, and lightweight.

The biggest differences between mini MIDI keyboard controllers and standard MIDI keyboard controllers are price, size, weight, and the number of keys.

What Are the Benefits of a Mini Midi Keyboard Controller?

The benefits of using a mini MIDI keyboard controller include:

The following mini MIDI keyboard controllers provide affordable options that are feature-packed, portable, lightweight, and durable.

1. Arturia | MiniLab MkII Slim-key Controller

MiniLab MkII is a feature-packed controller that gives you hands-on access to your virtual studio. This portable 25-key controller features 16 rotary encoders, eight RGB pressure-sensitive pads, and two capacitive touch strips. It also comes loaded with 5000 analog sounds and a software bundle. In addition, its compact profile makes it perfect for creating on the go!

2. ROLI | Seaboard Block Studio Edition

Play with unparalleled expression on the most compact and affordable model of ROLI’s acclaimed Seaboard keyboard. This next-generation MIDI keyboard controller sports a 24-keywave playing surface for shaping sounds with five dimensions of touch. Bend pitch, change timbre, and modulate sound through pressure, slides, and other movements. This versatile controller keyboard also comes with ROLI Studio, a desktop software suite with cutting-edge sounds, effects, and production tools. You can also connect the Seaboard Block to ROLI’s modular Blocks system to expand its capabilities.

3. AKAI | MPK Mini MkII Keyboard Controller

The limited-edition MPK mini comes in a white finish with inverted color keys. This ultra-compact MIDI keyboard controller is perfect for traveling musicians and desktop producers. It features 25 velocity-sensitive keys, a 4-way thumbstick, eight backlit velocity-sensitive pads, eight assignable knobs, an onboard arpeggiator, and more. The MPK mini also comes bundled with a suite of production software and virtual instruments for immediate music creation.

4. Native Instruments | KOMPLETE KONTROL A25

Take control of your virtual instruments and effects with the KOMPLETE KONTROL A25 keyboard. It sports a custom semi-weighted NI keybed, an OLED display, eight touch-sensitive control knobs, ergonomic pitch and mod wheels, Smart Play features, and more. This portable keyboard controller can also intuitively integrate with your favorite DAW. In addition, it comes loaded with a KOMPLETE Instruments and Effects software suite.

5. Novation | Launchkey Mini MK3 Keyboard Controller

Launchkey Mini is a compact and portable 25-key MIDI keyboard controller. It gives you everything you need to create in Ableton Live. Key features include intuitive Ableton control, 16 RGB pads, eight rotary knobs, two touch strips, a creative arpeggiator, Fixed Chord mode, and MIDI out. Launchkey Mini also includes a collection of sounds, instruments, and effects.

6. Nektar | Impact LX25+ Keyboard Controller

The Impact LX25+ MIDI controller is compact yet jam-packed with intelligent and expressive performance control. It uses automatic mapping to give you hands-on control of your DAW. You can also switch between Mixer, Instrument, and Preset modes for a fast workflow. Plus, the Impact LX25+ features a 25-note velocity-sensitive keybed, eight performance LED pads for drum programming, a 30mm fader, eight knobs, programmable controls, pitch and mod wheels, USB connection, and more.

7. Native Instruments | KOMPLETE KONTROL M32

The KOMPLETE KONTROL M32 is Native Instruments’ most compact keyboard. This highly portable keyboard controller is perfect for musicians on the go. It provides seamless integration with virtual instruments, effects, sounds, and popular DAWs. The M32 also sports a 32 synth-action keybed, an OLED display, eight touch-sensitive control knobs, two touch strips for intuitive expression, Smart Play features, and more. In addition, it comes with a vast array of virtual instruments, effects, loops, samples, and other production tools.

8. Novation | Impulse 25 Keyboard Controller

The Novation Impulse 25 MIDI keyboard controller gives you everything you need to control your DAW. This advanced controller features a 25-key semi-weighted keybed with assignable aftertouch, an LCD screen, eight backlit performance pads, eight rotary knobs, one 45mm fader, transport controls, and more. The Impulse 25 also ships with Novation’s Automap control software for seamless DAW integration, Ableton Live Lite, a collection of software, and a Loopmasters sample library.

9. Arturia | KeyStep Controller and Sequencer

KeyStep combines a portable USB keyboard controller with a polyphonic step sequencer. You can control both digital and analog devices, including modular gear. It also features a 32-note Slimkey keybed with aftertouch, an arpeggiator, two capacitive pitch and mod touch strips, a fun chord play mode, and more.

10. Korg | nanoKEY Studio Mobile Keyboard

The nanoKEY Studio is a compact mobile MIDI keyboard that connects via USB or Bluetooth. This compact controller combines a 25-note backlit velocity-sensitive keybed with eight backlit velocity-sensitive pads, eight encoders, a Kaoss pad, control buttons, and more. nanoKEY Studio is also battery operated and can connect wirelessly to iOS and Windows devices.

7 Ways Sound Healing and Vibration Enhance Your Music

Wed, 08 Jan 2020 17:05:00 GMT

Learn how to intentionally include noise, mindful sounds, and inaudible vibrations into your music. Discover how applying these sound healing techniques are beneficial to your health and well-being.

What’s the Difference Between Music and Noise?

Sound is a human’s mental construct of audible vibrations. Generally, our mind will categorize sound as pleasant (music) or unpleasant (noise). Both music and noise are mixtures of sound waves at different frequencies. However, you can simplify music as ordered sound and noise as a disordered sound.

Music also makes sense to the mind and can inspire an emotional response. It offers value and meaning, whereas noise has no meaning and can be perceived as an interruption to meaningful sound. Noise can also inspire an emotional response, though this is usually aggravation or annoyance.

For example, the mixture of sounds in a piece of music can be separated into individual frequencies, with a discernible dominant frequency. Conversely, noise contains every possible frequency in the audio spectrum with no presence of a dominant frequency.

Sound, Noise, and Music

Below further defines the distinctions between sound, noise, and music.

What is Sound?

Sound occurs when an object vibrates. Longitudinal pressure waves then transmit the radiant energy produced by the vibrating object through a medium such as air, water, or solid. Naturally, our eardrum vibrates from the incoming pressure waves and sends these vibrations to the brain. The brain then turns them into a sound we recognize and understand.

What is Noise?

Many perceive noise as a disorganized sound that causes disturbance or chaos. From a physics standpoint, noise is indistinguishable from sound, as both are vibrations through a medium like air or water. The differentiation takes place when the brain and nervous system receive and perceive the sound. Culturally with music theory, we perceive various tones as more pleasant and harmonious when played together. While other tones are perceived to create dissonance when combined. Dissonance is generally associated with noise.

What is Music?

Music is both the art and science of ordering tones in succession and combination in a meaningful way to produce a unified composition . Common elements of music include harmony, melody, rhythm, pitch, timbre, dynamics, texture, and tempo. A shared view is music both expresses and evokes emotion. Music can also take the listener on a visceral journey or tell a story. Musicians achieve this with mere instrumentation, silence, or by incorporating lyrics.

Mindful Sounds and Inaudible Vibrations

Below defines mindful sounds and inaudible vibrations. These expositions will also give you a better understanding of how to incorporate mindful sounds and inaudible vibrations into your music.

What is Mindful Sound?

The terms “healing sounds” or “sound healing” has been growing in popularity. There are a variety of ways to experience the effects of sound healing. For example, through binaural beats, Solfeggio Frequencies, Theta Healing, Schumann Resonance, sound meditation, and audio-guided experiences. Playing these sounds have the intended purpose of improving physical and emotional health and well-being .

Using the terms “mindful” or “intentional” sound also accurately represent this category. Both allow the listener to discern their own mental, emotional, and physical responses to the tones. For example, the sound healing benefits you experience listening to percussive instruments like gongs, singing bowls, and tuning forks may differ from how others experience these sounds.

These concepts and theories are a growing area of interest within the wellness industry. They offer explorations of how harmonics and pure tones bring a hyper-awareness of our unique embedded relationships with frequencies.

Inaudible Vibrations

The average spectrum of hearing for a healthy human ear falls within 20 Hz – 20,000 Hz. Sounds outside this range are inaudible to most humans. The mechanical apparatus of the ear may not hear these inaudible vibrations. However, the brain and nervous system still pick up the signals.

These inaudible sound vibrations can also influence human functionality. For example, a 5G network produces ultra-high intensity waves that invisibly interfere with our brainwaves and nervous systems. Side effects of these inaudible vibrations can negatively influence sleep patterns and amplify states of depression, anxiety, or our sense of mental and emotional well-being. However, there are also healthy inaudible vibrations, such as the Schumann Resonance. Musically, you can infuse these healthy inaudible vibrations into your music for various textures and subliminal harmonizing effects.

7 Ways to Apply Noise, Inaudible Vibrations, and Mindful Sounds into Your Music

Here are seven ways to creatively and intentionally incorporate noise, inaudible vibrations, and mindful sounds into the music production process.

1. Evolving Intros and Sound Effects

Start with noise and gradually transform that noise into music. Nicolas Jaar is a genius at doing this during his live performances. He works with an analog synthesizer to first create a tone. He then turns the tone into a warble and then into a rhythm. Finally, he layers patterns to create a unified piece of music.

You can also organize noise into a texture the mind makes sense of in a composition. Many synth soundbanks have noises you can mix into your music. For example, a noise riser by itself is only white noise that’s filtered. But in the context of a track, the riser creates movement, intensity, and anticipation during a build-up.

2. Pad Layering

Incorporate Solfeggio Frequencies into your pads and layers to bring a state of peace, bliss, or good vibes to the listener. You can apply these six frequencies into any genre of music.

Solfeggio Frequencies are long associated with meditation music. These musical tones were first adopted by the Gregorian Monks when they chanted in meditation. Many believe Solfeggio Frequencies penetrate deep into the conscious and subconscious mind, stimulating inner healing.

3. Bass Layering

Try layering the Schumann Resonance (7.83 Hz) with your low-end elements like the kick and bass. You could also use the Schumann Resonance tone to design a sub-bass layer. Search online for various ways to download the Schumann Resonance.

The Schumann Resonance is the natural resonant frequency of the Earth’s atmosphere. Scientific research claims the resonating 7.83 Hz frequency has health and wellness benefits.

4. Applying Binaural Beats

Binaural beats are auditory illusions with various health and wellness benefits. However, binaural beats only work on headphones. The binaural beat a person perceives has a frequency difference between the tones entering the left and right ear. For a binaural beat to work, you need two tones with frequencies less than 1,000 Hz. Also, the difference between the two tones can’t be over 30 Hz. Check out these binaural beats on Spotify .

Studies show panning different tones at a specific rate can affect brainwave response. It’s encouraged to research the various effects of binaural beats and binaural panning. You will discover interesting ways on how to apply these techniques to your music.

5. Layering Organic Textures

Layering sounds with organic tones from real instruments will enhance your music in various ways. For example, layering singing bowls and gongs into the mix add a new dimension of unique textures to the track. Try using the gradual resonance of a crystal singing bowl or a reversed gong hit as a riser. The possibilities are near endless.

6. Creating Meditation Music

Consider creating your own meditation music. Something that brings your mind and body into a state of peaceful appreciation. Try using ambient pads, nature sounds, vocal samples, relaxing harmonies, etc. It’s also a great way to tap into new audiences and increase your exposure!

7. Explore a Meditation Practice

Cultivating a relationship with stillness and silence is also a powerful, inspiring, and rejuvenating practice that compliments the creative process. The various meditation practices offer numerous health and well-being benefits. Try sitting in silent meditation for at least ten minutes a day and mindfully observe what sounds come to the surface. This practice will allow you to go deeper into your creative juices.

Conclusion

Each body resonates with the sonic world in unique ways. Incorporating the above techniques allow you to approach your craft more purposely. The intention is NOT to create sound healing music. But instead to become more mindful of the sounds and noises you incorporate into your music.

Take into careful consideration the elements you select and why. Also, reflect on what’s happening in your body when listening to noise or music. Moreover, be mindful of how the silence between the sounds compliments the stories you’re telling. These techniques help you become a more conscious creator, as art and music can often be a subconscious expression of our emotions. Avoid getting caught up in the analytical mind. It’s vital to make conscious musical decisions and to know how your music influences the listener’s mind and body.

Best Gifts for Music Producers

Mon, 09 Dec 2019 17:58:00 GMT

Score a hit this holiday season with these gifts for music producers. This holiday gift guide offers some of the best pro audio products for music lovers

Gift Ideas for Music Producers

To celebrate this holiday season, we’ve rounded up 40 festive gift ideas any musician or music producer will appreciate. Discover some of the best audio products in the music industry. Whether you’re looking for fun stocking fillers or something special for the studio, this holiday gift guide has it all.

Samsung | Portable SSD T5

Every music producer should have extra storage for their music projects, software, sample libraries, and more. The Samsung T5 SSD provides loads of storage, speedy transfers, and a rugged, compact design.

Ableton | Live 10 Upgrade

Live 10 is the ultimate software package for creative music production and performance. It includes Ableton software instruments and effects, various sound libraries, Max for Live devices, and a multitude of workflow improvements. Upgrade to Live 10 Standard or Suite to access more sounds, instruments, effects, and creative features to make music. See what you get with Live 10 Standard and Suite.

Soundtoys | Soundtoys 5 Effect Rack

Soundtoys 5 gives you all 21 audio effects plugins in their extensive collection. It offers all the essentials for mixing, mastering, and sound design. Also included is the Soundtoys Effect Rack. Combine plugins to build and manage custom multi-effect chains. Moreover, Soundtoys plugins are emulations of classic hardware or draw inspiration from sought-after gear. The bundle is a long-time favorite among pro mix engineers, musicians, and sound designers.

Audio-Technica | ATH-M50x Studio Headphones

Pro audio engineers and artists around the globe praise ATH-M50x headphones. These robust monitoring headphones feature large-aperture drivers, sound isolating earcups, and detachable cables. They also deliver accurate audio and outstanding comfort. They’re perfect for long sessions in the studio and on the go.

Arturia | MiniLab MkII Inverted

MiniLab MkII is a feature-packed controller that gives you hands-on access to your virtual studio. This portable 25 key controller features 16 rotary encoders, eight RGB pressure-sensitive pads, and two capacitive touch strips. It also comes loaded with 5000 analog sounds and a software bundle. Plus, its compact profile makes it perfect for creating on the go!

Focusrite | Scarlett 2i2 Studio Pack (Gen 3)

The Scarlett 2i2 Studio provides singer-songwriters with an all-in-one solution for recording. You get a Scarlett 2i2 USB audio interface, CM25 MkIII condenser microphone, HP60 MkIII closed-back headphones, and required cables. It also comes with a range of recording software, sounds, and plugins so you can make music instantly.

R ead More

Gator Cases | DJ Cases and Bags

When you’re on the go, the last thing you need on your mind is the safety of your gear. Gator provides a line of high-quality cases and bags to protect your controllers, mixers, turntables, and more!

Icon Collective | Online Music Production Course

Learn music production, synthesis, songwriting, arrangement, mixing, mastering, music business, and more. You’ll also get weekly lessons via HD videos and online feedback from instructors. Moreover, you can access weekly mentorship sessions with industry experts. Learn more about our comprehensive music programs .

Decksavers | Audio Equipment Covers

Decksaver makes essential protection covers for pro audio equipment. No matter what gear you have, there’s probably a Decksaver for it. These plastic covers will keep precious synths, controllers, DJ gear, and other gear free of dust and safe from spillages.

iZotope | Music Production Suite 3

Music Production Suite 3 includes Neutron 3 Advanced, Ozone 9 Advanced, Nectar 3, VocalSynth 2, RX 7 Standard, Tonal Balance Control, Visual Mixer, Relay, Insight 2, Celemony Melodyne 4 essential, and RX 7 Breath Control. You also get a year of in-depth tutorials from Groove3, along with iZotope’s R4 and NIMBUS musical reverbs. These innovative tools are perfect for mixing, mastering, sound design, and audio repair.

Slate Digital | Virtual Microphone System

The VMS Virtual Microphone System by Slate Digital is a hybrid microphone and preamp modeling system. The bundle includes the ML-1 mic, two vintage preamp emulations, and the VMS mic/preamp modeling software. Moreover, the VMS offers an extensive selection of iconic microphone models ranging from coveted tube classics to a modern ultra-fidelity condenser.

Neewer | Portable Microphone Isolation Shield

Neewer microphone shields reduce ambient noise and create a controlled vocal or instrument recording. The sound-absorbing panel features a folding diffusion shell and a foam absorption lining. It also mounts on a microphone stand to accommodate any size microphone.

KB Covers | Keyboard Shortcut Covers

Write, record, edit, and mix music on your computer faster and easier! These ultra-thin form-fitting keyboard skins include color-coded shortcuts right on the keys. Spend more time creating, producing, and performing your music and less time memorizing shortcut keys for your DAW or DJ software!

Roland | TR-8S Rhythm Performer

The AIRA TR-8S is Roland’s flagship drum machine. It combines the best of their iconic heritage with modern production abilities for beat making. Create in the studio or on stage with every sound from the most sought-after TR drum machines. This includes detailed circuit-models of the 808, 606, 909, 707, 727, and several modified versions.

Zoom | H6 Handy Recorder

The Zoom H6 is an advanced six-track portable recorder. It gives you everything you need to capture quality audio anywhere. This versatile recorder features four XLR/TRS combo inputs complete with onboard microphone preamps. It also comes with both X/Y and Mid-Side stereo mics.

Xfer Records | Serum Synthesizer

Serum is an innovative wavetable synthesizer from Xfer Records. Former ICON Instructor and Serum’s lead developer Steve Duda successfully created one of the best soft synths on the market. This acclaimed synth delivers high-quality sound, an immersive feature set, and unmatched sound sculpting possibilities. It also sports a creative workflow-oriented interface that makes it fun and easy to design sounds.

Output | Platform Desk

Platform is a stylish studio desk constructed with 100% real wood. It features a bridge for studio monitors, 9U of rack space, sleek cable management, and an optional slide-out keyboard tray with adjustable heights. It also ships with rack ears to mount gear such as audio interfaces, processors, instruments, and other equipment. Moreover, Platform’s attractive modern design will add style to your creative space.

Teenage Engineering | Pocket Operators

Pocket Operators are small, ultra-portable music devices. These affordable hand-sized instruments are perfect for making music on the go. The collection includes a drum machine, bass and lead synthesizers, noise percussion, and more. They’re also great stocking stuffers!

IsoAcoustics | ISO Series Monitor Stands

IsoAcoustics ISO desktop isolation stands will improve your monitoring accuracy. The sleek, low-profile design provides excellent acoustic isolation and enhanced sound clarity. They also feature 14 height and tilt variations to help optimize the placement of your monitors for greater clarity and focus. In addition, the ISO Stands series offers various models to support a range of studio monitor sizes, including a subwoofer.

Ableton | Push 2 Controller

Ableton Push 2 and Live work seamlessly together. This expressive controller instrument puts everything you need to create music in Ableton Live. Push 2 offers a matrix of 64 pressure-sensitive pads, endless encoders, a high-resolution color display, a touch strip, and various other creative controls. It also gives you hands-on control to create and perform music in Live 10 without needing to look at a computer.

Magma | CTRL Case Push 2

The Magma CTRL Case Push 2 is specially designed to protect the Ableton Push controller. It’s crafted with durable Durashock molded EVA foam and water rejecting polyester. The portable case also has comfortable carrying handles and high-density egg foam to protect control knobs, faders, and jog wheels.

Splice | Online Music Creation Subscription

Splice.com offers a cloud platform for music creation, collaboration, and project sharing. The site provides an enormous selection of sample downloads, a “Rent-to-Own” plugin subscription, cloud storage, and more. You can also enter contests, discover projects, and connect with musicians around the world.

Icon Collective | The Art of Flow Journal

The Art of Flow Journal is the perfect companion for journaling or note-taking in the studio. This high-quality journal features a leather hardcover, Art of Flow Mandala embossing, 192 pages, ink-proof paper, elastic enclosure band, a ribbon marker, and more.

Native Instruments | KOMPLETE KONTROL A-Series Keyboards

KOMPLETE KONTROL A-Series keyboards offer a streamlined look with a custom NI keybed, Smart Play features, an OLED display, intuitive integration with your favorite DAW, and more. They also come loaded with over 6,700 sounds and 13 GB of content. In addition, the A-Series keyboards come in three sizes: 25, 49, and 61 keys.

Vibes | High-Fidelity Earplugs

Vibes earplugs enhance your live music experience and protect your ears from damaging decibels. They work by lowering decibel levels of your listening environment without sacrificing sound clarity. You hear a natural sound that’s clear, clean, and controlled.

ROLI | Songmaker Kit

The Songmaker Kit gives you everything you need to create music using ROLI’s innovative touch-responsive playing surfaces. The kit combines the expressive power of the Seaboard Block, Lightpad Block M, and Loop Block. It also includes a suite of software tools and hundreds of sounds.

Slate Digital | All Access Pass Subscription

These award-winning plugins are some of the best analog-modeled mixing tools in the music industry. The subscription includes every Slate Digital plugin, the Kilohearts Bundle, ANA 2 Synth, and unlimited access to the Slate Academy. Plus, you get every new analog modeling plugin released during your subscription.

Herman Miller | Studio Chairs

Herman Miller chairs are a staple in recording studios around the world. These high-quality chairs have breathable mesh material, ergonomic design for long-term comfort, and are adjustable at every angle. More important, they’re the most comfortable chairs on the market!

Book | Mixing Secrets for the Small Studio

Learn how to achieve release-quality mixes in the smallest studios by applying power-user techniques from the world’s most successful producers. Mixing Secrets for the Small Studio by Mike Senior is an entertaining guide that leads you step-by-step through the entire mixing process.

Ableton | Making Music – 74 Creative Strategies

Making Music – 74 Creative Strategies by Dennis Desantis is an excellent book for music producers. It presents a collection of solutions to common roadblocks in the creative process. Specific emphasis focuses on solving musical problems, making progress, and finishing what you start.

Yamaha | HS Series Studio Monitors

The iconic white woofer and signature sound of Yamaha’s HS nearfield reference monitors are an industry standard. These highly-regarded studio monitors give you an honest and precise sound. The HS series also offers different monitor sizes to fit your studio needs, including a subwoofer.

Mackie | Big Knob Passive Studio Monitor Controller

The Mackie Big Knob Passive is a desktop-friendly monitor controller. It allows you to choose between two audio sources and two studio monitor pairs. Plus, the large volume knob makes it easy to make level adjustments while you’re mixing. It also sports handy buttons for Mono, Mute, and Dim.

Sonic Academy | KICK 2

KICK 2 is an award-winning drum synthesizer. Easily create, shape, and mix your way to a bangin’ kick drum. Also, speed your workflow by quickly synthesizing the perfect kick for your project instead of wasting time searching sample packs.

Native Instruments | MASCHINE MIKRO

MASCHINE MIKRO is a compact controller for making music. Use it to tap out beats, play melodies, build up tracks, and more. It also includes instruments, sounds, effects, and production tools like sampling and drum synths. It gives you everything you need to get creating music!

Auralex | Acoustic Treatment

Improve the sound quality of your studio! Auralex Acoustics offers a large selection of acoustical treatment products. They supply bass traps, absorbers, diffusers, sound barriers, construction materials, isolation platforms, and complete room treatment systems.

Moog | Travel Mug

The Moog Travel Mug features four waveforms and keeps your coffee hot. Stay energized during long production sessions with 11oz of pure analog bliss.

Akai | MPK Mini mkII Keyboard Controller

The limited-edition MPK mini comes in an all-white finish with inverted color keys. This ultra-compact controller is perfect for traveling musicians and desktop producers. It features 25 velocity-sensitive keys, a 4-way thumbstick, eight backlit velocity-sensitive pads, and eight assignable knobs. Plus, the MPK mini comes bundled with a suite of production software and virtual instruments for immediate music creation.

Korg | Monologue Monophonic Synthesizer

The monologue is a 25-key, fully programmable monophonic analog synthesizer. It sports a sleek layout, rugged construction, and loads of sound sculpting abilities. Generate powerful basses and sharp leads with monologue’s two oscillators, new filter, modulation options, analog Drive circuit, micro tuning, and more. Then put it to action with the step sequencer and intuitive controls. Plus, it comes in five colors!

IK Multimedia | iRig Pro Duo Studio Suite

iRig Pro Duo Studio Suite provides everything you need to record guitars, vocals, and other instruments with your iOS or Android devices. It includes the iRig Pro Duo audio interface, a large-diaphragm analog condenser microphone, closed-back studio monitor headphones, and required cables. The suite also comes with a software bundle of instruments, mixing tools, guitar amplifiers, microphone modeling, and more.

Novation | Launchkey Mini mk3 Keyboard Controller

Launchkey Mini is a compact and portable 25-mini-key MIDI keyboard controller. It gives you everything you need to create in Ableton Live. Key features include intuitive Ableton control, 16 RGB pads, eight rotary controls, two touch strips, a creative arpeggiator, Fixed Chord mode, and MIDI out. Launchkey Mini also includes a collection of sounds, instruments, and effects.

Native Instruments | Komplete 12

KOMPLETE 12 is the ultimate production suite. It packs all the creative tools needed into four differently-sized editions. They feature new synths, sampled instruments, effects, and Expansion sound packs. Plus, you can choose a physical copy that stores everything on an HDD or pen drive.

5 Reasons Why Music Collaboration is Necessary

Wed, 04 Dec 2019 16:28:00 GMT

What is music collaboration, and how can this skill advance your music and career? Learn five benefits of collaborating with other creatives in the music industry.

What is Music Collaboration?

Music collaboration is when two or more creatives come together to produce a musical project. Collaborative partnerships can occur at various stages of the creative process. It’s one of the most significant creative forces driving music today. As an artist, it’s essential to understand the value of music collaboration and the advantages this skill offers.

Music collaboration is a crucial skill all musicians should consider. Collaborating with other creatives will also benefit you in numerous ways beyond making a great piece of music. It can help develop your musical knowledge, expand your fanbase , boost exposure, open opportunities, and advance your career in the music industry. Here are five benefits of musical collaboration.

[yuzo]

1. Tapping Different Skills and Sharing Ideas

Collaborating with like-minded creatives with different skills or experience is beneficial. The music industry comprises people with innumerable skillsets and trades. Working with talented music producers, singers, songwriters, audio engineers, and others who can provide complementary skills and ideas will improve your music and musical knowledge.

If your skill is music producing , that’s great. Keep honing your craft, and when you need to tap a mixer, vocalist, etc., find someone whose roll fits that description. Work together to boost creativity, learn new techniques, share musical ideas, and delve into different areas of the creative process. You’ll discover how collaboration lightens the workload and increases productivity.

Connecting through the internet makes this process even easier. Check out online music collaboration services like Splice , ProCollabs, and Kompoz to connect with other industry creatives. Try finding partnerships with artists who excel in areas outside your specialty. Complement each other’s strengths and weaknesses to create and learn new techniques.

2. Music Collaboration Increases Productivity

Working with others and delegating different responsibilities during the creative process can save time and boost productivity. For example, you may struggle with mixing during post-production. For this reason, you could work with a mixing engineer and let them mix your music faster. Meanwhile, you can also start a new track.

Offloading duties will also free time to focus on other aspects of building your career. For example, brand development, promotion strategies, social media presence, and booking shows. These efforts are vital in this saturated industry. Moreover, collaborating with others can inherently double these strategies.

Collaboration can also increase productivity by helping combat writer’s block. It’s easier to work through creative stalls by sharing ideas and inspiring each other. Moreover, collaboration forces you to hit deadlines and not procrastinate or make endless tweaks.

3. Learn New Techniques Through Collaboration

Music collaboration presents opportunities to learn and create. No one person within the industry knows everything about music. Everyone, including you, has something unique to offer. So, when you work with others, you’re learning and teaching simultaneously.

During the process, you will also identify your strengths and weaknesses. Your strengths will drive your music, and your weaknesses will allow you to take your music to the next level. Collaboration can encourage you to address limitations and push the boundaries of what you’re capable of musically.

Learning new techniques and putting them into practice also forces you out of your comfort zone as an artist. For instance, try collaborating with someone who makes music outside your genre. If you make dubstep, work with someone who makes house music. By doing so, you’ll see the similarities and differences between the production techniques. You might also discover a love for a new genre you never knew you had.

4. Receive Helpful Feedback and Constructive Criticism

Music feedback is an essential part of artist development. Seeking feedback will help you improve your music and production skills.

As musicians, we become immersed in the music production process, and it makes it hard to hear our music objectivity. Useful feedback, both positive and negative, will give you a fresh perspective on your music. It will also present new ideas, reveal problems that may need fixing, and help you make artistic decisions.

Furthermore, if your goal is to be a professional music producer, you must learn how to make music for other people, not yourself. Collaboration will force you to show your music to others, which will make you more comfortable sharing your art. By having others contribute to the process, you’re inherently receiving feedback on your music. This approach will help give you a more well-rounded sense of what’s working and what isn’t. Remember to keep your ego in check. Feedback on a track is just that. It’s not personal. The person you’re collaborating with wants the music to sound good, just like you.

Also, two minds are better than one. Working with other artists can ignite inspiration, trigger ideas, and motivate you to finish a song you’re struggling to complete.

5. Expand Your Network and Fanbase Through Collaboration

Working with other artists doesn’t just mean you benefit from their musical expertise. Collaborating with other artists also exposes you to their fanbase. Tapping into the audience of another artist is a great way to reach new fans and expand your exposure. And if the other artist is well-established in the music scene, then the potential reach is even higher.

Collaborating with another artist can also connect you with their industry contacts. Having an extensive network of professionals within the music industry is vital to your success. Expanding your network can also open doors to further opportunities. For example, collaborations could lead to:

Remember, make sure you’re respectful at every step of the collaboration process. Most artists understand relationships don’t always work out creatively, but every relationship should work out in terms of respect. Having your music career hindered because you’re hard to work with can be devastating. If you have concerns, try working with close friends first. Ask for their feedback and impression of you as a professional.

Conclusion

Collaborations have produced some of the best and most innovative music in history. It’s an essential skill to develop. And in the digital era, collaborating with other creatives is even more accessible. Numerous collaboration services, social media, file sharing, and other resources make it easy to collaborate online or at long distances. It’s encouraged to connect with others and develop a collaborative partnership to advance your music and career.

Learn Reharmonization and How to Reharmonize a Song

Mon, 18 Nov 2019 17:39:00 GMT

What is reharmonization? Michael Emenau explains the musical theory behind reharmonization and shares tips on how to reharmonize a song using SOS by Avicii.

What is Reharmonization?

Reharmonization is when you substitute or change chords in a song while keeping the melody the same. It allows you to change the harmony of a song while still retaining the original melody. There are different reasons why you may want to reharmonize a chord progression. For example, reharmonization is useful for:

To understand reharmonization further, you must first know how harmony works. In its simplest form, harmony occurs when two or more notes are played simultaneously. For example, the chords that support a single line melody creates harmony. Generally, the underlying chords (chord tones) will contain the strong melody notes (notes that either repeat in a bar or are longer than other notes). For example, playing a C major chord and using the notes C, E, or G in the melody will create harmony.

The interaction between melody and harmony gives the song richness and flavor. However, you can change the flavor of a song by substituting one or more chords that still work musically with the melody. For example, you can replace chords that share common tones without completely changing the original song. It’s an excellent technique that gives an existing song a different sound and a personal touch!

Why Reharmonize a Song?

Reharmonization can dramatically change the mood and character of a song. Changing the underlying harmonies can bring new life to your music by adding varying degrees of tension and harmonic color to your chords. For example, you can transform a happy pop song into a sad song (or vice versa).

Why would a musician want to change the chords in a song and not change the melody? The melody is often the most recognizable and catchy part of a song. It’s the part most listeners latch onto and sing or hum. By changing the melody, you risk altering the most identifiable aspect of a song.

Whereas, substituting the harmony chords is a much safer way to modify the sound without completely changing the song. This technique allows the listener to hear the same melody they’re familiar with in a fresh, innovative way.

For example, the original chords for Jingle Bells are:

C – C – C – C7
F – C – F – G7

In a reharmonization, the melody notes stay the same, but some or all of the chords are different. In the example below, I transposed the chords for Jingle Bells to the relative minor:

C – Amin – Fmaj7 – Emin7♭5/A7
Dmin7 – Cmaj7 – B7♭5 – E7#9 – Amin

Reharmonization Techniques

There are many ways in which you can find chords that support a melody. Here are three common reharmonization techniques:

1. Relative Minor or Major Substitution

Every key has a group of chords that sound good together. These chords are called relative chords. Each chord in the scale will have either a relative minor or major chord that complements it. For example, A minor is the relative minor of C major.

Relative chords sound good together because they share two common notes and are based on the same scale. A common way to reharmonize with relative chords is to swap the ( I ) chord for the relative minor ( vi ) chord (or vice versa). For example, in the key of C major, the ( I ) chord is C major, and the ( vi ) chord is A minor.

To find the relative minor chord, start on the sixth scale degree of the major scale. For example, count up to the 6th note of a major scale and build a minor chord from that note.

To find the relative major chord, start on the third scale degree of the minor scale. For example, count to the 3rd note of a minor scale and build a major chord from that note.

In almost any case, you can exchange the relative major and minor chords in a song. The feeling will change, and the melody note may sound a little off, but you will still be in harmony.

Here is a chart to help you find every relative key without having to count scale tones.

2. Reharmonizing with Diatonic Chords

Every major and minor scale has seven diatonic chords. They are chords formed from the seven notes of any particular scale.

When reharmonizing a song, you can experiment with these chords in any combination to hear how they sound. Some chords will sound more “harmonious” than others, some will sound bad, while others may bend your ears in new and interesting ways.

Working out the seven diatonic chords for any scale can be tricky at first. However, there is a simple formula to help you build a diatonic chord from each note in the scale.

Build a diatonic chord by stacking thirds from the root of the scale. For example, take any note in a scale, then count up two notes and four notes in that scale. I think of it as pick a note, skip a note, pick a note, skip a note, pick a note.

For example, the illustration below shows the note names for D minor, and the numbers show the distance each note is from the root. You can see the D minor scale has the notes D – E – F – G – A – B♭ – C . Start with the root note ( D ), skip ( E ), pick ( F ), skip ( G ), and pick ( A ). This pattern gives you the first diatonic chord of the D minor scale. The notes for this chord are D – F – A , which makes a D minor (Dmin) chord.

This pattern works for every note of the scale. Let’s try it again to work out the diatonic chord for “E.” Start with the note ( E ), skip ( F ), pick ( G ), skip ( A ), and pick ( B♭ ). The notes are E – G – B♭ , which makes an E diminished (E°) chord.

Follow this logic to work out the remaining diatonic chords. The seven diatonic chords in the key of D minor are Dmin , Edim , Fmaj , Gmin , Amin , Bbmaj , and Cmaj .

Finally, once you work out all seven diatonic chords in any scale, you can play with them to reharmonize a song.

3. Common Chord Tone Harmony

A more harmonically advanced way to find chords that support your melody is to look into the chord structure. You can use any chord which contains a melody note to reharmonize. For example, you can substitute a chord that has one of the same notes in your melody.

However, this technique does not guarantee it will sound good. But it will open the door to many new chords and chord combinations you may have never thought of using.

For example, if your main melody note is a “G,” try figuring out which chords also have a “G” note. Any chord that contains a “G” is a possibility. Here are a few examples:

Major Chords

Gmaj (G – B – D)
C maj (C – E – G)
E♭maj (E♭ – G – B♭)

Minor Chords

Gmin (G – B♭ – D)
Emin (E – G – B)
Cmin (C – E♭ – G)

Diminished Chords

C#dim (C# – E – G)
B♭ dim7 (B♭ – D♭ – E – G)

Augmented Chords

E♭ Aug (E♭ – G – B)
B Aug (B – D# – G)

Minor 9 Chords

Amin 9 (A – C – E – G – B)
Fmin 9 (F – A♭ – C – E♭ – G)

With chord tone harmony, it’s not how one chord harmonizes with one melody note. Instead, it’s how groups of chords move around a progression and how they interact with the song in general. It’s an excellent technique for discovering unique ways to transform your music. You can even take chances and incorporate seemingly strange chords into your music. Remember, if it sounds good, USE IT!

Reharmonizing SOS by Avicii

Let’s look at reharmonizing the first part of the song SOS by Avicii.

Here are the original melody and chords from SOS. Please note, I have transposed them to D minor to work with the diatonic chord examples above. The original chord progression is:

Dmin – Amin – B♭maj
B♭maj – C maj – Dmin

Using the diatonic chords of D minor, I will show you two reharmonized examples of SOS.

Example One : I started the chord progression on a B♭maj chord and ascended through the scale in each section. The new chord progression is:

B♭maj – Cmaj – Dmin
Gmin – Amin – B♭maj

Example Two : I started on Fmaj, which is the relative major of D minor. I also based the remainder chords on this major feeling. The new chord progression is:

Fmaj – Cmaj – B♭maj
Amin – Gmin – B♭maj

Again, it’s your ear that’s the final decider. Play around with the melody and experiment with the diatonic chords in a different order until you decide what chord progression is right for you.

Conclusion

Reharmonization is an incredibly valuable tool. You can use it to improvise or create a new, reharmonized version of a song. Reharmonizing music also helps to develop your ear and understanding of music theory .

As you delve more deeply into reharmonization, you may also find that sometimes a melody note conflicts with the chords. When this happens, be flexible and try changing a chord to a different flavor. For example, try changing the chord to a minor, major, diminished, dominant, etc. You can also try lowering or raising the melody note a semitone.

Your ears should be the final judge, not your eyes or any rules about harmony. Remember, music theory is a tool for expanding your creative process – it’s up to you to make it beautiful.

9 Best Microphone Modeling Plugins for Vocal Production

Mon, 11 Nov 2019 19:06:00 GMT

What are the best microphone modeling plugins? This Icon Picks roundup features ten microphone emulation tools that model the most revered mics in the music industry.

What is Microphone Modeling?

A microphone is an essential tool for achieving excellent sounding recordings , whether it be vocals, instruments, or other sounds. The type of microphone you use can make or break the sound quality of any recording.

Each microphone has its own unique and colorful character that contributes to the tone of a recording. This is why recording studios around the world have a range of microphones that suit any situation. However, not everyone has access to the revered microphones used by professional studios. Also, sought after classic microphones are expensive and hard to find.

Fortunately, the ongoing developments in microphone modeling have provided more affordable and accessible choices. With a single hardware microphone and mic emulation plugins, you can access a dream virtual microphone collection inside your computer. You can now transform the sonic character of any recording using authentic emulations of the world’s most renowned microphones. Why pay $16,000 for an AKG C12 microphone when you can have dozens of high-end mics at your fingertips for far less?

Microphone Modeling Benefits

Microphone modeling plugins also have several benefits. For example:

Cost : Affordability is the main reason for using a modeled microphone instead of the original hardware. It’s extensive to build a personal mic collection that meets the needs of your projects. Also, most vintage mics are costly and hard to find.

Convenience : Microphone emulation plugins allow you to audition multiple mics quickly, even after recording. Imagine recording a track with one mic and then realize later another may have been a better choice. With modeled mic plugins, you can switch a preset to hear a new sound without hassle. Moreover, you can use mic modeling plugins in a live performance to get the sound of a high-end mic you would never consider bringing on the road.

Flexibility : Plugins can offer more options and capabilities than hardware microphones. For example, some mic modeling plugins allow you to change the mic type, polar pattern, and other microphone characteristics, even after recording!

Reliability : Microphone modeling systems don’t require maintenance like many vintage microphones. A new mic model system is also less delicate and easy to replace if damaged than a vintage vacuum tube microphone.

1. Townsend Labs | The Sphere L22 Microphone System

The Sphere L22 microphone system from Townsend Labs accurately models the characteristics of the most sought-after large-diaphragm condenser microphones. Access over 30 authentic emulations of the most revered microphones of all time.

The Sphere system consists of a high-resolution, dual-channel microphone, and the included Sphere Precision Microphone plugin by UAD. Together, they accurately model the response of each mic model, including transient response, harmonics, proximity effect, and three-dimensional polar response. You can also change the mic type, polar pattern, placement, and other microphone characteristics, before and after tracking.

2. Slate Digital | Virtual Microphone System

The VMS Virtual Microphone System by Slate Digital is a hybrid microphone and preamp modeling system. The system includes the ML-1 microphone, two vintage preamp emulations, and the VMS microphone/preamp modeling software. You can mix and match precise models of sought-after microphones and preamps to find your flavor.

Moreover, the VMS offers an extensive selection of iconic microphone models ranging from coveted tube classics to a modern ultra-fidelity condenser. There are also expansion packs available that offer even more sought-after mic emulations.

3. Antelope Audio | Edge Modeling Microphones

Antelope’s unique microphone modeling starts with the Edge microphones. These mics deliver the characteristic sound of some of the most sought-after microphones. Pair them with the included mic emulation plugin, and you’ll have the ultimate virtual mic locker.

The Edge Family consists of four high-quality large-diaphragm condensers:

The Edge Family also boasts an ever-growing library of stunning vintage mic emulations. Expand your dream mic locker as new emulations release.

4. Antelope Audio | Verge Modeling Microphone

The Verge modeling microphone allows you to access some of the most revered small diaphragm condenser microphones. Its transparent response and high SPL handling excel at capturing brass, drums, piano, strings, and acoustic guitar.

However, when combined with the included mic emulation plugin, the Verge takes on the character of some of the finest small diaphragm mics in existence. Each mic emulation also delivers stunning detail and realism with no additional hardware required.

5. Gauge | ECM 87 Virtual Mic Locker

The ECM-87 Virtual Mic Locker emulates the tone, frequency response, and character of iconic vintage microphones. This microphone modeling system uses a cardioid condenser microphone and included Mic Clone plugin to emulate eight mics from Neumann, AKG, and Sony.

Moreover, Gauge Precision Instruments offers two versions of their ECM-87 microphone bundles: the ECM-87 Classic Virtual Mic Locker and the ECM-87 Stealth Virtual Mic Locker. These kits come with either the ECM-87 or ECM-87 Stealth cardioid condenser microphone and the Mic Clone plugin that emulates the vintage microphones.

6. UAD | Ocean Way Microphone Collection

The Ocean Way Microphone Collection plugin expands the capabilities of the acclaimed Townsend Labs Sphere L22 microphone system. This microphone modeling suite gives you access to Grammy-winning engineer/producer Allen Sides’ renowned microphone collection. Capture the authentic sound of 12 vintage mics with ultra-precise emulations from Neumann, Sony, RCA, AKG, and more.

The Ocean Way Microphone Collection plugin also requires the Townsend Labs Sphere L22 condenser microphone (sold separately).

7. UAD | The Bill Putnam Mic Collection

The Bill Putnam Mic Collection plugin also works with the Townsend Labs Sphere L22 microphone. This microphone modeling plugin adds nine vintage mic emulations of Bill Putnam Sr.’s renowned collection. Access iconic mics from Neumann, RCA, AKG, and more.

Moreover, these mic emulations nail the classic timbres of iconic mics used by Bill Putnam to track Ray Charles, Frank Sinatra, and more. They also faithfully model the transient response, harmonics, proximity effect, and three-dimensional polar response of the original mics.

8. UAD | Townsend Labs Sphere

The Townsend Labs Sphere Precision Microphone plugins give you access to over 30 emulations of the most prized microphones in recording history. This microphone modeling suite accurately captures the rich detail of revered microphones from Neumann, Telefunken, AKG, and more.

The Townsend Labs Sphere plugin requires the Townsend Labs Sphere L22 condenser microphone (sold separately). Together, this microphone modeling suite delivers impressive accuracy and sound quality. It even accurately models the response of each mic, including transient response, harmonics, proximity effect, and three-dimensional polar response.

9. IK Multimedia | Mic Room

Mic Room is a microphone modeling tool for IK Multimedia’s T-RackS. The plugin puts a world-class collection of over 20 classic and contemporary microphones at your fingertips. Access a range of dynamic, condenser, and ribbon microphone models. There are also a few unconventional and highly creative models.

This microphone modeling module also allows you to “re-mike” your physical microphones to sound and perform like some of the most coveted mic models. In addition, Mic Room offers a selection of tone sculpting tools designed to enhance your recordings.

How to Find Your Center When Life Feels Overwhelming

Thu, 07 Nov 2019 15:10:00 GMT

Learn how to find your center. David Garcia shares five methods that will help you maintain a balanced and healthy life during challenging times.

5 Ways to Find Your Center

We all have moments when life’s demands leave us feeling stressed, scattered, exhausted, and more. Maybe you fell off your regular daily routine. It could also be a change in the weather, politics, increased stress at work or home, or anything else that threw a curveball in your mix. In these moments, it’s helpful to have simple coping methods to help you rebalance and find your center.

Here are five ways that have helped me recalibrate priorities and get back to being energetic and productive.

1. Meditation

Find your center through meditation. At the beginning of this year, I committed 10-15 minutes every morning to meditation. There’s a lot of research explaining the benefits of meditation . For me, meditation helped slow down the constant rush of thoughts that would continuously place me in the past (filling me up with regret) or the future (elevating my anxiety). By focusing on the breath and allowing my thoughts to “be,” I created a separation between the narrative in my head (which most of the time was negative), and my actual reality.

I meditated in the morning so that I could kick the day off with a fresher take. After a week, I noticed I had slightly less fog. I also felt less sluggish, which led to a more productive morning, better moods, and an overall better day. There were also unexpected bonuses through meditating. I was getting better sleep and understood how to let go of the tension that would build up throughout the day.

There are also useful apps that helped when I was in the mood for more specific guided meditations or topics related to mindfulness. A few of my go-to apps are 10% Happier, Calm, and the Waking Up App.

2. Journaling

Journaling is a practice that dates back millennia; some of the greatest philosophers and thinkers of our time were heavy journalers, including Marcus Aurelius and Seneca.

Journaling is easy to get started. There’s an entire economy dedicated to designing the coolest blank page journals. For instance, check out Icon Collective’s Art of Flow Journal or Moleskin. There are also guided journals that include daily tasks and goal setting, such as Best Self and Focus Journal.

You can start by journaling in the morning as “preparation for the day” or evenings as a “daily review.” For example, use journaling to outline the day ahead, set goals, or reflect on what you feel you did right/wrong and how you can improve. For instance, if I’m feeling stuck, I’ll start with questions as prompts such as:

Another useful journaling technique is “stream of consciousness” writing. This approach involves writing continuously for three pages or 15 minutes. The trick is to keep writing no matter what, even if what you’re writing doesn’t make sense. This technique is also known as the “subconscious brain drain.” It will help you clear out the cobwebs that may clutter your focus and direction.

I lean on this practice during stressful times or when I have a lot of projects up in the air. Writing my thoughts down has a calming effect. It also allows me to contextualize the abstract and prioritize it. Once it’s on paper, the tasks seem less daunting, as well. It’s a fantastic way to re-align when things feel unmanageable.

3. Breathwork

Find your center through breathing techniques. The breathwork exercise I’ve explored is called “Pranayama” breathing. A few places in the LA area offer classes that teach this breathing technique. Check out breathwork classes from Rebecca Kordeki or Jon Paul Crimi .

During these 45-minute sessions, you lay flat on the floor, get comfy on a mat with a blanket, and practice various breathwork exercises. For example, you open your mouth, take in a deep breath to fill your belly, then take in a second big breath into your chest. Next, you gently release it all out of your mouth. You will also repeat this pattern while continuously keeping the breath circular and flowing, without stopping. Your body and limbs will start to feel tingly. You may even experience cramping and tightness in the hands or around the mouth. This experience is known as tetany and described by many as “ lobster claw ” hands.

I’ve done breathwork 6-7 times now. Even after the first session, I felt a profound transformation in my emotional response. The practice shook emotions loose, produced a change in my physiology, and got me out of my “thinking head.” I also encountered feelings of abundance, an immense sense of gratitude, and some release of deep-seated toxic emotions. I was so overwhelmed by the cathartic release near the end of the session; I cried for 10 minutes. The experience was truly magical.

4. Exercise or Movement

Inertia is the tendency of an object to remain at rest or in motion. Newton’s First Law of Motion states that an object will remain at rest or move at a constant speed in a straight line unless it’s acted on by an unbalanced force.

Exercise is particularly helpful if you’re in a funk, frustrated, or feeling sluggish. And the best way to change your state is to change your physiology with exercise and movement.

Start with 5-10 minutes of movement every day. Do something that makes you break a sweat, gets your heart rate up, and changes your state. You don’t need to get a gym membership, put on exercise gear, or drive five miles. Put on some running shoes, and go for a brisk 10-20 minute walk . If you can’t do that, try 10 burpees, 20 jumping jacks, or 20 squats.

If you’re up for a challenge, try something entirely out of your comfort zone. For example, indoor climbing, yoga, hiking, etc. For me, I joined a Spin class called Cycling Pigeon. This program will 100% push you to the limit. It’s also gratifying, and if you do it at 6 AM, you’ve set yourself up for a phenomenal day.

5. Gratitude

The Story of Two Wolves is a Cherokee Indian legend. It illustrates a battle between our good and bad thoughts. Here is how the story goes:

First, sit back and objectively acknowledge whether you’re acting from a place of fear or a place of love and abundance. This process may not be clear right away. It could also take some time to understand. The point is, your thoughts create your reality. How you choose to be in life not only affects yourself but everyone and everything else. This knowledge is a powerful teaching that invites you to take responsibility for your choices. Even the tiniest ones have a ripple effect. For instance, how you speak, how you act, what you do, the energy you bring when you walk into a room — it all matters.

If you perceive the universe as friendly, then a positive outlook will enhance your cognitive function . However, when you lead with fear, anxiety, or scarcity, you narrow the focus to eliminate the threat. You also get stuck in a pattern of being reactive, and your choices become limited. As a result, stress levels rise.

Gratitude plays a critical role in human happiness. Research in Robert Emmons’ book “Thanks” explains that at the end of a 10-week experiment, participants who kept a gratitude journal felt better about their lives. They were also more optimistic about the future. When practicing gratitude writing, the key is to be specific. Here are examples of gratitude-inducing experiences:

The most significant benefit I discovered was it immediately put me in the now. however, gratitude also appreciates what you already have. By cultivating an attitude of gratitude, you think and feel certain things better. As a result, you will see a broader spectrum of possibilities.

Doing these exercises every day will help you with the process of re-writing malicious code. It will also help you determine the nature of the experience of your life.

Conclusion

I’ve worked with these modalities at different stages of my life; no magic button gets it all done. Experiment with different ones on different days to find what method resonates more. It takes practice and discipline to break any habit (good or bad). The trick is to find your rhythm and flow and stick to it. Over time, you will be able to find your center.

Why Music Producers Should Play An Instrument

Wed, 30 Oct 2019 15:12:00 GMT

Should music producers know how to play an instrument? Harry Levin explores the benefits of learning how to play an instrument.

How Playing an Instrument Can Improve Your Productions

More young musicians are choosing the electronic music production route these days. However, every artist should also consider learning an instrument. Having experience in playing an instrument opens up new avenues of thought surrounding music. It also helps you understand music theory and other essential concepts.

Developing this musical knowledge is essential and will help you become a better music producer. You’ll be able to better communicate with musicians, produce more well-rounded music, and have a smoother production process. As a result, you can gain more opportunities as a producer in the music industry.

However, learning how to play an instrument is not required. Several talented music producers create amazing music without knowing how to play an instrument. Although, knowing how to play an instrument is beneficial for several reasons.

Why Learning Piano Helps with Music Production

At most electronic production schools, the curriculum emphasizes on students having basic knowledge of keys (piano, keyboard, etc.). Piano is the best instrument for learning music theory, motor skills, ear training, melodic and harmonic development, and more. Music producers also use MIDI keyboards and the piano roll in their DAW to develop musical ideas.

The piano is also the simplest instrument when it comes to generating ideas. You don’t need advanced knowledge to mess around and come up with new ideas for a song. All 88 keys are before you like the letters on a computer keyboard. With two hands, someone can play melody, harmony, and countermelody at the same time.

Why Learning A Single Voice Instrument Helps with Music Production

Knowing music theory and producing ideas with the piano are valuable skills. However, students are not gaining the most profound knowledge an instrument can provide. This knowledge relates to the human aspects of music, such as motion and listening. To understand these aspects, it’s best to learn a single voice instrument.

Single voice instruments can only produce one voice at a time like winds and strings. Trumpet, trombone, violin, and cello are examples of single voice instruments. Unlike the piano, you cannot play overlapping rhythms on single voice instruments. They can only produce one idea at a time. This limitation pushes creativity and teaches players different lessons about music. With fewer options, you must think of inventive ways to create.

For music producers, playing one rhythm at a time might seem unnecessary. After all, electronic music tracks have a lot of overlapping layers. A full song consists of several instruments, samples, drum patterns, effects, and other elements.

Yet, learning a single voice instrument can still improve your music productions. For example, it forces you to focus on different aspects of music other than forming a product.

Learning A Single Voice Instrument

An essential part of learning a single voice instrument is physical technique. Playing these instruments is where motion and music meet. They need your input to produce sound. For example, there has to be a constant connection via your breath or hands. That’s why practicing a single voice instrument seems closer to physical training than book learning.

When you practice a single voice instrument, you are practicing technique more than studying facts. It’s comparable to weight lifting. For example, you have to bench press using proper technique countless times to see results in your muscles. Similarly, you have to practice the same techniques on a single voice instrument countless times before you produce the best sound possible. Whether that technique involves moving a bow across the strings of a violin or blowing air through a trumpet.

This approach is why the idea of practicing an instrument for twelve hours straight is impossible. After a long practice session on an instrument, you’re both physically and mentally exhausted. Conversely, producing music for the same amount of time takes little physical exertion. However, with time and dedication, you’ll develop far more along the way when learning how to play the instrument. For example, your brain will associate physical and sonic output as you improve at playing an instrument. You also become connected to the music in a way working on a computer can’t match. Motion and music become intertwined.

This awareness of motion and music doesn’t go away either. It’s what helps you learn other instruments fast. Your brain knows what sounds good, and your body knows how to make something sound good. Whether it’s holding a bow, touching keys, or blowing through a mouthpiece. That’s how musicians like Stevie Wonder and Kevin Parker can play all the instruments on their albums.

The Relationship Between Movement and Music

The awareness of movement and music goes beyond yourself. Knowing this will help you make others move through your music. That’s because it takes more than a strong beat or other rhythmic elements to make people dance to a song.

That’s why certain tracks make crowds go crazy, and others fall flat even if they sound similar. For example, when you watch Jimi Hendrix play guitar or John Coltrane play the saxophone, they never stand still. They aren’t locked into the beat either. Instead, they are moving to the music as they create it, and the audience follows along.

Someone in the audience could guess why this movement is happening. But you can only understand why when you have experienced this reaction yourself. For instance, when you play an instrument, you reach a middle point between consciousness and unconsciousness. Your brain is in control, but you also trust your instincts at every turn.

No one can replicate this physical state on a computer because playing an instrument is a human process. Quantization and programming are not human, they’re mechanical. They can make your music sound static and robotic. Music which lacks a groove can also feel like something is missing. Groove triggers a physical reaction that causes people to move to the music.

This effect is why groove plugins like Humanizer exist. Music producers use various plugins and production techniques to humanize programmed music. Whereas with instruments, each moment is imperfect. There’s no need for these programs because everything happening is human. The best music reflects the imperfect human experience through sound. Those imprecise moments are what cause this instinctual movement.

The more experienced you are at playing an instrument, the better you can recreate this physical reaction. It doesn’t matter if it’s with an instrument or a computer loaded with Ableton Live . For example, have you ever created a track that made your body move? That’s the same instinctual feeling as if you were playing an instrument in the moment. If the sound creates an instinctual feeling in you, then it will do the same to your audience. And if your tracks get the audience moving, then they’re doing their job.

Listening and Creating at the Same Time

When you’re producing music, you create, then listen. For example, you add an effect, listen to it, and then make a decision. However, when playing an instrument, you have to listen and create at once. You place equal focus on what you’re playing and what your hearing.

By doing so, you hear what you’re playing as an artist and a spectator. It makes you inherently detached from what you’re creating. As an artist, you become attached to the music you create. It’s your music, after all.

However, if you plan on being a professional artist, you must learn how to make music for other people. You have to be conscious of what they are hearing. No one buys tickets to the concert in your room, and no one streams music they don’t like. By learning an instrument, you develop a more critical ear.

This approach is essential to being a successful artist. The audience is often critical, especially now with social media. If you maintain a critical ear and hold yourself to a high standard, your music will be better. Making music will also be more satisfying.

In Conclusion

Playing an instrument is much different compared to producing music on a computer. Learning how to play an instrument teaches you lessons about music beyond what you program or master in a DAW. Playing an instrument also requires hands-on experience to understand. Since the experience is theoretical and emotional, you can apply it to other pursuits within music. This includes music production.

Learn How to Improve Your Music with Music Modes

Wed, 23 Oct 2019 15:38:00 GMT

What are music modes? Michael Emenau explains the musical theory behind modes, how to construct them, and how they differ from regular scales. He also shares tips for using modes in your music.

What are Music Modes?

Music modes are a type of scale which like major and minor scales, contains seven notes. However, music modes provide alternative tonalities by starting and ending a scale on different notes. They are variations of musical scales that give various emotions and feelings.

There are seven musical modes: Ionian, Dorian, Phrygian, Lydian, Mixolydian, Aeolian, and Locrian . These modes are constructed from the seven scale degrees of a major scale. This means they use the same interval pattern as a major scale. The difference is the tonic (the root note) and the sequence of half steps and whole steps. These different starting positions give each mode a unique musical character.

Note : Scale degrees describe the different notes of a scale in relation to each other and their distance from the tonic (first note of the scale).

Why Bother with Music Modes?

Music modes give you more emotional options than the standard major and minor dichotomy of happy or sad. What’s great about experimenting with different modes is it immediately changes the feeling and flavour of your music.

Changing the mode also allows you to emphasize different notes of the scale. This note emphasis is where the difference and the “flavour” of modes lie. Consider trying modes to introduce new tonalities, variety, and vibe into your music. For example, modes can evoke emotion by sounding dark, bright, happy, sad, tense, heavenly, epic, or other perceived characteristics.

Let’s have a closer look at the seven music modes to get a better understanding of their unique musical character.

Musical Modes Explained

The C major scale is the best example when learning music modes. Sticking to only the white keys on a keyboard can make things easier to follow.

The C major scale has the notes C-D-E-F-G-A-B-C . The seven notes in all major scales follow the same interval pattern of half steps and whole steps, which is W-W-H-W-W-W-H (Whole-Whole-Half-Whole-Whole-Whole-Half). Moreover, all seven modes use this major scale interval pattern to build each scale.

The examples below show each mode starting from one of the seven scale degrees in a C major scale. The difference is the tonic note (the root note) and the sequence of intervals between the notes. Notice how the tonic note and interval pattern rotate between each mode.

Ionian Mode

The Ionian mode is the same as a major scale. It starts on the 1st scale degree and has the same succession of whole and half steps as a major scale. This mode also has a bright, uplifting, and happy sound.

W-W-H-W-W-W-H
C-D-E-F-G-A-B-C

Dorian Mode

The Dorian mode starts on the 2nd scale degree of the major scale. It’s similar to a natural minor scale. However, the raised 6th scale degree makes this mode sound brighter and more uplifting than a typical minor scale.

W-H-W-W-W-H-W
D-E-F-G-A-B-C-D

Phrygian Mode

The Phrygian mode starts on the 3rd scale degree of the major scale. It’s similar to a natural minor scale. However, the lowered 2nd scale degree gives this mode a much darker and tense flavour than a typical minor scale.

H-W-W-W-H-W-W
E-F-G-A-B-C-D-E

Lydian Mode

The Lydian mode starts on the 4th scale degree of the major scale. It’s similar to a major scale. However, the raised 4th scale degree gives this mode a much brighter, heavenly feel than a typical major scale.

W-W-W-H-W-W-H
F-G-A-B-C-D-E-F

Mixolydian Mode

The Mixolydian mode starts on the 5th scale degree of the major scale. It’s similar to a major scale. However, the lowered 7th scale degree provides a smoother, less happy sound than a typical major scale.

W-W-H-W-W-H-W
G-A-B-C-D-E-F-G

Aeolian Mode

The Aeolian mode is the same as a natural minor scale. It starts on the 6th scale degree of the major scale and has the same interval pattern as a minor scale. This mode also has a sad and oppressive sound.

W-H-W-W-H-W-W
A-B-C-D-E-F-G-A

Locrian Mode

The Locrian mode starts on the 7th scale degree of the major scale. It’s the darkest of all modes. The lowered 5th scale degree creates an unstable and tense sound. It is also the least used mode.

H-W-W-H-W-W-W
B-C-D-E-F-G-A-B

How to Create a Music Mode

Here are two different ways to construct musical modes.

1. Add a Sharp or Flat to a Major Scale

2. Change the Tonic (Starting Note) of the Major Scale

Build music modes by moving the tonic up or down the seven scale degrees at the start of the scale. For example, the C major scale has the notes C-D-E-F-G-A-B-C. If you use the same notes but start on the 2nd note, which is a ‘D’ note, you will be in Dorian mode (D-E-F-G-A-B-C-D). Using this same logic, you can derive all seven music modes. For example, starting with the 3rd note of the scale = Phrygian, 4th note = Lydian, 5th note = Mixolydian, 6th = Aeolian, and 7th = Locrian.

In this example, we can see that all the modes share the same notes from the C major scale. The only difference is the tonic notes that start the scale. Also, changing the mode allows us to emphasize different notes of the scale.

Using Music Modes to Emphasize Notes

There are certain ways we use scales and modes to define our melodies. The difference between Ionian and Phrygian is not the notes used, but rather the notes being emphasized. For example, the Phrygian mode emphasizes the ‘E’ and ‘B’ notes, which has a different feeling than emphasizing the ‘C’ and ‘G’ notes in Ionian mode. The video below explains the different this concept further:

It’s essential to establish the tonal center for the mode you use in your music, as this gives you the flavour of each mode. This concept is the same as using major and minor scales to evoke a different feeling or flavour.

Below are a few examples of how to establish the tonal center for a melody.

Note the unique feeling and flavour each tonal center lends to your composition when constructing them.

This All Sounds like Theory, I Prefer to “Feel” the Music

When writing a piece of music, we inherently choose either strong notes, weak notes, or passing notes depending on the scale and chords. For example, when writing in the key of G major, I will use chords related to that key such as Gmaj, Cmaj, Dmaj, Bmin, etc. I will also use notes for the melody that usually coincides with these chords and then resolve to the tonic. It’s essential to make all your harmony and melody parts work together. So, if you consciously use a different mode, then the melody, chords, and tonal center all need to fit within that mode. It may feel or sound strange at the beginning, but your ears will become accustomed to the different moods of each mode with practice.

Conclusion

Understanding music theory and the different approaches to making music will expand your compositional toolbox. You will have more choices when making your tracks and a better sense of what emotion you want to evoke with your music.

Learning musical modes is also an integral part of music theory that enables aspiring musicians to perfect their craft and expand their creativity. Experiment with these modes, get a feel for the different flavours, and have some fun. And most importantly, if it sounds good, and it gets across the musical idea you are trying to express, then it is right!

What Is a Music Supervisor and Why It Matters?

Thu, 17 Oct 2019 16:36:00 GMT

What is a music supervisor? Learn the role of a music supervisor and the art of music supervision to reach new audiences with your music.

Exploring Music Supervision

Getting a track placed in visual media is an excellent way for your music to reach a wider audience. To do that you need to understand music supervision. This blog post will go over the basics of music supervision and the role of a music supervisor. It also provides examples of TV shows and movies with excellent music supervision to help you understand where your music might fit.

What Is Music Supervision?

Have you ever watched a movie or television show and discovered a new artist because of background music? If so, you have the music supervisor to thank.

Music supervision is the process of pairing existing music with visual media. Television, movies, commercials, video games , and other visual media platforms rely on music supervision to license existing songs.

Also, music supervision is separate from scoring. The composer hired to write an original score for a media production does not own the master rights to the score. The production company who paid for the score own the master rights. For example, Lucasfilm owns every piece of music John Williams’ wrote for all eight Star Wars films. They can use that music at their leisure for any purpose if they own it.

What Is a Music Supervisor?

A music supervisor oversees all music-related aspects of television, film, advertising, video games, and other existing or emerging visual media platforms. Music supervisors also serve as middlemen between the artists and the companies or directors licensing the music. Artists own their music (most of the time) and companies license the music for their production. As such, a good music supervisor needs to have the industry know-how and good taste in selecting the appropriate music. They also need to know how music and visuals fit together. Moreover, a skilled music supervisor will understand licensing and creative rights.

A significant part of the music supervisor’s job is negotiating terms with whoever owns the music the director wants to use for a production. Most of the time, negotiations are simple. Music supervisors will draw up synchronization licensing contracts and master recording licensing contracts. Together these two licenses allow the master recording to be synched to a production.

However, there are times when a project may necessitate recording a cover version of a song. For example, when the master recording license is too expensive or difficult to acquire within a specific time frame. When this happens, the music supervisor will produce a cover of the requested song. In this case, the music supervisor oversees the entire production. For instance, they find the musicians, book the studio, handle necessary contracts, and more.

These situations are only a few examples of what may arise for a music supervisor. Every production is different and thus requires different musical needs.

How Do You Get Music Supervisors to Notice Your Music?

There are worldwide companies that handle licensing music for various media. These companies are known as performance rights organizations (PRO). PROs collect license fees on behalf of songwriters, composers, and music publishers. They also distribute them as royalties to those whose copyrighted work was used in a public setting.

The two largest PROs are The American Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) and Broadcast Music Inc. (BMI). Together, these two PROs represent millions of songwriters and compositions. According to Billboard, in 2018, BMI collected $1.199 billion in licensing fees and distributed $1.12 billion in royalties.

You may have noticed the lack of the word “ music producer ” related to BMI and ASCAP. That’s because music producers who create music with Ableton Live are considered songwriters. For music producers, the best route for placing music in visual media is to become a member of BMI. BMI is better for television and movie placement, whereas ASCAP is more for engineers and other fields in the music industry.

You can become a member by simply paying a fee. Once you’re a member of BMI, your music is in their repertoire. From there, anyone looking to license your music can search for it in BMI’s online database. Once they’ve found it, BMI will ensure you receive royalty payments for your work depending on how it’s used.

Artists whose music is available for licensing through BMI are Claude VonStroke, Zeds Dead, RL Grime, VNSSA, Chris Lake, and more. Also, dozens of shows and movies now use electronic music, including Ozark, Bloodline, Breaking Bad, The Interview, and more. So, the chances of placing your music in visual media are only increasing.

Another solid option for getting your music placed is to approach lesser-known filmmakers. They’re far more likely to place your music. For example, you can pitch music already placed in media such as YouTube video, a film school project, or anything else which has visual context surrounding the emotion your music communicates.

Furthermore, to understand where your music fits, you must study other television shows and movies. Ideally, shows that license a wide variety of genres for different situations on screen. The following television shows are excellent examples.

Television Shows with Great Music Supervision

Here are three popular television shows that get music supervision right.

Entourage

Most television shows use original music in their productions. However, that’s not the case for Entourage. Every piece of music heard on this show is provided by outside artists.

Moreover, because this show is comparable to reality, each song heard pertains to a realistic situation. For example, Vincent Chase and his life-long buddies navigate the film business and experience the full range of emotions. Happiness. Sadness. Love. Heartbreak. Anger. Relief. Gratitude. Fear. Surprise. All supported by excellent music from every genre. Focus on the nuances of each song and how they contribute to the tone of the scene. From there, you can understand what makes a song work in a particular situation.

Breaking Bad

Unlike Entourage, Breaking Bad features an amazing original score. But it also has excellent music supervision. Dave Porter made all the original music for the show, but there were still moments where his eerie compositions were not adequate. That’s when they brought in the music supervisor to find music from other artists. These songs fit the scene at key moments in the show. They also contributed to developing the character.

One prevalent example is the use of Knife Party’s 2014 dubstep hit ‘Bonfire.’ The supervisor placed this track as Walt dives back into the meth trade with a new level of arrogance. This arrogance is represented by his frivolous purchase of a new car for both himself and his son. And the raucous, high-energy brand of dubstep which dominated that year was the perfect backdrop for Walt’s reckless enjoyment of being a criminal again.

Euphoria

This hit HBO show from Sam Levinson explores some of the harshest truths of what it means to grow up. The challenges faced by the characters in this show are severe, daunting, and even cruel at times.

With this in mind, a soundtrack that mirrors the vehement nature of the show was necessary, and Labrinth was a prime choice to provide it. This decision put even more pressure on the music supervision team, though. They had to find existing music that matched Labrinth’s vulnerable score.

They not only succeeded in doing so, but they found music from all genres that fit a show about high school kids. There’s plenty of music made in the previous century that would fit the emotion of the scenes. But a good music supervisor understands the music has to make sense within the context of the characters. For example, this is a show about kids, and kids listen to new music.

In Conclusion

We are living in an age where music is mostly consumed digitally, and that includes visual media. By understanding music supervision, you can open a new door for others to discover and share your music.

10 Best Chord Generator Plugins for Music Production

Mon, 14 Oct 2019 16:48:00 GMT

What are the best chord generator plugins? This Icon Picks roundup features ten composition tools to help you create chord progressions and melodies.

Chord Generator Plugins

Chord generator plugins will help you hone your music theory skills , whether you’re a beginner or a seasoned pro. These composition tools will also improve your workflow and make keyboard training easier.

Many of these chord generator plugins show you how harmony and melody work together. Discover endless chord variations and melody combinations. Either play or generate ideas that can you can resequence, audition, and edit in your favorite DAW. Moreover, your harmonies and melodies will always stay within the correct key and scale of your project.

1. Mixed in Key | Captain Chords

Captain Chords is part of the Captain Plugins series from Mixed in Key. This brilliant chord generator plugin enables you to quickly create and modify chord progressions inside your DAW. Captain Chords also offers an extensive set of features that makes the composition process fun and easy. You can record, perform, sequence, audition, and customize chord progressions that will always stay within the correct key and scale of your project.

Captain Chords’ intuitive interface also makes it easy to develop the tone, rhythm, layouts, and complexity of individual notes and chord progressions. In addition, it offers a Strum feature to play chords like a guitar, 249 built-in sounds, drag and drop MIDI exporting, MIDI routing, and more. It’s the perfect tool to speed your workflow and learn music theory at the same time!

2. Xfer Records | Cthulhu

Cthulhu is two MIDI FX modules combined into one plugin. One-half is a chord memorizer and player that allows you to experiment with creating and reworking chord progressions. The other half sports a pattern-based arpeggiator that allows you to manipulate incoming notes or chords in various rhythmic ways.

Cthulhu makes creating chord progressions fun and easy with single-note presses. Instantly find inspiration by recording your own chords or importing MIDI. The plugin also comes loaded with over 150 factory chord presets allowing for a near-unlimited amount of possible musical-sounding chord progressions. The Chords Module will then analyze the chords and provide various sorting options.

3. Plugin Boutique | Scaler

Scaler is a full-featured composition plugin that makes creating chords and progressions intuitive! It provides note detection, scale selection, chord suggestions, editing tools, and more.

Scaler can detect the key and scale of your music and suggest chords that fit your project. There’s also a bank of 2,000 scales and modes including genre and artist presets. In addition, Scaler provides an extensive set of editing and analysis tools to customize and arrange your chord progressions. There’s even a built-in sound engine. You can use Scaler as a virtual instrument or export the MIDI and use your favorite instrument.

4. Intuitive Audio | Chord Composer

Chord Composer is another powerful chord generator. Intuitively create, sequence, edit, and audition chord progressions. This composition tool features a customizable progression builder, visual chord charts, MIDI editing, MIDI sequencing, rhythmic pattern generators, and more. It even has a Guitar Mode with customizable strumming, fret positioning, and tuning. In addition, you can drag and drop MIDI files into your DAW.

5. W.A. Production | InstaChord

InstaChord is a chord generator plugin that helps you play chords and chord progressions fast. This composition tool includes different chord voicing modes: keyboard and guitar modes. It also offers a variety of chords to select, chord voicings, editing features, and playback options. For example, you can hit or strum the chords with a different combination of notes, speeds, velocities, directions, and more. You can also play individual notes of the chord separately, which makes it possible to arpeggiate the chords.

6. FeelYourSound | ChordPotion

ChordPotion is a composition plugin that can help you create new harmonic phrases and melodies within seconds. Improve your songs and arrangements with various note patterns that react to your chords. You can also mix and combine different playing styles to generate unique melodic phrases that fit the genre of your project. In addition, you can drag and drop MIDI files into your DAW.

7. Mozaic Beats | AutoTheory 5

AutoTheory enables you to play chords and melodies in perfect key. This innovative composition tool makes it easy to create chord progressions, melodies, basslines, and arpeggios. Choose a key and scale, and the software will map all relevant chords and notes to the keys of your keyboard. This clever sequencer also features a chord generator, MIDI effects, and various chord editing options. AutoTheory will also sync the key, scale, and chord selections between all open instances.

Also, AutoTheory is not a plugin. It’s a standalone application that syncs with your DAW. You can connect a MIDI keyboard or use your QWERTY keyboard to control up to eight instruments.

8. Re-Compose | Liquid Notes

Liquid Notes is a composition tool that assists you with chords, scales, and harmonic movement. With its advanced harmony analysis and chord progression algorithms, Liquid Notes will deliver chord progression suggestions. You can then customize progressions by substituting chords, altering their function, adding tension, adding melody lines, and more. There’s also a wealth of other creative music-making features. In addition, you can use Liquid Notes as a standalone program which routes to all sequencers, or as a MIDI effect in your DAW.

9. Midi Madness Software | Midi Madness 3

MIDI Madness is a melody generator plugin. Create an unlimited number of chord progressions, melodies, and sequences. Moreover, MIDI Madness creates note and controller data to use in your DAW. For example, you can route the MIDI to another plugin. You can also drag and drop loops into your DAW and host a third-party instrument directly in MIDI Madness. In addition, MIDI Madness features various options for using it in live performances.

10. Hooktheory | Hookpad

Hookpad is a chord progression and melody sketchpad. This composition tool makes it easy to sketch out and explore musical ideas. You can create chord progressions, basslines, melodies, and drum tracks. Moreover, Hookpad has built-in music theory, melody guides, and intelligent chord suggestions to help you write chords and melodies. It also features chord analysis, chord suggestions, various editing options, dozens of rhythm patterns, a sound engine with various instruments, drag-and-drop MIDI exporting, and more.

What is an A&R in the Digital Age

Wed, 09 Oct 2019 16:29:00 GMT

What is an A&R? Learn how the artists and repertoire role is changing in the digital age and how to get the attention of an A&R to increase your odds of getting signed.

What is an A&R?

A&R stands for Artists and Repertoire. A&R representatives are responsible for talent scouting and overseeing the artistic development of artists. They also act as a liaison between the artist and the record label or publishing company.

A&R reps spend the majority of their time listening to music, scouring clubs, watching social media, reading music blogs, checking metrics, and tracking industry buzz on the hunt for promising new musical talent. They also rely on an evolving understanding of current music tastes and industry trends to find talent with the most potential of commercial success.

However, A&R roles vary depending on the size, structure, and budget of a record label or publishing company. Traditional A&R responsibilities involve signing an artist, guiding their subsequent career, artist development, and representing their interests within the label. A&R duties may also include organizing promotional and marketing efforts, supervising the entire recording process, finding musical collaborators, offering creative input, and more.

A&R departments have long served as the music industry’s tastemakers and the gatekeepers of record labels. This notion is still true today, despite significant shifts in the music industry caused by the digital age.

How the A&R Role Is Changing in the Digital Age

A&R roles have evolved over the past several years due to music industry changes in the digital era. The internet has made it much easier for an artist to reach new audiences. For example, artists can gain exposure through social media, digital distribution services, streaming platforms, online marketing tools, music blogs, file sharing, and other emerging music sites. The internet has also made it much easier for consumers to discover new music. As a result, labels are downsizing their A&R departments. However, the A&R role is still very relevant.

The internet has also changed the way A&R departments scout promising new artists. Data metrics and analytics now play a significant role in driving decisions. A&R reps are increasingly relying on data to measure an artists’ potential more than traditional methods. For example, streaming numbers and social media data will be part of the deciding factor on whether an artist is worth nurturing. The data collected will also influence marketing strategies, audience targeting, tour bookings, and more.

The digital age has also led to a flood of artists and music in the market. As a result, record labels are taking more interest in an artist already showing a level of success. Artists are now expected to have momentum, exposure, a developed brand, marketing strategies, and a strong following. This trend is less risky and more cost-effective.

Although, this shift has resulted in a decrease in artist development. Now, A&R roles focus more on helping emerging artists break into the mainstream, gain more exposure, and get better opportunities.

How to Get A&R Attention

Capturing the attention of an A&R can play a major role in launching your music career. However, you need to have momentum and industry buzz building. Today’s A&R reps focus less on developing artists and more on artists that have already established themselves. But how do you gain the attention of an A&R? Here are five tips:

[yuzo]

1. Build Your Brand

In today’s music industry, branding can play more of a role in an artists’ success than the music they create. Artists are not merely selling their music; they’re selling an image, an experience, and a message which defines them. Your brand reflects your story as much as your music! A&R reps are looking for the next “big act” with a strong brand that sells.

2. Build Your Fan Base

Building a loyal fan base is essential if you want to be a successful artist. Making great music will only get you so far. You’ll also need to be savvy with marketing, branding, fan interaction, and more.

A&R reps take more interest in an artist with a strong fan base. Expand your fan base by:

The more momentum and excitement you can build around your brand, the more likely an A&R will take notice.

3. Network and Build Relationships

Building relationships and networking in the music industry is always helpful. Boost your chances of getting noticed by making connections. Get out and connect with people, regardless of their status. Try to meet other artists, producers, DJs, publicists, booking agents, label staff, fans, and anyone else in the music scene. These connections could lead to opportunities. But, do so professionally, and don’t be a stalker.

4. Get Discovered on Music Discovery Websites

Music fans and industry influencers alike search music discovery websites regularly. Music discovery websites make it easier to capture new fans, discover new music, and more. Many also help you get discovered by music bloggers, Spotify playlisters, record labels, A&R reps, and more.

Check out sites like Hype Machine, NoiseTrade, SubmitHub, Pitchfork, Bandcamp, SoundCloud, and ReverbNation. These sites help connect independent artists with passionate music fans. Some also provide tools and services that help you engage with fans, promote and sell music, view analytics, and more.

5. Apply Marketing Strategies

One of the biggest challenges as an artist is getting your music heard. Getting noticed in the music industry takes work. You also have to employ different marketing tools to keep up with the competition.

Marketing and promotional strategies play an essential role in increasing outreach and getting your music heard. An effective marketing campaign will help you increase exposure, establish credibility, and open new opportunities. There are several excellent ways to promote your music and reach new audiences. Do some research on public relations and marketing strategies for musicians.

In Conclusion

Advancements in the digital age have diminished the influence of A&R. However, that doesn’t mean A&R is obsolete. A&R is still alive and one of the most coveted positions in the music industry. Many labels are still investing heavily in the position. And A&R still plays a role in finding talent that deserves a record deal.

Learn 3 Common Chord Progressions That Sound Great

Mon, 07 Oct 2019 16:37:00 GMT

What are the most common chord progressions? Learn about three of the most common chord progressions used in popular music.

Learning Popular Chord Progressions

There may be an endless number of possible chord progressions, but some are used more frequently than others within popular music. Knowing how to build chord progressions and understanding how they interact with each other is essential when learning basic music theory . Read on to learn about a few common chord progressions that can bring new life to your next song, regardless of the genre.

What are Chord Progressions?

A chord progression is a series of chords that provide the foundation for a song. It supports both the melody and the rhythm. Chord progressions usually repeat throughout a song, often never changing. However, it’s also common to have a progression that changes between sections of a song to add variety and interest.

The most important part of any chord progression is not the specific chords, but rather the harmonic function of the chords. These functions are all related to the tonic of the key, which is defined by one of the 12 notes. The 12 notes on the piano keyboard represent the 12 possible keys. Based on this, artists can apply chord progressions to all 12 keys.

Also, each of the 12 keys contains seven notes in an octave which can each serve as the root of a triad, the most common chord. Each note within any scale can form a specific chord. Therefore, you can build a chord progression based on the position of notes in a particular scale. These chords are then assigned a Roman numeral to indicate both the scale degree and the harmonic function of the chord. These chords have the labels I, ii, iii, IV, V, vi, and vii. Uppercase Roman numerals represent major chords, while lowercase numerals represent minor chords. See the image below:

Common Chord Progressions

Read on to learn about three of the most common chord progressions used in popular music. There is also a brief explanation of why each progression is used so often and examples of popular songs that use them.

[yuzo]

1. I – V / V – I Chord Progressions

This common chord progression is the simplest in western music because it only uses two chords. Artists keep using it because it allows for a lot of freedom when creating melody and harmony.

The “I” refers to the first chord of the major scale, known as the “tonic.” The “V” refers to the fifth chord of the major scale, known as the “dominant.” These two chords are also closely related based on the overtone series, which defines the circle of fifths .

For example, when you play a “C” on the piano, you’re not only hearing a pure “C” tone. If you did, it would sound like a robotic frequency rather than a musical note. The strongest audible frequency is the “C” or “the fundamental.” However, there are also overtones that give the note its musical quality. The most prevalent overtone is an octave above the fundamental, followed by the fifth. The spectrum analyzer below shows the overtones of a “C” note:

Essentially, the fifth or dominant of any major key links to the tonic, whether it be through chords or singular notes. For instance, when you build a triad from the tonic of the major scale, it includes the dominant. As an example, the key of “C” has the notes C-E-G. “C” is the tonic and “G” is the dominant.

You can also build a triad from the dominant of the major scale. In the key of “C” that would be the notes G-B-D. Continue this pattern further by using the second and third notes of the dominant chord to build the seventh chord of the scale , which would be B-D-F. The seventh chord is the tense, diminished chord that leads back to the tonic, offering release.

Why This Chord Progression is Popular

The dominant is the bridge between tension and release in major keys. This is why a song can alternate between the tonic and dominant chords over and over. With the right melodies, counter-melodies, and harmonies, the song will never get boring regardless of genre. As long as you stay within the key, you can write almost anything over this progression.

Songs That Use I – V/V – I Chord Progressions

Sublime – “What I Got”

Bob Marley – “Lively Up Yourself”

The Beatles – “I’ve Got A Feeling”

2. Twelve Bar Blues I – IV – I – V – IV – I Chord Progressions

Once you’re familiar with the tonic and dominant, it’s time to integrate the third major chord in a major key: the subdominant.

The subdominant is the chord built on the fourth degree of the major scale. For example, a chord built on the fourth degree in the key of “C” has the notes F-A-C. Also, the subdominant introduces tension that can be released by either adding the dominant or tonic notes.

The chord built on the fourth degree of the major scale is known as the subdominant for two reasons. First, it is one scale degree below the dominant, which is the fifth degree. Second, the interval between the tonic and the subdominant is the same as the interval between the dominant and the tonic. Both are a perfect fourth apart.

The most common chord progression that uses the I, IV, and IV is the twelve-bar blues. As the name indicates, this chord progression consists of 12 bars. The first four bars are all tonic (I-I-I-I). The second four bars consist of the subdominant and tonic (IV-IV-I-I). And the third four bars place the subdominant between the dominant and tonic (V-IV-I-I).

Why This Chord Progression is Popular

Theoretically, the subdominant serves as a precursor to the tension of the dominant because it shares a specific relationship with both the tonic and the dominant.

For example, in the key of “C,” the subdominant triad has the notes F-A-C. So, the subdominant triad includes the tonic note while the second two notes are just one step away from the other two notes in the C major tonic triad, which is “E” and “G.” This relationship makes the chord ideal for both moving away from the tonic and going back to the tonic.

Also, note that the subdominant triad (F-A-C) doesn’t share any notes with the dominant triad (G-B-D). However, each note is a step away. This relationship creates a solid sense of forward motion as the function of the chord shifts from subdominant to dominant.

Shifts like this can be very effective and emotional in music. This is why these three chords are so common together. They are also all major chords, so a melody based on the major scale will almost always sound good.

Note: Beyond the 12-bar blues, there are also dozens of other songs that use the I, IV, and V chords. Their harmonic relationship allows you to arrange them in almost any way.

Songs That Use Twelve-Bar Blues Chord Progression

The White Stripes – “Ball and Biscuit”

Nick Cave & The Bad Seeds – “Red Right Hand”

Led Zeppelin – “Rock and Roll”

3. I – V – vi – IV Chord Progressions

Now that you’re familiar with three common major chords in a major key, it’s time to make things interesting by adding a minor chord to your progression. Here, we will add the “vi” chord, known as the submediant.

In the key of “C,” the submediant chord would be the A minor triad, which has the notes A-C-E. This chord introduces a more dissonant, minor sound into the chord progression. It also shares an interesting relationship with the dominant. For instance, its lack of common notes makes it perfect for redirecting the tension to the minor sound. It can also serve as a pivot back to either the subdominant or tonic because of its shared notes with those two chords.

Why This Chord Progression is Popular

This common chord progression also uses four chords. Four is the most common number in music. For example, most modern songs have four beats in a measure. Those measures are then arranged into phrases that consist of 8,16, or 32 bars (numbers all divisible by four). Therefore, a song naturally flows better when there are four chords in the progression. It doesn’t matter if it’s a rock song, an EDM track or a Latin tune because they all have an overarching mathematical similarity.

Moreover, the harmonic relationships between these chords make this common chord progression perfect for writing poignant, catchy pop tunes. For example, dozens of famous songs across various genres and time periods use this chord progression. Everyone from the Beatles to Lady Gaga to Journey to MGMT have used this common chord progression.

Check out this video from Axis of Awesome playing various pop songs using the same four chords:

Songs That Use the I – V – vi – IV Chord Progression

Jason Mraz – “I’m Yours”

Red Hot Chili Peppers – “Otherside”

A Ha – “Take on Me”

Conclusion

These common chord progressions can serve as the building blocks for any song from any genre. Countless artists use them time and time again because they work. Not only by themselves but for further experimentation.

Remember, there are only 12 notes in the entire worldwide musical canon. Think about the relationships shared between the notes in the progressions listed above. Then try applying them to different notes. You may be surprised by what you discover.

The History of House Music and Its Cultural Influence

Wed, 25 Sep 2019 15:56:00 GMT

Take a journey back through the history of house music and explore this genre’s explosive cultural evolution.

The History of House Music

House music is an influential genre of dance music that has become a global phenomenon. It has been keeping people dancing for decades, spawned subcultures, influenced technology, united people, and propelled music innovation.

Stemming from disco, house music has evolved into many genres and subgenres of electronic music. It’s even influenced pop music, hip hop, and other modern music styles. To this day, the cultural impact of house music continues to inspire new generations of fans, music, technology, and innovation.

Let’s explore how this niche underground sound originated and how it became globally recognized as the soundtrack to modern dance music culture.

House Music Origins

Few cultural movements in music have a legacy as influential as house music. House music’s origins trace back to the underground clubs of Chicago and New York in the late 70s. Club culture spawned from the disco era was thriving, and DJs were experimenting with new ways of mixing their sets to keep people dancing. Early mixing and remixing techniques gave new life to dance music in the dying disco era. And a unique sound coined “house music” emerged in Chicago. The exact origins of the name are unclear, but many say house music was named after “The Warehouse” nightclub in Chicago’s South Side. Chicago record stores would attract fans of the emerging sound by labeling dance records “as played at The Warehouse,” which became shortened to “house music.”

House music became the first direct descendant of disco in the early 80s. It’s said “house was born from the ashes of Disco” after the launch of an anti-disco movement. Disco emerged in the early 70s as an underground movement born out of the urban gay culture in New York City. Predominantly LGBTQ, African American, and Latino communities popularized underground nightclubs and accelerated dance music culture. These clubs also provided safe havens for partygoers who wanted to escape from social issues and enjoy a euphoric experience away from public scrutiny. Legendary nightclubs such as New York’s “Paradise Garage” and Chicago’s “Warehouse” set the stage for modern club culture and catapulted the club DJ to rock star status.

Disco Demolition Night: The Night Disco Died

The disco movement became a global “fad” in the late 70s, partly due to hit films such as “Saturday Night Fever” in 1977. Major record labels flooded the market to cash in on disco’s rise to the mainstream. Disco hits were dominating the Top 40 radio stations and topping the charts. However, disco’s mainstream popularity drew backlash from haters, and a “Disco Sucks” movement rose.

Disco fell out of fashion almost overnight in 1979 as a result of attacks from anti-disco movements across the country. One of the most memorable and extreme anti-disco rallies was “Disco Demolition Night” at Comiskey Park, July 12, 1979.

The anti-disco rally was led by Steve Dahl, a loudmouthed disc jockey who had been fired from a Chicago radio station when it went all-disco. Dahl expressed his frustrations on-air at his new job at a rock station. He also promoted “Death to Disco” rallies where he would destroy disco records.

However, Dahl made history when he organized the “Disco Demolition” event at Chicago’s Comiskey Park. Fans who brought a disco record could attend the doubleheader between the White Sox and the Detroit Tigers for only 98 cents. The event drew a massive crowd of over 59,000 people. After the first game, Dahl drove onto the field with a Jeep wearing a military uniform, leading the crowd in a chant of “disco sucks!” At the center of the field was a large collection of records rigged with dynamite. Dahl then detonated the crate of records. The explosion scattered records high into the air and left a crater in center field. Chaos then erupted when thousands of fans rushed the field, started fires by burning records, and vandalized the stadium. The riots and a ruined field forced the White Sox to forfeit the second game.

The popularity of disco declined substantially after “Disco Demolition Night.” The event also triggered a nationwide sentiment against disco. Many still believe the anti-disco movement expressed racism and homophobia. As a result, record sales fell, and the number of disco songs on the Billboard Top 10 went from six to zero in over eight weeks. US record labels had to look elsewhere, and DJs were forced to explore new mixing approaches to create dance music.

Early DJ Mixing Techniques

Early DJ innovators such as Frankie Knuckles, Larry Levan, DJ Ron Hardy, and others played a pivotal role in evolving disco into early house music. These revered DJs forever shaped the modern dance scene.

Pioneering club DJs in the late 70s explored creative ways to edit, mix, and remix records. They also experimented with innovative techniques to overcome the limitations of the DJ equipment. Many DJs didn’t have basic equipment such as a DJ mixer, headphones, or turntables with varying speeds. It was also during this time DJs merged the roles of DJ, producer, composer, and remixer. For example, Frankie Knuckles, known as the “Godfather of House,” would remix (re-edit) songs using a reel-to-reel tape machine. He would add percussion breaks, rearrange sections, change the tempo, and extend breakdowns or energetic parts of songs. He edited disco classics, funk, soul, electro-pop, and other genres to create mixes more designed to make people dance.

The “house music” sound also evolved rapidly with the advancement of technology. DJs took house music to the next level by incorporating synthesizers, samplers, effects processors, and drum machines which introduced the consistent 4/4 tempo. These early innovators also started to loop basslines, add percussion layers, mix in effects, add vocals, and apply other remixing techniques. This new and innovative electronic sound immediately captured the hearts of clubgoers.

Music Technology Influences

The early 80s was a vital turning point for DJing and music production. Synthesizers, samplers, sequencers, and drum machines became cheaper and more accessible, allowing bedroom producers to emerge. DJs and music producers in Chicago, New York, and Detroit delved deeper into dance music production and embraced these machines. New approaches towards music creation led to a sound which was deeper, rawer, and more designed to make people dance.

Increased access to music technology also continued to drive the conception of new music styles. Around the mid-80s, distinct electronic genres and subgenres emerged. We also heard defining characteristics such as tempo, deeper basslines, arpeggios, arrangement, the style of vocals, recognizable sounds from drum machines and synths, and more. It was also during this time, iconic drum machines like Roland’s TR-808, TR-909, and later the TB 303 gained popularity.

Early Chicago House Music

Chicago had a thriving underground dance scene throughout the 80s and DJs were seeking new music to energize the dancefloor. And with the advancement of music technology, more Chicago DJs produced and released original compositions. By the mid-80s, subgenres of house music emerged such as deep house and acid house. Record labels soon noticed the rising popularity of these genres. The most revered of these labels was Chicago’s Trax Records on North Clark Street. This iconic label released pivotal house music records, such as “Move Your Body” by Marshall Jefferson, “Acid Tracks” by Phuture, “Can You Feel It” by Larry Heard, “Your Love” by Frankie Knuckles, and many others.

Chicago house music even inspired various dancing styles. One of the first house dancing styles was “the jack” or “jacking.” This dancing style also left its trace in numerous record titles such as “Time to Jack” by Chip E, “Jack’n the House” by Farley “Jackmaster” Funk, and “Jack Your Body” by Steve “Silk” Hurley.

House Music’s International Rise

House music and club culture progressed during the 80s and into the 90s. It quickly spread to Detroit and New York, where new scenes and styles of music were emerging. Record labels in these cities also started focusing more on electronic music designed to make people dance. Even radio stations such as Chicago’s “The Hot Mix 5” were playing house music. By the mid-80s, house music had spread internationally and was one of the most popular genres in Europe.

Many consider the first major success of house music outside the US to be “Love Can’t Turn Around” by Farley “Jackmaster” Funk and Jesse Saunders. The hit song peaked at #10 in the UK singles chart in 1986. A year later in 1987, “Jack Your Body” by Steve “Silk” Hurley reached #1 in the UK charts.

The explosion of house music quickly spread across the globe by the 90s. Different regions developed new music scenes and subcultures. There were even more genres and subgenres of house music emerging. Also, a rise of independent labels started releasing dance music exclusively. Dance music culture was exploding and changing significantly Worldwide.

House music even made its way into the mainstream. Madonna’s 1990 house song “Vogue” topped the US charts and became an international hit. Soon after, other major acts such as Janet Jackson, Paula Abdul, CeCe Peniston, Robin S, Björk, and many more incorporated house music into their work.

House Music is Here to Stay

House music is here to stay! This influential style of music continues to evolve and develop through globalization, emerging technology, cross-genre influences, cultural changes, and more. There is also still much more to the story of house music. I encourage you to explore more of the rich and controversial history of house music.

House Music Documentary

Pump Up the Volume: The History of House Music is a recommend documentary to watch. It tells the story of the social and cultural explosion of house music.

How to Brand Yourself: 5 Music Branding Tips

Wed, 18 Sep 2019 16:27:00 GMT

Learn how to brand yourself in the music industry. ICON Grad Nick Voorhees shares five music branding tips to help you define your brand.

The Philosophy of Branding for Music Producers

Developing a career in today’s music industry requires much more than producing great music. If you crave a music career and a life that swims in the musical world, you must work hard. You’ll also need to figure out how to uniquely showcase your brand in this competitive industry.

A question you’ll inevitably ask yourself is: do I want a career in the music industry? If your answer is yes, then you must consider music branding. Branding is essential for advancing a career in the creative world.

The hard truth is, people will make judgments and decisions before actually hearing your music. That’s why it’s crucial to have a vision of where you want your music career to go and how you want to present your brand to the world. It’s also essential to discover what’s unique about you, your artistry, and your story. Then build your brand from there.

What is Music Branding?

In today’s music industry, branding can play more of a role in a musician’s success than the music they create. Musicians are not merely selling their music; they’re selling an image, an experience, and a message that defines them.

Music branding is a powerful marketing tool for creative musicians. It’s the reflection of their overall message, identity, personality, style, values, beliefs, ambitions, and music. In other words, branding is everything that helps people identify and experience your unique brand.

Music branding also includes the marketing and communication strategies that differentiate you from other musicians. Moreover, it aims to create a consistent experience which leaves a lasting impression and builds a loyal following of fans. The key components of music branding include brand identity, brand communication, brand aesthetic, brand awareness, brand loyalty, and various other strategies.

Your brand will also influence your music career decisions. For example, it will guide your marketing and messaging strategies. It will also affect the way you present yourself in person and online, how you interact with fans, the imagery you choose, and more. Your brand reflects your story as much as your music!

How to Brand Yourself

You may feel uncomfortable or unsure about how to brand yourself. Defining your brand and developing a brand strategy can be difficult. Here are five helpful music branding techniques and thought exercises to help identify your brand.

1. Be Yourself

Yes, this is a cliché. However, never forget your music tells the story of your life, connects people, and expresses your vision. It’s also crucial your brand does the same. Your logo, cover art, messaging, social media presence , and other branding elements provide a unique perspective of your brand and a visual representation of your music. No one else has a sound like yours, and this should be true for your brand.

Also, do not fake this process. The music industry can see bullshit from a mile away, and being inauthentic will damage your momentum. It’s vital to show your true colors, and in return, your fans will love you for it. And if you’re struggling to come up with ideas, think about what describes your style, inspires you, and sets you apart. What will make a memorable impression?

2. What’s Your Message?

Some of the greatest musicians during the past century spread powerful messages that extended further than phenomenal music. For example, in the 60s and 70s, we saw many artists push anti-war ideologies and other agendas that helped fight for humanitarian causes. By being an advocate for something they believed in, these musicians helped grow both awareness for the issues and the size of their fanbase.

Why are some musicians more innovative, influential, and profitable than others? To begin creating a brand message, you must first understand your own beliefs and message. Simon Sinek, author of “Start with Why,” does an excellent job of diving into this concept. He explains most businesses only communicate what they do. But the most successful ones communicate why they’re doing it instead.

Knowing “why” will help you connect with your fans and develop your brand to a level you never thought possible. Start by finding a unique and memorable message that like-minded people can connect with and recognize. For example, boost your brand’s awareness through advocacy.

The circle diagram below shows how to organize your thoughts and better understand yourself as a musician. Try creating a similar layout and then fill in your information to get a better visualization of your music venture.

Let’s dig deeper into brand messaging using examples from popular bands. Using the circle diagram, well explore the “Why, How, and What” of self-branding.

Your Message (Why)

Why do you want to brand yourself? What are you trying to say? What are your beliefs? Who are you as a person? Why are you even producing music? Many bands answer the “why” by using their brand to express their views and messages. For example:

These musicians not only supply us with great music, but they also shine a light on what needs to change in the world. There’s a reason why decades later, we still know these names.

Spreading That Message (How)

You’ve chosen music as your career, so this is “how” you tell your story. You can tell a great story with your music, lyrics, imagery, ambition, unique style, social media engagement, and more. These pieces must also reflect your brand’s message. It’s challenging to master all these at once, so focus on each one individually. With enough dedication and practice, these concepts will come naturally.

Your Job (What)

This part is self-explanatory. You should have no trouble explaining to the world that “what” you do is music production. You make music for a living.

3. Establish A Memorable First Impression

First impressions are influential and key to music discovery. You have only seconds to hold someone’s attention, so you must make a lasting first impression. That’s why brands are powerful. They are usually the first impressions people get of an artist in today’s music industry.

Have you ever seen a logo, cover art, tour flyer, or other imagery that instantly resonated with you? Imagery plays a vital role in brand identity. Visual identity should capture people’s attention and make them feel something, whether that emotion is happiness, sadness, or somewhere between. Musicians who move the souls of their audience will gain lifelong fans.

Designing effective cover art is a great place to start when creating a personal brand. Cover art is the visual gateway to your music. It’s also the image listeners associate with your music. For example, your cover art will often grab someone’s attention before they listen to your music. Potential fans are also more likely to listen to your music when your album artwork stands out.

[yuzo]

There are several ways to create album cover art. A few free options include services like Canva and Pixlr. If you’re looking for professional work, there are services that host graphic designers like Fiverr or Upwork. Melody Nest is also an excellent choice for music producers and creative entrepreneurs because of their specialization in graphic design for the creative field. They offer music cover art, podcast cover art, logos, social media branding, and more.

4. Realize You’re an Entrepreneur

Musicians are also entrepreneurs. They have a product and a brand to sell in a competing marketplace. To do this, musicians need to learn business skills . They must also have the drive to sell their music and brand as any entrepreneur would. If your branding is inconsistent or non-existent, chances of conducting business with key players in the music industry diminish drastically.

A successful DJ once said to me: “To blow up, it’s 80% branding and business, 20% music.” You might read this and feel like it shouldn’t be this way. However, that’s the way it is in the music business. The music industry is over-saturated with hungry producers looking to make it big.

Begin treating your brand as a business by dwelling on things you may need to acquire. For example:

It’s essential to have a basic understanding of the complexities and formalities associated with making a career in music. A music career is like operating a legitimate business. You’ll have to treat it as a full-time occupation to prosper and succeed.

5. Create Realistic Goals and Hit Those Marks

What is it that you’re looking to achieve? You’ll need to understand this critical question because it’s key to creating a successful music career.

“I want to be the next Skrillex” is not an answer.

A good practice is to define success. What does success mean to you? Are you looking to “get by” with your music? Would you like to be a touring artist? Or maybe you want to produce music for tv, film, radio, etc.?

These are the questions you cannot ignore. It’s rare to stumble upon success. It’s earned by those who know exactly what they want and ready to put in the hard-working hours to achieve their goals.

For instance, setting smaller goals can help you understand what it is you’re looking to achieve. For example, some realistic goals could be:

It’s essential to set goals, hit those goals, and then move to the next target. And if you don’t hit your target, try again!

Conclusion

It would be nice to produce music all day and immediately make millions of dollars. Unfortunately, this is unrealistic for the vast majority of us. It’s no secret that choosing to be a full-time musician is a difficult task. And to keep yourself motivated through hardships, you’ll need a strong force to keep pushing you forward.

Having a robust and consistent brand is necessary for all music producers looking to create a successful career. Spend time thinking about how to brand yourself, what you care about, what you want to achieve, and how to incorporate it all into your musical venture. Adequately self-reflect to better understand what you’re looking to accomplish. Good luck!

Celebrate the Legacy of the TR-909 for 909 Day

Mon, 09 Sep 2019 17:02:00 GMT

909 DAY celebrates the legendary Roland TR-909 Rhythm Composer. Learn the TR-909’s history, influence on music culture, and its indelible legacy.

Happy 909 DAY!

September 9th (9/09) marks the day music fans around the world celebrate one of the greatest drum machines of all time: the Roland TR-909 Rhythm Composer .

The iconic TR-909 Rhythm Composer has been at the forefront of electronic dance music since Roland introduced it in 1983. It has inspired countless artists, spawned the genres of house and techno, and shaped a myriad of hit records. To this day, the TR-909 continues to be a cornerstone of emerging electronic, pop, and hip hop genres.

909 DAY is for everyone who loves this enduring sonic signature of dance music. Join the global music community and celebrate the TR-909 by tagging your social posts with #909DAY .

A Brief History of the Roland TR-909 Rhythm Composer

The Roland TR-909 Rhythm Composer is a programmable drum machine introduced by the Roland Corporation in 1983. It succeeded the legendary TR-808 . Roland aimed to improve upon the TR-808 with higher quality sounds, sequencer improvements, and MIDI technology for synchronization. It was Roland’s most advanced and forward-thinking drum synthesizer at the time. Although, users preferred the more realistic sampled sounds of competing products such as the LinnDrum. After one year on the market, Roland ceased production in 1985, having built around 10,000 units. However, the influence of the TR-909 is still alive and heard to this very day.

Officially released in 1984, the TR-909 continued the tradition of its predecessor by using synthetic drum sounds instead of realistic drumkit reproductions. Though, the TR-909 had major differences. It was Roland’s first drum machine to integrate both analog and sample-based sounds. Roland used analog circuitry for the kick, snare, clap, rim shot, and toms. But the developers struggled to generate the perfect tone for the cymbals. Instead, they used digital samples of real cymbals for the hats, crash, and ride. And unlike its predecessors, the result boasted much more sonic clarity and punch, which has become staples of electronic and pop music.

The TR-909 was also Roland’s first MIDI-equipped drum machine. The ability to sync the 909 with external devices played a significant role in dance music’s move from the studio to live performance. By chaining together other instruments and processors, artists could perform tracks and mixes live. In addition, the 909 featured external memory storage and a step sequencer that can store up to 96 rhythm patterns or eight songs with multiple sections. It also offered various sound-shaping controls, velocity, and groove options such as “accent,” “shuffle,” and “flam.” These new features attempted to “ humanize ” the drum patterns, which also gave the 909 its endearing groove characteristics. The combination of all these features made the 909 the perfect tool for both the studio and live sets.

Unfortunately, musicians preferred more realistic drum sounds from expensive, sample-based drum machines like the Oberheim and LinnDrum. However, the 909’s technical constraints and affordability allowed underground musicians to experiment and use it in unconventional ways. The 909 eventually gained popularity in the lower-income neighborhoods of Chicago and Detroit where emerging producers used its unique sounds to pioneer the genres of house and techno.

The TR-909 Legacy

The TR-909 remains one of electronic music’s most revered instruments. Just as the TR-808 defined hip-hop, the TR-909 became influential in developing house and techno. To this day, the TR-909 continues to influence both the culture and industry of modern music.

The TR-909 found its niche when local DJs in Detroit and Chicago used it for their productions. The TR-909 helped cement the 4/4 beat firmly at the heart of dance music culture. One of the most notable producers who helped pioneer house music was Larry Heard, aka Mr. Fingers. His record “Can You Feel It” is regarded by many as one of the first house records. The track spread throughout Chicago, influencing the music that would take over the city’s club scene in the post-disco era.

In Detroit, innovators like Derrick May, Juan Atkins, and Kevin Saunderson, aka The Belleville Three, were using the TR-909 to craft early techno. Juan Atkins’ (Model 500) track “No UFO’s” captures the raw “Detroit Techno” sound influenced by visions of the future, technology, and the hard life of post-industrial Detroit.

The TR-909 also found favor among mainstream musicians in the mid-80s. For example, Phil Collins processed a 909 beat with his signature gated-reverb for his 1985 hit track “Take Me Home.”

Countless other artists released hit records that helped skyrocket the TR-909 into the commercial spotlight. For example, Technotronic’s 1989 hit “Pump Up the Jam,” Madonna’s 1990 dance track “Vogue,” Daft Punk’s not so subtly titled track “Revolution 909,” and numerous other great artists.

Conclusion

The TR-909’s impact on electronic music could never have been predicted in the labs of Roland Japan. Roland’s legacy drum machines will forever influence dance music culture, history, and innovation.

The continued desire for the TR-909 by a new generation of producers and performers has also inspired numerous clones and imitations. It’s a reflection of the historic status, usability, influence, and enduring quality of its drum sounds.

Should You Attend a Music Production School?

Wed, 04 Sep 2019 16:12:00 GMT

What is the best way to learn music production? ICON graduate Bradley Marcus compares learning at a music production school vs. free online tutorials.

Formal Education vs. Self-Education

Are you interested in breaking into the music industry and becoming a music producer? Educating yourself is a crucial first step towards achieving those goals and improving your skills. However, those seeking to learn music production often find themselves at a crossroad. Should you attend a music production school or continue to self-study through free online resources like YouTube videos , forums, and music blogs?

Choosing how to learn music production depends on your ambitions, learning style, and budget. This guide compares the advantages and disadvantages of learning music production through structured learning at a school vs. self-learning with free online resources.

Let’s Talk Options

Most choices in our lives are inevitably ours. With music production education, the same holds true. There are various ways to learn music production. However, the two most common approaches are attending a music production school and watching online tutorials. Fortunately for you reading this, I’ve done both and will lay out the reality of each approach.

Self-Learning: YouTube/Online Tutorials

Who is teaching you? The Internet has created a vast world for us. We can type into a computer our problem, and with hope, find an answer. However, anyone and everyone can create that answer in the same online universe for all to read. This presents a problem when learning music production online because it’s hard to decipher who knows what they’re talking about and who doesn’t, especially for a beginner.

Why are they teaching you? Many people creating YouTube tutorials are not there to teach you the foundations of music production . Instead, they rather get you to click on their video. It’s common for people to lure you in with enticing content in hopes to get you to pay for more information. These clickbait videos will NOT help you build a foundation in music production. Instead, they might diverge you from learning the proper steps of music production. It’s often hard to find videos that offer legitimate information for free.

However, you may find something interesting and helpful online. Although, if you’re new to the game, you might not understand various lessons, especially when the information is random and scattered. This disorder can often lead you with more questions and perhaps more frustration.

How are they teaching you? The answer will depend on a person-to-person basis. Often, people creating online videos are not actual teachers or experienced music producers. It’s common to waste valuable time watching random, confusing videos.

The Advantages and Disadvantages of Self-Learning

Self-education is a learning method where you direct the learning process. You control what, when, and how to learn. This approach is a great way to enhance your learning experience while finding your personal style. Moreover, the vast availability of online resources makes self-education a viable learning method for many people.

YouTube/Online Tutorials Advantages

YouTube/Online Tutorials Disadvantages

Structured Learning: Online/In-Person Courses

Who is teaching you ? The people that create structured music production courses are true masters of their craft. They are experienced music producers who are confident enough in their knowledge to build an actual business.

Why are they teaching you? A team who takes the time to create a comprehensive curriculum are usually passionate professionals who truly love their craft. Typically, they have been doing this much longer than the average music producer. This means they have the experience and knowledge to figure out the best ways to teach you.

How are they teaching you? Structured courses are just that, a structured way to set you up for success. You learn the basics and fundamental knowledge while gaining valuable experience. For example, Icon Collective prepares students to become music producers, composers, performers, recording artists, professional DJs, and entrepreneurs in the music industry.

It’s also important to mention these courses offer something even more valuable than knowledge – a community of like-minded artists who love music. At Icon Collective, I learned as much outside of the classroom as in the classroom. For instance, they offer various resources and opportunities, including the chance to pick the brains of peers. Asking questions is an invaluable piece of learning music production. I can tell you there’s no easier way to learn something than having the ability to ask questions.

The Advantages and Disadvantages of Structured Learning

Music production schools provide an organized and carefully planned out method of learning. They offer structured programs conducted by passionate, qualified instructors who inspire students to achieve their creative goals. Through a structured curriculum, an aspiring artist can accelerate how thoroughly they gain the knowledge, skills, and experience to advance their music and career. Students exposure to various aspects of the music business also prepares them for the complexities and challenges of the music industry.

Although formal education is not always required. Music professionals have become successful without proper training from an accredited school. However, an intensive and structured curriculum will provide the strongest foundation for achieving your musical potential.

Music Production School Advantages

Music Production School Disadvantages

Conclusion

Learning is an essential part of artist development. Improve your knowledge by combining structured learning and self-directed learning to develop the skills for a career in the music industry. Between these two methods of education, the rate at which you’ll learn music production will also skyrocket.

Both learning approaches have their advantages and disadvantages. It’s up to you to determine what path best meets your aspirations, level of motivation, and budget. Although, if you’re serious about making music production your profession, proper investment is a significant first step!

The Complete Guide to Audio Compression

Wed, 21 Aug 2019 17:03:00 GMT

This beginner’s guide to audio compression looks at the fundamentals of dynamic compression and how to use a compressor.

What is Audio Compression?

Audio compression reduces the dynamic range of an audio signal. Dynamic range is the difference between the loudest and quietest parts of a waveform. Compression reduces this range by attenuating the louder signals and boosting the quieter signals. As a result, the loudest and softest parts are closer in volume, creating a more balanced sound. With the extra headroom, you can then increase the overall level of the signal. In short, audio compression gives you a controlled sound that’s louder and more present in the mix.

Why Use Compression?

Audio compression is one of the most fundamental processes in music production, mixing, and mastering. For example, use compression for creative sound design, corrective mixing, audio enhancement, audio repair, and as a safeguard to prevent clipping.

Compression also has several uses for various situations. For example:

There are also several ways to apply compression. For example, serial compression, parallel compression , multiband compression , sidechain compression , and bus compression.

Compressor Controls

Careful adjustment of a compressor’s controls is essential. There’s a delicate balance between controlling dynamics to enhance an audio source and sucking the life out of it. Typical controls featured on a standard compressor include:

Threshold

The threshold control sets the dB level where the audio signal has to exceed for the compression to activate. Any signal that passes above the threshold gets compressed. Furthermore, a lower threshold will reduce a greater portion of the signal. Whereas, a higher threshold will reduce only the loudest peaks and leave the rest untouched.

Ratio

The ratio control sets the amount of gain reduction the compressor applies when the signal passes the threshold. For example, a ratio of 4:1 means that for every 4 dB the signal rises above the threshold, the compressor will increase the output by 1 dB. However, if the ratio is 1:1, no compression will occur. Whereas a ratio of 10:1 or higher will make the compressor effectively act as a limiter.

Attack

The attack control sets the time it takes for the compression to kick in once the signal passes the threshold. Faster attack times will immediately clamp down on the initial transients of a sound. This is good for controlling dynamics and catching transients that cause clipping. However, compressing too much of the attack transient can make a sound dull and lifeless. Whereas slower attack times allow more of the initial attack to punch through before compression begins. A slower attack time will help add punch and presence. However, slower attack times will also give you less control over taming peaks and maintaining consistent volume levels.

Release

The release control sets the time it takes for the compression to stop once the signal falls below the threshold. Faster release times sound more natural and transparent. However, setting the release too fast can cause a “pumping” effect and other unnatural sounds. Whereas longer release times are good for smoothing out dynamics. However, if the release is too slow, the compressor will not have time to recover before the next transient. The compressor must recover from gain reduction before it re-triggers, or it can suck the life out of a sound and reduce its impact.

Input Gain

Input gain controls the level of the signal going into the compressor. Decrease the input gain if the incoming signal is too hot. Or, increase the input gain if the incoming signal is too low to trigger compression.

Makeup Gain

Makeup gain controls the level of the signal leaving the compressor. Compression usually reduces the level of a signal. Use the makeup gain to bring the signal level back up after compression occurs. Or, turn the output level down if it’s clipping.

Knee

Knee adjusts how gradually or abruptly compression occurs as the signal approaches the threshold. For example, a “hard knee” setting of 0 dB will only apply full compression once the signal exceeds the threshold. With higher “soft knee” values, the compressor will compress gradually as the signal approaches the threshold.

Gain Reduction Meter

This meter shows the amount of gain reduction happening at a given moment. This meter helps to see how much compression is occurring, especially when it’s hard to hear the effect. It can also help you determine how to adjust the output signal level.

Compression Modes

Many modern compressor plugins also offer two basic modes of operation: Peak and RMS.

Peak Mode

Peak mode reacts faster to short peaks within an audio signal. This mode is more aggressive and responsive to transients. It works great for taming transient spikes and limiting tasks.

RMS Mode

RMS mode is less sensitive to short peaks. This mode applies compression only when the incoming level exceeds the threshold for a slightly longer time. Many consider RMS as sounding “musical” and smooth. It’s also a more accurate measurement of perceived loudness.

How to Use a Compressor

There are no hard rules for using compression. There are also no perfect compressor settings since every sound is unique. However, there are general tips to help you find a starting point when setting up an audio compressor. When applying compression, try these basic compressor settings as a starting point:

Note: Experiment with using dramatic compression settings at first to hear and understand what the compressor is doing to the audio. After training your ears, you’ll be able to set up the compressor with less aggressive settings.

Also, occasionally bypass the compressor while dialing in the settings. This method will help you hear how the compression is affecting the signal. And for more accurate results, avoid setting up the compressor in solo. It’s best to listen to the track in context with everything else in your mix playing to make informed decisions.

Last, it’s better to apply small amounts of compression in stages using multiple compressors. Avoid having one compressor do all the heavy work.

Compressor Circuit Types

The compressor you choose will also play a role in the overall sound of the effect. Compressors come in a wide variety of designs, flavors, and circuit types. The four most common circuit types found on both digital and hardware compressors are:

FET (Field Effect Transistor)

FET style compressors add punch and coloration. A FET compressor also has a fast attack and release response. Use a FET on sounds with more aggressive transients like drums, percussion, and guitars. An iconic FET compressor is the UREI 1176 .

VCA (Voltage Controlled Amplitude)

VCA style compression is the most common and versatile type. A VCA compressor also has a fast attack and release response. However, the response and sound are more precise and transparent than a FET compressor. They excel at adding punch, cohesion, and clarity. Use a VCA on drums, bass, vocals, guitars, piano, and the mix bus. An iconic VCA compressor is the SSL G Bus Compressor .

OPTO (Optical)

OPTO compressors have a smooth, natural, and musical sound. They also have a slow-acting attack and release response, which makes them less responsive to fast transients. Use an OPTO to smooth out bass, guitars, and vocals. An iconic OPTO compressor is the Teletronix LA-2A .

VARI-MU (Variable-MU)

VARI-MU compressors are known for their slower response and coloration. They work great at “gluing” mixes, adding warmth, and boosting fatness. Use a VARI-MU compressor for mastering and bus mixing. An iconic VARI-MU compressor is the Fairchild 670 .

Conclusion

Audio compression is one of the most misunderstood processes. Learning how to apply compression will help you achieve more polished mixes. However, the misuse of compression can make your mix sound flat and lifeless. It’s important to use compression with purpose. If you’re not sure how much compression to apply, think “less is more.” Also, remember to use your ears!

Everything You Need to Know About a Split Sheet

Wed, 14 Aug 2019 14:10:00 GMT

What is a songwriter split sheet? Learn how to manage split sheets when collaborating with other artists to ensure you get paid for your work.

What is a Split Sheet?

Songwriter split sheets are an integral part of the music business. A split sheet is a written agreement that identifies each contributor to a song and establishes ownership percentages amongst them. The agreed percentages determine how much each contributor will receive from the royalties generated by their music.

Split sheets are necessary for every song you write with collaborators. They ensure everyone involved in the creative process is properly credited and paid for the work they contributed.

It’s also important to note that split sheets are not a copyright agreement. Copyright ownership is different.

Why is a Split Sheet Important?

Split sheets are an essential safeguard for all co-creators of a song. They ensure everyone involved in the creation process receives credit and compensation for their work. Split sheets can also save creators from a potential legal headache because it requires them to work out an agreement and establish ownership in writing.

Under U.S. Copyright Law , any co-written content without a written agreement will be equally divided depending on the number of people involved. Without a split sheet, contributing producers and songwriters risk receiving less ownership or revenue for the content they created. This can lead to ugly disputes among each contributor and potential legal battles.

Also, a Performing Rights Organization (PRO), record label, music publisher, music licensor, and any other third-party using the song can hold royalty payments until the conflict resolves. Moreover, contributors risk not getting credit or royalty payments if a company does not know who, or how much to pay.

How to Determine the Ownership Percentage

The final percentage splits are negotiated and agreed upon by all parties involved. The total of all the split percentages must equal 100%. There are different approaches collaborators take to divide split percentages. For example, you can split the rights evenly among each co-writer, or give each person a percentage according to their contribution.

Giving each contributor equal ownership is the safest route to avoid confrontation. Also, treating everyone equally will help form lasting relationships with other artists. It may even boost the chances of them wanting to work with you again.

Determining splits according to a collaborator’s contributions to a song is trickier. Sometimes, not every contributor makes an equal contribution. Or, the contributions by co-writers are not equally significant in the song. For example, one co-writer may add a small part of the lead. Also, the same creator may contribute to both the songwriting and producing process.

Various other factors can further complicate matters. That’s why it’s crucial to figure out splits early. Make sure everyone who contributed to the creative process is on the same page.

When to Create a Split Sheet?

Co-creators often cringe thinking about negotiating ownership and royalty splits. However, navigating this conversation is a necessary practice to ensure you get paid correctly for your work. More important, turning that conversation into a written document proactively protects your rights. It can also save you from a potential legal battle.

It’s best to decide on songwriter splits and get them in writing early in the creative process or as soon as you’ve finished a song. Negotiations may get messy the longer you wait. It’s also easier to negotiate a split sheet before the song starts generating royalties or opportunities arise.

How to Create a Split Sheet

There are three ways to create a split sheet. The latest and most convenient way is with an online service. For example, the free SPLITS app from Create Music Group makes songwriter splits simple.

The SPLITS app helps eliminate songwriting disputes between producers, songwriters, and artists. Collaborators can quickly generate and sign a split agreement in a non-confrontational way, with a few clicks.

You can also find basic split sheet templates online or create your own. A basic split sheet should include:

Ensure each contributing writer fills out all the information that applies to them. Also, register with a Performing Rights Organization (PRO) such as ASCAP, BMI, or SESAC. A PRO helps songwriters and publishers get paid for the use of their music by collecting performance royalties on their behalf.

Conclusion

As a creator, it’s essential to understand the value of your work, especially before it’s published. Also, be proactive and take control of the conversation by using split sheets to secure your fair share of the revenue. Moreover, start negotiation splits early to avoid future disputes. And if you’re having trouble coming up with a fair agreement, get a lawyer!

How to Warp Vocals in Ableton Live Quickly

Wed, 07 Aug 2019 14:10:00 GMT

Learn how to warp vocals and acapellas in Ableton Live. These warping techniques show you how to time-stretch audio without a fixed beat.

Warping Audio in Ableton Live

Ableton Live‘s warping capabilities allow you to time-stretch audio, so it stays in sync with a chosen tempo. Live’s ability to play any audio sample in sync with the tempo is a versatile feature.

Warping also gives you the ability to manipulate audio in exciting ways. For example, you can change the rhythmic flow of a sample, or even move notes to other positions. Warping is also excellent for beatmatching, remixing, sampling, sound design, and other creative reasons.

Ableton Live Warp Modes

Live offers six time-stretching modes to accommodate different audio material. Choose the warp mode that best suits your audio source. You can set the time-stretching mode and adjust the associated controls from the Clip View Sample Box.

Here are the six warp modes:

How to Prepare Vocals for Warping

By default, Ableton Live will auto-warp audio samples loaded into your project. Auto-warping short samples like drum loops is helpful. However, auto-warping long samples like full songs and vocals cause problems. For example, you won’t get accurate results if the material has an intro without a defined beat or with a tempo that fluctuates. Auto-warping long samples and vocals also cause sound quality and timing issues.

It’s common practice to disable the ‘Auto-Warp Long Samples’ feature from the ‘Record Warp Launch’ tab in Live’s Preferences. Disabling this feature gives you the freedom to warp tracks manually. It also reduces the hassle of fixing the warp markers Live automatically placed.

It’s also a common practice to disable the ‘Create Analysis Files’ feature from Live’s Preferences. An analysis file contains all your warp settings and other data about the sample. Manually saving this file ensures Live loads the correct warp settings every time you drop in the sample. After warping, click the Clip View’s Save button to store the current warp settings with the clip’s analysis file.

How to Warp Vocals in Ableton Live

Ableton Live can warp various types of material. For example, vocals, multiple tracks, tracks with a drifting tempo, short and long samples, etc. This guide looks at warping vocals or acapellas without a fixed tempo.

Warping vocals and acapellas is difficult because there’s not a rhythmic reference like drums. It’s hard to determine the first beat and align it to the grid. Vocal recordings can also have a drifting tempo. The challenge is finding a downbeat and stretching the vocal to sync with the tempo without sacrificing audio quality.

Here are the steps for warping vocals in Ableton Live:

1. Determine the Tempo

The warping process is easier when you know the vocals original tempo. Find the tempo of a vocal by looking it up on the internet, using a BPM analysis tool like Mixed in Key Studio Edition , or with Live’s Tap Tempo feature. For example, click the Tap Tempo button once every beat to determine the tempo if you have the original vocal track.

Last, change the project tempo to the vocals original BPM before warping. Preparing your vocal before activating Live’s Warp feature will make the process easier. You won’t have to delete several misplaced Warp Makers.

2. Locate the First Downbeat

Activate the Warp button from the Clip View Sample Box to enable warping. Then, zoom into the sample and listen for the first prominent downbeat. For example, the first word that plays on the downbeat of the bar. If the vocal has an intro without defined words, then find the first word that occurs after the intro.

If you’re having difficulty finding the word that lands on the downbeat, check the original song to hear how the vocals align on the beat. Also, the first word is not always the word that lands on the downbeat. Some vocal recordings’ downbeat start a few words into the phrase. Use your ears and count if needed.

Next, place the cursor where the initial transient crosses the zero-crossing line and then double-click to create a Warp Marker.

3. Set 1.1.1 Here

Right-click the Warp Maker you just created and select ‘Set 1.1.1 Here’ from the context menu. This step sets the starting point where Live will begin warping.

Holding Shift while dragging the Warp Marker will move the waveform beneath the marker to make further adjustments.

4. Warp XXX BPM From Here

Live offers four ‘Warp From Here’ commands from the context menu. The command that works great for vocal samples with a consistent tempo is ‘Warp XXX BPM From Here.’

Right-click the new Warp Marker and choose ‘Warp XXX BPM From Here’ from the context menu if you know the original tempo.

5. Choose the Best Warp Mode

Select the best sounding Warp Mode for your vocals from the Warp Mode chooser. Complex and Complex Pro will give you the best time-stretching quality for vocals.

6. Check the Results

First, visually scan the vocal waveform to see if the sections align on the grid. You can also set an 8-bar loop brace and then move it along the timeline to examine the waveform.

Second, activate Live’s metronome to hear if the vocal warped correctly and plays in sync with the tempo.

7. Make Adjustments

Manually add Warp Markers where needed and make adjustments if the vocal drifts off tempo. Holding Shift while clicking on a pseudo Warp Marker allows you to drag the transient to a new position.

8. Save Default Clip Settings

Click the ‘Save Default Clip’ button to save the current warp settings. Live will then restore the saved clip settings whenever you drop the sample into a Live Set.

Conclusion

The warping techniques outlined in this guide work best for vocal recordings without a fixed beat. The process is essential for creating a vocal track, remix, or performing live.

What Are Loudness Meters and Why It Matters

Mon, 05 Aug 2019 14:10:00 GMT

What is loudness, and how do you measure loudness? Learn how to use different loudness meters to optimize your music for current loudness standards.

What Is Loudness Metering?

Loudness meters are essential tools used in music production, mixing, and mastering . A loudness meter can analyze, measure, and monitor audio levels in real-time for various purposes. For example, loudness meters help:

However, not all loudness meters work the same. The various metering types will give you different information about your levels. It’s important to know the differences between them. This guide looks at three ways to measure loudness in music production, mixing, and mastering.

What is Loudness?

Loudness is a way to measure audio levels based on the way humans perceive sound. Different factors influence the way we perceive loudness such as frequency, timbre, the listening environment, ear sensitivity, and more.

In the television, film, and music industries, loudness measurement has become a standard. This crucial process ensures audio levels remain consistent between loud and quiet songs. It also creates a better listening experience. Music fans can enjoy better quality music without having to adjust their volume controls between varying loudness levels of different songs.

How to Measure Loudness?

Below are the three main ways to measure audio levels in music production, mixing, and mastering:

Peak Level

Peak meters measure the maximum peak levels at a given time. They react quickly to transients and show instantaneous changes in level. These meters are common in DAWs, plugins, mixers, and audio interfaces.

Peak meters can help you monitor a signals dynamic range and available headroom. They are also useful for identifying digital clipping caused when the signal exceeds 0 dBFS. However, peak metering is not an accurate measurement of loudness. Averaging levels is a better measurement of loudness than monitoring instantaneous peak levels.

RMS (Root Mean Square)

RMS meters give a better impression of perceived loudness then peak meters. They measure the dynamic range in a waveform and then display average dB levels calculated over a short period. This method is a more accurate way to determine loudness because it resembles the way a human ear perceives sound levels. Humans perceive loudness from average levels rather than momentary peaks in a sound.

For example, a snare drum hit has a higher peak level than a sustained chord. However, the chord may sound subjectively louder if it has a higher average peak level. But, if both sounds have the same RMS level, they may be perceived as having similar loudness.

RMS metering is commonly used during the mixing and mastering stages to match loudness levels with reference tracks. RMS meters are also used to measure the loudness of studio monitors. However, this method of measuring perceived loudness is not as accurate as LUFS metering.

LUFS (Loudness Units Full Scale)

LUFS metering is the most accurate way of measuring loudness. It’s also the new standard for normalizing audio levels on music platforms such as Spotify, Apple Music, and YouTube. Moreover, this loudness measuring system has helped combat the loudness wars.

LUFS metering is the most accurate way of measuring perceived loudness because it resembles human hearing more closely than other meters. For example, the human ear has different sensitivities to sound at varying frequencies. We perceive volume changes in mid frequencies more acutely than low and high frequency ranges.

LUFS meters employ an algorithm that uses a filter to replicate these subjective loudness sensitivities between frequency ranges. Also, LUFS meters analyze the average perceived loudness over an extended period instead of averaging peak levels like RMS meters. Therefore, a song with loud, momentary peaks will not affect the averages.

In addition, LUFS metering is the current music industry standard for measuring loudness consistency between songs on albums and songs on music streaming platforms. The LUFS standard of normalizing audio also provides a better listening experience. With consistent volume levels, listeners don’t have to keep adjusting the volume between songs. For example, a chill reggae song will have the same perceived loudness as a hard-hitting dubstep track.

How LUFS Is Changing the Loudness Wars

The LUFS standard has also helped combat the loudness wars. Many leading streaming platforms such as Spotify, YouTube, Apple Music, and others apply loudness normalization to create balanced volume levels.

Before streaming platforms normalized levels, people were attempting to increase the loudness of songs as much as possible. The idea pushing this trend is the perception that louder sounds better. As a result, many were sacrificing audio quality for loudness. This flawed concept created an unpleasant listening experience for music consumers who had to continually adjust the volume between quiet and loud songs across the various music platforms.

To help combat these varying levels and degradation of audio quality, streaming services adopted a standard of normalizing audio levels. Many streaming services will now turn down songs with excessive limiting that exceeds their LUFS standard. They will also turn up songs to meet their LUFS target.

Each streaming service has different loudness standards and algorithms to measure and apply normalization. For example, the current Spotify target loudness level is -14 LUFS. Spotify’s normalization process will lower the gain of any track louder than -14 LUFS.

With the rising popularity of streaming services, there’s hope in the music industry that normalization standards will end the loudness wars. The goal is to encourage mixing/mastering engineers to create more dynamic masters. Especially now that streaming services are decreasing the volume of heavily limited songs that exceed their LUFS target. The loudness normalization efforts also remove any unfair advantage between soft and loud masters. However, there’s still an ongoing debate about this topic.

Conclusion

Loudness metering is a critical practice. Loudness meters are useful when trying to identify mix issues and achieve certain target levels. Moreover, you can learn a lot from analyzing other songs with loudness meters. You can gain insight into how different artists are mixing and mastering their music.

Also, if you are optimizing your music for streaming platforms, check their loudness standard. However, the various platforms have different loudness targets. You may have to compromise on a loudness level that sounds best across different platforms. Many consider -16 LUFS a loudness level that offers the best listening experience. Good luck!

10 Best Studio Desks For Music Production

Wed, 31 Jul 2019 14:10:00 GMT

This Icon Picks roundup features ten studio desks under $2,000. It lists both professional studio desks and entry-level desks for home music production studios.

Choosing the Best Studio Desk

Are you shopping for a professional or home studio desk? We’ve rounded up ten quality music production desks. This list offers both professional studio desks and entry-level desks to start a home music production studio. In each selection, quality, function, design, and value are at the forefront.

Whether you’re producing music , recording, mixing, or mastering, choosing the right desk for your studio is essential. A dedicated studio desk boosts workflow by putting your most-used gear right at your fingertips. It also helps organize your music equipment and cables to achieve a clutter-free workspace. Moreover, a stylish studio desk will complete the professional vibe of your creative space.

This studio desk buyers guide lists ten functional and stylish music production workstations under $2,000.

Tips for Choosing a Studio Desk

Choosing the right studio desk for your needs depends on space, functionality, design, and budget. Below are helpful tips to consider when buying a studio desk:

Desk size and studio space: It’s crucial to know the dimensions of the area where you intend to position the studio desk. The available studio space will determine the desk size.

How much gear space : Studio desks offer various options to store and position equipment. For example, rack space to mount or store outboard gear, shelves to position your computer monitor and studio monitors , a slide-out keyboard tray, cable management features, and more. Choose a desk that can accommodate your music gear. Also, consider what additional equipment you may add in the future.

Ergonomics and positioning of your gear: The design of many studio desks have ergonomics in mind. Ensure the design meets your needs and workflow. For example, ensure the studio monitor bridge has an optimum listening position . Also, check the desktop height to ensure your arms rest at a comfortable 90-degree angle. Last, consider the surface area size and positioning of your gear.

Build and materials: The build quality and materials used to construct the desk will affect the price, durability, longevity, and aesthetics. Carefully consider the materials and design. You’ll want a desk that is sturdy enough to hold your gear and will last.

Style and design: The design plays into functionality and style. Consider a desk that stores and places your gear in optimal positions. Also, choose a desk with a look and vibe that complements your studio.

Budget: Studio desks are not cheap. Quality music production workstations can range from $500 to $6,000. Budget will play a big role in quality, size, equipment storage, functionality, and design.

1. AZ Studio Workstations | Spike 88 Keyboard Studio Desk

The Spike 88 workstation is an excellent studio desk for a home studio with limited space. Its modern design sports a slide-out 88-key keyboard tray with three adjustable heights for a tailored fit. It also features 6RU of rack space and a spacious top shelf to position your computer monitor and studio monitors. Moreover, AZ Studio Workstations offers limitless custom options. Request design changes or any specific measurements and requirements you may have.

2. Output | Platform Studio Desk

Platform is a stylish studio desk constructed with 100% real wood. It features a bridge for studio monitors, 9U of rack space, sleek cable management, and an optional slide-out keyboard tray with adjustable heights. Platform also ships with rack ears to mount gear such as audio interfaces, processors, instruments, and other equipment. Moreover, Platform’s attractive modern design will add style to your creative space.

3. Studio Desk | Beat Series

The Beat Series workstations by Studio Desk are one of the most stylish and functional desks on the market. The Beat desk is perfect for home and professional producers with limited space. It provides more space for gear than expected from a desk this size. It also features high-quality materials, an angled top shelf for an optimal listening position, a slide-out 61-key keyboard tray, 4U of rack space, cable management, and more.

4. Zaor Studio | Vision Line

Zoar Studio’s new “VISION” line of studio desks offer style and modular options. There are two models and a line of accessories. The “VISION O” is a 63-inch wide desk that offers enough open space to place your music production gear. The “VISION W” features a second level with three 19-inch rack bays and shelf space above for multiple computer screens and studio monitors.

In addition, the Vision line offers two accessories to expand functionality. The “VISION K” is a height-adjustable controller keyboard trolley shelf that slides underneath the desktop. The “VISION R” is a side rack unit that offers 15 extra 19-inch rack unit spaces.

5. On-Stage | WS7500 Workstation

The WS7500 workstation is perfect for the home studio with limited space. This compact studio desk is ergonomically designed for comfort and work efficiency. It features a sturdy steel tube frame, a top-shelf to support your computer monitor and studio monitors, and a slide-out keyboard tray. The company also offers a line of accessories to add functionality as your studio grows. Moreover, it has an affordable price tag for those on a budget!

6. SCS | Slimline Keyboard Desks

SCS makes some the best high-end professional studio workstations. Their Slimline Keyboard Desk has a sturdy hardwood construction supported by two metal legs. It also features a slide-out 88-key keyboard tray, 8RU of rack space, cable management, multiple wood grains, and more.

7. Argosy | Halo.G Workstation

HALO.G brings a high-end line of studio desks with modular features to meet your needs. The HALO.G Base Desk offers a sleek and straightforward design you can build on. Its high-quality aluminum chassis and powder-coated steel legs are durable and attractive. It also features a full-length padded armrest to increase comfort, integrated floor levelers, and an aluminum extrusion accessory rail. Moreover, its ergonomic design features an angled workspace, perfect for screen-based work environments.

8. Zaor Studio | Miza 61

The Miza 61 workstation sports a modern design and plenty of space for your gear. It features a wide desktop, slide-out 61-key keyboard tray, cable management, and eight rack bays. It also offers plenty of space on the top shelf to position your computer monitor and studio monitors. Moreover, the Miza 61 will add a high-class look to your home studio.

9. Ultimate Support | Nucleus 2

The Nucleus Series modular workstations expand your workspace as your needs grow. Nucleus 2 is a sleek looking base model you can change with accessories. It sports a powder-coated finish, quality materials, and plenty of space for your gear. It also features a slide-out keyboard tray and a second tier to position your computer monitor and studio monitors. Moreover, the desk legs provide sonic isolation and decoupling.

10. RAB Audio | ProRak MK 61

The ProRak MK 61 is a solid workstation that offers plenty of space for your gear. It features a height-adjustable slide-out 61-key keyboard tray and three 4U of rack bays. Moreover, it has adjustable legs, a comfortable amount of knee clearance, and steel cross braces that provide rock-solid stability. Also, ProRak needs no tools to assemble!

Budget Studio Desks

There is a lot of budget-friendly music production workstations on the market. Below are five affordable studio desks worth considering:

1. Studio RTA Creation Station
2. Omnirax Presto 4 Studio Desk
3. Studio Trends 46″ Studio Desk
4. Studio RTA Producer Station
5. RAB Audio ProRak 48

Being an Independent Artist vs. Signing to a Record Label

Mon, 29 Jul 2019 17:36:00 GMT

Should you go independent or sign with a record label? Learn the advantages and disadvantages of releasing music as an independent artist vs. signing with a record label.

Independent Artists vs. Signed Artists

In the modern music industry, it’s getting easier to release your music and build a music career without the backing of a record label. There are more independent artists than ever before breaking into the mainstream without the support of a label.

Digital music distribution, streaming platforms, social media, online marketing tools, and technology advancements are changing the way artists release music and reach fans.

Chance the Rapper is an excellent example of an independent artist who seen major success without signing with a record label. His 2016 mixtape, Coloring Book earned him three Grammy Awards, including the award for Best Rap Album. It became the first streaming-only album to win a Grammy Award. It also peaked at number eight on the Billboard 200.

At some point in your music career, you may ask if you should release music as an independent artist or sign a deal with a record label. This guide lists the pros and cons of releasing music as an independent artist vs. signing with a record label.

Releasing Music as an Independent Artist

Here are the pros and cons of releasing music as an independent artist:

The Pros of Self-Releasing Music

1. 100% creative control: Independent artists have complete control over the direction of their music. They also have full control over distribution , marketing, artwork , messaging, deadlines, and more. Moreover, an independent artist has free will to make decisions about their creative vision. It’s the ideal scenario for many artists.

2. Keep 100% of the profits: Independent artists keep 100% of the profits generated from music sales, streams, licensing deals , merchandise, and other revenue sources.

3. 100% ownership of your music: Independent artists own the master rights to their music. They also have the freedom to negotiate music licensing and publishing deals. Moreover, they don’t have to worry about confusing contracts, expensive lawyers, and signing over their music rights.

4. Online music services offered to independent musicians: The digital era brings a variety of music services and tools for independent artists. Musicians have access to music distribution, marketing, streaming, merchandise creation, and other services. The internet also makes it easy for musicians to reach new audiences. They can now deliver their music to digital music stores, music platforms, and streaming services without a record deal.

The Cons of Self-Releasing Music

1. Limited resources and budget: Funding mastering, distribution, marketing, merchandise, touring, and other expenses are expensive. Many independent artists don’t have the resources and money a record label can provide.

2. Limited network: Independent artists starting their music career have a limited network of fans and industry contacts. Whereas record labels will have a larger fanbase and connections with music industry professionals such as promoters, booking agents, media, etc.

3. Limited music business experience: Learning the ropes of the music business is challenging. It takes time and experience to learn all aspects of the music business. There are a lot of parts to manage, changing trends, music laws, and much more. It’s a complex world! It can also be an expensive lesson to figure out what works and what doesn’t.

4. Limited time: Pursuing the independent artist route is time-consuming. Self-releasing your music can seem like a full-time job. It requires a lot of time to set up distribution, create all the release assets, develop a marketing strategy, track sales, book shows, and everything else associated with releasing music. All this extra work also takes away valuable studio time.

Releasing Music with a Record Label

Here are the pros and cons of releasing your music with a record label:

The Pros of Signing with a Record Label

1. Available resources and budget: Established record labels have the resources and funding to provide support for mastering, distribution, album artwork creation, marketing, merchandise, touring, music videos, and other expenses. However, the budget and resources available depend on the label.

2. Existing network and connections: One significant benefit of signing with a label is their existing network . It can present major opportunities for you and your music. Without a label, your network and reach to larger audiences can be limited. Established labels will have a larger fanbase. They may also have relationships with booking agents, music venues, publishing companies, PR companies, and other music industry professionals.

3. Reputation and influence: Many record labels, especially major labels have well-established influence and connections in the music industry. They are better positioned to secure licensing and publishing deals, shows at larger venues and festivals, media coverage, radio plays, and other opportunities.

4. Implemented marketing strategy: Signing with a record label with a robust marketing strategy will increase your music sales, help you reach new fans, and boost your music career. Also, a label may have a large email list, regularly send newsletters, have a strong social media presence , music media support, and more. In addition, a label will have music industry experience.

The Cons of Signing with a Record Label

1. Limited creative control: Signing with a record label gives them control over your music. The label can make deals and decisions with your music without your approval. They also have full control over distribution, marketing, artwork, messaging, and more. However, the control over your music and brand depends on the terms set in the contract.

2. Fewer profits: Records labels take a percentage of the profits generated from music sales, streams, licensing deals, and other revenue sources. Also, some labels use the royalties generated from music sales to pay for mastering, promotional mailers, and other expenses associated with the release.

3. Transfer of copyright ownership: The record label owns the master rights to your music when you sign a deal. They have the freedom to negotiate music licensing and publishing deals without your approval. As a result, they can keep more profits generated from these deals.

4. Bad contract deals: Many independent record labels have artist-friendly contracts. However, major record labels are known to have contract deals that give the artist a lesser percentage of royalties. Also, signing with a label means you have to deal with these complicated contracts and expensive layers if needed.

Conclusion

Should you go independent or sign with a record label? Each has its advantages and disadvantages.

Artists who want to retain the master rights, keep 100% of the profits, have complete creative control, and are music business savvy may consider going independent.

Artists who want more freedom to work on music, don’t mind fewer profits, and want more exposure may consider signing with a record label.

Remember that the only one responsible for your success is you. There is heaps of information out there to help you succeed. Take time to learn what works best for your music and brand. Good luck!

New Vocal Artist Program Coming in Summer 2020!

Wed, 10 Jul 2019 20:35:00 GMT

ICON Collective is proud to announce a new Vocal Artist Program in Los Angeles tailormade for singers, songwriters, and performers. Pre-register to this new program to receive exclusive updates and priority enrollment for Summer 2020.

New Vocal Artist Program in Los Angeles

The new Vocal Artist Program in Los Angeles is an opportunity to find your voice and develop your music skills ! This extensive 12-month program focuses on vocal training, songwriting, and performance. Enrollment into this exciting new program is expected to officially open in Summer 2020.

Students enrolled in the Vocal Artist Program will train their ear and expand their vocal range through a rigorous curriculum, weekly vocal training, and singing lessons from a professional vocal coach. Throughout the program, students will also use advanced songwriting techniques and honed music production skills to create original, commercial-grade music.

Those interested can pre-register with Admissions and enjoy priority enrollment for Summer 2020. Fill out the form below to contact an Admissions Advisor and learn more about the program.

What Is a De-Esser and How to Use It

Wed, 10 Jul 2019 15:05:00 GMT

What is a De-esser? Learn how de-essing can reduce or remove harsh high frequencies from vocal recordings, instruments, and entire mixes.

What is a De-Esser?

De-essers are specialized compressors that focus on a specific frequency range. They use a combination of multiband equalization and sidechain compression to reduce harsh high frequencies and sibilance.

De-esser plugins are typically used for vocal mixing . They are the most preferred mixing tool for dealing with sibilance in the mix. However, these versatile devices have other mixing or mastering purposes. For example, de-essers work great at taming cymbals, hi-hats, synths, keys, guitars, and more. Anything with high-end harshness can benefit from a de-esser.

De-essing is also an excellent alternative to traditional EQing when controlling harshness. The ability to control a specific range of unpleasant high frequencies is more transparent and natural sounding.

What is Sibilance?

Vocal recordings often have a tonal harshness called sibilance. Sibilance is the “ess, ch, or ts” sounds created by sharp consonants such as S, T, and Z. These consonant sounds can produce harsh resonant peaks in vocal recordings anywhere between 2 kHz – 10 kHz, depending on the voice. Various musical instruments and percussion sounds can also create unpleasant high frequencies.

Vocal sibilance can also result from:

Unpleasant sibilance can be irritating to the ear, especially with earbuds or headphones. The best way to reduce these annoying high-frequency sounds is with a de-esser plugin.

How De-Essing Works

De-essing temporarily reduces the level of a specified frequency range when a sibilant sound exceeds a set threshold. This method of controlling frequencies often works better than using an EQ to cut those problematic frequencies.

For example, a static EQ will continuously cut frequencies in the vocal, even when there is no sibilance occurring. Conversely, the dynamic response of a de-esser only tames the harsh frequencies when needed. The result is more transparent and natural sounding.

There are several de-esser plugins with different options. However, most have similar controls to set the frequency range, threshold, amount of attenuation, sidechain filtering, and volume. Many de-essers such as the FabFilter Pro-DS also offer two separate compression modes:

Wide-Band: Lowers the entire audio signal when sibilance is detected. Wide-band mode works best with a single vocal recording. It sounds smooth and more natural than split-band processing.

Split-Band: Uses high-pass sidechain filtering to split the signal into high and low frequency bands. Only the high frequencies get attenuated when sibilance is detected. The lower band remains untouched. Split-band mode also works best for de-essing full mixes, bus groups, or complex audio material.

How to Use a De-Esser

These basic steps will help you set up a de-esser and find a starting point:

Note: A de-esser plugin may also have other controls. For example, a monitor switch for listening to the sidechain signal, lookahead, stereo linking, and other advanced features.

5 Alternative De-Essing Techniques

De-essing is an excellent technique for treating vocals and taming annoying sibilant sounds. However, de-essing can also work great for rounding off harsh high frequencies on instrument tracks, drums, bus groups, or even entire mixes. Here are five examples of how de-essing can help other elements in the mix:

1. Taming Harsh Percussion Brightness

Cymbals, hi-hats, rides, and other high-frequency percussion can often sound harsh. Using split-band de-essing will tame any harsh spikes without affecting lower drum sounds like the kick or toms.

2. Reducing Harsh Synth Brightness

Digital synthesizers can often sound too bright in the high end. Especially when processing the signal with various effects. For example, those shrill dubstep basses and leads. De-essing will help tame harsh high-frequency spikes and smooth out the signal.

3. Reducing Guitar Harshness

Compressing a guitar recording can amplify fret and string noise. A split-band de-esser works great at attenuating fret and string noise without affecting the overall tone.

Moreover, electric guitars can often have harsh sounding frequencies. A wide-band de-esser can help smooth the signal and tame unpleasant harshness only when it occurs.

4. Mastering with a De-Esser

Inserting a de-esser on the stereo mix during the mastering process is another common technique. Mastering engineers will often use a combination of de-essing and EQ work to tackle excessive top-end brightness.

5. De-Essing Audio Effects

Insert a de-esser plugin before audio effects like reverb, delay, and distortion to smooth out the signal before it gets processed. These effects can amplify sibilance and introduce harshness. Placing a de-esser before these processes can help mitigate some of the unintended side effects.

Conclusion

Learning how to use a de-esser will expand your mixing tool kit. De-essing has an array of uses that can help you achieve better sounding mixes.

Try these techniques in your projects and experiment with the different ways to use a de-esser. Also, remember to use a combination of processes instead of relying on a single plugin or technique to do all the work. And most important, Use your ears!

What Is The Music Modernization Act And Why It Matters?

Wed, 03 Jul 2019 17:13:00 GMT

What is the Music Modernization Act? Learn how this massive update to U.S. copyright and publishing laws will affect your music and the music industry.

What Is the Music Modernization Act?

The Music Modernization Act (MMA) brings the most significant reform of music licensing in decades. The MMA updates music copyright laws and streamlines music licensing for the digital era.

The Music Modernization Act was signed into law on October 11, 2018. It passed through the US House and Senate with unanimous support. It also has widespread approval from the music industry.

The MMA updates outdated U.S. copyright and publishing laws for the internet age. It also creates better ways artists get paid, simplifies complex processes, closes crucial loopholes, and provides copyright protection for key players.

The Music Modernization Act Benefits

The Music Modernization Act benefits artists, music producers , songwriters, musicians, engineers, and music business. Some highlights of the bill will:

The MMA also combines three pieces of legislation into a single bill: The Musical Works Modernization Act, The Classics Protection and Access Act, and The Allocation for Music Producers Act. Below is a simplified summary of these three main components:

Musical Works Modernization Act (MMA)

The Musical Works Modernization Act updates licensing and mechanical royalties for streaming music. It changes how digital music providers like Spotify, Pandora, Apple Music, SiriusXM, Google Play, and others obtain licenses for the broadcast of music compositions. It also improves the way rights holders can collect royalty payments for the streaming and distribution of their music.

The MMA also sets a new “willing buyer/willing seller” rate standard that will require all digital platforms to pay fair market value for mechanical licenses.

Moreover, the MMA will establish the Mechanical Licensing Collective (MLC). This board will collect and distribute royalties on behalf of songwriters and publishers. It also has the authority to grant blanket mechanical licenses to digital music services for the distribution and streaming of musical works. The MLC will also create and maintain a public database that provides information regarding musical works and their respective owners. This database will ensure the correct rights holders receive royalty payments.

Note: Anyone involved with music creation/publishing must provide information to the database to ensure proper payments.

Classics Protection and Access Act (CLASSICS)

The Classics Protection and Access Act allow artists and record labels to obtain compensation for recordings created before 1972. Previously, artists who recorded music before 1972 were not entitled royalties under federal law when digital music services use their work.

This flawed law created a “pre-1972 loophole,” which enabled digital music services to avoid paying royalties to legacy artists. This loophole also led to extensive and costly litigation in the courts over recent years.

This section of the MMA also creates a digital performance right for owners of sound recordings created between February 15, 1972, and January 1, 1923.

Allocation for Music Producers Act (AMP)

The Allocation for Music Producers Act improves and simplifies the payment of royalties owed to music producers, mix engineers, and sound engineers. It’s also the first time in history producers and engineers are mentioned in copyright law.

Music producers, mixers, and sound engineers contributing to the creation of a sound recording now have a statutory right to royalties. They will receive royalty payouts when songs they helped create play on satellite radio or streaming services.

The AMP Act also establishes a process for how music producers and engineers receive royalty payments. The organization SoundExchange will now collect and administer digital performance royalties. They will also distribute royalty payments owed to producers and engineers upon the direction of the featured artist.

For example, the AMP Act requires the featured artist to send “ letters of direction ” to SoundExchange. This letter provides instructions on how to distribute a portion of the royalties they receive to specified producers and engineers involved in the creative process. Upon acceptance of a letter, SoundExchange will distribute the appropriate royalties to those involved in making the sound recording.

Conclusion

There are many other components and benefits to the new law that are complex and beyond the scope of this general overview. There is also a lot more of the law to work out, and the copyright system is still complicated. However, the Music Modernization Act is a big step towards bringing music laws to the modern age. It should ensure artists are paid more and have an easier time collecting money they are owed.

6 Best Backup Strategies for Music Producers

Mon, 01 Jul 2019 16:50:00 GMT

Learn how to create a backup and recovery strategy to protect your data when disaster strikes. This guide lists six excellent backup solutions.

Backup Guide for Music Producers

You know the feeling: You wake up almost falling out of bed with excitement to continue working on your new song. However, you turn on your computer only to see…. nothing. The worst has happened. Your hard drive failed! Panic sets in when you realize you may have lost everything!

Although you correctly saved your project, you never saw this coming. “It would never happen to me,” you always thought. But now it has.

While technology has only been getting better over time, it’s never immune from failure. For us music creatives , there may not be a worse feeling than seeing hours, days, weeks, and even years of work go down the drain. Knowing how to properly back up your data will save you a lot of heartaches. You’ll also be thankful you started backing up as soon as possible (even if you never end up using it).

Why You Should Backup Your Data

It’s crucial to have a backup system in place. Don’t risk losing all your irreplaceable data and work. Plus, you never know when you will lose something, accidentally delete something, or when a hard drive will fail.

In most cases, backups will serve three distinct purposes:

With today’s backup software and careful planning, establishing a backup strategy is easy to achieve. By combining different backup methods, you can also create an effective backup strategy that meets all your needs. You can even automate your backups for convenience or to avoid human error.

The 3-2-1 Backup Strategy

Having a backup and recovery system takes more than buying the right hard drive or using cloud storage. Responsible data management is about having a system that protects you from losing your data when disaster strikes.

The 3-2-1 strategy is a best practice for backup and recovery. This effective and robust backup strategy involves:

The 3-2-1 backup strategy may seem overkill. However, it’s the best way to ensure you have a copy of your data no matter what happens. Multiple copies prevent losing the only copy of your data. While multiple locations ensure there is no single point of failure. Your data is safe from disasters such as fires, floods, and theft.

The Different Backup Options

There are three main backup options: cloning, imaging, and cloud storage. Understanding what each technique involves and how they are different will help you can make an informed choice.

Disk Cloning

Disk cloning creates an exact copy of your drive. This method copies the information needed to boot the drive itself, all system files, and file directories that store your plugins, samples, etc.

The main benefit of cloning is that it minimizes downtime. The clone is an exact functioning copy of your original drive. For instance, if your hard drive fails, you could remove it and replace it with the cloned drive (assuming the clone is recent).

Cloning can get you up and running quickly, but it doesn’t offer as much flexibility as disk imaging.

Disk Imaging

Disk imaging creates a compressed “snapshot” of your drive. This file includes all the data stored on the source hard drive and the operating system information needed to boot. However, you cannot boot from this drive. You would need another drive with the appropriate imaging software to restore a bootable image.

Additionally, most imaging software allows you to create various versions. You can restore from a version you backed up a week ago or a year ago. For example, having the option to save multiple images is helpful if you download a virus and need to restore an image from two days earlier.

Another benefit of disk imaging is the ability to store the image file remotely. Using compression reduces the file size and allows you to move images to other drives or the cloud.

Cloud Storage

Cloud storage services store your data on offsite servers. This method can offer basic storage to upload your data to full-on backup solutions with imaging and cloning features (or both).

The biggest benefit of cloud storage is that it’s offsite and away from local disasters or theft. And if something happens to your drive, you know the data is safe! Another benefit of having your data in the cloud is the convenience of having an uninterrupted workflow. You can download samples, music projects, and files from the cloud wherever you are. No dongles or external hard drives necessary.

Backup and Recovery Solutions

There are a variety of great backup and recovery solutions out there. And yes, you can simply copy files onto an external drive and call it a day. However, that method can be tedious because you would have to manually transfer files every time you want to back up data.

Below are six excellent backup solutions for MacOS users:

1. Time Machine (Disk Imager)

Built-in to MacOS since Snow Leopard (MacOS 10.5), Time Machine has been a staple backup solution for everyday Mac users. Time Machine takes incremental snapshots of your drive. It also gives you hourly backups for the past 24 hours, daily backups for the past month, and weekly backups for all previous months.

Time Machine is a simple and effective backup solution for Mac users. With simplicity in mind, you can “set it and forget it” (so long as the backup location is connected). Time Machine will then automatically backup your data moving forward.

However, the number of backups it can store depends on the available backup drive space. For instance, if your backup drive runs out of space after a month, you’ll only have access to that point. Moreover, Time Machine will delete the oldest image to make room for new backups.

2. Carbon Copy Cloner (Disk Cloner)

Carbon Copy Cloner (CCC) by Bombich Software has been around for over 15 years. It’s a Mac enthusiast favorite because it offers a range of features. For example, you can schedule backup tasks at certain times, like once a week or when the hard drive is plugged in. It can also notify you with a reminder to do a backup, so you don’t forget. Although, one of the best features is its built-in “Snapshot Support” imaging. This feature allows you to “turn back the clock” and restore files from a previous moment in time.

3. SuperDuper! (Cloner and Imager)

If you’re looking for a simpler cloning solution to CCC, then try SuperDuper! It’s a great alternative and the user interface is super straightforward. You simply select the source drive, the drive you want to copy to, and what you want to back up. For example, all files, selected files, etc. You can also begin the backup immediately or schedule it for another time.

The best part! All those actions come with the free version of the program. If you want to get more technical, you can pay for the full version. However, the free version is more than enough for basic backup needs.

4. Acronis (Imager, Cloner, and Cloud)

Acronis is among the best of the best with backup solutions. Their base plan offers both imaging and cloning backup options to local and network drives. While their higher tier option provides cloud storage. This plan is essentially the same as the base plan but with the option to back up to the cloud. To add extra peace of mind, the data saved on the cloud is also end-to-end encrypted. This protection means the data cannot be opened if it were intercepted.

5. Backblaze (Cloud Storage)

Backblaze is a cloud backup software solution with awesome security and recovery features. For a few dollars a month, you have unlimited cloud storage for every one of your files. This includes all files stored on your computer and attached external drives.

Also, if you need to restore, you have the option to either download a zip of selected files or pay for a USB flash or hard drive they mail to you as fast as overnight (dependent on data). One of the sweet things about this mail service is Backblaze’s “Restore Return Refund” program. It delivers a full refund for the price of the drive if you return it within 30 days.

On the security side, Backblaze gives you the option to encrypt the mailed drive and your cloud backups. They also have two-factor-authentication, which adds yet another layer of security to your data.

6. Splice (Cloud Storage)

Designed specifically for computer musicians in mind, Splice is a cloud-based backup solution that works through its app. Once you have the app installed, you can create a Splice folder that backs up all your projects. You can also have it backup projects from any folder, regardless if it’s in the Splice folder or not.

Moreover, the Splice application saves incremental versions of projects every time you save the project. For instance, if you want to load a previous version, you can download it from the app or site.

Besides backing up your projects, Splice also offers features such as sharing your project with collaborators and leaving comments on individual project versions. Also, Splice supports Ableton Live, FL Studio, Logic Pro X, GarageBand, and Studio One.

Conclusion

Proper backup practices might not be the most exciting part of music production, but it’s necessary. Spend time thinking about your backup strategy and make sure it works! Know how much backup space you need, what backup drives and services to purchase, and how robust you what your backup system. Most important, back up frequently!

Learn How to Improve Progressions with Chord Inversions

Wed, 26 Jun 2019 15:09:00 GMT

What are chord inversions? This basic music theory guide looks at how chord inversions and voice leading chord progressions keep music sounding interesting.

What Are Chord Inversions?

Chords are the harmonious building blocks of all songs. They evoke emotion and provide the foundation for creating melodies. Knowing how to build chords and understanding how they interact with each other is essential when learning basic music theory .

Chord inversions are variations of the same chord. The more notes a chord has the more possible inversions. Create an inversion by transposing notes in a chord to different octaves. Also, the lowest bass note will determine the inversion.

Chord inversions add variation, excitement, and smoother transitions between chords in a progression. Inversions also open new possibilities for building captivating chord progressions and melodies.

Triad Chords

Understanding what makes up a triad is fundamental to all chord theory. Triads are three note chords consisting of the root, third, and fifth notes in a scale.

For example, an A minor triad has the notes:

Triads are also the foundation for more complex chords. For example, adding a note a third above a triad creates a seventh chord. Continue by adding notes at the interval of a third to build ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth chords.

The Three Triad Inversions

Once familiar with the different chords, the next step in music theory is to learn the possible chord inversions. Triad chords have three possible positions:

Root Position

A chord is in root position when the lowest note is its root note (Root, Third, Fifth). The root of any chord will be the note that corresponds to the letter name of the chord. For example, the root of an A minor chord is A. Therefore, an A minor chord is in root position if the lowest note is an A.

First Inversion

The first inversion transposes the root note up one octave. The third is now the bass note of the chord. For example, an A minor chord in its first inversion has the notes C, E, A (Third, Fifth, Root).

Second Inversion

The second inversion takes the first inversion and transposes the bass note up one octave. The fifth is now the lowest note of the chord. For example, an A minor chord in its second inversion has the notes E, A, C (Fifth, Root, Third).

Inverting Extended Chords

The inversion of notes applies to all chords, including sevenths or other extended chords . The more notes a chord contains, the more inversions are possible. For example, seventh chords add a third inversion, and ninth chords add a fourth inversion.

Why Use Chord Inversions?

Chord inversions minimize the movement from one chord to another. Rearranging the order of notes in a chord creates smoother transitions. Moving shorter distances also makes it easier to play chord progressions on a piano or keyboard. Moreover, playing progressions using only chords in root position sounds jumpy and disconnected.

Rearranging the order of the notes doesn’t affect whether a chord sounds major or minor. Instead, inversions create harmonic variations of the same chord. Furthermore, chord inversions improve the quality of chord progressions. For example, chord inversions add interest, excitement, and complexity that sounds pleasing. They also add a sense of emotion, tension, and release that keeps listeners engaged.

What is Voice Leading?

Now that you know the different chord inversions, apply them when voice leading chord progressions.

Voice leading is the linear movement between melodic lines or chords to create a single musical idea. The concept also allows musicians and vocalists to take advantage of harmonic relationships between notes.

Moreover, voice leading focuses on the smooth movement of notes from one chord to the next using common tones. The concept also minimizes the vertical and horizontal transition between notes in a chord progression or melody. Moving shorter distances sound more natural, smoother, and pleasing. They also make it easier to play chord progressions on a piano or keyboard. Melodic lines or voices that jump around across wide intervals sound jarring and awkward.

Conclusion

Without chord inversions, music wouldn’t sound as compelling and vibrant. Chord inversions add a new dimension to basic and extended chords. They also keep music sounding fresh and interesting.

What Are the Different Types of EQ and Filters?

Wed, 19 Jun 2019 15:23:00 GMT

Learn the different types of EQ used in music production. Knowing how to use various types of EQ and filter shapes will help you make informed mixing decisions.

What is Equalization?

Equalization is one of the most fundamental processes in music production. Every music producer should have various types of EQ in their arsenal.

Moreover, equalization has many applications ranging from correction and enhancement treatment to creative tonal reshaping. Equalizers are the essential tools used to achieve clarity, depth, tonal balance, and presence. Use an equalizer to remove problematic frequencies, enhance musical frequencies, balance various elements in a mix, shape sounds in creative ways, create sound effects, and more.

What is an Equalizer?

Equalizers have specialized filters that influence the volume of specified frequencies or a range of frequencies within the audio spectrum. The audible frequency spectrum ranges from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. An equalizer can attenuate, boost, remove, or leave these frequencies unchanged. Changing the frequency of a sound or entire mix will alter its tone, volume, and harmonic make-up.

Types of EQ

There are multiple variations of equalizers. Each has a different function, purpose, and characteristic sound. However, the most common types of EQ used in music production are parametric, semi-parametric, dynamic, graphic, and shelving.

In addition, there are digital and analog based EQ plugins like the FabFilter Pro-Q 3 and UAD PulTec EQP-1A .

Here are the most common types of EQ used in music production:

Parametric EQ

Parametric equalizers are the most common and versatile type of EQ used in music production. These multiband equalizers offer fully configurable and adjustable frequency bands. You can control the center frequency, level, and bandwidth of each frequency band with the highest precision.

Common parameters found on a parametric EQ include:

Parametric equalizers excel at shaping tone and doing surgical work. You can cut harsh, unpleasant, or masking frequencies with pinpoint accuracy.

There are also digital and modeled analog style parametric equalizers. Digital style EQs like FabFilter’s Pro-Q 3 are more advanced and provide modern features. Whereas analog modeled EQs like Waves’ SSL G-Equalizer are more basic and have fewer bands or features. Moreover, digital style EQs are transparent sounding. They don’t color the sound like an analog modeled EQ does when cutting and boosting frequencies. For instance, a common technique is to cut with a transparent sounding digital style EQ and boost with an analog style EQ to add character.

In addition, parametric equalizers are great for creative processing. For example, creating filter effects, wobbles, adding movement, or shaping sounds in unique ways.

Semi-Parametric EQ

A semi-parametric equalizer is a parametric equalizer without one or more features. Typically, the bandwidth Q has a fixed setting. You can only adjust the frequency and gain of each band. Many also don’t have an interactive display with an analyzer.

Semi-parametric equalizers are not as flexible as a fully parametric EQ. However, the fixed bandwidth curves do an excellent job of boosting or attenuating a wide frequency range. They’re ideal for tonal work and sweetening.

Dynamic EQ

Dynamic equalizers combine the precision of parametric equalization with the dynamic control of compression or expansion. This versatile combination gives you more control over shaping and enhancing sounds.

What are the differences between parametric and dynamic equalizers? Parametric equalizers are linear processors, meaning they treat the incoming audio continuously. For example, filter cuts or boosts are static and will not change.

Dynamic equalizers are nonlinear processors. The filters react to either the internal audio source or are triggered by a sidechain input source. For example, cuts and boosts respond to the incoming audio that passes a set threshold level. This dynamic movement adapts to the music.

Most dynamic equalizer plugins also provide functionality found on compressors such as threshold, attack, and release controls.

Graphic EQ

Graphic equalizers boost or attenuate a range of fixed frequencies using a bank of evenly spaced slider controls. They can also have up to 31 or more bands. More bands will provide higher accuracy over the frequency spectrum.

Moreover, graphic equalizers with narrower bandwidths have greater precision. However, they’re not as effective for surgical work as a parametric EQ. There is no control over the filter shape and bandwidth of each band. Instead, graphic equalizers are generally used to make broad changes to the overall mix or bus groups.

When working with a graphic equalizer, it’s better to make small, incremental adjustments across the frequency spectrum. You’ll get smoother results by rounding out your mix. Avoid making drastic adjustment leaps between each frequency band. It will sound jarring and unnatural.

Shelving EQ

Shelving equalizers are the most basic type of EQ. A shelving equalizer boosts or attenuates frequencies above or below a specified cutoff point. Many shelving equalizers also have predetermined filter curves with a wide Q. There smooth sloping curves excel at emphasizing or attenuating frequencies in a broad, musical manner to achieve more clarity and presence.

Most shelving equalizers have high and low shelving filters. Some also feature midrange bell curve filters. They work excellent at sweetening and deepening full mixes. For example, use a shelving equalizer to create the familiar “smiling” EQ curve by boosting the high and low end of a mix.

Common Filter Types

Understanding the different filter types and how they change the signal is also crucial. Below are the primary EQ filter types:

Low Cut Filter

A low cut filter removes all frequencies below a specified frequency cutoff point. This filter is also known as a high pass filter because it passes all high frequencies above the cutoff point.

Use a low cut filter to remove unwanted or problematic low frequencies. You can also automate the frequency to create sweeping effects.

Low Shelf Filter

A low shelf filter attenuates or boosts frequencies below a specified frequency point. Low shelf filters don’t cut frequencies out completely like low cut filters. Instead, they gradually reduce or boost bass frequencies.

Use a shelf filter to boost or reduce low-end frequencies without cutting them off completely. It is useful for making broad tonal changes.

High Cut Filter

A high cut filter removes all frequencies above a specified frequency cutoff point. This filter is also known as a low pass filter because it passes all low frequencies below the cutoff point.

Use a high cut filter to remove unwanted or problematic high frequencies. You can also automate the frequency to create sweeping effects.

High Shelf Filter

A high shelf filter attenuates or boosts frequencies above a specified frequency point. High shelf filters don’t cut frequencies out completely like high cut filters. Instead, they gradually reduce or boost treble frequencies.

Use a shelf filter to boost or reduce high-end frequencies without cutting them off completely. It is useful for making broad tonal changes.

Bell Curve Filter

A bell curve attenuates or boosts frequencies around a specified center frequency point. The bandwidth Q sets the width of the bell curve. Bell curve filters are also known as peak filters.

Moreover, bell curves are the most versatile filter. Use them to boost or reduce a range of frequencies with precision. For example, you can set broad curves to boost musical frequency areas or set narrow cuts to do corrective work with pinpoint accuracy.

Band Pass Filter

A band pass filter passes a range of frequencies around a specified center frequency point. Low and high frequencies outside the range are attenuated.

Use a band pass filter to isolate a range of frequencies. Multiband equalizers use multiple band pass filters to divide the audio spectrum into sections.

Notch Filter

A notch filter attenuates a range of frequencies around a specified center frequency point. Low and high frequencies pass on either side of the frequency range. Notch filters are also known as band stop filters.

Use a notch filter to cut a range of frequencies. Modulating notch filters also creates interesting tonal shaping effects.

Conclusion

Equalization is critical for creating a polished mix and a professional sound. Knowing how to use the different types of EQ and filter shapes will help you make informed mixing decisions. Also, knowing what type of EQ to use for different situations will give you better results and speed up your workflow.

10 Best Channel Strip Plugins for Mixing

Mon, 17 Jun 2019 17:21:00 GMT

What are the best channel strip plugins? This ICON Picks roundup features ten popular channel strip plugins that offer versatile features and excellent sound quality.

What Are Channel Strip Plugins?

Channel strip plugins combine a variety of mixing effects within a single interface. These versatile plugins are extremely useful mixing and analysis tools.

Many channel strip plugins emulate actual channels on iconic analog mixing consoles. There are also modular channel strip plugins that provide essential mixing effects and modern features not available on classic channel strips.

Channel strip plugins also speed up your mixing workflow. The ability to perform quick adjustments in one place makes mixing fast and intuitive. Channel strip plugins are also more affordable and less CPU intensive. Instead of buying several individual effects, you can buy one plugin that includes multiple effects.

This guide lists ten popular channel strip plugins that offer versatile features and excellent sound quality.

1. Slate Digital | Virtual Mix Rack

Create custom channel strips with analog modeled plugins from Slate Digital’s Virtual Mix Rack 2.0. Choose from a range of vintage modeled EQs, compressors, enhancers, filters, preamps, mixing consoles, and more. All faithful emulations of iconic hardware processors!

You can also mix efficiently by having your entire processing chain in one convenient window. Load up to eight modules at once into VMR. The drag and drop modules make it easy to build and save your channel strips. You can also switch between eight customizable channel strip configurations using VMR’s Dream Strips. In addition, the modules are highly CPU efficient, which means you’ll have more processing power during mixdown.

2. Soundtoys | Soundtoys 5 Effect Rack

Soundtoys 5 brings together the company’s entire range of audio effects into one powerful collection. It includes all 21 Soundtoys plugins. Choose from a variety of analog inspired delay units, EQs, compressors, saturators, filters, modulation effects, and more.

The Soundtoys Effect Rack is also the centerpiece of Soundtoys 5. It turns this collection of plugins into a creative multi-effects system. Easily create and recall custom configurations using some of the music industry’s most revered plugins.

3. iZotope | Neutron 3

iZotope Neutron 3 is a modern channel strip plugin with innovative mixing and analysis tools. It includes eight drag and drop modules. Mix with an intelligent Equalizer, two multiband Compressors, a multiband Exciter, a multiband Transient Shaper, a Gate, a True Peak Limiter, and more.

Neutron 3 also has innovative technology not available on other channel strips. Get to an optimal starting point in your mixes with the Track Assistant. Use the Tonal Balance Control to analyze and optimize your mix. Identify frequency collisions across tracks with the Masking Meter. There’s a ton more this versatile plugin can do that no other plugin can!

4. Waves | Scheps Omni Channel

Waves partnered with Grammy-winning mixer Andrew Scheps (Adele, Jay Z, Metallica) to design this channel strip. The Scheps Omni Channel features five drag and drop modules you can use in any order. Scheps helped design the modules based on years of go-to processor combinations. The result gives you a diverse selection of classic hardware emulations and innovative modules with modern features.

Moreover, the Scheps Omni Channel offers a variety of analog-style saturators, compressors, EQs, a de-esser, gate, and more. You can also load an extra Waves plugin anywhere in the channel strip.

5. Brainworx | bx_console Series

The bx_console series includes emulations of three legendary analog mixing consoles. Each channel strip plugin offers authentic analog modeling with additional modern features. The three models include:

Brainworx bx_console SSL 4000 G – Captures the legendary sound of the British Solid State Logic 4000 G series console. It also includes modern features not found on the original console.

Brainworx bx_console SSL 4000 E – Captures the legendary sound of the British Solid State Logic 4000 E series console. It also includes modern features not found on the original console.

Brainworx bx_console N – A faithful emulation of the rare and coveted Neve VXS console. It also includes modern features not found on the original console.

6. Softube | Summit Audio Grand Channel

The Grand Channel combines analog emulations of the Summit Audio EQF-100 Full Range Equalizer and the TLA-100A Compressor. You get a warm and smooth tone sculpting equalizer and a rich sounding compressor.

This versatile channel strip will cover a large part of your mixing needs. It’s simple design also makes it easy to dial in. You can even reverse the order of effects with a single switch. The plugin also includes parallel compression, saturation, and low-cut filtering.

7. McDSP | 6060 Ultimate Module Collection

The 6060 Ultimate Module Collection contains more processing tools than any module-based plugin. It includes over 30 modules for EQ, compression, saturation, distortion, specialized filtering, dynamic range expansion, gating, and more. Custom modules include bass optimized biasing to maximize the low end, transformer-based tone shaping circuits for high-end shine, tape simulation, de-essing, and more. This bad boy has it all! Additional modules are also already in the works.

8. Universal Audio | API Vision Channel Strip

API’s Vision Console is a legendary analog mixing console introduced in 2003. UA’s faithful emulation captures the same tone, punch, and personality as the classic API desks that have tracked the biggest records of the past 40-plus years.

Transform your DAW into a high-end analog console. The API Vision Channel Strip plugin brings a modern workflow to the classic API sound. It’s complete with five API modules – the 212L Preamp, 215L Cut Filters, 550L EQ, 225L Compressor/Limiter, and the 235L Gate/Expander. It also features UA’s Unison Technology for Apollo to capture the sound and behavior of sought-after tube and solid-state designs.

9. iZotope | Nectar 3

Nectar 3 brings a sophisticated set of tools designed for vocal production. Address every part of your vocal chain and get professional-sounding vocals with minimal effort.

Nectar 3 also ushers in a new era of mixing vocals. It features seven drag and drop effect modules, automatic preset detection settings, modern workflows, inter-plugin communication, beautiful visualizations, and more.

In addition, Nectar 3 includes Melodyne 4 essential and iZotope RX Breath Control. Use Melodyne 4 to perform surgical pitch corrective work. And RX Breath Control to detect and suppress breaths in vocal recordings.

10. Universal Audio | Neve 88RS Channel Strip

Introduced in 2001, the Neve 88 Series is another renowned analog mixing console. Neve’s premier analog console is famous for its depth, airiness, and clarity.

Create a modern Neve analog console in your DAW. UA’s emulation of this modern masterpiece comes complete with its famous mic/line preamp, cut filters, dynamics, four-band EQ, and post-fader output amplifier. It also features UA’s Unison Technology for Apollo to capture the sound and behavior of sought-after tube and solid-state designs.

How to Write Memorable and Catchy Song Lyrics

Wed, 12 Jun 2019 11:18:00 GMT

This songwriting guide breaks down the song lyrics from popular artists to help you develop a foundation for writing catchy lyrics.

How to Write Song Lyrics

Lyric writing is one of the craftiest parts of creating a song. The art of lyric writing combines a mixture of creativity and storytelling. Whether you write the music first and lyrics later, or vice versa, making a song catchy and meaningful is also about using certain songwriting techniques.

This post introduces techniques and approaches for writing song lyrics that grab a listener’s attention. Use the song examples compiled in this post to develop a foundation for writing catchy song lyrics.

The Song Seed

Writing a catchy song depends on factors such as the length of your phrases, repetition, rhyme schemes, and song sections. But above all else, it’s about starting with a great central idea for your song. So, before we get into these techniques above, let’s talk about how to build the essence of a song.

The central idea of a song is called a “song seed.” When writing song lyrics, you will grow and support the main idea of your song – your seed. A song seed is easily expressed, and should not be longer than one sentence. Below are lyric phrases that support the song seed:

As you can see in the above examples, a song can begin from a concept, a theme, a character, a situation, a visual, or some other sensory image. It can also be an image in your head, an emotion triggered by an experience, a memory of a specific person, or a place.

You may have also noticed that the song lyrics above reveal their song seed in the title. The idea is to figure out a song seed you can develop further and build a song around.

Point of View

Before you start writing song lyrics, it’s important to decide the song’s point of view. For instance, who’s this song addressed to? Who is telling the story? Once you make these decisions, it’s crucial to stay consistent throughout the song to avoid confusing the listener.

Let’s examine “Shape of You” by Ed Sheeran as an example. He addresses the song to the girl when he says, “I’m in love with the shape of you.” Throughout the song, he addresses this girl by narrating the whole story from a first-person perspective. He also stays consistent throughout the song, making it easy to follow along.

Song Form

Song form is the road map of your song. It’s the musical structure of a song made up of several sections that may or may not repeat. Basic song structure consists of an intro, verse, pre-chorus, chorus, breakdown, bridge, and outro.

Knowing how to structure a song will help you develop ideas for each section. For instance, where does the song accelerate? Where does the song slow down? Where is the catchiest part of the song? These questions will help you develop a song’s musical form.

Let’s look at the song lyrics for “Attention” by Charlie Puth. We will examine how he developed the verse, pre-chorus, and chorus:

The Verse

A verse is like the introduction paragraph of an essay. It’s where you start telling your story and reveal the characters involved. The verse is also the first thing a listener hears. It sets the vibe and emotion of the song. That’s why it’s crucial to write a compelling first verse that captures the listener’s attention.

There are usually multiple verses in a song. They often have different lyrics even though the melody may be the same. With each additional verse, we learn more about the story. It’s essential that each verse line furthers the story, and you’re not repeating yourself. Every line of every verse is an opportunity to move your story along with new emotions and details.

For example, here is the first verse from “Attention” by Charlie Puth:

This verse sets up the storyline that develops further in the pre-chorus and chorus.

The Pre-Chorus

A pre-chorus is a transitionary section that ties your verse to your chorus. It’s often shorter than a verse or chorus. Moreover, a pre-chorus works great at creating a sense of tension or anticipation before the chorus.

Also, not every song has a pre-chorus. However, having one can help you develop your ideas further into a compelling chorus section. If you use a pre-chorus, ensure it transitions into the chorus smoothly. It should also contrast with the main chorus, but complement it. The goal is to make them sound good alongside each other without sounding too similar.

For example, here is the first pre-chorus from “Attention” by Charlie Puth:

The verse introduced what the girl was doing and her intentions. The pre-chorus is the narrator’s response to the situation and what he thinks will happen. Another thing to note about the pre-chorus is that it tends to be the most unstable part of the song.

The Chorus

The term chorus comes from its Greek origin that means “to sing along.” It’s the most exciting part of the song. The chorus is also dubbed as “the hook” because the lyrics are the most catchy and memorable. It’s crucial to grab a listener’s attention with a strong chorus!

This section is also where the song seed gets reduced into a memorable part of the song. For instance, the chorus condenses the verse and pre-chorus into short repeated phrases supported by the repetition of a melody.

For example, here is the first chorus from “Attention” by Charlie Puth:

The chorus is not only the most memorable part of the song, but it’s also where the dynamics peak . For example, most modern pop songs feature a chorus that is louder or has more energy than the rest of the song.

You can think of song structure as a highway analogy. For example, you leave your house and get into your car. The verse is like driving slowly down a neighborhood street. The pre-chorus is like driving on a boulevard where you accelerate more. And then the chorus is like fully accelerating on the highway.

The Bridge

A bridge is a section that creates contrast between the verse, pre-chorus, and chorus. It usually offers a new perspective on the song. The bridge may also portray a revelation or an emotion significantly different than the rest of the song.

A great example would be the song “ Señorita ” by Justin Timberlake. Throughout the song, Justin Timberlake talks about this girl and how her boyfriend mistreats her. And in the Bridge, he offers a solution to her problem when he brings up the possibility of them being together instead.

For example, here is the first bridge from “Señorita” by Justin Timberlake:

The bridge is also a section that provides relief from the repetitive nature of many songs. It not only has different song lyrics from the verse and chorus, but the music is often different.

Creating Contrast Between Sections

To make your song lyrics more effective , it’s essential to create contrast between different sections. Lyric lines with the same length and rhyme scheme will sound monotonous.

If you are writing lyrics from an already existing melody, it’s also important to note that the verse melody is typically lower in pitch. Whereas the chorus melody is often higher in pitch as it’s considered the “peak” of the song.

In contrast to the verse, the chorus is also more repetitive and less wordy. It directly goes into the song seed or the central idea of the song. Whereas the verse typically backs up the song seed with a specific action, imagery, or detail. As a result, the verse becomes longer and less repetitive, which starkly contrasts with the chorus.

Rhyme Schemes

Rhyme schemes are patterns that help keep a listener’s attention. Lyricists use rhymes to add flow, pace, balance, and closure to the song.

A rhyme scheme is also a way of determining which lines of lyrics rhyme with one another. There are three conditions for rhyme:

Rhyme schemes also use letters to recognize different rhyming patterns in lyrics. For instance, ABAB and AABB are the most common rhymes schemes used in modern music.

Here is an AABB rhyme from “Superstitious” by Stevie Wonder:

As you can see above, phrases with end words that rhyme have the same letter. Also, the first two lines rhyme and the third and fourth lines rhyme. Since “wall” and “fall” rhyme, they both get assigned the letter “A.” “Glass” and “Past” also rhyme, but they have a different rhyme than the previous example. That’s why it gets assigned the letter “B.” Together, they create a pattern called AABB.

Final Words

The song lyrics tips in this guide apply to all music styles. You can also learn and develop your lyric writing techniques by analyzing more songs. I highly encourage everyone to dig deeper into the lyrical structures of your favorite music. Try to understand what makes that song special for you. Moreover, every song you hear is a chance to learn how musicians use these different approaches to tell their stories.

Mastering the art of songwriting also takes lots of trial and error, and ultimately writing lots of songs. As you put out more songs, you will unlock your potential to create songs that your listeners deem special!

How to Move Projects Effectively to Another Computer

Wed, 05 Jun 2019 15:05:00 GMT

Learn how to share or move projects to another computer without problems. This guide shows you how to manage project folders for Ableton Live and Logic Pro X.

How to Save Your Music Project the Right Way

Picture this: Your friend hears an awesome idea you started and wants to collaborate. However, when your friend opens the project on their computer, s/he is greeted with a ton of file missing error messages. Missing samples, plugins, you name it. This scenario can happen when you move projects from one computer to another.

While making music is fun , there are times we must take off our creative hats and put on our administrative hats. This music project management guide will cover two main topics:

1. Understanding a songs project folder and its contents.

2. How to save the necessary files into a project folder to avoid problems when opening it on another computer.

DAW Project Folders

Project folders store all the assets for your music project. They include subfolders that save samples, presets, project data, project settings, saved project versions, and more.

Properly managing project folders is essential. It makes it easier to organize, archive, and move projects.

However, project folders can get large and full of various folders and files. Here is a general breakdown of the project folder contents for Ableton Live and Logic Pro X .

Ableton Live Project Folder

A Live Project folder contains the saved Live Set(s) and all related files. All essential project files must live in this folder to avoid problems.

Live will create a new Live Project folder when you save a Live Set for the first time. The folder contains:

Note: Save each Live Set you create in its own individual Live Project folder. You shouldn’t save multiple songs or Live Sets in the same Project folder. Saving different Live Sets inside the same Live Project folder will cause critical file management issues and slow down Live.

Logic Pro X Project Folder

A Logic Pro X project contains all of your recordings, the location of media files, backups, and changes you make. It can include assets such as audio and video files, sampler instruments and samples, reverb impulse responses, presets, and more.

Logic Pro X will create a new project folder when you save a project for the first time. The folder contains:

Note: Logic Pro X gives you the option to save a project as a folder or package. The folder option will place all assets in corresponding subfolders within the project folder. The package option saves all the project assets and settings in a self-contained file. To see its contents, right-click on the package and select “Show Package Contents.”

How to Move Projects to Another Computer

Let’s say you want to move your music project to another computer. How would you ensure all samples, imported audio, plugins, presets, and settings transfer without getting error messages?

There are two main things to consider when moving a music project to another computer: the plugins and samples used in the project. The tips below ensure your projects and all associated assets will work on another computer:

Plugins: AU and VST

Plugins can cause several compatibility problems. For example, not everyone has the same plugins as you. Also, the plugin versions could be different on another computer. Consider these tips when using AU and VST plugins:

On an operating system level, AU plugins will only work on OSX. VST plugins are compatible with both OSX and Windows. If you move projects between OSX and Windows, it’s best to use VST plugins to avoid compatibility problems. However, if you’re moving between two Apple computers, then sticking with AU is fine.

Additionally, it’s smart to make sure the plugins on both computers are the same version to avoid problems. This helps prevent crashes and ensures presets load correctly.

Moreover, if you’re collaborating with someone that does not have the same plugins, consider “freezing” your tracks. It’s a good practice to freeze tracks that have third-party plugins. That way, someone without your plugins can open the project and still be able to work with it.

Lastly, if you work on multiple computers, try setting them up as identical as possible. Use the same DAW, plugins, and OS version. This will reduce the chance of problems arising.

Freezing Tracks and Committing to Audio

Freezing tracks and committing them to audio renders the original track and all the processing to a new audio file. Both Ableton Live and Logic Pro X have commands that will freeze midi and audio tracks.

There are a variety of reasons you would freeze a track. But for this topic, consider freezing a track if:

The Difference Between Freezing and Committing to Audio

There are notable differences between the two processes:

Freezing a Track

Freezing temporarily renders the track and all devices to a separate audio file. The process is not final until you commit the audio. You can still unfreeze the track to make edits. Moreover, many editing functions remain available to tracks that are frozen.

A frozen track can also be opened on another computer that doesn’t have the same plugins on that track. However, editing a frozen track is limited. Mixer controls such as volume, pan, and the sends are still available. Although, Ableton Live allows some clip and automation editing not available in Logic Pro X.

Commit to Audio

Committing a frozen track to audio completely replaces the original track with a new audio file. All the devices and processing get rendered. For example, committing a midi track to audio will replace all the midi notes with an audio waveform. This process is called “Flattening” in Ableton Live and “Bouncing in Place” in Logic Pro X.

How to Freeze and Flatten in Ableton Live

Ableton Live has “Freeze Track” and “Flatten” commands available from either the Edit menu or right-click context menu.

Freeze a track by right-clicking the track and choosing “Freeze Track” from the context menu.

Flatten a track by right-clicking the frozen track and choosing “Flatten” from the context menu.

How to Freeze and Bounce in Logic Pro X

Logic Pro X has two Freeze Modes: Source Only and Pre Fader. You can select the Freeze Mode from the Track Inspector.

Select Pre Fader mode if you are moving the project to another computer. Next, freeze a track by pressing the snowflake button on the Track Header. After that, click play to freeze the track. A green snowflake button will indicate a frozen track with Pre Fader mode.

https://youtu.be/Ez2kd76ycyY

Note: The Track Freeze button is not visible by default. Make it visible by right-clicking the Track Header, choosing Track Header Components, and selecting Show Freeze. A snowflake button will appear on the Track Header.

Bouncing a Track in Place

Unlike Ableton Live, Logic Pro X allows you to commit to audio without first having to freeze. Commit a track to audio in Logic Pro by selecting the track and clicking Control+Command+B. Next, click OK on the following “Bounce Track in Place” window to render the audio to a new audio track.

Note: Keep “Off” selected in the Normalize drop-down menu. The other settings will render the audio in a way that does not match the original playback.

Samples: Collecting and Saving all Associated Files into the Project Folder

Ableton Live and Logic Pro X do not automatically copy media files into a project folder. Instead, they both reference the files in their original location to save space.

If you send someone a project or transfer the project to a different computer, it’s vital to collect and save all audio assets into the project folder. This crucial step will copy all external media files used in the project to subfolders within your project folder. It will also prevent missing file error messages when opening the project on another computer.

Note: This step does not copy and save third-party plugins. It only saves audio files such as samples, recordings, sampler instrument samples, reverb impulse responses, etc. Moreover, this collection of audio assets can drastically increase the project folder size depending on the files used in a project.

Follow the steps below to collect and save audio files in Ableton Live and Logic Pro X:

Ableton Live: Collect All and Save

Ableton Live’s “Collect All and Save” function will copy all used audio files and Max for Live devices into the project folder.

Collect project assets by clicking File > Collect All and Save.

From the following dialog box, select which media files to copy into the project folder and click OK.

Logic Pro X: Consolidate

Logic Pro X has a “Consolidate” command that creates a consolidated copy of a project with all audio assets.

Consolidate project assets by clicking File > Project Management > Consolidate.

From the following dialog box, select the file types you want to copy into the consolidate project and click OK.

Conclusion

Following the steps in this guide will ensure your music projects include all the necessary assets. You can now safely share or move projects to another computer with minimal-to-no problems. These steps also make it easier to organize, archive, and move projects.

15 Best Transient Shaper Plugins

Tue, 28 May 2019 15:11:00 GMT

What are the best transient shaper plugins? This Icon Picks roundup features 15 versatile transient plugins that will shape your sounds with precision. *This post was updated with new and innovative plugins!

What Is a Transient Shaper?

A transient shaper is an essential mixing tool. These dynamics processing plugins control the transient response and envelope curve of an audio signal. Use them to shape dynamics, remove reverb and mic bleed, add punch, extend the impact of any sound, and more.

Unlike compressors, transient shapers sculpt the attack and sustain of sounds without affecting the level. They can also sharpen or soften the onset of a sound and lengthen or shorten the decay of sounds. This pinpoint accuracy makes it easy to position sounds in the mix.

Typical transient shaper plugins feature three simple controls to process dynamics – attack, sustain, and gain. However, many modern plugins have advanced features that expand their uses. For example, soft-clip limiting, sidechain options, mid-side processing, parallel mix control, saturation, and more. There are even intelligent transient shaper plugins that analyze and process frequencies in innovative ways!

Transient shaping is also a “secret weapon” mixing approach used by some of the world’s top engineers and producers. It is a must-have dynamics effect processor for shaping sounds, controlling presence, and fixing recording problems.

What are Transients?

A transient is a non-tonal short burst of sound that occurs during the initial attack phase of a waveform. This spike in amplitude contains higher frequencies than the harmonic content of the sound. An attack transient also gives a sound its impact. For example, the initial attack sound of a kick drum.

1. oeksound | spiff

Spiff is an adaptive transient processor from the developer of soothe, which is also an impressive plugin. This innovative device can cut or boost transients with detail not possible with other plugins.

Spiff analyzes the incoming signal and applies the processing only on the areas of the signal with transient information. This novel approach reacts only where and when needed while keeping the rest of the signal unaffected. Moreover, it sports an interactive EQ graph and a set of intuitive features.

2. iZotope | Neutron 2 Transient Shaper

Neutron 2 is an innovative mixing and analysis tool. The Transient Shaper module in Neutron 2 offers precision multiband transient shaping. It features three Global Modes: Precise, Balanced, and Loose. It also offers three Contour Shapes: Sharp, Medium, and Smooth. Moreover, it has an auto-learn option that sets the crossover for each frequency band.

3. Sonnox | Oxford Envolution

Envolution is a frequency-dependent envelope shaper with separate transient and sustain sections. These two sections have a set of shaping controls and two modes that target frequencies differently. Envolution also features a Warmth function that adds harmonic richness and a Mix control for parallel processing.

4. SPL | Transient Designer Plus

Transient Designer is a simple and effective transient shaper plugin revered by top engineers. With three controls, you can shape the attack and sustain of any audio source. This versatile plugin also sports a soft-clip limiter that prevents digital clipping when pushing your sounds. It also adds a parallel mix control and sidechain features.

5. Eventide/Newfangled Audio | Punctuate

Punctuate is an adaptive transient shaper plugin included in the Elevate Bundle by Eventide and Newfangled. It uses intelligent algorithms based on the human ear to control up to 26 frequency bands.

Moreover, Punctuate can analyze and alter the gain, speed, and transients of each filter band in real-time. By adapting to the signal, Punctuate can preserve or emphasize transients to avoid squashing your mix or introducing noise artifacts.

6. Native Instruments | Transient Master

Transient Master is an SPL inspired transient shaper plugin. Like the studio classic, it features three easy controls – Attack, Sustain, and Gain. With its soft-clipping limiter, you can also push your sounds into the plugin and use it as a peak clipping tool.

7. Waves | Smack Attack

Unlike traditional transient shapers, Smack Attack lets you control more than attack and sustain levels. It gives pinpoint control over the shape and duration of transients. There’s also a Sensitivity control for selective transient shaping. For example, you can process all your transients, only the loudest ones, or anything between. Smack Attack also sports a user-friendly GUI.

8. Boz Digital Labs | Transgressor

Transgressor is a versatile transient shaper plugin receiving positive reviews. It gives you two EQs: one for the attack and one for sustain. Having control over the gain and tone lets you shape the attack of your sounds with precision. Transgressor also includes an external sidechain function. This feature lets you trigger the EQ and sustain of any sound with an external source.

9. Joey Sturgis Tones | Transify

Transify is a multiband transient shaper plugin that combines four transient designers with three adjustable crossovers. Each band also has a clipping circuit for creating aggressive sounds and preventing peak overages. This flexible tool makes it easy to shape sounds for different frequency ranges!

10. Schaack Audio | Transient Shaper 2

https://youtu.be/4rMqz8Q5yvM

Transient Shaper 2 is another widely used transient shaping plugin. Dial-in quick results with two controls for shaping the attack and release. Version two also brings features such as analog saturation, three Attack shapes, and three Release shapes.

11. Softube | Transient Shaper

Transient Shaper is a dual-band transient processor. You can affect the entire frequency range or the highs and lows separately. Use the selectable slider to choose which frequency band to process. There’s also a crossover frequency control to dial in precise settings. Moreover, Transient Shaper has a soft-clipper that adds output distortion and prevents clipping.

12. Molecular Bytes | AtomicTransient

AtomicTransient is an innovative multichannel polyphonic transient designer plugin. It’s another intelligent processor packed with innovative features.

AtomicTransient offers three separate channels, each with a set of sound-shaping controls. The channels can detect transients or notes from mono and polyphonic instruments and complete mixes. Moreover, you can target specific instruments to either modify or remove entirely from a mix. This versatile plugin can also do a whole lot more.

13. Sonnox | Oxford TransMod v3

TransMod allows you to soften or harden attacks and transients using a few simple controls. It can also add harmonic distortion with its Overdrive feature. Use it to give your track or mix extra loudness, presence, and punch. TransMod also does a good job of increasing or reducing the effects of room ambiance. This transient shaper plugin is simple and effective!

14. Zynaptiq | UNMIX::DRUMS

UNMIX::DRUMS excels at attenuating or boosting drums in mixed music. It can also remove drums from a mix, which is helpful for creating remixes, mashups, and DJ mixes.

UNMIX::DRUMS sports an intuitive multi-level GUI, frequency-dependent controls, a high-precision analyzer display, M/S operation, and a limiter. It also features a sub-bass (re)synthesizer that adds clean and punchy low-frequency energy to your mix or drum track.

15. Mastering The Mix | ANIMATE

ANIMATE helps you inject life into your mixes in a precise, versatile, and colorful way. It’s a multi-effect plugin that offers four movement modes:

Honorable Mentions

There are a lot of excellent transient shaper plugins on the market. It makes it hard to narrow down the best ones. Below are ten more transient shapers worth considering:

1. elysia nvelope by Plugin Alliance
2. Helper Transients by W.A Production
3. Couture by Auburn Sounds
4. TransReckon by eaReckon
5. Transient Shaper by kiloHearts
6. Trans-X by Waves
7. Beatformer by Accusonus
8. Orbit by SoundSpot
9. BitterSweet v3 by Flux
10. MH TransientControl by Metric Halo

What Are Neighboring Rights and How to Collect Them?

Wed, 22 May 2019 15:07:00 GMT

What are neighboring rights royalties? Learn about neighboring rights and how to collect royalties generated internationally from your music.

What Are Neighboring Rights?

Neighboring rights royalties are one of the fastest growing revenue streams in music. Neighboring rights refer to the legal right to perform or broadcast recorded music in public.

Musicians and sound recording owners receive these royalties when their recording is performed or broadcasted on radio, streaming services, new media, TV, in a public place such as a club or restaurant. The rights do not generate royalties for selling music.

Who Can Claim Neighboring Rights Royalties?

Royalties generated from neighboring rights go to the owner of the master recording and the performing artists. The master recording rights owner is typically a record label. And, the performing artists include anyone who made an audible contribution to the recording. For example, singers, instrumentalists, and music producers.

Ownership of the master recording is also typically split 50/50 between the master owner and the performers. However, the performers share gets divided between the featured performer and non-featured performer.

Independent musicians can also collect royalties if they are the master rights owner. There are neighboring rights companies such as Lime Blue Music that provide royalty administration services.

Who Collects Neighboring Rights Royalties?

Neighboring rights collection societies such as PPL (UK) or PPCA (Australia) collect neighboring rights royalties. However, neighboring rights laws differ around the world.

Collect royalties due by registering your master recording with collection societies. Register with your local collection society and the territories where the recording is getting performed or broadcasted in public. It’s also important to register your artist name and music, so collection societies know who to pay.

Currently, the United States does not recognize neighboring rights. For example, U.S. terrestrial radio does not pay royalties on behalf of the master recording. Only recordings created outside of the U.S. are eligible to collect royalties for terrestrial radio. However, services like Sou ndExchan ge collect digital performance royalties from platforms like Pandora, Sirius XM, TV music channels, and other streaming services.

Am I Earning Neighboring Rights Royalties?

The master recording owner and performing artists earn royalties whenever that recording is publicly performed or broadcasted on the media sources below:

Royalties collected in many countries may not reach you. The reason being, neighboring rights laws are different throughout the world. In addition, the processes and distribution are complex, making it difficult to collect them.

If you’re a performing artist on a recording, talk to the record label that released the music getting radio airplay. Ensure the label is collecting these royalties for you! Or, research a trusted neighboring rights administration company.

Neighboring Rights vs. Performance Rights

Neighboring rights are similar to performance rights in music publishing. The reason being, both generate royalties through public performances and broadcasts of music. However, there are differences.

Neighboring rights generate royalties from the master sound recording. The master owner and performing artists own the rights to the master recording. Also, collection societies collect these royalties.

Performance rights generate royalties from the musical composition. Publishers and composers/songwriters own the rights to the composition. Also, Performing Rights Organizations (PROs) collect these royalties.

Conclusion

Collecting neighboring rights royalties can be difficult. However, they provide valuable income for musicians and record labels. Do some research and don’t dismiss this worthwhile revenue stream.

15 Best Vocal Mixing Plugins

Mon, 20 May 2019 17:41:00 GMT

What are the best vocal mixing plugins? This ICON Picks roundup features 15 vocal mixing plugins used by top music producers and engineers.

Best Vocal Mixing Plugins

Vocals are an essential part of a vocal mix. They’re the focal point of a song and require the most attention. However, mixing vocals is challenging. There are endless techniques and tools used for treating vocals.

Listing the best vocal mixing plugins is difficult. There are countless VST plugins that excel at treating vocals. There are also several vocal mixing plugins equally as good at doing a specific task.

To help narrow down the extensive selection, we rounded up 15 vocal mixing plugins widely used by music producers and mix engineers.

1. FabFilter | Pro-Q 3

Fabfilter’s Pro-Q 3 is an excellent digital parametric equalizer. Use it to sculpt your vocals with high accuracy and transparency. This fully-featured EQ sports an impressive Retina interface that offers 24 frequency bands. It also features high-quality phase modes, zero latency, mid/side processing, dynamic EQing, variable stereo placement of EQ bands, an intelligent solo feature, optional Auto Gain, a customizable spectrum analyzer, and more.

Subtractive EQing vocals is a critical step. Equalization fixes problematic frequencies, creates clarity, and adds presence. Parametric equalizers are the best for corrective and surgical EQ work. They can boost or cut frequencies with pinpoint accuracy. They are also the most flexible, have adjustable frequency bands, and are transparent sounding.

2. Maag Audio | EQ4

Several outstanding analog-style EQs can enhance vocals. Choosing the best one is hard. However, this roundup settled on the Maag Audio EQ4. The Maag EQ4 offers it’s legendary ‘Air Band,’ which does a fantastic job at boosting the high end to add color and clarity. You can also boost the ‘Air Band’ to bring the vocals into focus without sounding harsh and unpleasant.

After doing corrective work with subtractive equalization and compression, try shaping the tone of your vocal with additive equalization. Tonal equalization adds presence and character. For example, it’s common to boost the high end of a vocal to add presence in pop and electronic music.

The best way to add presence and shape tone is with an analog modeled EQ. These equalizers add, warmth, presence, punch, character, and sheen to vocals. If you have a dull or buried vocal, try using the Maag EQ4 to put your vocal at the front of the mix.

3. Universal Audio | 1176 Classic Limiter Collection

The UREI/Universal Audio 1176 is one of the most famous and widely used FET limiting amplifiers. It is a fast compressor, capable of taming sharp transients in the vocal. Moreover, it has a desirable sonic character revered by top music producers and engineers. There are also several plugin emulations of iconic 1176. UA and Waves both have 1176 plugins that work excellent on vocals!

Vocals are often the loudest and most forward element in most modern mixes. It’s critical to keep the vocal performance consistent and present in the mix. Compression can smooth out the dynamic range of your vocal to maintain constant levels. It also adds loudness and helps shape the tone of the vocal performance.

It’s often better to apply compression in multiple stages. Rather than using a single compressor with aggressive settings, use multiple compressors with subtle settings. For example, one compressor to control dynamic range and loud peaks. Then, a second compressor to add consistency, shape the tone, and add character. The result sounds more natural and musical.

4. Universal Audio | Teletronix LA-2A Classic Leveler Collection

The Teletronix LA-2A Leveling Amplifier is another legendary analog compressor. Many revere the LA-2A for its smooth, natural, musical compression.

UA’s LA-2A excels at smoothing out vocals to keep dynamic range consistent. The LA-2A also adds punch and a desired musical tone. However, avoid crushing the transients because that will push the vocals further back in the mix.

5. Celemony | Melodyne 4 Studio

Celemony Melodyne is an advanced tool that makes it easy to manipulate pitch, vibrato, timing, envelopes, and formants of audio. Melodyne automatically slices up the waveform of your audio into notes. You can then zoom in on each note to make pinpoint edits. Tuning problematic vocal notes will ensure the recording is perfectly in key with your song.

Melodyne can also do a lot more. You can introduce slight timing and pitch variations to create vocal doubling effects, change individual note volumes, level vocals without compression, sustain or shorten notes, adjust tempo, alter the timbre of voices, and more. Melodyne is also an excellent tool for corrective work on instruments!

Vocal recordings can have timing and pitch imperfections. Pitch correcting noticeable tuning issues will help your vocals sound great. Tuning your vocals will also help them harmonize with other elements in the mix.

6. Slate Digital | Eiosis e2deesser

The Eiosis e2deesser by Slate Digital is an excellent de-eeser plugin. It accurately identifies sibilance in vocal recordings and attenuates them in a natural, transparent way. It can also automatically detect sibilant frequencies and reduce them in the mix. Moreover, the e2deesser sports an elegant display that shows a spectral analysis of the detected sibilants.

Vocal recordings often have a tonal harshness called Sibilance. Sibilance is the “sss” or “ts” sound created by sharp consonants such as S, T, and Z. These consonant sounds can produce harsh resonant peaks. The best way to reduce unpleasant sibilance is with a de-esser plugin. De-essers are specialized compressors that focus on a specific frequency range. They use a combination of equalization and sidechain compression to remove harsh sibilance sounds.

De-essing is not limited to treating vocals. The e2deesser can also tame harsh resonances in drums, mix groups, complete mixes, and other sound sources.

7. FabFilter | Saturn

Countless saturation plugins work excellent on vocals. It’s hard to pick the best one because many are equally as good. This roundup settled on FabFilter’s Saturn because it’s versatile. Saturn can produce several types of saturation and distortion. It’s an all-around saturation plugin!

Saturn offers a range of different high-quality distortion models, inspired by the vintage sound of tubes, tape, and guitar amps. In addition, Saturn features a multiband design with a selection of tone and dynamics controls. Saturn also offers modulation options, XY controllers, envelope followers, and more. This versatile tool excels at adding warmth and definition to anything you run through it!

Applying small amounts of saturation or distortion can fatten up a vocal and help it cut through a busy mix. Saturation adds harmonics, presence, character, warmth, excitement, and cohesion. Also, saturation will make it easier to hear your vocals on small speakers like laptops, earbuds, and phones.

8. FabFilter | Pro-G

FabFilter’s Pro-G is a great noise gate plugin. It offers flexible routing, sidechain and channel linking, metering, and a modern interface. It also features mono, stereo or mid/side processing, and six expander/gate algorithms.

It’s crucial to make sure there are no unwanted noises in the vocal track. Listen for pops and clicks where two vocal clips meet. Also, listen for crackles, humming, and other unwanted background noises.

If there is noise between phrases, cut them out and apply fades on the clip edges. Alternatively, you can use a noise gate plugin to remove unwanted background noise during quiet sections of a recording. Noise gates lower the volume of a signal when it drops below a certain threshold level.

9. Waves | Vocal Rider

Waves Vocal Rider will automatically adjust vocal levels. This plugin saves time by not having to automate each level change or ride faders manually.

Vocal recordings are very dynamic. There are several loud and quiet parts throughout the performance. It’s essential to control the dynamics so the recording stays at a consistent level throughout the mix. Modern standards of production require vocals to be consistent, present, and intelligible.

Controlling vocal dynamics often requires a mixture of volume automation and compression. Using gain automation to create consistency before applying compression is the cleanest and most transparent way to level out the volume of vocals. This technique also eases the load on your compressors.

10. Slate Digital | VerbSuite Classics

VerbSuite Classics is a diverse reverb processor. It captures the evolving and modulating characteristics of ten iconic hardware units. You can’t go wrong with this plugin; it offers 40 years of the industry’s most-used digital reverb processors. Moreover, you get that legendary sound from classic reverbs in a user-friendly plugin build with modern features not found on their hardware counterparts.

Applying subtle amounts of short stereo reverb adds width and depth to the vocal. Reverb can also put a dry vocal in a space, which sounds more natural and helps it sit in the mix better.

Countless reverb plugins sound amazing on vocals. It’s hard to pick the best one because many are equally as good. This roundup settled on VerbSuite Classics by Slate Digital.

11. Soundtoys | EchoBoy

EchoBoy is one of the best echo/delay plugins available! It combines 30 echo styles modeled on iconic vintage gear. It also provides deep editing options and expression tools that let you create any delay sound imaginable. This versatile plugin can even create chorus, reverb, flange, and rhythmic effects. EchoBoy also features various types of analog saturation to give your echoes some attitude. This boy does it all and sounds amazing at the same time!

Applying subtle amounts of stereo delay also adds width and depth to the vocal.

12. Oeksound | Soothe

Soothe is a dynamic resonance suppressor for mid and high frequencies. It does a fantastic job of smoothing out a vocal recording by cleaning up harsh resonances.

Soothe features a dynamic equalizer with self-adjusting frequency bands. Unlike traditional EQs, soothe analyses the signal and adjusts the frequency-wise reduction based on the input. This function saves you from having to notch problematic frequencies manually. Moreover, the reduction kicks in when needed and where needed, without affecting the nearby frequency areas. The result adds detail and presence to your vocals.

13. iZotope | Nectar 3

iZotope’s Nectar 3 offers a sophisticated set of tools designed for vocal production. Address every part of your vocal chain and get professional-sounding vocals in seconds. Nectar 3 is also capable of both corrective and creative processing. It features seven effect modules, automatic preset detection settings, modern workflows, inter-plugin communication, beautiful visualizations, and more.

Consider looking into plugin suites that offer a selection of tools in a single plugin. For some, buying one versatile plugin works just as good as buying multiple vocal mixing plugins that cost more.

14. Waves | Doubler

The Doubler plugin by Waves uses delay and pitch modulation to add width and texture to vocals. Doubler can also create double-tracking, harmonizer and pitch detune effects, chorus effects, and more.

Vocal doubling adds width, fullness, presence, and character to vocals. Doubling vocals and processing them differently also creates captivating vocals. The technique can add emotion, build intensity, and provide excitement during choruses and hooks.

15. iZotope | VocalSynth 2

VocalSynth 2 opens up a world of vocal possibilities. This versatile vocal effect suite gives you five vocal engines, seven effects, and hundreds of presets for manipulating vocals in creative ways. Get lost in layers, textures, effects, blending, and morphing in an experimental vocal playground.

VocalSynth 2 also has interactive visuals. The colorful animations move and grow with the shape of your audio signal. There is a bunch of other cool processing this vocal mixing plugin can do, check it out!

Mix Vocals Like A Pro with These 15 Mixing Tips

Wed, 15 May 2019 18:52:00 GMT

Learn how to mix vocals. This guide offers 15 vocal mixing tips to help you achieve powerful and present lead vocals that cut through the mix.

How to Mix Vocals

Vocals are the most important part of a vocal mix. They are the focal point of a song and require the most attention. However, mixing vocals is challenging. There are endless techniques and tools used for treating vocals.

The genre, tempo, and vibe of a song also play a huge role in determining how to treat the vocals. Moreover, there are different vocal mixing approaches for the various genres and styles of music.

In addition, it’s essential to mix vocals with intention. Knowing how you want your vocals to sound is crucial. Having a direction in mind will help you make accurate mix decisions. Avoid making blind mixing moves.

These 15 suggestive vocal mixing tips will help you achieve professional sounding vocals. Learn how to add clarity, balance, and presence to your vocals with these general mixing tips:

1. Vocal Recording Quality

Working with a high-quality vocal recording that fits your song is crucial. 80% of what makes an excellent vocal mix is having a great sounding vocal. The remaining 20% is mixing. Before any processing, ensure you have quality sounding vocal material.

2. Mix Vocals in Context

Avoid mixing your vocals in solo! The goal is to make your vocals sound good with all the other parts of a song. It will be difficult to make good mixing decisions with your vocals in isolation. It’s also a good idea to bring in your vocal early. Then make your processing decisions based on how they sound in context with everything else!

3. Remove Unwanted Noise

Before applying effects, go through the entire vocal track and make sure there are no unwanted noises. Listen for pops and clicks where two vocal clips meet. Create fades on clip edges or a short crossfade between the clips to remove those noises.

Also, listen for crackles, humming, and other unwanted background noises. If there is noise between phrases, cut them out and apply fades on the clip edges. Alternatively, you can use a noise gate plugin to remove unwanted background noise during quiet sections of a recording. Noise gates lower the volume of a signal when it drops below a certain threshold level.

Last, listen for breath noises, mouth clicks, lip smacks, and plosives. Sometimes these noises sound natural and add character to the recording. However, they can also seem annoying or distracting. Moreover, compression and other processing might emphasize these noises. You can remove or reduce noise by cutting them out or using specialized plugins like iZotope’s RX7 audio repair software. RX7 provides a suite of plugins that make it easy to eliminate unwanted clicks, pops, hum, and noise.

4. Fix Vocal Timing and Tuning

Vocal recordings can have timing and pitch imperfections. If there are noticeable tuning issues, pitch correct any questionable notes with plugins like Celemony Melodyne or Waves Tune Real-Time. After applying pitch correction, bounce the audio to save processing power during mixing.

You can also go through and fix any timing issues. DAWs like Ableton Live and Logic Pro have time-stretching features that make it easy to correct timing issues.

Remember to apply timing and pitch correction in the context of the song, rather than with the vocal isolated!

5. Split the Vocal Across Multiple Tracks

A vocalist will often sing in a different tone or volume for each section of a song. A dynamic vocal performance makes it hard to use the same EQ or compressor setting that works great for every part of a song. For example, a compressor setting that works in the verse may not work as well in the chorus.

A solution to this problem is to split the vocal across multiple tracks. Have a separate vocal track for the verse, chorus, breakdown, etc. This technique will give you more flexibility to treat each vocal track differently.

Moreover, you won’t have to deal with a bunch of complicated or time-consuming automation moves. It also makes it easier to maintain a consistent-sounding overall performance throughout the song.

6. Volume Automation

Vocal recordings are very dynamic. There are several loud and quite parts throughout the performance. It’s essential to control the dynamics so that the recording stays at a consistent level throughout the mix. Modern standards of production require the vocals to be consistent, present, and intelligible.

Try going through the vocal track and automating the volume levels. Apply gain automation by inserting a gain plugin and manually automating the gain control. Or, try using a plugin like Waves Vocal Rider that automatically adjusts vocal levels.

How meticulously you go about this process is up to you. Some like to automate every word, while others prefer to adjust full sections. Either way, the result will give you a consistent performance that won’t require as much processing to cut through the mix.

7. Subtractive Equalization

EQing your vocals is a critical step. Equalization fixes problematic frequencies, creates clarity, and adds presence.

Subtractive EQing cuts unwanted low frequencies and harsh resonances. It’s best to remove problematic frequencies before compression. This way the compressor won’t accentuate those ugly frequencies.

Clean up the Low-End

Cut problematic low frequencies from the vocal with a high pass filter. Try cutting between 100Hz-300Hz depending on the vocal. Do this by ear! Remove enough of the muddiness without making the vocal sound thin.

Cut Harsh Resonant Frequencies

Use the EQ sweep technique to identify unpleasant or nasally sounding frequencies. First, boost a bell curve with a narrow Q using a parametric EQ. Second, slowly sweep up and down the frequency spectrum. Listen for harsh sounding spikes. Next, cut those frequencies by reducing the gain. Repeat the process to create a clean and pleasant sound. Also, be cautious not to go overboard. Too many narrow cuts can cause phase shifting and comb filtering.

8. Vocal Compression

The lead vocal is the loudest and most forward element in most modern mixes. It’s critical to keep the vocal performance consistent and present in the mix. Compression can smooth out the dynamic range of your vocal to maintain constant levels. It also adds loudness and helps shape the tone of the vocal performance.

It’s often better to apply compression in multiple stages. This technique is called ‘serial compression.’ Rather than using a single compressor with aggressive settings, use multiple compressors with subtle settings. The result sounds more natural and musical.

Several compressors work excellent on vocals. Two notable compressors commonly used on vocals are analog emulations of the classic 1176 and LA-2A. Both compressors have different tonal qualities and dynamics handling. However, the compressor and the settings you use depend on how you want your vocal to sound. Here are general compression tips to get you started:

The First Compressor

Use to catch the loudest peaks and to control dynamic range. Set a higher ratio and a harder knee. Then start with faster attack and release times. Adjust both controls to catch only the loudest peaks. 2-3dB of gain reduction during the loudest peaks is common. The compressor should only engage to tame the loudest peaks. Avoid squashing the life out of your vocal. Fast attack times can flatten transients and make your vocal sound lifeless.

The Second Compressor (Optional)

Use to shape the tone and to add character. Set a lower ratio and a softer knee. Then start with slower attack and release times. Next, lower the threshold to get 2-3dB of gain reduction. The goal is to squeeze the vocal’s dynamic range to smooth it out more while also shaping its tone. It’s common to use an analog modeled compressor like an LA-2A to add color and character.

9. Tonal Equalization

After doing corrective work with subtractive equalization and compression, try shaping the tone of your vocal with additive equalization.

Tonal equalization adds presence and character. For example, it’s common to boost the high end to add presence in pop and electronic music.

The best way to shape tone is with an analog modeled EQ , such as the UAD Pultec EQP-1A. Use a high shelf, and start with a 2dB boost at 10kHz. This technique adds excitement and will help the vocals cut through a dense arrangement.

Experiment with the frequency and amount of boost. Try boosting as much as 6dB from anywhere between 6kHz and above 10kHz. Keep it subtle and make sure it doesn’t become too harsh or brittle.

Moreover, be cautious about boosting areas causing frequency conflicts with instruments. If the vocal is competing for the same frequency space, cut a few dBs from the instrument instead of boosting the vocal. This method sounds more natural.

10. Saturation (Optional)

If you’re going for an aggressive sound, try sending the vocal to an aux channel or use parallel processing to apply heavier amounts of saturation. Then blend in the processed channel to taste. Parallel processing is an excellent technique that will give your vocals power and punch without affecting the original sound source. Remember, a little goes a long way!

11. Reduce Sibilance with De-essing

Sibilance is the “sss” or “ts” sound created by sharp consonants such as S, T, and Z. These consonant sounds can produce harsh resonant peaks. Also, compression and high frequency boosting can emphasize sibilance sounds. The best way to reduce unpleasant sibilance is with a de-esser plugin.

De-essers are specialized compressors that focus on a specific frequency range. They use a combination of equalization and sidechain compression to remove harsh sibilance sounds.

Insert a de-esser either before or after the compressor. However, placing the de-esser after the compressor towards the end of the effects chain is common. Next, listen for unpleasant sibilance sounds and set a frequency band to isolate the problematic area. Then, set the threshold to reduce that range when it becomes harsh. The de-esser should only activate during sibilance. If it activates at other times in the song, your threshold is too low.

12. Vocal Reverb (Optional)

Applying subtle, short stereo reverb adds width and depth to the vocal. Reverb can also put a dry vocal in a space, which sounds more natural and helps it sit in the mix better.

Whether you pick reverb or delay to give your vocal some space depends on the style of music and how upfront you want your vocal. Reverb sounds more natural, but it pushes the vocal back further in the mix.

Try applying subtle stereo plate reverb on the vocal to add width, depth, and brightness. Plate reverb has shorter decay times. Shorter decay times work best for avoiding a muddy mix. The reverb should fade out before the next phrase.

If you’re going for a modern vocal that’s upfront in the mix, you may not want the reverb to be noticeable. Start with the shortest decay time possible and a 30-100ms pre-delay to separate the vocal from the reverb. Next, slowly increase the mix control until you notice it. Then back off the mix amount slightly to achieve a safe amount of reverb.

Sending the vocal to an aux channel or using parallel processing is another option. This technique allows you to EQ the reverb before blending the processed channel. It also preserves the vocals punch and presence.

13. Vocal Delay (Optional)

Applying subtle amounts of stereo slapback delay also adds width and depth to the vocal.

Slapback delay is the best way to add space while keeping your vocals upfront in the mix. Slapback delay uses different delay times on the left and right side. A typical slapback delay setup has one side set to 50-200ms and the other side 20-50ms. Then the feedback is set to 0-10%.

Apply the delay effect by slowly increasing the mix control until you notice it. Then back off the mix amount slightly until it sounds right to your ears. Try to have the echoes fade away before the next phrase to avoid muddying up the mix.

Sending the vocal to an aux channel or using parallel processing is another option. This technique allows you to EQ the delay before blending the processed channel. It also preserves the vocals punch and presence.

You can also get creative by automating the delay amount and feedback on certain words or phrases. This technique adds excitement and variation.

14. Additional Effects (Optional)

There are several other ways to mix vocals with effects. The creative decisions are in your hands. Experiment with additional effects like chorus, flanging, pitch shifting, vocal doubling, multiband compression, limiting, and other creative effects.

Automation can also go a long way. Try automating your different effects throughout the vocal performance to add excitement and movement. Or, to emphasize words or phrases. There are countless possibilities!

15. Compare Your Mix with a Reference Track

Reference tracks are professionally mixed and mastered songs you use as a tool to measure your mix against.

Referencing is one of the best and most helpful mixing techniques to learn. Comparing your mix to a commercial ready track will help you achieve pro-sounding mixdowns and masters.

Reference tracks also guide your mix decisions. Quickly switch between your mix and a reference mix to help you identify what your vocals are lacking. This technique is an easy way to reveal problems you may not have noticed.

Conclusion

These suggestive techniques offer a starting point for mixing your vocals. They’re a general guide to help you make more informed mixing decisions. It’s encouraged to experiment. Try changing the order of the plugins and play with different settings. Last, remember not to go overboard. Learning to mix vocals with the least moves and plugins will give you more natural results. Good luck!

Basic Music Theory: Learn the Circle of Fifths

Wed, 01 May 2019 15:53:00 GMT

What is the Circle of Fifths? Learn how to use the Circle of Fifths to understand basic music theory and to improve your songwriting skills.

What is the Circle of Fifths?

The Circle of Fifths is a visual diagram that shows the relationship among the twelve notes of the chromatic scale, associated major and minor keys, and their corresponding key signatures.

Each note displayed around the Circle of Fifths is a perfect fifth apart from another. A perfect fifth interval is the distance of seven semitones. For example, C to G on the circle represents a perfect fifth.

Memorizing the Circle of Fifths can help you understand music theory . It shows how all the musical notes, keys, and chords relate to each other. It’s also an excellent tool that makes it easier to compose or improvise music. For example, the Circle of Fifths helps musicians:

How to Read the Circle of Fifths

Learning how to read the Circle of Fifths will help you understand the relationship between major keys and their relative minor keys. Relative major and minor keys have the same key signatures. This relation means they share the same sharps (shown as #) and flats (shown as♭) in their scales.

The outer section of the circle shows the key signatures and how many sharps or flats are in each key (known as accidentals). The uppercase letters refer to major keys, and the lowercase letters refer to their relative minor keys. These letters also represent the twelve notes in a chromatic scale. However, the notes are not in chronological order. Instead, each note around the circle as you move clockwise is a perfect fifth apart.

The Circle of Fifths starts with C major at the top because it has no sharps or flats. It’s like a “neutral” key. Each key moving clockwise from C major adds a sharp. For example, the next key a fifth above C major is G major. G major has one sharp. Move up another fifth, and you get D major, which has two sharps. If you keep ascending fifths, you’ll visit all twelve notes in the chromatic scale and land back on C major. The minor keys work in the same way, starting with A minor.

The Circle of Fifths can also act as the Circle of Fourths when moving counter-clockwise around the circle. Each note around the circle as you move counter-clockwise is a perfect fourth apart. Also, moving counter-clockwise around the circle adds flats to the key signatures. Whereas moving clockwise around the circle adds sharps.

How To Use The Circle of Fifths

The Circle of Fifths is an excellent tool for learning and applying music theory concepts. Here are five examples:

1. Figure out the Key of a Song

You can quickly figure out what key a song is in with the Circle of Fifths. First, count the number of sharps or flats in the scale. Second, move that many spaces around the circle starting at C.

For example, if you see three sharps (F#, C#, G#) in the scale of a chord progression, start from C and move clockwise three spots. You’ll find that the song is in either A major or F-sharp minor. Similarly, if you see four flats (A♭, B♭, D♭, E♭) in the scale, start at C and move four spots counter-clockwise. That puts the song in either A-flat major or F minor.

2. Figure out Harmonic Relationships

Keys and scales close to each other on the Circle of Fifths are harmonically related because they share common notes. For example, C major and G major have six shared notes in their scales. C major and F major also have six shared notes. While C major and A minor share all seven of the same notes. Because C major and G major are closely related, a move from one to the other sounds smooth and logical. However, moving from C major to F-sharp major would sound jarring and strange. These two scales are further apart on the circle and have only one note in common.

What this also means is if you write a melody in C major, it will work musically with either G major, F major, or A minor. This relationship is why the chord progression (I-IV-V/C-F-G) is so common. The further you move either to the right or left on the circle, the fewer notes the scales have in common. Scales not harmonically compatible increase the chance for clashing melodies or chords.

Knowing which notes, scales, and keys are harmonically compatible will help you build chord progressions, melodies, and baselines easier.

3. Discover What Notes Are in a Chord

Reading the letters as notes is useful for working out which notes form a chord. For example, figure out an A minor chord by first selecting the root note, which is A on the circle. Next, choose the note above in the outer circle and the note one spot to the right of A in the inner circle. You’ll get A-C-E, which is an A minor chord. You can also create a seventh chord by adding the G in the outer circle above the E.

Still confused? Follow these simple formulas:

4. Build Chord Progressions

The Circle of Fifths can also represent chords. The outer circle refers to major chords, and the inner circle refers to their relative minor chords.

The two most essential chords are the root (I) and fifth (V). Music is about tension and release. This interaction is created harmonically with chords that build tension and resolve to chords that provide a release. The simplest and most logical resolution is the movement from V to I in any key. For example, that resolution is E to A in the key of A minor.

With the root chord and the resolving fifth chord figured out, the next step is to fill in the rest of the chord progression. The chords closest to the root chord on the circle will be the best options. The closer two chords are on the circle, the better they will sound together because they share some of the same notes. For example, the chord progression D min / F maj / C maj / A min sounds great. All four chords are clustered together on the circle. Also, the progression starts with the root chord (D min) and resolves on the fifth (A min).

Major and relative minor keys share the same notes, so you’re free to borrow chords and go out of key. Keeping your chord progressions in the same musical orbit also helps the song establish a strong musical context.

Furthermore, chords that share notes makes voice leading easier. Voice leading focuses on the smooth movement of notes from one phrase or chord to the next using common tones. It also minimizes the vertical and horizontal transition between notes in a chord progression or melody. These shorter distances sound more natural and pleasing. They are also easier to play on a keyboard.

5. Harmonic DJ Mixing

Harmonic relationships also apply to DJing! Harmonic mixing is a technique used by DJs all over the world. Mixing songs in the same or related keys sound smooth and pleasing. Also, mixing harmonically compatible songs makes it easier to perform long blends and mash-ups. Moreover, the goal of harmonic mixing is to eliminate key clashes.

Harmonic mixing consists of two parts: knowing the key of every song you play and knowing which keys are compatible. There is an excellent DJ software called Mixed in Key that will detect the key of your songs. It can also label your track titles with the key, BPM, and other helpful info.

Once you know the key of your song, look at the Circle of Fifths to see the closest compatible keys. There’s also another similar chart called the Camelot Wheel.

Whether blending whole songs, samples, vocals, melodies or basslines, harmonic mixing will improve your DJ performances!

Conclusion

The Circle of Fifths adds new context to the way you create and interpret music. Musicians, composers, and DJs use the Circle of Fifths for various reasons. This useful tool helps to understand musical relationships when composing and harmonizing melodies, build chords progressions, modulate to different keys within a composition, and mixing songs harmonically in key with each other.

5 Stages of Music Production: The Process Explained

Mon, 29 Apr 2019 14:01:00 GMT

This guide looks at the five stages of music production. Learning how to manage them will help you navigate the music production process and increase workflow.

5 Stages of Music Production

Every music producer will have their own particular music making process. You’ll develop your own music making process as you practice your craft. However, you’ll find similar processes or stages music producers go through to finish tracks.

Making music involves creative and technical approaches. And, each requires a different mindset. With practice, you’ll learn how to move between the creative and technical mindsets throughout the music production process. The ability to prioritize the two mindsets will help you work more efficiently without losing momentum.

This guide looks at the fundamental stages of the music making process. It gives you an overview of the tasks involved in making music. Learning how to manage them will help you navigate the production stages and increase workflow.

Here are the five stages of the music making process.

1. Composition

The composition stage is the process of generating musical ideas. The composition process involves creating melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic ideas. Choices made in this stage define a songs genre, vibe, and style.

Creating your main melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic ideas at the beginning is crucial. Once you establish the main musical ideas, the songs take shape around them. It also becomes difficult to change the core ideas of a song without affecting other elements later on.

Main Ideas to Focus on During the Composition Stage:

The composition stage is about experimenting with ideas to develop the core elements of your song. Try not to get bogged down with technical aspects like sound design and mixing. The goal is to work fast and generate fundamental elements that work together musically.

2. Arrangement

Music arrangement is the art of taking your musical ideas and laying them out along a timeline to build a final piece of music. When working in Ableton Live , the Arrangement View provides a space to arrange, edit, and finish songs.

The arrangement stage is where you assemble the song structure. You’ll develop the intro, verses, bridge, choruses, breakdowns, and outro. It also involves adding and subtracting different instruments throughout the song to build or reduce tension.

Moreover, a well-arranged song should catch the listeners attention, keep their attention, and evoke emotion. It should also create a sense of flow and momentum. Last, the arrangement must appeal to both the listeners and DJs. A song that’s hard to mix can reduce its appeal and impact.

Check Your Musical Arrangement For:

Remember to keep things simple. Too much going on at the same time can sound jarring and confusing. Also, a cluttered mix causes elements to compete for space. Last, achieving a defined arrangement will make the mixing stage easier.

3. Sound Design and Production

The art of sound design is a cornerstone of electronic music production. The sound design stage involves synthesis, sampling, and sound manipulation using effects and production techniques.

The Sound Design Process

During the sound design process, you’ll create original sounds with various instruments, choose and edit synth presets, make sample choices, manipulate samples, layer sounds, use a combination of effects and editing techniques, and more.

It’s generally easier to work on sound design after arranging all the parts. Having the parts arranged first helps you hear everything in context. It’s also easier to make sound choices when all the parts play together.

Working on sound design after arrangement will also reduce the chance of replacing sounds that no longer work in the mix. Your sound choices may not sound good after arrangement if you work on sound design early in the music production process.

Moreover, sound design is an area that can bog down a music producers workflow. The sound design process can also take hours, days, and even weeks. For this reason, many music producers work on sound design in separate sessions. Some find it more enjoyable without the limitations of an arranged song.

The Production Process

The production process is the final stage before focusing on mixing. It may consist of various techniques, such as:

Sound design and production is the final stage before mixing. Make sure everything sounds good before moving to the mixing stage. It will be frustrating if you have to stop mixing to fix something missed during the previous stages.

4. MIXING

Mixing is the process of blending and balancing multiple audio tracks into a cohesive mix. Mastering is the final stage of the music production process, where the mixed audio is prepared for distribution and playback on various platforms. To prepare the final mix for mastering:

Balance your mix: Ensure your mix is well-balanced, with each element sitting well in the mix. This involves adjusting the levels of each track so that no single element overpowers the others.
Check your levels: Verify that your mix is at the optimal level for mastering. Avoid clipping and ensure there is enough headroom for the mastering engineer to work with.
Use EQ and compression: Apply EQ and compression to enhance the sound and control dynamics. EQ can help you shape the tonal balance, while compression can control the dynamic range.
Add depth and width: Use reverb, delay, and other effects to add depth and width to your mix. These effects can create a sense of space and dimension, making your mix sound more immersive.
Make a stereo mix: Create a stereo mix of your final mix, ready for mastering. Ensure that the stereo image is balanced and that all elements are placed correctly in the stereo field.

By following these steps, you’ll be able to prepare a well-balanced and polished mix, ready for the final mastering stage. This will ensure that your music sounds great on all playback systems and platforms.

10 Mixing Mistakes That are Easy to Fix

Creating a Three Dimensional Mix

Professional mixes also create the illusion of three dimensions: width, depth, and height. Placing sounds in their own space also gives your mix greater perceptual volume, clarity, and fullness. For example:

Width refers to the stereo field and the panning placement of sounds in the mix. Panning elements left and right in the mix creates stereo width.

Depth refers to the front and back placement of sounds in the mix. For example, elements that are louder, brighter, or dry sound upfront in the mix. Conversely, sounds that are quieter, duller, or processed with time-based effects like reverb sound further back in the mix.

Height refers to the high and low frequencies in the mix. Our ears perceive higher tones as coming from above, and lower tones coming from below. Think of high-frequency content as “up” and low-frequency content as “down.” It also represents the tonal balance of the overall mix.

Mixing throughout the previous stages is ok. However, your final mixdown should come before mastering. This is your last chance to address any issues and get everything sounding great.

Read: 5 Ways to Increase Perceived Loudness . This guide outlines five methods musicians use to boost the perceived loudness of sounds and achieve a more balanced mix.

5. Mastering

Audio mastering is the final step in the music production process. It’s the post-production process of taking an audio mix or album and preparing it for distribution.

The mastering stage involves a series of subtle audio processes including equalization, compression, saturation, stereo enhancement, and limiting. The purpose of mastering is to balance the stereo mix, make all the elements sound cohesive, and to reach commercial loudness. It also ensures playback optimization across all speaker systems and media formats.

TIPS FOR ELECTRONIC MUSIC PRODUCTION

Electronic music production involves creating music using electronic instruments, software, and equipment. Here are some tips to help you improve your electronic music production skills:

Develop your music theory skills: Understanding music theory will help you create more cohesive and engaging electronic music. Knowledge of chord progressions, scales, and song structure can greatly enhance your musical ideas.
Experiment with sound design: Sound design is a crucial aspect of electronic music production. Experiment with different sounds and techniques to create unique textures and timbres. This can involve using synthesizers, samplers, and various effects.
Use reference tracks: Reference tracks can help you stay focused and inspired during the music production process. They provide a benchmark for the quality and style you aim to achieve.
Collaborate with others: Collaborating with other electronic music producers can help you learn new techniques and gain new insights. It can also lead to creative breakthroughs and fresh perspectives on your music.
Practice regularly: Regular practice will help you develop your skills and improve your music production workflow. The more you practice, the more proficient you will become in using your tools and techniques.

By following these tips, you’ll be able to improve your electronic music production skills and create high-quality music that showcases your unique style and sound.

Email Marketing for Musicians: How to Build a Mail List

Wed, 24 Apr 2019 14:01:00 GMT

What is email marketing for musicians? Learn how to use email marketing to grow your fan base, promote your music, and boost your music career.

Why Should Musicians Use Email Marketing?

One of the best promotional strategies for musicians is email marketing. Email marketing allows you to connect with your fans and followers directly. Email is also the most effective way to get your fans to take action!

Social media is also a primary marketing tool for musicians. However, it’s harder to reach all your fans through social media. Your message gets buried in all the noise, you’re fighting for attention against the competition, and platforms restrict post reach. Plus, your fans are more likely to see an email before a social media post.

It’s also essential for musicians to connect with their fans regularly. That’s why it’s vital to build an email list of fans you can reach and engage with directly. Moreover, email marketing is an effective way to promote your brand, announce new releases, tour dates, merch, music videos, and other important news.

However, maintaining an email marketing campaign can be challenging. Here are email marketing tips for musicians.

1. Email Marketing Services for Musicians

Before you collect emails, you must first choose an email marketing platform. Email marketing services provide features that collect and manage email lists, send bulk emails, collect analytics, support integrations, and provide other emailing tools. Many also offer newsletter templates and an integrated editor to customize professional-looking email campaigns.

There are various email marketing services. It’s important to choose one that offers the email marketing features that meet your needs. Here are five email marketing services for musicians:

1. HubSpot
2. Mailchimp
3. ActiveCampaign
4. FanBridge
5. AWeber

There are a ton of other benefits of using an email service instead of your personal email account. We encourage you to research the various benefits and email marketing features.

2. How to Build an Email List?

Once you choose an email marketing service, start building your email list. There are several strategies for collecting email addresses. Here are five ways to collect email addresses:

Add an Email Signup Form to Your Music Website

An email signup form on your music website provides visitors with a quick, convenient way to subscribe to your list. Embedded opt-in email forms are also easy to add to a site and are proven to work.

Make your email signup form stand out so your visitors will notice it. For example, embed the signup form in a prominent area on your site that’s visible on all pages. Or, create a pop-up form your visitors will immediately see once they visit your site.

Moreover, add an effective ‘call-to-action’ that will persuade people to submit their email to your list. Also, tell fans what they get for opting in. A generic “signup to my newsletter” will not convince anyone to subscribe. List benefits like regular music updates, tour dates, exciting news, and other exclusive surprises.

Finally, keep the email signup form simple. The easier it is to fill out, the more subscribers you’ll get. A name and email address will suffice.

Offer Incentives for Email Addresses

Persuade people to give their email in exchange for an exclusive incentive. Offer a free music download, discount on merch, exclusive access to content, etc.

In addition, your email signup form will perform better if you reward fans for subscribing to your email list. Also, most email marketing services offer an autoresponder feature that will deliver details about the exclusive offer.

Collect Emails in Person at Gigs

Print out a mailing list signup sheet and place it on your merch table. After the show, add the email addresses to your mailing list and email your new subscribers thanking them for coming out.

Also, don’t place the list at your table and hope for signups. Offer an incentive in exchange for emails like a discount on merch, free stickers, or a button. Moreover, encourage fans to sign up for your mailing list on stage during your set.

How to Build a Fan Base for Your Music

Use Social Media to Grow Your Email List

Social media is a valuable asset for musicians. A strong social media presence is essential for promoting your music, engaging with fans, and expanding your fan base. Having an effective social media strategy also connects you with music industry peers and presents new opportunities.

Utilize Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, SoundCloud, YouTube, and other platforms to connect with fans. Leverage your social media accounts to collect emails with these tips:

There are several other ways to use social media to grow your email list. We encourage you to research different strategies. The key is to grow your social media following, and then convert those followers into email leads.

Start a Music Blog or Podcast

Posting quality content to a music blog is a sure way to attract visitors and grow your email list. Engaging and informative content also gets fans visiting your website regularly.

Every blog article or podcast you post is also an opportunity to promote your mailing list and brand. Moreover, encourage fans to sign up for your email list with a call-to-action.

How to Get Your Music Featured on Blogs

3. Email Marketing Best Practices

Like any email, the golden rule is to keep them simple, concise, straight-to-the-point, and polite. Below are best practices:

Conclusion

Your email list is like an official fan club. Email marketing is an effective way to connect with fans, promote your brand, and stay relevant in the music industry. To emphasize, email marketing is an essential promotional strategy that will boost your music career. Good luck!

7 Low End Mixing Tips That Will Improve Your Music

Wed, 17 Apr 2019 16:06:00 GMT

Learn how to tighten the low end of your mix with these five mixing tips. These basic mixing techniques will help you achieve punch, clarity, and presence.

How To Mix The Low End of Your Song

The low end of a song acts as the foundation of your mix. It is the support system for all other elements. The decisions you make while mixing the low end may make or break your song.

These five suggestive mixing techniques will help you achieve a clear and punchy foundation for your mix. Learn how to add punch, clarity, balance, and presence with these tips:

1. Cutting Unnecessary Frequencies

Cutting useless sub frequencies from other instruments is an excellent place to start when trying to achieve a defined low end. Using a high pass filter, go through all the elements in the mix and cut sub frequencies that could conflict with the kick and bass.

Various sounds in your song could have subsonic frequencies you can’t hear. These “extra frequencies” don’t contribute to the timbre of a sound. Also, a build-up of these low frequencies can create muddiness, phase cancelation, and other problems in your mix. Keeping the low end clear of this useless rumble is crucial. The goal is to leave room for your low-frequency sounds. Low-end elements include the kick, sub bass, main bass sounds, and 808s.

To combat problematic frequencies, apply a low-cut filter on sounds that are not part of the low end. Where you cut depends on the song and the sounds. I like to low cut frequencies anywhere from 60hz – 120hz . However, cut with caution. Cutting too many frequencies on each sound/track can make your song lose body and feel weak. Also, use both your ears and spectrum analyzers. Ensure your cutting problematic frequencies without sacrificing the impact of your song. Reference if need be and don’t forget to toggle your subwoofer on and off as you mix.

Also, the kick and bass can generate useless rumble. Try cutting anywhere below 40 Hz to tighten up either sound. You may be surprised how much louder the mix will sound after removing frequencies that don’t contribute to the song.

Moreover, keep in mind each EQ will sound different. I’d recommend using something passive like FabFilter’s Pro-Q3 . It also has a linear-phase option that helps reduce phase problems when cutting frequencies.

2. Check the Low End in Mono

Checking your mix in mono is vital. Listening to your low end in mono helps identify issues with the stereo image, phasing, volume, clarity, and more. Mixing in mono also helps ensure your mix translates on mono speaker systems.

Another good trick is to use Ableton Live’s Multiband Compressor on your master (or any multiband compressor). Then, solo the low band so you can hear everything playing in the low end. This will act as a low pass filter so you can focus on the low end without getting distracted by the stereo imaging some sounds may have. It also helps you identify problems. For example:

Song Finishing Checklist: 10 Ways to Finish Your Mix

3. Kick and Bass Correlation

The kick and bass are among the two most essential elements in electronic music. Careful attention to kick and bass relationships is crucial!

Kick and bass correlation is challenging and often overlooked. These general mixing tips will help tighten your kick and bass:

Mono the Kick and Lower Bass Frequencies

Having low frequencies in mono retains punch, helps avoid phasing, and allows the low end to translate on mono speaker systems. Also, low frequencies carry a lot of energy and will occupy more space in a mix than higher frequencies. Centering them clears space for elements with stereo information.

Sidechain the Kick to Your Bass

Sidechaining drops the bass volume every time the kick strikes. This technique will allow the kick to come through the mix more clearly and will give it more of an impact. Sidechaining is also the best way to avoid phasing and frequency masking between the two.

Also, use a short ghost kick trigger. I like to shorten the kick tail to make the sidechain compressor react faster. I also like dialing in the sidechain compression with a multiband compressor on the master. For example, try soloing the low band and then increase the release on the sidechain compressor to hear how the sub is communicating with your kick.

Last, try sidechaining with a multiband compressor. Plugins like Waves F6 and FabFilter’s Pro-MB can sidechain a specific frequency band. For example, duck only the low end of your bass every time the kick strikes instead of lowering the entire bass. This technique will also reduce sidechain pumping which sounds more natural.

Identify the Dominate Sound

Know which instrument is your lead. Choose which sound will be the deepest one in your mix. For example, if your kick is more dominant than your bass, then cut the lows out of your bass enough to let the kick fill in those low-end frequencies. Conversely, if the bass is the main focus, have the kick knock higher to avoid frequency conflicts.

You can also transpose the kick if it is conflicting with the bass. For instance, try transposing the kick to the 5th (seven semitones higher). This move adds separation while also staying in key.

Check the Kick and Bass Length

Pay attention to the size of your kick and bass. For example, long kick tails can interfere with a busy bassline. Focus on creating a contrast between the kick and bass. For instance, pair a short kick with long or deep bass notes. Conversely, if your bass notes are spread out, try using a boomy kick to fill in the space. This technique helps to reduce frequency masking conflicts. It also allows the kick and bass to groove better.

Check for Frequency Masking

Frequency masking between the kick and bass causes several problems. Use an analyzer or solo the kick and bass to identify conflicting frequency areas.

Fix frequency masking with an EQ or sidechain compression. For example, if you boost the kick fundamental with an EQ, try cutting that same frequency from the bass to reduce masking.

4. Compare Your Mix with a Reference Track

Reference tracks are professionally mixed and mastered songs you use as a tool to measure your mix against.

Referencing is one of the best and most helpful mixing techniques to learn. Comparing your mix to a commercial ready track will help you achieve pro-sounding mixdowns and masters.

Reference tracks also guide your mix decisions. Quickly switch between your mix and a reference mix to help you identify what’s lacking in your low end. This technique is an easy way to reveal problems you may not have noticed.

How to Use Reference Tracks to Improve Your Mixes

5. Post Processing Techniques

These mixing techniques will give your bass even more character. They will also help your low end translate on different speaker systems.

Arrangement

Remember contrast is key. Sometimes the arrangement of your kick and bass can cause problems. For example, having a heavy bass play the entire time without breaks will make your song lose its impact. Also, try using your sub bass sparingly and get creative with bringing it in and out throughout your song. This method keeps your song interesting.

If you’re still struggling to nail a fat and powerful low end, then reevaluate the composition. Having a kick play with your sub or 808 bass will make low-end management difficult. When all else fails, try changing up the bassline pattern or swap out the kick.

Saturation

I always recommend coloring your bass and sub with saturation. Saturation adds presence, character, warmth, edge, and cohesion. Also, saturation will make it easier to hear your bass on small speakers like laptops, earbuds, and phones.

Moreover, try adding parallel saturation with Ableton Live’s “rectifier” preset or FabFilter’s Saturn. Parallel processing is an excellent technique used to give sounds power and punch without affecting the original sound source.

Chorus

Chorus is a fun tool to give your bass more character and stereo width. If you’re trying to achieve an analog sound, applying some slight chorus on your bass can mimic that imperfect analog sound. However, be cautious using chorus on the sub and lower bass. Applying stereo width to low frequencies can reduce punch and clarity.

Limiting

Limiting is very important. It helps level out all the notes to make them play at a consistent level. It also adds perceived loudness and power. I recommend limiting your bass on the track itself as well as parallel limiting to beef up your bass.

Conclusion

When creating and mixing, always keep your low end in the back of your head. The goal is to have a tight and centered low end. Avoid any bleed from the beginning, and figure out your kick and bass correlation early on. Doing so will help your session run smoothly. Finally, when in doubt, use your ears!

10 Best Audio Interfaces Under $1,000

Mon, 15 Apr 2019 16:52:00 GMT

What are the best audio interfaces? This Icon Picks roundup features ten pro sounding audio interfaces under $1,000. It also offers buying tips and considerations.

Why Audio Interfaces are Important

An audio interface is an essential piece of gear for any music recording studio or mobile musician. However, there are a variety of high-quality studio interfaces available. It can become overwhelming weighing the differences between options and knowing which features best fits your needs. There are different input and output configurations, connection types, formats, and other options to consider.

To help narrow down the extensive selection, we rounded up ten pro sounding audio interfaces. This buyers guide will help you choose the best audio interface for an affordable price.

What is an Audio Interface?

An audio interface is the hub of a modern recording studio. It connects your studio monitors, headphones, microphones, instruments, and other gear to your computer. They also provide high-resolution audio A/D and D/A conversion for music production and DJing.

For example, an audio interface converts analog signals from a microphone or instrument into digital audio signals your computer can process. This audio conversion also performs the same process in reverse. Digital audio signals from your computer convert into analog signals heard through your studio monitors or headphones.

Many audio interfaces also provide preamps, metering, and other features for recording or tracking audio.

Features to Consider When Buying an Audio Interface

Understanding how audio interfaces work, and the various features will help you make an informed buying decision.

Input/Output (I/O)

The number of inputs and outputs you need depends on your set up. For example, at least two balanced line outputs are necessary to connect studio monitors. If you DJ with a computer, consider an audio interface with four line outputs. Two outputs that connect to the house sound system, and two outputs to cue songs. The number of inputs also depends on how many devices you want to connect and record simultaneously.

Common Audio Interface I/O:

Audio Interface Type

Computer Connection Type

Choose an audio interface compatible with your computer’s data ports. Connect your computer to the interface with USB, USB-C, Thunderbolt, Firewire, PCIe or Ethernet.

Audio Latency

Latency is also an important consideration if you work with multiple plugins and high tracks counts. Latency is a delay caused by the time it takes audio to pass from the audio interface through your DAW and then back out. It takes time to convert and process the audio. Faster connection types will give you better performance.

Bit Depth and Sample Rate

The sample rate and bit depth define sound quality and resolution.

Additional Considerations

Other features to look for are metering and included software packages. Newer audio interfaces also integrate software control and onboard DSP for mixing. Digital signal processing (DSP) provides integrated software mixers, audio effects, and monitoring. This technology reduces latency and CPU load.

1. Universal Audio | Apollo Twin MkII DUO

Apollo Twin MkII is a 10-in/6-out desktop Thunderbolt audio interface. It packs console functionality into a compact desktop unit. The new redesign brings two Unison enabled mic preamps and next-generation audio conversion used in their flagship Apollo interfaces. You also get access to the full range of UA’s DSP Powered Plugins . Mix with authentic analog emulations of iconic vintage recording gear!

2. Focusrite | Scarlett 2i4 (2nd Generation)

The Scarlett 2i4 is a compact 2-in/4-out USB audio interface. This second-generation Scarlett brings new upgrades. It features super-low latency, improved sample rates, enhanced sound quality, and more. Also, the industrial redesign gives you metal volume controls, and a sleeker red metal chassis built to go anywhere.

3. Audient | iD14

The Audient iD14 is a compact 10-in/4-out desktop USB audio interface. It sports two Class A mic preamps, Burr-Brown converter technology, console-style monitor control, and a JFET direct input. Also onboard is Audient’s ScrollControl mode. This virtual scroll wheel gives you control over compatible parameters within your DAW. Moreover, it delivers the high-quality sound of a large console in a compact desktop unit.

4. RME | Babyface Pro

The Babyface Pro is a portable 12-in/12-out USB audio interface. This road-ready interface offers a low-profile aluminum casing, two high-quality mic preamps, two analog XLR outs, hi-Z, and lo-Z 1/4″ inputs, ADAT/SPDIF I/O, a MIDI port, and two separate headphone outputs. Also included is RME’s TotalMix FX software mixer, which gives you access to audio effects and routing. This unit is pricey, but it’s also possibly the best mobile interface on the market!

5. Native Instruments | Komplete Audio 2

KOMPLETE AUDIO 2 is a new USB audio interface designed for the studio or the stage. This compact desktop interface is worth considering for those on a budget. It’s lightweight, affordable, and offers essential connections. The KOMPLETE AUDIO 2 also comes with Native Instruments’ Maschine Essentials, Komplete Start, the Monark synth, an effects suite, and Ableton Live 10 Lite.

6. Apogee | Element 24

The Element 24 is a streamlined 10-in/12-out desktop Thunderbolt audio interface. It features two front-panel combo inputs, two rear-panel balanced XLR outputs, a stereo headphone out, and word clock I/O. Two of Apogee’s world-class mic preamps are also onboard, with selectable phantom power. Moreover, it comes with Apogee’s Element Control software. You can control the interface from your Mac or wirelessly with an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch.

7. IK Multimedia | AXE I/O

The AXE I/O is a compact 2-in/5-out desktop USB audio interface. Its design and features focus on recording guitarists. But it also works excellent for any music production set up. This versatile interface also has controller capabilities not found on other audio interfaces. Moreover, the AXE I/O is a fully-featured audio interface. It offers innovative features, tonal shaping controls, a variety of instrument input circuits, amp functions, a built-in tuner, and more. It also comes with AmpliTube 4 Deluxe software suite, T-RackS, and Ableton Live Lite.

8. PreSonus | Studio 26c

The Studio 26c is a portable 2-in/4-out desktop USB-C audio interface. It’s ideal for DJs, mobile musicians, and electronic musicians. It features mic/line/instrument inputs, DC-coupled line outputs, MIDI I/O, and a Cue Mix A/B button for DJs. The Studio 26c also comes with PreSonus’ award-winning Studio One Artist music production software.

9. Behringer | U-Phoria UMC404HD

The U-Phoria UMC404HD is an affordable 4-in/4-out desktop USB audio interface. This rugged interface is perfect for the studio or the stage. First, it incorporates MIDAS designed mic preamps. MIDAS has a long history of innovation and leadership in the world of audio mixing consoles. Second, it’s impact-resistant metal chassis, and Monitor A/B source select for DJ-style cueing makes it ideal for the road. Last, the U-Phoria UMC404HD comes with audio recording, editing, and podcasting software. It also includes 150 instrument/effect plugins.

10. Steinberg | UR-RT2

The UR-RT2 is a compact 4-in/2-out desktop USB audio interface. First, it gives you legendary Neve sound in a budget-friendly interface. The switchable Rupert Neve Designs transformers on the front inputs deliver a musical sound with rich harmonics. This feature is beneficial for vocals, acoustic guitar, and other instruments with an expressive dynamic range. It also offers studio-quality sound and a variety of I/O options for mobile musicians.

Honorable Mentions

There is a lot of excellent audio interfaces on the market. It makes it hard to narrow down the top ten. Below are ten more affordable audio interfaces worth considering:

1. Universal Audio Arrow
2. Focusrite Scarlett 2i2 (2nd Generation)
3. Focusrite Clarett 4Pre
4. Apogee Duet
5. Audient iD4
6. Audient Sono
7. IK Multimedia iRig Pro Duo
8. Arturia AudioFuse
9. Steinberg UR22mkII
10. MOTU UltraLite-mk4

808 Mixing Tips: How to Get Fat and Powerful 808 Bass

Wed, 03 Apr 2019 15:11:00 GMT

Learn how to mix 808’s! These mixing tips will help get your 808 bass sounding fat, powerful, and punchy on various speaker systems.

How The Roland TR-808 Revolutionized Music

Few instruments have influenced music and music culture like Roland’s legendary TR-808 drum machine. Its iconic drum sounds have transcended musical styles, defined genres, and attracted a global fan following. The 808 has even inspired a tribute celebration day around the world on August 8th (8/08) .

The TR-808 is most famous for its big, booming bass drum. The renowned 808 kick drum is a staple in hip hop, techno, trap, pop, and other modern music productions.

However, mixing the 808 is challenging. Getting an 808 to cut through a mix is difficult. It competes with the kick and bass, causes various mix problems, and even disappears on small speakers.

These mixing tips will help get your 808 bass sounding fat, powerful, and punchy on all speaker systems.

1. 808 Sample Selection

Choosing a quality 808 sample that works with your song is crucial. 90% of what makes an excellent sounding 808 is selecting the best sample. Look for clean and punchy samples that have a consistent body. It will be easier to process and shape them to fit with other elements in the mix. Numerous sample packs offer a variety of 808 sounds to accommodate any genre.

You also have the option to synthesis 808 sounds. The foundation of an 808 is a sine wave with a fast attack envelope assigned to the pitch. Xfer Serum is an excellent choice for synthesizing 808’s. It offers several features to shape and modulate unique sounding 808’s. There are also dedicated 808 instrument plugins such as KICK 2, New Era 808, BazzISM, BD-808, and many others.

Either way, it’s essential you choose or create the best 808 sound to use as a starting point. Composing a track around a weak or insufficient 808 will cause problems later on.

2. Tune 808’s

808’s are tonal and have defined pitches that correspond to notes on the musical scale. When choosing an 808, think about its relation to the key of your song. Tuning the 808 to the key of your song will help it sit better in the mix. A tuned 808 also harmonizes with the kick, bass, chords, and other melodic parts.

Tune your 808 by first determining the key of your song. Then identify the fundamental note of the 808 using a spectrum analyzer or Ableton Live’s Tuner. Next, transpose your 808 to a pitch that sounds good with the key of your song. This pitch is typically the root note of the scale. For example, if your song is in the key of F minor, then the root note will be F.

How to Perfectly Tune Drums in Ableton Live

Root Vs. Fifth

Tuning the 808 to a fifth (+7 semitones) above the fundamental note is another effective technique. This method is useful when the kick and 808 fight to occupy the same frequency range. The fifth separates the two elements while allowing them to play in harmony.

3. Layer 808 Bass with a Kick Drum

Layering a punchy top kick sample over your 808 will help it cut through the mix. However, careful attention to the kick and 808 bass relationship is crucial. Moreover, getting the kick and 808 bass to sit right in the mix can be challenging.

The biggest issue with layering the kick and 808 bass is that they both dominate the same frequency ranges. A buildup of low frequencies causes clarity issues, phasing problems, and headroom loss. An untreated low-end will also cause your mix to lose punch, presence, and level. Put simply, masking or overlapping low frequencies are problematic.

The goal is to shape the kick and 808 bass so they can co-exist in the same frequency ranges. You want separation between the two sounds while also creating one cohesive sound. This challenge involves creating separation with either clip fades, equalization, or sidechain compression.

Kick and Bass Mixing Tips

Create Separation with Clip Fades

An ideal mix will have the kick transient hit first, and then the 808 bass fades in. However, blending the two should sound like one seamless bass sound.

Create this separation with clip fades. Start by bouncing both your kick and 808 into audio files. Next, reduce the attack of the 808 with a clip fade. Then, reduce the kick’s tail with a clip fade. The 808 should fade in as the kick decays.

Use both your eyes and ears in this process to make sure the attack of the 808 doesn’t interfere with the kick. The kick should cut through, while still having a seamless blend.

This method is often better than using sidechain compression. It allows you to visually compare the volume levels and waveforms to create a more precise mix.

Create Separation with Sidechain Compression

Sidechain compression creates separation by quickly reducing the volume of the 808 when the kick plays. This method gives the kick drum space to punch through the mix.

Sidechaining involves using a compressor that temporarily reduces the volume of a sound. Achieve this technique by loading a compressor on the 808 track. Then, choose the kick or another percussive sound as the external trigger source. Next, adjust the attack and release controls to balance the mix. Most DAWS have native compressor devices with sidechaining features.

4. Apply Multiband Distortion

Make sure your 808’s translate on small speakers that can’t reproduce lower frequencies like earbuds, laptops, and phones. Applying various harmonic enhancement like distortion, saturation, and bit-crushing will give the 808 presence. It also adds character, warmth, edge, cohesion, and more.

The best way to apply distortion is with multiband effects processing. Multiband processing is an effective technique used in sound design, mixing, and mastering. Splitting the frequency spectrum into independent and adjustable bands allows you to process those isolated frequencies with more control.

The goal is to process the mid and high frequencies while keeping the low-end clean. This method gives you a powerful sub that translates on mono speaker systems and enhanced harmonics that help define the 808’s character.

There are several approaches to applying multiband distortion. For example, you can create a multiband effects processing rack in Ableton Live and apply different distortion amounts to separate bands. Or, use distortion effect plugins that have multiband capabilities, such as FabFilter Saturn and iZotope Trash.

Last, experiment with different distortion and saturation plugins on the separate bands. For example, try bit-crushing the high band and saturating the mid band.

You can also apply other effects and mixing techniques. For example, mono the low band, apply a tube amp to the mids, and add stereo width and compression to the highs. The creative decisions are in your hands!

Ableton Live Parallel Processing Tips

5. Equalization

Cutting unnecessary sub frequencies from other instruments is a good place to start when trying to achieve a defined low-end. Using a high pass filter, go through all the elements in the mix and cut the low frequencies that conflict with the kick and 808.

Next, cut problematic sub frequencies from the kick and 808 with a high pass filter. Useless sub rumble takes up headroom, causes clarity issues, and other problems. Try cutting anywhere below 40 Hz to tighten up either sound. Conversely, if there is a lot of unnecessary or conflicting high-end energy, try cutting anywhere above 10 kHz with a low pass filter. You may be surprised how much louder and punchy the mix will sound after removing frequencies that don’t contribute to the sound.

Last, apply subtractive equalization where it’s needed. For example, use an EQ to create more separation between the kick and 808 if the kick isn’t cutting through. Or, carve out space for other elements in the mix with conflicting frequencies. For instance, other bass sounds, the snare, etc.

Moreover, use an EQ to sweep the frequency spectrum of the 808 to identify harsh resonances and unpleasant frequencies. Boost a bell curve with a tight Q and listen for harsh areas. Then cut those frequencies. Repeat the process to create a more pleasant sound.

Finally, apply additive equalization if you want to emphasize tones. For example, fundamental tones and other musical overtones. Analog-modeled EQ’s are ideal for tonal work and sweetening. These EQ’s capture the warmth, character, and sound of vintage hardware equalizers. They also excel at emphasizing or attenuating certain frequency bands in a broad, musical manner to achieve clarity and punch.

Digital vs. Analog Modeled EQ’s

6. Arrangement and 808 Length

Another crucial decision to consider with the 808 is its length. For example, short 808’s can leave space in a song that feels empty or less interesting. Conversely, long 808’s can have overlapping notes or tones that mask other elements and muddy up the mix. A build-up of unwanted low-end clutter will rob the mix of punch and energy.

Furthermore, consider the placement of your 808’s. It’s essential your 808’s groove with the drums. If you’re working with audio, cut the tails to make space for other elements and to allow the low-end breath. Also, use clip fades to make the 808 decay smoothly. And, if you’re working with midi, shorten the notes, and adjust the decay and release controls.

Giving your 808’s space, and making room for elements like the kick and snare will give your song a stronger groove. It also adds clarity and space that will make your 808 sound fatter and present. These moves also sound more interesting than an 808 that continually plays without breaks.

If you’re still struggling to nail a fat and powerful 808, then reevaluate the composition. Having the main kick play with an 808 bass or a sub will make low-end management difficult. When all else fails, try changing up the bassline rhythm or swap out the kick. You can also try playing the 808 an octave or fifth higher (+7 semitones).

7. Optional 808 Processing

Creating punchy and powerful 808’s is a multistep process that may need additional processing. Below are optional methods to enhance your 808 bass further.

Applying Additional Effects

Several audio effects on the market will enhance 808’s. One example is Renaissance Bass by Waves. R-Bass delivers richer, deeper lows that sound great on any speaker system.

Octave Layering

Layering a copy of the 808 one octave higher adds character to the sound. First, duplicate the 808 track. Next, process the new top layer. Transpose the top 808 up one octave. Add a clip fade to remove the attack, so it doesn’t conflict with the original 808. Then, use a high pass filter to cut conflicting low frequencies below 120 Hz. Last, apply additional effects if needed to change its character.

Multiband Compression

Applying multiband compression can give your 808 presence and energy. Multiband compression will also glue your kick and 808 layers. This move makes the two separate sound unified, cohesive, and balanced.

Multiband compression is an advanced form of compression. A multiband compressor splits the frequency spectrum into separate bands. Each frequency band also has dedicated compression settings. Applying different amounts of compression to the separate frequency ranges gives you more control.

Multiband Compression Tips

Conclusion

There are no rules to creating fat 808 basses. These guidelines offer suggestions to help you get closer to creating powerful and punchy 808’s.

How To Get Noticed By a Music Booking Agent

Mon, 01 Apr 2019 17:41:00 GMT

Learn how to get noticed by a music booking agent. This guide explains the importance of a booking agent. It also offers tips on how to get noticed by a booking agency.

How to Get the Attention of a Booking Agent

Artists who commit to making a career in music will reach a point where it becomes time to consider a booking agent. This decision can be an important step in taking their music career to the next level.

Booking shows and organizing tours is a vital part of being a performing musician today. Playing live is also essential if you want to be a successful musician. Getting signed by a reputable booking agency or hiring a booking agent can launch your music career. A booking agent can approach promoters, negotiate contracts, help you grow your fan base, sell music, generate press coverage, and more.

However, finding that perfect booking agent is challenging. Competition is fierce, and the process can be frustrating. It also requires a lot of work and commitment. If you’re thinking about professional booking management, this guide is for you. These tips will help you get the attention of a booking agent.

What Is a Booking Agent?

A music booking agent secures and manages live performances or appearances for artists. Booking agents work closely with promoters, venues, festivals, record labels, and the artists’ manager.

A booking agent may work independently or for a booking agency that represents a roster of artists. They are the point of contact for talent buyers interested in booking an artist. They also contact venues and promoters to pitch performances.

Moreover, a booking agent will secure shows or tours, negotiate contracts, collect payments, arrange technical setups, and manage other details. They also handle hospitality (hotels, dinners, riders), logistics (travel, flights), tour routing, and promotional efforts. A booking agent may even secure interviews, radio, commercial, and TV performances.

Benefits of a Booking Agent

Booking your own shows or tours can be difficult and time-consuming. Having someone handle the music business aspects can advance your music career. Here are the benefits of having a booking agent:

Playing your music live is critical to building a fan base. Having a booking agent who can score bigger shows, better venues, and opening slots for popular acts can boost your music career. However, agents should only come into the picture when you have reached a certain point in your career.

When Is it Time for a Booking Agent?

The decision to hire a booking agent depends on where you are in your music career. It also depends on what you hope to achieve by working with an agent. Hiring an agent or connecting with a booking agency is also optional. You may choose to organize your own booking.

Artists reach a level to consider a booking agent when they have established a fan base, are playing regularly, selling out local shows, receiving several booking inquiries, and releasing original music. Most agents will not consider working with artists unless they have proven themselves as a live performer that can bring out fans.

In most cases, a booking agency will find you. However, you may hire an agent when it becomes difficult to manage your bookings, planning to tour, and are making enough to pay the agent.

How to Attract a Music Booking Agency

Connecting with a booking agency can play a major role in launching your music career. But how do you get their attention? We break it down with these ten tips:

1. Updated Electronic Press Kit (EPK)

An Electronic Press Kit (EPK) is effectively a resume for musicians, artists, bands, and DJs. An EPK is your online media/marketing portfolio, designed to provide simple access to all your essential information. Make this first impression count!

EPK’s are also one of the most professional tools to showcase your talents to the music industry. They provide your artist assets to labels, booking agents, promoters, venues, media, and anyone who would like to learn more about you and your music.

Moreover, an EPK should feature your artist bio, links to stream your music and DJ mixes, high-resolution images, tour dates, relevant media, logo, recent press, notable achievements, links to your social media or online presence, and contact details. A successful EPK represents you as an artist, your brand, and musical identity.

2. Release Music

There is a strong correlation between releasing music and scoring bookings. To be a successful touring artist, you must release music. Regularly putting out music is a sure way to build a loyal following that will get the attention of booking agents and promoters. Also, getting listed in various charts and having DJ support will increase your chances of catching the attention of a booking agent.

3. Perform Live Regularly

Booking agents want to see a busy gig schedule. Immerse yourself in your local scene and build a regular performance schedule. Take on as many worthy gigs as you can handle. Show booking agents and promoters that you’re serious about your music career. Having dates at notable venues or events can boost your credibility and make your local demand seem stronger. If you’re not able to manage a regular gig schedule, then keep busy releasing music. Show you’re staying active and relevant!

4. Record Label Support & Management

Signing your music with an established record label is the best way to reach a global audience. Gaining the support of a reputable label is a sure way to catch the attention of a booking agent. Also, releases from top labels receive a lot of chart coverage and music streams. This exposure will also increase your chances of getting noticed by a booking agent.

How to Send a Demo to Record Labels

Once your music career reaches a certain level, you may also want to consider hiring a manager. It can be beneficial for your career if you have someone who can represent you, connect with booking agencies, and seek opportunities. Moreover, having a manager working on your behalf makes you more qualified to prospective agents.

5. Strong Social Media Presence

The rise of social media is a valuable asset for musicians. A strong social media presence is essential for promoting your music, engaging with fans, and expanding your fan base. Having an effective social media strategy also connects you with music industry peers and presents new opportunities.

Your social media profiles will also be the first place booking agents look when researching potential clients. They will judge an artist by looking at their social media presence, activity, and followers.

Covering all the major social media networks is also crucial. Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, YouTube, SoundCloud, and Mixcloud are excellent platforms for promoting your brand and music. The more you can showcase your artistry the better.

It’s also vital you keep your networks updated and active. Show you’re busy releasing music, playing live, and engaging with fans. Booking agents may get concerned about how in-demand you are if there are gaps in your timeline.

Furthermore, having a strong following will reassure booking agents you are a good investment. Followers show you have fans interested in your music and want to see you perform. Also, growing your followers organically will make you credible. Avoid services that generate fake followers. Having thousands of followers with little or no engagement is suspicious and will turn agents away.

Last, post engaging content with regular consistency to stay relevant to your fans. It’s critical to create content for your audience even when you’re busy in the studio, between releases, or touring. Finally, engage with your fans. It’s vital you connect with your fans. Don’t just use social media to promote your music and tour schedule. Use these platforms to interact with your fans.

10 Social Media Tips for Musicians: How to Engage Fans

6. Public Relations

One of the biggest challenges as an artist is getting your music heard. Getting noticed in the music industry takes work. You have to employ different marketing tools to keep up with the competition.

PR and marketing strategies play a big part in increasing your outreach and getting your music heard. An effective PR campaign will help you increase exposure, establish credibility, and open new opportunities.

Learning different ways to promote your music and brand is also essential if you want to make it in the music business. There are several effective ways to promote your music and reach new audiences. Do some research on public relations and marketing strategies.

How to Get Your Music Featured on Blogs

7. Network and Build Relationships

Building relationships and networking in the music industry is always helpful. Boost your chances of getting noticed by a booking agent by making connections. Get out and connect with people, regardless of their status. Try to meet other artists, producers, DJs, publicists, booking agents, label staff, fans, and anyone else in the music scene. These connections could lead to opportunities. But, do so professionally, and don’t be a stalker.

8. Get Referrals

One of the quickest ways to connect with a booking agency is by referral. Your chances of being considered will increase if a known artist, manager or record label puts in a good word for you. So, making the right connections is crucial!

9. Stand Out from the Competition

What makes you stand out from the crowd? The competition is fierce, there are countless DJs and live performers in the music scene. Booking agents and promoters are always looking out for an act that is unique. Think of ways to stand out and catch the attention of booking agents.

Knowing your target audience is also vital. Who are your fans? What are their interests? Tailor your brand to meet the market’s needs. Also, keep up on trends in the music scene. Keeping on top of music industry trends will help you stay on point. Avoid the risk of becoming outdated or undesirable.

10. Be Considerate

Finally, professional courtesy is a must. Show the utmost respect to music industry peers and fans. Consider showing appreciation; gratitude can go a long way. Reputation and respect matters in the music industry!

Conclusion

For most artists, success doesn’t happen overnight. Going through the steps above takes time and commitment. Be patient, stay dedicated, and work hard on building your portfolio. It takes time to get noticed and to build a following.

Last, don’t rush into signing with a booking agency. Ensure you’re ready and that your music career is at a level that requires a booking agent. There are also numerous agencies out there. Research them and find the agency right for you.

How to Design an Effective Music Website

Wed, 20 Mar 2019 16:34:00 GMT

Learn how to design an effective music website. Here are ten tips for building a musician website that connects with your fans and music industry peers.

What Is a Music Website?

Establishing an online presence for your music and brand is an absolute must. Social media is not enough for musicians starting their music career in today’s digital landscape. If you’re serious about your music, you’ll also need a music website.

A music website serves as an online hub for your brand identity and music. A professional website with your latest music, artist information, tour dates, and merchandise will get you and your music taken seriously. It also plays a vital role in your music marketing strategy, discovery, and fan engagement.

What Are the Benefits of a Music Website?

There are many reasons it’s necessary to have a music website. Here are a few reasons:

What Content Does a Music Website Need?

A musician website should reflect your image as an artist, attract new fans, and connect with existing fans . It’s crucial you provide relevant information, engaging content, marketing material, and contact info. Your music website will be the go-to place for people to know about your brand and music. Ensure fans, record labels, booking agents, promoters, music journalists, and other music industry peers can find everything they need.

Consider adding these pages and content ideas to your music website:

1. Home Page

The home page is your chance to make a first impression. Include all the essential information about you and your music. Make it easy for fans, record labels, booking agents, promoters, music journalists, and other music industry peers to find essential info in one place.

The home page should display a shortened artist bio, latest release, upcoming tour dates, visual media, social media links, mailing list signup, and a link to your Electronic Press Kit (EPK) . It’s also vital to have clear navigation links to all the important pages and a call-to-action (CTA). A CTA asks visitors to engage with your content. For example, a button that says “Buy My Album.”

Also, update this page often to keep all the info current. Moreover, consider using a sidebar or footer section to add a newsletter signup and to promote your latest release or next show. Content that appears in these sections will show on all pages of the site.

Last, avoid cluttering up your pages with too much content. Keep the layout simple, quick to navigate, and easy to find relevant info.

2. About Section or Artist Bio

Have a dedicated page that displays your full artist bio or tells your story. This is where you can highlight your music career. Also, include brief details of any previous or upcoming releases, milestone achievements, collaborations, recent shows at notable venues, and any significant endorsements. Record labels, music promoters, booking agents, and press use this information for promotional material and write-ups.

This page could also include a downloadable Electronic Press Kit (EPK). An EPK is an online media/marketing portfolio. It’s designed to provide simple access to all your essential information. Learn how to create an effective EPK below.

3. Music and Videos

Your website should have a page where people can listen to your music. You can embed audio players from music streaming services like SoundCloud , Spotify , Bandcamp or Mixcloud . You could feature releases, playlists, mixes, music videos, and even free music downloads. It’s also important to add buttons or purchase links directing fans to buy or download your music.

Also, don’t auto-play music or videos when someone visits your website. Avoid startling people with blaring music that plays unexpectedly. Their likely to leave your site, which is a missed opportunity to gain potential fans. It also hurts SEO.

4. Press Photos

A page of promotional photographs is beneficial. Professional looking photos is also a must for any press coverage. It’s essential you have high-resolution photos for promoters, labels, booking agents, venues, press, and anyone looking for visual media.

Showcase your artistry. Add photos of you in the studio, playing live, candid shots, and anything else that reflects your brand. Also, include vertical and horizontal photos to fit the varying layouts of different media outlets.

Last, high-quality press shots have large file sizes and can slow down your website. Consider uploading high resolution (300 DPI or larger) versions of your best photos to Dropbox or another offsite cloud drive. Then add a button or shareable link for easy access.

5. Social Media

Social media is a valuable asset for musicians. A strong social media presence is essential for promoting your music, engaging with fans, and expanding your fanbase. Moreover, an effective social media strategy connects you with music industry peers and can also present new opportunities.

Make sure your social media profiles are easily accessible on your website. Also, using icon buttons associated with the different social media profiles makes them easily identifiable.

6. Press and Testimonials

Have you been featured or interviewed on a music website or magazine? Having a page dedicated to your press is beneficial. Include short quotes and links to any press coverage. Also, add favorable reviews or testimonials from respected industry professionals. A few key points of interest will help build up your profile and credibility.

7. Tour Dates

Do you have upcoming tour dates? Listing forthcoming gigs or tours on a dedicated page or footer widget is crucial. Adding tour dates informs fans when and where you’re playing live. They also help booking agents work around your current schedule. In addition, anyone mentioning you on a radio show, podcast, or in a blog post can include the dates and help promote them.

There are several ways to add tour dates. You can use dedicated plugins compatible with your website theme. Or, embed widgets from music sites like Bandsintown and Songkick .

8. Contact Page

A page that includes your contact information and a form to contact you is vital. Make it easy for fans and music industry professionals to reach you. Someone may want to book you for a show, ask about licensing your music , schedule an interview, or another opportunity.

Also, consider including your management or booking agents contact details if applicable. The contact page is also a great place to add links to all your social media profiles. Make it easy for people to find your online presence.

Alternatively, you can skip a contact page and add your contact details and social media links in the footer, so it’s visible on every page.

9. Merchandise Store

Fans often want something tangible from the artists they support. Having a merch store on your website is an option to consider. Selling merch is a marketing strategy to promote your brand, connect with fans, and make money. Having a merch store also looks more professional to promoters hoping you’ll bring fans to their venue.

Some item ideas to include are music downloads, vinyl, tickets, t-shirts, hats, stickers, tote bags, buttons, bracelets, or other swag. Moreover, items sold in your store are commission free. 100% of the profits go straight to your pocket!

There are also a ton of merch design websites for musicians like Bandzoogle , Dizzyjam , Threadless , and Shopify .

10. Promote Your Music with a Newsletter

Email marketing is an essential promotional tactic for musicians. Every artist should be collecting email addresses on their website and anywhere else. Email lists are an effective way to reach your fans directly. You can promote new releases, tour dates, send updates, sell music, merch, tickets, and more.

Newsletter services like Mailchimp offer email marketing tools and newsletter templates for musicians. Also, Mailchimp’s free account may be enough for most musicians.

All the major email marketing services also provide newsletter signup forms you can embed on your website. Adding it in the footer or a sidebar will make it visible on every page of your site.

Conclusion

Your music website should represent your brand and music. It’s also vital that it looks sleek and professional.

There are lots of options for designing a musician’s website. You can use website builder services like WordPress , Wix , Squarespace , and Bandzoogle . Or, you can hire a website designer. There are also tons of low-cost options out there for web design, so do your research and shop around. Browse various themes and features that will best serve your needs.

Finally, keep your design simple and easy to navigate. You want your fans to immediately find what they’re looking for within seconds of arriving on your site. Avoid cluttering your pages with excessive content and links that make it hard for visitors to find everything. Last, keep your website’s content fresh. Update it regularly and give your fans a reason to keep coming back!

How to Warp Tracks in Ableton Live Quickly

Mon, 18 Mar 2019 16:54:00 GMT

This first part in a series of Ableton Live warping techniques teaches you how to warp tracks with a fixed tempo. Learn how to time-stretch audio for remixing and live performances.

What is Warping in Ableton Live

Ableton Live ‘s warping capabilities allow you to time-stretch audio, so it stays in sync with a chosen tempo. Live’s ability to play any audio sample in sync with the tempo is a versatile feature.

Warping also gives you the ability to manipulate audio in exciting ways. For example, you can change the rhythmic flow of a sample, or even move notes to other meter positions. Warping is also excellent for beatmatching, remixing, sampling, sound design, and other creative reasons.

Ableton Live Warp Modes

Here are the six warp modes:

Preparing Audio for Warping

By default, Ableton Live will auto-warp audio samples loaded into your project. This setting ensures they play in sync with the set tempo. Auto-warping short samples like drum loops is helpful. However, auto-warping long samples like full songs and vocals cause problems. For example, you won’t get accurate results if the material has an intro without a defined beat or a tempo that fluctuates.

It’s common practice to disable the ‘Auto-Warp Long Samples’ feature from ‘Record Warp Launch’ tab in Live’s Preferences. Disabling this feature gives you the freedom to warp tracks manually. It also reduces the hassle of fixing the warp markers Live automatically placed.

It’s also a common practice to disable the ‘Create Analysis Files’ feature from Live’s Preferences. An analysis file contains all your warp settings and other data about the sample. Manually saving this file ensures Live loads the correct warp settings every time you drop in the sample. Clicking the Clip View’s Save button will store the current settings with the sample’s analysis file.

How to Warp Tracks with a Fixed Tempo

Ableton Live can warp various types of material. For example, vocals, multiple tracks, tracks with a drifting tempo, short and long samples, etc. This guide looks at warping longer audio tracks with a fixed tempo, such as a full EDM song. Fixed tempo means the BPM is consistent throughout the material.

Here are the steps for warping long tracks with a fixed tempo:

1. Determine the Tempo

The warping process is easier when you know the songs original tempo. Find the tempo of a song by looking it up on the internet, using a BPM analysis tool like Mixed in Key , or with Live’s Tap Tempo feature. For instance, playback the song and click the Tap Tempo button once every beat to determine the tempo. Last, change the project tempo to the original BPM of the song before activating the Warp feature.

2. Locate the First Downbeat

Activate the Warp button from the Clip View Sample Box to enable warping. Then, zoom into the sample and find the first prominent downbeat. For example, the first kick drum. If the song has an intro without a beat, then find the first downbeat after the intro.

Next, place the cursor where the initial transient crosses the zero-crossing line and double-click to create a Warp Marker.

3. Set 1.1.1 Here

Right-click the Warp Maker you just created and choose ‘Set 1.1.1 Here’ from the context menu. This step sets the starting point where Live will begin warping.

4. Warp from Here (Straight)

Live offers four ‘Warp From Here’ commands from the context menu. The command that works best for long samples with a consistent tempo is ‘Warp from Here (Straight).’

Right-click the new Warp Marker again and choose ‘Warp from Here (Straight)’ from the context menu. This command auto-warps a clip with no tempo variations.

5. Choose the Best Warp Mode

Select the best sounding Warp Mode for your material from the Warp Mode chooser. Complex and Complex Pro will give you the best time-stretching quality for full songs.

6. Check the Results

First, visually scan the waveform. Zoom in on different sections to see if beat lines up on the grid. You can also set an 8-bar loop brace and move it along the timeline to examine the waveform. Second, activate Live’s metronome to hear if the song warped correctly and plays in sync with the tempo.

7. Make Adjustments

Manually add Warp Markers where needed and make adjustments if the song drifts off tempo. Also, manually add a Warp Marker on a downbeat at the end of the song and drag it until the timing sounds correct. Setting a Warp Maker at the end ensures the tempo won’t drift when transitioning to the next song in a live performance.

8. Save Default Clip Settings

Click the ‘Save Default Clip’ button to save the current warp settings with the sample. Live will then restore the current warp settings whenever you drop the sample into a Live Set.

Conclusion

The warping techniques outlined in this guide work best for full songs with a fixed beat. The process is essential for remixing or performing live. Learning how to warp tracks also opens other creative possibilities. For example, you can stretch audio to create new rhythms, grooves, and more.

Women’s History Month: Daphne Oram

Wed, 13 Mar 2019 15:00:00 GMT

We are celebrating Women’s History Month by looking back at the remarkable lifelong achievements of Daphne Oram, a true pioneer of early electronic music.

Who Is Daphne Oram?

Daphne Oram (1925 – 2003) is one of the central figures in developing British experimental electronic music . Her story is fascinating!

Besides being a musical innovator, Daphne Oram was the first woman director of a music studio, the first woman to set up a personal electronic music studio, and the first woman to design an electronic musical instrument.

Oram has many distinguished achievements. However, she is mostly known for developing a new form of optical sound synthesis in the early 1960s called Oramics . This innovative method of music composition and performance generated sounds by drawing shapes on film stripes fed through a machine and converted into sound on magnetic tape. It was an original way to think about sound creation.

Early Career at BBC

Oram’s musical journey began in the late 1930s while studying piano, organ, and composition at the Sherborne School for Girls. Then in 1943, she received an invitation to continue her education at the Royal College of Music. However, she declined to accept a position as Junior Studio Engineer and “Music Balancer” at the British Broadcasting Corporation. During this period, she became fascinated with the developments in synthetic sound and experimented with tape recording machines. She would record sounds onto tape and then cut, splice, loop, adjust the speed, and play them backward to create new sounds.

Spending late nights in the BBC studios, Oram also dedicated time composing music. She composed an orchestral work entitled Still Point . Still Point was an innovative piece performed with three 78rpm discs and five microphones. Many consider Still Point to be the first composition that combined acoustic orchestration with live electronic manipulation. Oram submitted the piece to BBC for the Prix Italia award, but they rejected it. Lost to the BBC’s archives, Still Point remained unheard for 70 years. In 2016, the London Contemporary Orchestra brought this early masterpiece to lite and performed Still Point for the first time.

Advancements in Music Technology

By the 1950s, Oram had worked her way up to becoming BBC’s Music Studio Manager. Shortly after, she visited the RTF studios in Paris and became inspired by an experimental composition technique called musique concrète . Musique concrète was a revolutionary sampling technique developed by the French composer Pierre Schaeffer at the Studio d’Essai. Using advanced tape-recording technology of the time, composers would record, manipulate, and arrange various natural sounds on tape to produce a montage of sounds.

Oram returned with this new knowledge and petitioned for the BBC to invest in similar technology. The company eventually acquired their first Ferrograph tape machines, one of the earliest consumer mono reel-to-reel recorders. Once again, Oram spent late hours experimenting with the equipment in creative ways. She built a makeshift studio using a combination of tape machines, oscillators, and a mixing desk. Through these experiments, she crafted compositions created entirely of electronic sounds.

Soon after, Oram was asked to provide electronic sound effects for various BBC programming. In 1957 things picked up when she was commissioned to compose music for BBC’s television drama, Amphitryon 38. Employing tape recorders, a sine wave oscillator, and some self-designed filters, she created the first synthetic score in BBC history.

That same year, Oram partnered with her BBC colleague Desmond Briscoe. Desmond was also a pioneering sound engineer that brought electronic music to radio and television. The two composed electronic music for BBC’s most significant productions of the time. Their innovative sounds captured public attention and highlighted the potential for electronic sound effects in radio and television.

BBC Radiophonic Workshop

Demand grew for new “radiophonic” electronic sounds, and the BBC finally agreed to finance a new facility devoted to producing electronic content. With the new budget, Oram and Briscoe established the renowned BBC Radiophonic Workshop in early 1958.

Oram once again made history as the first woman director and co-founder of a music studio. The BBC Radiophonic Workshop became a pioneering studio for electronic music and tape-manipulation techniques. The studio flourished from 1958 until 1998 and primarily created sound effects and incidental music for radio and television. The studio was best-known for producing acclaimed scores for programs such as “Doctor Who” and the “Quatermass and the Pit.” They also provided scores for numerous radio shows such as “The Goon Show” and “The Hitchhiker’s Guide to the Galaxy.”

However, Oram’s tenure at the workshop was short lived. In 1959, she resigned from the BBC, frustrated by the network’s continued refusal to push electronic music into the foreground. Shortly after, she assembled her own studio called the Oramics Studios for Electronic Composition. Oram would be the first woman to have ever opened her own music studio. She continued preliminary work on graphical sound techniques which led to developing a graphical sound generating system known as Oramics.

Oramics Machine

Daphne Oram’s innovative Oramics Machine is one of the earliest forms of electronic sound synthesis. It was also a breakthrough in optical synthesis technology.

The Oramics design consisted of a large rectangular metal frame, which provided a table-like surface traversed by ten synchronized strips of 35mm film strips. Oram would draw shapes on the film, which were then read by photo-electric cells and converted into sound. The generated electrical charges from the shapes also controlled the amplitude, timbre, frequency, and duration of sounds. The output from the machine was monophonic. However, recording sounds to multitrack tapes would create polyphonic textures.

Shapes interpreted by a machine and then converted into sound was an extraordinary approach to music production. In 1968, Oram recorded the first composition using the machine, entitled “Contrasts Essonic.”

Continued Career

Throughout the remainder of her career, Daphne Oram made significant advances in the electronic music movement. She continued her research and successfully developed innovative technology that helped lay the foundation for modern electronic music production.

Oram also collaborated with several film composers. She provided soundtracks to various forms of audio and visual mediums. She even provided the prominent electronic sounds for the famous James Bond film “Doctor No” in 1962.

Later on, Oram abandoned composition to devote all of her focus to advancing Oramics. In 1977, the Apple II personal home computer released and Oram sought to embrace the new technology. Assisted by programmer Steve Brett, the two worked on developing a software version of Oramics for the Acorn Archimedes computer. However, a lack of funding prevented this project from becoming realized.

Throughout the 1980s Oram spent time lecturing on electronic music and studio techniques. She also wrote several books. Her first book written in 1972, entitled “An Individual Note of Music, Sound and Electronics” investigates the physics of sound and the emergence of electronic music in a philosophical manner.

In the 1990s, Oram suffered several debilitating strokes and had to move into a nursing home. Sadly, Oram died in 2003 at 77 in relative anonymity. To this day, most of her music remains unavailable.

10 Best Synth Plugins for Music Production

Mon, 11 Mar 2019 16:41:00 GMT

What are the best synth plugins? This ICON Picks roundup features ten popular virtual synthesizer instruments that deliver big on sound and features.

What Are the Best Synth Plugins?

It is an exciting time to be a music producer . Virtual instruments continue to evolve in impressive ways. Many modern software synthesizers offer unique features that create and shape sounds like never before.

However, choosing the best synth plugins is difficult. Several excellent synth plugins that offer immersive features and amazing sound. Picking the best synth for your needs is also a personal choice. You’ll want to look for something that fits your workflow and is capable of creating sounds that work with your music. There’s also a learning curve to consider. Do you want to spend a week learning a new synth or making music?

Moreover, music producers and sound designers commonly have multiple synths for different jobs. For example, many music producers have a dedicated synth for leads, basses, pads, etc. That’s because many synths have features and characteristics better suited for certain sounds.

This guide lists ten popular synth plugins that offer excellent sound sculpting features and quality sound.

1. Xfer | Serum

Serum is an innovative wavetable synthesizer from Xfer Records. Former ICON Instructor and Serum’s lead developer Steve Duda has successfully created a “dream synthesizer.” Serum delivers high-quality sound, an immersive feature set, and unmatched sound sculpting possibilities. Moreover, you can create, import, edit, morph, and modulate wavetables with its workflow-oriented interface. Serum also features 10 effects, drag-and-drop routing, and a heap of presets.

2. u-he | Diva

Diva is a modeled analog synthesizer from u-he. This rich-sounding synth captures the sound and features of iconic hardware synthesizers. Diva’s modular design features a selection of analog modeled oscillators, filters, and envelopes. Moreover, you can recreate an old favorite or mix-and-match modules to design a unique hybrid. This synth delivers authentic analog sound!

3. Spectrasonics | Omnisphere 2

Omnisphere 2 is a full-featured synthesizer from Spectrasonics. This versatile synth plugin combines several types of synthesis with a massive amount of sound-sculpting options.

Omnisphere 2 offers over 500 oscillator waveforms, 57 effects, morphing wavetables, new granular synthesis, an innovative browser, and over 14,000 sounds. It also features a crazy amount of modulation options, filtering, complex patch-layering, multiple arpeggiators, and so much more. In addition, you can import audio files and manipulate them in creative ways to create something new and unique!

4. Native Instruments | Massive

Massive is a wavetable synthesizer from Native Instruments. It’s an awesome synth for basses and leads. This versatile synth also has a hybrid digital-analog design. It features several modulation options, drag-and-drop routing, morphing step sequencers, 17 effects, and more. As the name suggests, this OG synth brings a massive sound!

5. LennarDigital | Sylenth1

Sylenth1 is a virtual analog synthesizer from LennarDigital. This flexible synth has been a long-time favorite in the music industry. It does a fantastic job of creating huge, lush supersaw chords, pads, and leads.

Sylenth1 features 4 unison oscillators, analog-sounding filters, several modulation options, an arpeggiator, and 7 effects. With 512 voices and 32 filters, Sylenth1 delivers big on sound! It’s also one of the easiest synths to use.

6. Native Instruments | Kontakt

Kontakt is an industry-leading sampler from Native Instruments. This diverse sampler brings you a universe of sampled instruments. There are over 600 licensed instruments from other manufacturers that run in Kontakt. You can play any instrument or sound imaginable with Kontakt.

Moreover, Kontakt comes loaded with a huge library of realistic sounding sampled instruments. There are also instruments that combine wavetable synthesis with sampled content. It also sports several effects, extensive sound design options, and hardware integration. In addition, Kontakt offers creator tools that enable you to design custom instruments.

7. Reveal Sound | Spire

Spire is a polyphonic synthesizer from Reveal Sound. This versatile synth combines multiple forms of digital synthesis with classic analog synthesis techniques. It also delivers big on sound and usability.

Spire features 4 multimode polymorphing oscillators, advanced modulation options, multimode filters, 6 effects, and over 900 factory presets. It also offers a step sequencer and an arpeggiator.

8. Future Audio Workshop | Circle2

Circle2 is a wavetable synthesizer from Future Audio Workshop. This full-featured synth focuses on streamlined workflow and creativity. Moreover, its modular design shows every control in one window. There are no submenus, multiple windows, or hidden controls.

Circle2 also makes modulation fast and easy. It offers an extensive amount of modulation options using drag-and-drop color-coded circles. You can create unique sounds with minimal effort. Circle2 also features a new morphing synthesis, 110 wavetables, several effects, and a Smart Browser loaded with over 300 sounds. In addition, it offers a step sequencer, an arpeggiator, Native Instruments NKS Support, and more.

9. Vengeance Sound | VPS Avenger

VPS Avenger is a hybrid synthesizer from Vengeance Sound. This versatile synth has 1,000 oscillators, tons of smart, modern features, and a growing library.

VPS Avenger is a ‘Power Synth’ that delivers big time. It unites analog, sample-based, and wavetable synthesis. It also features an immersive set of modulation options, 30 effects, 47 filter types, and over 950 presets. Also onboard is a drum sequencer, arpeggiator, step sequencer, a guitar player/chord detection module, a wavetable editor, and much more. It’s nutty how much this beast brings!

10. u-he | Hive

Hive is a virtual analog synthesizer from u-he. It’s another flexible synth that aims at streamlining workflow and modern sound design. Hive also comes packed with features. It sports 4 oscillators, 2 multimode filters, 7 effects, an arpeggiator, and a step sequencer. Moreover, Hive offers a modulation matrix, drag-and-drop routing, wavetable editing, XY control, 2,700 presets, and a ton more.

Honorable Mentions

There are a lot of excellent synth plugins on the market. It makes it hard to narrow down the top ten. Below are ten more synth plugins worth considering:

1. Twin 2 by FabFilter
2. Iris 2 by iZotope
3. Zebra2 by u-he
4. FM8 by Native Instruments
5. Nexus by reFX
6. SubBoomBass 2 by Rob Papen
7. Strobe2 by FXpansion
8. Trilian by Spectrasonics
9. Reaktor 6 by Native Instruments
10. SynthMaster by KV331 Audio

How To Build A Fan Base For Your Music

Wed, 06 Mar 2019 16:22:00 GMT

Learn how to build your fan base. Here are ten tips that will help you boost fan engagement, promote your brand, and increase fans.

How to Build a Fan Base?

Building a loyal fan base is essential if you want to be a successful musician. Making great music will only get you so far. You’ll also need to be savvy with marketing, branding, fan interaction, and more.

Here are ten effective tips that will grow your fan base:

Build a Brand

Before you do anything else, you must first know your brand . Your brand and story will influence your music career decisions. It will guide your marketing and messaging strategy. It will also influence the way you present yourself in person and online, how you interact with fans, and more. Your brand reflects your style as much as your music!

It’s also crucial to have a vision of where you want your music career to go. So, take the time to discover what’s unique about you, your artistry, and your story. Then build your brand identity from there.

Get Discovered on Music Discovery Websites

Music fans and industry influencers alike search music discovery websites regularly. Music discovery websites make it easier to capture new fans. Many also help you get discovered by music bloggers, Spotify playlisters, record labels, and more.

Check out sites like Hype Machine , NoiseTrade , SubmitHub , Pitchfork , TopSpin , ToneDen , Bandcamp , SoundCloud , and ReverbNation . These sites help connect independent artists with passionate music fans. Some also provide tools and services that help you engage with fans, promote and sell music, view analytics, and more.

Get Your Music Featured on Spotify Playlists

Spotify is one of the biggest music streaming platforms. It is an excellent place to grow your fan base, discover new artists, and promote your music.

Getting your music featured on popular Spotify playlists is an effective way to introduce your music to the world. Curated streaming playlists are also how most fans discover new music.

Below are a few ways to get your music featured on Spotify playlists :

Get Featured on Music Blogs

One of the biggest challenges as an artist is getting your music heard. Getting your music featured on blogs is one effective way to promote your music and reach new audiences.

Support from a music blog will help you increase exposure, establish credibility, and open new opportunities. However, it’s challenging to get your music featured on a blog. Especially with so many emerging acts striving to get heard. So, how do you submit music to a blog? And, how can you find the music blogs that will feature your music? The guide below breaks down all the essential steps of scoring a feature on a music blog.

Run Competitions or Giveaways

Offer incentives as a referral strategy to reach new fans. Running a competition or a giveaway is a great way to incentivize your existing fan base. Give your fans something in return for referrals.

Here are some ideas that will motivate fans to refer their friends to your music:

Play Live Shows

Live performance is one of the best ways to reach new fans and connect with people. It’s also a chance for fans to experience your music rather than stream it. Playing your music live has a more powerful impact.

However, gigging needs a strategy. For example, avoid playing live too often. If you play every weekend in the same city or venue, your shows will lose value. It also helps to promote your shows. List your tour dates on Bandsintown and Songkick , create Facebook events, and send out emails. And don’t forget to meet people in the audience and engage with them!

Also, try to play with established artists with a strong following. A great way to increase your fans is to play with artists who have a larger fan base. Network with local artists and venues or even artists in cities you’re touring. Networking in the music industry is essential!

Create Video Content

Videos are an effective medium for music promotion. And YouTube has become a must-use media platform for musicians.

Beyond being a video platform, YouTube has other advantages. For example, it is one of the largest search engines. People also visit YouTube first to find a song. In addition, music is the most searched topic on YouTube.

Videos also offer a different way to connect your music with fans. Plus, there’s a lot more you can do with video compared to music streaming. Here are some video content ideas:

Don’t limit yourself to YouTube. Several other video hosting platforms are also effective. For instance, Vimeo, Facebook Live, Instagram, and Stageit .

Distribute Your Music and Merchandise

Digital music distribution services help independent artists and labels get their music on major online music stores and streaming sites. These digital aggregators distribute music on iTunes, Apple Music, Spotify, Beatport, Amazon, Google Play, Pandora, and other leading music platforms. Getting your music on these platforms is a sure way to reach new fans.

Leading digital music distributors such as Symphonic Distribution , TuneCore , and DistroKid also offer a suite of services and tools for artists. They provide everything needed to prepare, sell, and market your music online.

Building an official website for your brand is another effective way to offer music and merchandise. An official website should feature your artist bio, music, tour dates, images, relevant media, achievements, social media links, merch, and contact details. A successful website represents you as an artist, your brand, and musical identity.

Leverage Fans of Other Artists

Leverage the fans of artists, venues, and brands to increase your fan base. For example, collaborate with other artists, create remixes, and play at venues with a loyal following. Tapping into other people’s audiences is an easy way to reach new fans.

Have a Social Media Presence

The rise of social media is a valuable asset for musicians. A strong social media presence is essential for promoting your music, engaging with fans, and expanding your fan base. Moreover, having an effective social media strategy connects you with music industry peers and presents new opportunities.

These social media tips will boost fan engagement and increase followers:

10 Social Media Tips for Musicians

Conclusion

Implementing these methods will increase your fan base. However, you must engage with your fans frequently if you want to maintain and grow your fan base. Also, stay consistent if you want to break through the noise and hold the attention of your fans. Give your fans something to expect or look forward to regularly. Last, get creative and think outside the box. Figure out what your fans love and then have fun with it.

Tips on How to Write Better Melodies

Wed, 27 Feb 2019 16:43:00 GMT

What is a melody and why is it important? Learn how to create both effective and memorable melodies. This guide will help you develop your melody writing skills.

What is a Melody?

Melody is a rhythmical sequence of notes that create a musical phrase or motif. A melody also consists of two parts: pitch and rhythm. We sometimes think of melodies as the vocal part of a song. However, a melody can also be the topline of your instrumental drop, a signature bassline, or even a unique vocal sample.

Melody also plays a significant role in our experience of a song’s emotion, structure, groove, and personality. Have you ever had a song stuck in your head for hours or even days? What part do you singe repeatedly? Have you ever been to a show where everyone sings along together to a particular part of the song? That’s the melody!

Why are Melodies Important?

Why do we want strong melodies in our music? Because an effective melody is what listeners sing along to, relate to, and remember. They are the most memorable part of a song. Also, your melodic material is often the primary focus or central element of your music.

Listen to a few of your favorite songs and pinpoint the melody part that is memorable. These melodies play an essential role in shaping the character originality of your song. The groove, sound design, effects, and sample choices are also invaluable in setting the vibe. However, they all create a foundation that supports your melody.

How to Identify a Weak Melody

To define what a strong melody is, let’s first look at identifying weak melodies. Weak melodies lack a sense of signature or personality. They’re not memorable and don’t grab a listener’s attention.

Moreover, ineffective melodies lack repetition and structure. Humans like patterns in music. We like similarity because it feels familiar and gives us a sense of something we can latch onto. A melody without repetition or structure is similar to a story with no purpose or direction. There’s no sense of where ideas start, begin, or relate to each other.

Melodies can also become boring or redundant if you don’t create variation. For example, repeating the same idea becomes predictable. It also drains the excitement or interest from the listening experience.

A poorly written melody can also lack space or structure. We need spaces and breaks to “chunk” ideas together and process what we just heard. Avoid making your music sound like a run-on sentence or someone who talks without breathing. This can result in melodic ideas that lack purpose, drive, and memorability.

How to Write Strong Melodies

What are the elements of a strong melody? Melodies can be broken down to smaller ideas called motifs. Motifs are shorter melodic ideas that use different pitches in rhythm. Let’s look at these two variables and analyze how we can utilize them to our advantage.

Melody and Pitch

Pitch is how high or low a note sounds. A melody comprises high and low-pitched notes played one after the other. Pitch also makes a melody singable and memorable. You can control pitch by placing notes along the vertical MIDI grid in your DAW.

Improve the way pitch influences your melodies with these tips:

1. Use Stepwise Motion

The most compelling melodies combine stepwise motion and leaps . Stepwise motion is moving from one note to the next up or down in the scale.

Stepwise makes it easier for the listener to follow because the notes rise and fall smoothly in either full or half step intervals. It also makes it easier to play melodies without jumping between large intervals. For example, the key of C has the notes C, D, E, F, G, A, B. If your melody starts on an E, move up a step to an F or down a step to a D.

The song “Yesterday” by The Beatles uses stepwise motion effectively. The melody walks up and down the scale with very few leaps. That’s why it’s easy to remember and sing along too.

2. Use Leap Motion

Leap motion is when the melody rises and falls with large intervals between one note and the next. For example, the interval from C to F is a leap.

Melodic leaps often grab a listeners interest. Melodies with few or no leaps can become boring because the stepwise motion is somewhat predictable. However, leaps should be very intentional and used with caution. This motion is considered a disjunct melody and is less smooth sounding. Also, too many leaps are difficult to process and sing along too.

The song “Somewhere Over the Rainbow” has an octave leap up followed by a downward stepwise motion resolution. This large leap makes the initial melodic statement memorable. However, it doesn’t have a sense of balance and makes the melody hard to sing.

3. Place Melody Notes on Chord Tones

Using the notes from chords is an effective way to maintain harmony. Placing melody notes on chord notes also emphasizes those chords.

For example, an A minor triad chord has the notes A, C, E. These are the 1st, 3rd, and 5th notes from the root within the scale. Using the notes, A, C, and E over an A minor chord will sound harmonic, smooth, and conjunct. Conversely, placing melody notes outside of the chord notes will sound confusing, unbalanced, and disjunct.

The verse of “Nocturnal” by Disclosure and The Weeknd uses notes from the chords to create the melody. The notes emphasized are D, F, and A over the chords G Minor and D Minor.

4. Use the Pentatonic Scale

The Pentatonic scale is a five-note scale derived from either a major or minor scale.

Pentatonic melodies have several advantages. For instance, they offer increased chord progression choices, are easy to create and sing, and sound harmonically pleasing. Other scale degrees sound great as well. However, pentatonic scales are a solid place to start.

The song “Psycho” by Post Malone uses a simple melodic motif that hits the chord tones of the G# major pentatonic scale. But it also uses other notes outside the chords. This combination keeps the melody interesting while also making it sound correct over the chords.

Melody and Rhythm

When writing melodies and motifs, it’s also essential to focus on rhythm. The rhythmic succession of notes gives your melodies groove, vibe, and character. You can control rhythm by placing notes along the horizontal MIDI grid in your DAW.

Improve the way rhythm influences your melodies with these tips:

1. Use Syncopation

Syncopation varies notes in a pattern that deviate from a regular expected rhythmic pattern. Without syncopation, your music can become repetitive and monotonous.

A syncopated rhythm will often use 8th and 16th note patterns. This method also places stress on weaker upbeats. This contrasts with placing notes on the “strong” or predictable downbeat of the quarter note.

2. Add Rhythmic Variation

The most memorable melodic and rhythmic motifs often switch between notes on the beat and syncopated notes. Rhythmic variation creates a sense of tension and release. For instance, the listener is drawn in by the syncopation and returned to a stable place with an emphasis on strong beats. This push and pull rhythm between the straight and syncopated notes feel comfortable and intriguing.

The verse of “Quarrel” by Moses Sumney uses syncopated notes followed by straight rhythms. This pattern also resolves the rhythmic tension of the off-beats at the beginning of the melody.

3. Combine Long and Short Notes

Combining long “Legato” notes and short “Staccato” notes give melodies a different emotional impact.

The verse melody of “PYT” by Michael Jackson uses a simple rhythmic motif that hits long notes and short rhythmic notes. This method keeps the melody interesting. It also makes it sound correct over the chords.

More Melody Writing Tips

What are the next steps? How do we put all these ideas together? And how do we create variation between sections using pitch and rhythm? Try these tips:

1. Use Call and Response

Good melodies feel effortless, like conversation or speech. Think of a melodic idea like a question and answer. Or, like the call and response of conversation.

A call and response succession creates musical tension and release. It consists of two distinct phrases. For example, a call phrase starts the melody like a question. Then the response phrase follows with a different, more conclusive resolution.

Analyzing phrase structures like ABAC or AABA is a helpful way to recognize melody creation. For example, the chorus of “Into You” by Ariana Grande uses the ABAC structure.

2. Creating Variation

Keep your melodies interesting by creating variation between the different sections of the song. For example, add slight changes to the melody in the intro, verse, chorus, breakdown, etc. to keep things interesting. Here are ideas that add variation:

The song “Don’t Wanna Fight” by Alabama Shakes has a steady melodic rise between the verse, pre-chorus, and chorus.

How to Find Melody Inspiration

Here are some other great melody techniques that will help you create strong and compelling melodies:

Conclusion

Improve your melody skills by practicing writing melodies often and regularly. Challenge yourself to write 3-4 melodies a day for a week. Or, write several melodies over a particular loop or chord progression. Just like a muscle, your melodic senses and instincts will improve when you use them frequently.

10 Mixing Mistakes That are Easy to Fix

Tue, 19 Feb 2019 17:08:00 GMT

This guide explains ten common mixing mistakes that can mess up your mix. Learn how to identify these mixing pitfalls and how to correct them.

What is Mixing?

Audio mixing is the process of combining multiple layers of audio to make one final track. The mixdown process makes sure all the parts in a song sound good together. Mixing involves balancing levels, panning sounds, equalizing, compressing, harmonics enhancing, fixing problems, and adding various effects. Mixing also involves automation, editing sounds in creative ways, and giving instruments their own space in the mix. The goal is to sculpt a balanced and unified arrangement ready for mastering .

Common Mixing Mistakes

Learning how to mix is challenging. There is an abundance of mixing tools and techniques . Plus, crafting a great mix takes time, effort, and skill. There’s no shortcut to mixing mastery, but there are several pitfalls worth avoiding along the way. Here are ten common mixing mistakes you should know when learning how to mix:

1. Mixing in Solo

Clicking the solo button and mixing tracks in isolation is not the best approach for making mix decisions. This habit is hard to break because it’s easier to hear a sound in isolation. However, a track that sounds awesome soloed may not sound as great when all the tracks play together.

Mixing in solo shifts your focus to making that track sound amazing on its own rather than making it fit in the mix. The goal is to make all the tracks in a mix sound great together. So, try to make mix decisions in context while all the layers are playing simultaneously. If it’s hard to hear the part you’re working on, raise the level fader until you get it sounding good. Then re-balance the levels after processing.

2. Forgetting About Stereo Width

Stereo width is essential to great-sounding mixes. It’s vital to give your mix a sense of dimension by placing different elements within the stereo field. The most effective way to create stereo width is by panning.

Like EQing, panning can give sounds their own space in the mix. It’s an easy way to add separation between various sounds. Conversely, keeping everything panned center will affect clarity, presence, and definition. It also introduces frequency conflicts. In addition, your mix will sound dull and boring.

Be careful when panning. Elements panned too wide may sound weak or inaudible on mono speaker systems. And as a general rule, keep your low-frequency elements center. For example, keep the kick and lower bass frequencies mono . Keeping low-frequency elements center retains punch, clarity, and power. It also reduces phasing issues and allows the low-end to translate on mono speaker systems. It’s also common to place the snare, lead vocals, guitar, and anything else that is the focus of attention near the center. Conversely, high-frequency elements are safe to pan wider across the stereo field.

3. Squashing Dynamic Range

Dynamic range is the difference between the loudest and the quietest parts of an audio signal. Dynamic range is essential for creating a mix that breathes, sounds natural, and is not ear fatiguing.

The most common way to control dynamic range is with compression . Applying compression reduces dynamic range, controls transients, shapes tone, glues sounds together, makes them sound louder, and more. However, over-compressing a mix reduces clarity, punch, and dynamic expression. It also fatigues your ears and limits resources for the mastering process.

For best results, avoid squashing the life out of your mix and individual sounds. Instead, try applying subtle amounts of compression at different stages. This technique spreads the workload over multiple compressors instead of a single compressor doing all the work.

4. Not Checking the Mix in Mono

Checking your mix in mono is vital. Listening to your mix in mono helps identify issues with the stereo image, phasing, volume, clarity, and more. Mixing in mono also helps ensure your song translates on mono speaker systems.

Check your mix in mono by inserting a mono utility plugin on the master at the end of the device chain. Playback the mix and switch between mono and stereo to identify mix problems.

5. Not Using Reference Tracks

Reference tracks are commercial ready songs that have been mixed and mastered. They’re used as a tool to either measure your mix against or as a roadmap to guide your arrangement.

Referencing is one of the best and most helpful mixing techniques to learn. Comparing your mix to a commercial ready track will help you achieve pro-sounding mixdowns and masters.

Reference tracks also guide your mix decisions. Quickly switch between your mix and a reference mix to help you identify what’s lacking. This technique is an easy way to reveal problems you may not have noticed.

6. Not Checking the Mix on Different Speakers

It’s vital that your mix translates on various speaker systems. Listen to your mix on several types of speakers. For example, check your mix in the car, on your laptop, headphones, smartphone, home stereo, etc. This technique will help you identify mix problems.

Also, take notes! After fixing any problems, test your mix again to ensure it sounds good on different sound systems.

7. Lack of Headroom

Managing your levels at every stage throughout the signal chain is vital. Gain staging ensures the audio signal flow is at an optimum level as it passes through the various processors and mixer stages. No track should be clipping! Also, check the master level to make sure your mix has enough headroom for mixing or mastering.

Check your track volume levels. Maintaining optimal levels prevents overloading the master. For best results, keep the master volume fader at ‘unity’ which is 0 dB. Also, try to keep the master volume level at about -3 to -6 dB when mixing. These level averages ensure you have enough headroom for the mastering process.

Monitoring the input and output levels of devices is also crucial. Avoid running a ‘hot’ signal into a plugin. Overloading a plugins input signal will give you poor results. Ensure there’s enough headroom for the plugin to process the audio. A plugin that’s clipping will affect all other plugins that come after it in the device chain.

Most plugins have an output gain control to adjust the output signal level. Many even have an input control to adjust the incoming signal level. Use these controls to balance levels across the entire device chain. If the plugin doesn’t have an output control, insert a gain plugin after it.

8. Monitoring Too Loud

Our ears perceive louder as better. That’s why it’s tempting to crank up the monitors while mixing. However, mixing at high volumes is damaging to your mix and hearing.

We hear frequencies differently at various volume levels. For instance, increasing volume accentuates lower and higher frequencies. That’s why everything sounds better loud. Mixing at high levels will make you think the music sounds amazing for the short term. That’s until you turn down the volume and discover it sounds unbalanced. Conversely, if your mix sounds great at lower levels, it will still sound great when you crank the volume.

Also, at high sound pressure levels (SPLs), your ears become fatigued. Instead, mix at lower levels. You’ll be able to mix longer without ear fatigue. You will also make better mix decisions when louder levels are not tricking your ears. Reserve cranking the volume up for pleasure or quick referencing.

9. Not Checking for Frequency Masking

Two or more sounds that occupy a similar area of the frequency spectrum compete for space within the mix. Sounds with competing frequencies is a phenomenon known as frequency masking. Masking causes frequency conflicts that make it hard to hear two or more sounds clearly. It also creates various other mix issues.

Sometimes it’s easy to hear when two sounds are competing. Other times, visual assistance can be helpful. Many spectrum analyzer plugins such as Voxengo SPAN have a feature that enables you to see multiple frequency responses. This feature helps you compare two or more sounds and identify the conflicting frequency areas.

10. Not Checking for Phase Problems

It’s crucial that you fix phase problems. Phase cancellation is an audio phenomenon that occurs when similar waveforms work against each other. Waveforms with the same frequency cancel each other out when they are out of phase. For example, if two identical signals are 100% or 180 degrees out of phase, they will completely cancel one another if combined.

Phase issues also cause elements in the mix to sound weak, thin, and hollow. Moreover, phasing causes sounds to lose volume, punch, and even disappear in the mix. Phase cancellation is a serious issue, and there are various reasons it occurs.

Check for phase issues with a phase metering plugin such as Voxengo Correlometer or by switching your mix in mono. Insert your metering plugin on the master or on single tracks to diagnose phase problems.

Bonus: Not Taking Breaks

Our ears get tired, and they become fatigued from long studio sessions. Ear fatigue leads to making mix mistakes. It’s crucial to give yourself 20 or 30-minute breaks every two hours or so. It’s also good to take longer breaks from a song. For example, take a day or even a week away from your song. When you come back to it, you’ll have fresh ears and will be able to hear details that weren’t noticeable before. Taking breaks also helps you reset and get back to being productive.

How to Ask for Music Feedback to Improve Your Songs

Wed, 13 Feb 2019 15:27:00 GMT

Music feedback will help you make better-informed decisions with your music. Learn how to ask for feedback on your songs and apply it to improve your music.

Why Music Feedback is Important

Music feedback is an essential part of artist development . Seeking feedback on your songs will help you improve your music and production skills.

As musicians, we become so immersed in the music production process it makes it hard to hear our music objectivity. Useful music feedback, both positive and negative will give you a fresh perspective on your work. It also drives artistic decisions, presents new ideas, and reveals problems that may need fixing. The feedback you receive can also help with writer’s block and provides continuous learning.

What Types of Music Feedback To Expect

Knowing what types of music feedback you may receive will help you apply it. There are three common critique types:

How to Ask for Feedback and Use It to Improve Your Music

Services such as SubmitHub and Crowd Review have grown to be viable options for music feedback. But how do you make sure the feedback you receive from people is constructive and useful? And how do ask for song feedback without burning bridges or annoying people? Last, how do you interpret feedback on your songs?

Here are ten things to remember when asking for feedback on your music:

1. Know Why You’re Sending That Specific Song for Feedback

Are you sending your song because you’re out of ideas? Or do you have many ideas and need help deciding? Specify this to the listener. For example, “I’m still working on this track and would like to know which of the drops at 1:15, 2:08, and 3:22 is the strongest.”

Furthermore, don’t ask for feedback if you’ve stopped working on the song. Don’t waste someone’s time if you’re not going to incorporate any suggested changes.

2. Know Why You’re Sending That Song to a Specific Person

Your listener should have experience relating to whatever technical needs that may need improvement. For example, if you want feedback on something specific with your mix, ask a mixing engineer. Or if you don’t like the lyrics, ask a songwriter.

Also, don’t discount song feedback from non-music people. You don’t have to ask people to give feedback because they have musical experience. However, best not to overwhelm them with technical jargon. Try to keep things to emotional or stylistic aspects. For example, ask “How does the song make you feel” or “What artist does the song sound like?” Conversely, you may not get useful feedback asking someone without musical knowledge what they think of your mix.

3. Know What Specific Aspects of the Song Need Work

Don’t expect the listener giving you music feedback to critique everything. Most feedback covers one or two aspects of a song. So, it’s crucial to be explicit about what areas of the song you need help improving. For example, ask “What do you think of the lyrical concept and song structure?” Asking for specific feedback will also give you in-depth advice that’s easier to apply.

Specific music feedback is always more useful than vague opinions like “this song is awesome!” Moreover, general feedback takes more time and can be overwhelming for a listener. It requires several listens and provides less helpful advice than technical feedback. Again, if it’s something technical, ask someone with that specific skill set.

4. Know Your Artistic Objective for the Song

Music evokes an emotional feeling. Knowing how your music makes people feel is important. Besides asking for technical feedback, ask how your song makes the listener feel. For example, does it make them feel happy or sad? Also, know what emotion you are trying to convey with your music? For example, ask “I’m trying to evoke x/y/z emotion. Does it come through?”

Evoking a specific emotion is the hardest part of writing for many songwriters and music producers. Also, bias plays a role in the way we feel about music. For example, we all have preferences on the genres or styles we like and dislike. So, if you think the feedback comes out of a certain bias, communicate that to the listener. Let them know your artistic objective.

5. Know Your Commercial Objective for the Song

If you have a specific commercial objective for the song, be specific about it. For example, are you releasing the song for club play, radio, sync/licensing , etc.? Let the listener know how you plan on using the song.

This feedback may be harder to apply. It’s also hard to get useful feedback from someone who doesn’t have experience in a particular industry. However, knowing your objective may influence the feedback, even if the listener doesn’t have a foot in that world.

6. Ask for Music Feedback in a Professional Manner

If you’re emailing, keep it simple, concise, straight-to-the-point, and polite. Many people will not read a wordy or sloppy email. 100 words or less is plenty.

Also, personalize your message. For example, write a sentence or two that compliments the listener. Let them know why you’re seeking their feedback.

Last, always thank people for their time!

7. Sending Your Music to People You Don’t Know

It’s crucial to send your music to people who will give you credible feedback. However, one day you’ll send your music to people you don’t know. Here are things to remember:

8. How to Respond to Music Feedback

As musicians, we pour our heart and soul into our music. It’s crushing to read negative feedback. However, it’s vital you respond well to any negative feedback.

If you plan on making a career in the music business, get used to criticism and hard truth. If you disagree with the feedback, thank the listener for their opinion and let him know you’ll keep it in mind. Be mindful and avoid attacking someone for giving their opinion. You won’t get honest feedback with that behavior.

Also, you don’t have to apply all the feedback you receive. But don’t deflect it either. A listener will never give you feedback again if you push back on their assessment. Remember, don’t waste someone’s time if you’re unwilling to accept critical feedback. So, avoid getting into a debate with the person taking the time to help you!

9. Build Your Network

Building relationships and networking in the music industry is always helpful. Get out and connect with people in the music industry, regardless of their status. Try to meet other artists, producers, DJ’s, publicists, booking agents, label staff, fans, and anyone else in the music scene. These connections could open new opportunities and provide more helpful feedback.

10. Music Feedback Services

Music feedback services like Crowd Review , Audiu , and SubmitHub offer detailed feedback and statistic reports. The in-depth feedback helps you make better-informed decisions about composition, production, and promotion.

Crowd Review track summary for Half-Truth “Get Up.”

Consider using Crowd Review or Audiu for works-in-progress and SubmitHub for finished/released tracks. These services are open to the public for a fee. Sending your songs to music-loving randos provide anonymous, relatively impartial feedback, and excellent analytics reports. Some things covered in the reports are mood, genre, songwriting, production quality, audience identity, and commercial potential.

The Take-Away

Be nice, specific, and know why you’re asking for feedback. Also, thank people for their time! And don’t be afraid to combine feedback from people you know with anonymous feedback from services like Crowd Review, Audiu, and SubmitHub.

How to Find the Best Studio Monitor Placement

Mon, 04 Feb 2019 15:55:00 GMT

Optimize your listening environment with proper studio monitor placement. This guide will help you find the best spot for your monitors and listening position.

Why is Studio Monitor Placement Important?

Building an optimal listening environment is crucial. Proper studio monitor placement is essential for creating mixes that translate on different speaker systems. It also ensures you’re hearing your music accurately. Conversely, incorrect studio monitor placement will cause problems in the frequency response of your room. A poor listening environment will also affect how you hear your music which leads to bad mix decisions.

This guide outlines five best practices to follow when setting up your studio monitors. However, these best practices may not work in every studio. But, these tips should provide a good starting point for setting up your listening environment.

1. Finding a Room’s Sweet Spot

The first step is to pick the best position for your workstation and studio monitors. Here are some general guidelines:

Place Your Monitors Away from the Walls

Sound waves that bounce off walls and other surfaces can either cancel each other out or multiply. Phase cancellation and frequency buildup are serious problems! Place your monitors eight or more inches away from walls to reduce sound wave reflection issues.

Center Your Monitors and Listening Position

Center your monitors and listening position between the sidewalls to achieve a balanced stereo image. This position ensures equal frequency reflections. A listening position too far left or right will create a buildup of frequencies on that side. While the area further away will have a dip in the frequency response. These two issues will give you an unbalanced representation of your mix.

Also, if your room is small and narrow, try centering the monitors along the widest wall. This position reduces side wall reflections.

Avoid Sitting in the Exact Center of the Room

Placing your monitors and listening position in the center of the room creates various problems. For example, some frequencies that bounce to the center simultaneously can cancel each other out. It also creates a null that causes a dip in the bass response.

Keep Your Listening Position Away from Corners

Avoid placing your studio desk in a corner. Keeping your monitors away from corners will help prevent bass buildup. Low frequencies build up where two reflective surfaces meet. This problem affects how you perceive the low end of your mix.

Positioning Monitors in Large Rectangular Rooms

Consider positioning the monitors along the shorter wall if you have a large rectangular room. The further away your listening position is from the back wall, the better. This position allows sound waves that reflect off the rear wall time to dissipate before reaching you. However, place your monitors on the widest wall if your room is small and the shorter wall is narrow to reduce side wall reflections.

The 38 Percent Rule

Try the 38% rule. For example, if your room is 10 feet long, position your monitors 3.8 feet from the front wall. This distance is a good starting point when finding the sweet spot.

2. The Equilateral Triangle Position

Position your studio monitors to form an equilateral triangle with your listening position. This studio monitor placement will put you in the sweet spot and give you an accurate stereo image.

For example, your listening position should be five feet from the monitors if your monitors are five feet apart. Keeping an equal distance between your monitors and your head is the ideal position.

Also, aim the monitors toward your ears at a 60-degree angle for best results. This position ensures you hear high frequencies accurately.

3. Position Your Studio Monitors at Ear Level

Position the monitor tweeters at ear level. High-frequency content is more directional than low-frequency content. So, directing the tweeters at your ears will allow you to hear higher frequencies more accurately. You can also tilt monitors down to direct the tweeters towards your ears if they are too high.

4. Keep Your Studio Monitors Upright

For best sound reproduction, position the monitors vertically. Don’t turn your monitors on their side unless the design allows it. Keeping monitors upright will also place you in the sweet spot and give you accurate sound reproduction.

Moreover, read the manual for your monitors. Some monitors can lay horizontal or vertical. Also, if you place your monitors on their side, position the tweeters toward the outside for best results.

5. Invest in Studio Monitor Stands

Placing monitors directly on your studio desk can cause several problems. For example, sound waves that reflect off your desk will not give you a clear and balanced stereo image. Monitors also transmit their vibrations to any surface they are resting on which could produce unwanted noise. Setting monitors on a desk may also place them below ear level, which is not ideal.

Studio monitor stands are an essential piece of studio equipment worth considering. There are a variety of studio monitor stands. Choose the type that best fits your needs. The three main types are:

Floor stands decouple your monitors from the surface. They allow you to place monitors behind your workstation on secure stands. They also isolate your monitors which prevents surface reflections and vibration.

Desk stands raise the monitors closer to ear level. They also help prevent reflections from interfering with your listening environment. Many are also cushioned to reduce surface vibration.

Isolation pads are foam or rubber stands that lift your monitors off the desk. They provide a cushion to reduce surface vibrations and reflections. Isolation pads are also the most cost-effective studio stand.

Calibrate Your Listening Environment

There is room correction software that measures and calibrates the frequency response of your monitoring. For example, Sonar Reference 4 uses a microphone to measure the frequency response of your room. It then creates an EQ curve that corrects any tonal imbalances. Monitoring through this custom curve will help you hear a more accurate representation of your mix. This method leads to better mixing decisions. It also makes it easier to achieve quality mixes that translate on different speakers.

Knowing the frequency response of your studio will also help you calibrate your monitors. Most studio monitors provide a set of controls on the back to adjust optimal settings.

Conclusion

There are exceptions to every rule. Use your ears to decide what the best studio monitor placement is for your room. Also, consider treating your studio with acoustic treatment. A combination of absorbers, diffusers, and bass traps will create an optimal listening environment.

10 Easy Tips for Editing MIDI Notes in Ableton Live

Thu, 24 Jan 2019 18:17:00 GMT

Learn how to work with MIDI notes in Ableton Live. This guide looks at ten creative MIDI editing techniques that will improve your music composition workflow.

Editing MIDI Notes in Ableton Live

Among Ableton Live ’s many versatile features is the unique ability to create and edit MIDI notes. Ableton Live offers various MIDI editing tools that make it easy to manipulate the harmonic or rhythmic content of a MIDI clip.

Discover new ways to create music and improve your workflow with the MIDI editing techniques outlined in this guide.

What is MIDI in Ableton Live

A MIDI clip in Live contains notes and controller data for playing a MIDI instrument. This instrument can be a virtual instrument or an external hardware instrument.

The MIDI clip also provides the device with a musical score to play. It includes note pitch, length, position, and velocity information. Moreover, MIDI is composed and edited in Live’s MIDI Note Editor.

1. Record MIDI Note Output From MIDI Effects

Ableton Live comes with a selection of MIDI effects. Devices such as Arpeggiator, Chord, Scale, and Random generate new note sequences, chords, or rhythmic patterns from incoming notes. Generating notes with these devices is a great way to discover musical ideas you may not have imagined.

However, the MIDI notes these devices output are not visible. You must record the MIDI note output on another track to edit the notes.

Follow these steps to record the MIDI note output from MIDI devices:

2. Multi-Clip Editing

One of the most exciting new features in Ableton Live 10 is multi-clip editing . You can now work with MIDI clips across multiple tracks within the Note Editor in both Session and Arrangement View.

Multi-clip editing helps you see melodic and rhythmic relationships between different clips. This ability is useful when creating and refining musical ideas. It also allows you to compare and edit MIDI clips across separate tracks quickly. In addition, you can select and edit multiple clips within the same track.

With multi-clip editing, you can select and view up to eight MIDI clips simultaneously. When multiple MIDI clips are selected:

3. Fold the MIDI Note Editor to any Scale

Ableton Live’s MIDI Note Editor makes it easy to display all the notes of a particular scale with the ‘Fold’ button. This technique ensures all the notes you choose will be harmonically correct. It also makes it easier to create harmonies and melodies. Especially, if you have little music theory knowledge!

Use the MIDI Note Editor as a scale reference guide with these steps:

4. Capturing MIDI

Another exciting feature added in Ableton Live 10 is Capture MIDI. Live is always listening to MIDI input on armed or input-monitored tracks. Capture MIDI lets you retrieve the material you’ve just played on those tracks. This feature is useful if you forgot to press the Record button before playing. It also lets you improvise or experiment freely without the stress of recording.

To capture the MIDI notes you just played, press the Capture MIDI button. Live will create a MIDI clip containing the notes you recently played. It even works when playback is stopped. No more losing ideas if you forgot to record!

Capture MIDI also functions differently depending on the state of the Live Set. Learn more about these different behaviors at the Ableton website.

5. Extracting Grooves to Create MIDI Patterns

The timing and volume information from any audio or MIDI clip can be extracted to create a new groove. You can apply the extracted groove in the Groove Pool to clips in your project. However, you can also use the extracted MIDI to create a new musical idea.

For example, take a percussion loop, extract the groove, and use the extracted MIDI to build a bassline pattern. The extracted groove will give you a rhythm. Edit this rhythm by moving the MIDI notes to different pitches.

Use extracted grooves to create new MIDI note patterns with these steps:

6. Stretching MIDI Notes

Ableton Live’s MIDI Note Editor makes it easy to shorten or lengthen MIDI notes. The MIDI Note Stretch feature allows you to scale multiple notes or a range of time. You can quickly adjust MIDI notes without having to edit each note to make them work in your project. It’s also a fun way to create rapid arpeggios or half-time rhythms!

Time stretch MIDI by selecting multiple notes or a range of time in the Note Editor. Note Stretch markers will appear, allowing you to scale the notes by dragging them horizontally. This technique is similar to warping audio.

Also, when the mouse is between the Note Stretch markers, a ‘pseudo’ stretch marker will appear. Dragging this marker stretches or compresses the material between the fixed markers. This move allows you to edit notes without affecting the material outside of them.

7. Deactivating MIDI Notes

Ableton Live allows you to deactivate or mute MIDI notes. Deactivating notes is an excellent way to experiment with grooves. It also makes it easier to reference multiple MIDI note patterns from different tracks in one place. For example, you can visually build a lead melody around a chord progression. Start by copying and pasting the chord MIDI notes into the lead MIDI clip. Then, deactivate all the chord notes by selecting them and clicking ‘0’ on your keyboard. You can now reference the note patterns without hearing them.

This method also works for analyzing note placements between two or more tracks. Seeing all the notes from multiple tracks makes it easier to identify notes out of sync or other issues. You can also achieve this with the multi-clip editing feature.

8. Invert and Reverse MIDI Notes

Ableton Live offers various MIDI transform tools in the Clip Box. They allow you to manipulate the notes within a MIDI clip. Two of these tools are Invert Notes and Reverse Notes.

The Invert and Reverse controls can also affect selected notes or a time range. If nothing is selected, they transform the entire clip. They work excellent for creating or auditioning variations. For example, you could copy a bass pattern and invert it to create a lead pattern. You can also use the same technique with the Reverse control.

9. Converting Audio to MIDI

Ableton Live’s features four conversion commands that convert audio into MIDI. They make it easier to discover, edit, and create new musical ideas. You can transform monophonic melodies, polyphonic harmonies, and drum beats into MIDI clips.

There are endless audio samples and sample packs available across the internet. With Live’s conversion commands, you can transform original audio into something new or unique. For example, you can resequence MIDI patterns, rearrange notes and chords, pitch notes, cut sections, and more.

There are two ways to convert audio to MIDI. Select the audio clip and choose a command from the Create Menu or right-click the clip to open the context menu.

Here are the four conversion commands:

Slice to New Midi Track

This command divides the original audio into slices and assigns them to MIDI notes in a Drum Rack. A new MIDI track is also created, containing a MIDI clip with one note for each slice.

This method opens many new editing possibilities. For example, you can resequence the slices to create new patterns. Also, each slice lives on its own chain in the Drum Rack. So, you can process the individual slices with different audio effects. You could also try inserting MIDI effects before the Drum Rack to generate ideas. For instance, the Arpeggiator and Random devices can create exciting results.

Note: Slicing differs from the other Convert commands. It uses the original audio to generate sound. The other commands create a MIDI clip that does not play the original sound. Instead, they extract the notes and use them to play an entirely different sound.

Convert Harmony to New Midi Track

This command identifies the pitches in polyphonic audio and creates MIDI notes for them on a new MIDI track. The track also comes preloaded with an Instrument Rack that plays a piano sound.

Convert Melody to New Midi Track

This command identifies the pitches in monophonic audio and creates MIDI notes for them on a new MIDI track. The track also comes preloaded with an Instrument Rack that plays a synthesizer sound.

Convert Drums to New Midi Track

This command extracts the rhythms from percussive audio and creates MIDI notes for them on a new MIDI track. The command also attempts to identify kick, snare, and hi-hat sounds. It then places them into the new clip, so they play the appropriate sounds in the preloaded Drum Rack. Live also places any additional sounds on a silent note lane for manual editing.

10. Duplicating MIDI Loops

Another useful transform tool in the Clip Box is Duplicate Loop. This control doubles the loop brace and the MIDI notes within the loop.

Duplicating a loop makes it easier to develop ideas and create variation. For example, create a simple 2 bar drum pattern, duplicate the loop, change or add a few notes, and repeat the process. It’s a fast way to transform a simple idea into something more interesting. Also, try this technique on chord progressions, basslines, leads, arpeggios, and any other material.

Conclusion

Experiment with the MIDI note editing techniques outlined in this guide to create new musical ideas. You may discover creative methods to use Live’s MIDI editing tools in unconventional ways. Happy music making!

5 Ways to Spark Inspiration in Ableton Live

Wed, 16 Jan 2019 16:10:00 GMT

Stuck on starting a song and need inspiration? This guide looks at five techniques that will help you jump-start creativity when starting a new song in Ableton Live.

How to Create a Song from a Blank Canvas

One daunting task as a music producer is starting a new project and staring at a blank canvas. Your mind asks where do I start, what genre, what bpm, what synth, and so forth?

Try these five music production techniques the next time you’re stuck gazing at a blank session in Ableton Live .

1. Converting Audio to MIDI

Ableton Live’s conversion commands are excellent for sparking inspiration. They make it easier to discover, edit, and create new musical ideas. You can transform monophonic melodies, polyphonic harmonies, and drum beats into MIDI clips.

There are endless audio samples and sample packs available across the internet on websites like Splice . With Live’s conversion commands, you can transform original audio into something new or unique. For example, you can resequence MIDI patterns, rearrange notes and chords, pitch notes, cut sections, and more.

There are two ways to convert audio to MIDI. Select the audio clip and choose a command from the Create Menu or right-click the clip to open the context menu. There are four conversion commands available:

Slice to New MIDI Track

This command divides the original audio into slices and assigns them to MIDI notes in a Drum Rack. A new MIDI track is also created, containing a MIDI clip with one note for each slice.

Convert Harmony to New MIDI Track

This command identifies the pitches in polyphonic audio and creates MIDI notes for them on a new MIDI track. The track also comes preloaded with an Instrument Rack that plays a piano sound.

Convert Melody to New MIDI Track

This command identifies the pitches in monophonic audio and creates MIDI notes for them on a new MIDI track. The track also comes preloaded with an Instrument Rack that plays a synthesizer sound.

Convert Drums to New MIDI Track

This command extracts the rhythms from percussive audio and creates MIDI notes for them on a new MIDI track. The command also attempts to identify kick, snare, and hi-hat sounds. It then places them into the new clip so they play the appropriate sounds in the preloaded Drum Rack. Live also places any additional sounds on a silent note lane for manual editing.

2. Generate Random MIDI Notes

Creating new harmonies and melodies can be challenging or overwhelming. There are infinite note and chord combinations . Instead of twisting your brain in a knot figuring out ideas, try generating melodies and harmonies with Live’s MIDI devices.

Live offers several MIDI devices that can generate ideas you may not have imagined. With a single note, create endless ideas to jump-start the composition process. The best tools for the job is Live’s Random, Chord, Scale, and Arpeggiator devices. Try using all four devices or a combination of them to generate notes and chords.

These steps put this technique into practice by randomizing MIDI note patterns:

3. Use Other Ableton Live Projects as a Starting Point

Open an older project or a project from another artist to use as a template for a new song. A finished project has everything set up and ready to go. Use it as a guide to creating something new. This technique also speeds up workflow !

For example, the rhythm foundation is already built. Try swapping out samples, change note placement, and make other creative decisions. The goal is to create a new drum group from an existing one.

This move also applies to the other elements that make up the song. For instance, swap out instruments, edit or replace MIDI sequences, record audio and process it with existing effect chains, etc. The creative decisions are up to you.

In addition, a template project has a song structure. Use the existing song structure as a roadmap when arranging new ideas. Again, the goal is to use a finished song as a palette to inspire new ideas.

4. Use MIDI Files and Sample Packs

Ignite your initial creative spark when starting a song with MIDI files and samples . There is an abundance of pre-made material online that will give you instant inspiration!

For example, MIDI files can provide melodies, chord progressions, drum grooves, basslines, pads, completed songs, and more. Use the material to discover new ideas and kick-start your creativity. Start by dropping different MIDI files into your project. Then edit, combine, and rearrange the clips or notes to build something new.

MIDI files are also a valuable educational resource. Analyze them to understand chord structures, deconstruct drum patterns, understand supporting melodies, and more.

Sample packs also provide material that will help you discover fresh ideas. For example, drop in various samples to sketch out an initial loop. After developing the loop, you can always swap out the samples or convert them to MIDI. Again, there are endless possibilities.

5. Create a Default Live Set

Inspiration can spark at any time, and it’s important to lay out your ideas quickly while they are fresh. Creating a custom default template with device and track defaults in advance allows you to jump in and create music while your creative energy is flowing.

Ableton Live default templates also make it easier to start every project with convenience. They save valuable time by reducing the repetitive and tedious routines of setting up tracks, groups, routing, and devices every time you open a new Live Set. Having your tools ready improves workflow and keeps the creative momentum going!

Conclusion

Ableton Live’s intuitive feature set allows artists of all skill levels and styles to work with music efficiently. The tips in this guide scratch the surface of what’s possible. So, take these song starter ideas and develop them to fit your workflow. Good luck creating!

Mental Health Awareness in the Music Industry

Wed, 09 Jan 2019 15:44:00 GMT

Mental illness claims the lives of too many in the music industry. Mental health awareness has never been more critical. Watch this panel discussion on mental health in the music industry.

Mental Health in the Music Industry

It’s no news that the life of an artist can be challenging. On the way up, the struggle is real. Making money can be tough. Parents and are often unsupportive. Long hours spent in isolation while perfecting your craft. And, the music business is constantly changing and full of big egos.

Once an artist becomes successful, the challenges don’t go away. Demanding tour schedules take a toll on physical health. Increased time is spent away from family and true friends. Pressure builds from managers, agents, and record labels to keep the cash machine running. Sex, drugs, and alcohol become more readily available and even encouraged as part of the rockstar lifestyle.

With this unique set of circumstances awaiting artists on their journey, the importance of mental health cannot be overstated. And not just for artists, but for everyone involved in the music industry. Anxiety, depression, and substance abuse are accepted (and even expected) as a regular part of the music community. We’ve lost far too many icons and great people along the way in this noble pursuit of bringing great art to the world. It’s time for things to change!

Fortunately, we are seeing this conversation make its way into the public arena. More artists, music industry professionals, and publications are raising awareness about the importance of mental health, and we are excited to support this movement.

ICON Collective recently partnered with the ‘ Back to Back with Willy Joy ‘ podcast to host a panel at ICON discussing mental health. It was a powerful dialogue that explored real-life challenges the panelists have faced and the strategies they’ve used to overcome them. The guests included Flosstradamus, Getter, Aryay, and Blaise DeAngelo (co-founder of Areté).

What is Multiband Compression and Why You Need It

Tue, 08 Jan 2019 15:25:00 GMT

What is multiband compression, and why should you use it? This guide looks at five ways multiband compression can improve your mix.

Understanding Multiband Compression

What is multiband compression? Why do we need it? Is it better than our good old friend standard compression? Explore the ways multiband compression can make your tracks sound outstanding. Learn what a multiband compressor is and the various ways you can use it.

Dynamics play a significant role in music. Knowing how to control and shape dynamics is crucial. And compressors are the essential tools used to treat dynamics. However, standard compressors can be limiting (pun intended) compared to the other dynamics processing tools.

This guide introduces you to multiband compression. It also offers tips on how to treat various sounds with multiband compressors .

Audio Compression Basics

Compression is the act of reducing the dynamic range of an audio source to make the average volume louder. Dynamic range is the difference between the loudest and quietest levels of an audio signal. Compressors make sounds louder by reducing the loudest levels and amplifying the quietest levels. Compression can also shape sounds, change their tone, and control transients. A compressor’s main controls include:

What is Multiband Compression?

Multiband compression is a more advanced form of compression. A multiband compressor splits the frequency spectrum into separate bands. Each frequency band also has dedicated compression settings. Applying different amounts of compression to the separate frequency ranges gives you more control. A multiband compressor is essentially an EQ and a compressor in one.

Why Use Multiband Compression?

Multiband compression is more flexible than standard single-band compression. The results sound more natural and transparent. You also have greater control over shaping and managing dynamics. For instance, standard compressors affect the entire frequency spectrum of an audio signal. Whereas multiband compressors enable you to treat specific frequency ranges of an audio signal. For example, you can compress the low frequencies while preserving the high frequencies, or vice versa.

Another example: Say the top end on your snare is too harsh but standard compression causes it to lose punch. For this reason, multiband compression will work better. You can compress the high-frequency band more than the mid and low bands. In turn, the top end will sound less harsh and dynamic. You’ll also preserve the snares punch because the mid and low bands will have less compression. It’s kind of the ultimate sculpting technique for your audio.

The benefits of multiband compression are endless. There’s a reason top producers and audio engineers use multiband compression to get the sound they want. So let’s look at five examples where multiband compression can improve your mix.

1. Multiband Compression on Your Drum Bus

If you’re not using multiband compression on your final drum bus, you might be missing out. Treating your drum bus with multiband compression is a great way to glue all the drum elements, balance frequencies, and add excitement.

No two drums are alike, so be careful when applying the same amounts of compression across all your drums. Sure I like to use Live’s Glue Compressor as the first effect on my drum bus. However, when it comes to controlling dynamics, I use Waves C4 Multiband Compressor Plugin .

For example, you can hit the low-end hard with compression without affecting the high-end every time the kick hits. With a single-band compressor, if you increase the kick level, the top-end could become too loud and compete with other elements in the mix.

Furthermore, how you apply multiband compression depends on your song and how you want your drums to sound. For example, I love nice and punchy drums. I start by setting a fast attack and a slower release on the higher bands where my cymbals and hats sit. Sounds in this higher range can tire the listener’s ear when they’re too loud. So, aggressive compression here can be beneficial.

Next, I move to the midrange frequencies where my kick and snare sit. I want to hear that punch, so I’ll apply aggressive compression. However, I would set a slower attack to let the snare’s initial transient punch through before getting compressed.

Last, I’ll treat the low-end with small amounts of compression if needed. For instance, most electronic kicks are full enough and may not need processing. However, a live recorded kick would benefit from compression. Compressing its low-end will beef it up and give it more impact in the mix.

2. Mixing Vocals with Multiband Compression

Mixing vocals can be tricky. No two vocalists are alike. Vocal performances are also very dynamic, making it hard to get them to sit in the mix. For this reason, multiband compression works excellent at shaping and controlling vocals.

For example, you can compress specific frequency ranges to shape a vocal performance as a singer goes through different registers. You can also use multiband compression when elements in the same frequency range are clashing. For example, say you have a female vocalist with a high voice that gets masked by your synths. Raising and lowering the volume throughout your vocal track to get it to sit in the mix is a pain. Instead, let a multiband compressor do the work for you. For instance, boost the vocal top end with a medium attack and a medium-fast release. Then boost the gain to make her voice louder than the top end of your synths. This way you’re affecting only the masked frequencies and not the entire vocal.

3. Multiband Compression and OTT on Synth Groups

Multiband compression does a great job at gluing groups of sounds together and balancing levels. For example, apply multiband compression on synth stacks or various instrument layers to make them sound unified and cohesive. Unlike standard compression, multiband compression also has more control of handling a full-spectrum sound. Let’s look at a specific technique using OTT compression.

If you’ve been in the producing/mixing game for any amount of time, I’m sure you’ve heard of the infamous OTT. At this point, it is almost a cliché to use it according to some. However, I find it to be a fantastic tool.

If you’re not familiar with this name, the multiband compressor in Ableton Live has a preset called OTT (over the top). This style of multiband compression combines upward expansion and downward compression to squash a signal. It does this on three different bands.

Moreover, the OTT does an excellent job at gelling synth groups, brightening up the top end, and adding excitement. However, be careful when putting this preset on your group. OTT will make things LOUD and brings various harmonics to the forefront of your mix. In addition to squashing synths dynamics, OTT also brings up all your reverbs and delays. In turn, this move makes those elements sound like synth layers of their own. It’s an exciting technique!

4. Mixing Bass with Multiband Compression

The low end can make or break your mix. It’s crucial to get your kick and bass correlating with each other. You can control kick and bass relationships with sidechaining and levels. But at a certain point, you may need a multiband compressor to take over.

Multiband compression works great at tightening low frequencies, reducing boom, and adding power. Treating the low-end with a dedicated band also allows you to apply heavy compression without affecting the midrange frequencies, which carry the attack of the sound. This move is vital when you want a consistent low-end level and a dynamic midrange.

Multiband compression will also bring cohesiveness to your mix and allow you to tighten up the low-end. For example, group your kick and bass and compress everything below 100 Hz. Be aggressive, try 6-10 dB of gain reduction and apply makeup gain to match levels. Also, pay attention to your attack and release times. Faster attack times can cause the kick to lose punch. Using a multiband compressor on your master is another place to achieve this technique.

5. Mastering with Multiband Compression

Using multiband compression on your master bus for the mastering process is also beneficial. I like to set slower attack times, faster release times, and small amounts of compression on each band. 1-3 dB of gain reduction is sufficient.

The mid band around 500 Hz to 2 kHz is where a lot of a songs body lies. Applying some light compression in this frequency range adds body and gives my tracks power. I tend to set medium to slow attack times, fast release times, and a 2-3 dB gain boost. The result tightens the mid-range, beefs it up, and adds level.

Adding gain to the different bands can also help you sculpt your sound. For example, apply compression to get everything under control, then boost and reduce levels where needed. This move works better than boosting with an EQ because compression is controlling your dynamics first. You’ll be able to get more gain in a controlled way.

Also, anything you do on your master can drastically change the overall sound of your song, so be careful. Minor moves on the master go a long way!

Conclusion

Multiband compression is a simple tool that can seem daunting. But once you figure it out, a whole new world to mixing opens. Learning how to use multiband compression will also help get your tracks to a professional level. You can preserve dynamics and sculpt your sound, unlike any other audio effect. While standard compression can help get the job done, multiband compression will excel when you want to get specific. Remember though, always use your ears first before trying anything.

Learn How to Improve Your Mix with Spectrum Analyzers

Thu, 03 Jan 2019 17:44:00 GMT

What are spectrum analyzers? Learn how to use spectrum analyses to identify problematic frequencies, balance a mix, measure room acoustics, and more.

Mixing with Spectrum Analyzers

Getting your mix to sound great and translate on different speaker systems can be challenging. Especially without a proper listening environment and a decent monitoring system.

Your ears are the best tools you possess for making music. Trusting your ears is essential. However, certain times require visual insight into the frequency makeup of a mix. Using a spectrum analyzer can show you frequencies which are inaudible or difficult to perceive. They also help you make mix decisions without the influence of room acoustics, monitor limitations, love for the song, and other factors.

What is a Spectrum Analyzer?

A spectrum analyzer is a measurement tool that displays real-time frequency analysis of incoming audio signals. Spectrum analyzers display the results in a graph. The horizontal axis shows frequency and pitch measured in Hertz. The vertical axis shows the amplitude of those frequencies measured in decibels.

A variety of spectrum analyzers offer different and useful features. Many EQ plugins also include integrated spectrum analyzer displays. Besides your DAW’s stock analyzers, there are also excellent spectrum analyzer plugins available. Check out iZotope Insight , MeldaProduction MMultiAnalyzer , and Voxengo SPAN .

What is the Frequency Spectrum?

The frequency spectrum represents the range of audible frequencies. The typical human hearing range is 20 Hz to 20,000 kHz.

Many charts divide the frequency spectrum into seven bands. These bands describe the tonal qualities of each frequency range. The seven frequency bands are:

How to Use Spectrum Analyzers

Audio spectrum analysis is a useful aid in music production, mixing, and mastering processes. There are several ways to use a spectrum analyzer.

Learn how to use a spectrum analyzer to improve your mix or listening environment with these five methods:

1. Identify Resonance Problems

Resonance is a buildup of energy at a particular frequency. Some resonances sound pleasing and add to the character of a sound. However, unpleasant resonances cause problems.

Addressing harsh resonance spikes is crucial. They cause several mix issues and are unpleasant sounding. Resonances are easy to spot on a spectrum analyzer. They show up as sharp, narrow peaks in the upper midrange or broader bumps in the lower mids and lows.

Identify problematic resonances by inserting a spectrum analyzer plugin at the end of the device chain. Look for frequency spikes and address them with an EQ, filter, compressor, or other processing plugins.

Examining resonance peaks is also helpful for finding the fundamental frequency of a signal.

2. Identify Unwanted Low Frequencies and Rumble

Poor listening environments or monitors that don’t reproduce the lower spectrum make it hard to identify problematic low frequencies. Figuring out where to highpass filter sounds with excess low frequencies or rumble can be tricky sometimes. Set the cutoff frequency too low, and you risk leaving frequencies that cause issues. While cutting too much robs the sounds fullness and body.

A spectrum analyzer can help you spot unwanted frequencies. Insert a spectrum analyzer plugin at the end of the device chain. Next, playback a section of the song where the track plays its lowest note or chord. Look for the lowest frequency bump on the analyzer’s display. This bump represents the sounds fundamental frequency. You can safely cut anything below it without affecting the body and timbre of the sound. This technique also works for identifying and cutting excess high frequencies.

3. Compare Two Frequency Responses

Ensuring the different elements in a mix are not conflicting with one another is crucial. Each sound in the mix should occupy its own sonic space, both in the frequency spectrum and in the stereo field.

Two or more sounds that occupy a similar area of the frequency spectrum often compete. Sounds with competing frequencies is a phenomenon called frequency masking . Masking makes it hard to perceive two or more sounds clearly. It also causes various mix issues.

Sometimes it’s easy to hear when two sounds are competing. Other times, visual assistance can be helpful. Many spectrum analyzer plugins have a feature that enables you to see multiple frequency responses. This feature helps you compare two or more sounds and identify the conflicting frequency areas.

This method requires a spectrum analyzer plugin that has an external sidechain input. Insert the spectrum analyzer plugin at the end of the device chain. Then, route the signal from the track you want to compare into the plugin using the sidechain input. After identifying the problem areas, use an EQ to achieve separation and clarity.

4. Examine the Tonal Balance of a Mix

Tonal balance describes the relative distribution of energy across the frequency spectrum. The interaction of all the parts of a song contributes to the overall tonal balance. It’s also responsible for the perceived timbre of a mix or sound. Moreover, tonal balance is key to a great-sounding mix that will translate across different speaker systems.

A tonally balanced mix has a reasonably consistent frequency response. It also has perceived equal loudness across the frequency spectrum. Conversely, a mix with poor tonal balance may have noticeable peaks and dips in the frequency response. For example, an emphasized low-end or a lacking midrange. Lower frequencies should blend smoothly with higher frequencies.

Spectrum analyzers are the primary tools for monitoring the tonal balance of a mix. Insert a spectrum analyzer plugin at the end of the device chain on the mater channel. Then, set the spectrum response to a slow speed so it displays an average reading. A slower response time averages short-term peaks and shows a smoother frequency curve. When observing the analyzer, look for significant peaks or valleys. Then address these areas in the mix with an EQ.

You can also use a spectrum analyzer when mastering to compare your song to a commercial reference track . Route the reference song into the analyzer to compare its frequency response to your mix. This technique will help you get your mix to a commercial level.

5. Measure Rooms Acoustics

You can use spectrum analysis to help reveal the frequency response of your listening environment. There are several acoustic measuring tools and methods used to analyze the frequency response of a room. Knowing the unique frequency curve of your room is useful. It helps you know where to compensate for the bumps and gaps when mixing. It also reveals how your room acoustics are affecting your mixes. Installing acoustic treatment may be an option to look into if you have a poor listening environment.

Conclusion

The visual feedback that a spectrum analyzer provides can help you make better mixing decisions. However, trust your ears and use visual feedback as a supporting tool to confirm what you hear or don’t hear.

Over time and with experience, your ears will tell you what needs attention. Until then, use spectrum analyzers to guide your mixing and mastering decisions.

Song Finishing Checklist: 10 Ways to Finish Your Mix

Wed, 02 Jan 2019 15:49:00 GMT

This song finishing checklist will help you work through your mix and take it to completion. Use it to identify and fix issues with your project.

How Do You Know When Your Song is Finished?

One of the toughest tasks in music production is deciding when a mix sounds finished. Knowing when your mix sounds finished is an artistic judgment. However, there are techniques to help you get your music over the finish line.

Follow this ten-step song finishing checklist before sending your mix off for mastering .

1. Check Your Levels

Play your song and check all your levels . Ensure the audio signal flow is at an optimum level without clipping as it passes through the various processors and mixer stages. Also, check the master level to make sure your mix has enough headroom for mixing or mastering.

Monitor Track Levels

For best results, keep the master volume fader at “unity” which is 0 dB. Also, try to keep the master volume level at about -3 to -6 dB when mixing. These level averages ensure you have enough headroom for the mastering process. Also, monitor your track volume levels. Maintaining optimal levels prevents overloading the master. You can also keep track volume faders at 0 dB for the highest resolution and then use a gain plugin to adjust levels.

Monitor Device Inputs and Outputs

Monitoring the input and output levels of devices is also crucial. Avoid running a “hot” signal into a plugin. Overloading a plugins input signal will give you poor results. Ensure there’s enough headroom for the plugin to process the audio. A plugin that’s clipping will affect all other plugins that come after it in the device chain.

2. Check Your Mix in Mono

Bonus Mixing Tip: Placing your low frequencies centrally in the mix is important. Kick and lower bass frequencies should always be in mono for several reasons. Keeping low frequencies in mono retains punch, helps avoid phasing issues and allows the low-end to translate on mono speaker systems. Also, low frequencies carry a lot of energy and will occupy more space in a mix than higher frequencies. Centering them clears space for elements with stereo information.

3. Check Each Track in Solo

Soloing each track helps identify any mix issues. Check for clicks, pops, hums, rumble, digital distortion, and other unwanted noises. The mastering process can emphasize these noises if not fixed. Many of these mix issues are caused by:

Soloing tracks and bringing them in one at a time also reveals mix issues. For example, set a loop around the main section of your song. Then bring in one element at a time to make sure all the parts sound clear and work together. This move may reveal an element buried in the mix or masked by another sound.

4. The Mute Test

The mute test is similar to the soloing technique. Set a loop around a section of your song. Play the song with all the elements unmuted. Next, mute one element at a time to hear how each part contributes to the mix. Listen for any difference in the mix when you mute a part.

If you find an element that doesn’t contribute to the mix, delete it. If you don’t need it, delete it! Unnecessary sounds take up valuable headroom.

5. Check Your Music Arrangement

Music arrangement is the art of taking your musical ideas and laying them out along a timeline to build a final piece of music. When working in Ableton Live, the Arrangement View provides a space to arrange, edit, and finish songs.

Here are a few things to check your musical arrangement for:

6. Check for Phase Issues

Phase issues also cause elements in the mix to sound weak, thin, and hollow. They also lose volume and punch or disappear in the mix. Phase cancellation is a serious issue, and there are various reasons it occurs.

Check for phase issues with a phase metering plugin or by switching your mix in mono. Insert your metering plugin on the master or single tracks to diagnose phase problems.

7. Compare Your Mix with a Reference Track

Reference tracks are professionally mixed and mastered songs you use as a tool to either measure your mix against or use as a roadmap to guide your arrangement.

Referencing is one of the best and most helpful mixing techniques to learn. Comparing your mix to a commercial ready track will help you achieve professional-sounding mixdowns and masters.

8. Listen to Your Mix on Different Speaker Systems

It’s vital that your mix translates on various speaker systems. Listen to your mix on several different types of speakers. For example, check your mix in the car, on your laptop, headphones, smartphone, home stereo, etc. This technique will help you identify any mix issues or inconsistencies.

Also, take notes! After fixing any problems, test your mix again to ensure it sounds good on different sound systems.

9. Add Silence to the Beginning and End of the Mix

Inserting one or two bars of silence at the beginning of your mix is important. Adding silence gives plugins time to kick in. Sometimes latency issues cause plugins to lag. It also ensures the first note of the mix does not get cut off.

It’s also essential to leave enough silence at the end of your mix. This move gives time for reverb and delay tails to fade out. Check the end of your mix to ensure nothing has been cut short.

10. Housekeeping and File Management

Staying organized is important. File management helps keep your projects organized, reduces file size, improves CPU performance, removes clutter, and more.

Housekeeping is the final step in the music production process. Ableton Live ’s File Manager offers several convenient tools for managing projects. You can perform these tasks:

Bonus: Take a Break and Have a Fresh Listen

Forcing yourself through a session without taking breaks can become counter-productive. Taking breaks is healthy and necessary to recharge your creative energy.

Take some time away from the studio to clear your head and not think about music. It can be 30 minutes, a day, a week or a month. Then jump back in the pilot seat with fresh ears and a clear head.

Listen to the full mix with two perspectives. On the first pass, listen for any mix issues. Then on the second pass, focus on the big picture instead of small technical tweaks. Stop being a mixer and enjoy the music.

After listening to your mix objectively, ask yourself these questions:

Song Finishing Checklist Takeaways

The truth is, your song is never truly finished. But there is a point where it’s good enough. This song finishing checklist will help you systematically work through your mix and take it to completion.

How to License Music for Video Games

Tue, 18 Dec 2018 15:24:00 GMT

What is sync licensing and how do you license music? Get a better understanding of music licensing and learn how to get your songs placed in video games.

How to Get Your Songs Placed in Video Games

Collecting royalties from digital music sales and song streams is not the only way to make money with your music. Licensing your music for TV shows, movies, commercials, video games, trailers, YouTube, and other types of visual media can generate significant revenue streams.

Music licensing has become one of the smartest ways for independent musicians to earn money. It’s also one of the fastest growing opportunities for emerging artists to make money and get discovered. You can receive licensing revenue through initial fees and performance royalties while also gaining valuable exposure.

What is sync licensing and how does it work? This guide will help you understand music licensing. It also offers advice on how to get your music placed in video games.

What is Music Licensing?

Music licensing gives legal permission to use copyrighted music. Licensing music also ensures the owners of copyrights receive royalty payments for the use of their work.

There are six types of music licenses: synchronization license, master license, mechanical license, public performance license, print license, and theatrical license.

License Music For Video Games

Licensing music for video games and other types of visual media requires two licenses: A Synchronization License (Sync) and a Master Use License.

Music licensing agreements require both licenses because every recorded song has two copyrights:

What is a Synchronization License (Sync)?

A Synchronization License or Sync License allows the right to use a copyrighted musical composition in movies, television shows, commercials, video games, and any other visual media. It is an agreement between the owner of the copyrighted music (copyright holder) and the licensee who wants to place the music.

However, a Sync License does not include the right to use a master recording with the visual media. A licensee will also need a Master Use License before using copyrighted music.

What is a Master Use License?

A Master Use License is an agreement between the owner of the original master recording and the person seeking permission to use the recording. Any use of protected music in visual media, whether it’s a full song or short sample, will need a Master Use License. An artist owns the master rights to their songs. However, if they sign a record deal, then the record label takes ownership of the master rights.

Benefits of a Sync License

The video game industry has been the fastest growing area of the entertainment business. And music plays a significant part in many of these video games. Below are some benefits of sync licensing:

What is a Music Supervisor?

Understanding the role of a music supervisor is essential if you’re looking to get your music placed in video games.

A music supervisor places music in visual media such as movies, television shows, video games, commercials, and other types of visual media. They select the appropriate music for a project and secure the licenses to use it. A music supervisor oversees all music-related tasks.

For example, music supervisors have music expertise, knowledge of music licensing, and negotiation skills. They work with the directors, producers, or creative teams of the visual media to determine the best music needed for a project. Once the music gets approved, they approach the copyright holder to seek music licensing permission and work out financial details.

A music supervisor will also work with a composer or musician to create original music sometimes. They book a studio, hire the musicians and singers, and consult with sound engineers to create the original score.

The music supervisor is essentially the gatekeeper you must get past before a director considers your work.

What is a Music Licensing Company?

Getting your music into the ears of music supervisors can be difficult. Music supervisors prefer working with dedicated sync agents and music licensing companies. Music licensing companies give you representation and their music placement knowledge. They also have trusted relationships with music supervisors, filmmakers, broadcasters, creative agencies, and brands. Moreover, a music licensing company will pitch your music to the buyer community, take care of sync licensing and music clearance, and make sure your music is labeled with the correct metadata.

Some top music licensing companies include:

Music Licensing Preparation Tips

Takeaways

Immerse yourself in the world of gaming and video game music. But before going into sync licensing, it’s crucial that you know how the sync business works and how much a song is worth. Research music licensing and sync deals. Also, become familiar with the industry standards and trends, so you don’t miss an opportunity. Scoring the right sync deal will bring in new revenue streams, boost exposure, and grow your fanbase. Good luck!

How to Get Your Music Featured on Blogs

Tue, 11 Dec 2018 15:22:00 GMT

Learn how to submit your music to a blog. Boost your career and get your music featured on blogs with these essential music submission tips.

Get Your Music Featured on Blogs and Boost Your Career

One of the biggest challenges as an artist is getting your music heard. Getting noticed in the music industry takes work. You have to employ different marketing tools to keep up with the competition.

Learning different ways to promote your music is essential if you want to make it in the music business. And getting your music featured on blogs is one effective way to promote your music and reach new audiences.

Gaining support from a music blog will help you increase exposure, establish credibility, and open new opportunities. However, it can be challenging to get your music featured on a blog. Especially with so many emerging acts striving to get heard. So, how do you submit music to a blog? And, how can you find the music blogs that will feature your music? This guide breaks down all the essential steps of scoring a feature on a music blog.

1. Music Submission Preparation

Preparing your music or video for submission is an essential first step. Before you submit your work to a blog, ensure your music is sounding the best it possibly can. Avoid submitting unfinished or poor quality tracks. Make sure your tracks are finished, mixed down, and mastered. Send your best work!

Next, get all of your release information together. Include the release date, hi-res artwork, a press release or release bio, an artist bio , hi-res press photo, a link to stream your music, social media links, and your contact details. Even better, create an electronic press kit (EPK) . Also, most blog writers prefer private links to stream music over downloading files. For example, a private DropBox or SoundCloud link.

Lastly, DO NOT submit music with copyrighted material unless it’s cleared for use. Blog writers will reject tracks that could land them in legal trouble.

2. Music Blog Research

Many tastemaker music blogs specialize in a specific genre and style. It’s essential that you research a music blog before sending them your music. It’s also crucial that your music aligns with the music they feature. It makes zero sense sending a future bass track to a hip hop blog.

Also, research artists that produce the same style of music as you. Find what blogs feature their music or interview them. Doing this will help you track down blog writers that cover your style of music.

Lastly, compile a list of the blogs you want your music featured on the most. Familiarize yourself with those blogs and the type of music they feature. Look for their website, SoundCloud, Facebook Page, Twitter account, and other channels. Also, find names and contact information for blog writers and editors. Lastly, see if there is a dedicated submission form and locate their music submission guidelines!

The more you know about the music blog, the better. For instance, the information you collect will help you personalize your message during the submission process. It will also help you reach the right people.

3. Follow Music Submission Guidelines

Once you have your list of music blogs, locate and carefully read their music submission guidelines. Most blogs have music submission guidelines displayed on their website.

4. Submit Exclusive Music

Getting your music featured is beneficial for the music blog and the artist. A successful feature brings visitors to the blog, and the artist gains exposure. However, music blogs like to feature new music that is exclusive to their platform. Blog writers want music that will drive traffic and increase visitors. Your music has a better chance of being featured if it’s a new release, unreleased, exclusive to their publication, or never published before. So, offer blog writers a track that you have not made public yet to increase your chances of getting featured.

Furthermore, give yourself a couple of weeks of lead time. For instance, submit your music to blogs 3-4 weeks in advance when looking to score a music premiere or exclusive.

5. First Impressions Matter

Ensure your message, artist information, and artwork look professional. Everything you put out sends a message about you, so make sure it’s the right one.

Carefully proofread your music submission before clicking send. Look for spelling errors, grammar mistakes, and other issues that could reflect poorly on you. A message filled with spelling errors, incomplete sentences, slang, and inappropriate language gives the impression that you’re not professional. It also shows that you’re not serious about your musical aspirations. Moreover, blog writers don’t want to fix a press release riddled with spelling and grammar errors.

Have someone proofread your message. Sometimes it can be difficult to spot errors in your own writing. Ensure your music submission is clear, concise, informative, and as professional as possible!

6. Personalize Your Message

Music blogs can receive dozens or even hundreds of music submissions a day. Personalizing your message is vital to stand out from the competition.

Like any email, the golden rule is to keep them simple, concise, straight-to-the-point, and polite. Below are some best practices:

Lastly, avoid sending mass mailings to multiple music blogs. This approach is not effective and often rejected. Blog writers are keen to spot lazy attempts using marketing software and unsolicited emails. Put in the effort and personalize your email to the specific blog writer or editor that you’re asking to feature you.

7. Send Links Instead of Files

Before you send anything, find out how the blog accepts music submissions. Most blog writers prefer private streaming links to your hosted music. For example, private SoundCloud links with the ‘Downloads’ feature enabled has become an industry standard. Moreover, sending a link to stream your track(s) is fast and easy. The easier you make it for someone to access and listen to your music the better.

Also, avoid attaching your tracks to emails unless the music blog prefers it. Emails with attachments are often deleted for security purposes or end up in the Spam folder. Moreover, files can take long to download, clog inboxes, and can seem suspicious.

8. Build Relationships

Building relationships and networking in the music industry is always helpful. Boost your chances of getting featured by developing a relationship with music blog writers and editors. Find blog writers that post articles about the same music you make and listen too. Follow their content, comment on their posts, and engage with them on social media. Familiarize yourself with their content and the other artists they write about on the blog.

Also, get out and connect with other people in the music industry, regardless of their status. Try to meet other artists, producers, DJ’s, publicists, booking agents, label staff, fans, and anyone else in the music scene. These connections could open new opportunities. But, do so in a professional manner and don’t be a stalker.

9. Follow Up Email

Give music blog writers time to reply. They receive lots of submissions every day. It could take a few weeks before getting a reply. They may also need time to decide if they want to cover you and how the feature fits into their calendar.

Also, if the blog has a follow-up policy, make sure you stick to that. If not, it’s safe to send a follow-up email after a week. Send a short, polite email to the blog writer asking if they received your email or submission and had a chance to listen to your music. The hard truth is, you may not get a reply from bigger publications. Especially if they’re not into your music or don’t think covering you will benefit the blog.

10. Music Blog Types

Music is wide-ranging and so are music blogs. Make sure you are submitting your music to a blog that features your style of music.

Knowing the different music blog types will help narrow your search. There are independent music blogs, major EDM blogs, music discovery websites, and more. You can discover the best music blogs at sites like Hype Machine and SubmitHub.

Hype Machine

Hype Machine has long been the king of music blog aggregators. The site indexes hundreds of music sites and collects their latest posts for easy streaming and discovery. You can use the site to discover music blogs. For example, search Hype Machine for artists with a similar sound to you. Underneath the posted songs, you can see all the music blogs that posted the music content. Use the provided info to track down and contact the writers.

Also, many industry professionals, labels, and A&Rs look at which tracks are popular to understand what’s trending. If you’re trying to get discovered, get your music posted on Hype Machine!

SubmitHub

SubmitHub is an easy way to submit your music to bloggers, Spotify playlisters, record labels, and more. The service offers statistics and methods that help you find the best blogs to feature your music. The service also provides feedback that can help improve your music-making going forward. Moreover, there are hundreds of blog editors, labels, and playlisters that use SubmitHub to find new music and connect with artists.

Bonus: Climbing the Press Ladder

If you get your music featured on a music blog, use the coverage to generate even more press. Share the music feature on social media and use it as leverage when reaching out to other music blogs. Use the coverage to get you your next one!

Conclusion

One amazing write-up on a leading blog can boost your music career . These tips aim to guide you in the right direction when seeking to get your music featured on a blog. And, when you’re ready to submit your music, remember that first impressions make a difference. Good luck!

5 Tips to Make an EDM Drop More Powerful

Wed, 28 Nov 2018 15:08:00 GMT

Learn how to maximize the impact of your EDM drop. This guide outlines five techniques to make your drops sound bigger and louder.

What is an EDM Drop?

“The drop” is a section of a song with the most energy or intensity. It’s the moment when tension is released, and the beat kicks in at full force. The drop often follows a breakdown and buildup section of a song.

An EDM drop is also the climax of the song where rhythm and bass hit hardest. So, it’s crucial to make this section sound powerful. This guide offers five ways you can maximize the impact of your drop, so it sounds bigger and louder.

1. Mono Buildups

Mono buildups are an easy way to help emphasize an EDM drop. The technique involves narrowing the stereo image before the drop to make it sound bigger and wider. Using a stereo imager like Ableton Live’s Utility device or iZotope’s Imager , automate the stereo width towards mono during a buildup. Then the moment the drop hits, snap the stereo width back to 100%.

Mono builds are most effective when used subtly. It’s better to automate the stereo image slowly over time. A quick and drastic change towards mono will be noticeable and sound awkward. So it’s best to gradually automate the stereo image towards mono over 4 or 8 bars. Also, don’t go overboard with the stereo width amount. 40-60% stereo width tends to work best. These two moves will also give you more transparent results.

2. Volume Automation

We perceive louder music as sounding better. A simple way to make your EDM drop sound louder is to automate the master volume. However, don’t increase the overall volume of the drop section. Instead, lower the volume of the breakdown and buildup section before the drop. This technique will make your drop bigger and louder when it hits.

Like mono builds, this technique is most effective when used subtly. It’s better to automate the volume slowly over time. A quick and drastic change in volume will be noticeable and sound jarring. So it’s best to automate the volume over 4 or 8 bars gradually. Also, lowering the gain 1-3 dB tends to work best. These two moves will also give you transparent results.

Furthermore, it’s better to automate the volume using a plugin rather than the master fader. Plugins give you more control, and won’t restrict you from making adjustments with your master fader. For example, insert Live’s Utility device on the master bus and automate the gain control, so it lowers the volume slowly over time. Then the moment the drop hits, snap the volume back to “unity gain” or 0 dB.

3. Reverb Buildups

Automating reverb during a buildup is an effective way to create tension and make your EDM drop impactful. The technique involves creating a big reverb swell to make the buildup sound wide and spacious. Then cut the reverb right before the drop to make it sound upfront and center.

Applying heavy amounts of reverb to sounds pushes them back in the mix. This move increases the depth and makes them sound further away. So, cutting the reverb once the drop hits will make everything sound upfront and focused. This move gives the illusion that the drop is more powerful.

There are a few ways to achieve this technique. You can insert a reverb plugin on the master or certain sounds playing during the buildup. Or use a Return track or Bus Channel to automate reverb. Hall reverbs tend to work best because they have long tails and a dense sound.

For example, insert a reverb plugin on a Return track in Ableton Live. Set the Dry/Wet to 100%. Next, automate the dedicated Send control on the tracks you want to apply reverb. Add as much or little reverb as needed over 4-8 bars. Then right before the drop, cut the reverb tail off by automating the Send amount. This approach is also called a “wash-out” effect.

This technique also applies to delay . Try the same steps to create tension with a buildup of delay echoes.

4. Filter Sweeps

Thinning out the mix with a high pass filter before an EDM drop is another excellent technique. Removing low frequencies makes sounds less full and powerful. So, thinning out the mix during a buildup will emphasize the drop when those lows come back in. For example, automate a high pass filter to remove low frequencies before the drop. When the drop hits, bring back in the low frequencies. This move will give your drops more impact and make them sound powerful.

Create a filter sweep by inserting a filter or EQ plugin on the master. Ensure you’re using a high pass filter. Next, automate the cutoff frequency gradually for 1-4 bars. Then right before the drop, deactivate the plugin. Deactivating the plugin ensures the full frequency spectrum plays. Some plugins like Live’s Auto Filter continue to cut frequencies when the filter is fully open.

5. Cut Elements in the Mix

Cutting elements to create a gap of silence before an EDM drop increases its impact. Silence goes a long way. Try creating a build up to add tension and then cut everything for a half or full bar before the drop. You could also add a drum fill or big snare hit on the 4th beat of the bar to signal the drop.

Also, having too many sounds playing before the drop creates a lot of energy that can overpower the impact of the drop. For the drop to sound huge, the previous section needs to sound less huge.

Conclusion

Many genre-specific factors contribute to the success of a powerful EDM drop. There are also various other techniques to improve the impact of your drops. Remember that tension and release play a big part in making an EDM drop sound powerful. So, try out these techniques, combine them, and have fun!

8 Tips on How to Finish Songs Faster and Not Get Stuck

Wed, 21 Nov 2018 17:40:00 GMT

Are you feeling stuck and having trouble finishing your songs? Here are some songwriting tips to help you finish songs faster when feeling stuck.

How to Finish Songs Faster?

Starting a new piece of music is one of the most fun and exciting parts of being a producer. There are endless possibilities, and you have the potential to do something you’ve never done before. But once you’ve established a basic idea, where do you go from there?

Taking a melody or an 8-bar loop and turning it into a fully produced song can be daunting and frustrating. This guide offers some techniques you can use to streamline the process and finish songs faster. Learn how to flesh out a full track from a basic melody, drum pattern, chords, or even a couple produced sections.

1. Produce ‘Horizontally’ Before You Produce ‘Vertically’

This technique can take a second to wrap your head around. When Producing ‘horizontally’ means working left to right inside your DAW. The horizontal arrangement of your song is what composes the structure and songwriting of your music. For example, looking at a finished song left to right may have a structure like Intro-Verse-PreChorus-Chorus-Verse, etc.

Looking at a finished song top to bottom or ‘vertically,’ we see the instrumentation and layers within each section. These track elements include things like Melody Layer 1, Melody Layer 2, Arp, Drums, Percussion, Sub Bass, etc.

The idea here is that before you get too deep into the actual instrumentation and layering of a track (or producing vertically), try to flesh out the arrangement and structure of the entire song first. Think of it like building a wooden frame for a house before you start filling it with furniture. Creating a skeletal version of your song first also makes producing easier. It also eliminates any guesswork. For instance, questions like “what comes after the first drop?” won’t be an issue anymore. This method also improves workflow. Producing becomes faster because your filling in the blanks rather than figuring out the next section.

Creating a Sketch Arrangement

What should this stripped back skeletal version look like? It depends on the producer. I prefer to lay out my chord structure first. It’s often the focus of my music, and usually the element I start working with first. Using a piano or simple synth sound, I’ll lay out every chord progression in my track. I might also include a simple drum beat throughout the track, so it doesn’t feel sterile. By doing this, it forces me to decide where each section starts and ends. This way there’s no guesswork in your production. You lay out a blueprint and then get to producing music.

Alternatively, if your music is more focused on drums or bass, use those elements as the foundation for your track skeleton. The goal of this approach is to build the frame that’s going to support your song before focusing on ‘vertical’ elements like mixing, layering, and sound design. Getting the basics down before the fine details will help you finish songs faster.

Producing horizontally before you produce vertically can also help with arrangement and song structure. It also gives you the opportunity to consider how those elements will function in your music. For instance, newer producers won’t give a lot of thought to the structure of a song. They often allow the song to take shape naturally as they move from one section to the next. However, that approach can result in a piece of music that feels choppy and short-sighted. Focusing on song structure earlier in your production can make a big difference both for your arrangement and the time it takes to finish songs.

2. Don’t Over Do It!

For many producers, the first thing they do is produce a full intro and drop/chorus. But after that they get stuck . Part of that has to do with hearing a finished section followed by an unfinished section. For instance, a new section can feel like it’s falling flat and not maintaining the energy from the previous section. It’s a frustrating feeling because the two sections are not going to flow naturally until they’re both finished. It’s also the culprit behind us not being able to move passed an 8 or 16-bar loop.

Furthermore, producing one full section at a time can cause us to lose track of what made our original ideas seem special. For example, a finished intro that you loved might not sound so special anymore after listening to it 500 times while working out the arrangement and other sections. Hearing a section too many times can make you desensitized to an idea that you initially thought was great.

Over-producing is something else to be aware of after producing that first great section. If you don’t execute the rest of your song efficiently enough, you can end up adding unnecessary elements to make things sound as good to you as it did initially. To emphasize, over-producing is when you add too many elements to a song. It can make your song sound too busy and like it’s lost its direction or focus. The best way to avoid over-producing is to streamline your production workflow. For example, try to get more work done in a shorter amount of time. That way your initial material will still feel fresh by the time you’ve finished producing. Also, producing horizontally before you produce vertically is a great way to ensure your workflow is as efficient as possible.

3. Use Music You Love as a Reference

A lot of producers have trouble deciding what elements work best for a particular section of music. For instance, questions like, “are these chords better for the verse or better for the chorus?” As you learn and improve, decision making will become easier. But when in doubt, look to the artists you admire. Use their music as a roadmap to guide you toward improving your music. For example, use elements of the songs you enjoy as starting points for your productions.

For instance, you can work out how other artists are using chords in their music. Start by listening to a song you like and using a keyboard to work out the root notes of the chords they’re playing. Then build your chords up from there. You can also make sketches of how their drum patterns change from section to section. Or, listen to the way the FX and drum fills are helping to transition from one section to the next.

The same idea works for song structure. Throw another artist’s song in your DAW to use as a roadmap. For example, label the length and placement of each section in their arrangement. It’s also important to realize that this method isn’t “stealing.” It is learning common song structures. It’s essential to understand the structural tenets and nuances of music you like. And, incorporating those elements into your music can help you make choices on how you want your music to sound. So, it’s ok to use other artist’s music as a tool to help you.

4. Quick General Tips to Finish Songs

Here are five additional tips to help keep you motivated and productive when producing music:

1. Take breaks.

Our ears get tired, and they become fatigued from an 8-hour studio session. It’s crucial to give yourself 20 or 30-minute breaks every two hours or so. It’s also good to take longer breaks from a track. For example, take a day or even a week away from your song. When you come back to it, you’ll have fresh ears and will be able to hear details that weren’t noticeable before. Taking breaks also helps you reset and get back to being productive.

2. Set Deadlines

Workflow and motivation skyrockets when working under a deadline. We’re used to other people setting deadlines for us. But, if you set deadlines for yourself and stick to them, you’ll be surprised what you’re capable of achieving.

3. Watch Things That Inspire You

When I’m feeling worn down or don’t have any new ideas for music, I’ll watch videos of other musicians producing or performing. I regularly watch FACT Magazine’s ‘ Against the Clock ‘ series. Seeing other producers make something out of nothing puts me in a new headspace where I say “Hey! I can do that too!”

4. Work on Something Else

If you’re working on a song and not making progress, shift your focus. There are many other parts of producing beyond the actual act of making music. For example, try working on sound design. A lot of producers dedicate sound design sessions where they don’t work on tracks. Instead, they focus on making new sounds to implement in future projects. The new sounds might even inspire new tracks. Also, go sample hunting. One of the most common issues I see with novice producers is bad sample choice. Every producer has access to the same samples, so there’s no excuse for your samples not to be top notch. It’s just a matter of taking the time to find them. So, put that Splice account to good use!

5. Just Start

You can’t finish songs if you don’t start them. Convincing yourself to sit down and work on music can be the toughest part of making music. So many times, I have not felt like working on a song. Or I’ll sit down, open my DAW, listen one time, and immediately close it. When you’re feeling unmotivated, make a deal with yourself. For example, tell yourself that if you sit down and work on a track for 30 minutes, you can stop if you want to after those 30 minutes. In my experience, once I’ve forced myself to commit those 30 minutes, I’ve gotten over whatever feelings were making me not want to work. But if that doesn’t happen, at least you got 30 minutes of work out of yourself.

Final Words

Ultimately, making progress and finishing music has to do with making choices. The more informed and comfortable you are with your choices, the faster you can make them and get things finished. Now, go out and finish songs!

10 Best Limiter Plugins for Mixing and Mastering

Wed, 14 Nov 2018 15:20:00 GMT

Looking for the best limiter plugins? This Icon Picks roundup features ten excellent limiter plugins for mixing, mastering, and sound design.

What are Audio Limiters?

Limiters are essential dynamic processing tools used for mixing and mastering . At a basic level, limiters reduce the peaks in a waveform and prevents them from exceeding a digital ceiling. The results reduce the dynamic range of an audio signal and increases perceived loudness. However, limiting comes at the price of losing detail and punch. It also introduces digital distortion and clipping when pushed hard.

Limiters work much like compressors set to a high compression ratio of 10:1 or higher. While both processors reduce dynamic range, the way they do it differs. A compressor gradually reduces the signal level above a certain threshold. Whereas a limiter prevents the signal from going over a specified threshold level. Preventing the signal from crossing a set output ceiling is also known as “peak” or “brickwall” limiting. Limiters also share similar controls as compressors. It’s common to see controls for setting attack and release times. Many also offer lookahead and knee controls. The big difference between a compressor and a limiter is the ratio.

Ways to Apply Limiting

Limiters can be used for a variety of tasks and purposes. Below are the three most common ways to apply audio limiting:

Mastering with Limiter Plugins

A limiter plays a vital role in the mastering stage. Its primary purpose is to make your track as loud as possible without causing clipping or distortion. Boosting the overall level and perceived loudness is necessary to achieve competitive commercial levels. Limiters are also inserted as the last processing device on the master to prevent clipping.

Mixing with Limiter Plugins

Limiters also work great for mixing and sound design. Use them to process both single tracks and group busses. They help reduce excessive transients, control dynamics, glue sounds together, boost levels, and add power.

Prevent Clipping

Limiters act as a safety device that prevents the audio signal from clipping. Safeguarding against signal peaking prevents damaging equipment and your hearing.

Choosing the Best Limiter Plugins

There is a vast selection of limiter plugins on the market. Also, there are several types of limiters designed for different tasks. Choosing the right limiter for the job is crucial, and there are many great plugins for the task. This buyers guide narrows down the options and features ten of the best limiter plugins available.

1. FabFilter | Pro-L 2

Pro-L 2 is a versatile peak limiter that delivers excellent results for any mixing or mastering task. It does it all! Moreover, this feature-packed limiter offers eight different limiting algorithms. Each style brings its own character and purpose. It also comes equipped with true peak level meters, extensive loudness metering, and a spectrum analyzer. Not to mention, it sports one of the best-looking user interfaces on the market.

2. iZotope | Ozone 8 Maximizer

Ozone’s Maximizer is one of the industry’s most regarded mastering limiters. It excels at boosting the overall loudness of a mix while adding fullness and polish to your music. The Maximizer module offers multiple IRC (Intelligent Release Control) modes, automatic threshold adjustment, independent stereo detection, and other advanced technology. It also provides various metering and scrolling waveform display.

3. Waves | L2 Ultramaximizer or L3-LL Multimaximizer

The L3-LL is the latest limiter plugin in Waves’ L-Series. It is a multiband peak limiter that features five band crossover filters for precise control over frequencies. The L3-LL is also another all-purpose limiter capable of maxing levels for any mix or mastering task. Moreover, it offers a versatile set of presets and advanced capabilities. It is also a transparent sounding limiter plugin that will make your mix load while preserving detail.

The L2 Ultramaximizer is another acclaimed limiter plugin for mixing and mastering. It is a single band peak limiter that also maximizes level at high resolution.

4. UAD | Precision Limiter

The Precision Limiter plugin is a single-band, look-ahead brickwall limiter. This transparent mastering limiter does not pass audio through any filters; it only affects the gain. It works great for maximizing the bus group level or adding the final boost during mastering.

5. A.O.M. | Invisible Limiter G2

A.O.M. Invisible Limiter is a transparent look-ahead brickwall limiter. It features automatic attack and release-times for the best results. It also has a reputation for being one of the most transparent sounding limiters on the market. The second generation of this acclaimed mastering limiter plugin brings new features, improved response, extended metering, and more.

6. Sonnox | Oxford Limiter v3

The Oxford Limiter v3 is a long-time favorite by industry pros. It delivers maximum loudness and presence while retaining clarity and transient detail. This all-purpose peak limiter plugin is an excellent choice for any mix or mastering task. Also notable is its unique Enhance function. It provides a musical boost when increasing apparent loudness.

7. Brainworx | bx_limiter

The bx_limiter is a simple all-purpose limiter plugin perfect for mixing single tracks and stems. Brainworx designed the bx_limiter to treat multiple busses. It works great at smoothing out the signal and gluing tracks together. It also excels at taming peaks and adding color to sounds. Moreover, bx_limiter features a Mix control and a unique Channel Link knob. This control blends between unlinked and linked peak detection. bx_limiter also rocks an XL saturation control to boost level and fattiness.

8. PSP | Xenon

PSP Xenon is a full band, dual-stage limiter plugin. It is another workhorse ideal for any mixing or mastering task. Xenon’s two processing stages make it special. The first stage is more forgiving. It uses Infinite Impulse Response filters to apply the initial gain reduction. This allows transients to exceed the output ceiling. The second stage takes a hard line. It uses Finite Impulse Response filters that act like a brickwall limiter.

9. Slate Digital | FG-X Mastering Processor

The FG-X Mastering Processor is Slate Digital’s award-winning mastering plugin. It offers three modules in a single plugin. The FG-X combines an ultra-transparent compressor, a loudness enhancer, and a metering panel. Moreover, FG-X can make your mixes louder without altering the dynamics, removing punch, or skewing your mix balances.

10. IK Multimedia | Stealth Limiter

T-RackS Stealth Limiter is an ultra-transparent mastering peak limiter. It’s also a versatile limiting plugin, perfect for any mixing or mastering task. It features four modes, each designed for a different mastering purpose. Stealth Limiter also delivers transparent results while preserving the perceived sense of dynamics. Moreover, it sports simple controls and intuitive features.

Honorable Mentions

There are a lot of excellent limiter plugins on the market. It makes it hard to narrow down the top ten. Below are five more limiter plugins worth considering:

Indie vs. Major Record Labels: Which is Right for You?

Wed, 07 Nov 2018 18:44:00 GMT

Are indie or major record labels better for your music career? This guide compares the two record label choices and offers insight from music industry professionals.

Finding the Right Record Label

When it comes to choosing a record label , finding the right fit for your music career is critical. But, are indie or major record labels better for your career? What are the advantages of doing business with small indie companies vs. bigger record labels?

This guide compares the two record label choices and offers insight from music industry professionals.

What are Major Record Labels?

Major record labels or “internationals” are large companies often under the control of a corporate umbrella called a “music group.” They operate their own distribution and publishing companies. Major record labels are also heavily funded. They have big financial budgets for marketing, production, touring, and more. They also have a large network of connections and influence in the music industry.

The big three major record labels are Sony Music Entertainment, Universal Music Group, and Warner Music Group. All other major record labels are “sub-labels” owned by either of the big three.

What are Independent Record Labels?

Independent record labels are small companies called indie or boutique labels. They are generally not affiliated with or funded by the three major records labels. Also, indie labels work with other smaller companies for distribution and publishing.

Many consider boutique and indie labels as artist-friendly. They also offer many other benefits that may be more important to the artist. However, they don’t have the funding for artists that major labels can provide.

Indie vs. Major Record Labels

There are several factors worth considering when weighing the pros and cons of indie and major record labels:

1. Trust and Close Working Relationships

Indie labels and boutiques generally have the advantage here. They have smaller artist rosters, which means you will get more attention. It also makes it easier to develop personal relationships and work closely with the label’s team. It’s always nice to work with someone who has earned your trust outside of business concerns. In contrast, most major labels have large artist rosters and so many moving parts that it can be hard to know who’s working on your release.

2. Record Deal Terms

Across the board, boutique deals will tend to be more favorable to artists. Indie label contracts are known to be artist-friendly. They tend to give artists a larger royalty percentage than major labels. For example, deals with indie record labels have trended towards simple contracts that offer 50/50 splits. This agreement gives the idea that it’s a partnership of equals. Major label deals, on the other hand, rarely offer a percentage higher than 18%. There are also plenty of deductions and a level of complexity that requires the help of a lawyer to understand.

Furthermore, indie label contracts often give the artist most of the creative control over their music. The agreement terms also give the artist back the “ownership rights” to their music after a short period.

Also worth considering is a key person clause. A key person clause (or key man clause) in your contract gives you the option of ending your deal if a given person – typically the one championing you – leaves that company. In general, this clause lets you follow them to their new agency. At a big company, you could get passed off to people with whom you have no relationship. This leaves you stuck in a contract without any benefit. With a small company or sole proprietorship, the chance of you getting passed off to someone else is less.

3. Artistic Priorities

Do you want to work with a team that believes in your music? Indie record labels don’t have a board of directors who are more interested in a profit than your music. Small companies tend to sign artists because they love their music and believe in their brand.

Same goes for other music career opportunities. Do you want to play in the biggest venues and make the most money OR do you want to make the most interesting art? Big companies can have objectives and expectations regarding revenue. These ambitions may or may not align with yours in the short or long term.

On the other hand, a big company has experience developing artists and music careers. They will have a better sense of what’s ahead than someone from an indie record label who may have less experience developing careers or are learning as they go. Dealing with people you trust is important here. It’s something that may not seem intuitive but necessary to take your music career to the next level.

4. Other Artists/Clients

Are you comfortable being one of 23 artists, of which you might not be the #1 priority at a given time? This is often the case at a big management company. Or do you want to be one of 3, 2, or the only one on their roster, like with some single-proprietorship managers?

The flipside of this is that a big label, agency, etc. use the hottest, “tentpole” artists to leverage bigger/better opportunities for the agency’s smaller ones. An excellent example of this is live booking. Many newer acts get on festival lineups that have booked bigger acts from the same management/booking company. A small company won’t have that option. Which brings us to….

5. Music Industry Influence and Connections

The big names almost always have an advantage here – that’s the #1 reason people go with major record labels. The majors are still the most reliable option if you want to become internationally famous. For example, on an Ariana Grande level. They typically have greater access to traditional distribution. They also have relationships with terrestrial radio, which is still a big money-generator. In general, major record labels have well-established influence and connections across all aspects of the music industry. In contrast, smaller companies probably know the same people you do. They will help you more from sheer hustle than pre-existing relationships.

On the other hand, a local indie company is going to have better relationships with the grassroots music scene, underground promoters, etc. Those connections will be the most useful for the start of your music career. Plus, they can work with a much shorter lead time. Good luck getting something released by a major less than three months after you hand it over!

Conclusion

In the end neither big nor small are inherently better. It’s all about your musical career and personal priorities. If you want fame and the most revenue, major record labels are the way to go. Bear in mind the drawbacks of working with these huge corporations. And there’s no reason not to mix and match. For example, a “friendager” (manager friend) with a big label and midsize booking agent. Whatever works, do it!

How to Improve Your Mix with Field Recordings and Foley

Wed, 31 Oct 2018 13:07:00 GMT

What are field recordings? And, what is foley? Learn how to transform recorded audio of everyday sounds into unique samples for your music projects.

What are Field Recordings?

Field recordings are recordings captured outside the studio. The recorded material can be both natural and human-produced sounds. For example, sounds of water, wind, birds, noisy crowds, traffic, machines, dropping a cup, etc. Everything makes a sound! Moreover, field recordings are one of the most creative ways to design unique sounds and textures for your projects.

What is Foley?

Foley is the reproduction of real-world sound effects. Foley sound effects are added to films, television, video games, music projects, and other media in post-production to enhance audio quality. For example, footsteps, clothes rustling, doors opening, glass breaking, etc. Foley also adds realistic sounds and textures to your music. The term is named after Jack Foley, an innovative Sound Editor at Universal Studios in the 1920s.

How can Field Recordings and Foley Improve Your Mix?

Adding field recordings and foley to a project is a trending technique in modern music production. Using realistic sounds in your mix adds dimension, character, and creates a compelling sound. They also provide an organic palette of interesting source material that can inspire new rhythmic or sonic ideas.

Collecting field recordings and foley also gives you a diverse library of sounds no one else has. For example, what does it sound like when you pour water over a glass on fire? Would layering this captured material with a snare add character and make it punchy? You could also use the sound of a hammer hitting wood as a percussive layer. These types of experimental processes and interaction with objects often yield exciting results.

Furthermore, adding real-world sounds to your mix evokes emotion and adds authentic qualities. For example, layering ocean waves in a tropical house track that has a summer vibe. Hearing the waves in the background fills out the mix. They also help you envision enjoying the song on a beach.

Check out this song from ICON Collective Alumni SoPhilthy. He uses a field recording of vinyl with crackles and pops to add texture. It also adds background ambiance and gives the song an extra layer of interest. He also uses a bird recording and real-world sounds as percussion.

How to Capture Field Recordings and Foley

Record field recordings and foley using anything from your smartphone to a high-quality recorder such as a Zoom H6 . You can also find countless recordings online to download. Many downloadable sample packs also include field recordings and foley loops. For example, Cymatics compiled an Ultimate List of Free Foley Sound Effects .

What should you record? The answer is anything that makes a sound. With the advent of DAW’s and numerous plugins available, any sound can be used to create something new. The best way to know what works is to experiment! You’ll often discover new and exciting sounds that you would have never thought to use.

How to use Field Recordings and Foley in Your Mix

The technique involves capturing raw material and editing it into usable samples for your music productions. These types of recordings are not as noticeable as prominent sounds. Some describe these recordings as hidden sounds. When listing to a song you may not notice them. That’s until you remove them and realize how much they added to the mix. In addition, they typically play in the background at low volumes or layered with other sounds.

Below are some examples of how artists use field recordings and foley in their projects:

How to Process Field Recordings and Foley

Once you’ve collected some source material, import the raw audio into your DAW and begin processing. Either transform the source material into something usable and amazing or leave it dry. You drive the creative decisions! You’ll soon develop a creative process for making samples.

Below is a list of ways you can manipulate the captured audio in Ableton Live :

Conclusion

It’s amazing how many sounds we hear every day and the ways to use them in music production. Thinking outside the box with your music will take your creativity to the next level.

10 Best Music Production Plugin Bundles

Tue, 16 Oct 2018 14:05:00 GMT

Looking for the best plugin bundles? This Icon Picks roundup features ten music production plugin bundles for mixing, mastering, and sound design.

Music Production Plugin Bundles

There’s an overwhelming abundance of music production plugins available. It can be hard choosing the best plugins for your needs. In addition, buying several plugins for various purposes is pricey.

When looking to update your toolbox, consider music production plugin bundles. Many plugin bundles offer everything needed to create great music.

Whether you’re after effects plugins or looking to extend your virtual instruments arsenal, this guide has it covered.

Benefits of Music Production Plugin Bundles

Saves Money: The initial cost of plugin bundles is more than buying a single plugin. However, you get more for your money in the long-run. It’s more affordable to purchase a bundle compared to the combined cost of buying each plugin separately.

Intuitive Workflow: Plugins from the same developer often have similar layouts or features. This consistency makes it easier to learn and navigate each plugin in the bundle.

Variety of Tools: Plugin bundles offer a range of tools for various purposes. They come with all the essentials for either mixing, mastering, or sound design. You may also discover a new plugin that works better for a particular job.

Included Effects Rack: Many plugin bundles include a multi-effect rack. Effect racks make it easy to create simple or complex effect chains. You can also combine, rearrange, and save your effect chains as a preset.

1. Soundtoys | Soundtoys 5

Soundtoys 5 gives you all 21 audio effects plugins in their extensive collection. This plugin bundle is a long-time favorite among pro mix engineers, musicians, and sound designers. It offers all the essentials for mixing, mastering, and sound design. Also included is the Soundtoys Effect Rack. Combine plugins to build and manage custom multi-effect chains. Moreover, Soundtoys plugins are either emulations of classic hardware or draw inspiration from iconic gear. Check out their student discounts .

2. FabFilter | Total Bundle

The Total Bundle gives you all 14 FabFilter plugins. With this bundle, you get a range of industry-leading audio effects and synthesizer plugins. This complete set of plugins offers everything needed to create and sculpt quality mixes. Moreover, FabFilter plugins have awesome interfaces, quality sound, and impressive features. The Total Bundle is also another highly recommended set of plugins trusted by pros. Check out their student discounts .

3. Slate Digital | Everything Bundle

Slate Digital’s award-winning products are some of the best analog modeling plugins in the industry. With the Everything Bundle, you get every Slate Digital plugin in addition to all future plugins they release. This complete set of amazing tools is available as monthly and yearly subscriptions. Also included is Slate’s Virtual Mix Rack. The VMR makes it easy to create and manage custom channel strips with a library full of analog modeled plugins. Choose from dozens of vintage modeled EQs, compressors, enhancers, filters, preamps, mixing consoles, and more. Check out their student discounts .

4. Waves Audio | Waves Gold

The Waves Gold Bundle brings you one of the industry’s most popular plugin sets. You get over 40 essential audio effects plugins for mixing and mastering. Moreover, it offers some of the most sought-after Waves plugins as well as newer additions. The Waves Gold Bundle is also very affordable. Check out their student discounts .

5. iZotope | Music Production Suite

iZotope’s Music Production Suite combines seven next-level music production plugins. It offers the industry’s most innovative mixing, mastering, vocal production, and audio repair tools. You get Ozone 8 Advanced, Neutron 2 Advanced, RX 6 Standard, Nectar 2 Production Suite, VocalSynth, and Trash 2. Check out their student discounts .

6. Native Instruments | Komplete 12

NI’s KOMPLETE 12 is an extensive production suite for artists, musicians, and sound designers. It packs all the creative tools you’ll ever need into four different packages. Supersize your library with NI’s biggest update ever. KOMPLETE 12 features new synths, sampled instruments, audio effects, and sound pack Expansions. It is the ultimate set of music production plugins. Check out their student discounts .

7. Universal Audio | Analog Classics Pro Bundle

UAD’s Analog Classics Pro Bundle features five emulations of the most iconic analog effects in recording history. It includes the Teletronix LA-2A Classic Leveler, 1176 Classic Limiter, Pultec Passive EQ, Fairchild Tube Limiter, and UA 610 Tube Preamp & EQ Collections. Add the warmth and character missing in digital productions with this revered set of EQ’s, compressors, and tube amps.

8. Arturia | V Collection 6

Arturia’s V Collection bundles 21 emulations of legendary keyboard instruments. The set offers a range of modeled synths, organs, pianos, and keyboards. Moreover, each plugin comes with modern features to meet today’s demands. Get the classic sound of iconic instruments combined with innovative features. You’ll also find over 6,000 incredible preset sounds.

9. IK Multimedia | T-RackS 5

T-RackS 5 provides you with a convenient, all-in-one modular approach to mixing and mastering. Version 5 offers four new modules for a total of 38 high-quality plugins. Moreover, its redesigned modular interface provides a streamlined workflow. T-RackS 5 also adds features like album assembly, multi-format export, and broadcast-ready metering tools. Moreover, it supplies everything needed to transform mixes into finished masters and prepare them for delivery.

10. D16 Group | Total Bundle

D16’s Total Bundle elevates your virtual studio with 16 top-level plugins. It offers a powerful set of synths, delays, and modulation effects. Enjoy vintage Roland hardware emulations, Sigmund and Repeater delay’s, their flagship LuSH-101 synthesizer, and more. Ask about their student discounts .

Bonus: u-he | Everything Bundle

The Everything Bundle comes with all 12 u-he plugins. You get six analog-modeled synths and six audio effects, including Uhbik, a suite of nine effects. It is an excellent set of music production and sound design tools. Moreover, u-he provides great-sounding analog inspired synths and effects.

How to Isolate or Remove Vocals from a Song

Tue, 09 Oct 2018 14:05:00 GMT

Looking to remix a song with a stellar vocal or create a mashup and need the acapella? This guide shows you how to isolate or remove vocals from a song. Learn how to isolate vocals with phase cancellation in both Ableton Live and Logic Pro X. You’ll also learn how to separate vocals from a song with Music Rebalance in iZotope RX 7.

What is Phase Cancellation?

Phase cancellation is an audio phenomenon that occurs when similar waveforms work against each other. Two combined signals with the same frequencies cancel each other out when their waveforms are out of phase. For example, a waveform has many peaks and troughs. If the peaks and troughs of identical waveforms are out of sync, they cancel each other out. In other words, playing two exact waveforms that are 180 degrees or 100% out of phase results in silence. Conversely, playing two identical signals in phase will cause an increase in amplitude.

How to Isolate or Remove Vocals with Phase Cancellation

Isolating vocals from other songs with phase cancellation is an effective way to score sought-after acapellas. There are various other ways to isolate vocals in a song. Though, phase cancellation is one of the most efficient methods to extract vocals from a mix. The technique requires an original vocal mix and an identical instrumental version of the same song. The magic happens when you flip the phase on a vocal mix while simultaneously playing back the instrumental mix. Inverting the phase of one track while playing them together will cancel out all the instrumentation, leaving only the vocals. This technique also works in reverse. You can remove vocals to create an instrumental version of a song.

Potential Mix Issues

The phase cancellation method often works better than the other techniques used to remove vocals. However, it doesn’t always work 100%. Different factors can affect the results. First, it’s essential to use high-quality audio files and to ensure the vocal version is identical to the instrumental version. Second, other sounds may bleed through. For example, background noises picked up while recording the vocals. Third, the mastered versions may vary if any virtual instrument or audio effect has a random feature enabled. Forth, this technique doesn’t work well when vocals are panned, modulated in any way, or are swimming in lots of reverb. This technique works best when the vocal track is dry and mono.

If you find unnecessary sounds, use an EQ to cut them and remove any problematic frequencies. You could also use specialized audio repair tools such as iZotope’s RX to isolate vocals from a song.

Demo Song Examples

These recordings are a cover of ‘ House of the Rising Sun ‘ made famous by The Animals.

How to Isolate Vocals in Ableton Live

Removing vocals in Ableton Live using the phase cancellation method is easy. All you need is two quality recordings and Live’s Utility device.

Step 1 | Importing Songs

Load the vocal mix and instrumental mix to separate audio tracks in Arrangement View. Also, make sure to line up both tracks along the grid.

Step 2 | Phase Inversion with Utility

Load Live’s Utility device on the vocal mix and enable both the Left and Right Phase buttons. If everything goes right, you should only hear the vocals when playing back both tracks together.

Step 3 | Recording the Vocals

Create a new audio track to record the results. Next, select ‘Resampling’ from the Input Channel chooser and arm the track for recording. Lastly, enable the Arrangement Recording button to begin recording.

How to Isolate Vocals in Logic Pro X

The steps for removing vocals in Logic Pro X using phase cancellation is like the steps outlined for Ableton Live.

Step 1 | Importing Songs

Import the vocal mix and instrumental mix to separate audio tracks. Again, line up both tracks along the grid.

Step 2 | Phase Inversion with Gain

Load Logic’s Gain device on the vocal mix and enable both the Left and Right Phase Invert buttons.

Step 3 | Bouncing the Vocals

There are a few different ways to resample in Logic Pro X. One quick way to record the results is with Logic’s Bounce feature. Select File > Bounce > Project or Section. Choose your bounce settings, click OK, and set the bounce filename and location. Logic will create a new file of the resampled audio that you can drag into your project.

How to Separate Vocals with iZotope RX 7

iZotope’s RX software has been at the forefront of innovation in audio repair. With RX 7, iZotope included even more advanced features. One notable addition is Music Rebalance. This impressive source separation tool allows you to adjust levels and isolate elements in an audio track. For example, you can isolate or remove vocals, bass, percussion, and other instruments from a mono or stereo file.

Moreover, this innovative tool makes it easy to extract vocals from any song and use them for a remix. This ability also works in reverse. You can use RX 7 to remove vocals or other parts to create an instrumental version of a song. This approach also eliminates the need for different track versions or stems.

Isolating vocals with Music Rebalance in RX 7 is quick and easy. The software runs as a standalone audio editor. However, you can connect to your DAW via the RX Connect plugin. There’s also a suite of plugin modules available in your DAW.

Step 1 | Importing a Song

To get started, launch RX 7 and import a song. You can use the File menu, Open File button, or drag and drop a song into the editor window.

Step 2 | Launch Music Rebalance

Choose Music Rebalance from the right-side Module List. After Music Rebalance opens, turn down the Bass, Percussion, and Other sliders. Leave the Voice slider at zero to focus on isolating vocals.

Step 3 | Choose a Separation Algorithm

Select a Separation algorithm from the drop-down chooser. These algorithms determine performance and processing speeds. For example, Advanced Joint Channel mode offers the highest quality separation results.

Step 4 | Adjust Sensitivity

Adjust the Sensitivity meter to get the best results. Lower values contain less audible “bleed” from other mix elements. However, this can introduce artifacts and reduce vocal clarity. Whereas higher values will have fewer audible artifacts and more potential for bleed.

Step 5 | Render

When ready, press Render to create a file containing the isolated vocals. Lastly, export the file and drop it into your DAW for further editing.

Is Removing Vocals from a Song Legal?

It is not legal to use vocals from copyrighted music commercially. You must get permission before using the vocals for commercial gain. This includes using music with copyrighted vocals for YouTube, a podcast, or any other public media source.

What Is Audio Saturation and How It Improves Your Mix

Thu, 27 Sep 2018 17:59:00 GMT

Learn how to enhance your mix with saturation. This guide will give you a better understanding of audio saturation and harmonic distortion.

What is Saturation in Music?

Audio saturation is the essence of what makes analog hardware sound musical and pleasing. Driving sounds through tape, tubes, transistors, and circuits have long been an essential ingredient in great-sounding mixes.

Saturation is a subtle form of distortion that adds pleasant-sounding harmonics. The effect originates from the analog days when audio recordings ran through various pieces of hardware. Mix engineers discovered they could overload magnetic tape machines, tube amps, and transistor-based preamps to create a type of “soft-clipping.” This technique gave recordings sought-after qualities that sounded pleasing.

To this day, artists and engineers use saturation to add presence, character, warmth, edge, cohesion, and more. From subtle to extreme, saturation is an integral part of amazing mixes.

Different Types of Audio Saturation

While some studios still have analog equipment, the industry has shifted to the digital realm. There are several types of saturation plugins that emulate the imperfections of analog hardware. However, the most common types are tape, tube, and transistor.

Tape Saturation

Tape saturation plugins emulate the sound of audio recorded through tape machines. They introduce odd order harmonics, subtle compression, and non-linear shifts in frequency response. Tape saturation also rolls off high-end frequencies and creates a small boost in the lows. Moreover, it rounds off transient peaks, creating a form of compression that smooths out the signal.

Many describe tape saturation as sounding warm and punchy. This type of harmonic distortion works great for adding dimension, fatness, and depth to your mix.

Tube Saturation

Tube saturation plugins emulate the sound of audio driven through tube amps. They introduce even order harmonics. This type of harmonic distortion also adds a subtle form of compression. However, when pushed hard, tube saturation can have an aggressive edge.

Many describe tube saturation as sounding warm, musical, and punchy. This type of harmonic distortion can also increase perceived loudness , dimension, and fatness.

Transistor Saturation

Transistor saturation plugins emulate the sound of audio driven through transistor‑based circuits. You can also achieve this sound by overloading input levels on various hardware and plugin emulations. Transistor saturation introduces odd order harmonics and a form of “hard clipping” compression. Depending on the device, this type of harmonic distortion can have a subtle or aggressive sound.

Many describe transistor saturation as sounding fuzzy, gritty, and textured. Moreover, its impact on transients and higher harmonics can make sounds less punchy and musical when pushed hard. Whereas, subtle settings will give you a smoother tone.

How Audio Saturation Can Improve Your Mix

Audio saturation plays a significant role in music production. Applying saturation to single tracks, bus groups, and the master channel will improve your mix. Even more, it adds that desired analog vibe!

Various flavors of saturation generate harmonics and apply subtle forms of “soft-clipping” compression. This unique effect makes sounds fuller, punchy, and louder. Saturation also adds depth, presence, character, color, and warmth. Moreover, it does an excellent job of “gluing” groups of sounds together. This technique helps create a cohesive mix when applied to bus groups and the master.

Where to Apply Audio Saturation

You can apply saturation on everything. However, overdoing it can make the entire mix sound bad. So, use your ears!

Saturation is also a versatile effect used for both sound design and mixing. Below are a few ways to apply this effect across your mix.

Drums Bus

Applying tape saturation to your drum bus helps “glue” all your drums tracks together. It also helps tame rogue transients and softens high-end harshness. This method is a great way to inject character and excitement. Moreover, it will add subtle “punch” to help your drums cut through the mix.

Basslines

Injecting tube saturation to your bass parts will add power and fatness. Driving your bass through harmonic distortion will also add mid-range to help it cut through the mix. Experiment with different types of saturation. They will enhance your bass big time!

Vocals

Subtle amounts of harmonic distortion will make your vocals pop! Apply saturation to tame wild transients and make thin or dull vocals fuller. It also does an excellent job at warming harsh sounding vocals. It’s the secret ingredient to great sounding vocals.

Synths

Virtual synths often sound too clean and digital. Saturation will bring static synths to life with some analog warmth, fatness, and character. Try some tube saturation to add harmonics and grit. This method will increase perceived loudness and bring your synths upfront.

Master

Applying tape saturation to your master adds a cohesive, analog sound to your mix. However, be gentle with the amount. A little goes a long way.

Inserting a console emulation plugin to the master is another common technique. This move simulates running your mix through an analog console. It also works great on single tracks. Also, try adding channel strip or preamp plugins to several tracks. This method creates a cohesive, analog vibe across your entire mix.

Parallel Saturation

Parallel saturation gives you the best of both worlds. You can mix the original signal with the saturated signal. Use a plugins Wet/Dry mix control if one is available or route the effect through an aux track. This method gives you greater control over the amount of saturation while preserving the original signal.

Conclusion

Infusing your mix with authentic analog character is an excellent way to enhance your music. Also, trying different saturation types across your mix will give you better results. For instance, try using tape on drums, tube on vocals, and transistors on synths. And, remember not to go overboard, or you can cause more harm than good.

How to Humanize Your Drums in Ableton Live

Wed, 19 Sep 2018 15:10:00 GMT

Learn how to make programmed drums sound more realistic. This guide offers five techniques to humanize drums in Ableton Live and make them more expressive.

Humanizing Drums

One challenge of programming drums in Ableton Live is maintaining a human feel. When a real drummer plays, subtle variations and imperfections give the groove a natural vibe. Conversely, programmed MIDI drum sequences can easily sound robotic and repetitive, leaving listeners bored.

Music is all about movement and humanizing your drums is a great way to keep your listeners moving. Injecting human character into your music is a great way to boost expression and realism. One of the best ways to achieve natural groove and vibe in your music is to humanize drums.

The following techniques offer some creative ways to add some life into your static drum patterns in Ableton Live .

1. Velocity Variation

Velocity controls how hard or soft a MIDI note sounds when played back. Moreover, velocity values determine the volume or amplitude of a sound. For example, the harder you hit the pads or keys on a controller, the louder the sound will be.

Giving your MIDI drum hits different velocity values will make them sound less rigid. Also, the subtle differences in volume will give your rhythms extra movement that sounds pleasing to listeners. This is the easiest way to humanize drums.

Changing the velocity of a MIDI note in Live is easy. Click and drag a notes velocity marker in the Velocity Editor. However, adjusting velocities for every note is time-consuming. An alternative is to use Live’s Velocity MIDI device.

The Velocity device can randomly change incoming MIDI note velocity values. It’s a quick way to introduce random modulation to all note velocities. Moreover, this method simulates the natural volume fluctuations of a real drummer. Try it on your hats, rides, and shakers!

Apply this technique by inserting Velocity before your instrument and increasing the Random control. You can also adjust the Out Hi and Out Low amounts if the velocity ranges sound too loud or quite.

2. LFO Modulation

Modulating various parameters with an LFO is another technique that humanizes drums. Try the following three methods to make subtle changes to drum hits with an LFO:

LFO Modulation with Simpler

Live’s Simpler instrument has an LFO section that offers controls to modulate volume, pitch, pan, and filter cutoff frequency. Applying subtle amounts of movement to these controls simulates the natural fluctuations of a real drummer. Also, deactivate the LFO Retrigger button in this section to hear the effect.

LFO Modulation with Sampler

Live’s Sampler instrument has a Modulation tab that offers an additional loopable envelope and three LFO’s. Sampler gives you more advanced control than Simpler. For example, the LFO’s can modulate themselves. Use the three LFO’s to add subtle amounts of movement to various controls to create a realistic sounding groove.

Sampler also has a Sample Offset feature that changes the sample start point with velocity. For example, notes triggered at full velocity will play the sample from the original start position. Whereas, lower velocities will start playback further into the sample. This feature is available from the MIDI tab. Select Sample Offset from the Velocity chooser and adjust the Amount A slider. Try this technique on a kick or snare ghost hit!

Max for Live LFO

Those with Max for Live will enjoy the new LFO device available in Live 10. The upgrade allows you to map and modulate multiple parameters. With LFO, you can modulate nearly everything in Live. It also offers various controls to alter the behavior of the waveform. For example, the Jitter control introduces small inconsistent movements to the LFO waveform.

Below are examples of some controls to modulate with the LFO device:

3. Varying Sample Selection

Inject life into your MIDI drum patterns by triggering different versions of the same sample over time. This technique adds variation to the timbre of each drum hit. It also works excellent at humanizing snares, claps, and hats. Below are two methods used for triggering the different samples with Drum Rack:

You can also automate the technique above using Live’s Arpeggiator. This method triggers the different sample versions randomly. It’s a quick way to humanize drums with variation.

4. Applying Groove

Applying groove is an essential technique that changes the timing of your drum patterns. You can manually move the position of various drum hits or modify their timing with grooves. Live’s browser has a large selection of grooves you can drag and drop onto audio and MIDI clips.

Once you’ve applied a groove file, modify its behavior by adjusting its controls in the Groove Pool. You can tweak timing, quantization, random timing fluctuation, and velocity. This technique works great on all drum elements. However, it sounds best on percussion, such as hats, rides, shakers, etc.

Disabling Live’s Record Quantization when recording beats is another way to get a humanized feel. However, if you struggle at keeping on beat, use partial quantization settings. For example, try quantizing to 80% rather than 100%.

5. Pitch and Duration

Mixing different drum hit lengths adds groove and variation that sounds human-like. For example, make louder notes longer and quieter notes shorter. You can shorten or lengthen various drum hit samples or MIDI notes. This technique also creates a push and pull feeling that sounds more intriguing than a repetitive pattern.

A final tip to create humanized drums is to modify the pitch of each hit by a small amount. If you’re using samples, adjust the pitch of various hits a few cents from the Sample Box in Clip View. Or, if you’re working with MIDI, draw in notes at different pitches with the MIDI Note Editor.

Conclusion

Humanizing your programmed beats is a great way to inject organic vibe into your music. This guide offers a few techniques to get your grooves sounding more natural and less robotic. The goal is to apply subtle variations in timing, timbre, duration, dynamics, and any other creative way to impart the imperfections of a real drummer.